JP7356169B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachi-slot machines and pachinko machines.

In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed in which a sound table for managing sounds is used to control sound effects (for example, see Patent Document 1).

In such conventional gaming machines, when a plurality of sounds are to be controlled in succession, a sound sequence that manages the reproduction of the plurality of sounds is requested and the sounds are played back.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-015443

However, when a request for a sound sequence as described above is registered, in order to control the playback of individual sounds, management and processing separate from the sound sequence are required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to manage multiple sounds by requesting a sound sequence (sequence request), and also to manage individual sounds registered in a sequence request. The purpose is to make it possible.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An arithmetic processing unit (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375),
a sound source amplification unit (for example, digital amplifier 2240 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the arithmetic processing unit;
a sound output section (for example, the speaker group 2040 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the sound source amplification section,
The arithmetic processing unit is
having sound source request data (for example, a request (request ID=1) or a sequence request (request ID=10) shown in FIG. 407) in which a plurality of sound source data are set to be output to the sound output unit,
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding single sound source data (for example, the request shown in FIG. 407 (request ID=1)), and second sound source request data including a request regarding multiple sound source data. data (for example, the sequence request (request ID=10) shown in FIG. 407),
comprising a sound source request data storage unit (for example, a request table shown in FIG. 407) that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
The arithmetic processing unit is
When the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request regarding sound source data, the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request is referred to from the sound source request data storage unit,
When the second sound source request data includes a playback request related to sound source data, a playback position (for example, a marker position included in a sequence marker) can be set in the first sound source request data related to the playback request , and the second sound source One or more playback positions can be set in the request data,
Each of the playback positions is associated with identification information (for example, a marker name included in a sequence marker),
The arithmetic processing unit may output the identification information corresponding to the playback position when the playback regarding the first sound source request data or the playback regarding the second sound source request data reaches the playback position. A gaming machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to manage multiple sounds using a sound sequence request (sequence request) and to manage individual sounds registered in the sequence request. Increased freedom.

It is a diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the internal structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the mode of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a carryover combination storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of an operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a press order storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing medal reception/start check processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a process at the start of a game during an advantageous period, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing reel stop control processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing processing at the end of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing periodic interrupt processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an overview of sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a back perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is a front view of the game machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are in an open state. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the mirror mechanism. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a positional relationship between a projector device and a mirror mechanism. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the attached state of the mirror mechanism. FIG. 3 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the display unit. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a projector device. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the projector device. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal for fixing the projector device. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along the line XXVI-XXVI in FIG. 48. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper side pedestal and a lower side pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of an upper side pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the attitude adjustment method of a lower side pedestal. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper side pedestal and a lower side pedestal. It is a top view which shows the state which assembled the upper side pedestal and the lower side pedestal. FIG. 55 is a view of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 55 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 viewed diagonally from behind. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a case housing internal components of a projector mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the case is attached to the lower pedestal. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. 61 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 60 along arrow LL and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. FIG. 3 is a view of the projector cover with the top wall removed, viewed diagonally from above. FIG. 3 is a front view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. 64 is a cross-sectional view taken along arrow MM of the projector cover shown in FIG. 63. FIG. It is a perspective view of a blind. FIG. 3 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66 taken along the arrow NN, with the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover removed. 66 is a perspective view showing a state in which a fan for the vicinity of the opening and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 65, and a case is arranged. FIG. 67 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66. FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view showing the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 67 with a fan for the vicinity of the opening and a duct cover attached. 71 is a right side view showing a cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 70 with a fan for the vicinity of the opening removed. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a duct cover and a fan for the vicinity of an opening. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening, viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening, viewed from the front and below. It is a perspective view seen from the left with a blind and a duct cover attached. It is a perspective view of a projector cover, a blind, and a duct cover seen from the rear. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, blind, and duct cover shown in FIG. 76. FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a blind and a duct cover. It is a figure for explaining the method of attaching an upper door mechanism to a cabinet. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of an intake fan and an exhaust fan. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an air flow path that may be formed inside the projector cover. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view showing a decoration unit and a frame member of a pachinko game machine from the front. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. FIG. 89 is a perspective view showing a disassembled state of the projector and mirror from the display unit shown in FIG. 88; 88 is a perspective view showing light being projected from the projector in a state where the projector and mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 87. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen. (b) is a diagram showing how light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side right screen. (c) is a diagram showing how light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side left screen. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining images displayed on a cabinet-side screen, a door-side right screen, and a door-side left screen. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining images displayed on a cabinet-side screen, a door-side right screen, and a door-side left screen. FIG. 3 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism and the cabinet. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of a transparent plate, a screen sheet, a lower pressing member, an upper pressing member, and a lower frame seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member viewed from the front while the transparent plate and the screen sheet are viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view of an upper holding member and an upper frame seen from below. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame seen from the rear. It is a perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a light-transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED board, and a light guide member viewed from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a light-transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, and a light guide member viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a cross section of a light-transmitting plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED board, and a light guide member, viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook portion, and the front side protruding member as seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook portion, and the front side protruding member viewed from the side. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the cabinet, the hook, and the front side protruding member viewed from the side. It is a right side view of the upper door mechanism, a cabinet, a hook part, and the cross section of a front side protrusion member. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from below. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism and a lower door mechanism seen from the front. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism and a lower door mechanism seen from the rear. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine seen from the front with the upper door mechanism and lower door mechanism removed. FIG. 3 is a side perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector device. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit seen from the side. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cabinet. It is an exploded perspective view of an irradiation unit, a cover for closure, and a back wall of a cabinet. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall. 126 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 125. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the closure lid and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the closure lid and the back wall of the cabinet. It is a partial enlarged view of the area around the operation window in the gaming machine with the closing lid attached to the back wall. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism with the center screen unit and front top unit removed. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism with the central screen unit and front top unit removed from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the front. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side uneven portion of the central screen. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side decoration unit in the upper door mechanism. FIG. 137 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 136 with the side decoration section removed. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion seen from the rear. It is a sectional view of the right side decoration part. It is a sectional view of a center screen and a right side decoration part. FIG. 3 is a front view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 143 is a sectional view taken along arrow AA of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142. It is a perspective view of a side LED board and a light guide. It is an exploded perspective view of a side LED board and a light guide. It is a perspective view of a side LED and a light guide. It is a perspective view of a light guide and a side light lens. It is a perspective view of a side light lens seen from the rear. It is a sectional view of a side light lens. It is a sectional view of a side light lens. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a rear transparent plate, a light guide, and a side light lens. It is a perspective view of a side decoration part. It is a perspective view of a side decoration part and a side light lens. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the central screen, the rear light-transmitting plate, and the side light-shielding plates. FIG. 155 is a perspective view showing a side light shielding plate removed from the state shown in FIG. 154; FIG. 143 is a sectional view taken along arrow AA of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. 158 is a perspective view showing the side LED board cover removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 157. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left side periphery of the shielding wall member. It is a perspective view of a shielding wall member seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. 163 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the speaker harness protector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 162. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram of how light is projected from the projector in this embodiment, viewed from above. (b) is a schematic diagram seen from above, showing how light is projected from a projector in another embodiment. It is a front view of a shielding wall member. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a shielding wall member and a light guide. It is a perspective view of a shielding wall member seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base is removed from the upper door mechanism. 169 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper front and rear frames and the duct seal are removed from the state shown in FIG. 168. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper front and rear frames seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper front and rear frames seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the rear and below. 173 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 172. FIG. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a bottom view of the top frame base. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from slightly below. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and top frame base. It is a schematic diagram of the plane part in a center screen, and the lower surface wall in a top frame base. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the front and from below. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the rear and below. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the rear and above. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the rear and below. 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 185. FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and top frame base. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and top frame base. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and top frame base. It is a sectional view of a center screen and a rear transparent plate. (a) is a schematic diagram viewed from above, showing how light projected from a projector enters a rear transparent plate in this embodiment. (b) is a schematic diagram viewed from above, showing how light projected from a projector enters a rear transparent plate in another embodiment. It is a sectional view of a center screen and a rear transparent plate. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the rear transparent plate seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the central screen and the rear transparent plate seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the under frame is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the top side panel is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a top side panel and a speaker grill removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame decoration is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a state in which the top center panel and top lens are removed from the upper door mechanism. 202 is a partially enlarged front view of the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top reflector and the arrow eye reflector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 204 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base and the top inner cover are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 203. FIG. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, the top center LED board, and the center LED board base. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top reflector seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the top reflector. It is a front view of a top reflector and a top center LED board. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector and a top center LED board. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector and a top center LED board. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector, a top center LED board, and a top frame base. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector seen from the front and right side. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector seen from the rear. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a center LED, a top reflector, and a left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a center LED, a top reflector, and a left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a center LED, a top reflector, and a left arrow eye reflector. It is a perspective view of a top frame base and a top lens. 220 is a perspective view showing the top lens removed from the state shown in FIG. 219. FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top lens seen from the rear and above. It is a perspective view of a top center LED board, a top reflector, a left arrow eye reflector, a right arrow eye reflector, and a top lens. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top center LED board, the top reflector, the left arrow eye reflector, the right arrow eye reflector, and the top lens. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top center LED board, the top reflector, the left arrow eye reflector, the right arrow eye reflector, and the top lens. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector and the top lens. It is a sectional view of a left arrow eye reflector and a top lens. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the front. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged front view of the top center panel. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the rear and above. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the top center panel and top lens. It is a sectional view of a top center panel and a top lens. It is a front view of a top center panel and a top lens. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the top frame base and the top center panel as seen from slightly above. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top center panel is attached to the top frame base, viewed from slightly above. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the rear and slightly below. FIG. 3 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base seen from the front. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top center panel seen from the rear and slightly above. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the top lens seen from below. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top lens. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a top center LED board, a top frame base, a top lens, and a top center panel. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel. It is a figure showing an example of rock performance. It is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6." It is a flowchart showing the lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure showing an example of an image displayed on a main display device in a pseudo game. It is a flowchart showing processing during a pseudo game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing normal pseudo game processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a reel performance process after a pseudo game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a process during a pseudo game after reel performance performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start process performed in a main control circuit. 5 is a flowchart showing random delay processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a temporal change in the reel control state when a pseudo game is performed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a temporal change in the reel control state when a pseudo game is performed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of a temporal change in the reel control state when a pseudo game is performed. It is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a process for starting a pseudo game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing normal pseudo game processing performed in the main control circuit. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop button operation reception process performed in the main control circuit. 2 is a flowchart showing swing control processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a pseudo game ending process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing pseudo game challenge operation acceptance processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on a main display device. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of bonus winning performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing lock performance determination processing at the end of the game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing lock performance execution processing at the end of the game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a process for starting a lock effect at the end of a game, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion performance execution process performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion performance execution process for type A performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion performance execution process for type B performed in a sub-control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting suggestion performance execution process for type C performed in a sub-control circuit. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device when the AT state ends. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state. (A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on the main display device. (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a menu screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a character customization screen for customizing a character. It is a figure showing an example of a game history screen. It is a diagram showing a gaming system. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a lock at the time of a 1st stop. It is a figure which shows an example of a lock at the time of a 1st stop. It is a figure which shows an example of a lock at the time of a middle stop. It is a figure which shows an example of a lock at the time of a middle stop. (a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of gaming states according to an embodiment of the present invention. (b) is a table summarizing the gaming state transition conditions according to an embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table. (b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (two-stakes game). (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (three-coin game). (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a state between 3BB flags (two-stakes game). (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the 3BB flag state (3-coin game). (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a state between 2BB flags (two-stakes game). (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the 2BB flag state (3-coin game). (c) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for BB gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in the bonus non-winning state and the 2BB flag state (3-card game). It is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in the 3BB flag state (3-coin game). (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations and sub-flag numbers. (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between subflag numbers and subflag names. It is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of gaming states in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for a non-advantageous section performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing an initial bonus winning rate lottery table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a flag set lottery table for determining the number of games that have passed in an advantageous period. It is a figure showing a Chance B continuation rate lottery table. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing character-related lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure showing a character determination lottery table. It is a diagram showing a character high accuracy game number lottery table. 12 is a flowchart showing various lottery processes for an advantageous section (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing bonus lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flags and ball flag group (normal) numbers for each character. (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the ball-out flag group (normal) number and the ball-out flag group (normal). It is a flowchart which shows the bonus promotion lottery process performed in a main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a bonus promotion lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows chance A lottery processing performed in a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the chance A lottery table by setting. It is a figure showing a chance A lottery table. 12 is a flowchart showing a precursor game number lottery process performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the number lottery table of portent games. 3 is a flowchart showing precursor game number counter management processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance A mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a reward lottery table during chance A. It is a diagram showing a reward lottery table during chance A. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flags and ball-out flag group (chance A) numbers for each character. (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the ball-out flag group (chance A) number and the ball-out flag group (chance A). It is a figure which shows the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the time of reward lottery non-winning during chance A performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the forced cancellation lottery table during chance A. It is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table when the specified chance A point is reached. It is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games during chance A. It is a diagram showing an example of symbols that are stopped and displayed in a pseudo game. It is a diagram showing a pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table. It is a diagram showing a pseudo game stop position determination table. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (pseudo bonus A mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery table. It is a figure showing a chance B continuation rate UP lottery table at the end of pseudo bonus A. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a reward lottery table for pseudo bonus B. It is a diagram showing a chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition during pseudo bonus B. It is a figure which shows the transition route to chance B mode. 3 is a flowchart showing a process performed in the main control circuit at the time of transition to chance B; It is a diagram showing a lottery table for converting remaining chance A points when chance B enters. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B basic mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the first game of the first set during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game process in chance B (basic) performed in a main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a chance B one-shot win lottery table. It is a figure showing a chance B continuation lottery table. It is a figure which shows the heaven transition lottery table after an AT confirmed state. It is a flowchart which shows the process only for the first game in chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the damage amount lottery table at the time of a set start. It is a figure showing a pursuit number determination lottery table. 3 is a flowchart showing common processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the rewritten lottery table during chance B. It is a flowchart which shows the process after the 2nd game in chance B (basic) performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the last game process in chance B (basic) performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the final game process when Chance B is not continued, which is performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the time retroactive lottery table at the end of chance B. 12 is a flowchart showing processing at the end of chance B performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a chance B point handover lottery table at the end of chance B. It is a flowchart which shows the chance B one-shot win process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing a chance B one-shot win lock performance execution process performed in the main control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bell navigation during chance B performed in a main control circuit. It is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B special mode) performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure showing a pursuit number UP lottery table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a sub-control unit etc. included in a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining how each process is activated when the power is turned on. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between each process and shared memory. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a data transmission/reception method in a shared memory. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a basic processing flow regarding a sound process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of shared memory data related to processing of a sound process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a sound thread of a sound process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of an interprocess communication thread of a sound process. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of a periodic thread of a sound process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a basic process flow related to a lamp process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of shared memory data related to lamp process processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of a lamp thread in a lamp process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of an inter-process communication thread of a lamp process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a periodic thread of a ramp process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a basic processing flow related to a graphic process. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of data in a shared memory related to processing of a graphics process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a graphics thread of a graphics process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a file cache thread of a graphics process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of an interprocess communication thread of a graphic process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a regular periodic thread of a graphic process. 12 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of the accessory thread of the graphic process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a basic processing flow regarding a master process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a master thread of a master process. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of an interprocess communication thread of a master process. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing of a periodic thread of a master process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of the main board thread of the master process. 3 is a flowchart showing the processing flow of a peripheral device thread of a master process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing time-series processing of CPU processing, GPU (VPU) processing, and display processing in a graphic process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing time-series processing of CPU processing, GPU (VPU) processing, and display processing in a graphic process. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of blending processing in a graphic process. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of file decompression processing in a graphics thread. It is a figure which shows the example of the data referenced and used in a sound process. It is a figure which shows the example of the data referenced and used in a sound process. It is a figure which shows the example of the data referenced and used in a sound process. It is a figure which shows the example of the data referenced and used in a sound process.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine.

[1. Pachislot machine structure]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Note that FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, for convenience of explanation, in the following explanation of the external structure, a part of the internal structure may be explained, and in the explanation of the internal structure, a part of the external structure may be explained.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes a housing 2 in the shape of a rectangular box. The housing 2 also includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD placed at the upper front of the cabinet G, and an upper door mechanism UD placed at the lower front of the cabinet G. It has a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that in FIGS. 1 and 2, illustration of the rear wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 is omitted. Furthermore, two openings G4a are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and penetrating in the vertical direction. A wooden plate member G4b is attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

Note that the plate member G4b is used to fix the pachislot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when it is installed in a game parlor, but as long as such a fixing method is secured, metal or resin materials can be used. Alternatively, it can be formed integrally with the upper wall G4. Furthermore, as long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each component may be made of wood or resin.

Furthermore, inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space with the intermediate support plate G1 in between, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. There is. The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and houses a main display device 210, which will be described later, and the like. Further, the lower space is a space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates a reel unit RU, a main control board 71, etc., which will be described later.

Note that the cabinet G does not necessarily need to be configured to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device etc. is appropriately accommodated within the cabinet G, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper space and the lower space are not partitioned. Moreover, the cabinet G can be simply called a "box body" or a "main body", and since it functions as a frame body that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, it can also be referred to as a "body frame", It can also be referred to as a "support body", "support frame", or "fixed frame".

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper space and the lower space of the opening in the cabinet G. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable, for example, by an opening/closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Note that either one of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is configured to be able to be opened and closed by the above-mentioned opening/closing mechanism, and the other is configured to be detachable only when one of the door mechanisms is in an open state. You can also do that.

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided in the center thereof, and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows visual confirmation of an effect image displayed on a screen device C that constitutes a main display device 210, which will be described later, provided on the back side of the effect display window UD1. In addition, in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays effects via the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display section 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided approximately at the center of the upper part thereof, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G on the back side of the main display window 4. There is.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the circumferential surface of the reel body. symbols) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the rotation direction of the reels. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each reel can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The main display window 4 is configured as a transparent panel made of resin, for example, and allows at least some (for example, three) of the symbols on the circumferential surface of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visually recognized. Furthermore, inside each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, a light source (a reel lamp included in lamps and LEDs to be described later) is provided at least at a position where the symbols are visible from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, When 3C and 3R are rotating, they are illuminated from inside with a constant brightness to ensure the visibility of the symbols.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display section 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4, and a effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub effect display section 22 displays an effect image displayed on a sub display device 220, which will be described later. Note that the sub effect display section 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a function of displaying effects but also as one of the buttons for effects. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that receives a performance operation (performance operation) from the player.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD is provided in the substantially horizontal pedestal portion formed below the main display window 4, with the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, and settlement button 9 provided on the left side, and the settlement button 9 provided approximately in the center. It has a presentation button 10a and a medal slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b are used to perform game operations (bet operations) by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the Pachislot machine 1. This is the operation section that accepts the commands (which can also be referred to as "", etc.). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number (for example, 3 medals) and the number of medals credited is greater than the difference, the maximum bet number of medals will be bet. Ru. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than the difference, no medals are bet. Further, when the 1 bet button 6b is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The payment button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a game operation (payment operation) by the player to return (payment) the credited medals. In addition, if the payment button 9 is operated when there are no medals credited, the credit for the medals to be inserted or paid out is within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). It may also be possible to accept a player's gaming operation (C/P mode selection operation) to enable selection of either mode (C mode) or pay mode (P mode) in which the medals are not credited. That is, the payment button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The performance button 10a is an operation unit that receives a performance operation (performance operation) from the player.

The medal slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. The accepted medal is detected by a selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not it is an appropriate medal. If one of the accepted medals is not proper, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later. Furthermore, if the accepted one medal is a proper one and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current bet number is the maximum bet number and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medals are returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned pedestal. The information display device 14 includes a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information regarding the game depending on the lighting mode thereof.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD includes a start lever 7 provided on the left side below the pedestal, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R provided approximately in the center, and a start lever 7 provided on the right side. It has a locking mechanism 15. The start lever 7 is an operation section that is attached to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range and receives a game operation (start operation) from the player to start the game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation section that accepts a game operation (stop operation) by a player to stop the rotation of each reel.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state, an administrator of the game parlor (for example, a clerk of the game parlor, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole. ) is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and the lower door mechanism DD becomes open. Note that the locking mechanism 15 may have not only the function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism but also the function of a reset switch. For example, if the manager of the game parlor inserts a door key into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described later. Further, in this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, the upper door mechanism UD can also be configured to be in the open state in conjunction with this, and the lock corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be It is also possible to provide separate mechanisms so that opening and closing can be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also includes a waist panel 13 provided at the center of the lower part, a medal tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal payout port 11 provided above the medal tray 12. , sound-transmitting holes 24a and 24b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 11.

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source (such as a lamp or LED described later) for illuminating this decorative panel from the back side. Consists of a lumbar lamp (included). The medal receiver 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. The medal payout port 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. Note that the medals discharged from the medal dispensing port 11 include those dispensed from a hopper device 32 (described later) and those returned from a selector 31 (described later) through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are located on the back side of each of the speakers 35a and 35b (the symbol of the speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) installed on the inside of the cabinet G to output sounds such as sound effects and BGM. is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Note that in this embodiment, an upper door mechanism UD and a lower door mechanism DD are provided in response to the fact that the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be constructed as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. Moreover, it can also be configured as a double door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door) in the front-rear direction. In addition, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can also be simply referred to as a "door" or "door", and since they function as members that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G, they can be referred to as "opening/closing members" or "doors". It can also be referred to as a "door member" or a "door member."

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R starts rotating when the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), driving and controlling stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R, which will be described later. As a result, the symbols displayed on the main display window 4 are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, when each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is operated (when a stop operation is performed by the player), stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, which will be described later, are drive-controlled for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. This stops each rotation. As a result, the symbols displayed on the main display window 4 are stopped and displayed.

That is, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 are variable display units (means) that can variably display (and stop display) a plurality of symbols in multiple rows, or variably display (and stop display) a plurality of symbols. ) configuring a plurality of possible variable display units (means). Note that the variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)", a "variable display section (means)", etc. Further, the symbols can be referred to as "pictures", "patterns", etc., and can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense, since any information that can be visually identified by the player is sufficient.

Further, the main display window 4 is configured such that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutively arranged symbols for each reel are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions of each column (3 symbols in total) (3 rows x 3 columns within the frame of the main display window 4). (The design is displayed in this manner.) Note that the main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as a "symbol display area" or a "window section."

Furthermore, an effective line is defined in the main display window 4. The valid line is a line for determining whether or not a prescribed combination of symbols has been displayed when symbols in all rows have been stopped and displayed in response to a stop operation by the player. In this sense, the active line can also be referred to as a "winning line", a "judgment line", etc. Further, the effective line is configured as a line that connects any one of the regions in each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a manner of 3 rows x 3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 valid lines. However, in reality, one or more of the lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the middle area of the reel 3R is the "center line," and the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the top area of the reel 3C, and the top area of the reel 3R is the "center line." The connecting line is the "top line", the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the reel 3R. The line that connects the upper area is called a "cross-up line," and the line that connects the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called a "cross-down line." Since the line connects each region in a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as the effective line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line that connects each area of each column with a polygonal line can also be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the active line to be activated, the medals required for the current game (the number of medals available for starting the game) must be bet before the player starts the operation. The number of active lines displayed may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the three lines mentioned above are defined as the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line", then in the case of the former, the number of bets is either 1 to 3. ``Centerline'', ``Topline'', and ``Bottomline'' are enabled even if On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" will be activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" will be activated, and if the number of bets is 3 (maximum bet number), the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are enabled.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display section has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, so that 3 rows x 3 Although the symbols are displayed in a column format, the symbol display format in the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is 1, 2, or 4 or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each row is 1, 2, or 4 or more. You can also display the design with . Furthermore, in this case, the number of definable effective lines is also increased or decreased as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable display section displays the symbols in a variable manner by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub display device 220 described later, or it may be configured using other display devices (for example, organic EL or 7-segment LED). . Alternatively, for example, a configuration using other physical devices (eg, a belt, etc.) may be used. Further, the arrangement, size, etc. of the variable display section can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable display section functions as a main side display section directly related to the game, which is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described below. A variable display section may be provided as a sub-display section that is controlled by a sub-display section that is related to performances that are not directly related to games. Note that the sub-side display section can be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220. In other words, a variable display section that displays symbols in a variable manner in response to a player's start operation (or other start conditions are met), and that stops and displays symbols in response to a player's stop operation (or other stop conditions are met). In addition to the main side display section, a sub side display section may also be provided. In this case, in order for the player to be able to identify whether the variable display section is directly related to the game or not, the words "Kyokudou" or "Main Reel" are displayed near the main side display section. It is sufficient to attach an identification display in which is displayed to make it possible to identify that the variable display section is the main display section. Note that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal slot 5 that receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. Note that the medal slot 5 and the selector 31 (to be described later) have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b, so such an insertion operation is , for example, can also be referred to as a bet operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal slot 5 is a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

In addition, in this embodiment, the use of medals as game media is explained as an example of the game value used in the game or given according to the game result, but the game value used in this way is It is not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, etc. can also be used. Further, the gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "gaming value".

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operating sections as operating sections that can be operated by a player. Note that each operation section shown below is just an example, and the configuration may include a different operation section, or the configuration may not include operation sections that are not necessarily essential. .

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 6a and a 1 bet button 6b that accept a bet operation by a player to use medals deposited (credited) therein. Further, such a bet operation is detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's bet operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are provided, but only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1 bet button 6b. Further, a 2-bet button for betting two medals may be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the start lever 7 that accepts a player's start operation to start the game. Further, such a start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection section (means) that can detect the player's start operation. Note that the start lever only needs to be able to detect the player's starting operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are provided corresponding to the respective reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and which accept a stop operation by a player to stop the rotation of each reel. Moreover, such a stop operation is detected by a stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R and stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player. Note that the stop button only needs to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Payment button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the settlement button 9 that accepts the player's settlement operation (return operation) to return (settlement) the credited medals. Further, such a payment operation is detected by a payment switch 9S, which will be described later. Therefore, the payment button 9 and the payment switch 9S constitute a payment operation detection unit (means) that can detect the payment operation by the player. Note that the payment button only needs to be able to detect the player's payment operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Performance button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes performance buttons 10a and 10b that accept performance operations from the player. Note that such presentation operations are detected by detection switches (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective presentation buttons. Therefore, the performance buttons 10a, 10b and the detection switch constitute a performance operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the performance operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the player's effect operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is also possible to configure the system without providing either of them, or to provide only one of them. can. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that three or more presentation buttons are provided.

The main uses of the presentation buttons include changing the presentation mode when executing a specific presentation (for example, operation-linked presentation described below), and performing selection/decision operations in the user menu described below. Therefore, it is also possible to configure so that buttons for effects are provided depending on the purpose. For example, it is assumed that the presentation buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the above-mentioned touch panel may be used for the latter purpose. Note that for use in the latter purpose, it is also possible to provide a jog dial, a cross key, or the like that can accept selection/decision operations as another presentation button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout port]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal payout port 11 for discharging medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. In addition, when a winning occurs and medals are paid out, the medal payout port 11 is for giving the player the medals paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It can also be said that it is part of the means. Further, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout port can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-7. Medal saucer]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. That is, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) that can store the awarded game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a waist panel 13 that includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically shows the type of pachislot machine 1 in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, but for example, the waist panel 13 itself can be By configuring it with an image display device or the like, it can be configured as one of the performance execution means that can execute the performance.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information regarding the game depending on the lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display section (means) that can display information regarding games.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp indicates that medals can be inserted by lighting up. By lighting up, the start lamp indicates that the game can be started in conjunction with the operation of the start lever 7. When lit, the replay lamp indicates that medals have been automatically inserted due to the replay operation. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of credited medals depending on the lighting mode. The number of payout lamps display the number of medals (number of payouts) that have been paid out according to game results depending on the lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (status display section). The notification lamp lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the player is notified of the information on the stop operation (for example, in an AT state), thereby providing information on the stop operation. Display. Note that "an aspect that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified" refers to, for example, the press order (in this embodiment, this may be referred to as "batting order"), "1st (the first stop operation When notifying the press order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)", display the numerical value "1" on the instruction monitor. The number "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and when the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)" is notified, the number "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. It is about. Note that the notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, information on the stop operation may be displayed using either a credit lamp or a payout number lamp.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in a situation where information on a stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means (for example, the main performance display section 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later, In addition, information on the stop operation is also notified by an instruction monitor as a main notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100, which will be described later. Note that the mode of notification in the main side notification means and the mode of notification in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notification means only needs to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to specify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means may directly notify information about the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main effect display section 21 may directly notify instruction information for causing the reels 3L to perform the first stop operation.

Further, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in an advantageous section, which will be described later. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (described later), the section lamp lights up at any timing until the start of the game in the advantageous section, and then when the advantageous section ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section. In this case, the light is turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game in the non-advantageous section is started. Note that the lighting timing of the section lamps is not limited to this. For example, when first transitioning from a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section (normally advantageous section) to an increased section (AT state) described below in an advantageous section, any arbitrary period until the game in the increased section starts. It may also be something that lights up at the right time. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the section is in an advantageous section, regardless of whether it is a production section or an increase section, or at least an advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section. It may also be possible to report the period until the end of the period.

Further, the limit lamp indicates that a limit process, which will be described later, has been executed or the possibility thereof, depending on its lighting mode. For example, when the limit process is executed, the light is turned on to notify the player that the advantageous state (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Further, for example, when the limit process is about to be executed, the light blinks to indicate that there is a high possibility that the advantageous state will be forcibly terminated by the limit process. In addition, other information related to the limit process can be reported as appropriate by providing other triggers for turning on, blinking, or turning off the light.

[1-1-10. Performance display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the main effect display section 21 and the sub-effect display section 22 that display effect images. The main performance display section 21 and the sub-performance display section 22 constitute a performance display section (means) capable of displaying a performance. Moreover, it is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from a visual viewpoint to the player.

The main performance display section 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays a performance via the performance display window UD1. Further, the main display device 210 is configured as a display unit A replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 within the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and a screen device C that makes an image appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B. In this embodiment, by configuring the main display device 210 in this way, sophisticated and powerful effect display is possible, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is sufficient if it is possible to provide a visual effect to the player, and it may be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL device, a 7-segment LED device, etc., or a display device such as a sub-reel, etc. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, in the case where the pachi-slot machine 1 is mainly designed to provide entertainment based on so-called rolls, the main effect display section 21 may not be provided (sub-effect display section 22 as well).

The sub effect display section 22 is configured to include a sub display device 220. Further, the sub display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Note that, like the main display device 210, the sub display device 220 can also be configured as another image display device or a display device, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, since the main performance display section 21 is configured with a large screen, it mainly displays performances closely related to the current game, such as push order notification, winning notification, continuous performance, etc., and the sub performance display section 22 is composed of a small screen, so it is possible to display the display contents separately depending on the purpose, such as mainly displaying effects that are not closely related to the current game, such as game history etc. It is possible. In addition, in this embodiment, the main effect display section 21 and the sub effect display section 22 are configured to be provided, but it is also possible to configure without providing either of these sections. It is also possible to configure so that only one of them is provided. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that three or more effect display sections are provided.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1, like the upper lamp 23 mentioned as an example, has a light emission mode (not only lighting, flashing, or turning off, but also the brightness and color of the light when configured as a full-color LED). ) is equipped with one or more lamps (light emitting means) that can perform effects. Moreover, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from a visual viewpoint to the player. In addition, from such a viewpoint, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end surfaces of the upper door mechanism UD and both end surfaces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation sections provided in each operation section. Examples include lamps and the like. Note that the latter includes a function that informs the player whether or not each operation part can be operated, so when such a function is activated, the light emission mode does not change depending on the content of the performance. , it can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission mode.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sounds such as sound effects and BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute audio output means that can produce effects by outputting audio. Moreover, it is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from an auditory viewpoint to the player. In addition, from such a viewpoint, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with production devices other than the various production devices (production execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to perform a performance by providing a performance device such as a movable performance device such as a so-called role model, a vibration performance device that performs a performance using vibration, or an air performance device that performs a performance by jetting air. In other words, a performance device that can execute a performance that appeals to any of the player's five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, smell) (allows the player to recognize that the performance is being performed). If so, you can use any of them. Therefore, in this embodiment, "performing a performance" means, unless otherwise specified, using any one or more of the above-mentioned various performance devices (direction execution means) to perform a performance. This indicates that it may be executed.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (number omitted in FIG. 2) is a flow path for medals inserted from the medal slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 includes, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects a medal inserted from the medal slot 5 and determines whether the detected medal is an appropriate medal. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal and the medal is in a state where it can be accepted, the sorting device transfers the medal to the hopper device 32, which will be described later. The drive is controlled so that it is guided. Note that in this case, 1 is added to the number of bets or the number of credits. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, and when the medal cannot be accepted, the sorting device passes the medal through the cancellation chute to the medal payout port 11. The drive is controlled so that it is returned from. If an abnormality occurs in medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam) is removed, the error state will be canceled.

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection section (means) that can detect the inserted game medium. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a determining means capable of determining whether or not the inserted gaming medium is appropriate. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a distributing means that stores the inserted game media internally when it is appropriate, and discharges it to the outside when the inserted game medium is not appropriate. Furthermore, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 includes, for example, a bucket section that stores medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and is provided at the bottom of the bucket section, and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section. It has a disk section that guides medals one by one to a discharging section, a discharging section that discharges medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharging section.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Medals exceeding a certain number are guided to a medal auxiliary storage 33, which will be described later, through a guide path provided on the top side. Note that when the medals stored in the bucket section become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, if a reset operation is performed after replenishing medals, the error state will be canceled.

The disk part has a plurality of medal-shaped hollow parts formed radially from the center, and when the central shaft is rotationally driven in accordance with a drive signal, the medals fitted in the hollow parts are guided one by one to the ejection part. Note that the medals stored in the bucket section are stirred by the rotation of the disk section. Further, if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam) is removed, the error state will be canceled.

The count sensor detects the medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when dispensing one medal, the disc part starts rotating, and then stops rotating in response to the count sensor counting the dispensing of one medal. In this way, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game media payout unit (means) that can pay out game media. Further, as described above, it can be said that it is part of a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to a player. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary medal storage]
The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage 33 includes, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage that is provided near the storage section and detects the capacity of medals stored in the storage section. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, a medal auxiliary storage error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage unit to at least a certain number, the error state will be canceled.

That is, the medal auxiliary storage 33 constitutes a surplus game media storage section (means) that can store surplus game media. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 includes, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. Note that the power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part, similar to household electrical appliances. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) that can supply necessary power to the gaming machine. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting key type switch 52 and the reset switch 53, which will be described later, are provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case, which will be described later). It is also possible to configure the power supply device 34 to include a switch.

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as necessary for various controls. Note that each of the substrates shown below is merely an example, and the structure may include a different substrate, or the structure may not include substrates that are not necessarily essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the back side of the reel unit RU within the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that performs control related to games, and is located inside a resin main control board case (not shown) that is transparent (or nearly transparent) so that its status can be visually recognized. is housed in. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

Note that there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and it is basically configured by DIP mounting various electronic components, but some or all of the various electronic components may be SMT mounted (surface mounting). It may also be configured by implementing (implementing). Further, in this case, a test point may be provided for checking the operation using a tester or an oscilloscope. Moreover, small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm2 may be used for some or all of the various electronic components. Further, the board surface of the main control board 71 may be configured to have multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached within the cabinet G to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1. The sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls effects, and is housed in a sub-control board case (not shown) made of resin. Note that the sub-control board case can be constructed as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or it can be constructed of another material that is opaque (or nearly opaque). It can also be configured as a case using . The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (symbol omitted in FIG. 2) is installed at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is connected to various devices connected to the main relay board 73 and the main controller. This is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a separate board from the main control board 71 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, so all functions of the main relay board 73 can be controlled as the main control board unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the main relay board 73 is not provided and is placed on the board 71. Further, from this point of view, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Sub relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is installed between various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and This is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Note that the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a separate board from the sub-control board 72 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, so all functions of the sub-relay board 74 can be performed as a sub-control board if there is no particular problem. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the sub-relay board 74 is not provided and is placed on the board 72. Further, from this point of view, the sub relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as sub-relay substrates.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is installed at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower space), and receives signals such as a medal input signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal. Output to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Note that the output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be set as appropriate, and the transition of the internal state of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the bonus state or AT state) can be set externally according to the playability. It makes it possible to report. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display device or hall computer, these devices can be used to check not only the status of medal insertion and payout and the occurrence of errors in the pachislot machine 1. , it is possible to recognize such internal state transitions.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the test machine in the certification test (sight shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1. (Please note that the pachi-slot machine 1 as a release product for sale is not equipped with these relay boards, so the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 301 for the test machine. Various electronic components required to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, test signals for controlling the main operations related to the game (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and are also determined by the main control board 71. Test signals and the like related to the pressed order navigation are outputted via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained. Note that FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. Main control board 71 and main relay board 73, main relay board 73 and sub-relay board 74, and sub-relay board 74 and sub-control board 72 are electrically connected, respectively. The main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other via the main relay board 73 and the sub-control board 74 so as to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72. connected.

A main control circuit 100 as a game control section that controls games is mounted on the main control board 71. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by execution of a control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signals. Furthermore, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from among the generated random numbers as necessary. In this way, control related to the overall gaming operation is performed.

A sub-control circuit 200 is mounted on the sub-control board 72 as an effect control section that controls effects. The sub control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 203, and the like. Further, a ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 includes various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, and various presentation data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub display device 220, lamps, etc.). Lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub-RAM 203 includes a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by execution of a control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, etc. provided. Note that the random number value for the performance may be generated and extracted within the sub CPU 201 from random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or the main control The generation and extraction may be performed by providing a random number circuit similar to the circuit 100. Alternatively, a sub-ROM may be included in the sub-control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs etc. may be stored in the sub-ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may be configured to store various performance data, and the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200 may be configured to store various control programs and various data tables. Further, the sub control circuit 200 includes a microprocessor (for example, also referred to as "VDP") dedicated to images, such as a GPU, which allows images to be displayed on the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220. It may be configured to generate (edit).

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, a setting key type switch 52, a reset switch 53, a role ratio monitor device 54, an external centralized terminal board 55, a hopper device 32, a medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, and a power supply. A device 34 is electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 is electrically connected to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, payment switch 9S, and information display device 14 via the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. Note that, if the first interface board 301 for a test machine and the second interface board 302 for a test machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

In addition, the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, payment switch 9S, information display device 14, testing machine Since the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted here.

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R are connected to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears each having a predetermined reduction ratio, and are driven to rotate and stop the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Note that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, so the main CPU 101 controls each stepping motor 51L, 51R, The number of times a pulse is outputted to 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is managed based on the count result. Furthermore, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for performing such management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index. .

The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, 6 levels of settings 1 to 6) (setting change), or when checking the settings of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). used for. Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage of the player regarding the game, and usually, the lower the setting value (for example, the closer to setting 1), the relative degree of advantage the player has. The higher the setting value (for example, the closer it is to setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player becomes. The setting key-type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an administrator at the game parlor inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it to the initial position from the counterclockwise position. and turns off. Note that when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered off, turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power will enable settings to be changed, and the settings can be changed while the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on. When the key-type switch 52 is turned on, settings can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a reset operation by an administrator at the game parlor. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. Further, the reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a setting value determination operation by a manager at the game parlor in a state where settings can be changed. Note that when the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where settings can be changed, the setting value increases by 1 each time it is operated (when setting 6 is reached, the setting returns to setting 1). In this way, the setting value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this way is determined when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. In other words, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting a setting value confirmation operation by the administrator of the game parlor. In this way, when changing the settings, turn on the setting key type switch 52, operate the reset switch 53 to select the setting value, and operate the start lever 7 to confirm the selected setting value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key type switch 52. Note that this is an example of a setting change operation, and the configuration may be such that the setting change can be performed by other operations. Furthermore, when changing or confirming settings, the current setting value may be displayed on the above-mentioned credit lamp or payout number lamp, for example.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is composed of, for example, a four-digit seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the main control board case. The winning ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information regarding the game that has been aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information are used by the game parlor manager when checking whether the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with or not. Note that the role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71 or on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. It's okay. Further, as long as it is within the cabinet G, it may be provided at another location. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Furthermore, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or switching its contents may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this switch is operated, the above-mentioned various ratio information will be displayed. good. Furthermore, on the premise that such a management switch is used, the information display device 14 may also be used as the role ratio monitor device 54, for example. Immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined period of time (for example, about 10 seconds, which serves as a buffer considering the time required to start up the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200), the role ratio monitor device 54 In order to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning properly, use a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs light up). It is desirable to have a configuration in which the light is turned on (or blinks) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitoring device 54, for example, the type of ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous character ratio information and character ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, and cumulative continuous character ratio information. There is also information on the proportion of accessories.

Specific section ratio information refers to the stop operation that is advantageous to the player within the game section of the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative"; 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games"; the same applies hereinafter). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of games played (or may simply be the number of games played during an advantageous period) in the game period (for example, AT state) in which the information was reported. In addition, continuous accessory ratio information refers to the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation (the consecutive bonuses related to the first-class special bonus) This is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the first class special bonus (RB) in a state where the operating device (BB) is operating (including during the operation of the first class special bonus (RB)). In addition, the accessory ratio information indicates that among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, the first type special bonus (RB), the second type special bonus (CB), and the normal bonus (SB) ) is the information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB), and here, when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation, the first-class special bonus (RB) is operated by the continuous operation device for the first-class special bonus (RB). This concept includes the state in which the first type special accessory (RB) is in operation while the second type special accessory (CB) is in operation. This concept includes the operation of the second type special accessory (CB) in a state where the accessory continuous operation device (MB) according to the above is in operation.

Note that the game period in which information on stop operations advantageous to the player was being reported (for example, AT state) is considered to be when the accessory is in operation or when the accessory continuous operation device is in operation, and the respective percentage information is It can also be subject to aggregation and calculation. That is, the role ratio monitoring device 54 may be any device that appropriately displays necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. For example, when displaying continuous accessory ratio information on a model that is not equipped with the first class special accessory (RB), or when displaying specific section ratio information on a model that is not equipped with an advantageous section function (AT function). For models that do not have the corresponding numerical information (correspondence information), when displaying the item, the last two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio). On the 7-segment LED, for example, by displaying an identification display for non-compatible information, such as lighting up two vertical bars in the center, such as "--", it is possible to confirm that the model does not have compatible information. It is desirable that the user can recognize the information at a glance.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. Note that it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may also be configured to be provided with a similar door opening/closing monitoring switch. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, and turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, thereby monitoring the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD. Note that when the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on, a door opening error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the lower door mechanism DD is brought into the closed state.

A ROM cartridge board 202, a main display device 210, and a sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72. Further, the sub control board 72 is connected via the sub relay board 74 to a 24h door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as the performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps/LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and speakers 35a and 35b. A group of speakers such as the following are electrically connected.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, the presentation button group, the lamps/LEDs, and the speaker group have already been described, so their description will be omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, similarly to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56. Note that it is the same as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has the function of monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by allowing such monitoring to be performed on the sub control circuit 200 side as well, the lower door mechanism DD can be further improved. The opening/closing history of the door mechanism DD can be saved for a certain period of time. Note that this opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the game being opened after the manager of the game parlor has left after business hours, or if there is a history of the game being opened and closed for a long time during business hours, this may result in fraudulent activity. It is now possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that an act has been committed.

[3. Pachislot machine function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (performs a bet operation) and operates the start lever 7 (performs a start operation), a random number from a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is selected. One random number (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number") is extracted.

An internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process to be described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed on the active line are determined in advance. In addition, the types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" where the player is given benefits such as medal payout, replay activation, bonus activation, etc., and those related to other so-called "losing". The following shall be provided. Furthermore, the winnings related to the payout of medals are called "small winnings", the winnings related to the activation of replays are called "replay winnings", and the winnings related to the activation of bonuses (bonus status) are called "bonus winnings". to be called. Furthermore, a winning combination that can be internally won (that is, a combination of symbols that is permitted to be realized) is sometimes simply referred to as a "winning combination." Further, the internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as a "winning combination," "predetermined result," or "derivation permissible condition." Further, the internal lottery means is sometimes referred to as a "winning combination determining means", "winning combination determining means", "advance determining means", or "derivation permissible condition determining means".

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), the plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player operates the stop button (stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reel (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (described below) The main CPU 101) that performs reel stop control processing performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed (or the order in which the stop button is pressed). Note that the operating means for performing the starting operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, but any operating means may be used as long as the player can perform the starting operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to button-shaped ones such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, but any operation that allows the player to perform the stop operation may be used. It may be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, control is basically performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reels rotate within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces." In this embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that permits the display of winning symbol combinations is determined, the reel stop control means normally causes the symbol combination to appear on the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (4 symbols). Stop the reel rotation so that it is displayed as much as possible at the top. Further, the reel stop control means uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations whose display is not permitted due to the internal winning combination are not displayed on the active line. Note that the symbols displayed when the reels stop rotating are sometimes referred to as a "stop display" or a "display result." Furthermore, displaying symbols when the rotation of the reels stops is sometimes referred to as "deriving a stop display" or "deriving a display result."

The reel stop control means also includes an automatic reel stop control means that automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the reels have rotated, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. Stop control may also be performed. In this case, the reels will stop without the player's stop operation, so even if any internal winning combination has been determined, any combination of winning symbols will be valid. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reels so that they are not displayed along the line.

In this way, when the rotation of all the plurality of reels is stopped, the winning determination means (the main CPU 101 that performs winning operation determination processing described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is related to winning. (or some other predetermined value). That is, it is determined whether or not a winning combination of symbols (or other predetermined symbol combination) has been established. The displayed symbol combination is determined by the winning determination means to be a winning symbol (or other predetermined symbol combination) (i.e., a winning symbol combination (or other predetermined symbol combination) ) is established, benefits such as payout of medals are given to the player, or various controls are performed using this as an opportunity. In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the above-described series of games is played as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means merely determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the active line corresponds to any one of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the combination of symbols corresponds to an internal winning combination determined by an internal lottery means. That is, in the former case, it may be determined whether the combination of symbols is related to a winning combination or not, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately performs the stop control, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the occurrence of erroneous winnings, so it is possible to reduce the control burden related to erroneous winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter case, by making it possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols involved in winning a prize is a combination of symbols that is permitted to win, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols involved in winning a prize is a combination of symbols that is permitted to win. can be detected, which makes it possible to improve security.

In addition, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, images are displayed on a display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub-display device 220, etc.), and light is emitted by various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.). Various effects are performed using the output of the sound, the output of sound from the speakers (for example, the speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are performance execution means that execute the performance. The content of the performance executed by the performance execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or may be determined on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can serve as a performance content determining means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for performance is extracted separately from the random number value for internal lottery. When the random number value for production is extracted, the production content determining means determines the production to be executed this time from among the multiple types of production content associated with the internal winning combination (or according to predetermined conditions). decide.

Next, when the performance content is determined by the performance content determining means, the performance execution means executes a corresponding performance in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reels start rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when determining whether or not there is a prize. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing the performance contents associated with the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at, the order of pressing to be performed, etc.) is determined. The player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict what the player can do, which can increase the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding playability of pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to play a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable and static manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp which symbol is placed at which position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores at least data for identifying the type of symbol at each symbol position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Note that, as long as such an objective is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is used as an example.

In the symbol arrangement table, symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotational direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. Further, data for specifying the type of symbol (for example, a symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". Note that the number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. can be changed and defined as appropriate.

[4-2. Design combination]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols influences the game result. That is, the pachislot machine 1 grants various benefits, transitions from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or transitions from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state, depending on the combination of displayed symbols. This makes it possible to migrate. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such symbol combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such combinations of symbols is defined in the main ROM 102. Note that as long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14), which will be described later, is used as an example. ing.

In the symbol combination table, data indicating the types of predetermined symbol combinations among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line (for example, "display combination" or "winning activation flag") is defined. ing. Note that the symbols constituting each symbol combination can be specified using, for example, the above-mentioned symbol code. Furthermore, data indicating the type of privilege (for example, "payout, etc.") is associated with each symbol combination. The symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. Note that the number of types of symbol combinations, the content of benefits, etc. can be changed and defined as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that which symbol combinations are allowed to be displayed (determined in advance) influences the game result. That is, the Pachislot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combinations that can be displayed (or the types of benefits that can be awarded)) prior to (in advance) the player's stop operation. It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such an internal winning combination is defined in the main ROM 102. Note that various data configurations can be adopted as long as such an objective is achieved, but in this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is used as an example.

The internal lottery table includes data indicating the types of a plurality of predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values for determining each internal winning combination in each gaming state. is defined. Note that the lottery value may vary depending on the set value. Further, types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding to) are associated with each internal winning combination. In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to associate a plurality of symbol combinations with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which symbol combination is displayed? is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the later-described internal lottery process of this embodiment (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a numerical value range predetermined by the random number circuit (for example, 0 65535) are sequentially added and updated with the lottery values defined corresponding to each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether the lottery result has overflowed or not). Then, in a predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is made to win (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if no winning combination exceeds 65535 even after making this determination for all internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination in the current game will be a "lose". Note that this is just an example of internal lottery processing, and as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability), various methods can be used for the lottery processing. For example, the extracted random numbers are updated by sequential subtraction with the lottery values specified corresponding to each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (the lottery result underflows) is updated. The internal winning combination may be determined by determining the internal winning combination.

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the probability that an internal winning combination with a larger prescribed lottery value is determined (winning probability) becomes higher. Note that the winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "Lottery value specified for each winning number/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As mentioned above, in the pachislot machine 1, the game result is determined by which symbol combination is finally displayed by the player's stop operation among the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed based on the determination of the internal winning combination. It is a specification that affects the. In other words, the Pachislot machine 1 determines the final display based on not only the determined internal winning combination type but also the player's stop operation timing and press order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be displayed. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp the manner in which the stop control is to be performed for each internal winning combination according to the manner in which the player performs the stop operation. For this reason, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying the mode of such stop control. Note that as long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, as an example, a stop table, a pull-in priority table (not shown), etc. are used. There is.

In the stop table, data indicating the movement amount of symbols (for example, "number of sliding pieces") is defined for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, assume that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination has been determined. Next, it is assumed that a stopping operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Assume that in the predetermined stop table, the number of sliding pieces specified by the symbol position data "0" is "4". Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at the symbol position moved by four symbols (the position of the symbol position data "4") (the scheduled stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table defines data (the number of sliding pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that such a data structure is also just an example. Furthermore, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control."

The attraction priority table contains data indicating which symbol combination should be preferentially displayed (drawn) when there are multiple symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (for example, "Attraction priority order"). ”) are stipulated. For example, assume that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination has been determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination allows the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table is set such that symbol combination B is displayed preferentially than symbol combination A. It is assumed that the order of priority is specified. Next, it is assumed that a stopping operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position is "0".

Then, the main control circuit 100 determines whether the symbols constituting symbol combination A and the symbols constituting symbol combination B are different for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position. Search to see if it exists. If both symbols are not present, the position to stop is determined according to predetermined rules (for example, to stop at a closer position, to stop at a farther position, etc.). If there are only symbols constituting symbol combination A, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If there are only symbols constituting symbol combination B, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, symbol combination B will be displayed preferentially over symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at a position corresponding to the symbols constituting symbol combination B. In addition, the pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions while the target reel is rotating, or when a stop operation is performed on the target reel, according to the selected pull-in priority table. When the symbol is moved, each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position may be stored. Moreover, such a data structure is also just an example. Furthermore, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally referred to as "control control."

In addition, in this embodiment, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the stop control is executed by performing only "table control", or a configuration in which the stop control is executed by performing only "control control". Alternatively, first, perform "table control" to temporarily determine the stopping position, then perform "control control" to search for a more suitable stopping position, and change the stopping position depending on the search results. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that executes stop control that enables this.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the active line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (the lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "lost", the combination of symbols related to any replay role, the combination of symbols related to the minor role, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus role ultimately falls on the active line. It will never be displayed. It should be noted that the "loss" can be considered as one of the internal winning combinations, or it can be taken as a lottery result in which no internal winning combination has been determined.

The second element is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbol (the pressed position) when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set at four symbols, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process, display is permitted. If the symbols constituting the symbol combination are arranged over four symbols on the active line (or on each active line if there are multiple symbols), depending on the timing of the player's stop operation, the combination of the symbols may be may not be displayed. This is called a "missing point."

The third element is the player's press order (the order in which the player operated the stop button). For example, in this embodiment, there are cases where an internal winning combination is determined in which a combination of multiple symbols is associated, and in this case, the combinations of symbols are finally displayed on the active line according to the order in which the symbols are pressed. The combination of symbols may change. In addition, such an internal winning combination is called a ``push order'', and if it is a replay win, it is sometimes called a ``push order replay'', and if it is a small win, it is called a ``push order small win''. It is sometimes called.

[4-5. Game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as game states in order to vary the degree of advantage for the player or to achieve the intended playability. An example of the gaming state will be explained below.

[4-5-1. Bonus status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus winning combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination is displayed on an active line, it is possible to shift to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such a bonus state is not provided. Further, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is also possible to configure a plurality of bonus states. When a bonus combination is won, a state (carryover state) occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role." Further, such a carryover state is sometimes referred to as "between (bonus) flags" or "inside (bonus)."

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode (including the probability of winning, its contents, and the mode of stop control, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) of the small winning combination compared to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Since it is also a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can also be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include the first class special bonus (RB), the bonus continuous activation device (BB) related to the first class special bonus, and the second type special bonus (CB) (but not a carryover role) , an accessory continuous operating device (MB) related to the second type special accessory, and a regular accessory (SB) (however, it is not a carryover winning combination). Further, for example, the bonus status corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of wins (for example, the upper limit is 8) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12) are played. configured. The BB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals is paid out (for example, the upper limit is 285).

The CB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals is paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153) or when a player wins an RB or SB during the MB state. Ru. The SB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played.

Note that the operating condition for the bonus state is not limited to only that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. For example, when the accessory continuous operating device (BB) related to the first class special accessory is in operation, when the accessory continuous operating device (BB) related to the first class special accessory starts operating, It is also possible to configure the first type special bonus (RB) to be automatically activated at the start of a game when the item is not in operation, or when the first type special bonus is finished being activated. That is, it is also possible to control the RB so that it is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the combination of symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB in BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC" or the like, and a specification in which the RB in BB operation is automatically activated in this way is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Further, while the BB is in operation, control can be performed such that the RB is in operation when a combination of symbols related to the prescribed RB is displayed on the active line. A specification in which the RB operates based on the display of corresponding symbol combinations in this manner is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. Further, the relationship between the accessory continuous operating device (MB) related to the second type special accessory and the second type special accessory (CB) is also the same. In other words, without specifying the combination of symbols related to CB, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation while the MB is in operation, or it is possible to control the combination of symbols related to the specified CB while the MB is in operation. It is also possible to perform control such that the CB is activated when the combination is displayed on the valid line.

[4-5-2. RT status]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of transitioning to the RT state (activating the RT state) when predetermined transition conditions are met. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such an RT state is not provided. Further, it is also possible to configure a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination compared to a state where the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the non-RT state. Further, when providing a plurality of RT states, the same applies to the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode (especially the probability of winning) of the replay winning combination is relatively advantageous to the player is called a "high RT state" or "high probability replaying state", and the lottery of the replay winning combination is An RT state in which the aspect (particularly the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player is sometimes referred to as a "low RT state", "low probability replay state", or the like.

For example, the RT state can be transitioned by satisfying any of the following transition conditions. Further, when providing a plurality of RT states, the same applies to the plurality of RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, (5) (3) or (4) When a specific symbol combination is displayed when the winning is not in BB or MB (not carried over) and the player is not in RB, BB or MB state. When a predetermined number of games are played after the transition conditions are met.

[4-5-3. AT status]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of transitioning to the AT state (activating the AT state) when predetermined transition conditions are met. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such an AT state is not provided. Further, it is also possible to configure a plurality of AT states. For example, the AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), because when the player wins the above-mentioned push order combination, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. This is a gaming state configured as a state.

In addition, if multiple AT states are provided, the gaming period of each AT state (including the ease of extension if the said period can be extended (also referred to as "add-on"; the same shall apply hereinafter)), The degree of advantage for the player can be varied by making the types of winning combinations for which stop operation information is reported or the probability of occurrence of stop operation information being reported different. Furthermore, the conditions for transition and termination of the AT state can be set as appropriate depending on the gameplay (excluding termination by execution of limit processing, which will be described later). Further, the AT state may be treated in the same way as the above-mentioned bonus state, and in this case, it may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

Furthermore, the playing period in the AT state may be managed by the number of games (number of games played) as long as the period is managed appropriately (number of games management). (number of sets management). Alternatively, the management may be performed based on the number of payouts or the net increase (difference number) during the AT state (payout number management, difference number management). In addition, it may be managed based on the number of times (navigation count) that notifications that affect the payout of medals (for example, press order navigation when winning a press order small winning combination) are performed in the AT state (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Further, the gaming period given when transitioning to the AT state and the gaming period given when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. Furthermore, when providing a plurality of AT states, they may be managed using the same management method or may be managed using different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when predetermined transition conditions are met, it is possible to transition to the ART state (activate the ART state), which is a combination of the above-described high RT state and AT state. In other words, the ART state means an AT state performed in a high RT state, so at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and a transition to a high RT state (or a transition to a low RT state) is performed. The basic control is the same as the AT state (high RT as a result of being informed of information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player). (or if transition to a low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). Note that when the transition conditions for the ART state are met, the transition to the AT state may be made first, and then the transition to the high RT state may be performed to transition to the ART state, or the high RT state and the AT state may be simultaneously transitioned ( Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the ART state by shifting to the ART state (substantially simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other gaming status]
Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 can also provide game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode in the advantageous section (see FIGS. 5 and 6), which will be described later, is also a state in which the player plays a game, and the advantage is whether or not to shift to the AT state as a pseudo-bonus state. Since the degree can be varied, these can be considered as gaming states. Further, from a similar viewpoint, for example, a gaming state can be provided in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to a bonus state can be varied. For example, when a bonus winning combination is won (carried over), a gaming state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination is likely to be displayed due to stop control, and a combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination are relatively By providing a gaming state that is less likely to be displayed, the player's degree of advantage can be varied. Furthermore, for example, a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) is provided. It is also possible to configure the system so that the degree of advantage for the player can be varied.

In addition, the following methods can be used to change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state (which may also include whether to extend the playing period of the AT state; the same applies hereinafter). You can also. For example, a "specific combination" may be determined as the internal winning combination. The number of medals awarded for the specific combination changes depending on the player's stop operation mode (may be the stop operation timing, the order of the presses, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 coins will be paid out; if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect answer), 1 coin or no coins will be paid out).

Then, if you win the specific combination in a specific gaming state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not to change the advantageous degree of whether or not to shift to the AT state in the current game to an advantageous one. No decision is made (which may include a decision as to whether or not to move directly to the AT state, or whether to directly extend the playing period in the AT state; hereinafter described as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous determination is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific winning combination is won in the above-mentioned specific gaming state, and 8 coins are paid out, the advantageous determination is made in the current game. On the other hand, if eight coins have not been paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays a game using a specific gaming method, there are cases where an advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and cases where the advantageous decision is not made (there is a restriction on the occurrence of an advantageous decision). It can also be configured so that there are cases where the Please note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, there is a risk that the (next) player will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to the current game and not continue from the next game onward. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game sections as states in which the game is performed with a concept different from the above-mentioned game state. An example of the game section will be explained below. Note that the gaming section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Unfavorable section)
The non-advantageous period is configured as a gaming period in which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. Note that the requirements below are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or made stricter, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is not possible to inform the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state is not possible.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change) or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is satisfied, a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described below is executed in an advantageous section (in other words, a predetermined value that is updated as the game progresses during the advantageous section (for example, the number of advantageous section games counter and the number of advantageous section payout counters described below) value) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 coins), a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state. Note that by referring to the predetermined value, if the predetermined value is a specific updated value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, the non-advantageous section may be set based on that. In addition, if a predetermined end condition is met during an advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, if a lottery is configured to end the advantageous section and the winner wins), then A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether to move to the advantageous section, etc.) can only be performed with reference to the determined internal winning combination, and the derived It is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the result display (symbol combination) or the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before transition). In addition, to determine which internal winning combination has been determined, it is possible to refer to data directly indicating the internal winning combination, such as the winning number, or to check the sub-flag (multiple winning combinations) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. It is also possible to refer to data that indirectly indicates an internal winning combination, such as one data to be determined.
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, it is not possible to set the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section as the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section after the setting change to be the non-advantageous section B, and so on.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. Note that the requirements below are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or made stricter, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the setting value is changed (setting change) or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is satisfied, an advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit process described below is executed in an advantageous section, it is necessary to terminate the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, processing related to the advantageous section (for example, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section or whether to extend a specific gaming state (mode), etc.) , it is possible to perform not only processing that refers to the determined internal winning combination, but also processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in an advantageous section. . In addition, other examples of various parameters that can be referenced include, for example, benefit information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, types of bonus states, types of RT states, and timing of stop operation of any reel. , or the order in which they are pressed.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a normal state which is disadvantageous for the player, a CZ state where it is easy to shift to the AT state, or an AT state where the expected value of medal increase is positive when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification. Further, for example, in response to a decision to transition to the CZ state in the normal state, a CZ precursor may be set as a standby state until the actual transition to the CZ state, and a precursor effect suggesting transition to the CZ state may be performed. In response to a decision to transition to the AT state, or in the normal state or the CZ state, the system may be set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state, and a precursor effect suggesting transition to the AT state may be performed. States such as the AT precursor state can also be set according to the gameplay.
(6) It is possible to notify that you are in an advantageous section by lighting the section lamp (status display section) that can notify you whether you are in an unfavorable section or an advantageous section (if the section lamp is off) (It is possible to notify that the vehicle is in a non-advantageous section.) Note that, as described above, the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to a certain arbitrary timing. Basically, the lights may start turning on when the transition is from an unfavorable section to an advantageous section, and may continue to be turned on until the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. However, if the advantageous section to which the switch has been transferred is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, but the lighting may be started when the AT state is first entered. Note that if the transitional advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling aspect from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, an upper limit (restriction) is set on the period during which the advantageous section continues continuously. is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Furthermore, in the present embodiment, ending the advantageous section using such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or operation of the limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Number of games limiter)
The number of games limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of games (number of games played) in an advantageous period reaches "1500". For example, an advantageous period game counter, which will be described later, starts counting when the advantageous period starts, and increases the count by 1 each time one game is completed. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section game counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous section is forcibly played (for example, even if the playing period in the AT state remains). It is terminated and moved to a non-advantageous section. Note that the number of games for which the game number limiter operates can be set to any number of games as long as the number of games is less than or equal to the upper limit of "1500". Furthermore, if the requirements for such a game number limiter are to be relaxed or made stricter, they can be changed accordingly. Alternatively, the gambling nature may be suppressed in stages according to the number of games during the advantageous period.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of medals paid out during an advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter described below starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time a medal is paid out, the corresponding number of medals is paid out (more specifically, the net increase is calculated by subtracting the number of bets from the number of medals paid out). (several minutes) Add the count. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "2400" or more), the advantageous section is forcibly given (for example, even if the playing period in the AT state remains). It is terminated and moved to a non-advantageous section. Note that the number of payouts at which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any number of payouts that is less than or equal to the upper limit of "2400". Further, if the requirements for such a payout number limiter are to be relaxed or made stricter, they can be changed accordingly. Further, the gambling nature may be suppressed in stages according to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section.

In addition, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described below takes the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section as the lowest point (starting point), and counts the positive amount from the latest lowest point. (In other words, if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.). In other words, the payout number limiter executes the limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from when the number of medals increases during the advantageous period (for example, when the AT state starts). It can also be configured as a limiter. Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described later may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the number of bets is not subtracted from the payout number) instead of the above-mentioned net increase number.

Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of games limiter, may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of payouts limiter, and may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of games limiter and the number of payouts. The advantageous section limit processing may be executed using both number limiters. Note that when using both limiters, it is desirable to end the advantageous section when the operating condition for either limiter is satisfied after the start of the advantageous section.

Further, the type of limiter is not limited to the above-mentioned game number limiter and payout number limiter. For example, the number of navigation times for the small winning combination in the push order during the AT state (that is, the number of times information on a stop operation advantageous to the player was notified regarding the winning combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number of times (for example, "400" times). A navigation number limiter may be provided that executes the limit process when the number of times the navigation is reached. That is, as long as the gambling nature can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute the limit process using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to be able to output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display device will also be able to do this. You can perform effects during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the BB state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the start of the MB state. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the completion of the MB state, and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the completion of the MB state, not only the above-mentioned bonus state effect will be performed on the external data display device, but also the bonus state will be displayed. You can count the number of times by type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and turned off based on the end of the AT state, the external data display device can also In conjunction with this, it is possible to perform effects during the AT state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of a predetermined AT state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is turned on. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the start of a specific AT state, and turned off based on the end of a specific AT state, the external data display will also be able to display the information during the above AT state. In addition to performing performances, it is also possible to count the number of ATs by type.

Also, for example, the AT state is configured as an AT state for managing the number of sets, and the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the first set of AT state, and from the second set onward, the set is started. If the external signal 2 is turned on every time the AT state is hit, the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can be counted on an external data display. Note that the timing of turning on and turning off each external signal can be set as appropriate. That is, as long as the situation is appropriately recognized by an external data display, hall computer, etc., the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, various conditions can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state and then to the off state again, such as a predetermined time, one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to be able to transmit a plurality of types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and it is required that communication be performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to timely transmit information (commands) for reporting changes in the status of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub-control circuit 200. An example of such a command will be explained below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify setting values, gaming conditions, and the like. Further, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Further, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command is configured to include parameters that specify internal winning combinations, gaming conditions, and the like. Further, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command is configured to include parameters that specify the contents of the lock performance. Further, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command is configured to include a parameter specifying that rotation of the reels has started.

Further, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command includes parameters that specify the reel to be stopped, the position at which the reel is to be stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning activation flag) is determined, a winning activation command is transmitted. The winning activation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of display combination, the content of the bonus to be awarded, and the like. Further, for example, when starting an advantageous section, an advantageous section start command is transmitted. The advantageous section start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous section, the mode (gaming state), and the like. Further, for example, when ending an advantageous section, an advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command is configured to include parameters for specifying the termination of the advantageous section, the cause of the termination, and the like. Further, for example, when a payment operation is performed, a payment command is transmitted. The payment command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns and the like. Note that these are just examples, and commands other than these can be transmitted as needed, and unnecessary commands among these can also be prevented from being transmitted.

[4-10. Performance]
As mentioned above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various performances are performed using various production devices in order to increase the interest of the game, to provide useful information to the player, or to achieve the intended gameplay. It is now possible. An example of such a performance will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side performance]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side), the following effects can be performed, for example. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify information on a stop operation using the instruction monitor, but this is also included in performance in a broad sense.

(Rock performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the player's game operation for a predetermined period). Such a performance is called a "rock performance (or simply "rock")" or a "freeze performance (or simply "freeze")." Note that it is possible to configure the system so that such a rock effect is not performed, or to allow a plurality of types of rock effects to be performed.

Further, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, if the start operation is disabled for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period after all stop operations have been performed. Further, for example, if the stop operation is disabled for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period after the start operation is performed. In addition, when providing multiple types of lock effects, the period during which the progress of the game is stopped (period for invalidating the player's game operations), the type of game operations to be invalidated, etc. are set for each lock effect. All you have to do is make it so.

(Reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, the performance display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only a variable display mode but also a combination with a stop display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. (including). Such a presentation is called a "reel presentation" and also a "symbol presentation." It should be noted that it may be configured so that such reel effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the phrase "performing (performing) a lock effect" includes both cases where a reel effect is performed and cases where a reel effect is not performed.

In short, reel production is to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R without the player's gaming operation during a period when the player's gaming operation is invalidated. It is a performance that will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to set a movement pattern for performing such a performance movement without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. Furthermore, by setting a plurality of movement patterns, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of reel effects. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects and multiple types of lock effects, a wider variety of effect patterns can be set. Note that only one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for reel production.

(pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that causes a pseudo game to be played during the above-described lock effect can be performed. Such performances are called "pseudo games." It should be noted that the system can be configured so that such pseudo games are not performed, or it can be configured so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, the phrase "performing (executing) a lock effect" includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where a pseudo game is not performed.

In short, a pseudo game is a process in which a player's game operation is accepted in a pseudo manner during a period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, and thereby the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated or stopped (temporarily stopped). The performance is performed by doing things like this. That is, the reel performance described above is performed by further intervening the player's game operation. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement button 9 are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operations. For this reason, it is essentially undesirable to use it for any other purpose. However, in a simulated game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that he or she is playing an actual game.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be explained using an example. For example, the pseudo game is performed in the following manner.
(1) Actual start operation by the player (here the execution conditions are met and the pseudo game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a pseudo manner (during a pseudo game)
(3) Receive a pseudo-stop operation, which causes each reel to temporarily stop (during pseudo-gaming)
(4) After random delay processing, each reel actually starts rotating (the pseudo game ends and the actual game starts)

Note that random delay processing is, for example, when specific symbols are displayed side by side in the situation (3) above, and when each reel starts rotating normally in the situation (4) above, the player In some cases, it becomes easier to stop using a specific symbol as a landmark (helping with so-called "eye pushing"), so in order to correct this, a delay period is randomly assigned to each reel. This is a process for starting rotation after generation (such a delay period is also referred to as a "relocation period"). In addition, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the situations (3) and (4) above, the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor must be set to the specified value so that it is not mistakenly recognized as completely stopped. It is desirable that the reels alternate between forward and reverse directions for less than a period of time (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, if any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the situation (3) above (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all reels are temporarily stopped), In the above-mentioned situation (4), each reel may be slightly vibrated (swinged) up and down until the random delay process is started. In addition, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging will not occur when the first reel temporarily stops or when the second reel temporarily stops. You may also do so.

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo game lamp is installed to notify that a pseudo game is in progress, and after a pseudo game is started in the situation (1) above, ), the pseudo game lamp may be turned on until the random delay process is started. Note that it is desirable that the pseudo game lamp be installed at a position above the operation section that accepts game operations from the player and at a position where it can be visually recognized during the game. Further, the pseudo game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for any other purpose, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo game lamp is covered with a monochrome edge. Further, it is desirable that the display range of the pseudo game lamp including the explanatory part of the pseudo game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm). In addition, the explanatory part of the pseudo game lamp includes a description that allows the user to recognize that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp for notifying that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY", "simulating game production in progress", or " It is preferable that the reel should have a description such as ``Reel automatic production in progress'', and it is desirable that such a written part should occupy 1/3 or more of the surface area. It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 or the sub control circuit 200 that controls the pseudo game lamp.

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-gaming display to notify that a pseudo-gaming is in progress may be displayed after the pseudo-gaming is started in the situation (1) above. ) The main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) may be used until the random delay process is started in the situation described in (). It is preferable that the pseudo-gaming display be displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's gaming operations and at a position where it can be seen during the game (in this embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220 are located above the operating section, so either one may be used). In addition, the pseudo-gaming display, including the explanation part, must have a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and if the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area must exceed 642 square mm. , if the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area should preferably be 8.2% or more of the entire screen). In addition, the explanatory part of the pseudo-gaming display includes descriptions that make it clear that the pseudo-gaming display is a display to notify that a pseudo-gaming is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY", "simulating game production in progress", etc.). It is also desirable that the size of the reel is such that it can be read by the player without being obscured.

Also, for example, during a pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the above-mentioned situation (1) until the start of the random delay process in the above-mentioned situation (4)), the instruction monitor It is desirable to configure the system so that the information on the stop operation is not notified (if it is necessary to display the information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay process is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from mistakenly believing that he is playing an actual game during a pseudo game. Furthermore, if any of the above-mentioned measures are taken, even if the sub-side performance device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220) is configured to notify information about the stop operation during the pseudo game. good. Similarly, during the simulated game, the sub performance device may perform a performance according to the game result of the simulated game (in conjunction with the simulated game operation).

In addition, in the actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during the pseudo game In this case, the test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is not output. Therefore, during the pseudo game, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be outputted so that the test machine can recognize that the pseudo game is being played. Note that when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, it outputs a signal for pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the main control board 71 side performs the pseudo game signal. The game may be progressed (that is, the first interface board 301 for the test machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). Further, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine is provided with such a pseudo game progression function, a changeover switch that can turn the function on and off may be provided. As a result, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the production content of the pseudo game in the certification test (sight shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be performed, for example, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side). Note that, as described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 allows the main display device 210 and the like to notify information about a stop operation, but this is also included in performance in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed that is completed in the current game (that is, completed in one game). Such a performance is called a "normal performance" or a "single performance". It should be noted that it may be configured so that such normal effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of normal effects can be performed.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that continues over a plurality of games (that is, continues for a plurality of games) can be performed. Such a performance is called a "continuous reading performance" or a "continuous performance". Note that it is possible to configure the system so that such a continuous performance is not performed, or to perform a plurality of types of continuous performance.

(Operation linked production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a performance can be performed in which the content of the performance can be changed according to a performance operation by a player. Such a performance is called an "operation-linked performance" and is also called a "button performance" or the like. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that such operation-linked effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Further, the operation-linked performance can be configured as a normal performance or as a continuous performance. Furthermore, the performance operations can include not only operations on the performance button group, but also various game operations.

Note that the various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or inform setting values, internal winning combinations, game status, game sections, bonus award details, period until the award is awarded, and the like. Further, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Furthermore, these uses are just examples.

(Other performances)
The pachi-slot machine 1 can also perform performances other than the various performances described above. For example, various types of notifications to players or game parlors (for example, notifications to prevent addiction, notifications to prevent forgotten items, error status notifications, demo status notifications, etc.) that are used for purposes other than those mentioned above are also included in production in a broad sense. . Note that the addictive prevention notification may be such that, for example, when an advantageous section ends, a warning or the like indicating this fact is notified. In addition, the forgotten item prevention notification may be such that, for example, when an advantageous section ends or when a payment operation is performed, a warning or the like indicating this fact is notified. Further, the error state notification may be such that a warning or the like indicating the error is notified from the time the error occurs until the error is resolved. In addition, the demo status notification may be such that when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which no games have been played or when a payment operation has been performed, it is possible to notify that the machine is empty.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of specifications regarding the gaming performance of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine." It should be noted that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to other gaming machines described in this embodiment, and Some or all of the various specifications and functions described as another gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to the first gaming machine in this embodiment. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be a combination of these as appropriate.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the above-mentioned "center line." Further, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as gaming states. In addition, the non-bonus state is between the 2BB flag where "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can only be won in a 2-bet bet state, hereinafter referred to simply as "2BB") described later is carried over, and the Between the 3BB flag where "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won when 3 cards are bet.Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over, and when no bonus role is won (carryover). (not flagged) and non-flags. Further, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that transitions in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 2BB, and a 3BB state that transitions to in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 3BB. Ru.

Furthermore, with the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (2-bet state) and with three medals bet (3-bet state). There is. Note that "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 5 in order to play a game, and that the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b. This includes both of multiplying two or three medals from the credits and automatically multiplying two or three medals by winning a replay combination.

[5-1. Game performance of first gaming machine]
Next, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. In addition, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams showing examples of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays the game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section further includes a presentation section (advantageous section/normal game) and an advantageous section. An increased section (advantageous section/pseudo bonus) will be provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not reported, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. The performance section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not reported, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, but as will be described later. , differs from the non-advantageous section in that mode transition occurs.

In other words, the non-advantageous section is set as an initial state that is controlled when a game in the advantageous section ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the factory shipment is made. The production section is a control state as a normal state in which the expectation level of increasing section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition etc., and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increase period is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the number of medals. It should be noted that both the effect section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and these sections are configured as a series of advantageous sections by mutually transitioning.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section sub-flag is set as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later). is determined. Note that the sub-flag indicates an internal winning combination that plays a similar role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various types of lottery related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous sections) performed by the main control circuit 100. This is information that allows groups to be identified by grouping and assigning the same information. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, so the amount of data can be compressed and the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery is performed using the non-advantageous section sub-flag.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Repbell" has internal winning combinations of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell123A1" to "F_Bell321B2". ” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Weak Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "confirmed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_confirmed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Naka Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that, in the non-advantageous section as well, the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag may be determined in the same way as in the advantageous section. Furthermore, these correspondence relationships are not limited to those described above.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is used as secondary information (sub-flag) according to an internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in an advantageous section. is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning time sub-flags and advantageous section winning time sub-flags.

The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Bell" is determined when the internal winning combination is one of "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Weak Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Confirmed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_Confirmed Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach" (No. "8"). . The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Naka Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag ``Rip 1'' at the time of advantageous section winning is set to ``Right This is determined when the symbol combination of "Upward Rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Right Up Rip"). The sub-flag "Tori Rip 2" when winning an advantageous section is "Parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). This is determined when the symbol combination of "Rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Parallel Rip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of "Rip to the right" symbols is not possible between the 3BB flags. A combination of "parallel rep" symbols is displayed between 2BB flags and between non-flags.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Toru Reply 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section between 3BB flags, and between 2BB flags and between non-flags. When winning a prize in a section, "Toru Rep 2" is determined as the sub-flag. In the first gaming machine, when the advantageous section winning time sub-flags are different in this way, various lotteries described later (for example, pseudo-bonus transfer lottery using the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8(f) is varied.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is played as a winning combination in which the sub-flag changes depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. ) is described as an example, but the manner in which the sub-flag changes when winning an advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Bell123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control will be different depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. Therefore, when winning such a role, the number of medals paid out does not change (or may be changed), and the combinations of symbols displayed are different. A sub-flag may be determined. Then, depending on the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied.

For example, as described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag (non-flag) it is between, the pressed position (stop operation timing) ) is appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon" symbols will be displayed, and if the pressed position is not appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon Spills" will be displayed as the result will be missed. When winning a winning combination, different advantageous section winning time sub-flags may be determined depending on whether the prize is won without missing a prize or when a winning occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied in accordance with the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, the stop operation is predefined) between the 3BB flags. If it is performed in any of the following manners: the pressing order (the correct pressing order), the appropriate pressing position (timing of the stop operation), or a combination of these, the The symbol combination of "Parallel Rip" will be displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific manner, the symbol combination of "Rip to the right" will be displayed, and this will determine the sub-flag when winning a different advantageous section. You can do it like this. Then, depending on the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the gaming state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these regarding the specific combination, All modes that allow different secondary information to be determined depending on different stop display modes, thereby making it possible to vary the degree of advantage, can be applied.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery to move to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing, a destination mode etc. is determined according to the non-gaming section sub-flag. In addition, when making this determination, there are cases where only the type of mode when moving to an advantageous section is determined ("advantageous section start" in Figure 5), and cases where not only the type of mode but also a shift to a pseudo bonus is determined. There is a case where it is determined (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which a transition to a pseudo bonus is not determined in a non-advantageous period.

Here, each mode in the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 6. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may also be referred to as a gaming state or a control state) for varying the expectation level of transition (granting) to an increased section (pseudo bonus) in a performance section (normal game). Yes, in the performance section (normal game), it is determined whether or not to transfer to a pseudo bonus according to this mode, it is decided to maintain an advantageous section, or it is decided to end an advantageous section and move to a non-advantageous section. It is supposed to be done.

Start mode is a relatively unfavorable mode that is easy to stay in when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (production section), and the expectation level of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). 7 (c)), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8, which will be described later). Although not shown, in the start mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games." The ceiling number of games is used to force the transition to the pseudo bonus when the period of not transitioning to the pseudo bonus reaches a certain period. Therefore, the fewer the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous it is to the player, and the greater the number of ceiling games, the disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, A mode is the easiest mode for players to stay in when playing games, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, and the expectation level of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c in Figure 7 below)). ), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later). Note that in the normal A mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games." In addition, in FIG. 6, "approximately 999G after the pseudo bonus" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, the mode shifts to end A mode or end B mode, which will be described later, and in that mode, 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus. If a game is played and the normal A mode is selected when transitioning from the non-advantageous period to the advantageous period after the game has been played and the period has shifted to the non-advantageous period, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + End A The game period in mode or end B mode is "32 games" + the number of games required to transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, so this is expressed. The same applies to the normal B mode, heaven preparation mode, and chance mode.

Normal B mode is relatively easy for players to stay in while playing games, and although it is a relatively disadvantageous mode, it is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the expectation level for shifting to pseudo bonuses is This is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7, which will be described later), and the degree of expectation for shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f), in FIG. 8, which will be described later). Note that in the normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In the Heaven Preparation Mode, the expectation level of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below), but the ceiling number of games is set to "466 games", and when transitioning to a pseudo bonus After that, it is certain that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later), so in that sense, it is a relatively advantageous mode.

Chance mode has a relatively high expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is set to 222 games, so it is relatively advantageous in that sense. mode. However, the level of expectation for transition to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode that is easy to stay in if you transition to a pseudo-bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after it ends, and there is no expectation of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. The degree of expectation for shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8, which will be described later). In the termination A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section.

End B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than end A mode, because it is easy to stay if you move to a pseudo bonus and do not move to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after it ends. mode, the expectation level to shift to a pseudo bonus mode is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) described below), and the expectation level to shift to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see Figure 7 (discussed below)). 8(f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section. Note that the end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode."

The guarantee mode is a mode to stay in when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation level for transitioning to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is "32 games". In that sense, it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the level of expectation for transition to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later). That is, when Heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode that maintains (guarantees) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decline in interest due to it.

Heaven A mode may include the extension (addition) of pseudo bonuses in a row (if the AT state continues due to a decision to extend (addition) made during the AT state). The same applies hereafter), the expectation level for transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling It is a relatively advantageous mode with a moderate probability that the mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, the ceiling mode loop rate may be set differently. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so that the set value is higher, or the lottery value can be simply set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate is. The same applies to heaven B mode and heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which you can expect pseudo bonuses to be played consecutively, and the expectation of transitioning to pseudo bonuses is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is 32 games. ”, and is a relatively advantageous mode with a high probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). In other words, this mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which you can expect pseudo-bonuses to be played consecutively, and the expectation level for transitioning to pseudo-bonuses is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is 32 games. ”, and the probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be quite high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode. Note that heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode."

Note that each of the above-mentioned modes is just an example, and the configuration of the mode is not limited to this. Modes other than the above-mentioned modes may be set, or some of the above-mentioned modes may not be set.

Furthermore, although the non-advantageous section has been described as being relatively less advantageous than the advantageous section, the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increased section is higher than when at least one mode is set in the advantageous section, or the average number of games required to shift to the increased section is shorter. It is also possible to make a specification such that the non-advantageous section is the most likely to be an increasing section. By doing this, an incentive is created to play games even in a state where it is determined that the area is not advantageous, such as after a setting change, and therefore, there is an incentive to start playing games even when the store opens. In addition, even if the section lamp stops lighting after 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not determined that the most disadvantageous situation will occur, so even in such a case, there is no incentive to continue playing. becomes. In addition, up to this point, we have explained that the production section is a gaming state in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, but compared to the increase section, there are disadvantageous aspects (for example, reducing the frequency of notifications, (e.g., changing the winning combination), the game state may be such that information on a stop operation is notified.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. In the performance section (normal game), first, for each game, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the advantageous section winning sub-flag. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not to transfer to a pseudo bonus, "winning (current game)" means to transfer from the current game to a pseudo bonus, and " "Winning (next game)" means transitioning to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, if a "win (current game)" is determined, the game will be played at the start of the current game, and if a "win (next game)" is determined, the game will be played at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is disabled for a certain period of time, and during the invalid period, a reel performance in which "Red 7" symbols are displayed in a row on the main display window 4 ("Red 7 in a row" performance) is performed. , in a game where a pseudo bonus has started and a "red 7" effect is performed, if it is necessary to notify information on a stop operation, at least the invalid period has ended and the game operation (stop operation) is valid. Information on the stop operation is notified when (it may be before, but not before the above-described random delay process is started).

In the production section (normal game), if it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. In addition, as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus and the mode transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and mode transfer lottery described below. (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) are not performed.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay" In a game in which a player wins in "B"), a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

In addition, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), "Toripu 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag than when "Toripu 1" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. The percentage of cases where it is decided to shift to pseudo bonuses is higher. However, the manner in which "Toru Reply 2" is given preferential treatment than "Toru Reply 1" is not limited to this. For example, in the case where "Toripu 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it may be decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability; In such a case, it may not be possible to decide to shift to a pseudo bonus.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Further, as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), it is determined to transfer to the pseudo bonus, and if the mode transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transfer lottery (at the time of ceiling) described below will not be performed.

In addition, in the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f), "Toripu 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag rather than "Toripu 1" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. In this case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a mode relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the manner in which "Tori-Rep 2" is given preferential treatment than "Tori-Rep 1" is not limited to this. For example, in the case where "Top 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag, it may be determined that the player is shifted to a relatively advantageous mode with a predetermined probability, but as the advantageous section winning sub-flag " In the case where it is determined that the game mode is 1, it may not be determined to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (either addition method or subtraction method is fine), and the ceiling game When the number reaches the ceiling number of games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that a "win (current game)" is determined, or it is also possible to make sure that a "win (next game)" is determined. Further, any of these may be determined by lottery.

In the performance section (normal game), when the number of games reaches the ceiling and it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

In addition, the processes related to the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest are the same processing contents, so they use the same lottery table and control flow. It can be controlled using In addition, the processes related to mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) are the same except for the type of sub-flag, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. can be controlled.

In addition, if "Win (this game)" is not set as the type of winning of the pseudo bonus, at the timing when the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined, the advantageous section winning sub-flag has also been determined, and Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo bonus transfer processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed all at once. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be performed all at once in one process.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. As mentioned above, when it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus in the performance section (normal game) and the pseudo bonus is started ("pseudo bonus start" in Figure 5), the transition to the increase section (pseudo bonus) occurs. . In addition, as mentioned above, in the performance section (normal game), if the end A mode or end B mode is controlled and 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus (in Figure 5, the "Advantage section ends" (via Ends A and B)"), then shift to a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, if the conditions for limit processing shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are satisfied, the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated ("end of advantageous section (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, Shift to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling reduction lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus, depending on the current mode. In (e) of Figure 8, "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games will not be shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. , means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (reduced). Note that the ceiling reduction lottery may be performed not only when the pseudo bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo bonus.

As a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, if it is decided not to reduce the number of ceiling games, and when the pseudo bonus ends, if you do not have 1G continuous stock as described below, the number of ceiling games will be reduced according to the current mode. is set (in the case of end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but the ceiling number of games may be temporarily set here) , the pseudo bonus ends ("pseudo bonus ends" in FIG. 5), and the game moves to the performance section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is determined to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, when the pseudo bonus ends, "0 games" is set as the ceiling number of games. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of games reaches the ceiling, the above-described mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increased section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "determined hand" or "medium Che" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section). . Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that the destination mode may also be determined when an advantageous section winning sub-flag other than the above is determined, but in this case, as a general rule, a mode that is relatively disadvantageous than the current mode is selected. In order to avoid being determined as the previous mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referred to.

In the increased section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which a winning is made in "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. In this case, as above, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively disadvantageous than the current mode from being determined as the destination mode, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is based on the lottery value. Another mode transition lottery table with a different value may be referred to.

In the increasing section (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate a 1G consecutive lottery according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag or the advantageous section winning sub-flag. be done. In addition, in (d) of Figure 7, "non-winning" means that 1G series will not be generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" means that the right to generate 1G series (1G series stock) is 1 piece. It means that it is given (the 1G continuous stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that a plurality of 1G continuous stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (stored) by the 1G continuous stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be awarded during one pseudo bonus. Furthermore, the 1G continuous lottery table can be configured so that a plurality of 1G continuous stocks can be awarded in one 1G continuous lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G continuous stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G continuous stock), one 1G continuous stock is used up (the 1G continuous stock counter is (subtracted by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. Note that in this case, since a pseudo bonus corresponding to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G continuous stock counter is not 1 or more (that is, if you do not own 1G continuous stock), and if you have not won the ceiling reduction lottery described above, The number of ceiling games is set according to the current mode (in the case of end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but the number of ceiling games is temporarily set here. ), the pseudo bonus ends ("pseudo bonus end" in FIG. 5), and the transition to the performance section (normal game) occurs.

In addition, if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G continuous stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will take priority, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G continuous stock will be given. Alternatively, the 1G continuous stock may be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling reduction may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store information that can carry forward the fact that there is ceiling shortening.

In the first gaming machine, as an example of the structure of the increase period (pseudo bonus), the structure continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 coins can be acquired, but the structure of the pseudo bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo bonus is configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)" is also installed, which is a pseudo bonus that lasts for "22 games" and can earn up to 110 coins. You can do it like this. In this case, when it is decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transfer lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G consecutive lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo BB") RB or "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, in 50% increments). Note that "pseudo RB" may have a different value from "pseudo BB" (more specifically, it has lower value than "pseudo BB"), so for example, the number of consecutive games may be different from "pseudo BB". BB", but by setting the BellNavi rate (probability of notification of stop operation information) to a low value, it is possible to differentiate the maximum number of coins that can be acquired and make the value different. In addition, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel performance in which "BAR" symbols are displayed all together on the main display window 4, or a reel performance in which "Red 7-Red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. Just do it like this. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to one configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continued games (game period) can be changed.

Additionally, if the conditions for executing the limit process shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are met during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section will be forcibly ended (in FIG. 5, "end of advantageous section due to limit processing"). ), resulting in a transition to a non-favorable section.

In the first gaming machine, the above-described flow of the game is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-bet bet state. Therefore, when a game is played with two bets, for example, various drawings using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. are not performed, and The number of ceiling games is also not updated. Furthermore, if a game is played with two bets during the pseudo bonus, the medals are configured not to increase in the two bet state, so the period during the pseudo bonus does not become an increasing period. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player is basically at a disadvantage when playing a game with two bets.

Here, when a game is played with two bets, the lottery regarding the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc.) is used. (various lotteries) and processing (for example, updating the number of ceiling games) will not be performed, but the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter for the number of games limiter and the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter for the payout number limiter will be updated. It is desirable that the These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing the gambling nature by limiting the number of games stayed in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of coins acquired, so even if two coins are bet, these counters will not be updated. If this is the case, there will be cases where the number of stay games and the number of coins won will exceed the upper limit of the set advantageous zone due to intervening games with two bets, and as a result, it may not be possible to appropriately suppress the gambling nature. It's to get it. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counter be configured to be able to be updated every game regardless of the number of bets.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when a game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. It will not be played, and the number of ceiling games will not be updated. In addition, if a bonus state occurs during a pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the non-bonus state with a 3-card bet). , the period during the pseudo bonus may not be an increasing period. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player may be at a disadvantage if he plays the game in the bonus state.

Therefore, the first gaming machine is configured so that it is recommended to play a game with a 3-card bet between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, a 3-card bet between 2BB flags is referred to as a "recommended game"). In some cases, other states may be described as "non-recommended gaming states"). In other words, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus combination that can only be won in a 2-piece bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between the 2BB flags can only be won in a 2-piece bet state, and cannot be won in a 3-piece bet state. The configuration is such that it does not. Furthermore, 3BB is a bonus combination that can only be won in a 3-piece bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between the 3BB flags is configured such that it can only be won in a 3-piece bet state and not in a 2-piece bet state. Furthermore, there is no case where 3BB is won between 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB is won between 3BB flags.

In the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, after winning 2BB in a 2-bet bet state between non-flags (without winning 2BB) and placing it between 2BB flags, a 3-bet bet state is made. If you play the game with , you can play the game in the above-mentioned recommended gaming state without worrying about whether or not you will win the bonus combination.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling reduction lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e), when the current mode is one of the guarantee mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, 1 The probability of winning the ceiling reduction lottery is /8 (32/256), while the ceiling reduction lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the case of a mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the case of a mode in which the number of ceiling games is greater than that, This prevents the number of ceiling games from being shortened.

Note that even in a mode where the number of ceiling games is more than "32 games", the probability that the number of ceiling games is greater than "32 games" is lower (for example, 1/64) than in a mode where the number of ceiling games is "32 games". may be determined to be shortened.

Further, the manner in which the number of ceiling games is shortened is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, if you shorten "32 games" to a smaller number of predetermined games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be achieved, so when you win the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of shortened games will be further determined. Alternatively, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance in the ceiling shortening lottery.

Moreover, the opportunity for performing the ceiling shortening lottery is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, during the pseudo bonus, a ceiling reduction lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guarantee mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, ceiling shortening lottery will be performed for each game. You may also do so. In these cases, the advantageous section winning time sub-flag and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d), it is shown that 1G consecutive stock may be awarded regardless of which mode the current mode is. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling of 32 games or not.

Note that the manner in which the rights are granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode where the number of ceiling games is "32 games", 1G continuous lottery is not performed considering that a ceiling reduction lottery will be performed, and in a mode where the number of ceiling games is greater than "32 games". By allowing the 1G consecutive lottery to be performed when , the gambling nature of the game may be prevented from becoming excessively high.

Moreover, the opportunity for performing the 1G lottery is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed even in an advantageous section (performance section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be used up in the next pseudo bonus.

Although illustrations are omitted in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the current mode is the heaven mode at the start of the pseudo bonus or during the pseudo bonus, the game machine is in an advantageous state. A special bonus performance to suggest something is executed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, when the special bonus performance is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the ceiling reduction lottery will be executed. Further, this special bonus performance may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if a special bonus effect is executed at the start of a pseudo-bonus, it will be suggested that you are at least staying in heaven mode, and there is also the expectation that you may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. It can make you feel. Further, this special bonus performance may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a 100% probability even when a 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning. Various possibilities such as winning only can be suggested, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the advantageous condition (for example, pseudo bonus) will be controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the end of the advantageous condition (for example, pseudo bonus), , in the case of heaven mode), the period may be further shortened. Therefore, even if the playing period of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by allowing the game to be played in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, in the case of the end mode), the right (for example, , 1G continuous stock) may restart the advantageous state, so it is possible to increase the player's expectations and improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when a "confirmed combination" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning in an advantageous section (i.e., "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_ ``Reach roll'' is determined as an internal winning combination), and if it is determined to shift to heaven C mode as a result of the mode transition lottery described above, the probability is 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). ), a special rock performance can be performed. Furthermore, even if the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player may also select the "Confirmed winning combination" as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. '' is determined, so if the sub-flag ``Medium Che'' is determined when winning an advantageous section, it is the same as when ``Confirmed hand'' is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section. Similarly, a special lock performance may be made possible.

Here, since the "confirmed hand" is a hand that also confirms the transition to a pseudo bonus (see (c) in FIG. 7), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can transfer to the pseudo bonus and transition to heaven C mode. It is now possible to recognize that there has been a game, and it has become very interesting for players. The special lock performance is, for example, configured as a performance in which game operations (stop operations) are disabled for approximately 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this time, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in reverse, or a special video etc. that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display section 21. You may also do so. Also, special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce effects by combining these. In addition, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be made to continue until the player performs the next game operation (in other words, the effect can be executed to the end or canceled midway through). It is also possible to leave the decision of whether to proceed with the game to the player).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, for example, even if you stay in heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. , it may be undesirable to perform the above-mentioned special lock effect many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, within a series of advantageous sections, if it is decided to execute a special lock effect for the first time, the special lock effect will be executed, but after that, within the same series of advantageous sections, the same conditions will be applied. To control so that a special lock performance is not executed even if it is established. In addition, the method is that once a special lock effect is executed, information indicating that effect is stored, and if the information is stored in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter, the special lock effect is not activated in the first place. The decision as to whether or not to execute the performance may not be made, or the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the result of the decision indicates that the performance will be executed. may also be rewritten to indicate that it will not be executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

Note that the manner in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the upper limit number of times that the special lock effect can be executed may be set as "twice" or "three times" instead of "one time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set as a plurality of times. This can be set as appropriate depending on the expected value of balls to be rolled out per special lock effect.

Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is performed upon winning a "confirmed role", and a decision is made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode. However, for example, there are cases where the game enters heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than winning the "confirmed role" (see (f) in Figure 8), so the special lock effect is executed in these cases as well. A special lock effect will be executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as that triggered by winning a "determined role", or it may be a different probability). It may be determined that the

Furthermore, for example, upon winning a "determined role", it is first decided whether or not a special lock performance will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock performance will be executed, the heaven It may be possible to shift to C mode. In other words, the special lock performance may be executed in response to the decision to move to heaven C mode, or the transition to heaven C mode may be performed in response to the decision to perform the special lock performance. It may also be possible to shift to .

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game during the advantageous section may be adopted as the condition for determining whether or not the special lock performance is to be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or control game number counter described below is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or control payout number counter described later is less than "1201", , When it is determined whether or not to execute the special lock effect as described above, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described below becomes "750" or more, or When the value of the section payout number counter or the control payout number counter becomes "1201" or more, a decision as to whether or not a special lock performance will be executed is made not to be made in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do that.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16, which will be described later). In the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set multiple times, special effects (for example, special lock effects) are set each time. controlled so that it does not occur. Therefore, while suppressing the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that the winning of a specific combination (for example, a "determined combination") will trigger an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). , control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, heaven C mode) may be set. In the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs multiple times, the control is performed so that a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, while suppressing the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine secondary information (for example, advantageous section winning sub-flag) according to the determined internal winning combination, and secondary information (for example, a sub-flag at the time of winning in an advantageous section) according to the combination of displayed symbols. For example, it is possible to determine whether to grant an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stop operation is notified, depending on the determined secondary information. It is assumed that it can be determined.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the provision of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined but also when a combination of symbols is displayed. It is possible to diversify the gameplay regarding giving.

In addition, the first gaming machine manages both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination as common secondary information. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and amount of information related to provision.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the betted gaming value is the first amount (for example, 3 coins), the first special prize (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special prize (for example, , 2BB) cannot be won. Further, when the betted game value is the second amount (for example, 2 coins), the second special winning combination is made possible to win, while the first special winning combination is not made possible to win. In addition, when winning a specific combination (for example, "F_Replay A"), if it is in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "Rip to the right") is displayed, and If it is in the 2 special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "Parallel Rip") (see FIG. 15, which will be described later).

In the first gaming machine, different secondary information can be determined when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed and when a specific symbol combination is displayed. In other words, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on which special permission state is in effect. It is possible to further diversify the gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the provision of states.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific winning combination is won and a specific combination of symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are symbol combinations related to re-gaming, it is considered that re-gaming is activated no matter which one is displayed. The same benefits will be granted.

Note that the manner in which the same benefits are provided is not limited to the above. For example, the specific winning combination is configured as a specific small winning combination that is associated with the granting of gaming value. If you win a specific small role, for example, if you are in the first special permission state, you will receive 1 coin (this value is arbitrary and may be any other value below the betted gaming value, or The second special permission In this case, a combination of specific symbols that gives the same number of gaming values as when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed (a combination of symbols that gives a gaming value equivalent to "parallel reply") is displayed. It's okay.

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are combinations of symbols that are "missing" (however, in order to make it possible to decide whether or not to give an advantageous state, the combination of symbols is different from the case of pure "missing"). A combination of symbols may be configured as a combination of distinguishable symbols. Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be varied depending on which special permission state is in place. , it is possible to diversify the gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the provision of advantageous states. In addition, in games where a specific combination has been determined, the same benefits are granted regardless of which special permission state the player is in, so even if the gameplay is changed, the player is not directly disadvantaged. You can prevent it from getting covered.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, a specific combination of symbols can be displayed when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner in the second special permission state, and a specific combination of symbols can be displayed. It may be configured such that it is not possible to display a specific combination of symbols when a stop operation is not performed in the mode.

Then, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a specific combination of symbols is displayed. If a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state different depending on when a combination of specific symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is not displayed. good.

In addition, if you win a specific combination, if you are in the first special permission state, a combination of predetermined symbols will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if you are in the second special permission state, you will be able to display the stop operation in a specific manner. When the stop operation is performed, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed.

In this case, the specific combination is determined when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate on at least one reel (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "press position ○", "press position correct", etc.). When a specific combination of symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "pressed position x" or "incorrect pressed position"), the specified symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on (the timing of) the player's stop operation, which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and improves the interest of the game. can.

In addition, as mentioned above, the specific winning combination can also be configured as a specific small winning combination, and in this case, on at least one reel, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the pressed position is ○), the specific symbol will be displayed. A combination is displayed and a predetermined number of gaming values are awarded, and if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressed position is x), a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of gaming values are awarded. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same benefit). Further, a predetermined number may be awarded more gaming value than a specific number. Furthermore, the predetermined number may be awarded less gaming value than the specific number. Further, at least one of the specific symbol combination and the predetermined symbol combination may be used as a symbol combination when a failure occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible to not only change the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, but also to change the content of direct benefits, so that the player This allows the player to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and improves the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, on one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the stop operation becomes an appropriate stop operation and a specific symbol combination is displayed, and when the timing of the stop operation is other than the first timing, the stop operation is appropriate. When the first specific combination is not and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and the timing of the stop operation is a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed. , and when the timing is other than the second timing, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed without an appropriate stop operation. What is the second specific combination, and when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing? When the third timing is different, the stop operation is appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the stop operation is not appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. A third specific winning combination is provided, and these winnings may be won with the same probability of winning.

In addition, in this case, the specific combination of symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), and the specified combination of symbols is displayed when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect pressing order). It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on the player's stop operation (the procedure), which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and improves the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above, and in this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. It can be configured such that when a value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of an incorrect pressing order), a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same benefit). Further, a predetermined number may be awarded more gaming value than a specific number. Furthermore, the predetermined number may be awarded less gaming value than the specific number. Further, at least one of the specific symbol combination and the predetermined symbol combination may be used as the symbol combination when a missed spot occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state be changed due to the player's stop operation (the procedure), but also the details of the direct benefits can be changed, so the player This allows the player to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and improves the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order will be limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when it is the first stop on the left, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when it is the first stop in the center or right, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. When it is the 1st specific combination and the middle 1st stop, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is the left/right 1st stop, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed. When the combination is the 2nd specific combination that is not displayed and the 1st stop on the right, it becomes an appropriate stop operation and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when it is the 1st stop on the left or middle, it is not an appropriate stop operation. A combination of specific symbols is provided with a third specific combination that is not displayed, and these may be set to win with the same probability of winning.

Up to this point, in a unit game in which a specific winning combination has been won, due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order), the process for determining the transition from an unfavorable section to an advantageous section, or an advantageous section. As described above, the determination process regarding the granting of advantageous states (including pseudo bonus transition lottery, mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantageousness of the gaming situation in advantageous sections) will be changed. Among these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may result in disadvantage) can be regarded as the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which an arbitrary effect (warning notification) can be generated to call attention.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, there is a higher possibility that an advantageous state will be given when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It has become. In other words, assuming that 3 coins are bet, the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) is a state in which the granting of an advantageous state is more preferential than the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). It is.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, if you win a predetermined combination (for example, "Push Order Bell B" described later), if you are in the first special permission state, you can combine the awarded symbols (for example, 8 pieces payout) regardless of the batting order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, if the batting order is the predefined correct pressing order, the given symbol combination will be displayed, but the batting order is predefined. If it is not the correct pressing order, the combination of awarded symbols will not be displayed and no gaming value will be awarded, or a smaller amount of gaming value will be awarded than if the combination of assigned symbols had been displayed. It is configured so that a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that results in one payout) is displayed. That is, unless the operation of the advantageous state is taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the granting of gaming value is given more preferential treatment than the second special permission state.

In other words, even if the player is in a non-recommended gaming state, if the player plays a game with a bet of 3 cards between the 3BB flags, the probability of giving an advantageous state will not be given preferential treatment, but the gaming value will be increased when the advantageous state is not activated. Since the granting probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be played with a relatively small difference in slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility that the player can rapidly increase the gaming value is reduced, can be defined, for example, as a "stable state."

On the other hand, if the player plays a game in the recommended gaming state, the probability of granting an advantageous state will be treated favorably, but the probability of granting gaming value when the favorable state is not activated will not be treated favorably, so the favorable condition will not be activated. The game can be played in a state where the difference in slope value between when it is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which there is a high possibility that the player will be able to rapidly increase the gaming value, but the player's gaming value is likely to decrease can be defined, for example, as a "rough sea state."

Here, the method of creating two states, a stable state and a rough sea state, is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the pseudo-bonus transition probability is made higher than in the "rough sea state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode is made higher than in the "rough sea state". lower. In addition, in the "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is lower than in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode is lower than in the "stable state". enhance In this way, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to hit a pseudo bonus for the first time in a "stable state" but difficult to hit consecutive games, and in a "rough sea state" it is difficult to hit a pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is easy to win consecutive games. This situation can be created. As for the stop control of the predetermined combination, as described above, it may be changed between 2BB flags and between 3BB flags, or it may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between 3BB flags).

[5-2. Design layout configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement of the first gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "Red 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Red Blank", "Yellow Blank", " Ten types of symbols, ``White Blank 1'' and ``White Blank 2,'' are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Further, FIGS. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing examples of symbol combination tables of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine. That is, in the following, which symbol is selected depending on the type of internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine and the stop operation mode (i.e., batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. We will explain whether the combinations (which can also be referred to as display combinations, winning combinations, stop display modes, display results, etc.) are displayed.

First, in the first gaming machine, in an internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "Corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to a minor role. It shows.

“F_2BB” can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 2-card bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while it can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 3-card bet. The structure is such that if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. In a game in which "F_2BB" wins in a 2-bet state, or in a game in which "F_2BB" is a "miss" between the 2BB flags, "BB01" will be displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB) will be displayed. (bonus state). On the other hand, even if it is between two BB flags, "BB01" will not be displayed in a three-bet bet state.

“F_3BB” can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a bet of 3 coins in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), but when a game is played with a bet of 2 coins, The structure is such that if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a 3-bet state, or in a game in which "F_3BB" is a "miss" between the 3BB flags, "BB02" will be displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB) will be displayed. (bonus state). On the other hand, even if it is between 3 BB flags, there is no case where "BB02" is displayed in a 2-bet bet state.

In addition, in the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referred to and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of coins that can be started is only 3 coins). During the 2BB state and 3BB state, the RB, which is a first class special accessory, is always controlled to be in operation (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two winnings occur or two games are played after activation, the RB state is once terminated and activated again. Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the end condition for the 2BB state is stipulated that more than one medal is paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition for the 3BB state is defined as that more than 176 medals are paid out in the 3BB state. It is stipulated that the amount has been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, special mode transition processing is performed. For example, if the mode in which you entered the bonus state (same as when the bonus state ends, as no mode transition occurs during the bonus state), i.e., the current mode, is "start mode", then the transition destination The mode is "start mode". Furthermore, if the current mode is one of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the destination mode will be "normal A mode". Further, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the destination mode is "end A mode". Furthermore, if the current mode is one of "guarantee mode," "heaven A mode," "heaven B mode," and "heaven C mode," the destination mode will be "guarantee mode."

“F_Replay A” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and between 2BB flags, any one of "REP64" to "REP72" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode (these are "Replay" symbols in a straight line in the lower row or in a straight line in the middle row). Because they are displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel reps." Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower reps," and "REP72" is a "middle rep." ``reply'') is displayed and a replay is granted. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, "REP73" (this can be called "replay" as it displays the "replay" symbol upward to the right) will be displayed and a replay will be granted.

“F_Replay B” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel reply" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state and a replay will be granted.

“F_Cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-bet bet state, if the pressed position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, one of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" will be displayed (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol at the bottom of the left reel 3L). Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "Cherry Rip") is displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is granted.

“F_Confirmed Cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the pressed position is ○ for at least left reel 3L, one of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are The "cherry" symbol is displayed at the bottom of the left reel 3L, and since symbols such as "REP42" that can increase the player's expectations on other reels are also displayed, these are ) is displayed and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, the above-mentioned "Cherry Rep" and "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a replay is granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_middle cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the pressed position is ○ for at least left reel 3L, one of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row of the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle row cherry reps"), and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_Reach” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state, regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP01" to "REP14" will be pressed regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customary for players to It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitively notify (or suggest) a transition to an advantageous state, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye reps") is displayed, and replay is possible. Granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_Watermelon” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these are "watermelon" symbols displayed side by side, so (which can be collectively referred to as "Watermelon") is displayed, and if the bet is on 3 medals, three medals are paid out, and if the bet is on 2 medals, two medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, either "FRU08" or "FRU09" (these can be collectively referred to as "watermelon spills" because the "watermelon" symbols are not displayed side by side) is displayed and one medal is paid out. In addition, in the case of the pressed position x, it is also possible to configure so that a missed medal occurs and no medals are paid out.

"F_Bell123A1", "F_Bell123A2", "F_Bell132A1", "F_Bell132A2", "F_Bell213A1", "F_Bell213A2", "F_Bell231A1", "F_Bell231A2", "F_Bell Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A."

As shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor combination with 6 choices (any one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct pressing order). If the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, the "lower right bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "middle bell" ("FRU04"), "right rising bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "lower bell" ("FRU07"). is displayed, and if the bet is 3 medals, 8 medals are paid out, and if the bet is 2 medals, 2 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations will have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressed position ○, and the pressed position ○ If so, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, the remaining stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ○, and if the pressed position is ○, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out.

"F_Bell123B1", "F_Bell123B2", "F_Bell132B1", "F_Bell132B2", "F_Bell213B1", "F_Bell213B2", "F_Bell231B1", "F_Bell231B2", "F_Bell ``Bell 312B1'', ``F_Bell 312B2'', ``F_Bell 321B1'', and ``F_Bell 321B2'' are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B."

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor combination between the 3BB flags in the 2-bet bet state and the 3-bet bet state. If it is decided as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the bet is 3 medals, 8 medals will be paid out, and if the bet is 2 medals, 2 medals will be paid out. A number of medals will be paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" is not pressed in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between non-flags in the 3-bet state, and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). If the winning combination is decided as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed and 8 medals will be displayed. paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations will have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressed position ○, and the pressed position ○ If so, which one of the winning "one-card combinations" is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, the remaining stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ○, and if the pressed position is ○, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out.

The "F_RB combination of 8 cards" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight medals are paid out.

The "1 piece F_RB combination" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "1-card combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 1-card combination will be displayed. medals will be paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the correspondence between the internal winning combination, stop operation mode, display combination, etc. shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, in the first gaming machine, in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed when the result is a pure "loss", when "BB01" is missed and becomes a "loss", "BB02" can be displayed. In a 3-bet state, when you miss "BB02" and become a "miss", when you become a "miss" due to a 3-bet state between 2BB flags, when a 2-bet state occurs between 3BB flags A "miss" may occur in various situations, such as when a "miss" occurs due to this, or when a "miss" occurs due to a "small winning combination" being missed. Therefore, in order to vary the symbol combinations that are displayed as "lost" in some or all of these cases, these different symbol combinations are defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and the determined internal winning combination is By allowing these to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the situation, it is also possible to vary the symbol combinations related to "missing" displayed depending on the state or the like.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing ( Each limit process (number of games) and semi-limit process (number of payouts) are executed. Note that this is an example of limit processing that can be executed, and limit processing other than these limit processing can be executed, or some of these limit processing can be executed. You can also prevent it from happening.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when games during the advantageous section are played 1500 times in a row). The advantageous section game counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the activation of the limit process). It is cleared (initialized) after the counting ends. Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts both when the number of bets is two and three. Further, the advantageous section game number counter performs counting also in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended and the non-advantageous section is completed, regardless of whether it is during the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus). to be transferred to In addition, at this time, information regarding advantageous sections (for example, information for controlling the effect section and increase section, information regarding the current mode, information regarding the playing period of pseudo bonuses, information regarding the number of ceiling games and whether there is ceiling reduction) information, various information obtained during the advantageous section such as the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, and various information necessary to control the advantageous section) are all cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") that has been paid out since the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the section ends (including the end due to activation of the limit process), the counting is ended and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter performs counting whether the number of bets is two or three. Further, the advantageous section payout number counter performs counting also in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter will count as appropriate according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2 pieces" or "-3 pieces", etc.) when a "miss" or "missed" occurs during the advantageous section, for example. The value is subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the start of the advantageous section, it may become a negative value (or, if it becomes a negative value, it will always remain ``0''). ). That is, the advantageous section payout number counter is capable of counting the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section from the lowest point to the defined maximum point (difference in number of medals: 2400).

When the normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended, regardless of whether it is during the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section to be transferred to Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when games in the advantageous section are played 1445 times in a row). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the activation of the limit process). It is cleared (initialized) after the counting ends. Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, and does not count when the number of bets is two. Further, the control game number counter performs counting when the game is in the non-bonus state, and does not perform counting when the game is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase period), the pseudo bonus will be activated without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. When the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus is not in progress (that is, if it is in the performance section), first, the process is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is not won, the transfer to the pseudo bonus is made by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly, and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section game number counter in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", whereas the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of games (continuable period) during the pseudo bonus is "55 games" (Fig. 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when a predetermined regulation period has been played in an advantageous area in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (number of games) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus starts or during it, the player will feel a sense of distrust or loss, which will reduce the interest in the game. There are cases. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (number of games) is performed on a game that is the continuable period (55 games) per increase period before the game on which normal limit processing (number of games) is performed. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus being terminated midway.

Note that from this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above-mentioned timing. For example, the special limit process (number of games) is executed before the game where the normal limit process (number of games) is executed by the continuation period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per 2 increase periods. It is also possible to do so. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the limit processing (number of games) is normally executed before the continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase period. A special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game. Also, for example, in the case of specifications such as going through a precursor state before moving to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuable period (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) per increase period before the game that is played. In other words, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed; It is assumed that settings can be made as appropriate depending on the game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). In addition, the control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and When the section ends (including the end due to activation of the limit process), the counting is ended and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter performs counting when the number of bets is three, and does not perform the counting when the number of bets is two. Further, the control payout number counter performs counting when in a non-bonus state, and does not perform counting when in a 2BB state and a 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs in the advantageous section, the control payout number counter is decremented by an appropriate value according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-3 coins", etc.). However, the control payout number counter does not cause a "missing medal" (or a difference) when a "missing medal" occurs during an advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out). The number of medals paid out is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game where you bet 3 medals and win "Push Order Bell A", if the batting order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) is "8" (the difference number is " On the other hand, if the batting order is not appropriate, if the pressing position is appropriate, the number of medals paid out will be ``1'' (the difference in number of medals is ``-2''), and if the pressing position is not appropriate. If a medal is missed, the number of medals paid out becomes "0" (the difference number is "-3"), but the control payout number counter shows the difference number "-3" in any case in the game. +5 pieces” are counted.

In addition, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout number counter due to activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter becomes It is corrected to the value of the section payout number counter. Note that the control payout number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout number counter.

When the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, if it is in the increase period), the pseudo bonus will be released without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. When the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus is not in progress (that is, if it is in the performance section), first, the process is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the transfer to the pseudo-bonus is made by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly, and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter where normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates) is "2401", whereas special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates) Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of coins acquired in the pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) is "275 coins". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into consideration the amount of gaming value that can be awarded in the pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when a predetermined regulated gaming value amount of gaming value is awarded in an advantageous area in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed immediately after or during the start of a pseudo bonus, the player will feel distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. There are cases where this happens. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a gaming value amount that is less than the gaming value amount for which limit processing (number of payouts) is normally executed is given by the amount of gaming value that can be given per increase section (275 coins). By occasionally executing special limit processing (number of payouts), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful or lost due to the pseudo-bonus ending prematurely.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above-mentioned timing. For example, when a gaming value amount that is less than the gaming value amount for which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed is awarded by the amount of gaming value that can be awarded per two increase periods (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins). A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. For example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the amount of gaming value that can be awarded per increase period (275 coins) + grace period is equivalent to the amount of gaming value that can be granted per increase period (275 coins) + the amount of gaming value for which limit processing (number of payouts) is normally executed. A special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount less than the game value amount (8 pieces) is awarded. In other words, the special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed (activated) at any timing before the normal limit process (number of payouts). It is assumed that settings can be made as appropriate depending on the game specifications, etc.

For semi-limit processing (number of games), add "1" to the value of the control game counter (if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and it becomes "with ceiling shortening"), add "1" to the value of the 1G continuous counter. ) is multiplied by "55" (that is, the period during which the pseudo bonus can be continued), and is executed when the addition result becomes "1390" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". ”, the semi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (activated).

For semi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout number counter and the value of the 1G continuous counter (if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and it is "with ceiling shortening"), add "1". ) is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given as a pseudo bonus), and is executed when the addition result becomes "1851" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and it is "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout number counter is "1301". ”, the semi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (activated). Note that semi-limit processing (number of games) and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) both have the same restrictions, so after one operating condition is established and activated, the other operating condition will be applied. Even if this holds true, there is no need for it to operate redundantly.

When the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in a series of subsequent advantageous sections. It will no longer be done. That is, the extension of the gaming period in the increased section is suppressed. Note that the method for suppressing the extension of the gaming period in the increased section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the probability of winning the 1G consecutive lottery may be set to be lower than usual, and in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be set to be lower than usual. . That is, although the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed, it may be made so that it is difficult to win these lots. Further, for example, in the production section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that becomes a winning prize in the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, in the mode transition lottery, the lottery value at which a mode transition advantageous to the player is determined may be lowered to make it difficult for pseudo bonuses to be won consecutively.

In addition, when the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, the "determined hand" (( A special process is performed when a) is won. Hereinafter, this special processing will be explained using as an example a case where the "confirmed combination" is "F_confirmed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "confirmed cherry").

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "certain cherry" is won during the performance period (may be during the increase period), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery occurs. ``Winning (next game)'' is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). In addition, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a highly anticipated symbol for the player, so in games where information about stop operations is not reported, the player The general procedure is to perform the stop operation by making one stop and aiming at the "Cherry" symbol (as a guideline, aim at the "BAR" symbol). Therefore, when a game is played according to the general procedure, when a "determined cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower row of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "confirmed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2" ”) may be made. Further, "winning (next game)" is not limited to a pseudo bonus starting from the next game, but may also mean a pseudo bonus starting from the next game or later.

Here, a skilled player also aims at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and right reel 3R and stops, in order to further determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "certain cherry". Perform operations. As a result, the "BAR" symbols line up in the middle of each reel, and it can be recognized that the "confirmed cherry" has been won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player, for example, may not or may not be able to perform the stop operation while aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and right reel 3R, and the stop display may appear to be a "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "determined cherry" (for example, see "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, when a "confirmed cherry" is won, the "confirmed cherry reply" is not activated. When a combination of symbols is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" and the "Confirmed Cherry Lip" symbol combination is not displayed, but the "Cherry Lip" symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound will also be played. It is now output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100%, or with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, if you win a "certain cherry", at the start of the next game, "red 7" ” will be performed and it will be announced that the pseudo bonus will start, and the pseudo bonus will start.

On the other hand, if a "guaranteed cherry" is won during the production period (or may be during the increase period) after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus will be transferred. Although the "win (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "win (the current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the current game, it is announced that a "red 7" effect will be performed and a pseudo bonus will be started, and the pseudo bonus will be started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation is performed to display the "Middle Rip" symbol combination without displaying the "Confirmed Cherry Rip" symbol combination (including the "Cherry Rip" symbol combination). Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is given to the effect that the first right stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, the flow of the game was changed from displaying "confirmed cherry reply" to starting a pseudo bonus from the next game. After either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus starts from the current game → a stop operation is performed according to the special notification, and a game called "middle rep" is displayed. The flow will be changed to Note that the special notification may be performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and from the viewpoint that the player will not be disadvantaged even though it will shift to a pseudo bonus as a result. The control may be performed only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

In addition, if you win a "confirmed cherry" after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, and even though a special notification has been made, the "confirmed cherry" When the symbol combination “Cherry Rip” is displayed, no special winning sound is output.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure for the stop operation is not notified. For this reason, assuming that the stop operation procedure is announced and the "Middle Reply" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a situation occurs, one of the The player will clearly recognize that the semi-limit process has been activated, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any semi-limit process is activated (or it may be after the activation of any quasi-limit process), "F_Replay A" or When "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be made when the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is won. In addition, in this case, in the pseudo bonus transfer lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if it is configured such that "Win (current game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

Up to this point, we have explained using the example of monitoring the gaming period in the advantageous section using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" in order to activate the normal limit processing, special limit processing, and semi-limit processing. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when each limit process is executed, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter. The presence or absence of ceiling shortening (that is, the variable for activating the quasi-limit process), etc. can be changed as appropriate according to game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the gaming period of the advantageous section is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, if you use the "Navi count" to monitor the gaming period in the advantageous section, you can use normal limit processing (Navi count), special limit processing (Navi count), or semi-limit processing (Navi count) in the same way as above. (number of times) can also be executed. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be used to monitor the gaming period in the advantageous section, and the value at which limit processing is normally performed for the adopted element. By defining a value for which special limit processing is executed, and a value for which quasi-limit processing is executed, each limit process can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, performance section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is controlled for a predetermined period (for example, , the value of the number of advantageous section games counter is "1500" or more), or the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the number of advantageous section payout counters is "2401" or more). ), this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but if the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445") or above), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), If the vehicle is in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections are terminated when the vehicle transitions to a specific state.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections are not forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow as the advantageous condition ends. It is possible to do so. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, performance section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, advantageous section). When the value of the section game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more) When this happens, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but if the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more) , or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), an advantageous state If not, the system shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, the series of advantageous sections ends.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections are not forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow as the advantageous condition ends. It is possible to do so. Moreover, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if the condition is not advantageous, it is changed to an advantageous condition and then terminated. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the period during which an advantageous state can continue (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be awarded (for example, "275 coins"). Therefore, while giving due consideration to the emotions of the players, it is possible to prevent the amount of gaming value given to the players from being extremely restricted.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections is limited to a specific period. When the special period is shorter and is set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), Or, when the amount of gaming value awarded in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control payout counter is at the semi-limit) When the processing (number of payouts) reaches a value that is executed, the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, the player may be granted more rights than he or she can consume, and in such a situation, a series of advantageous sections will be forcibly terminated, causing the player to feel a sense of distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high while also considering the emotions of the players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," it is important to note that, for example, when the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount" are Even if there is a difference between the amount of gaming value that was originally awarded and the amount of gaming value that was actually awarded, the calculation is based on the amount of gaming value that was originally supposed to be awarded, without taking this difference into consideration. It is about to be done. As a result, the series of advantageous sections may be extended unnecessarily due to the actions of such players, and unfairness may arise between players who have committed such actions and players who have not. Since it is possible to prevent players from putting the game away, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high while also considering the emotions of the players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, a player wins a fixed combination (for example, a "fixed cherry") that is guaranteed to transition to an advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed (for example, a state after semi-limit processing is activated). When this happens, a special notification is made to prevent the display of special symbol combinations (for example, "confirmed cherry rip") that can clearly recognize the winning of this confirmed combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling, for example, that the winning of the confirmed winning combination was a useless winning. In other words, in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when an advantageous state has started, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, while also making the game more enjoyable. This makes it possible to consider people's feelings as well. Note that any effect execution means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is given, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to start from the next game starts from the current game. This allows the player to perform the stop operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even when such a special notification is issued. can.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed due to a winning combination, a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, when the granting of rights is suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed in a winning combination, it is not possible to make a special notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling, for example, that the winning of the confirmed winning combination was a useless winning. In other words, in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when an advantageous state has started, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, while also making the game more enjoyable. This makes it possible to consider people's feelings as well. Note that any performance execution means may be used to make the special notification.

In addition, the first gaming machine determines whether or not to make a special notification depending on whether or not a confirmed winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been made. I'm trying to decide. Thereby, the situation in which special notification is performed can be managed more appropriately.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter perform counting regardless of the amount of betted game value, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state, This allows normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) to be executed.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the 3-card bet state, but do not perform counting in the 2-card bet state. Therefore, in the 3-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed, but in the 2-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed. Processing (number of payouts) is not allowed to be executed. Therefore, in a two-card bet state, the series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during a pseudo bonus by executing the normal limit process (number of games) or the normal limit process (number of payouts).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, the winning probability of the small winning combination and the number of medals paid out are different between the 3-piece bet state and the 2-piece bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15), and the 3-piece bet state is different. The player is at a disadvantage when playing a game with two bets than when playing a game with . However, the method in which the player is disadvantaged when playing a game with two bets is not limited to this. For example, if a game is played with two bets during a pseudo bonus, the procedure for stopping the game may not be notified, thereby putting the player at a disadvantage.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a game is played with a first amount of gaming value (for example, "3 coins") being bet, a series of advantageous sections are forced in the middle of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period of time in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that On the other hand, if a second amount of gaming value (for example, "2 coins") is bet and a game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state. This makes it possible for the player to realize that he or she did not play the game using the intended gaming method, thereby encouraging the player to play the game using the intended gaming method.

Furthermore, in a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the second amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played than when the first amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played. Therefore, by making it possible to call attention to this, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous situation, and to prevent the player from playing the game in a way that is not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to this.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover combination storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, the configurations of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and symbol code storage area will be described. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the storage areas described above is composed of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by 1 byte of data. Although the data stored in each storage area is only 1-byte data in the "Data" column in FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, the symbol combinations associated with the bits in each storage area are shown in FIG. The "combinations" shown (in FIG. 17, the symbols on reel 3L, the symbols on reel 3C, and the symbols on reel 3R are described in this order) and their contents (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that corresponds to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in the current game). It is used to For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed combination (that is, the type of symbol combination displayed on the active line in the current game). used for For example, if a combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed on the active line in the current game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that can still be displayed on the active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is rotating. used for For example, in this game, when at least one of the reels is rotating, if the combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the active line, "1" is set in bit 0 of storage area 1. is stored.

(Carryover win storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the configuration of the carryover winning combination storage area will be explained. The carryover combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when a bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as an internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored in the carryover combination storage area as a carryover combination ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed on the active line. In addition, while the carryover winnings are stored in the carryover winnings storage area, the carryover winnings (bonus winnings) are stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winnings determined by the internal lottery process (minor winnings/replay winnings). be done.

(Game status flag storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the configuration of the gaming state flag storage area will be explained. The gaming state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, when the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Note that in the first gaming machine, since the RT state is not provided, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 is not provided with an area indicating the type of RT state. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. Note that in the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section is stored separately in a mode flag storage area, which will be described later. You can also. Further, the same applies to the game sections of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. It is possible to provide an advantageous section flag storage area (not shown) for management, or it is also possible to store and manage the game status flag in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and the ART state. It is possible to provide an AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) for management, or it is also possible to store and manage the game state flag in this gaming state flag storage area.

(mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Further, for example, if the current mode is Heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 21. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Furthermore, bits 0 to 2 of the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of stopped reel), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of reel being rotated).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the currently pressed stop button, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, it is a valid stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the press order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 22. The press order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Note that the pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, that is, the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the press order storage area. Next, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. will be stored. Next, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), "1" remains stored in bit 0, but "1" remains stored in bit 1. "0" is now stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order for the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be explained with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. In addition, in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing content may be explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing content of the various processes shown below is limited to this. It's not a thing.

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. FIG. 23 also shows power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, various processes necessary when the power is turned on are performed. Note that details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as a winning flag storage area or a winning activation flag storage area where data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, etc. are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal reception/start check process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs random value acquisition processing (S4). In this process, random numbers for internal lottery (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for performance (other random numbers for lottery) used in various kinds of lottery related to gameplay (for example, in the range of 0 to 65,535, or 0 to 255 range), etc., and the various extracted random numbers are stored in a random number storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the manner in which various random numbers are obtained is not limited to the above. The required number of random values can be obtained as appropriate from each predetermined numerical range (for example, the range 0 to 65535, the range 0 to 32767, the range 0 to 255, or the range 0 to 127, etc.). .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining an internal winning combination are performed based on an internal lottery table and random numbers for internal lottery depending on the current gaming state and the like. Note that details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game start state control processing (S6). In this process, for various game states, when a game starts, if a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination, etc.), the game state is transitioned according to the established transition condition. , or perform various processes necessary to manage the gaming period of the current gaming state. The details of the state control process at the start of the game will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs start command generation and storage processing (S7). In this process, data of a start command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in a communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32), which will be described later. Furthermore, the methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs main-side performance control processing at the start of the game (S8). In this process, when starting a game and performing various effects under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side), various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the start of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, for example, when the instruction monitor is in the AT state and informs information of a stop operation, the manner of the notification is controlled. Further, although the details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S9). In this process, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table used in the current game and the type of attraction priority table, is set based on the internal winning combination, the game state, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel rotation start processing (S10). This process requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32) described later, and the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 3C, 3R is controlled. Rotation begins. Each reel that has started rotating is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, although the details are omitted, in this process, a reel rotation start command generation and storage process is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an attraction priority order storage process (S11). In this process, the pull-in priority is determined for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reels (all reels in this case) by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority table. The data shown is acquired and stored in an attraction priority order data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, a symbol code storage process, which will be described later, is performed prior to this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R. Perform various processing necessary for this purpose. Note that details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is any combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Further, although the details are omitted, in this process, a winning activation command generation and storage process is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal payout/replay operation processing (S14). In this process, if the symbol combination determined in the winning operation determination process described above is a combination of symbols related to a small role, the corresponding number of medals will be paid out, and if it is a combination of symbols related to a replay role, the number of medals will be paid out for the next time. Performs various processes necessary to activate replay in a game. For example, if the symbol combination determined in the winning operation determination process described above is a symbol combination related to a replay combination, the same value as the number of bets in the current game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter described below. Perform the processing to do. Further, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game end state control process (S15). In this process, for each game state, when a game ends, if a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a combination of displayed symbols, etc.), the game state is transitioned according to the established transition condition. , or perform various processes necessary to manage the gaming period of the current gaming state. The details of the state control process at the end of the game will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs main side performance control processing at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side) when the game ends, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the end of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, although the details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-described processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the configuration may be such that processes other than these processes are performed as necessary, or the configuration may be configured such that some of these processes are not performed. That is, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on process performed in S1 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of power-on processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (not shown) upon power-on, then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the write to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally as a result of the test. S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally (S21: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the on state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the settings can be changed.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when changing settings (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a carryover combination storage area, a gaming state flag storage area, a mode flag storage area, or other storage area where data needs to be erased when changing settings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 has been started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, after the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation and setting value confirmation operation, new setting values are set (stored) in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. be done. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 is turned off (S26). That is, after a new setting value is set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the state in which settings can be changed has ended.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S26: YES), initialization command generation and storage processing is performed (S27). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 has been completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is cut off (at the time of power outage) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (S28: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S29). In this process, the pachi-slot machine 1 is returned to the state before the power cutoff. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), and if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), an error occurs when the power is turned on. Processing is performed (S30). It should be noted that the error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the above-mentioned reset operation, but is resolved in response to a new set value being set. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power of the pachi-slot machine 1, and thereafter operates normally until a new set value is set (until the above-mentioned processes S22 to S26 are performed). The process does not proceed (S2 and subsequent steps in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception/start check processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal reception/start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the medal reception/start check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay winning combination was won in the previous unit game (replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), the main CPU 101 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Further, although details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, medal insertion command generation and storage processing is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal input signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the process in S42, it performs a medal auxiliary storage switch check process (S43). In this process, it is determined whether the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is turned on (that is, whether a certain number or more of medals are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33), and the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is turned on. If it is determined that it is in the on state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, processing is put on hold until the error is resolved. Further, if it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the on state, this process is ended.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion state check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits are checked, and it is also determined whether acceptance of medals is prohibited or a selector error has occurred, and if it is possible to accept medals, the number of medals is Set the state to a state in which reception is possible (state in which bet operations can be received) (to permit reception of medals). Note that if a selector error has occurred, the process is on standby until the error is resolved.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to accept medals (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that medals can be accepted (S45: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the bet switch 6S. Further, although details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal input signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not medal insertion or credit is possible (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not possible to insert medals or credit (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (S49 is NO) , prohibits acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 is in a state where it is not possible to accept medals (a state where it is not possible to accept bet operations).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that it is not possible to accept medals (NO in S45), in S47 it determines that it is possible to insert medals or credit (YES in S47), After the process of S48, it is determined whether the number of inserted coins is the number of coins that can start playing (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of coins inserted is the number of coins that can be used to start the game (S49: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has performed a start operation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is turned on (S50: YES), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal reception/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of coins inserted is not the number that can start the game (NO in S49), and if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the on state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 performs processing. is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking the set value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the set value, the number of bets, the gaming state, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains an internal lottery random number value from the random number storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the internal lottery random number value acquired in S4 of the above-described main process. In addition, in this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred. Then, the above-mentioned power-on error process (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs internal winning combination determination processing (S64). In this process, the obtained internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (for example, by addition update) using the lottery value of each internal lottery combination specified in the internal lottery table that has been set, and the updated result becomes a predetermined result. (for example, overflowed). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of the current unit game. Note that if the predetermined result is not obtained even after determining all the internal winning combinations, the result of the current unit game will be a "loss" (a "loss" will be determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (S65 is NO), the process returns to S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (and sequentially updates the random numbers for internal lottery) until all internal winning combinations are determined (or if the internal winning combinations are determined midway through the process). (until it is determined) the process of S64 is repeated.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has been determined (S65 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover combination (that is, it is not a bonus combination that is a carryover combination, but is a small combination or a replay combination). It is determined whether or not it is a winning combination (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover winning combination (S66: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the winning flag storage area in the data corresponding to the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carryover winning combination (NO in S66), and after the processing in S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a carryover winning combination ( In other words, it is determined whether the winning combination is a carryover bonus winning combination (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carryover target combination (S68: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus combinations have not been carried over yet. If the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69 is YES), it updates the carryover combination storage area (S70). In this process, data in the carryover winning combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the processing of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the carryover combination storage area in the data corresponding to the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carryover winning combination (S68 is NO), then in S69 it determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (S69 is NO). ), and after the processing in S70, it is determined again whether the data in the carryover winning combination storage area is "0" (S71).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (S71: NO), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when the bonus combination has been carried over (or won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores data corresponding to the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed in correspondence with the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. ``1'' is stored in the bit.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S71 is YES), and after the process in S72, it performs a sub-flag etc. setting process (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous section sub-flag and an advantageous section winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. Note that in this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to information on a stop operation notified by the instruction monitor may be set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from any gaming state to any gaming state are satisfied. For example, when shifting to a flag as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus combination, it is checked in this process whether or not the predetermined bonus combination has been won. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, since the space between the flags is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a gaming state stored in the gaming state flag storage area), there is no need to check here. Further, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific number of games are played after the establishment of a specific transition condition, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S82). If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S82 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S84). In this process, depending on the transition of the gaming state, for example, it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In such cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition conditions for transitioning to any gaming state are not satisfied (NO in S82), and after the processing in S84, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether there is one (S85). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S85: YES), it performs a process of checking whether the start condition for an advantageous section is established (S86). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (starting conditions for an advantageous section) are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not this lottery result is the one that starts the advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are not satisfied (NO in S87), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (S87: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous section. In this process, in response to the start of an advantageous section, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes start counting (that is, start monitoring the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections), etc. Perform the setting process as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) during the started advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S90). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, in accordance with the set destination mode, when transitioning to a pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the gaming period, and the game transitions to the end mode. In this case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and in the case of transitioning to other modes, the corresponding number of ceiling games is set. In addition, lottery values (lottery table) for various types of lottery (see FIGS. 7 and 8, etc.) are set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S85: NO), it performs processing at the start of a game during an advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check whether the advantageous section end condition is met (S92). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (conditions for ending the advantageous section) are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the operating conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode. In this step, it is checked whether 32 games have elapsed or not.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S93). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S93: YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets a non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous period, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (playing state) during the advantageous period, and the playing period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) are displayed. Initialization processing is performed to clear all information related to (including information on advantageous sections) etc. (that is, information related to advantageous sections). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition for the advantageous section is not satisfied (S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the advantageous section game start process performed in S91 of the game start state control process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of games during the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the gaming period such as various modes (playing states) during the advantageous period, or other counters are used. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtraction (addition) by 1 for each game, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S102). If the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S102), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the playing period in the AT state (for example, by extending the number of games or adding the number of sets) at the start of the game, it is determined whether the execution conditions for such an extension are satisfied or not. Based on the result of this determination, processing such as extending the gaming period is performed (if it is possible to shorten the playing period in the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state gaming period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the AT state gaming period is managed in the process of S101 described above, and this process only deals with the extension. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. Processing is performed for this purpose.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs navigation setting processing (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command, etc. are set. Note that in this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. In other words, when the notification target winning combination is won in the AT state, navigation may not necessarily occur. The determination may be made according to the probability of occurrence).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S102), and after S104, the main CPU 101 determines whether a mode transition condition is satisfied (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the destination mode has been determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the advantageous section to which the mode has been transferred. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode is set, which is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a process similar to the process of S90 described above is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the start of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S105), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

The state control process at the start of the game shown in FIG. 27, the state control process at the end of the game shown in FIG. 30, the process at the start of the game during the advantageous period shown in FIG. 28, and the process at the end of the game during the advantageous period shown in FIG. Basically, they have almost the same processing configuration. This process may be performed either when the game starts or when the game ends (for example, a process that refers to the determined internal winning combination, such as changing the game state or mode, etc.) Processing where the processing result only needs to be reflected until the end of the current game (or until the start of the next game) means that it only needs to be performed in either one, and the same applies to both. This does not mean that the processing is performed redundantly. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game starts or when the game ends.

On the other hand, processing that needs to be performed when starting a game (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting process, etc.) shall be performed when starting the game, and when the game ends. Processing that needs to be performed (for example, processing that refers to the combination of displayed symbols) may be performed when the game ends. Also, for example, there are cases where processing needs to be performed at a predetermined time after the start of the game and before the end of the game, or cases where it is better to perform the process (for example, a process that refers to the stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) may be carried out at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotational speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rotations/minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until all the reels are rotating at a constant speed. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (S111: YES), each reel is allowed to stop (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Additionally, the operation stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until a valid stop button is operated. In addition, when performing automatic stop control, the standby time can be measured and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the bits in the operation stop button storage area are "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Further, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle region of the reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs sliding piece number determination processing (S117). In this process, for example, the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (symbol movement amount) is determined by referring to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table, the data in the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the scheduled stop position from the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the symbol position data of the position where the symbol will finally stop based on the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above is stored as the planned stop position. .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop command generation and storage processing (S119). In this process, data for a reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can include parameters that can specify not only the scheduled stop position but also the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs symbol code storage processing (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether there are any reels that are still rotating (whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

If the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), it performs control change processing (S122). In this process, depending on the player's stop operation mode up to this point, for example, if it is necessary to change the stop table, attraction priority table, etc. set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process, such changes may be made. Reset various information necessary for stop control.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an attraction priority order storage process (S123). In this process, each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reels is set as the set internal winning combination while also referring to the type of symbol at the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. The data indicating the attraction priority is obtained by referring to the attraction priority order table, and is stored in the attraction priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(Status control process at game end)
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from any gaming state to any gaming state are satisfied. For example, when transitioning to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, a check is performed in this process to see if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked in this process whether or not the termination conditions for these gaming states are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is checked whether a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S132). If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S132 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming status flag storage area, and Set state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, if the termination conditions of these gaming states are satisfied, bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, depending on the transition of the gaming state, for example, it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In such cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "1", and even if the 3BB state is set, the number of payouts is set to "1". For example, "176" is set as the number of payouts as the end condition.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is not satisfied (S132 is NO), and after the processing in S134, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether there is one (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S135: YES), it performs a process of checking whether the conditions for starting the advantageous section are established (S136). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S86 (game start state control process) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the starting conditions for the advantageous section are not satisfied (S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs a setting process for starting the advantageous section (S138). Note that, as described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S88 (game start state control process) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) during the started advantageous section. Note that, as described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S89 described above (game start state control process).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. As mentioned above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S90 (game start state control process) described above.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S135: NO), it performs processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking whether conditions for ending the advantageous section are met (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (end conditions for an advantageous section) are satisfied. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the operating conditions of various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of payouts during the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode. In this step, it is checked whether 32 games have elapsed or not.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S143). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met (S143: YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets a non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous period, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (playing state) during the advantageous period, and the playing period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) are displayed. Initialization processing is performed to clear all information related to (including information on advantageous sections) etc. (that is, information related to advantageous sections). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied (S143: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section performed in S141 of the above-mentioned state control processing at the end of the game will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of payouts during an advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing gaming periods such as various modes (gaming states) during an advantageous period, or other counters are used. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S152). If the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (S152: YES), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the AT state playing period (for example, by extending the number of games or adding the number of sets) at the end of the game, it is determined whether the execution conditions for such an extension are satisfied or not. Based on the result of this determination, processing such as extending the gaming period is performed (if it is possible to shorten the playing period in the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state gaming period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the AT state gaming period is managed in the process of S151 described above, and this process only deals with the extension. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, and a process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the result of this lottery.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (S152 is NO), and after S153, the main CPU 101 determines whether mode transition conditions are satisfied (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the destination mode has been determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the advantageous section to which the mode has been transferred. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode is set, which is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a process similar to the process of S140 described above is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the end of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S154 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of periodic interrupt processing.

Here, in this embodiment, the period of periodic interrupt processing (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the cycle of periodic interrupt processing is not limited to this. For example, periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the interrupt processing may actually be executed for some or all of the processing. By setting the number of interrupts to "2" or more, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a different cycle as a result.

First, the main CPU 101 performs register saving processing (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S202). In this process, the input states (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt and the input state at the time of the current interrupt are compared to check whether there has been a change in the input state, and if there is a change in the input state, the input state of the main RAM 103 is The change is stored in port storage area 0 (not shown), and input states that are not related to the change are stored as they are in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). In this process, the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled, and the rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled. Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. In this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 is sent to the sub control circuit 200 as an input status command.

Note that in this embodiment, various command data are once stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in periodic interrupt processing. It may be configured such that the information is not stored but is directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in this embodiment, although detailed explanation is omitted, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by serial communication. For example, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by parallel communication. It may also be configured such that the information is sent to

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door opening/closing check process (S208). In this process, for example, the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. Note that when various error states occur and when the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by sub control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the outline of the sub-side control process.

In addition, in the Pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modification. There are not many restrictions on the 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can be used in various ways depending on the type and number of effect devices to be connected, the type of effect performed by the effect devices, and the manufacturing cost. configuration can be used. That is why it is labeled as "Summary" in FIG. 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs power-on processing similarly to the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). This process detects whether an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializes the data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and performs various tasks necessary to perform various production execution control processes described below. Processing such as starting up is performed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it performs a production execution control process upon command reception (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if settings have been changed, initialization processing is executed on the sub side as appropriate, and the settings must be changed. If so, processing is also executed on the sub side to restore the state to the state before the power cut.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if it is in a non-AT state, the content of the production that suggests or informs internal winning combinations, gaming status, etc. (as necessary) (by lottery), and controls various production devices so that the production of the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if it is in the AT state, in addition to this, it determines the content of the performance to notify the advantageous stop operation mode, and controls various performance devices so that the performance of the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, it refers to the parameter information of the received lock command, determines the content of the performance that is linked to the content of the lock performance, and creates various performances so that the determined content is executed. Control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to and linked with the stop start position and planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) The content of the performance is determined and various performance devices are controlled so that the performance of the determined content is executed. For example, when a winning activation command is received, the information on the parameters of the received winning activation command is referred to, and when a bonus is awarded, the content of the performance that is linked to the bonus to be awarded is determined, and the determined content is The various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation is performed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74), and for example, when the production buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the sub-CPU 201 executes production when the production button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when a performance button corresponding to the performance is operated during execution of the operation-linked performance, various performance devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked performance changes. Further, for example, when a presentation button is operated to call up a user menu, which will be described later, while not playing a game, control is performed to display the user menu. Further, when a presentation button is operated for selection/decision operation while the user menu is displayed, control is performed in accordance with these operations.

Further, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger is established, the sub CPU 201 performs other production execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, if the non-operation period in which no operation related to the game or user menu is performed is a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demonstration status notification is determined and determined. The various performance devices are controlled so that the performance of the content is executed.

[8. Other functions of pachislot machines]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is equipped with various functions for controlling games, various functions for controlling performances, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have functions. Note that an example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the game parlor side will be described below.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's performance operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and the appropriate selection/decision operation is performed for the selected menu, the player can obtain various information. , it is possible to make various settings.

For example, if "Arrangement/Payout Table" is selected/determined, it is possible to confirm the symbol arrangement in the Pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the game information showing the payout (contents of benefits) when winning the prize. The following information screen is displayed on the performance display section.

For example, when "volume/light intensity adjustment" is selected/determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, the light intensity of the lamp/LED group, etc. are set. A possible setting screen is displayed on the performance display section. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

For example, when "Custom" is selected/determined, the production mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the production, the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character, etc.) or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of production occurrence (including the type of expectation when the production occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (production execution timing) etc.) A setting screen is displayed on the effect display section where the settings can be made. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

Further, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected/determined, it is possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone, a smartphone, etc.). In such information providing services, for example, a player logs in to start a game (it is also possible to start a game without logging in), and when the game ends, logs out, thereby providing gaming history information (e.g. , the total number of games played, how many times an advantageous game state occurred, the maximum number of coins acquired, and other information corresponding to the results of various games) can be confirmed or obtained.

For example, the game history information may include information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during the game and the types of music that can be output, depending on the game result (the fulfillment of the opening condition), It also includes information about accompanying benefits, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of songs that can be output.

Note that various methods can be used for logging in and logging out in such an information providing service. For example, using the player's terminal, the player may be able to log in and log out by having the player read a two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display section, or the player may enter a password. (Specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, instead of a two-dimensional code, a string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for next input, and The password can be obtained by the player writing it down on paper or taking a photo with a mobile device, etc., and the password obtained in this way can be entered when logging in before the next game starts). - You may be able to log out. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform login and logout by appropriately combining these methods.

[8-2. Game store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (this may be a setting change operation or other operation by the game hall administrator) by the game parlor administrator, and the desired menu is selected from the hall menu. Further, when the selected menu is appropriately selected/determined, the game parlor manager can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen on which the date and time of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed on the production display section. Note that the date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the above-described sub-side power-on process (see S302 in FIG. 33).

For example, when "total medal information" is selected and determined, history information indicating the number of coins inserted and number of coins paid out within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of seven business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the performance display section. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu.

For example, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected/determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations in the pachislot machine 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days), etc. An information screen is displayed on the effect display section where history information indicating the information can be confirmed. For example, if "error information history" is selected/determined, history information indicating the date and time of error occurrence and its contents within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of 7 business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is also provided. An information screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows confirmation of the information.

For example, if "monitoring history" is selected/determined, history information indicating the date and time the door was opened within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of 7 business days), the period, etc. of the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the performance display section. Further, for example, when "warning setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows setting of the mode, frequency, etc. of various warning notifications in the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, for example, when "power saving mode setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

Further, for example, when "stop-stop setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the stop-stop function in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that the discontinuation function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, disables the game until a cancellation operation (for example, a reset operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be established, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increased section, or an advantageous section). It may be made to be established when any of the sections (including the performance section) ends. Moreover, when the cancellation function is set to the ON state, an automatic payment function, which will be described later, may also be set to the ON state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when "automatic payment setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the automatic payment function in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that the automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (that is, all credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is met. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be established, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increased section, or an advantageous section). It may be made to be established when any of the sections (including the performance section) ends. Moreover, when the automatic payment function is set to the ON state, the above-mentioned cancellation function may also be set to the ON state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the cancellation function or automatic payment function, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to settings, various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations are provided. can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (that is, the operation unit that accepts production operations). However, in this case, it is also undesirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, so only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the setting. It may be possible to do so.

[9. Expansion example]
Up to this point, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as so-called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines," and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to any gaming machine that is capable of playing a game (performing game control) in accordance with a player's gaming action (operation). Further, the configuration and functions of the gaming machine including the pachi-slot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and expansions are possible. An example of such expansion will be described below, although it is just an example.

(pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine includes, for example, a game board having a game area where game balls can roll and fall, a glass door including a protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, and an effect display device provided in a predetermined area of the game area. (It may be provided outside the gaming area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit that includes various control boards that perform various controls related to games and performances, and these are connected to the frame ( (sometimes simply referred to as a "frame" etc.).

In addition, on the front side of the pachinko machine, for example, there is a firing handle as one of the player's operating means, an upper tray that can store game balls to be used in the game, and a lower tray that can store the game balls that are put out. etc. are provided. Note that many of them are provided with the above-mentioned presentation buttons and movable presentation devices. In addition, the gaming area includes, for example, a starting area (sometimes referred to as a "starting hole" etc.) through which a game ball can pass, a specific area (sometimes referred to as a "V winning hole" etc.), A variable winning device (sometimes referred to as a "big winning hole" etc.) that can change between a state in which it is easy for game balls to win a prize and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize, and identification information (also referred to as a "design" etc.). In some cases, a variable display device or the like is provided that can variably display ``special symbols'' and ``normal symbols''.

In the pachinko machine, a player plays a game by operating a firing handle and firing a game ball into a gaming area. For example, when the fired game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display starts. In addition, at this time, whether or not to transition the gaming state with a probability depending on the current state (for example, whether it is a variable gaming state with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area, etc. It is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot gaming state or a small winning gaming state that is advantageous to the player (in other words, it is determined (or determined) whether or not to shift the gaming state). Thereafter, when a condition for stopping the variable display (for example, the set variable time has ended) is satisfied, the variable display is stopped in a stopping manner according to the above determination result. At this time, if the above-determined result is to shift the gaming state (win), the stopping mode to be stopped will also be the display result corresponding to the win, and the corresponding display result will correspond to the win. Shift to the gaming state. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned determination result does not cause the game state to shift (miss), the stopping mode to be stopped also becomes a display result corresponding to the shift, and the game state does not shift. For example, when a fired game ball passes through a specific area (the specific area is often in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), the game state is displayed regardless of the variable display device. It is decided to migrate.

That is, in the Pachislot machine 1, the game is started when the player bets the necessary medals and performs a start operation, whereas in the Pachinko machine, the game is started when the player operates the handle to fire the necessary game balls. Although they differ in that, for example, the game is started when the game ball passes through the starting area, they both have the same point that the game is started by the player's game action. Furthermore, the pachislot machine 1 and the pachinko machine have in common that the stop mode in which display is finally permitted (in other words, the content of the privilege to be granted) is determined when the start opportunity is established. .

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, the variable display is basically stopped by the player's stop operation, whereas in the pachinko machine, the variable display is stopped by the satisfaction of the stop condition (not by the player's stop operation). Although they are different in that the variable display is stopped, they both have the same feature in that the variable display is stopped according to a predetermined result and a benefit is given according to the stopping mode. Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 1 and the pachinko machine have in common that they can perform performances related to games. For example, the effect display device functions as the above-described effect display section or information display section. Furthermore, it goes without saying that the pachinko machine may also be provided with performance execution means such as the above-mentioned lamps, speakers, or other performance devices, and the performance may be performed using these.

Note that in many pachinko machines, decorative patterns (which may also be referred to as "identification information" or the like) are displayed in a variable manner in the effect display device. As mentioned above, the original game results are displayed on the variable display device, but the variable display device is configured to be small, and the display results are also displayed in a lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs. Therefore, in many cases, it is difficult for players to recognize game results. For this reason, in most pachinko machines, the game is played by displaying decorative symbols in a variable manner (and in a static manner) on the effect display device in conjunction with the variable display of the variable display device. . In addition, such a fluctuating display of a decorative pattern may be performed (for production purposes, the fluctuating display may be started after a certain period of delay when a start opportunity is established, or may be temporarily stopped before a stop condition is met). Basically, similar to the above-mentioned variable table device, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner or in a stopped manner as the game progresses. ), and in the case of a miss, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a non-special stopping mode (for example, a random pattern). Therefore, this is considered to be one mode of the variable display section mentioned above. It is also possible to apply the invention according to the embodiment.

That is, in this embodiment, the various items described as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 are those that have characteristics unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that require medals and cannot be replaced with game balls, etc.) ) can be applied to the external structure or internal structure of a pachinko machine.

In addition, in pachinko machines, various controls related to games are performed by a main control circuit as a game control unit mounted on the main control board (partly, control related to payout is performed by a main control circuit that is electrically connected to the main control board). Various controls related to production are performed by a sub-control circuit as a production control section mounted on a sub-control board, so The various items described as the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be applied as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, except for those that have characteristics unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, those related to stop operations).

In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, as described above, the gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration) include the bonus state, RT state, AT state, It is possible to provide an ART state or the like that combines these. For example, in the bonus state, by making the lottery mode of the minor role more advantageous than in the non-bonus state, it is possible to continue a state in which medals are easily awarded (increase) for a certain period of time, and in the RT state, the lottery mode of the minor role is made more advantageous than in the non-bonus state. By making the lottery mode more advantageous than the non-RT state, it is possible to maintain a state in which winnings are less likely to occur (as a result, medals are less likely to decrease), and in the AT state, the more advantageous stop operation mode is By being notified, it is possible to continue a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increase) for a certain period of time.

On the other hand, pachinko machines can also be provided with various game states having similar characteristics. For example, in a jackpot game state or a small win game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently than usual, so that the game ball can be changed to a state where it is easy to win, and thereby the game ball is awarded. This makes it possible to continue a state of easy (increasing) for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a time-saving gaming state (sometimes referred to as an "electrical support state", etc.), a different control than usual is performed on the normal symbols to make it easier for the game ball to pass through the starting area. This makes it possible to increase the lottery frequency by the variable display device and to maintain a state in which the number of game balls is difficult to decrease for a certain period of time. Further, for example, in a variable probability game state, special symbols are controlled differently than usual, so that a state in which the probability of winning by the variable display device increases (as a result, the number of game balls is likely to increase) continues for a certain period of time. is possible.

That is, in this embodiment, various matters explained as the configuration of control regarding the transition (or transition) of the game state as the gameplay of the pachi-slot machine 1 are those that have characteristics unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the It can be applied as a control configuration regarding the transition (or transition) of the gaming state of a pachinko machine, except for those that involve transition, etc.). Further, the same applies to various other matters described as the game performance of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Although this is a time-saving gaming state, pachinko machines can also shift to a time-saving gaming state when the number of games played during the non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) reaches a specified number of times. There is. That is, even in a pachinko machine, if a ceiling function (unfavorable state (e.g., normal gaming state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without shifting to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state), The various matters described as the configuration of the ceiling function of the pachislot machine 1 are the configuration of the ceiling function of the pachinko machine. It can be applied as

In addition, although it is a time-saving gaming state, even in a pachinko machine, if the stop mode of the variable display device becomes a display result corresponding to a specific loss during a non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state), It is possible to use this as an opportunity to shift to a time-saving gaming state. In other words, even in pachinko machines, it is possible to transition (transition) the gaming state by displaying a specific display result (a specific combination of symbols) (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot gaming state, etc.). , the various matters described as a configuration regarding the transition (transition) of the RT state due to the display of a specific combination of symbols of the pachislot machine 1 are described as the configuration regarding the transition (transition) of the time-saving gaming state due to the display of a specific display result of the pachinko machine. Can be applied.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's bet operation (that is, the operation of inserting the medals in hand into the medal slot 5 and placing a bet, or placing the credited medals on the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button) The game is started with one of the starting conditions being that there is an operation (operating 6b to place a bet), and if there is a payout of medals when the game ends, the hopper device 32 is driven and the medal payout port 11 is activated. Although the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, this embodiment applies to all formats in which a player bets the gaming value necessary for a game, plays a game based on the bet, and is awarded a benefit (for example, a gaming value is awarded) based on the result of the game. It is possible to apply the invention according to the above. In other words, in addition to physically inserting (spending) and paying out medals through the player's actions, the game value held by the player is managed electromagnetically within the Pachislot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, it is also possible to manage the game value in a manner that does not allow the player to directly contact the game value, and to enable games without medals. Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine." Note that medalless gaming machines are sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines", "enclosed gaming machines", etc.

Note that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player, or it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) that is attached to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may also be a (connected) gaming value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal number control board"). An example in which this gaming value management device is provided will be explained below.

The gaming value management device is a device that includes at least ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the pachislot machine 1, and is a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device will be referred to as a "connection terminal board"). It is connected to an external gaming value providing device (hereinafter, such a gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") via an external gaming value providing device (such as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication. The gaming value management device performs the gaming value lending operation (i.e., provides the gaming value necessary for the player to perform the gaming value betting operation) by performing the necessary communication with the external gaming value providing device. (i.e., the action of providing the player with the gaming value related to the award when the winning role is won (the winning combination is established), etc.); The player shall be able to perform actions such as electromagnetically recording the gaming value provided by the action. Note that the gaming value providing device is sometimes referred to as a "gaming value (gaming media) handling device," "gaming value (gaming media) lending device," or "sand."

In addition, the external gaming value providing device is connected to an external ball output management device (ball output management server), and the gaming value management device communicates with the external ball output management device through communication devices and external gaming value management devices. It is configured to be able to transmit ball release management information via the providing device. Here, the put-out ball management information is composed of various kinds of information necessary for an external ball-out management device to manage the put-out balls. Note that an example of the ball release management information will be described later. Furthermore, the external gaming value providing device and the external ball payout management device are connected, for example, via an Internet line.

Here, the term "balls paid out" directly means the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, for example, the term "balls paid out" refers to the difference number (net increase) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number paid out. The extent to which benefits are given to players (for example, how much the player has gained (how much has the game store lost), or how much has the player lost (how much has the game store gained)? The concept also includes the degree of continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling expected by a combination of these.

Further, for example, a possessed gaming value number display device (not shown) is provided on the front side of the Pachislot machine 1 to display the number of held gaming values, and the gaming value management device is configured to control the number of game values based on the management result of the number of gaming values held. The number of game values displayed on the held game value number display device of the lever may be managed. That is, the gaming value management device may be configured to not only record the total number of gaming values that a player can use for gaming using an electromagnetic method, but also to be able to control the display of the recorded results. . In this case, the gaming value management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming values to the external gaming value providing device, and also allows the player to It has the ability to not reduce the number of recorded game values except when directly operated, and the signal indicating the number of recorded game values can only be transmitted through a communication device. is desirable.

Note that the gaming value management device not only has the function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of a player using an external gaming value providing device, but also controls the number of gaming values bet based on the player's physical movements and the number of gaming values bet by the player's physical movements. The player may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical action of the player. That is, it may also be possible to manage the actual insertion and payout of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method or by a method such as the medalless game machine described above, so no matter which specification the pachi-slot machine 1 has. Even if there is a common configuration, it is possible to have a common configuration. Further, in this case, it is possible to adopt a method in which the gaming value management device directly controls the above-mentioned selector 31 and hopper device 32, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71), It is also possible to adopt a method of indirect control by transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a rental operating means and a return (payment) operating means, which can be operated by a player. In addition, the gaming value providing device includes various devices such as an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (for example, an IC card), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operating means necessary for the operation of the medalless gaming machine, such as a loan operating means and a return operating means, which can be operated by a player may be provided (none of which are shown). Note that the insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued on the day at the gaming parlor, but also member recording media owned by members of the gaming parlor. The gaming value recorded on the non-member recording medium is valid only on that day (invalid after the next day), but the gaming value recorded on the member recording medium is valid even after the next day.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be explained. For example, first, the player deposits value into the gaming value providing device using any method. The gaming value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of negotiable values in response to a player's operation on any of the lending operation means, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with a gaming value corresponding to the subtracted negotiable value. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operations if more gaming value is required. Thereafter, when the player ends the game after acquiring a predetermined number of game values based on the result of the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The gaming value management device transmits the number of gaming values to the gaming value providing device in response to the player's operation on any of the return operation means. The game value providing device discharges the recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. The gaming value management device clears the number of gaming values stored in itself when transmitting the number of gaming values. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange place or the like in order to exchange it for a prize, or the player can take the ejected recording medium to a gaming value providing device compatible with other Pachislot machines 1. By inserting it, you can move the machine and continue playing. Further, if the ejected recording medium is a member recording medium, it is valid even after the next day, so the game can be stopped at this point.

Note that in the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. It may be configured such that only the number of game values desired by the player can be transmitted. That is, the game value held by the player may be divided. In addition, the gaming value providing device records the transmitted gaming value number on a recording medium and outputs it, but it uses the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna etc. to send the same value to the player's mobile terminal. For example, cash or cash equivalent may be sent as long as it provides the player with something of equal value.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device is provided with a lock operating means that can be operated by the player, and communication between the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device is disabled depending on the operation of the lock operating means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the Pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device, for example, setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication. The lock state may be released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, for example, some external structures such as the medal slot 5 and the medal payout slot 11, or the selector 31, etc. Since it is not necessary to provide some internal structures such as the hopper device 32, it is possible to reduce not only the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine but also the power consumption of the game machine. Furthermore, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent acts against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of medalless gaming machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example in which the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. Note that, below, a configuration example in which a medal number control board (gaming value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (number of gaming values) held by the player. Further, the medal number control board is connected to a communication dedicated unit (gaming value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits ball payout management information to the ball payout management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Further, a medal number control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal number control board. Further, the medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The ball output management device is, for example, a server for ball output management managed by an association (an information center) to which gaming machine manufacturers are members, and the transmitted ball output management information is stored in the ball output management device. This is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling performance of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball output performance).

Therefore, from this point of view, since the medal number control board and the connection terminal board play important functions in the pachislot machine 1 like the main control board 71, they should be designed in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. It needs to be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show examples of such aspects.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case like the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing treatments to make it difficult to open (or remove) or to make it possible to recognize traces of it being opened (or the number of times it has been opened). (For example, sealing by caulking, pasting of a seal seal, or pasting of a caulking sticker that records the cutting of the caulk, etc.)

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modification can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration example 2>
In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, unlike configuration example 1 described above, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal number control board case provided separately from the main control board case. It shows that there is. The medal number control board case shall be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, and the medal number control board and connection terminals housed inside the case. The board shall be stored so that it is easily visible.

Here, the medal number control board case of configuration example 2 may be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or may be configured to undergo at least a part of the sealing process. You can also do that. For example, the medal number control board case may be sealed by caulking in the same way as the main control board case, but a sealing sticker may not be attached. Further, for example, in the main control board case, it is mandatory to use a predetermined caulking seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the caulking seal.

<Example of stored data>
The example of accumulated data shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data accumulated in the ball output management device. That is, the medal number control board shows an example of the ball output management information transmitted to the ball output management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Note that this is just an example, and a configuration may be adopted in which some of the various information shown in FIG. 34 is not transmitted, or a configuration in which information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34 is transmitted. You can also do it.

Moreover, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-only unit is also arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball output management device is also arbitrary. The information may be transmitted at any timing as long as the ball output management device can monitor the ball output performance of each gaming machine on at least one unit (for example, one business day at a game parlor). . For example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball output management device. Further, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication dedicated unit may be different depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of coins inserted" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of game values bet by the player's bet operation to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, every unit game), excluding the number bet by the replay operation. The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "total number of coins to be paid out" is the cumulative number of coins to be paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of game values awarded through payout processing of a gaming machine, excluding those awarded through replay operations, to a communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, every unit game). The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum number of difference in the number of coins that occurred during one unit after the power was turned on for each gaming machine (in short, the number of difference in the number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most in one unit. (referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum difference in the number of medals, and transmits the calculated information to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours at the game parlor), and the communication-only unit transmits the information. is transmitted to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "Total number of coins paid out for accessories" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of coins paid out during the operation of various accessory products. . For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of various accessories at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of various accessories). The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the game parlor).

The accumulated data "Total number of consecutive paid out coins" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. This is the cumulative number of coins paid out during operation. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of a continuous accessory) of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of a gaming machine during the operation of a continuous accessory. The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the game parlor).

Further, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the winning ratio monitoring device 54 to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation in the winning ratio monitoring device 54), and the communication-only unit The information is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal number control board). In addition, the accumulated data "accessory object ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned accessory ratio information, the accumulated data "continuous accessory ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "advantageous object ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, for example. For example, the "section ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "instruction accessory ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned accessory ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even during the AT state. The accumulated data "status ratio of accessories, etc." corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even when various accessories are in operation.

The accumulated data "number of games" is the cumulative number of games played per unit after each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played to a communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of the information at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game). For example, the information is transmitted to the ball payout management device at the end of business hours at the game parlor.

The accumulated data "main control chip ID number" is an individual identification number (also referred to as "CPUID", also referred to as "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the individual identification number. Send information including this individual identification number.

The accumulated data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the manufacturer code. Send information including manufacturer code.

The accumulated data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the product code. Submit information including product code.

The accumulated data "medal number control chip ID number" is an individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the individual identification number. Send information including this individual identification number. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the manufacturer code. Send information including manufacturer code. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the product code. Submit information including product code. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

In this way, the ball output management device is capable of accumulating various types of information (ball output management information) transmitted from gaming machines. Further, the ball output management information includes a plurality of individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal number control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball output management device can identify the gaming machine that is the sender based on these pieces of individual identification information, and also, for example, from a certain point on, the "main control chip ID number" and "medal number control chip ID number" If the correspondence relationships between the two control boards become different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been carried out).

Further, the ball output management information includes a plurality of pieces of ball output information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of inserted coins" to "number of games played") that can identify the ball output performance per unit. Therefore, the ball output management device can recognize whether the gambling quality of the sending gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on the ball output information. For example, if the ``total number of coins paid out'' or ``instruction included accessory ratio'' becomes extremely high after a certain point, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been carried out, or there is some flaw in the original specification design. It is possible to recognize the possibility that something has happened.

If the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the ball payout management device, the result will be notified to the game parlor or the game machine manufacturer, and it can be expected that appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, a plurality of managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication dedicated unit) that transmits the ball output management information transmitted from the managed gaming machines to the ball output management device, and each By constructing a management system that includes a ball output management device that manages the ball output performance of the managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of gaming values held by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal number control board may be provided with a medal number monitoring device (not shown) so that the manager of the game parlor can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitoring device is composed of, for example, a four-digit, seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitoring device collects and calculates various types of information (for example, part or all of the above-mentioned ball output management information) regarding the number of gaming values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. Incidentally, if all the display contents of the winning ratio monitoring device 54 are displayed by the medal number monitoring device, the winning ratio monitoring device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may also be used as a medal number monitor device.

Further, the medal number monitoring device may be mounted on the medal number control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal number control board. Good too. Further, as long as it is within the cabinet G, it may be provided at another location. For example, it may be provided on the medal number control board case. Furthermore, a management switch for starting the display on the medal number monitoring device or for switching its contents may be provided in the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Furthermore, on the premise that such a management switch is used, the information display device 14 may also be used as a medal number monitoring device, for example.

Note that the medal number monitoring device may display the type of error state that has occurred when various error states related to itself occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, a communication error with the connection terminal board, a communication error with the gaming value providing device, or an abnormality occurs in the medal number control RWM. In certain cases, a corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, in order for the game parlor manager to easily recognize which error condition the displayed value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is displayed on or near the medal number control board case. What is necessary is to provide an explanatory section (such as pasting a sticker or printing) to show the information.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit ball output management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. In this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is additionally provided for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. This not only makes it possible to reduce the number of parts, but also reduces wiring directed to the outside, thereby increasing the security effect.

Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged close to each other at least in the cabinet G. Thereby, work efficiency during connection can be improved. Further, since the length of the wiring can be made constant and the wiring locations can be limited, the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the ball payout management information is transmitted to the ball payout management device. Further, the ball output management device can appropriately manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine based on the transmitted ball output management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball dispensing performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-described limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain restriction condition.

Alternatively, the medal number control board may be provided with a function to appropriately manage the ball output performance, and on the premise that the ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. . That is, it may not have a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain restriction condition.

For example, the medal number control board is configured to include a payout monitoring RWM (which may be the above-mentioned medal number control RWM or another RWM). The ball payout monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but monitors the ball payout in such a way that it is not initialized when the advantageous section ends. If the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the advantageous section itself will not be forcibly terminated, but the probability of navigation occurrence will be reduced, the probability that the AT state will be extended, etc. Alternatively, the AT state itself may be terminated to reduce the ball dispensing performance. Even in this case, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball dispensing performance. In addition, in this case, such a control result may be transmitted to the ball release management device as ball release management information. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which both the medal number control board and the ball output management device can manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of main control board of pachislot machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. Note that, below, a configuration example for reusing the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, in the Pachislot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board management number must be printed on the main control board 71. It has become. The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the management number is a number for identifying the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer's name and board management number are printed in letters on the main control board 71 as in the conventional case. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, it is assumed that a pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Corporation. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" at the bottom are printed. Thereafter, if Model A is removed from the game parlor and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different Pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "Model B"), then AA Co., Ltd. AA laser-engraved the manufacturer's name and board management number printed on the lower row, and in a different space wrote the manufacturer's manufacturing number and board management number related to the company (for example, the manufacturer's name and board management number on the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35). The name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board control number "AA-00-11-22" must be newly printed.

Then, after that, model B is removed from the game parlor, and if, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. would have to use laser engraving to delete the manufacturer's name and board management number that had been printed on the top row, and then print a new manufacturing number and board management number related to the company in a different space. However, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, there is no more free space, so even though reuse is still possible in terms of hardware, it is difficult to reuse the main control board 71 due to the above-mentioned restrictions. The problem was that sometimes it was not possible.

Note that this also applies even if multiple manufacturer names and board management numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and board management number for both AA Corporation and BB Corporation are printed in advance, the serial number and board management number for AA Corporation are laser engraved at the time of manufacturing model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although BB Co., Ltd. may be able to reuse the product, AA Co., Ltd. may not be able to reuse it. On the other hand, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 can be expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. That is, it is possible to improve the reusability of a board used for controlling a game, such as the main control board 71.

<Configuration example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 shows printing of a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number, but JAN code (bar code) and other The following code can be used. In other words, the code can be any type of code as long as it contains information that allows the confirming person to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and board control number by some means (e.g., mobile terminal, etc.). Good too.

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, when it is assumed that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. Afterwards, when Model A is removed from the game parlor and AA Corporation attempts to manufacture Model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

Afterwards, when Model B is removed from the game parlor and BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture Model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, even if model C was removed from the game parlor and AA Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. The code is removed by laser engraving, and the fourth code from the right is printed, so that the fourth code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. For example, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

That is, in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. ) Since space can be saved, it is possible to improve reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Configuration example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, like configuration example 2 described above, shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number is printed. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, assume that two copies of AA Corporation and BB Corporation are printed. In addition, the code can be read by caulking the parts corresponding to each code on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case) with, for example, a belt-shaped member. It is possible to be fixed in an impossible state. Furthermore, for example, by cutting the band-like member or the like, it is possible to release the fixation and make the code readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, when it is assumed that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. is considered unreadable. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, model A was removed from the game parlor, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

After that, Model B was removed from the game parlor, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture Model C, only the third code from the right was readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, even if model C was removed from the game parlor and AA Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. By making only the code readable and making the first to third codes from the right unreadable, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, so further reuse is possible and more It is also possible to reuse it at other gaming machine manufacturers. In addition, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is also possible to provide only the caulking holes and print a code at the location corresponding to the caulking hole each time the product is reused.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, the pachi-slot machine 1 is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The Pachislot machine 1 is capable of playing games using coins, medals, game balls, tokens, etc., as well as game media such as cards that are given or will be given to players and that store information on game value. In the following explanation, it is assumed that medals are used.

In the following description, the side (direction) from the pachi-slot machine 1 toward the player will be referred to as the front side (front direction) of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side will be referred to as the rear side (backward direction, depth direction). The right side and left side when viewed from the player are referred to as the right side (right direction) and left side (left direction) of the pachi-slot machine 1, respectively. Moreover, the direction including the front side and the rear side is called the front-back direction or the thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is called the left-right direction or the width direction. The direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the up-down direction or the height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the appearance of the pachi-slot machine 1 is comprised of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD placed at the upper front of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism UD placed at the lower front of the cabinet G. It has a door mechanism DD.

Furthermore, two openings G41 are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and penetrating in the vertical direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of these two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 38, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower parts of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening approximately in the center of the upper part. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is attached to the back side of the main display window DD4. Furthermore, a main control board MS is attached to the back surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) each having a plurality of types of symbols drawn on their outer peripheral surfaces. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each reel can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The operations of the reels RL, RC, and RR and the symbols drawn on the reels RL, RC, and RR are visible through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4, so that players and the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b, and DD2c having substantially horizontal surfaces are formed. A medal slot DD5 for inserting medals is provided in the first pedestal portion DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4. The medal slot DD5 is an opening into which medals are inserted by the player. The medals inserted through the medal slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

A maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as MAXBET button) is provided on the second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 as an effective line setting means for betting credited medals. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals to be inserted.

A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). Note that the touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of the human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen, and outputs a detection signal, or It may be of a type that detects contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal, or of another type or structure (such as an in-cell structure).

The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and displays game information such as the number of games played as the game progresses on its display screen, as well as displaying game information selected by the player. Alternatively, a message or input key for requesting input may be displayed.

In addition, in the liquid crystal display device DD20, it is also possible to display content (performance information) corresponding to the performance related to the game on its display screen, for example, as the game progresses. Moreover, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a production accessory or a dedicated attachment such as a jog dial or a push button may be attached. Furthermore, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by distributing its functions to a display unit A, etc., which will be described later.

A start lever DD6 is provided on the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, which rotates the reels RL, RC, and RR by operation by the player, and starts variable display of symbols within the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is attached so as to be tiltable within a predetermined angular range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR when pressed by the player (stopping operation). , DD7C, and DD7R are provided.

A C/P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C/P button DD13 is used to switch credits/payouts for medals that the player has won in the game by pressing the button. When payout is selected by switching the C/P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are dispensed from the medal payout opening DD14 (cancellation chute) provided in the coin guard plate on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving section DD15.

A waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is arranged below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, the name representing the model of the pachi-slot machine 1, various patterns, etc. are printed.

Further, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information regarding the game through sounds such as voices and music. Furthermore, a first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning and the number of remaining medals that have been credited. Normally, the maximum number of medals credited to the pachi-slot machine 1 is 50, so the number of credits less than 50 is displayed. Note that in a state where the maximum number of 50 medals has been credited, the inserted medals are paid out as they are from the medal payout opening DD14. Further, the sub display devices DD19L and DD19R may include a touch panel on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 39, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and includes the reel unit RU, the main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire pachislot machine 1, and the sub-control device SS (see FIG. 46). etc. are accommodated. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the Pachislot machine 1, such as determining internal winning combinations, rotating and stopping the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determining whether or not there is a prize. do. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls execution of effects such as video display.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 40, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 within the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for displaying an image, and a screen device C that makes an image appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image onto the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object. By projecting images that are generated based on performance information (e.g.) and shapes, it is possible to create sophisticated and powerful performances.

The display unit A has a housing A1 with an opening formed in the front. This housing A1 includes a projector cover B1 that forms the upper part of the irradiation unit B, and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. The screen housing C10 has a box-rectangular shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the top surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 41, the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is placed in front of the projector device B2 and is placed diagonally downward and rearward to emit the irradiation light from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 while being covered by a case B22, and is disposed at the rear inside the cabinet G. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221 that are horizontally arranged. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. Thereby, the lens unit B21 and optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 47) housed in the case B22 are located on the lower surface of the lower pedestal B221. The lens unit B21 is arranged so that the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) is emitted toward the front mirror mechanism B3 via a lens or the like. There is. Details of this projector device B2 will be described later using FIGS. 46 to 52.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 41, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (in the direction in which the irradiated light is emitted). As shown in FIG. 42, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 that fix both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. are doing. As shown in FIG. 43, the mirror holder B31 is formed into a plate shape with a rectangular front surface. An angle adjustment hole B311 is formed in each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed in the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Furthermore, mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the vertical angle adjustment holes B311 and B311.

On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is also formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the center and has a size that does not overlap the angle adjustment hole B311 and the attachment hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341, and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. Angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and attachment holes B334 and B344 in mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged to correspond to angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 and attachment holes B314 and B314 in mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both sides in the left and right direction of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding part B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. , an optical mirror B32 is held in a mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 44, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11, and this screw passes through the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws passing through the angle adjustment holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are inserted into the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

When the screws are rotated in a direction in which the screws are loosened from the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction that tightens the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

As mentioned above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed together through the mounting holes B314, B334, and B344, so that the optical mirror is placed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is being held. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by rotating the screw. Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner parts of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism at the positions where each of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from the optical mirror B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding section B11, whereby the reflector holding section B11 and the mirror holder B31 are It is held between. A screw inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11 passes through the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head will come into contact with the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11 due to the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from popping out from the angle adjustment hole B111 and disrupting the positional relationship between the reflector holding part B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: Irradiation unit B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 45, the projector device B2 and mirror mechanism B3 are housed in the projector cover B1. Note that the lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has a sloped surface B2a1 at the front thereof that slopes upward from the rear toward the front. As shown in FIG. 43, the projector cover B1 includes a horizontally arranged upper wall part B12, a reflector holding part B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall part B12, and symmetrical arrangement in the left-right direction of the upper wall part B12. side wall portions B13, B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects further forward than the cabinet G (see FIG. 40). A reflector holding part B11 is formed in the center of the front part of the upper wall part B12 so as to protrude forward, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in the space formed by the protrusion so that its angle can be adjusted. There is.

(Display unit A: screen device C)
The irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through screw holes formed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 40). Thereby, the display unit A can be handled as a unit by integrating the irradiation unit B and the screen device C.

Inside the screen casing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms that make images appear by irradiation with irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are each constructed by applying screen paint to a base material, and each has a projection surface on which an image can appear.

The projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have mutually different shapes in order to diversify image expression. Specifically, while the projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 are flat, the projection surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has an arcuate shape when viewed from the side. Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, and the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are respectively movable screens. (not shown).

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: electrical and optical configuration of projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 46, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. The above-mentioned sub-control device SS is connected to the projector device B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the performance operation of the screen or the accessory, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen or the accessory via the optical mechanism B24, thereby creating a visual performance. Display the video. Further, in the assembly process of the display unit A, an adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2. This adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used to adjust the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and to initialize the focus. In this embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is used as the adjustment device for the projector device B2, but the adjustment device for the projector device B2 can be a tablet PC or a so-called smartphone on which the adjustment program (application software) is installed. , or a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233. The optical mechanism B24 includes an LED light source that emits R (red), G (green), and B (blue) color light, a DMD, and a projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 as components arranged around the lens unit B21. A focus mechanism and the like for performing focus adjustment are provided (not shown).

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on a command from the sub-control device SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism and moves the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control device SS, thereby adjusting the focus when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data related to settings and adjustments of the projector device B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 mainly includes a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and an LED light source of the optical mechanism B24 and a DMD.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected by the DMD in a predetermined direction travels to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. is guided to the projection target. As a result, the irradiation light is projected onto the screen or accessory object to be projected, and an image corresponding to the performance is formed.

In this embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Furthermore, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by returning the irradiated light using the mirror mechanism B3, and also makes the projection distance of the irradiated light as short as possible by setting the contrast ratio to 1000:1, for example. ing. As a result, the display unit A including the projector device B2 is configured to be less expensive and smaller, and can be easily mounted in the limited space in the cabinet G of the pachi-slot machine 1.

(Mechanical configuration of display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
As shown in FIG. 47, the projector device B2 includes a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an undercover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged to cover the lower surface of the case B22. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via the stay B223a, and is also fixed to an appropriate portion of the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 43) of the projector cover B1 via an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221. In this embodiment, an upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and a lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end of the case B22 so as to cover the upper opening of the case B22. Lower pedestal B221 is connected. The installation and adjustment procedure for such a projector device B2 will be described later.

The projector device B2 also includes a lens unit B21, an LED board (not shown) equipped with an LED light source, a DMD board (not shown) equipped with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B as internal components. , 243D, intake fans 244A, 244B, exhaust fan 245, and projector control board B23. The case B22 accommodates the lens unit B21 with the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 covered by a lens unit cover B222, and also includes an LED board, a DMD board, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, and an intake fan. 244A, 244B, and an exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

Such a projector device B2 is controlled by the sub-control device SS so as to receive video data related to images such as performances from the sub-control device SS, and to project the video onto a screen or an accessory. On the other hand, the sub-control device SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the content of the performance.

Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the performance, and images are projected onto the projection surfaces of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. Adjust the focus so that the image is projected clearly.

The heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B are in partial contact with the back surface of the LED board. Heat sink 243D partially contacts the back side of the DMD board. In this embodiment, as for the fin outer size of the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, the heat sinks 243R and 243G are relatively large, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D dissipate the heat generated in the LED board and DMD board into the air, so that the temperature of the optical elements and board does not increase until the optical characteristics change significantly. Dissipates heat well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat dissipation members, are made of aluminum material with high heat conductivity to enhance the heat dissipation effect, and have a plurality of heat dissipation fins to increase the contact area with the air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged close to the back surface of the right front part of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged close to the back surface of the left side of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged close to the rear back surface of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243G.

An intake port B22A is provided at the front right side of the case B22 where the intake fan 244A is close to, and an exhaust port B22E is provided at the rear right side of the case B22 where the heat sink 243R faces the intake port B22A. It is being An air intake port B22B is provided in a part of the left side of the case B22 adjacent to the air intake fan 244B, and an air intake port B22B is provided in the other part of the left side of the case B22 so as to be aligned with the air intake port B22B. An intake port B22C is provided so that air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided at the rear of the case B22 adjacent to the exhaust fan 245.

That is, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, a flow of air is formed in which air is forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fan 244A and then exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while taking heat from the heat sink 243R. . In addition, inside the case B22, after the air is forcibly taken in from the intake port B22B by the intake fan 244B, the air is forcibly taken in by the exhaust fan 245 from the exhaust port B22D while removing heat from the heat sink 243D, the heat sink 243B, and the heat sink 243G. A flow of air is formed that is exhausted to the Furthermore, inside the case B22, a flow of air is formed that is taken in from the intake port B22C and then forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 while mainly removing heat from the heat sink 243G and the heat sink 243B. .

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with an undercover B223. The projector control board B23 is equipped with a control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to an LED board and a DMD board arranged in the case B22, as well as a focus mechanism.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: position/attitude adjustment of projector device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall B12 (see FIG. 43) of the projector cover B1, and includes a rectangular main body 2200 and both left and right sides of the main body 2200. A left end part 2201a and a right end part 2201b are formed by bending the main body part 2200 downward and outward, and have a step with the main body part 2200 and extend to both the left and right sides, and a left end part 2201a and a right end part 2201b that extend partially from the rear side of the main body part 2200 to the rear. It has a rear end portion 2202 that extends out. The main body part 2200 and the rear end part 2202 are provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane along the main body portion 2200 (in a horizontal plane). Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screw fastening. In this embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged at each of the left end 2201a and the right end 2201b, and are equally spaced in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) that is inserted and fastened into the square hole 2201c.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that generally corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. Three connecting screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the lower pedestal B221 so as to protrude upward in correspondence with the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the lower pedestal B221. The lower pedestal B221 has a coil spring 2211 externally fitted to each of the connecting screw parts 2210, and inserts the tip of the connecting screw part 2210 into the connecting hole 2200A, so that the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the main body part 2200 and the rear end part 2202. By fastening a nut 2213 to the tip of the connecting screw part 2210 from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 via a washer 2212 while maintaining the upper pedestal B220 in a suspended state, the upper pedestal B220 is connected in a suspended state to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. Lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of upper pedestal B220 while supporting undercover B223 via case B22 and stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected to each other at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 so that the distance between them can be adjusted. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 includes a connecting hole 2200A of the upper pedestal B220, a connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that its positioning and optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 51 shows how the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower diagram in FIG. 51(a) shows the mounting screw T inserted and fastened into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, and the upper diagram in FIG. 51(a) FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along line BB' shown in the lower figure. Note that although FIG. 51 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end 2201a of the upper pedestal B220, the same applies to the periphery of the remaining square holes 2201c in the left end 2201a and right end 2201b.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the mounting screw T is inserted into the square hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged approximately in the center of the square hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to a nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W disposed along the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. Thereby, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by similar screws.

Here, the shaded area indicated by the symbol A in FIG. 51(a) is a gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 51(a), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed approximately at the center of the square hole 2201c. At this time, the screw shaft of the mounting screw T becomes movable within the range (adjustment range) indicated by the shaded area A. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T with respect to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

FIG. 51(b) shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is shifted in the direction of arrow E with respect to FIG. 51(a). The upper diagram in FIG. 51(b) is a sectional view taken along the line DD′ shown in the lower diagram in FIG. 51(b). In the state shown in FIG. 51(b), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is relatively shifted to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and within the range of the hatched part (adjustment range) shown by symbol C. It is possible to move.

In this way, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, the mounting position of the projector device B2 relative to the upper wall portion B12 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction by the plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220. Thereby, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincident with the front-back direction as the reference direction.

FIG. 52 shows the connection structure of the lower pedestal B221 to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 in the connecting portion R2. Note that although FIG. 52 shows one connecting portion R2, the same applies to the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3.

The connecting screw part 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body part 2200 of the upper pedestal B220, and is screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body part 2200. Ru. A coil spring 2211 is fitted onto the connecting screw portion 2210, and the coil spring 2211 is held between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the peripheral edge of the connecting hole 2200A. Due to such a coil spring 2211, the portion near the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 is biased in the direction away from each other (in the vertical direction), so that the thread between the connecting screw portion 2210 and the nut 2213 is biased. This prevents loosening at the mating part.

In such a connecting portion R2, by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the tightening or loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being biased by the coil spring 2211. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 52). Therefore, by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in a direction closer to the upper pedestal B220, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is expanded. That is, by loosening the nut 2213 appropriately, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced in a direction away from the upper pedestal B220, and the height position is adjusted lower.

In the other connecting parts R1 and R3, the height position of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting parts R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the amount of tightening of the nut 2213 in the same manner as described above. Specifically, the connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so that the lines connected to each other form a triangle so that they are not located on the same straight line in the plane (horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. It is arranged like this. That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by the amount of tightening of the nut 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, The degree of inclination within the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in either the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Such posture adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221 irradiates light onto the screen or the like. At this time, an image is projected onto a screen or the like using irradiated light, and the attitude of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. Thereby, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that the image is projected on the surface of the screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, by adjusting the attitude of the lower pedestal B221 in the optical axis direction, the image display mode can be adjusted in advance so that so-called trapezoidal distortion or the like does not occur.

Adjustments in the optical axis direction and the like are performed using an adjustment PC 1000 (see FIG. 46) connected to the projector device B2. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 has its optical axis direction adjusted and the displayed image on the screen etc. checked during inspections at the factory. , various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying images are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2 during adjustment work (see FIG. 46). When the adjustment PC 1000 is operated, optical parameters related to the projection position of the irradiation light, focus adjustment, etc. in the projector device B2 are changed by a predetermined command transmitted from the adjustment PC 1000. The projection position and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector device B2 as horizontal and vertical adjustment value data (see FIG. 46). The horizontal and vertical adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 will remain unchanged even if power is not supplied to the projector device B2 for transportation after shipment from the factory and the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in a game hall. can be used.

As is clear from the above, the projector device B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction mainly depending on the attachment position of the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall B12, and is positioned within the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221. The optical axis direction is adjusted according to the posture at .

In addition, in this embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 to each other are provided at three locations, but if the condition that at least three locations are not on the same straight line is met, four locations may be provided. You may make it provide the connection part above. Further, in this embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A, and the lower pedestal B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connecting threaded portion is not limited to being formed integrally with the pedestal as in this embodiment, but may be any type as long as it can be fixed to one of the pedestals. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that is fixed through the lower pedestal.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying images,
a main body (cabinet G) that houses the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front;
An opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable and closable,
The display unit (display unit A) is
a projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image;
a reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2);
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) that can display an image projected by the projector (projector device B2) based on the light reflected by the reflective mirror (mirror mechanism B3). and,
The projector (projector device B2), the reflective mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are configured as a unit,
The position of the reflective mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) open.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the display unit A includes a projector device B2, a mirror mechanism B3, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1. However, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the Pachislot machine 1, it is possible to adjust the position of the mirror mechanism B3, so the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate. However, the projection position can be adjusted.

(1-2) The gaming machine according to (1-1) above,
The projector (projector device B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A),
The projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and can emit light forward,
The reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is arranged in front of the projector (projector device B2) so as to be able to reflect the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2) obliquely downward and backward, and is arranged in front of the projector (projector device B2). The direction in which the light is reflected can be adjusted by changing the degree of engagement of the screws exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the projector device B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the direction of light reflection, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the Pachislot machine 1, the direction (angle) of light reflection can be adjusted by loosening or tightening the screws with the upper door mechanism UD open. Can be adjusted. Thereby, even if the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

(2-1) A projection device (projector device B2) that projects an image using irradiation light;
a plurality of projection surfaces capable of displaying images projected by the projection device;
a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that displaces at least one projection plane among the plurality of projection planes as a movable projection plane;
an upper wall (upper wall part B12) located above the projection device,
The plurality of projection planes are surface-treated,
The drive mechanism is configured to displace the movable projection surface relative to the projection device,
An upper pedestal (upper pedestal B220) and a lower pedestal (lower pedestal B221) are provided between the projection device and the upper wall,
The upper pedestal is attached to the upper wall so that its in-plane position can be adjusted, and the lower pedestal can adjust the interval at three or more locations with respect to the upper pedestal while supporting the projection device. A gaming machine characterized by being attached to.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the projector device B2 appropriately adjusts the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall part B12, so that the upper wall part B12 can be properly adjusted via the upper pedestal B220. By appropriately adjusting the vertical interval of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 positioned on the upper wall part B12 using three or more connecting parts R1, R2, R3, It is attached so that the posture supported via this lower pedestal B221 is appropriate. Therefore, the in-plane placement position and the in-space attitude of the projector device B2 can be easily adjusted using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and high-quality images with high visual effects can be projected onto multiple projection surfaces. It can be projected.

(2-2) The gaming machine according to (2-1) above,
The upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are connected to each other at three or more connecting portions (connecting portions R1, R2, R3) that are not on the same straight line,
Each of the plurality of connecting parts includes:
a connecting screw portion (connecting screw portion 2210) that protrudes from one of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal and is screwed through the other;
The present invention is characterized in that a coil spring (coil spring 2211) is provided which is externally fitted onto the connecting screw portion and which is disposed between the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 have three or more connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 that are not on the same straight line, and the distance between them is the same as that of the connecting screw part 2210. Individual adjustments can be made by simply adjusting the amount of screw tightening, and the elastic biasing force of the coil spring 2211 keeps the adjusted spacing constant, so the space can be adjusted in the front-rear, left-right, and up-down directions perpendicular to each other in the space. It is possible to finely adjust each posture of the projector device B2 in the three axial directions, and it is possible to hold the projector device B2 in an appropriate posture in any direction, for example, the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction.

[Third embodiment]
The second embodiment has been described above. The third embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of parts that apply to the third embodiment as well as those in the second embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221 according to this embodiment have different configurations from the upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221 according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 54 is a plan view showing a state in which the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are assembled. FIG. 55 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 56 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of the case housing the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing the case attached to the lower pedestal.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member that is rectangular in plan view. As shown in FIG. 54, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by sides A, B, C, and D.

Square holes 2201c are provided in the right and left parts of the upper pedestal B220, respectively. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 61) by fastening screws.

In the second embodiment, when attaching the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1, the upper pedestal B220 is screwed to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 to directly fix the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1. explained. In contrast, in this embodiment, a relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper pedestal B220 and the projector cover B1.

The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T that is inserted and fastened into the square hole 2201c. Note that FIG. 54 also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper pedestal B220 to the relay plate B300. In this embodiment, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened using a fixing plate B321 and a cap bolt. In the second embodiment, the fixing plate B321 is not shown, but when fastening the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220, conventionally known members can be appropriately selected and used.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. The three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (in a horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220.

The lower pedestal B221 includes a rectangular main body B221a with a rectangular opening formed in the center, a right side B221b and a left side B221c extending forward with a step from the main body B221a, and a main body B221a. This is a sheet metal member including a rear end portion B221d that extends rearward with a step.

As shown in FIG. 55, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the front right side of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the front left side of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 56, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and bending a part of the downwardly bent portion outward. The right side part B221b, the left side part B221c, and the rear end part B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

Connection screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the right side B221b, the left side B221c, and the rear end B221d, respectively, so as to protrude upward in correspondence with the three connection holes 2200A of the upper pedestal B220. The three connecting screw portions 2210 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the right side B221b, the left side B221c, and the rear end B221d.

Similar to the second embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected so that the distance between them can be adjusted at each of three connecting parts corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw parts 2210. be done. The three connecting portions each include a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 47).

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, it is possible to adopt a structure similar to that of the second embodiment, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, a case B22 having a rectangular box shape is adopted. There is.

Similar to the second embodiment, the case B22 accommodates internal components of the projector device B2, such as a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 47), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, and the like. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 47) is fixed to the lower surface of the case B22.

A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 47) is attached to a front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is housed in a case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 47) covered with a lens unit cover B222.

Although not shown, the case B22 has two intake fans 244A located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction (near the right end of the left side B221c when attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 58)).・244B are arranged so that they are lined up one after the other. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

Further, an intake port B22A is provided on the right side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 57), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side surface of the case B22 (see FIG. 58). As a result, in the case B22, a flow of air is formed in which air is forcibly taken in from the intake port B22A by the intake fans 244A and 244B, and then exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while taking heat from the heat sink.

As shown in FIG. 58, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screw fastening, and its upper end face (upper wall part B22F shown in FIG. 57) is the inner surface of the main body part B221a of the lower pedestal B221. is in contact with. Further, in a state where the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is located above the upper pedestal B220. Thereby, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

In this respect, in the second embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is arranged above it. Therefore, the case B22 could not be placed in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In contrast, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the case B22 is arranged so that the upper end (upper wall part B22F) of the case B22 passes through the opening upwardly. (Top wall portion B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space for arranging the case B22.

In this way, by moving the relative position of the case B22 (projector device B2) upward with respect to the upper pedestal B220 compared to the second embodiment, the front part provided on the front surface of the case B22 A portion of the upper pedestal B220 is disposed in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 57) (see FIG. 58). That is, a part of the upper pedestal B220 is placed in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 47) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. As a result, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

However, the illumination light is not blocked in this way. That is, in this embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from a portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210. In other words, when emitting the irradiation light, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the portion below the horizontal plane passing through the center of the projection lens 210 in the vertical direction) is used. The light output position of such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-058875).

In this way, in this embodiment, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used when emitting the irradiation light, and the irradiation light is emitted from the portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210, as shown in FIG. The upper pedestal B220, which is disposed in front of the projection lens 210, is located above the optical axis of the projection lens 210. Therefore, the path of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is below the upper pedestal B220, and the irradiated light is not blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

In addition, by bending the lower pedestal B221 downward to form a right side part B221b, a left side part B221c, and a rear end part B221d, the upper part of the right part B221b, the left part B221c, and the rear end part B221d can be The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be connected so that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged. Thereby, although the configurations of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are changed from the second embodiment, the configurations of the three connecting parts can be the same as in the second embodiment.

Therefore, adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like of the light emitted from the projector device B2 can be performed using the same method as in the second embodiment. Such adjustment of the optical axis direction, etc. requires a sophisticated computer program, and developing this program incurs a large amount of cost. In this embodiment, since the optical axis direction and the like can be adjusted using the same program as in the second embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

Further, in this embodiment, the case B22 is described as having the upper wall part B22F, but the case B22 having an open upper side (see FIG. 47) may be used as in the second embodiment. good. Further, the method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and as in the second embodiment, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using the stay B223a (see FIG. 47). It may also be a thing.

As explained above, in this embodiment, by arranging a part of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, it is possible to move the case B22 upward compared to the second embodiment. , a new space can be created in the lower area of case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the configuration of the upper pedestal B220 from the second embodiment, and the same configuration as the second embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

However, in this embodiment, considering other effects, a projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the second embodiment is adopted. The projector cover B1 according to this embodiment will be described below.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 60 is a plan view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. FIG. 61 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 60 along arrow LL and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 62 is a diagram of the projector cover with the top wall removed, viewed diagonally from above. FIG. 63 is a front view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 63 taken along arrow MM.

As shown in FIG. 59, the projector cover B1 has a generally symmetrical structure, and has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside thereof. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed to protrude inward from the inner side surfaces of the left and right side wall portions B13 and B13, respectively. The relay plate attachment part B301 is formed to have a step, and includes a relay plate attachment surface B301a formed at the front and the rear, a position adjustment surface B301d formed above the relay plate attachment surface B301a, and a front side. and a connecting portion B301e that connects the rear relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjustment surface B301d.

A mounting hole B301b is formed in the relay plate mounting surface B301a. Further, a position adjustment hole B301c is formed in the position adjustment surface B301d. The attachment hole B301b is a screw hole for attaching the relay plate B300 to the relay plate attachment part B301 by screw fastening. The position adjustment hole B301c is formed at a position opposite to the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 53) of the upper pedestal B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate attachment part B301.

As shown in FIG. 61, the relay plate B300 includes a main body portion B300A, a front side portion B300B that extends forward with a step from the main body portion B300A, and a front side portion B300B that extends rearward with a step from the main body portion B300A. A rear side part B300C is provided. The front side part B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body part B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and rearward. In this way, the shape of the relay plate B300 corresponds to the step provided in the relay plate mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

A first through hole B300a is formed in the main body portion B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side part B300B and the rear side part B300C. The first through hole B300a is a hole through which a cap bolt is inserted when attaching the relay plate B300 to the upper pedestal B220. On the other hand, the second through-hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate attachment part B301 by screw fastening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) whose upper sides are open are provided on both left and right sides of the front of the projector cover B1. The right opening B400a has a shape that approximates a hexagon formed by sides E to J (see FIG. 60) when viewed from above.

As shown in FIG. 62, wall surfaces (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) that are continuous downward from each side are formed with sides E to J as the upper ends. ing. The wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) that is formed continuously from the side J has a shorter length in the vertical direction than the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. Note that the wall surface B401e that is continuously formed from the side E continues inside the projector cover B1 to the rear, and is a part of the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301.

FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view taken along a horizontal plane passing through the connecting portion B301e (a plane passing above the relay plate mounting surface B301a and below the position adjustment surface B301d).

As shown in FIG. 64, an opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and a cavity 402 formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting part B301 , are in communication inside the projector cover B1.

<Formation of space by projector cover B1 and blind B500>
In this embodiment, a blind B500 is used as a member provided under the projector cover B1, instead of the perforated plate B15 (see FIG. 45) in the second embodiment.

FIG. 65 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 66 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66 taken along the arrow NN, with the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover removed.

As shown in FIG. 65, the blind B500 has a generally symmetrical structure, and has a first horizontal portion B501 formed substantially horizontally, and a slope continuous with the first horizontal portion B501. a first inclined part B502a, a second horizontal part B502b formed substantially horizontally and continuous with the first inclined part B502a, and a second inclined part B502b continuous with the second horizontal part B502b. The inclined part B502c, the third horizontal part B502d formed substantially horizontally and continuous with the second inclined part B502c, and the rear of the third horizontal part B502d so that the width in the left and right direction is the same as that of the third horizontal part B502d. It has a rear wall part B503 standing upward from the end, an outer wall part B504 forming the outer wall of the blind B500, and an inner wall part B505 facing the outer wall part B504.

The outer wall part B504 is continuous with the first inclined part B502a, the second horizontal part B502b, the second inclined part B502c, the third horizontal part B502d, and the rear wall part B503. The inner wall portion B505 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a and the second horizontal portion B502b. In addition, the first slope part B502a, the second horizontal part B502b, the second slope part B502c, and the third horizontal part B502d are raised in a certain range near the outer wall part B504, and are higher than the inner part of the range. It has the following structure.

Moreover, the blind B500 has a small room B507 that is rectangular in plan view. The small room B507 is a space surrounded by a front wall B507a, an outer wall B507b, a rear wall B507d, and an inner wall B505, which are formed in the vertical direction. The front wall portion B507a is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b and extends in the left-right direction. The outer wall portion B507b is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, extends in the front-rear direction, and is continuous with the rear wall portion B503. The rear wall portion B507d is erected so as to form substantially the same plane as the rear wall portion B503.

In this way, the small room B507 is formed so as to straddle the second horizontal part B502b, the second inclined part B502c, and the third horizontal part B502d. The width in the left-right direction is narrower than the width in the left-right direction of the first inclined portion B502a by the length of the width in the left-right direction of the front wall portion B507a. Note that a U-shaped notch 507c that is open at the top is formed in the outer wall portion B507b. Further, the upper ends of the front wall B507a, the outer wall B507b, and the rear wall B507d are lower than the upper edge B505a of the inner wall B505.

The first horizontal part B501 includes a first wall part B501a that stands slightly upward at the front end thereof, and a second wall part B501b that continues rearward from the inner part of the first wall part B501a. A third wall B501c continues diagonally backward from the second wall B501b, a fourth wall B501d continues backward from the third wall B501c, and a fourth wall B501d continues inward from the fourth wall B501d. A fifth wall portion B501e is formed. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

A screw hole B506 for attaching the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 by screw fastening is formed in an area surrounded by the third wall B501c, the fourth wall B501d, and the fifth wall B501e.

As shown in FIG. 67, when the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1. The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1. , is continuous with the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1.

Although not shown in FIG. 67, the surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is approximately the same plane as the surface B402a (see FIG. 64) that exists in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1. placed above. A certain gap exists between the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a. As described later, the gap is filled with a duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) (see FIG. 71). Further, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 64).

As described above, a space P (see FIG. 67) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The space P is covered above by a projector cover B1 and covered below by a blind B500. Further, on the sides of the space P, the first wall B501a to the fifth wall B501e, the inner wall B505, the rear wall B503, and the outer wall B504 of the blind B500, and the wall surfaces B401f to B401i of the projector cover B1, It is surrounded by surfaces B402a and B402b existing at the front and rear of the cavity B402, an inner surface 403, and the like.

A part of the upper part of the space P is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 (see FIG. 59), and is also connected to the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 via the cavity B402 (see FIG. 64). (see). The cavity B402 is a part of the space P when the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, punching B450 (right punching B450a and left punching B450b) having a mesh structure is provided in opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b). Thereby, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the space P through the opening B400 to a certain extent.

<Formation of air flow path and liquid storage space>
FIG. 68 is a perspective view showing the blind shown in FIG. 65 in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are attached and the case is arranged. FIG. 69 is a perspective view showing the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66 with the right punching removed. FIG. 70 is a sectional view showing the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 67 with a fan for the vicinity of the opening and a duct cover attached. FIG. 71 is a right side view showing a cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 70 with the fan for the vicinity of the opening removed.

As shown in FIG. 68, a duct cover B600 is disposed substantially horizontally on the upper right side of the blind B500. The duct cover B600 is a flat plate-like member, and the external shape in top view is the rear wall B503, outer wall B504, inner wall B505 of the blind B500, and the front wall B507a and outer wall B507b of the small room B507. (See FIG. 65) It has a shape that approximates a figure that includes the upper edge of each. Thereby, the duct cover B600 covers the blind B500 from above.

Furthermore, a duct cover B650 is disposed substantially horizontally on the upper left side of the blind B500. The duct cover B650 is a flat plate-like member, and although its external shape in a top view is different from the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 75), it covers the blind B500 from above like the duct cover B600.

As shown in FIG. 70, the space P formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 (see FIG. 67) is a space P1 above the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) and a space below the duct cover B600. It is divided into P2. For clarity, in FIG. 70, the duct cover B600 is shown with diagonal lines.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68, a fan B700 for use near the opening is placed at the upper front of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is an intake fan, and is configured so that the air existing in front of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening can be moved rearward by passing through the air passage part B710 (see FIG. 72). It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the blind B500, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is positioned near the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1. For clarity, in FIGS. 69 and 70, the fan B700 for use near the opening is shaded.

Although not shown, in this embodiment, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the front part of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the part of the irradiation unit B that protrudes from the cabinet G is , is accommodated in the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 36). Two openings (not shown) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD are respectively positioned directly above the two openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70, the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57) of the case B22 is arranged close to the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58) of the case B22 is similarly arranged close to the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402).

As a result, in the present embodiment, air flows from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 into the inside of the upper door mechanism UD through the opening (the right opening of the two openings) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD. can be incorporated. This air moves downward inside the upper door mechanism UD and is taken into the inside of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has entered the inside of the projector cover B1 is directed to the space P formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 (the space P on the right side of the two spaces P, see FIG. 67) above the duct cover B600. After moving backward through the space P1 (see FIG. 70), it changes its direction to the inside of the projector cover B1, passes through the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and then opens the air intake port B22A. It enters the inside of case B22 through.

The air that has entered the case B22 moves to the left while taking away the heat generated within the case B22, and exits the case B22 via the exhaust port B22E.

After the air exiting the case B22 passes through the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), it changes its course forward and enters the space P (the left space of the two cavities P). P), the space P1 above the duct cover B650 is moved forward. The air then exits to the outside of the projector cover B1 via the opening B400 (left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

The air exiting the projector cover B1 moves upward inside the upper door mechanism UD, and then passes through an opening (the left opening of the two openings) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD. Then, it is released to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Among the air flows described above, the air flow paths inside the projector cover B1 are indicated by thick arrows in FIG. Further, the flow of air in the space P1 is indicated by an arrow A in FIG. In this embodiment, by forming such an air flow path, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Here, as described above, the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD exists directly above the opening B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening of the upper door mechanism UD and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a portion thereof overlaps.

Therefore, if a foreign object such as a liquid enters the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD, the foreign object will enter the inside of the projector cover B1. However, according to the present embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign object from entering the inside of the case B22. Hereinafter, a case where the liquid L is injected from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD will be described as an example.

The liquid L introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD passes through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1 and falls onto the first horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 65) of the blind B500.

Here, as explained using FIG. 67, the upper end of the fifth wall B501e of the blind B500 and the lower end of the surface B402a (see FIG. 64) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1 A certain gap exists between them, and the thickness of the duct cover B600 substantially matches the length of the gap. The duct cover B600 is arranged so as to abut both the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a and fill the gap. Thereby, a gap corresponding to the height of the fifth wall part B501e of the blind B500 is formed between the first horizontal part B501 of the blind B500 and the duct cover B600. The liquid L passes through the gap and flows from the first horizontal portion B501 toward the first inclined portion B502a.

Since the first inclined part B502a and the second inclined part B502c of the blind B500 have an inclination that descends toward the rear, the liquid L flows through the first inclined part B502a, the second horizontal part B502b, and the second inclined part B502b. It flows backward through the inclined part B502c and the third horizontal part B502d. In this way, the liquid L flows on the surfaces of the first horizontal part B501, the first inclined part B502a, the second horizontal part B502b, the second inclined part B502c, and the third horizontal part B502d. Such a flow of the liquid L is shown by an arrow L in FIG.

The liquid L flowing backward collides with the rear wall B503 and is stored in an area surrounded by the rear wall B503, the outer wall B504, and the outer wall B507b (and the inner wall B505) (FIG. 71 reference). This area is included in the space P2 (see FIG. 70) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. For clarity, in FIG. 71, the stored liquid L is shown shaded.

Here, the space P1 shown in FIG. 70 and the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 64) are connected via the opening B510 shown in FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the opening B510 has a shape that approximates a rectangle formed by sides K to N when viewed from the side.

The side K forming the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper edge B505a (see FIG. 65) of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. As shown in FIG. 65, the upper edge B505a (lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 includes a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, and It is located above the third horizontal portion B502d (path of liquid L).

Although not clearly shown in the figure, the right end of the duct cover B600 is placed on the upper edge of the outer wall B504 of the blind B500, and the left end touches the outer surface of the inner wall B505 of the blind B500. The main surface B610 (see FIG. 72) forms substantially the same plane as the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500 (see FIG. 68). As a result, the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the liquid L storage space (space P2) are separated by the duct cover B600, and the liquid L flows through the opening B510 to the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22). ) is becoming less likely to occur.

<Mounting structure and mounting position of fan near opening>
FIG. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening seen from the rear and below. FIG. 74 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening, viewed from the front and below.

As shown in FIG. 72, the duct cover B600 includes a main surface B610, a fan installation structure B620, a rear side part B630, a wiring opening B640 (B640a and B640b), a screw hole B650 (B650a and B650b), It is equipped with

The main surface B610 has a rectangular shape when viewed from above, with the rear left corner cut out. The fan installation structure B620 is a structure for installing the fan B700 for use near the opening, and is formed on the front right side of the main surface B610. The rear side part B630 is formed to extend rearward from the right rear part of the main surface B610. The wiring opening B640 is a hole through which a wiring connecting various functional components (sub-control device SS, etc.) arranged outside the projector cover B1 and the projector device B2, etc. is inserted. The screw hole B650 is a hole for attaching the duct cover B600 to the projector cover B1 by screw fastening.

The fan installation structure B620 includes a front engagement part B621 erected at the front end of the main surface B610, a left rear engagement part B622 and a right rear engagement part B622 erected from the main surface B610 behind the front engagement part B621. The side engaging portion B623 and the lower engaging portion B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c).

The lower left engaging portion B624a and the lower middle engaging portion B624b connect the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the left rear engaging portion B622. The lower right engaging portion B624c connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623.

The upper end edge B621a of the front side engaging part B621, the upper end edge B622a of the left rear side engaging part B622, and the upper end edge B623a of the right rear side engaging part B623 are each formed in a curved shape. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening has a circular air passage portion B710. The upper edge B621a, the upper edge B622a, and the upper edge B623a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion B710. For clarity, in FIG. 72, the upper edge B621a and the upper edge B622a are shown with diagonal lines, and the air passage portion B710 is shown with hatching.

As shown in FIG. 73, a structure (fan installation structure) for installing a fan B700 near the opening is formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling inside the projector cover B1. Specifically, the projector cover B1 includes a front engagement part B421 formed along the rear end of the opening B400, a rear engagement part B422 formed behind the front engagement part B421, and a rear engagement part B422 formed along the rear end of the opening B400. It has an extending upper engaging part B423 (upper left engaging part B423a, upper middle engaging part B423b, and upper right engaging part B423c).

The upper engaging portion B423 connects the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 and the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422. The length of the downward protrusion from the ceiling inside the projector cover B1 is longer in the front engaging part B421 and the rear engaging part B422 than in the upper engaging part B423.

The lower end edge B421a of the front side engaging part B421 and the lower end edge B422a of the rear side engaging part B422 are each formed in a curved shape. The lower edge B421a and the lower edge B422a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion B710 of the fan B700 for use near the opening. Note that, for clarity, in FIG. 73, the lower edge B421a and the lower edge B422a are shown with diagonal lines.

The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is held between the fan installation structure B620 of the duct cover B600 and the fan installation structure of the projector cover B1 described above.

Specifically, the distance between the front side engagement part B621 and the left rear side engagement part B622 of the duct cover B600, the distance between the front side engagement part B621 and the right rear side engagement part B623, and the front side engagement of the projector cover B1. The distance between the joining portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 is approximately equal to the length of the opening vicinity fan B700 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the left front side of the near-opening fan B700 comes into contact with the back side of the front side engaging part B621 of the duct cover B600, and the left side back side of the near opening fan B700 comes into contact with the back side of the left rear side engaging part B622 of the duct cover B600. In contact with the front surface, the opening vicinity fan B700 is held between the front side engaging part B621 and the left rear side engaging part B622 of the duct cover B600. Further, the right front surface of the fan B700 for use near the opening contacts the back surface of the front side engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the right rear surface of the fan B700 for use near the opening contacts the front surface of the right rear side engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600. The fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is held between the front engaging part B621 and the right rear engaging part B623 of the duct cover B600.

Further, the front surface of the fan B700 for use near the opening comes into contact with the back surface of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1, and the back surface of the fan B700 for use near the opening contacts the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1. , the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is held between the front engaging part B421 and the rear engaging part B422 of the projector cover B1.

In addition, the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600 extend upward from the main surface B610. The protrusion lengths of the two are approximately equal to each other. Furthermore, the three upper engaging parts B423 (upper left engaging part B423a, upper middle engaging part B423b, and upper right engaging part B423c) of the projector cover B1 are connected downward from the ceiling inside the projector cover B1. The protrusion lengths of the two are approximately equal to each other. The distance between the lower engaging part B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging part B423 of the projector cover B1 is approximately equal to the length of the opening vicinity fan B700 in the vertical direction.

As a result, the lower surface of the fan B700 near the opening is connected to the three lower engaging parts B624 (lower left engaging part B624a, lower middle engaging part B624b, and lower right engaging part B624c) of the duct cover B600. ), and the top surface of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is in contact with the three upper engaging parts B423 (upper left engaging part B423a, upper middle engaging part B423b, and upper right engaging part B423c) of the projector cover B1. ), and the opening vicinity fan B700 is held between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1.

As described above, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is fixed by being held between the duct cover B600 and the projector cover B1 from the front and back directions and the top and bottom directions.

In a state where the fan B700 for near the opening is fixed, the front side peripheral edge of the air passing section B710 is connected to the upper edge B621a of the front side engaging section B621 of the duct cover B600 and the lower edge B421a of the front side engaging section B421 of the projector cover B1. (See FIGS. 69 and 74). Although not shown, the outer edge of the rear side of the air passing portion B710 is the upper edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600, the upper edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623, and the upper edge B623a of the rear right engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600. It is positioned along the lower end edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422.

That is, when viewed from the front, the air passing portion B710 includes the front engaging portion B621, the left rear engaging portion B622, and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the front engaging portion B1 of the projector cover B1. It does not overlap with B421 and rear engaging portion B422. In other words, the air passing portion B710 includes the front engaging portion B621, the left rear engaging portion B622, and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the front engaging portion B421 and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the projector cover B1. It is not covered by the rear engaging portion B422. Thereby, the area of the air passage portion can be secured to the maximum extent.

On the other hand, the peripheral edge of the air passage part B710, the upper edge of the engaging part in the duct cover B600 (upper edge B621a, upper edge B622a, and upper edge B623a), and the lower edge of the engaging part in the projector cover B1 (lower edge By matching B421a and the lower edge B422a), the area of the part where the fan B700 for near the opening and the duct cover B600 contact and the area of the part where the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening and the projector cover B1 contact are increased. This allows the fan B700 for use near the opening to be stably fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74, the front surface of the front engaging portion B421 in the projector cover B1 is a wall surface B401j (FIG. 59) formed downward from the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a. (see). Thereby, the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is disposed behind the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a by the thickness of the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is located at a position deeper than the right opening B400a, even if liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, the liquid is unlikely to directly hit the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening. It looks like this. On the other hand, since the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening is arranged close to the right opening B400a, it is easy to take in air from outside the projector cover B1 via the right opening B400a. Thereby, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be efficiently discharged.

In addition, while the left rear engaging part B622 and the right rear engaging part B623 of the duct cover B600 are configured separately, the front engaging part B621 has left and right parts connected without being separated. It has a similar shape. Thereby, even if liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to enter rearward.

Furthermore, the length of the rear end edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a in the projector cover B1, the length in the left-right direction of the front engagement part B621 in the duct cover B600, and the left rear engagement part in the duct cover B600. The length from the left end of portion B622 to the right end of right rear engaging portion B623, the left-right length of front engaging portion B421 in projector cover B1, and the left-right length of rear engaging portion B422 in projector cover B1. The width and the length in the left-right direction of the fan B700 for use near the opening are all substantially equal. As a result, the intermediate space from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1 to the space P1 (see FIG. 70) (the cross section when space P1 is cut along the vertical plane in the left-right direction) is almost completely closed by the opening vicinity fan B700. It is in a buried state. In this respect as well, the area of the air passage portion is secured to the maximum extent, and the cooling efficiency of the projector device B2 can be improved.

<Liquid storage and discharge>
FIG. 75 is a perspective view from the left with the blind and duct cover attached. FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the projector cover, blind, and duct cover seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, blind, and duct cover shown in FIG. 76. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the blind and duct cover.

Note that FIG. 78 shows the blind B500 as seen from the front and above, and the duct cover B600 as seen from the rear and below.

As described above, of the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500, the space P2 (see FIG. 70) below the duct cover B600 has entered the inside of the projector cover B1. It is possible to store liquid (see Figure 71).

As explained using FIG. 65, the blind B500 includes a first horizontal part B501, a first inclined part B502a, a second horizontal part B502b, a second inclined part B502c, a third horizontal part B502d, and a small room B507. is formed. This makes it possible to increase the capacity of the liquid that can be stored, secure space for arranging the screen device C (see Figure 40) below the blind B500, and maintain the strength of the blind B500. There is.

In particular, in this embodiment, the strength of the blind B500 is increased due to the presence of the small room B507, and liquid can also be stored in the small room B507. That is, as described above, the notch 507c is formed in the small chamber B507, and when the amount of liquid stored exceeds a certain amount, the liquid flows into the small chamber B507 from the notch 507c. In this way, by storing the liquid in the small chamber B507 provided as a rib, the space within the blind B500 is effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 75, the duct cover B650 has a rectangular shape when viewed from above, with the left front corner cut out. For clarity, in FIG. 75, the duct cover B650 is shown with diagonal lines. As described using FIG. 68, the duct cover B600 is arranged along the front wall B507a and the outer wall B507b (see FIG. 65) of the small room B507 when viewed from above. On the other hand, the duct cover B650 has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the duct cover B600, and the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned further forward than the small room B507.

Although not shown, the rear end of the duct cover B650 is closer to the side N of the opening B510 shown in FIG. is also placed at the rear. Thus, like the duct cover B600, the duct cover B650 separates the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 from the liquid L storage space (space P2), and the liquid L passes through the opening B510 to the projector cover B1. Intrusion into the internal space Q (inside the case B22) is less likely to occur.

Here, the liquid stored in the blind B500 is discharged using a discharge mechanism including a tube communicating from the blind B500 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The tube is inserted into the blind B500 by passing through the liquid discharge hole S. The liquid discharge hole S will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 76, the liquid discharge hole S is provided on the back side of the irradiation unit B. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the liquid discharge hole S is located at the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the rear of the duct cover B600. and a side portion B630 (see FIG. 72).

The wiring opening B411 is formed as a cutout that is open at the bottom in the back side wall portion B410 that constitutes the back surface of the projector cover B1.

The wiring opening B510a is formed as a notch that is open at the top in the first back side wall part B510 that constitutes the back surface of the blind B500. The wiring opening B511a is formed as a notch with an open upper part in the second back side wall part B511 formed in front of the first back side wall part B510 of the blind B500. The second back side wall portion B511 is formed to stand up from the rear end of the horizontal surface B508 that is continuously formed rearward from the upper end of the rear wall portion B503. The first back side wall portion B510 is formed to stand up from the rear end of the horizontal surface B509 that is continuously formed rearward from the lower end of the second back side wall portion B511.

The rear side part B630 of the duct cover B600 has a backside surface B631, and a downward protrusion B632a and a downward protrusion B632b that protrude downward from both left and right edges of the surface B631. The downward protruding part B632a and the downward protruding part B632b are opposed to each other so as to be substantially parallel to each other with a certain distance apart, and a space is formed between the downward protruding part B632a and the downward protruding part B632b. .

When the projector cover B1, the blind B500, and the duct cover B600 are assembled, the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the downward protrusion of the duct cover B600 The spaces formed between B632a and the downward protrusion B632b overlap in the rear view, so that the liquid discharge hole S (the left liquid discharge hole S of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 76) A hole S) is formed. In addition, since the rear side part B630 is not formed in the duct cover B650 (see FIG. 75), the right liquid discharge hole S of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. It is formed by the wiring opening B411 of , and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500.

A tube for discharging the liquid stored in the blind B500 is inserted through the liquid discharge hole S, and various functional parts other than the irradiation unit B (sub-control device SS, etc.) are connected to the projector device B2, etc. Wiring for this purpose is also inserted. The wiring is connected to the projector device B2 and the fan B700 near the opening by passing through the wiring openings B640a and B640b (see FIG. 72).

Here, the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed on the outside (near the right end) of the duct cover B600, and the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed in the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 64). The position is spaced apart from the opening B510 (see FIG. 71) that is open toward the outside. This makes it difficult for the liquid stored in the blind B500 to enter the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22) through the wiring openings B640a and B640b.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that can perform effects by displaying images projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to express images on the same level as a liquid crystal display device, and it is also possible to reduce the cost when the display screen becomes large compared to a liquid crystal display device or the like. Furthermore, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it is possible to express images that cannot be achieved with a liquid crystal display device.

However, compared to liquid crystal display devices and the like, projection devices are more likely to generate heat and reach high temperatures, so there is a problem in that they will not function properly unless the generated heat is released.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can efficiently release heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting images. shall be.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) Screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making images displayed on the screen visible;
a fan (fan B700 for near the opening) disposed inside the cover member;
A partition member (duct cover B600) that partitions the internal space of the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) open to the external space of the cover member, and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The partition member partitions a space communicating from the first opening inside the cover member into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2),
The first space and the second space communicate through the second opening,
the fan is arranged in the second space,
the projector is arranged in the first space,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) that is open toward the external space, and a second opening that is open toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. A space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) is divided into a second space (space P1) and a third space ( It is partitioned into a space P2). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P1) are in communication via the second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in a first space (space Q), and a fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P1). Thereby, air can be moved between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P1), and such air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). Through this flow, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released.

On the other hand, since a fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P1), it is assumed that the cover members (projector cover B1 and Even if a foreign object gets inside the blind B500), the presence of the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) prevents the foreign object from entering the side where the projector (projector device B2) is located (first space (space) Q) side) can be made difficult to occur. Further, the third space (space P2) is separated from the second space (space P1) (a space communicating with the first space (space Q) in which the projector (projector device B2) exists) by a partition member (duct cover B600). ), so if a foreign object were to enter the third space (space P2), it would not be possible for the foreign object to enter the second space (space P1) from the third space (space P2). It is possible to prevent it from being put away. As a result, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign substances such as liquid that have entered from outside the game machine, and eliminate the cause of the projector (projector device B2) malfunctioning. Unauthorized access through the opening (right opening B400a) can be suppressed to improve security.

(4-1) Screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making images displayed on the screen visible;
a fan (fan B700 for near the opening) disposed inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) open to the external space of the cover member, and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
the projector is arranged in the first space,
A fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing the fan is provided in the second space,
The fan is held between an inner side of the cover member and the fan installation member in the second space.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) that is open toward the external space, and a second opening that is open toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are They communicate through the opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). Thereby, air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). Through this flow, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released. In particular, the second space (space P) is provided with a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing a fan (fan B700 for near the opening), and the fan (fan B700 for near the opening) is installed. , in the second space (space P), is held between the inner side of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and the fan installation member (duct cover B600). In this regard, if structures such as screws and claws are separately provided when installing the fan (fan B700 for use near the opening), additional space (in the left-right direction) will be required for the structure. On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to install the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) in a space-saving manner, and the passage of air in the second space (space P) is possible. Maximum possible space can be secured. As a result, it is possible to increase the efficiency of air movement between the external space and the internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), and to make maximum use of the function of the fan (fan B700 for use near the opening). At the same time, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(4-2) The gaming machine according to (4-1) above,
A fan installation part (fan installation structure B620) having a shape corresponding to the shape of a part through which air can pass (air passage part B710) in the fan is formed in the fan installation member.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the fan installation part (fan installation structure B620) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the part through which air can pass (air passage part B710) in the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening). Therefore, it is possible to prevent air passage from being obstructed by the fan installation part (fan installation structure B620). Thereby, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be further improved while making maximum use of the suction power of the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening).

(5-1) Screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making images displayed on the screen visible; ,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) open to the external space of the cover member, and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
the projector is arranged in the first space,
The second space is capable of storing liquid by being closed at the bottom,
The cover member further includes a wiring opening (a wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and a wiring opening of the blind B500) through which a wiring connecting the projector and a device arranged outside the cover member is inserted. An opening B510a for wiring and an opening B511a for wiring are formed,
The second space and the external space of the cover member communicate through the wiring opening,
The wiring opening is capable of inserting a mechanism (a tube included in the discharge mechanism) for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) that is open toward the external space, and a second opening that is open toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are They communicate through the opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q). Thereby, air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). Through this flow, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released.

In addition, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) includes a device arranged outside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and a projector (projector device). Wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of blind B500) are formed for passing the wiring connecting to B2), and the second space (Space P) and the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) are defined by wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of blind B500). communicated through. The second space (space P) can store liquid by closing the lower part, while the liquid stored in the second space (space P) can be stored in the wiring opening (projector cover). It is possible to discharge to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the wiring opening B411 of B1, and the wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500. As a result, if liquid (such as a drink poured by a player) enters the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the gaming machine through the first opening (right opening B400a), Even if the liquid is stored in the second space (space P), the liquid can be retained in the second space (space P), and the liquid can be prevented from entering equipment outside the second space (space P). can do. In addition, by appropriately discharging the stored liquid from the wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, and wiring opening B510a and wiring opening B511a of the blind B500), the amount of liquid stored can be kept below a certain limit. It is possible to maintain As a result, due to excessive liquid being stored in the second space (space P), the liquid enters the arrangement space (first space) of the projector (projector device B2). The situation can be avoided. In this way, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the projector (projector device B2) and other devices from being damaged by the liquid. Note that since the internal temperature of the pachi-slot machine 1 is relatively high (approximately 60° C.), the stored liquid will naturally evaporate if left undisturbed, even if it is not discharged using the mechanism described above. Therefore, it is not essential to provide the ejection mechanism, and the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) have wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a of blind B500, and wiring The opening B511a) may not be formed.

(6-1) Screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1),
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making images displayed on the screen visible;
a fan (fan B700 for near the opening) disposed inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) open to the external space of the cover member, and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed, and an opening edge (projector cover A front engaging portion B421) of B1 is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
the projector is arranged in the first space,
The fan is arranged in the second space so as to come into contact with the opening edge.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) include the cover members (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) that is open toward the external space, and a second opening that is open toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are They communicate through the opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is arranged in the second space (space P). Thereby, air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P), and such air can be moved between the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). Through this flow, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released. Particularly, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has a part from the periphery (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the first opening (right opening B400a) to the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening edge (front engaging part B421 of the projector cover B1) is formed that continues toward the opening edge (front engaging part B421 of the projector cover B1), and the fan (fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening) is connected to the opening edge (the projector cover B1) in the second space (space P). It is arranged so as to come into contact with the front side engaging part B421) of B1. As a result, if foreign matter such as liquid (for example, a drink poured by a player) gets into the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400a), Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from coming into direct contact with the fan (fan B700 for use near the opening). On the other hand, by placing the fan (fan B700 for near the opening) as close as possible to the first opening (right opening B400a), the external space and internal space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) can be separated. Air can be smoothly moved between the projectors and the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

In the third embodiment, when the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G, the front part of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, and the part of the irradiation unit B that protrudes from the cabinet G is connected to the upper door mechanism UD (Fig. 36)). In this way, when the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes to the front of the cabinet G, it is desirable to adopt a configuration in which the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G as shown in FIG.

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining a method of attaching the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. According to this configuration, the hook portion UD120 is a member that projects rearward from the upper door mechanism UD, and is attached to the upper door mechanism UD by screw fastening. On the other hand, an inner side protruding member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner side of the side wall G2) that protrudes inward is provided on the inner side of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G.

When attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G), first place the lower side of the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD on the upper surface of the front side protruding member G120, and then hook the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G. The notch of the portion UD120 is hooked onto the inner side protruding member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the upper door mechanism UD is pushed rearward by the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed to the cabinet G. By adopting such a configuration, the internal space of the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G can be effectively utilized.

Note that in the third embodiment, air flows between the internal space and the external space of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD, but in the present invention, Alternatively, air may be allowed to flow through an opening G41 (see FIG. 36) formed in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G. In this case, for example, when the display unit A is mounted on the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G may be positioned directly above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1.

In addition, in order to reduce the amount of foreign matter that enters into the Pachislot machine 1 through the opening formed above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (the opening formed in the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G), the opening is should be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and the opening should be provided with some kind of measure to prevent foreign matter from entering (for example, installing a mesh structure similar to the punching B450). desirable.

Further, in the third embodiment, the intake fans 244A and 244B are arranged in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and a fan B700 for near the opening is provided outside the projector device B2 (inner space of the projector cover B1). The explanation was given as follows: In the present invention, the arrangement position of the fan is not particularly limited, and the fan is arranged only in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan is arranged outside the projector device B2 (inner space of the projector cover B1). It is also possible not to provide it. Conversely, a fan may be provided only on the outside of the projector device B2 (the interior space of the projector cover B1), and no fan may be provided on the projector device B2 (inside the case B22).

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. Note that in this modification, the configurations of the projector cover B1 and blind B500 are slightly different from those in the third embodiment. Since the basic configuration is the same, a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the blind B500 in this modification includes a first inclined part B502a, a second horizontal part B502b, a second inclined part B502c, and a third horizontal part B502d. Instead, an inclined portion B502 is formed, and a small room B507 is not formed. Further, the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is positioned further forward than in the third embodiment, and the front side surface of the rear wall portion B503 is continuous with the surface B402b existing at the rear of the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. .

The intake fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the right space P of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 80, the arrangement positions of the intake fans are an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), an area enclosed by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), and an area enclosed by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ). A region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ) is illustrated.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 on the right side (see FIG. 71), and when an intake fan is installed in this area, the intake fan It is close to the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57) provided on the right side surface of B22. Thereby, air taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 can be efficiently sent into the inside of the case B22 (projector device B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ) is the right side area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), and is a location where the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1 is extended rearward. When the intake fan is disposed in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air that has moved backward in the space P can be smoothly changed inward.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), and is the lower area of the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) of the projector cover B1. be. When an intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (R ₃ ), the air taken into the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 can smoothly flow backward. .

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ) is the area in front of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ), and is the area below the opening B400. When the intake fan is disposed in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ), air can be smoothly taken into the interior of the projector cover B1.

Further, the exhaust fan can be disposed at a desired position in the space P (the left space P of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 80, an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(L ₁ ) and an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ) are illustrated as the arrangement positions of the exhaust fans.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) is located near the opening B510 on the left side, and when an exhaust fan is installed in this area, the exhaust fan is located on the left side of the case B22. It is close to the provided exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58). Thereby, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 can be efficiently sent out to the outside of the projector device B2.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ) is the lower area of the wall surface B401j of the projector cover B1. When the exhaust fan is disposed in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ), the direction of travel of the air coming out of the case B22 can be smoothly changed to the forward direction.

As for the intake fan and exhaust fan described above using FIG. 80, both the intake fan and the exhaust fan may be provided, or only the intake fan may be provided. However, only an exhaust fan may be provided.

In addition, the intake fan has an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), an area enclosed by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ), and , F(R ₄ ) may be arranged only in one of the regions surrounded by dotted lines, or may be arranged in two or more of these regions. Good too. The exhaust fan may be disposed only in one of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F (L ₂ ), It may be arranged in both areas.

Note that the third embodiment has been described on the assumption that an air flow path as shown by the thick arrow in FIG. 64 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air within the projector cover B1 does not necessarily need to flow completely along this path.

An air flow path that may be formed other than the air flow path shown in FIG. 64 will be described using FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an air flow path that may be formed inside the projector cover.

As shown by arrow _X1 in FIG. 81, for example, there may be a flow in which air warmed by heat generated by the projector device B2 exits the case B22 via the air intake port B22A. The air flowing out from the intake port B22A in this manner may move toward the rear of the projector cover B1, as shown by arrow _X2 . Further, as shown by arrow _X3 , there may be an air flow such that the air exiting from the case B22 via the exhaust port B22E is directed rearward.

Since the rear of the projector cover B1 is open, air that has moved rearward as shown by arrow _X2 or arrow _X3 is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. In order to smoothly exhaust air from the rear of the projector cover B1, an exhaust fan may be provided in the rear region of the projector cover B1.

Further, in the third embodiment, it has been explained that the partition members (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) are provided to partition the air flow path and the liquid storage space, but in the present invention, the partition members (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) are not essential.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the slope part B502 has a slope that descends toward the rear. The distance in the vertical direction from the lower end of the opening 510 is longer than that of the front part, and the liquid L is stored in the rear part of the inclined part B502 (an area away from the lower end of the opening 510). Therefore, even if the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650 are not provided, it is possible to prevent the liquid R from invading the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (inside the case B22) through the opening B510. can do.

Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification has the following features.

(7-1) A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting images;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which the screen can be viewed;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400) that open upward. An opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed in communication with the first opening, and a first space is formed in communication with the second opening. 2 spaces (the left space P of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space is open in a direction different from the upper direction (to the left) through a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (to the right) through a fourth opening (the left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. and
The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B400) communicate with each other. B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510),
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (right side space P), and the lower end portion defines the lower end of the first space (right side space P). It is equipped with an inclined part (inclined part B502) having an inclination that descends as it moves away from the directly below part,
At least a portion of the inclined portion is located below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400) opened upward. ) and a second opening (left opening B400) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) that open in a direction different from the upper direction (left and right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (right space P), while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) are in communication, thereby forming a second space (left side space P). A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). As a result, air flowing from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) flows into the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B400). B510), passes through the projector (projector device B2), passes through the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P), and then enters the second opening (left side space P). is released to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and high-temperature air has a tendency to flow upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left-hand space P) and passes through the second opening ( It will be smoothly discharged from the left opening B400). As a result, through such air flow, it becomes possible to efficiently release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (right side space P). In addition, the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) includes an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) that slopes downward as it moves away from directly below the first opening (right opening B400). Therefore, if liquid (such as a drink poured by the player) enters the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from outside the gaming machine through the first opening (right opening B400), , the liquid flows through the slope portion (slope portion B502) so as to descend as it moves away from the portion directly below the first opening (right side opening B400). Here, since at least a part of the inclined part (inclined part B502) is located below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall part B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the liquid is inclined When the liquid flows downward through the lower end (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall B505) of the third opening (the right opening B510), the liquid flows down the lower end (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall B505) of the third opening (the right opening B510). Since the lower end of the opening B510 (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall B505) is located above, it is difficult for the liquid to pass through the third opening (the opening B510 on the right side), and the liquid does not reach the projector. (Projector device B2) is in a state where it is difficult to invade the direction where it is arranged. In this way, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign substances such as liquid that have entered from outside the gaming machine.

(7-2) The gaming machine according to (7-1) above,
On the upper surface of the main body (the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G), there is a fifth opening (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41) above each of the first opening and the second opening. ) and a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the top surface (top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the gaming machine from above the outside of the gaming machine via the fifth opening (right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) After this air flows into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400 on the right side, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transferred to the second side of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the gaming machine through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G). In this way, in the Pachislot machine 1 according to the above modification, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is discharged to the outside and above the gaming machine. If the heat is discharged from the back of the game machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game parlor, which will have an adverse effect on the control of the game machine. Additionally, if air is exhausted from the side of the game machine, warmed air will be drawn into the adjacent game machines, creating a vicious cycle of warm air between adjacent game machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Furthermore, if air is discharged in front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air will be blown onto the player's face. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, it is possible to create an air flow for discharging the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the fifth opening (the right opening G41) and the sixth opening (the left opening G41) is present above the first opening (right opening B400) and second opening (left opening B400) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), so the fifth opening ( If a foreign object enters the gaming machine from outside through the right opening (G41) or the sixth opening (left opening G41), the foreign object will enter the gaming machine through the first opening (right opening B400) or the second opening (right opening B400). It is easy to enter the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the opening (left opening B400). Therefore, there is a concern that foreign matter that has entered the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) may reach the projector (projector device B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector device B2). For example, when a player injects a drink from the fifth opening (right opening G41), the drink passes through the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B510). If it invades the inside of the projector (projector device B2), there is a risk that the projector (projector device B2) will malfunction. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1 Even if liquid enters the inside of the blind B500), the liquid will flow along the sloped part (slanted part B502) as described above, so such a situation will not occur. can be prevented.

(7-3) The gaming machine according to (7-1) or (7-2) above,
A space closed at the bottom is formed by the inclined part (inclined part B502) and the wall parts continuous with the inclined part (rear wall part B503, outer wall part B504, and inner wall part B505).
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the slope part (slope part B502) and the wall part (rear wall part B503, outer wall part B504, and inner wall part B505) continuous with the slope part (slope part B502) are used to lower the Since a closed space is formed, the liquid flowing down the inclined part (inclined part B502) can be stored in the space. As a result, as long as the level of the stored liquid is below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the third opening (right opening B510) It is possible to prevent liquid from entering the arrangement space of the projector (projector device B2) through the projector.

(8-1) A projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting images;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying the image projected by the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) in which the screen can be viewed;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400) that open upward. An opening B400) is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed in communication with the first opening, and a first space is formed in communication with the second opening. 2 spaces (the left space P of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space is open in a direction different from the upper direction (to the left) through a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upper direction (to the right) through a fourth opening (the left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. and
The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B400) communicate with each other. B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510),
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400) opened upward. ) and a second opening (left opening B400) are formed. Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) that open in a direction different from the upper direction (left and right direction) are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) and the third opening (right opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a first space (right space P), while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) are in communication, thereby forming a second space (left side space P). A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). As a result, air flowing from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) flows into the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B400). B510), passes through the projector (projector device B2), passes through the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P), and then enters the second opening (left side space P). is released to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and high-temperature air has a tendency to flow upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left-hand space P) and passes through the second opening ( It will be smoothly discharged from the left opening B400). As a result, through such air flow, it becomes possible to efficiently release the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(8-2) The gaming machine according to (8-1) above,
The projector includes a first ventilation port (intake port B22A), a second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E), and a fan (air intake port B22E) disposed between the first ventilation port and the second ventilation port. fans 244A and 244B),
The first ventilation port (intake port B22A) and the third opening (right opening B510) face each other, while the second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) face each other. B510) the projector is arranged so as to face the projector;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) is provided with a first vent (intake port B22A) and a second vent (exhaust port B22E). Fans (intake fans 244A and 244B) are provided between the ventilation port (intake port B22A) and the second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E), and the first ventilation port (intake port B22A) Since the projector (projector device B2) is arranged so that the second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E) faces the fourth opening (the left opening B510), By forcibly taking in air using the fans (intake fans 244A and 244B), the above air flow can be smoothly created.

(8-3) The gaming machine of (8-1) or (8-2) above,
On the upper surface of the main body (the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G), there is a fifth opening (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41) above each of the first opening and the second opening. ) and a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed,
The projector is housed in the main body so as to be disposed above the screen.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the top surface (top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) has the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the gaming machine from above the outside of the gaming machine via the fifth opening (right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1) After this air flows into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400 on the right side, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transferred to the second side of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged upward to the outside of the gaming machine through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G). In this way, in the Pachislot machine 1 according to the above modification, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is discharged to the outside and above the gaming machine. If the heat is discharged from the back of the game machine, there is a concern that heat will be trapped in the island equipment installed in the game parlor, which will have an adverse effect on the control of the game machine. Additionally, if air is exhausted from the side of the game machine, warmed air will be drawn into the adjacent game machines, creating a vicious cycle of warm air between adjacent game machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Furthermore, if air is discharged in front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air will be blown onto the player's face. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, it is possible to create an air flow for discharging the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the above modification, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the main body ( The projector (projector device B2) is placed close to the top surface of the main body (top wall G4 of the cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) formed on the upper surface of the main body (upper wall G4 of cabinet G) and the projector (projector device B2) is also As a result, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) and the projector (projector device B2) is relatively small. There is. Therefore, when designing a flow path that takes in air from the fifth opening (opening G41 on the right side) and exhausts it from the sixth opening (opening G41 on the left side) via the projector (projector device B2), it is necessary to There is no need to create a complicated detour to avoid existing members and devices, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

In the embodiments described above, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachi-slot gaming machine has been described. Hereinafter, a modification in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine will be described using FIGS. 82 to 86.

FIG. 82 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit and frame member of the pachinko game machine from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the pachinko game machine 6100 includes a glass door 6111, a wooden frame 6112, a base door 6113, a game board 6114, a tray unit 6115, a firing device 6122 that fires game balls, and various control boards. It is composed of a board unit 6123 including a base unit 6123, a ball payout unit that gives game balls as game value, and the like.

The glass door 6111 described above is pivoted to the base door 6113 so as to be freely openable and closable. Further, an opening 6116 is formed in the center of the glass door 6111, and a transparent protective glass 6124 is disposed in the opening 6116. Furthermore, a base door 6113 is pivoted to the front of the wooden frame 6112 described above.

The above-mentioned dish unit 6115 is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be located below the glass door 6111. The plate unit 6115 is provided with an upper plate 6125 above it and a lower plate 6126 below it. The upper tray 6125 and the lower tray 6126 are formed with payout openings 6131A and 6131B for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), and when predetermined payout conditions are met, the game The balls are ejected, and in particular, game balls to be fired into the game area 6141 are stored in the upper tray 6125.

The above-described firing device 6122 is disposed on the base door 6113 so as to be located on the side of the dish unit 6115. This firing device 6122 is provided with a firing handle 6132 that can be operated by the player, and the player can advance the pachinko game by operating the firing handle 6132. When the firing handle 6132 is grasped by the player and rotated clockwise, power is supplied to the firing motor according to the rotation angle, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 6125 are They are fired sequentially onto the game board.

The game board 6114 described above is arranged in front of the base door 6113 so as to be located behind the protective glass 6124. The game board 6114 has a game area 6141 on its front surface, in which a fired game ball can roll. This game area 6141 is surrounded by guide rails and the like, and is an area where game balls can roll. In this way, the game balls fired by the firing device 6122 are guided by the guide rails provided on the game board, move to the top of the game board 6114, and then move to the top of the game board 6114, and then move to the top of the game board 6114. Due to the collision with the game board, the ball changes direction and flows downward from above the game board.

As shown in FIG. 82, a decorative unit 6258 is provided in the upper area of the front surface of the glass door 6111. The decoration unit 6258 is arranged so as to protrude in front of the pachinko game machine 6100.

A cavity is formed inside the decoration unit 6258, and the irradiation unit B described in the above embodiment is disposed in the cavity. FIG. 82 shows a state in which the inside of the decoration unit 6258 is seen from above.

As shown in FIG. 83, a screen device C (see FIG. 40) is arranged on the back side of the game board 6114. As a result, similarly to the embodiment described above, the light emitted from the projector device B2 of the irradiation unit B is irradiated onto the screen of the screen device C (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, and reel screen mechanism F1). It is now possible to do so.

Decoration unit 6258 is attached to the top of frame member 6211 (see FIG. 84). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the back side of the glass door 6111.

As shown in FIG. 84, the irradiation unit B is attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211. By attaching the decoration unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 with the irradiation unit B attached to the frame member 6211, the irradiation unit B is housed in the internal space of the decoration unit 6258.

Furthermore, a speaker 6152 and a speaker holder 6152A are integrally attached to the upper part of the frame member 6211 on both the left and right sides of the irradiation unit B. On the other hand, the decoration unit 6258 is provided with speaker holes 6151A and 6151B on the right and left sides, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh-like openings.

When the decorative unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B each cover the front of the speaker 6152, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 is transmitted through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B. It is possible to release it outside the pachinko game machine 6100.

Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as a vent hole for taking in air from the outside of the pachinko game machine 6100. As shown in FIG. 84, an intake fan 6244 is provided on the front right side of the irradiation unit B. Thereby, air is taken into the interior of the Pachinko game machine 6100 from the outside front of the Pachinko game machine 6100 via the speaker hole 6151A.

Similar to the third embodiment, this air is taken into the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1, and is generated in the projector device B2. It moves inside the projector cover B1 while removing the heat generated by the projector, and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

The air coming out of the projector cover B1 passes through the through hole 6245 formed in the frame member 6211, moves to the rear, and is released to the outside from the back side of the pachinko game machine 6100.

The air flow described above is shown by arrows in FIGS. 82 and 84. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which air is taken in from above the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 and air is discharged above the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. In contrast, in this modification, air is taken in from the front of the outside of the pachinko game machine 6100, and air is discharged to the rear of the outside of the pachinko game machine 6100. As described above, in the present invention, the direction in which air is taken in and the direction in which air is discharged for cooling the projector is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed depending on the arrangement position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

Furthermore, since pachinko machines have a shorter depth in the front-rear direction than pachislot machines, if another pachinko machine is installed on the back side of one pachinko machine in the same island facility, , there is a relatively large space between these pachinko gaming machines. Therefore, even if the air heated by the projector is discharged from the back of the pachinko game machine, it is thought that the island equipment of the pachinko game machine will not get as hot as the island equipment of the pachislot game machine.

Hereinafter, as another modification, a case where air is taken in from the outside right side of the pachinko game machine 6100 and air is discharged to the outside left side of the pachinko game machine 6100 will be described using FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 85, an opening 6300R is formed on the right side surface of the decoration unit 6258. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko game machine 6100 from the outside right side of the pachinko game machine 6100 via the opening 6300R.

This air is taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1, and is generated in the projector device B2, as in the above-mentioned modification. It moves inside the projector cover B1 while removing the heat generated by the projector, and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

Although not shown in the figure, an opening (opening 6300L) is formed on the left side of the decoration unit 6258 as well as on the right side. Thereby, the air that has come out of the projector cover B1 from the opening B400L is released to the outside of the pachinko game machine 6100 from the opening 6300L.

Such air flow is shown by arrows in FIG. In this modification, since the air is discharged from the side of the gaming machine, it is thought that there is a possibility that the warmed air will be drawn into the neighboring gaming machine. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, if the air exhaust direction is set to the side of the game machine, for example, the width of the decoration unit 6258 in the left and right direction may be made shorter. It is desirable that the exhaust port (opening 6300L) of the gaming machine and the intake port (opening 6300R) of the pachinko gaming machine installed next to the gaming machine be configured to be separated by some distance.

Another modification will be described below using FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine.

In the above-described modification, the irradiation unit B is attached to the frame member 6211. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 86, the irradiation unit B is attached to the base door 6113. Further, a speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113. Even in such a modified example, the same air flow path as in the above-mentioned example can be formed.

Although FIG. 86 shows that the irradiation unit B is attached to the front side of the base door 6113, the irradiation unit B may be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113. In the present invention, the irradiation unit B may be installed in front of the game board or behind the game board. When installing the irradiation unit B behind the game board, the irradiation unit B can be placed by forming a space on the back side of the game board and utilizing the space.

For example, the game board may have an opening in the center, and the irradiation unit may be placed on the base door, the game board, or other rear part of the pachinko machine so that the front part of the irradiation unit passes through the opening. Good too. In that case, the game board of a conventionally existing general pachinko game machine (a pachinko game machine with an opening in the center of the game board through which the liquid crystal display device etc. at the rear of the game board can be viewed) It is also possible to repurpose it as is. For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, installing a screen mechanism, and further placing an irradiation unit on the rear part of the game board, the irradiation unit and screen mechanism can be installed while keeping the shape of the game board as before. This makes it possible to create a new gaming machine with When such a configuration is adopted, a portion of the front of the irradiation unit protrudes further forward than the game board, so that a larger space at the rear of the pachinko game machine can be secured. By doing so, when a pachinko game machine with an irradiation unit is installed throughout the island equipment in a narrow game hall with island equipment, it becomes possible to reduce the temperature rise in the island equipment. Furthermore, in front of the illumination unit that is visible to the player (for example, around the reflector holding part B11), decorative members such as logos depending on the model can be placed, or a small-sized liquid crystal display device can be used for supplementary decoration. By arranging an illumination board, etc., the irradiation unit can be hidden so that it cannot be seen from the player, and it is possible to further enhance the performance effect.

Note that the screen device C may be installed in a state attached to the irradiation unit B, or may be installed in a state separated from the irradiation unit B.

In the modification described above, the air is discharged in the rear or side direction of the gaming machine, but similarly to the third embodiment, the air may be discharged from above the gaming machine. When the air exhaust direction is set upward, for example, an exhaust opening may be formed on the upper surface of the decorative unit 6258 (glass door 6111). In this case, if the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, an appropriate opening may be formed in the game board to ensure an air passage.

In the present invention, it is possible to form openings as appropriate in the member present on the air flow path depending on the direction in which air is taken in and the direction in which air is discharged, and the path through which the air flows. A tubular duct may be provided depending on the air flow path.

Furthermore, in order to smooth the flow of air, an intake fan and/or an exhaust fan can be appropriately provided. For example, an intake fan (for example, the intake fan 6244 in FIG. 84) may be disposed between the opening for taking in air (for example, the opening 6300R in FIG. 85) and the opening B400R in the projector cover B1, or It is possible to arrange an exhaust fan between the opening for exhausting (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 85) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if the fan provided inside the irradiation unit B can sufficiently intake and exhaust air, it is not necessary to provide a fan outside the irradiation unit B.

Note that although the above-described modification is illustrated as adopting the projector cover B1 described in FIG. 80, the structure of the projector cover is not particularly limited, and may include an opening for taking in air for cooling the projector, Further, a projector cover having an opening for discharging the air can be appropriately employed. These openings can be formed in any location such as in front, behind, above, below, or on the side of the projector cover, and the position of the openings should be determined as appropriate, taking into consideration the cooling efficiency of the projector, etc. be able to. Furthermore, the projector may be placed inside the gaming machine in an exposed state without being covered by a projector cover, and the cooling air taken in from the outside of the gaming machine may be directly supplied to the projector (via the projector cover). It is also possible to configure the system so that the

[Fourth embodiment]
The second embodiment and the third embodiment have been described above. The fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second and third embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of portions that apply to the fourth embodiment as well as those in the second embodiment and the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Display unit 9000>
FIG. 87 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. FIG. 88 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the display unit shown in FIG. 88 with the projector and mirror disassembled. FIG. 90 is a perspective view showing light being projected from the projector in a state where the projector and mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 87.

The display unit 9000 shown in FIG. 87 is replaceably placed on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 40) in the cabinet G, similar to the display unit A described in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet-side screen 9040.

The unit housing 9010 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate 9011, a right side plate 9012 erected at the right end of the bottom plate 9011, a left side plate 9013 erected at the left end of the bottom plate 9011, and a rear end of the bottom plate 9011. It has a back plate 9014 erected at the section. A right side plate 9012, a left side plate 9013, and a back plate 9014 are connected to the bottom plate 9011 by screws, thereby forming a box-shaped casing whose front side and top side are open.

A projector installation member 9015 for installing a projector 9020 is attached to the back plate 9014. The projector 9020 is installed in the unit housing 9010 by being engaged with the front part of the projector installation member 9015.

The projector 9020 has the same configuration as the projector device B2 (see FIG. 47) described in the second embodiment (for example, a lens having the same configuration as the projection lens 210, etc.), and projects light containing an image. It is possible to do so. The projector 9020 is installed with the lens facing downward, so that the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward.

A mirror installation portion 9016 for installing a mirror 9030 is formed below the projector installation member 9015. The mirror installation portion 9016 has inclined sides 9016a and 9016b that slope from the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011.

The mirror 9030 has the same configuration as the optical mirror B32 (see FIG. 42) described in the second embodiment, and can reflect the light projected from the projector 9020. The mirror 9030 is installed along the inclined sides 9016a and 9016b of the mirror installation section 9016. As a result, the mirror 9030 assumes an inclined posture such that the front side is lower than the rear side.

As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and traveling downward is reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 90). In FIG. 90, the light irradiation range is indicated by diagonal lines. Note that the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 90 is based on their relative position in the state shown in FIG. The positional relationship is the same. That is, FIG. 90 is an exploded view showing the projector 9020 and mirror 9030 while maintaining their relative positional relationship in the state shown in FIG. 88.

A cabinet-side screen 9040 is fitted to the front part of the bottom plate 9011 to stand upright. Thereby, the light projected from the projector 9020 and reflected forward by the rear mirror 9030 enters the cabinet-side screen 9040 from the rear (back side).

The cabinet side screen 9040 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The cabinet side screen 9040 is a transmissive type that displays a projection image from the rear, and has a uniformly flat entrance surface 9040a on the back side on which the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and It has a display surface 9040b on the front side on which a projected image is projected when light incident on the surface 9040a is transmitted. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is formed primarily of, for example, a translucent glass plate, acrylic plate, or resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projecting.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the entrance surface 9040a of the cabinet-side screen 9040, images related to games (still images and moving images) are displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. be done. Note that a moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and is obtained by continuously changing the large number of still images over time. In this specification, moving image and video have the same meaning.

<Relationship between light irradiation range and cabinet side screen 9040>
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen.

In FIG. 91, the cabinet-side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shown by hatching. The irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is wider than that of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Specifically, the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the entire surface (shaded area in FIG. 91) of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (incident surface 9040a) and passes through the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040. In FIG. 91, the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040 among the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is indicated by diagonal lines.

Of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passes through the shaded area in FIG. 91 travels forward of the cabinet-side screen 9040. A portion of the light that has proceeded forward of the cabinet-side screen 9040 will be incident on the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 of the upper door mechanism UD, as explained below (FIG. 96). (see (b) and (c)).

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 95 is a front view of the gaming machine.

As described in the second embodiment, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 40). The upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 92 is disposed in front of the upper space of the cabinet G and closes the upper part of the opening in the cabinet G, similarly to the upper door mechanism UD according to the second embodiment (see FIG. 39). It is set up so that it is possible.

As shown in FIG. 93, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH that forms the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. Panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. Furthermore, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 38) in the center (a position that overlaps with the cabinet side screen 9040 in front view), and the upper display window UD1 has a transparent panel UD11. It is provided. Thereby, when an image is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, the image becomes visible to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, a door-side right screen 9050 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the right side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). A door-side left screen 9060 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the left side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have substantially the same shape.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have a shape that is a curved shape of a flat screen (for example, a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and have the reel screen mechanism described in the second embodiment. Similar to the shape of F1 (see FIG. 45) in side view, the shape in top view (bottom view) is an arc shape. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed to have uniform thickness over the entire surface.

Like the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are of a transmission type in which a projection image is displayed by being projected from the rear. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed mainly of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and exhibit a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The door-side right screen 9050 has an entrance surface 9050a on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and a display surface 9050b on the front side where the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface 9050a. , has. The door-side left screen 9060 has an entrance surface 9060a on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and a display surface 9060b on the front side where the projected image is projected by the light incident on the entrance surface 9060a passing through. , has.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are each arranged so that the center of curvature is on the back side. That is, the entrance surface 9050a and display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050 and the entrance surface 9060a and display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060 are convex toward the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. There is.

FIG. 92 shows the positional relationship between the door-side right screen 9050, the door-side left screen 9060, and the cabinet-side screen 9040 arranged in the cabinet G when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. In the figure, the cabinet side screen 9040 is shown by a virtual line.

As shown in FIG. 92, the side forming the left end of the door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050c shown in FIG. 95) and the side forming the right end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040c shown in FIG. 87) are close to each other. (or substantially in contact with each other), and the side 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050 is located slightly to the right of the side 9040c of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Furthermore, the side forming the right end of the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9060c shown in FIG. 95) and the side forming the left end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040d shown in FIG. 87) are close to each other (or almost in contact with each other). ), and the side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060 is located slightly to the left of the side 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040.

Side 9050c of door-side right screen 9050, side 9060c of door-side left screen 9060, and side 9040c and side 9040d of cabinet-side screen 9040 are approximately at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are each located on substantially the same plane as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Since the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved so as to be convex forward, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are generally positioned in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040. It will be located.

In addition, the side forming the lower end of the door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050d shown in FIG. 95), the side forming the lower end of the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9060d shown in FIG. 95), and the lower end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 The sides (side 9040e shown in FIG. 87) constituting are approximately the same in position (height) in the vertical direction (these three sides are located on approximately the same plane). Furthermore, the lengths of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 in the vertical direction (sides 9050c and 9060c) are longer than the lengths of the cabinet-side screen 9040 in the vertical direction (sides 9040c and 9040d). There is. As a result, the lower ends of the door-side right screen 9050, the door-side left screen 9060, and the cabinet-side screen 9040 are located at approximately the same height, and the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are lower than the cabinet-side screen 9040. has a taller configuration.

<Displaying images on cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060>
FIG. 96(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen. FIG. 96(b) is a diagram showing how light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side right screen. FIG. 96(c) is a diagram showing how light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side left screen. 97 and 98 are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet-side screen, the door-side right screen, and the door-side left screen.

In FIG. 96(a), for convenience, the shaded area in FIG. and region III). Area I is an area located on the right side of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Area II is an area located on the left side of the cabinet-side screen 9040. Area III is an area located above the cabinet-side screen 9040. Note that in FIG. 96(a), the cabinet-side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shown by hatching, similar to FIG. 91.

As described above, a portion of the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the entrance surface 9040a of the cabinet-side screen 9040. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 96(b), among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet side screen 9040 and passed through the area I in FIG. is incident on the incident surface 9050a. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96(c), among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passes through area II in FIG. 96(a) is on the door-side left screen. The light enters the incident surface 9060a of the light beam 9060. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060.

As described above, images (still images and moving images related to games) are displayed on each of the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060. In this embodiment, each image displayed on three screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060) corresponds to one image data, and one image By using the data, images can be displayed on each of the three screens.

97 and 98 show such image data. The shaded area (area A) in FIG. 97(a) includes information indicating the image displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040. The shaded area (area B) in FIG. 97(a) includes information indicating the image displayed on the door-side right screen 9050. The shaded area (area C) in FIG. 97(a) includes information indicating the image displayed on the door-side left screen 9060. The remaining area (area D) in FIG. 97(a) includes information with a pixel value of 0. The pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of a pixel formed on a liquid crystal panel included in the projector 9020. A pixel value of 0 indicates that the light transmittance is minimum, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to the area where the pixel value is 0 is black.

FIG. 97(b) shows an example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 97(b) includes information indicating a production image 9100 in area A, information indicating a fireworks image 9101 in area B, and information indicating a character image 9102 in area C. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure contains information with a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, a performance image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, a fireworks image 9101 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050, and a character image 9102 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060.

As described above, in this embodiment, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050, the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060, and the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are: The positions in the front-rear direction are approximately the same. As a result, the distances of the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 from the projector 9020 in the front-rear direction are approximately equal, so that the focus will not shift significantly. It has become.

FIG. 98(a) shows an example of another image data. The image data shown in FIG. 98(a) includes information indicating a performance image 9100 in area A, information indicating a decorative image 9110 in area B, and information indicating a decorative image 9111 in area C. . The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure contains information with a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060. .

FIG. 98(b) shows yet another example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 98(b) includes information indicating a decorative image 9110 in area B, and information indicating a decorative image 9111 in area C. The area corresponding to the shaded area in the figure contains information with a pixel value of 0. By using such image data, a decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050, and a decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that can perform effects using a projector are known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 6-035066 and 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, an image for gaming is projected onto a projection surface such as a screen from a projector, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, in gaming machines in which images are projected onto a screen from such a projector, there has been a problem in that the screen is flat, resulting in poor performance expression.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform a variety of effects.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) Screens (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060),
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen,
The screen is arranged so that the light projected by the projector enters from the back side, and is capable of displaying an image on the front side by the light entering from the back side,
The screens include a first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040), and a second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) disposed to the side, above, or below the first screen in front view. is established,
The projector, the first screen, and the second screen are arranged so that a part of the light projected by the projector is incident on the first screen, while a part of the light projected by the projector is incident on the first screen. arranged so that at least a portion of the light that does not enter the first screen enters the second screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060) is arranged on the side of the first screen (the cabinet-side screen 9040) when viewed from the front. There is. Then, part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is made to enter the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040), while part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is made to enter the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040). At least a portion of the light that does not enter the side screen 9040) can be made to enter the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060).

Therefore, it is possible to display images on the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060), and these images are In this case, they will be displayed in a horizontal positional relationship. This allows the player to be visually informed through the images displayed on these two screens (the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and the second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060)). It is possible to entertain and perform a variety of production expressions.

(9-2) The gaming machine according to (9-1) above,
a main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and has an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and is provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making the image displayed on the first screen visible; Equipped with
The second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening/closing door.
It is characterized by

Generally, the opening/closing door of a gaming machine is decorated (shaped) according to the model of the machine, but adding such decoration requires a large amount of cost. And if you have to shape the opening/closing door and change the decoration every time you develop a new model (for each project), the costs will increase accordingly.

In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second screen (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD), and the second screen By displaying images (images that are similar in appearance to decorations) on the door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060, it is possible to avoid adding decorations unique to the model to the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD). It is also possible to obtain the same visual effect as with decoration. Therefore, it is possible to employ a simple opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) without decoration, and the cost for decoration can be suppressed. When developing a new model, there is no need to make extensive changes to the decoration of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD). ) should be prepared. As a result, if the images displayed on the second screens (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) are adapted to the new model, it is possible to obtain the same effect as changing the decoration. Cost reduction can be achieved.

In the fourth embodiment, among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that passes through region I (the region located on the right side of the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. 96(a) enters the door-side right screen 9050. , the door side so that among the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that passes through area II (the area located on the left side of the cabinet side screen 9040) in FIG. The explanation has been made assuming that the right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are respectively arranged. That is, the description has been made assuming that the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are arranged on the side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (first screen) when viewed from the front.

In the present invention, the positional relationship between the first screen (cabinet-side screen) and the second screen is not limited to this example, and the second screen is located above or below the first screen (cabinet-side screen) when viewed from the front. It may also be arranged. For example, if a door-side upper screen is provided above the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), out of the light projected from the projector 9020, area III (located above the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. The structure may be such that the light passing through the area) is incident on the upper screen on the door side. In addition, while providing a door-side lower screen below the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), an area of the light projected from the projector 9020 located below the cabinet-side screen (for example, FIG. 96(a) It may be configured such that the light passing through the region III in ) and the region opposite to each other with the cabinet-side screen 9040 in between enters the door-side lower screen. As the second screen in the present invention, all four screens of the door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen may be provided, or any one of the four screens may be provided. One, two or three screens may be provided. In addition, a screen placed on the side of such a cabinet side screen (door side right screen or door side left screen) and a screen placed above or below the cabinet side screen (door side upper screen or door side lower screen) (screen) may be configured as one screen. For example, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen may be configured to be integrated.

In the present invention, the arrangement positions of the second screens (the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, the door-side upper screen, and the door-side lower screen) in the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) are not particularly limited. That is, the second screens (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen) are provided in an area adjacent to the first screen (cabinet-side screen) when viewed from the front. Alternatively, it may be provided in an area spaced apart from the first screen (cabinet side screen) to some extent. For example, by changing the structure of the arrangement positions of the top panel mechanism HA, the upper left panel mechanism HB, the upper right panel mechanism HC, the left horizontal panel mechanism HD, the right horizontal panel mechanism HE (see Fig. 95), An upper screen, a door-side left screen, a door-side right screen, etc. may be provided. As a result, by allowing the light projected from the projector to enter the back side of these screens and displaying images on the front side, model-specific designs and Not only can model information be displayed, but such design and information can be easily changed by appropriately using image data.

The top panel mechanism HA is arranged at the upper end of the upper door mechanism UD, the left lateral panel mechanism HD is arranged at the left end of the upper door mechanism UD, and the right lateral panel mechanism HE is arranged at the right end of the upper door mechanism UD. If a second screen (door-side upper screen, door-side left screen, door-side right screen, etc.) is provided at these locations (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD), , it is necessary to widen the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector (see FIG. 91). For example, it is possible to widen the irradiation range to the maximum extent and adopt a configuration in which the entire upper door mechanism UD is irradiated (assuming that no cabinet-side screen is provided). In order to widen the irradiation range, for example, the arrangement position and inclination of the mirror 9030 may be adjusted. By adjusting the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030, the irradiation range can be changed as appropriate. So that the light reaches the placement positions of the panel mechanism HD, right side panel mechanism HE, etc. (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) (so that the light irradiates over a wide range of the upper door mechanism UD) It is possible to design. In this way, in the present invention, only the portion of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is close to the first screen (cabinet side screen) in front view is irradiated with the light projected from the projector. Alternatively, the light may be irradiated over a wider area around the outer periphery of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD).

In the fourth embodiment, as an example of image data, area A, area B, and area C shown in FIG. 97(a) are respectively separate images (in the example of FIG. 9101 and character image 9102) has been described. The image data used in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may include, for example, information indicating one image (for example, effect image 9100) spanning area A, area B, and area C. It is also possible to use image data. By using such image data, a part of one image (for example, the effect image 9100) is displayed on each of the cabinet side screen 9040, the door side right screen 9050, and the door side left screen 9060, and each screen The one image (for example, effect image 9100) is constructed by combining some of the images displayed on the screen. In this way, in the present invention, different images are displayed on the cabinet side screen and the screens arranged in its peripheral area (door side right screen, door side left screen, door side upper screen, door lower screen, etc.). may be displayed individually, or the images displayed on each screen may be combined to form a single video representation as a whole.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, a door-side right screen 9050 and a door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are provided in an exposed state on the front side of the pachislot machine 1 (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060 (second screen)). The explanation has been made assuming that no other members are provided on the front side of the screen 9060. As a result, when an image is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060, the image becomes visible to the player. However, in the present invention, a transparent panel may be provided on the front side of the second screen (the door-side right screen and the door-side left screen). If it is a transparent panel, the image displayed on the second screen will not be obstructed from the player's field of view, and it is considered that there will be no problem for the player to visually recognize the image. On the other hand, by covering the second screen with a transparent panel, the rigidity of the gaming machine can be ensured and the second screen can be prevented from being damaged. When providing a transparent panel, the shape of the transparent panel is not particularly limited, but for example, a transparent panel with unevenness can be used. This makes it possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the images displayed on the second screens (door-side right screen and door-side left screen), creating an appearance similar to when three-dimensional decoration is applied to the opening/closing door itself. can be created.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 has been described as being a shape obtained by curving a flat screen (the shape in a top view is an arc shape). However, the shapes of the second screens (the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen) in the present invention are not particularly limited, and screens having any shape can be appropriately employed. For example, the second screen may be a flat screen like the cabinet side screen 9040, a screen with unevenness, or a rounded screen. , the screen may have an angular shape.

[Fifth embodiment]
The second to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of parts that apply to the fifth embodiment as well as those described in the second to fourth embodiments will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 99 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper door mechanism and cabinet.

In FIG. 99, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is shown using a dashed line. Similar to the fourth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 90).

In the fourth embodiment, it has been described that a portion of the light that has traveled forward in this manner enters the cabinet-side screen 9040 (see FIG. 88) from the rear (back side). In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the cabinet-side screen 9040 is not provided, and all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

As will be described later, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 102 and 103). The light projected from the projector 9020 enters the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 from behind (back side), and an image is formed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. It will be displayed. The details will be explained below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen unit 1040, a decoration unit 1050, and an indirect lighting unit 1060. Each unit will be explained below.

<Screen unit 1040>
FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 104 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 105 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member viewed from the front while the transparent plate and the screen sheet are viewed from the rear. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the upper holding member and the upper frame viewed from below. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the transparent plate, screen sheet, and lower frame seen from the rear.

Note that FIG. 102 shows each component of the upper door mechanism UD as viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 103 shows each component of the upper door mechanism UD viewed diagonally from the rear. In FIG. 104, the transparent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown assembled, and the lower frame UD100 is shown existing independently. There is. In FIG. 105, the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are shown assembled, and the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown individually. FIG. 106 shows how the upper holding member UD102 and the upper frame UD110 exist independently. FIG. 107 shows a state in which the transparent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, and the lower frame UD100 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the screen unit 1040 includes a transparent plate 1045 and a screen sheet 1046.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 is mainly made of a transparent resin such as an acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The light-transmitting plate 1045 includes a flat part 1045a located at the center, a curved part 1045b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat part 1045a, and a curved part 1045b continuously formed rearward from the rear end of the curved part 1045b. and a side surface portion 1045c continuously formed. The plane portion 1045a and the side surface portion 1045c are formed into a planar shape, and their surfaces are substantially orthogonal to each other. The curved portion 1045b has the shape of a curved flat plate, like the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 93) in the fourth embodiment.

The screen sheet 1046 is a transmissive screen that is displayed by projecting a projection image from behind, and is similar to the screens in the fourth embodiment (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060). ), it has an entrance surface on the back side into which the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and a display surface on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. The screen sheet 1046 is made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and is formed to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and has a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projecting. exhibit color.

The screen sheet 1046 includes a flat portion 1046a located at the center and curved portions 1046b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 1046a. The plane portion 1046a is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 1046b has a shape obtained by curving a flat plate. The flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 have substantially the same size and shape as the flat portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the transparent plate 1045.

The screen sheet 1046 is arranged on the back side of the transparent plate 1045. Specifically, the back surface of the flat portion 1045a of the transparent plate 1045 and the front surface of the flat portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other, and the back surface of the curved portion 1045b of the transparent plate 1045 is in close contact with the front surface of the flat portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046. and the front surface of the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the incident surface (back side surface) of the screen sheet 1046, images related to games (still images, etc.) are displayed on the display surface (front side surface) of the screen sheet 1046. (video) is displayed. The transparent plate 1045 is formed to be transparent, and there is no structure in front of the transparent plate 1045 that blocks the player's view. Therefore, when an image is displayed on the screen sheet 1046, the image is not visible to the player. It becomes visible from

Further, the screen sheet 1046 has a flat portion 1046a and a curved portion 1046b, and since the positions of the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b are different in the depth direction, an image is displayed on both the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b. By displaying, a three-dimensional effect can be given to the entire image displayed on the screen sheet 1046. Further, in the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046, the curved portion 1045b and the curved portion 1046b are formed by forming (molding in an open space), respectively, so that, for example, when the curved portion is formed by vacuum processing etc. Image deformation can be suppressed compared to .

The transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 configured as above are held down by the lower frame UD100 and the upper frame UD110, with the lower part being pressed down by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper part being pressed down by the upper pressing member UD102. Supported.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the lower frame UD100 is formed as a U-shaped member, and includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate UD100a and a bottom plate UD100a that slightly protrudes upward at the front end of the bottom plate UD100a. A right side portion UD100c extending in the vertical direction at the right end of the bottom plate UD100a, and a left side portion UD100d extending in the vertical direction at the left end of the bottom plate UD100a. The transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are placed on the bottom plate UD100a with the transparent plate 1045 in contact with the bottom plate UD100a, the right side UD100c, and the left side UD100d. In this state, the lower front surface of the transparent plate 1045 contacts the wall portion UD100b. The wall portion UD100b has a shape corresponding to the flat portion 1045a, the curved portion 1045b, and the side portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 so that the entire lower front surface of the transparent plate 1045 can come into contact with the wall portion UD100b.

As shown in FIG. 105, the lower pressing member UD101 is formed in a plate shape, and its front side surface (pressing surface UD101a) has a curved shape with a planar portion corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. It has a formed part. With the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 placed on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100, the lower pressing member UD101 is fixed to the lower frame UD100, so that the lower part of the screen sheet 1046 is placed on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100. It is held between the wall portion UD100b and the transparent plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101, and is pressed down by the pressing surface UD101a. Note that the lower holding member UD101 can be attached to the lower frame UD100 by screwing a screw passed through the screw insertion hole UD101b (see FIG. 104) into the screw hole UD100e of the lower frame UD100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the upper frame UD110 is formed as a member having a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a bottom surface UD110a extending in the left-right direction and a slight downward direction from the front part of the bottom surface UD110a. It includes a protruding wall portion UD110b. With the upper frame UD110 fixed to the lower frame UD100, the upper edge of the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 touch the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, and the front surface of the transparent plate 1045 The upper part is positioned so as to abut against the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110. The wall portion UD110b has a shape corresponding to the light-transmitting plate 1045 so that the upper front surface of the light-transmitting plate 1045 can come into contact with it over a certain range.

The front side surface (pressing surface UD102a, see FIG. 105) of the upper pressing member UD102 has a planar portion and a curved portion corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. With the upper surface of the upper holding member UD102 in contact with the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, the screw inserted through the screw insertion hole UD102b (see FIG. 106) is inserted into the screw hole formed on the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110. It is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing into the UD110c. Thereby, the upper part of the screen sheet 1046 is held between the wall portion UD110b and the transparent plate 1045 of the upper frame UD110 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102, and is pressed by the pressing surface UD102a.

As described above, the lower part of the screen sheet 1046 is pressed down by the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper part is pressed down by the upper pressing member UD102. The pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102 each have a curved portion corresponding to the shape of the screen sheet 1046. This allows the screen sheet 1046 to be brought into close contact with the transparent plate 1045 while suppressing the formation of a gap between the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 and the generation of wrinkles on the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the image viewed by the player from being distorted.

As shown in FIG. 107, when the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other and viewed from the rear, the flat part 1045a and the curved part 1045b of the transparent plate 1045 are different from the flat part of the screen sheet 1046. 1046a and the curved portion 1046b, the side surface portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed.

Although not shown, a cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046. Therefore, a gap exists between the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 and the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), which corresponds to at least the length of the side surface portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 in the front-rear direction. For clarity, such gaps are shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 107.

An image is displayed on the portions of the transparent plate 1045 that are covered by the screen sheet 1046 (flat portion 1045a and curved portion 1045b), while the exposed portions of the transparent plate 1045 that are not covered by the screen sheet 1046. No image is displayed on the side surface portion 1045c (that is, the shaded area in FIG. 107). As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image stands out at a position spaced forward from the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), realizing a variety of image expressions. be able to.

<Decoration unit 1050>
FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet viewed from the rear.

In addition, in FIG. 108, the first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are shown assembled, and the upper frame UD110, the screen sheet 1056 , and screen sheet 1057 are shown as existing independently.

As shown in FIG. 108, the decoration unit 1050 includes a first structure 1051 placed in the center, a second structure 1052 placed around the first structure 1051, and a second structure 1052 adjacent to the second structure 1052. It includes a third structure 1053, a fourth structure 1054 adjacent to the third structure 1053, and a screen sheet 1056 and a screen sheet 1057 arranged on the back side of these structures.

The first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. The screen sheet 1056 is placed on the back side of the first structure 1051 and the second structure 1052 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1057 is placed on the back side of the third structure 1053 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are arranged adjacent to each other and have shapes that allow them to fit into each other at adjacent portions. The fourth structure 1054 is arranged on the back side of the speaker storage section UD110d of the upper frame UD110, and a speaker (not shown) is arranged together with the fourth structure 1054 on the back side of the speaker storage section UD110d.

The first structure 1051 is made of a translucent material (eg, acrylic resin, etc.), and is formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (eg, character shape). The second structure 1052 is made of a light-transmitting material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.), and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape resembling a flame). The third structure 1053 is made of a translucent material (eg, acrylic resin, etc.), and is formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (eg, a shape imitating a chain). The fourth structure 1054 is made of a light-transmitting material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.), and is formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape resembling a chain).

The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are transmissive screens on which a projected image is projected from the rear, and like the screen sheet 1046, the incident light on the back side where the light projected from the projector 9020 enters. and a display surface on the front side on which a projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and are formed to have an even thickness over the entire surface, and are milky white or semi-white when not projecting. It is transparent or gray in color.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the incident surface (back surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and screen sheet 1057, the display surface (front surface) of the screen sheet 1056 and screen sheet 1057 is illuminated. , images related to games (still images and moving images) are displayed.

Here, the third structure 1053 has a configuration in which a half mirror (magic mirror) is formed on its front side. A half mirror can be formed by attaching a semi-transparent film sheet to the surface of a substrate or depositing a metal film using conventionally known methods. It has the property of being reflective but partially transmitting.

By arranging such a half mirror on the front side of the screen sheet 1057, when no light is projected from the projector 9020, objects existing around the third structure 1053 are reflected. It will look like a part that has been decorated with. As the object existing around the third structure 1053, for example, a structure imitating a chain as shown in FIG. 100 can be provided. Note that the structure shaped like a chain may be provided near the third structure 1053, or the third structure 1053 (half mirror) itself may be formed in the shape. On the other hand, when light is being projected from the projector 9020, the image displayed on the screen sheet 1057 will be reflected on the half mirror. For example, an image in which objects existing around the third structure 1053 or objects having a shape similar to the shape of the third structure 1053 (shape imitating a chain) are flowing and moving is displayed on the screen sheet 1057. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect that makes it appear as if the object, which was stationary, is moving when no light is projected from the projector 9020. In this way, according to the above configuration, an attractive performance can be created using both the shaped object and the video related to the shaped object.

The screen sheet 1056 also includes a diffusion layer for diffusing light and a prism layer in which a plurality of unit prisms each having a convex shape on the incident surface side are arranged. Thereby, the light projected from the projector 9020 is diffused, and together with the shaped object placed on the front side of the screen sheet 1056, an attractive presentation can be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, when the first structure 1051 is formed in the shape of the character "GOD", by displaying an image corresponding to the character "GOD" on the screen sheet 1056, the character "GOD" is displayed. It is possible to create an appearance that makes the characters appear as if they are shining brightly. Furthermore, the center of the light projected from the projector 9020 (irradiation light emitted from near the optical axis of the projection lens) enters the screen sheet 1046, and the screen sheet 1056 is placed at a position away from the center of the angle of view. However, by providing a prism layer with a high light condensing effect, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the image displayed on the screen sheet 1056 from decreasing. Note that, similarly to the screen sheet 1057, a half mirror may also be arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056.

<Indirect lighting unit 1060>
FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, screen sheet, lower frame, LED board, and light guide member viewed from the rear. FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the light transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member viewed from the front. FIG. 111 is a perspective view of a cross section of the light transmitting plate, screen sheet, lower frame, LED board, and light guide member viewed from the front.

Note that FIG. 109 shows the light-transmitting plate 1045, screen sheet 1046, lower frame UD100, LED board 1061, and light-guiding member 1062, with the light-guiding member 1062 removed from the assembled state. . In FIG. 110, the transparent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, and the light guide member 1062 are shown in the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 with the lower frame UD100 slightly shifted from the assembled state. is shown enlarged. In FIG. 111, the light-transmitting plate 1045, screen sheet 1046, lower frame UD100, LED board 1061, and light guide member 1062 are cut in a horizontal plane when they are assembled, with an enlarged view of the vicinity of the light guide member 1062. It is shown as follows.

As shown in FIG. 101, the indirect lighting units 1060 are arranged along the right side UD100c and the left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and each indirect lighting unit 1060 has a symmetrical configuration. There is.

As shown in FIG. 109, the indirect lighting unit 1060 includes an LED board 1061 and a light guide member 1062.

The LED board 1061 is arranged slightly to the left of the right side UD100c of the lower frame UD100 and slightly to the right of the left side UD100d (slightly inside the side surface 1045c of the transparent plate 1045), and is arranged substantially parallel to the side surface 1045c. . A plurality of LEDs 1061a are provided on the LED board 1061 at equal intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, the LED 1061a of the LED board 1061 placed near the right side UD 100c is installed to emit light in the right direction, and the LED 1061a of the LED board 1061 placed near the left side UD 100d is installed to emit light in the left direction. It is installed so that it emits light. The LED board 1061 is arranged so that a part thereof overlaps with the side surface 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 when viewed from the side, but the installation position of the LED 1061a is behind the rear end of the side surface 1045c. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 1061a is not blocked by the side surface portion 1045c. Note that the LED board 1061 is arranged slightly apart from the side surface portion 1045c.

The light guide member 1062 is a member having substantially the same height as the right side UD100c and left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and has a plurality of openings 1062a that open inwardly formed in the vertical direction. The light guide member 1062 has screw holes 1062b formed in each of the upper and lower parts, and the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the LED board 1061 by screws inserted through the screw holes 1061b formed in the LED board 1061. be done. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062.

Further, the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 by screws inserted through a screw hole 1062c formed in the upper part thereof and a screw hole UD100f formed in the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. be done.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110, the light guide member 1062 has a plurality of openings 1062d that open in the front direction formed in the vertical direction. The opening 1062a shown in FIG. 109 and the opening 1062d shown in FIG. 110 communicate inside the light guide member 1062. Further, in the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100, a plurality of openings UD100g penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the up-down direction. Thereby, in the state where the light guide member 1062 is attached to the lower frame UD100, the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062 and the opening UD100g of the lower frame UD100 communicate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 111, the inside of the light guide member 1062 is a reflector that changes the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a. The light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a of the light guide member 1062 and enters the inside of the light guide member 1062, then changes its direction of travel from sideways to forward and passes through the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062. , is emitted forward from the opening UD100g of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d). The arrow in FIG. 111 indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 1061a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 111, the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is in contact with the side surface 1045c of the transparent plate 1045. Further, the rear end of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) and the rear end of the side surface 1045c are approximately the same in the front-rear direction, and the length of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) in the front-rear direction is It is shorter than the length of the portion 1045c in the front-rear direction. Although not shown, a cabinet G is arranged on the back side of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. The front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) is close to (substantially in contact with) the rear end of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d), and the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) are They are located approximately on the same plane.

The indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the side surface 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 so as to have the above-mentioned positional relationship with surrounding members. Then, the light emitted from the LED 1061a is emitted forward along the side surface 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045. As explained using FIG. 107, the side surface 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 is not covered by the screen sheet 1046, and no image is displayed in that area (the shaded area in FIG. 107), so the image stands out. It is possible to give a similar impression to the player. In this embodiment, the light of the LED 1061a is emitted from the part where the image is not displayed (along the side surface 1045c of the transparent plate 1045), so that the part where the image is displayed and the image are displayed. By emphasizing the boundary between the image and the non-image area, it is possible to more clearly give the player the impression that the image stands out.

<Attachment of upper door mechanism UD to cabinet G>
FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook portion, and the front side protruding member viewed from the rear. FIG. 113 is a side perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook, and the front side protruding member. FIG. 114 is a side perspective view of the cabinet, the hook, and the front side protruding member. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional right side view of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hook, and the front side protruding member. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from below. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism seen from the rear.

Note that FIG. 112 shows a state in which the hook portion UD120 and the front side protrusion member G120 are removed from the upper door mechanism UD. In FIG. 113, the hook portion UD120 is shown attached to the upper door mechanism UD, and the front side protrusion member G120 is shown removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 114 shows how the hook portion UD120 and the front side protrusion member G120 are attached to the cabinet G. FIG. 115 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD, the cabinet G, the hook portion UD120, and the front side protruding member G120 are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction when the upper door mechanism UD is closed with respect to the cabinet G. ing. For clarity, in FIG. 115, the hook portion UD120 and the front side protruding member G120 are shown with diagonal lines. FIG. 116 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. FIG. 117 shows how the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD are viewed from different directions when they are not assembled, with the lower door mechanism DD being viewed from an angle closer to the side. are doing. FIG. 118 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G.

The upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G by a hook portion UD120 and a front side protruding member G120.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the hook portion UD120 is a member that projects rearward from the upper frame UD110, and a notch UD120b with an open bottom is formed in the main surface UD120a. A screw hole UD120c is formed in a surface perpendicular to the main surface UD120a of the hook portion UD120, and the hook portion UD120 is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. By fixing the hook portion UD120 to the upper frame UD110, the main surface UD120a is arranged along the front-rear direction.

The front side protruding member G120 has a horizontally arranged main surface G120a, a front end central part G120b formed by bending upward the front end center area of the main surface G120a, and a front end center part G120b formed by bending the front right side of the main surface G120a upward. The front end of the main surface G120a is bent upward between the formed front end right side part G120c, the front left side part G120d formed by bending the front left side of the main surface G120a upward, and the front end center part G120b and the front right side part G120c. and a right placement part G120e formed by bending the main surface G120a upward and backward between the front center part G120b and the front left side part G120d. and a rear side portion G120g formed by bending downward the rear portions of both the left end and the right end of the main surface G120a.

The front right side G120c and the front left side G120d are formed behind the front center G120b, and the heights of the front center G120b, the front right side G120c, and the front left side G120d are approximately the same. Further, the right placing portion G120e and the left placing portion G120f are formed at the rear of the front end right side portion G120c and the front end left side portion G120d, respectively, and the heights of the right placing portion G120e and the left placing portion G120f are , are substantially the same, and their heights are higher than the heights of the front end center portion G120b, the front right side portion G120c, and the front left side portion G120d. Further, the right placing portion G120e and the left placing portion G120f have horizontally arranged surfaces.

A screw hole G120h is formed in the rear side portion G120g, and the front side protruding member G120 is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G from the inside with a screw inserted through the screw hole G120h. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the front side protruding member G120 is fixed to the cabinet G, so that the front part of the main surface UD120a (front end center part G120b, front right side part G120c, front left side part G120d, right (including the placing portion G120e and the left placing portion G120f) protrudes forward from the cabinet G.

On the other hand, an inner side protruding member G2a (for example, a screw screwed into the inner side of the side wall G2) that protrudes inward is provided on the inner side of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G. The notch UD120b is hooked on the inner side protruding member G2a. Thereby, the hook portion UD120 is locked to the cabinet G.

As shown in FIG. 116, the lower frame UD100 includes a lower side surface UD100h as a surface facing below the bottom plate UD100a (see FIG. 104). A plurality of downward protrusions UD100i that protrude downward are formed on the lower side surface UD100h. The downward protruding portion UD100i has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and extends forward from the rear end of the lower side surface UD100h. A screw hole UD100e (see FIG. 104) is formed at the rear end of the downward protrusion UD100i.

As shown in FIG. 117, the lower door mechanism DD includes an upper plate DD100 horizontally arranged in the left-right direction at its upper part. As shown in FIG. 118, when the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G, the rear edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 is connected to the lower protrusion UD100i formed on the lower frame UD100. It is close to (approximately in contact with) the front end.

Since the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are configured as described above, when attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G), first, the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G. While placing the lower surface of the upper wall of the UD110 on the upper surface of the right mounting part G120e and the left mounting part G120f of the front side protrusion member G120, the notch UD120b of the hook part UD120 is hooked on the inner side protrusion member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the rear edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 of the lower door mechanism DD hits the downward protrusion UD100i of the lower frame UD100, and the upper door mechanism UD is pushed rearward. It will be done. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed to the cabinet G.

In this embodiment, since the upper door mechanism UD can be closed as described above, the upper door mechanism UD is not provided with a hinge for connecting to the cabinet G. If a hinge is provided, the range in which images can be displayed on the side portion of the gaming machine is limited, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the upper part of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is A wide range in the door mechanism UD can be secured as an image display area. Specifically, the range extending to the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 (the rear ends of both the left and right curved portions 1045b of the transparent plate 1045) is included in the irradiation range in the left and right direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. becomes possible. This makes it possible to perform powerful performances on a large screen.

Also, three screens, screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057, are provided, but as in the fourth embodiment, information indicating the image displayed on each screen is combined into one image data. If included (see FIGS. 97 and 98), images can be displayed on each of the three screens by using the one image data.

Note that when the upper door mechanism UD is closed as described above, a slight gap is formed between the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G (see FIG. 115), but foreign matter cannot enter through the gap. Even if the foreign matter comes into contact with the cabinet G, the presence of the front side protruding member G120 can prevent the foreign matter from penetrating further into the cabinet G.

[Sixth embodiment]
The second to fifth embodiments have been described above. The sixth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of parts that apply to the sixth embodiment as well as those described in the second to fifth embodiments will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the gaming machine seen from the front with the upper door mechanism and lower door mechanism removed. FIG. 120 is a side perspective view of how light is projected from the projector device.

As shown in FIG. 119, an irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G. Similar to the second embodiment (see FIG. 41), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, and a projector device B2 and a mirror. A projector cover B1 that accommodates a mechanism B3 is provided.

The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from the second embodiment, and the reflector holding part B11 (see FIG. 45) is formed above the projector device B2 instead of in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 123). . Similar to the second embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding part B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 includes an optical mirror B32 that can reflect the light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 42).

In this embodiment, the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted toward the rear than the front, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11, and the projector device B2 is placed above. Note that the configuration of the mirror mechanism B3 itself is the same as that in the second embodiment, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having an inclination that is lower at the rear than at the front (a steeper inclination than the optical mirror B32).

As a result, the light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 120). In FIG. 120, the light irradiation range is indicated by diagonal lines. Similar to the fifth embodiment, all the light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward reaches the upper door mechanism UD. The upper door mechanism UD has the same configuration as the fifth embodiment, and the light projected from the projector device B2 is transmitted through the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 100 to 103). The light enters each of the screen sheets from behind (back side), and images are displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets.

<Adjusting the traveling direction of the irradiated light>
FIG. 121 is a side perspective view of the irradiation unit. FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit seen from the rear.

As described in the second embodiment, the projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being covered by the case B22 (see FIG. 47).

Specifically, square holes 2201c are provided in the right and left parts of the upper pedestal B220, respectively (see FIG. 48). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 by a mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted into the square hole 2201c. Although FIG. 51 shows how the mounting screw T is inserted from below the square hole 2201c, in this embodiment, the mounting screw T is inserted from above the square hole 2201c (the screw head is on the upper back side). ) is inserted. Note that the upper pedestal B220 may be attached to another member fixed inside the cabinet G instead of the projector cover B1.

In addition, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 47), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 from below by screwing. It will be done. Although the configuration of the case B22 is not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the case B22 (see FIG. 57) having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is adopted. The case B22 houses internal components of the projector device B2, such as a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 47), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, etc., and a projector control board B23 is housed on the bottom surface of the case B22. (see FIG. 47) is fixed.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has vertical and horizontal inner diameters larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. Thereby, the attachment position of the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-back direction. The details of the method for adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are the same as described using FIG. 51, so the explanation here will be omitted.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw parts 2210 (see FIGS. 47 and 49). . Thereby, the interval between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so as not to be located on the same straight line in a plane (horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the upper side of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are By appropriately changing the distance between the pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, it is possible to adjust the degree of inclination of the lower pedestal B221 in the three-dimensional space with respect to the upper pedestal B220. The details of the method for adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are the same as described using FIG. 52, so the description thereof will be omitted here.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, it is possible to appropriately adjust the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the projector cover B1, and it is possible to arrange the projector device B2 at an appropriate position. . In addition, the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 can be adjusted as appropriate, and the posture of the case B22 (lens unit B21, etc., which is an internal component of the projector device B2) supported by the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted. It can be made appropriate. In this way, the projector device B2 is configured to be able to change its position and posture within the cabinet G and adjust the emitting position, traveling direction, and irradiation range of the irradiated light.

As shown in FIG. 121, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged at the rear of the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear sides of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are open. Thereby, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed toward the rear. Although not shown, the mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also exposed toward the rear.

As shown in FIG. 122, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper and rear sides of the reflector holding part B11 are open.

An angle adjustment hole B111 (see FIG. 44) is formed in the reflector holding portion B11, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjustment hole B111 from above (back side). As described in the second embodiment, the distance between the reflector holding part B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw. As a result, the position (posture) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding part B11 is changed, and the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (the traveling direction of the irradiation light after reflection) is adjusted. It is possible to do so.

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 123 is a longitudinal sectional view of the cabinet. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, the closure lid, and the back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 125 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall. FIG. 126 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine shown in FIG. 125. FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the closure lid and back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the closure lid and back wall of the cabinet. FIG. 129 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the gaming machine with the closing lid attached to the back wall.

As shown in FIG. 123, when the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged at the rear of the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are positioned to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned to face the closure lid G100. A space in which no other members are present is formed behind the upper pedestal B220.

Further, at the rear upper part of the cabinet G, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged. A space in which no other members are present is formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and this space is connected to the rear space of the upper pedestal B220. Note that in FIG. 123, the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2 is indicated by diagonal lines.

Note that the irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3 by fastening screws. As shown in FIG. 122, screw holes B100a to B100d for inserting screws are formed in the rear part of the projector cover B1. When the irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3, the surface B110a in which the screw hole B100a is formed, the surface B110b in which the screw hole B100b is formed, and the surface B110c in which the screw holes B100c and d are formed are , each abut against the inner surface (front surface) of the rear wall G3. These surfaces B110a to B110c are formed separately from each other, so that the projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear space of the upper pedestal B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding part B11 are open. ing.

As shown in FIG. 124, an operation window G10 is formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening through which the inside of the cabinet G can be visually recognized from the outside. The operation window G10 can be closed by a closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 125, when viewed from the rear with the closure lid G100 removed from the back wall G3, the connecting portions R1 and R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are seen through the operation window G10. , R3 (particularly the nut 2213, see FIG. 52), and the head (not shown) of the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 are visible through the operation window G10. This allows the nut 2213 to be operated from outside the cabinet G, and by turning the nut 2213 as appropriate, the attitude of the projector device B2 can be adjusted. Furthermore, by operating the mounting screw T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the position of the mounting screw T within the opening range of the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the position of the projector device B2 can be moved. can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, when the occluding lid G100 is removed from the back wall G3 and the vicinity of the operation window G10 is looked up from the lower side of the back side, the angle of the reflector holding part B11 can be seen through the operation window G10. The head of the screw (not shown) inserted into the adjustment hole B111 can also be visually recognized. This allows the screw to be operated from outside the cabinet G, and by turning the screw appropriately, the attitude of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

The structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described below. FIG. 127 shows the operating window G10 and the closing lid G100 as viewed obliquely from the rear. FIG. 128 shows the operating window G10 and the closing lid G100 as viewed diagonally from the front.

As shown in FIG. 127, the operation window G10 includes an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (back side a peripheral edge G10b formed to have a square-shaped surface at a recessed position with respect to the surface), four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral edge G10b, and an outer edge and a back wall of the peripheral edge G10b. A connecting portion G10d that connects to the outer surface of G3 is provided. As shown in FIG. 128, the peripheral edge G10b is not visible from the front, but since the screw hole G10c passes through the rear wall G3, it can be seen from the front. It is shown that a screw hole G10c is formed on the side.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a recess is formed in the outer surface of the rear wall G3, and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the recess. have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess where no opening is formed corresponds to the peripheral edge G10b. Note that the peripheral portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the back wall G3, and the connecting portion G10d is formed as a flat surface in the horizontal and vertical directions.

The closure lid G100 is configured as a plate-like member, and includes a back surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the back surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. A portion G100c and a peripheral portion G100d formed forward from the peripheral edge of the back surface G100a. The back surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (rear surface G100a) is approximately the same as the outer shape of the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral edge G10b), and is smaller than the opening G10a of the operation window G10. is also getting bigger. As a result, by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 so as to fill the recess), the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed. It has become.

To explain in more detail, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 is along the connecting part G10d of the operation window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operation window G10 and the closing The four bosses G100c of the lid G100 overlap each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3) by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole G10c from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss part G100c. It will be done. Thereby, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Since the screws for fastening the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 are screwed together from the inside of the cabinet G (with the screw head positioned inside the cabinet G), security for the inside of the cabinet G is ensured. can be ensured.

In addition, when adjusting the position and posture of the projector device B2 and mirror mechanism B3, with the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD open, tighten the screws that fasten the closing lid G100 and the rear wall G3. The screw fastening can be released by operating from the front side and turning it appropriately. Thereby, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the back wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) that has been closed by the closing lid G100 can be exposed. In this state, the attachment inserted from the outside (back side) of the cabinet G through the opening G10a into the connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220. By operating the screw T, which is inserted into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holding part B11), the position and orientation of the projector device B2 and mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

Here, in the closure lid G100, the length from the front surface G100b to the front end of the peripheral edge G100d (the forward protrusion length of the peripheral edge G100d based on the front surface G100b), and the tip of the boss portion G100c from the front surface G100b. The length up to (the height of the boss portion G100c) is equal. Therefore, when the closing lid G100 is arranged such that the front end of the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 comes into contact with the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10, the tip of the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 also It comes into contact with the peripheral edge G10b of the window G10.

FIG. 129 shows how the closure lid G100 is placed in such a state. In FIG. 129, the shaded portion indicates the closing lid G100 (front surface G100b), and the diagonally shaded portion indicates the back wall G3 (periphery of the opening G10a). A space S is formed between the shaded part (the front surface G100b of the closure lid G100) and the diagonal part (the periphery of the opening G10a), and the width of the space S (length in the front-rear direction) is equal to the above-mentioned width. This corresponds to the "forward protrusion length of the peripheral portion G100d" and the "height of the boss portion G100c."

By adopting such a configuration, the closing lid G100 can be stably attached to the back wall G3, and the closing lid G100 (the front end of the peripheral portion G100d) and the back wall G3 (the operating window G10 It is possible to avoid a gap from being formed between the peripheral edge G10b) and prevent fraudulent acts from being committed through the gap.

Further, the peripheral edge G10b of the operation window G10 is formed to have a step with respect to the outer surface of the back wall G3 by the length of the connecting part G10d in the front-rear direction, and the peripheral edge G10b of the closing lid G100 is The length of the portion G100d in the front-rear direction (the forward protrusion length of the peripheral edge portion G100d based on the back surface G100a) is approximately the same as the length of the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10 in the front-rear direction (the length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10). (It is slightly shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d of G10). The length in the front-rear direction of the peripheral edge G100d of the closing lid G100 and the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10 are each constant over the entire circumference. As a result, when the occluding lid G100 is attached to the back wall G3, the back surface G100a of the occluding lid G100 forms approximately the same plane as the outer surface of the back wall G3 (slightly smaller than the outer surface of the back wall G3). (located at the front), making it difficult to recognize the presence of the closing lid G100 from the outside.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that can perform effects using a projector are known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 6-035066 and 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, an image for gaming is projected onto a projection surface such as a screen from a projector, so that the image is displayed on a screen or the like instead of a liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in gaming machines equipped with such projectors, once the projector is fixed inside the gaming machine, it has been difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which adjustments can be made to a projector while the projector is attached inside the gaming machine.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(10-1) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057),
a projector (internal components of projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
Adjustment unit for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, attachment part of upper pedestal B220 to projector cover B1, mirror mechanism) B3 attachment part to reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a housing section (cabinet G) that houses the projector;
The accommodation section is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment section can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) that can close the opening is attached. There is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the accommodating section (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) includes the projector (internal components of the projector device B2, etc.). (lens unit B21, etc.))) (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221; An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the attachment part, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) ) is attached to a closing member (closing lid G100). Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the storage section (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) that is closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) can be made to appear. It is possible to access the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) from the outside of the housing part (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the housing section (cabinet G), the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) etc.)) is installed inside the housing part (cabinet G), and from the outside of the housing part (cabinet G), the adjustment part (the connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the upper By operating the attachment part of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.), the image is projected by the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)). The traveling direction of the light can be adjusted.

(10-2) Screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057),
a projector (internal components of projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
Adjustment unit for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, attachment part of upper pedestal B220 to projector cover B1, mirror mechanism) B3 attachment part to reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a main body (cabinet G) that houses the projector and has an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area for making images displayed on the screen visible;
Separately from the front surface, the main body section is provided with an opening (opening G10a of operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment section can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid) that can close the opening. G100) is installed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is housed in the main body (cabinet G). (lens unit B21, etc.))) (connection parts R1, R2, R3 between upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221; An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the attachment part, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) ) is attached to a closing member (closing lid G100). Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) that is closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) can be made to appear. It is possible to access the adjustment section (the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10). , the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (internal components of projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the main body (cabinet G), the projector (internal components of projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) etc.)) is installed inside the main body (cabinet G), and from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the adjustment part (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the upper By operating the attachment part of the pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11, etc.), the image is projected by the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)). The traveling direction of the light can be adjusted.

(10-3) The gaming machine according to (10-2) above,
The closing member (closure lid G100) is attached to the main body by screwing from the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Therefore, in order to remove the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), it is necessary to unscrew it from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Thereby, it is possible to avoid removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), and while ensuring security for the inside of the main body (cabinet G), It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out from outside the main body (cabinet G).

In the present invention, the method of attaching the closing member (closing lid G100) to the main body (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). It may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing together, or it may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). Further, the closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by a method other than screwing. For example, a guide member for allowing the closing member (closing lid G100) to slide along the wall surface (inner surface or outer surface of the rear wall G3) of the main body (cabinet G) is installed in the cabinet G ( It may be formed in a rail shape on the inside or outside of the back wall G3), and a closing member (closing lid G100) may be locked on the guide member. By sliding the closing member (closing lid G100) on the guide member in the left-right direction (or front-back direction), the opening (opening G10a of the operating window G10) is closed and the opening (operating window G10) is closed. If the configuration is configured such that the open state in which the opening G10a) of G10 is opened can be switched, it is possible to operate the adjustment section from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in the open state, similar to the sixth embodiment. Additionally, the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be adjusted. In addition, in view of such effects, in the present invention, the structure of the closing member (closing lid G100) is not essential, and the closing member (closing lid G100) is not attached to the main body (cabinet G), and the structure of the closing member (closing lid G100) is not required. The opening provided in (cabinet G) (opening G10a of operation window G10) may be configured to be always open.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening G10a of the operating window G10 is formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the closing lid G10 is attached. In the present invention, an opening (opening G10a of operation window G10) is provided in any wall surface (for example, back wall G3, side wall G2, top wall G4, etc.) constituting the main body (cabinet G), and a closed It is possible to configure so that a member (closing lid G100) is attached. For example, instead of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be provided in the side wall G2 or the top wall G4, and a closing member (closure lid G100) may be attached. In such a configuration, adjusting parts (for example, the connection parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the reflector of the mirror mechanism B3) The attachment portion to the holding portion B11, etc.) may be arranged near the side wall G2 or the top wall G4. Note that when an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in the upper wall G4 and a closing member (closure lid G100) is attached, the opening G41 and the plate member G42 (see FIG. 36) are respectively connected to the operation window G10. Alternatively, the opening G10a and the closing lid G10 of the operation window G10 may be adopted as the opening G10a and the closing lid G10, or a configuration corresponding to the opening G10a of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G10 may be adopted separately while not forming the opening G41 and the plate member G42. It may also be a thing.

In addition, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in a plurality of walls (for example, two or three of the back wall G3, side wall G2, and top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). It is also possible to provide a closing member (closing lid G100). For example, an adjusting section for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, the connecting sections R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the attachment section of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1) etc.), an opening G10a of an operation window G10 is provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and a closing lid G10 is attached, while an adjustment is made to adjust the position (posture) of the mirror mechanism B3. An opening G10a of the operation window G10 is provided in the upper wall G4 of the cabinet G, and a closing lid G10 is attached so that the part (for example, the attachment part of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding part B11) can be operated from the outside. It may also be a thing.

In addition, a plurality of openings (opening G10a of the operation window G10) are provided in one wall surface (for example, the back wall G3, the side wall G2, or the top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G), and each opening is A closing member (closing lid G100) that can be closed may be attached. For example, an adjusting section for adjusting the position (posture) of the projector device B2 (for example, the connecting sections R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the attachment section of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1) etc.), a first opening is provided near the center of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, and a first closing lid that can close the first opening is attached so that the mirror mechanism B3 can be operated from the outside. A second opening is provided above the first opening so that an adjustment section for adjusting the position (attitude) (for example, a portion where the mirror mechanism B3 is attached to the reflector holding section B11) can be operated from the outside. It is also possible to provide a second closing lid that can close the second opening. In the case where a plurality of openings are provided, as many closing members as the number of openings that can individually close each opening may be attached, or only one closing member that can close a plurality of openings at the same time may be attached.

When making such adjustments from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), in order to facilitate the adjustment operation, open the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) from the front. When viewed, the members to be adjusted (for example, the nuts 2213 at the connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, It is desirable that the member is arranged so that the screw (such as a screw inserted into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding part B11) is visible through the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) (Fig. 125 reference). If there are multiple members to be adjusted, all of these members are visible when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). (For example, the entire upper pedestal B220 is visible). When multiple members to be adjusted are provided, for example, the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) has a diameter larger than the distance between these members (distance between the members that are farthest apart). It is good to do this. This facilitates adjustments to these members. However, when the opening (opening G10a of operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the member to be adjusted is visible through the opening (opening G10a of operation window G10). Becoming is not necessary. For example, when the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the angle adjustment hole B111 of the member to be adjusted (for example, the projector cover B1 (reflector holding part B11) Even if the screws inserted in If a space in which no other member exists is formed between the member and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10), it is possible to operate the member from the outside. In the present invention, the member to be adjusted (adjustment screw, nut, etc.) and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to have such a positional relationship.

In the embodiment described above, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1, and the upper space (the space behind the upper door mechanism UD) is provided with the display unit A (irradiation Unit B) is housed therein, while the control board (main control board MS, sub-control device SS, etc.) is housed in the lower space (the space behind the lower door mechanism DD) (see Figure 40). ). However, in the present invention, the inside of the main body (cabinet G) does not need to be partitioned into an upper space and a lower space, and the space in which the projector (irradiation unit B) is accommodated and the control board (main control board MS and sub There is no need to distinguish between the space in which the control device SS, etc.) is housed. For example, a control board (main control board MS or sub-control device SS) may be arranged in the space behind the reflector holding part B11 (mirror mechanism B3) of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 123). This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space within the main body (cabinet G) and to alleviate the phenomenon in which heat generated from the control board (main control board MS or sub-control device SS) is trapped in the lower space. . Note that the opening/closing door in the present invention may be composed of a plurality of doors (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD), or may be composed of one door.

[Seventh embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. The seventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of portions that apply to the seventh embodiment as well as those described in the first to sixth embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...". Even if the description is as follows, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment without departing from the spirit of the seventh embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to sixth embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, without departing from the spirit of the seventh embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the seventh embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment, components having similar functions may be given the same reference numerals for convenience. Furthermore, even if the machine has the same shape or the same processing as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments, different symbols or step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
In this embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 99). All of the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

The upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen 3010 (see FIGS. 132 and 133). The light projected from the projector 9020 enters the central screen 3010 from behind (back side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of the central screen 3010. The details will be explained below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the front. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism with the central screen unit and front top unit removed from the front. FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism with the central screen unit and front top unit removed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen unit 3000. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the central screen unit 3000 includes a central screen 3010 and a rear transparent plate 3050.

The central screen 3010 is a transmissive screen that is displayed by projecting a projection image from behind, and is similar to the screens in the fourth embodiment (cabinet side screen 9040, door side right screen 9050, and door side left screen 9060). ), it has an entrance surface on the back side into which the light projected from the projector 9020 enters, and a display surface on the front side on which the projected image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. The central screen 3010 is made mainly of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and has an even thickness over the entire surface, and is milky white, translucent, or gray when not projecting. exhibit color. The central screen 3010 is formed by three-dimensional molding so as to have rigidity (not flexibility).

The central screen 3010, like the screen sheet 1046 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 102), is formed continuously from a flat portion 3011 located at the center and from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 3011 toward the rear. and a curved portion 3012. The plane part 3011 is formed in a planar shape, and the curved part 3012 has a shape obtained by curving a flat plate, like the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 94) in the fourth embodiment. ing.

The rear transparent plate 3050 is mainly made of transparent polycarbonate and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The rear light-transmitting plate 3050, like the light-transmitting plate 1045 in the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 102), includes a flat portion 3051 located at the center and a continuous portion extending rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 3051. A curved portion 3052 formed as shown in FIG. The plane portion 3051 is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 3052 has a shape obtained by curving a flat plate.

The central screen 3010 is arranged at the frontmost surface (outermost surface) of the upper door mechanism UD (pachislot machine 1). As a result, no other member exists between the central screen 3010 and the player. The rear transparent plate 3050 is arranged on the back side of the central screen 3010, and reinforces the central screen 3010 from the back side (cabinet G side). The material of the rear transparent plate 3050 is not particularly limited as long as it can reinforce the central screen 3010, and in addition to polycarbonate, acrylic plates, resins such as ABS, glass plates, etc. can be used as appropriate. be able to.

Since the rear transparent plate 3050 has translucency, the light projected from the projector 9020 passes through the rear transparent plate 3050 and enters the incident surface (back surface) of the central screen 3010. do. As a result, images related to the game (still images and moving images) are displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the central screen 3010. Since there is no structure in front of the central screen 3010 that obstructs the player's view, when an image is displayed on the central screen 3010, the image is visible to the player.

Further, a left side decoration unit 3100L and a right side decoration unit 3100R are provided on the left and right portions of the upper door mechanism UD, respectively, and a front top unit 3200 is provided on the upper portion of the upper door mechanism UD. It is being Each configuration will be explained in more detail below.

<Arrangement relationship between center screen 3010 and side decoration portion 3110>
FIG. 134 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the front. FIG. 135 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side uneven portion of the central screen. FIG. 136 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side decoration unit in the upper door mechanism. FIG. 137 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 136 with the side decoration section removed. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion seen from the front. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the right side decorative portion seen from the rear. FIG. 140 is a sectional view of the right side decoration part. FIG. 141 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and right side decoration part.

As shown in FIG. 134, the rear part (right side part) of the curved part 3012 (right curved part 3012R) of the central screen 3010 includes a right side uneven part 3020R (upper right side uneven part 3021R, right middle side uneven part 3022R, In addition, a lower right side uneven portion 3023R) is formed. In addition, the rear part (left side part) of the curved part 3012 (left curved part 3012L) of the central screen 3010 has a left side uneven part 3020L (upper left side uneven part 3021L, middle left side uneven part 3022L, and lower left side uneven part). 3023L) is formed.

The central screen 3010 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and the right side uneven portion 3020R and the left side uneven portion 3020L are also bilaterally symmetrical. Therefore, in the following, the right side uneven part 3020R (upper right side uneven part 3021R, middle right side uneven part 3022R, and lower right side uneven part 3023R) and the left side uneven part 3020L (upper left side uneven part 3021L, middle left side uneven part 3023R) portion 3022L and lower left side uneven portion 3023L), and may be referred to as side uneven portion 3020 (upper side uneven portion 3021, middle side uneven portion 3022, and lower side uneven portion 3023).

As shown in FIG. 135, the upper side uneven portion 3021 has a recess 3021a that is recessed with respect to the surrounding surface, and a protrusion 3021b that projects with respect to the recess 3021a. The protrusion 3021b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3021a. Similarly, the middle side uneven portion 3022 has a recess 3022a that is recessed with respect to the surrounding surface, and a protrusion 3022b that projects with respect to the recess 3022a. The protrusion 3022b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3022a. The lower side uneven portion 3023 has a recess 3023a that is recessed relative to the surrounding surface, and a protrusion 3023b that projects relative to the recess 3023a. The protrusion 3023b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3023a. For clarity, in FIG. 135, the recess 3021a, the recess 3022a, and the recess 3023a are shown in black.

Moreover, the central screen 3010 has a rear side part 3013 that is formed continuously from the rear end of the curved part 3012 toward the rear. The rear side portion 3013 is formed substantially flat. For clarity, the rear side portion 3013 is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 135.

As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, on the right side of the right curved portion 3012R of the center screen 3010, a right side decorative portion 3110R is arranged along the right curved portion 3012R. Similarly, on the left side of the left curved portion 3012L of the central screen 3010, a left side decorative portion 3110L is arranged along the left curved portion 3012L. The right side decoration part 3110R and the left side decoration part 3110L are components of the right side decoration unit 3100R and the left side decoration unit 3100L (see FIG. 130), respectively. The right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L have a mutually symmetrical structure. In this specification, the right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L are sometimes referred to as a side decorative portion 3110 without distinction.

As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the side decoration part 3110 has an outer part 3111 and an inner part 3112. The outer portion 3111 and the inner portion 3112 are each formed into a flat plate shape and are arranged substantially parallel to each other. The side decorative portion 3110 also includes a bulging portion 3113 (an upper bulging portion 3114, a middle bulging portion 3115, and a lower bulging portion) that bulges out from the front portion of the inner portion 3112 toward the side opposite to the outer portion 3111. 3116).

FIG. 140 shows the side decoration part 3110 cut along a horizontal plane passing through the middle bulge part 3115. As shown in FIG. 140, the middle bulging part 3115 has a front part 3115a arranged on the front side and a bent part 3115b bent from the side edge of the front part 3115a. As a result, a triangular space 3115c is formed, which is surrounded by the inner side portion 3112, the front side portion 3115a, and the bent portion 3115b (an extended portion thereof).

FIG. 141 shows the center screen 3010 and the side decoration parts 3110 cut along a horizontal plane passing through the middle bulge part 3115. For clarity, FIG. 141 shows the center screen 3010 and side decorative portion 3110 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, with other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. ing. Further, the cut surface of the center screen 3010 is shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the side decoration portions 3110 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 141, the inner side portion 3112 of the side decorative portion 3110 is in contact with the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010, and the bent portion 3115b of the side decorative portion 3110 is in contact with the recessed portion 3022a in the middle side uneven portion 3022 of the central screen 3010. are in contact. As a result, the protrusion 3022b of the middle side uneven portion 3022 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space 3115c of the side decorative portion 3110.

Similarly, although detailed illustration is omitted, the vicinity of the upper bulging portion 3114 of the side decorative portion 3110 has a structure corresponding to the upper side uneven portion 3021 of the central screen 3010, and the lower bulging portion of the side decorative portion 3110 The vicinity of the protruding portion 3116 has a structure corresponding to the lower side uneven portion 3023 of the central screen 3010. As a result, the protrusion 3021b on the upper side uneven portion 3021 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space formed by the inner side portion 3112 and the upper bulge portion 3114 of the side decorative portion 3110. Furthermore, the protrusion 3023b of the lower side uneven portion 3023 of the central screen 3010 is inserted into the space formed by the inner side portion 3112 and the lower bulging portion 3116 of the side decorative portion 3110.

As described above, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the side decorative portion 3110 is arranged along the curved portion 3012 and the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010. As a result, the side decorative portions 3110 are in a state of covering the rear portion of the central screen 3010. Here, in this embodiment, a predetermined motif image (an image showing a motif of the pachi-slot machine 1) is displayed on the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. The motif image is an image corresponding to a pillar (pillar image), and the size of the pillar image corresponds to the size of the curved portion 3012. Due to the shape of the curved portion 3012, the pillar image has a three-dimensional appearance. As a result, it can be shown to the player that a pillar having the same size and curvature as the curved part 3012 actually exists, and the side decoration part 3110 can ride on the pillar. You can make it look like you are there. Furthermore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the decoration of the side decoration part 3110 (the bulging part 3113, etc.) is applied directly to the pillar. Further, since there is no other member between the player and the central screen 3010, the player can directly touch the pillar. Furthermore, the image displayed on the rear side of the central screen 3010 may appear distorted to the player; however, since the side decoration section 3110 covers this area, it is possible to hide the distorted image. This is possible, and it is also possible to prevent the appearance of the image from deteriorating.

<Side decoration unit 3100>
FIG. 142 is a front view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142 taken along arrow AA. FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the side LED board and light guide. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the side LED board and light guide. FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the side LED and light guide. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the light guide and side light lens. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the sidelight lens seen from the rear. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of the sidelight lens. FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of the sidelight lens. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the rear transparent plate, the light guide, and the side light lens. FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the side decoration part. FIG. 153 is a perspective view of a side decoration part and a side light lens. FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the central screen, the rear light-transmitting plate, and the side light-shielding plates. FIG. 155 is a perspective view showing the side light shielding plate removed from the state shown in FIG. 154. FIG. 156 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142 taken along arrow AA. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 158 is a perspective view showing the side LED board cover removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 157.

As shown in FIG. 142, a right side decoration unit 3100R is arranged on the right side of the center screen 3010, and a left side decoration unit 3100L is arranged on the left side of the center screen 3010. The right side decoration unit 3100R and the left side decoration unit 3100L have a symmetrical structure. In this specification, the right side decoration unit 3100R and the left side decoration unit 3100L are sometimes referred to as side decoration unit 3100 without distinguishing between them.

As shown in FIG. 143, the side decoration unit 3100 includes a side decoration part 3110, a side LED board 3120, a light guide 3130, and a side light lens 3140. For clarity, in FIG. 143, the cut surface of the center screen 3010 and the cut surface of the rear transparent plate 3050 are shown in shading, and the cut surface of the side decoration part 3110 and the cut surface of the side LED board 3120 are shown in black. , the cut plane of the light guide 3130 and the cut plane of the side light lens 3140 are shown with diagonal lines.

FIG. 144 shows the side LED board 3120 and the light guide 3130 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, with other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, a plurality of side LEDs 3122 are provided on the front surface 3121 of the side LED board 3120. Specifically, two side LEDs 3122a, two side LEDs 3122b, two side LEDs 3122c, two side LEDs 3122d, two side LEDs 3122e, two side LEDs 3122f, and two side LEDs 3122g are provided. The side LED 3122 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface (approximately to the right). Furthermore, the side LED 3122 is a full-color LED and can emit multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green.

The light guide 3130 includes a first light guide section 3131, a second light guide section 3132, a third light guide section 3133, a fourth light guide section 3134, a fifth light guide section 3135, a sixth light guide section 3136, and a third light guide section 3134. 7 light guide portions 3137, and has a structure in which these are sequentially connected. Further, the light guide 3130 is made of a material (eg, transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate) having a high light transmittance (eg, 75% to 95%, preferably about 80% to 90%).

The first light guide section 3131 includes a base section 3131a, and an upper branch section 3131b and a lower branch section 3131c branched from the rear end of the base section 3131a. Similarly, the second light guide section 3132 includes a base section 3132a, and an upper branch section 3132b and a lower branch section 3132c branched from the rear end of the base section 3132a. The third light guide section 3133 has a base section 3133a, and an upper branch section 3133b and a lower branch section 3133c branched from the rear end of the base section 3133a. The fourth light guide section 3134 includes a base section 3134a, and an upper branch section 3134b and a lower branch section 3134c branched from the base section 3134a. The fifth light guide section 3135 has a base section 3135a, and an upper branch section 3135b and a lower branch section 3135c branched from the base section 3135a. The sixth light guide section 3136 includes a base section 3136a, and an upper branch section 3136b and a lower branch section 3136c branched from the base section 3136a. The seventh light guide section 3137 includes a base section 3137a, and an upper branch section 3137b and a lower branch section 3137c branched from the base section 3137a.

As shown in FIG. 144, the upper branch part 3131b and the lower branch part 3131c of the first light guide part 3131 are respectively arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122a. Similarly, the upper branch part 3132b and the lower branch part 3132c of the second light guide part 3132 are respectively arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122b. The upper branch part 3133b and the lower branch part 3133c of the third light guide part 3133 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122c, respectively. The upper branch part 3134b and the lower branch part 3134c of the fourth light guide part 3134 are respectively arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122d. The upper branch part 3135b and the lower branch part 3135c of the fifth light guide part 3135 are respectively arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122e. The upper branch part 3136b and the lower branch part 3136c of the sixth light guide part 3136 are respectively arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122f. The upper branch part 3137b and the lower branch part 3137c of the seventh light guide part 3137 are respectively arranged close to the two side LEDs 3122g.

Thereby, the light emitted from the side LED 3122a enters the upper branch part 3131b and the lower branch part 3131c. As shown in FIG. 146, the upper branch part 3131b and the lower branch part 3131c are bent with respect to the base part 3131a. Thereby, the light incident on the upper branch part 3131b and the lower branch part 3131c changes its traveling direction forward inside the first light guide part 3131 and reaches the front surface 3131d of the base part 3131a. Similarly, the light emitted from the side LED 3122b reaches the front surface 3132d of the base portion 3132a in the second light guide portion 3132. The light emitted from the side LED 3122c reaches the front surface 3133d of the base portion 3133a in the third light guide portion 3133. The light emitted from the side LED 3122d reaches the front surface 3134d of the base portion 3134a in the fourth light guide portion 3134. The light emitted from the side LED 3122e reaches the front surface 3135d of the base portion 3135a in the fifth light guide portion 3135. The light emitted from the side LED 3122f reaches the front surface 3136d of the base portion 3136a in the sixth light guide portion 3136. The light emitted from the side LED 3122g reaches the front surface 3137d of the base portion 3137a in the seventh light guide portion 3137.

For clarity, FIG. 146 shows the side LEDs 3122a to 3122g and the light guide 3130 when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, with other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationships. ing. Further, front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the base portions 3131a to 3137a are shown with diagonal lines. The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d are formed as substantially flat surfaces in the vertical direction, and the normal direction thereof is the front direction.

FIG. 147 shows the light guide 3130 and side light lens 3140 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, with other components removed while maintaining their relative positional relationship. As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the sidelight lens 3140 includes a first light guide section 3141, a second light guide section 3142, a third light guide section 3143, a fourth light guide section 3144, and a fifth light guide section 3145. , a sixth light guide section 3146, and a seventh light guide section 3147, and has a structure in which these are connected in sequence. The side light lens 3140 is made of a translucent material.

FIG. 149 shows a side light lens 3140 cut along a horizontal plane passing through the first light guiding portion 3141. FIG. 150 shows the side light lens 3140 cut along a horizontal plane passing through the second light guiding section 3142.

As shown in FIG. 149, the first light guide section 3141 includes a rear protrusion 3141a that is formed in a plate shape and protrudes rearward, and a front protrusion that is formed to continuously protrude forward from the rear protrusion 3141a. 3141b. Similarly, the fourth light guide section 3144 includes a rear protrusion 3144a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a front protrusion 3144b formed so as to continuously protrude forward from the rear protrusion 3144a. have. The seventh light guide portion 3147 includes a rear protrusion 3147a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a front protrusion 3147b formed so as to continuously protrude forward from the rear protrusion 3147a. ing.

As shown in FIG. 150, the second light guide section 3142 extends forward via a rear protrusion 3142a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protrusion 3142a. It has a right front protrusion 3142b and a left front protrusion 3142c that protrude. Similarly, the third light guide section 3143 includes a rear protrusion 3143a that is formed in a plate shape and protrudes rearward, and a right front protrusion that protrudes forward via a branch structure that is continuously formed from the rear protrusion 3143a. It has a protrusion 3143b and a left front protrusion 3143c. The fifth light guide part 3145 includes a rear protrusion 3145a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a right front protrusion 3145b protruding forward via a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protrusion 3145a. and a left front protrusion 3145c. The sixth light guiding portion 3146 includes a rear protrusion 3146a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a right front protrusion 3146b protruding forward via a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protrusion 3146a. and a left front protrusion 3146c.

In FIG. 148, the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the rear protrusions 3141a to 3147a in the first to seventh light guide parts 3141 to 3147 are indicated by diagonal lines. As shown in FIG. 147, the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the first to seventh light guide parts 3141 to 3147 of the side light lens 3140 are the first to seventh light guide parts 3131 to 7 of the light guide 3130, respectively. It is arranged so as to face the front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the portion 3137.

In FIG. 151, the rear transparent plate 3050, light guide 3130, and side light lens 3140 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are shown while maintaining their relative positional relationships while other components are It is shown deleted. As shown in FIG. 151, a rear side portion 3053 of a rear transparent plate 3050 is arranged between the light guide 3130 and the side light lens 3140 (see FIG. 143). The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the first to seventh light guide parts 3131 to 3137 of the light guide 3130 are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the rear part 3053 of the rear transparent plate 3050. The rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the first to seventh light guide parts 3141 to 3147 of the side light lens 3140 are substantially in contact with the front surface of the rear side part 3053 of the rear transparent plate 3050.

Here, the rear light transmitting plate 3050 is made of a material (for example, transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate) having a high light transmittance (for example, 75% to 95%, preferably about 80% to 90%). ing. Therefore, the light emitted from the side LEDs 3122 to 3122g and reaching the front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the light guide 3130 enters the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the side light lens 3140. Note that the rear side portion 3053 of the rear transparent plate 3050 is a portion formed into a flat plate by bending the rear end of the rear transparent plate 3050.

The light incident on the rear end surface 3141d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the first light guide section 3141 and reaches the front protrusion section 3141b. Similarly, the light incident on the rear end surface 3144d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the fourth light guide section 3144 and reaches the front protrusion section 3144b. The light incident on the rear end surface 3147d of the side light lens 3140 travels inside the seventh light guide section 3147 and reaches the front protrusion section 3147b.

Furthermore, the light incident on the rear end surface 3142d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the second light guide section 3142 and reaches the right front protrusion 3142b and the left front protrusion 3142c. Similarly, the light incident on the rear end surface 3143d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the third light guide section 3143 and reaches the right front protrusion 3143b and the left front protrusion 3143c. The light incident on the rear end surface 3145d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the fifth light guide section 3145 and reaches the right front protrusion 3145b and the left front protrusion 3145c. The light incident on the rear end surface 3146d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the sixth light guide section 3146 and reaches the right front protrusion 3146b and the left front protrusion 3146c.

As shown in FIG. 152, the side decorative portion 3110 includes light exit openings 3117 (first light exit opening 3117a, second light exit opening 3117b, third light exit opening 3117c, third light exit opening 3117c, Four light emitting apertures 3117d, a fifth light emitting aperture 3117e, a sixth light emitting aperture 3117f, and a seventh light emitting aperture 3117g) are formed. One aperture is provided as each of the first light emitting aperture 3117a, the fourth light emitting aperture 3117d, and the seventh light emitting aperture 3117g, and the second light emitting aperture 3117b and the third light emitting aperture 3117b are provided with one aperture. Two openings are each provided as the emission opening 3117c, the fifth light emission opening 3117e, and the sixth light emission opening 3117f.

For clarity, in FIG. 152, the light exit openings 3117a to 3117g are shown with diagonal lines. In addition, the side decoration part 3110 has a structure that protrudes forward from the periphery of the first light emission opening 3117a, the periphery of the fourth light emission opening 3117d, and the periphery of the seventh light emission opening 3117g. , these protruding structures are formed so as to be continuous with the upper bulging part 3114, the middle bulging part 3115, and the lower bulging part 3116, respectively.

The shapes of the first light output opening 3117a, the fourth light output opening 3117d, and the seventh light output opening 3117g are the same as the front protrusion 3141b, the front protrusion 3144b, and the front protrusion of the side light lens 3140, respectively. This corresponds to the shape of the portion 3147b. Further, the shapes of the two second light exit openings 3117b, the two third light exit openings 3117c, the two fifth light exit openings 3117e, and the two sixth light exit openings 3117f are respectively on the right side. Shapes of the front protrusion 3142b and the left front protrusion 3142c, the right front protrusion 3143b and the left front protrusion 3143c, the right front protrusion 3145b and the left front protrusion 3145c, and the right front protrusion 3146b and the left front protrusion 3146c It corresponds to

The side light lens 3140 is arranged between the outer part 3111 and the inner part 3112 (see FIG. 139) of the side decorative part 3110. As shown in FIG. 153, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the front protrusion 3141b, the right front protrusion 3142b, the left front protrusion 3142c, the right front protrusion 3143b, and the left front protrusion of the side light lens 3140 are shown in FIG. 3143c, the front protrusion 3144b, the right front protrusion 3145b, the left front protrusion 3145c, the right front protrusion 3146b, the left front protrusion 3146c, and the front protrusion 3147b are light exit openings of the side decorative part 3110, respectively. 3117a to 3117g, and these protrusions close the light exit openings 3117a to 3117g. As described above, the light emitted from the side LEDs 3122a to 3122g is emitted from the side light lens 3140 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the light emitting openings 3117a to 3117g. Note that the front end surfaces of these protrusions are textured, so that the light emitting openings 3117a to 3117g are evenly illuminated.

As shown in FIG. 154, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, a side light shielding plate 3150 is disposed between the rear side 3013 of the central screen 3010 and the rear side 3053 of the rear transparent plate 3050. It is set up. As shown in FIG. 155, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear end of the central screen 3010 is positioned forward of the rear end of the rear transparent plate 3050, and the rear transparent plate 3050 The rear portion is not covered by the central screen 3010 and is exposed. For clarity, in FIG. 155, the exposed portion (exposed portion 3054) is shown with diagonal lines. The side light shielding plate 3150 is arranged to cover the exposed portion 3054.

The side light shielding plate 3150 has a light shielding property and is designed to block light from passing through. The side light shielding plate 3150 is made of polycarbonate or the like, and is colored black. For clarity, in FIG. 156, the cut surface of the side light shielding plate 3150 is shown with diagonal lines. By providing the side light shielding plate 3150, it is possible to prevent the light projected from the projector 9020 from passing through the exposed portion 3054 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050 and entering the side light lens 3140. It looks like this.

Note that the upper end of the side light shielding plate 3150 is slightly lower than the upper end of the rear light transmitting plate 3050, and the upper part of the exposed portion 3054 is not covered by the side light shielding plate 3150 and is still exposed. However, the upper end of the side light lens 3140 is also lower than the upper end of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 (approximately the same height as the side light-shielding plate 3150), and the projection from the projector 9020 is transmitted through the exposed portion. The emitted light will not enter the side light lens 3140.

Further, in FIG. 156, the cut surface of the side LED board cover 3160 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the shielding wall member 3300 is shown in hatching. A side LED board 3120 is installed on the side LED board cover 3160. As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the side LED board cover 3160 is arranged on the side of the side LED board 3120 and the light guide 3130, and together with the side decoration part 3110 and the key receiving member 3320, the side LED board cover 3160 It constitutes the outermost surface of the machine 1). The shielding wall member 3300 will be explained in detail later.

<Shielding wall member 3300>
FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member seen from the front. FIG. 160 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left side periphery of the shielding wall member. FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member seen from the rear. FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from the rear. FIG. 163 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the speaker harness protector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 162. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram of how light is projected from the projector in this embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram of how light is projected from the projector in another embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 165 is a front view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 166 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the shielding wall member and the light guide.

As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the shielding wall member 3300 has a generally symmetrical structure and has a rectangular annular shape with an open center. Specifically, the shielding wall member 3300 includes a lower side part 3302, a left side part 3303, a right side part 3304, and an upper side part 3305 arranged around the light passage opening 3301.

The lower part 3302 has a lower surface 3302a. The lower side surface 3302a constitutes the upper surface (the surface facing the light passage opening 3301) of the lower side portion 3302, and is formed in a substantially horizontal direction. Although not shown, the lower surface 3302a is textured to form fine irregularities. Graining is a process in which grains (wrinkle patterns) are formed on the surface, and this process is performed as a light diffusion process. In this specification, the shape of the unevenness (wrinkle pattern) formed by the graining process is not particularly limited, and may include patterns such as satin finish, wood grain, rock grain, sand grain, cloth grain/silk grain, etc., geometric patterns, and parallel patterns. It is possible to appropriately form a pattern in which thin lines are arranged at equal intervals.

As shown in FIG. 160, the left side portion 3303 includes a first left inner wall surface 3303a, a second left inner wall surface 3303b, a third left inner wall surface 3303c, and a fourth left inner wall surface 3303d. The first left inner wall surface 3303a, the second left inner wall surface 3303b, the third left inner wall surface 3303c, and the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d define the right surface of the left side portion 3303 (the surface facing the light passage opening 3301). It is formed in a substantially vertical direction. Note that, for clarity, FIG. 160 shows the left side portion 3303 cut along a horizontal plane.

The first left inner wall surface 3303a is formed continuously from the right end of the front end surface of the left side portion 3303 diagonally rearward. The second left inner wall surface 3303b is formed continuously from the rear end (right end) of the first left inner wall surface 3303a toward the rear with a steeper slope than the first left inner wall surface 3303a. The third left inner wall surface 3303c is formed continuously from the rear end of the second left inner wall surface 3303b toward the rear with a steeper slope than the first left inner wall surface 3303a and a gentler slope than the second left inner wall surface 3303b. has been done. The fourth left inner wall surface 3303d is formed continuously from the rear end of the third left inner wall surface 3303c toward the rear with a steeper slope than the second left inner wall surface 3303b.

Further, the left side portion 3303 has a left rear end portion 3303e formed by slightly bending the rear end to the right. The front surface 3303f of the left rear end portion 3303e is formed continuously from the rear end of the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d toward the right side. The front surface 3303f and the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d are substantially perpendicular to each other. Note that the length of the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d in the front-rear direction becomes shorter as it goes upward, and the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d is not formed in the upper part of the left side portion 3303, and the left rear end portion The front surface 3303f of 3303e is continuous with the third left inner wall surface 3303c.

Similarly, although a detailed description is omitted, the right side portion 3304 includes a first right inner wall surface 3304a, a second right inner wall surface 3304b, a third right inner wall surface 3304c, a fourth right inner wall surface 3304d, and a right rear end portion. 3304e. The first right inner wall surface 3304a, the second right inner wall surface 3304b, the third right inner wall surface 3304c, the fourth right inner wall surface 3304d, and the right rear end 3304e are the first left inner wall surface 3303a and the second left inner wall surface 3303a, respectively. It is symmetrical with the wall surface 3303b, the third left inner wall surface 3303c, the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d, and the left rear end portion 3303e.

The left rear end portion 3303e and the right rear end portion 3304e are each formed in a substantially vertical direction. For clarity, in FIG. 161, the back surface 3303g of the left rear end portion 3303e and the back surface 3304g of the right rear end portion 3304e are shown with diagonal lines.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the lower part 3302 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged above the relay board 3330 and the relay board cover 3331. As a result, the relay board 3330 and the relay board cover 3331 are substantially completely covered by the lower side portion 3302 (lower side surface 3302a). The position of the front edge 3302b of the lower part 3302 of the shielding wall member 3300 in the front-rear direction substantially matches the position of the rear edge of the lower part 3055 of the rear transparent plate 3050 in the front-rear direction. That is, the front edge 3302b of the lower part 3302 substantially coincides with the rear edge of the lower part 3055 in plan view, and the lower part 3302 and the lower part 3055 are arranged with almost no gap between them. Note that the lower part 3055 of the rear transparent plate 3050 is formed continuously from the lower end of the flat part 3051 and the curved part 3052 toward the rear, and is arranged substantially horizontally.

The right side part 3304 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged on the left side of the right side LED board 3120R and the right side key receiving member 3320R. As a result, the right side LED board 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R have the right side portion 3304 (first right inner wall surface 3304a, second right inner wall surface 3304b, third right inner wall surface 3304c, and fourth right inner wall surface 3304d). almost completely covered by.

Similarly, although not shown, the left side portion 3303 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged on the right side of the left side LED board 3120L and the left key receiving member 3320L. As a result, the left side LED board 3120L and the left key receiving member 3320L are connected to the left side portion 3303 (first left inner wall surface 3303a, second left inner wall surface 3303b, third left inner wall surface 3303c, and fourth left inner wall surface 3303d). almost completely covered by.

Here, as described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 (the light reflected by the mirror 9030) travels toward the front (the side where the central screen 3010 is arranged) (see FIG. 99). In FIG. 164, the irradiation range of such light is indicated by diagonal lines.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164(a), most of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 passes through the light passage opening 3301 of the shielding wall member 3300 and reaches the central screen 3010. On the other hand, part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is incident on the left side 3303 (the right side of the left rear end 3303e) and the right side 3304 (the left side of the right rear end 3304e) of the shielding wall member 3300. do. Since the shielding wall member 3300 does not have translucency, the light cannot pass through the left side 3303 and the right side 3304 and is reflected by the left side 3303 and the right side 3304. 3010 is not reached.

On the other hand, another embodiment shown in FIG. 164(b) has the same configuration as this embodiment except that the shielding wall member 3300 is not provided. In this embodiment, the progress of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 is not obstructed by the shielding wall member 3300, so the irradiation range shown in FIG. 164(b) is wider than the irradiation range shown in FIG. 164(a). It has become. Specifically, in FIG. 164(a), region I and region II are not the irradiation range, whereas in FIG. 164(b), region I and region II are the irradiation range. Region I and region II are regions located at the periphery of the central screen 3010 when viewed from the front.

In region I, the left side LED board 3120L and the left key receiving member 3320L are arranged. Further, in region II, a right side LED board 3120R and a right key receiving member 3320R are arranged. Therefore, in other embodiments, a part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is reflected by the left side LED board 3120L and the left key receiver member 3320L, as well as by the right side LED board 3120R and the right key receiver member 3320R, and A situation may arise in which reflected light enters the central screen 3010. In contrast, in this embodiment, since Region I and Region II are not included in the irradiation range, a portion of the light projected from the projector 9020 is transmitted to the left side LED board 3120L, the left key receiver member 3320L, and the right It is possible to prevent a situation where the light is reflected by the side LED board 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R (the reflected light enters the center screen 3010).

As shown in FIG. 160, the left side portion 3303 has a left front end portion 3303h formed by slightly bending the front end to the left. Similarly, the right side portion 3304 has a right front end portion 3304h formed by slightly bending the front end to the right. As shown in FIG. 165, the left front end 3303h and the right front end 3304h have light guide openings 3306 (first light guide opening 3306a, second light guide opening 3306b, third light guide a fourth light guide opening 3306c, a fourth light guide opening 3306d, a fifth light guide opening 3306e, a sixth light guide opening 3306f, and a seventh light guide opening 3306g).

The light guide openings 3306a to 3306g are slightly larger in shape when viewed from the front than the base portions 3131a to 3137a in the first to seventh light guide portions 3131 to 3137 of the light guide 3130. As shown in FIG. 166, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the light guide openings 3306a to 3306g have base portions in the first to seventh light guide parts 3131 to 3137 of the light guide 3130, respectively. The front portions of 3131a to 3137a are inserted. The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the base portions 3131a to 3137a are positioned substantially on the same plane as the front surface 3304i (front surface 3303i) of the right front end 3304h (left front end 3303h). As a result, the light transmitted through the light guide 3130 travels from the light guide 3130 to the side light lens 3140 via the light guide openings 3306a to 3306g.

<Formation of air flow path>
FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the shielding wall member seen from the rear. FIG. 168 is a perspective view showing the top frame base removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 169 is a perspective view showing the upper front and rear frames and the duct seal removed from the state shown in FIG. 168. FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the upper front and rear frames seen from the rear. FIG. 171 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper front and rear frames seen from the front. FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the rear and below. FIG. 173 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 172. FIG. 174 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames viewed from the rear. FIG. 175 is a sectional view of the top frame base and the upper front and rear frames. FIG. 176 is a perspective view showing the speaker harness protector removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 167, the upper part 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300 is formed with a right side ventilation opening 3307R and a left side ventilation opening 3307L. The right side ventilation opening 3307R and the left side ventilation opening 3307L are each formed so that air can pass therethrough in the front and back direction. For clarity, in FIG. 167, the right side ventilation opening 3307R and the left side ventilation opening 3307L are shown with diagonal lines.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168, the top frame base 3210 has an upper wall 3211. The top frame base 3210 is a component of the front top unit 3200 (see FIG. 130), and is a member constituting the frame of the front top unit 3200. The top wall 3211 is provided with a plurality of right side vents 3212R and a plurality of left side vents 3212L, respectively. The top frame base 3210 is made of polycarbonate or the like and has a symmetrical structure. Note that the top frame base 3210 is colored black by mixing a pigment or dye into a resin material before molding. Thereby, the top frame base 3210 does not transmit light.

An upper front and back frame 3230 is arranged below the top frame base 3210. As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the upper front and back frame 3230 has a structure in which a right side portion 3230R and a left side portion 3230L are connected by a center portion 3230C. The right side portion 3230R is formed with a right side opening 3231R that opens upward and a right side opening 3232R that opens rearward. The left side portion 3230L is formed with a left side opening 3231L that opens upward and a left side opening 3232L that opens rearward.

The right side opening 3231R and the right side opening 3232R communicate with each other via the right side cavity 3233R formed inside the right side part 3230R, and the left side opening 3231L and the left side opening 3232L communicate with each other through the left side cavity 3233R formed inside the left side part 3230L. They communicate via a cavity 3233L. For clarity, in FIG. 170, the openings 3231 (the right opening 3231R and the left opening 3231L) and the openings 3232 (the right opening 3232R and the left opening 3232L) are shown with diagonal lines.

Duct seals 3240 (a right side duct seal 3240R and a left side duct seal 3240L) are arranged between the top frame base 3210 and the upper front and rear frames 3230. The right side duct seal 3240R and the left side duct seal 3240L each have a rectangular shape with a large opening at the center, and are arranged along the peripheries of the right side opening 3231R and the left side opening 3231L in the upper front and rear frame 3230. As the duct seal 3240, a buffer member (eg, rubber packing) capable of sealing the space between the top frame base 3210 and the upper front and rear frames 3230 can be appropriately employed.

Here, the right side vent 3212R and left side vent 3212L of the top frame base 3210 communicate with the right side cavity 3233R and left side cavity 3233L via the right side opening 3231R and left side opening 3231L of the upper front and rear frame 3230, respectively. The right side cavity 3233R and the left side cavity 3233L communicate with the right side ventilation opening 3307R and the left side ventilation opening 3307L of the shielding wall member 3300 via the right side opening 3232R and the left side opening 3232L, respectively.

As a result, air is taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, through the left side ventilation port 3212L, the left side cavity 3233L, and the left side ventilation opening 3307L. This air enters the inside of case B22 via intake port B22A (see FIG. 57). The air that has entered the inside of the case B22 moves to the right while taking away the heat generated inside the case B22, and exits the case B22 via the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58). The air exiting the case B22 is released to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the right side ventilation opening 3307R, the right side cavity 3233R, and the right side ventilation port 3212R.

In this way, the heat generated in the projector 9020 can be discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. In addition, in 2nd Embodiment, while the intake port B22A was provided on the right side of case B22, it demonstrated that the exhaust port B22E was provided on the left side of case B22. In contrast, in this embodiment, the intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while the exhaust port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170, a frame base engagement groove 3234 (a frame base engagement groove 3234R and a frame base engagement groove 3234L) is formed in the center portion 3230C of the upper front and rear frame 3230. The frame base engagement groove 3234 is formed as a concave portion recessed from the surrounding surface so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The frame base engagement groove 3234R and the frame base engagement groove 3234L have substantially the same configuration and are provided so as to be substantially parallel to each other.

As shown in FIG. 171, the frame base engagement groove 3234 includes a groove bottom 3234a, and a left wall surface 3234b and a right side wall surface 3234c that connect the groove bottom 3234a and the surrounding surfaces. The frame base engaging groove 3234 is formed from the front end of the central portion 3230C to the rear, and the rear end of the frame base engaging groove 3234 is positioned forward of the rear end of the central portion 3230C. Thereby, the left and right sides of the frame base engagement groove 3234 (groove left side part 3235 and groove right side part 3236) are connected by the rear part (groove rear side part 3237) of the frame base engagement groove 3234.

Furthermore, a groove rear opening 3234d that is open toward the rear is formed at the rear end of the frame base engagement groove 3234. For clarity, in FIG. 171, the left side wall surface 3234b of the frame base engagement groove 3234L is shown in black, and the groove rear opening 3234d of the frame base engagement groove 3234R is shown in diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 172, front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 (front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213L) are formed on the lower surface 3211a of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210. The front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 are formed as convex portions that protrude from the surrounding surfaces and extend in the front and rear direction. The front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213L have substantially the same configuration and are provided substantially parallel to each other.

The distance between the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213L is approximately the same as the distance between the frame base engagement grooves 3234R and 3234L in the upper front and rear frames 3230. Further, the sizes of the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213L are slightly smaller than the frame base engagement grooves 3234R and frame base engagement grooves 3234L.

As shown in FIG. 173, the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 have front and rear frame engagement claws 3213a. The front and rear frame engagement claws 3213a are formed at the rear ends of the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 with their lower portions protruding rearward. For clarity, in FIG. 173, the side surfaces of the front and rear frame engaging protrusions 3213 are shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 174, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the front and rear frame engaging claws 3213a of the top frame base 3210 protrude rearward from the groove rear opening 3234d of the upper front and rear frames 3230. Note that, on the lower surface of the central portion 3230C of the upper front and rear frame 3230, a portion of the lower surface where the frame base engagement groove 3234 is formed has a downwardly extending groove corresponding to the recess of the frame base engagement groove 3234. A protruding structure 3238 shaped like a letter is formed.

In FIG. 175, the top frame base 3210 and the upper front and rear frames 3230 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along a vertical plane in the front and rear direction (a plane passing through the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and the frame base engagement grooves 3234R). It shows the situation. For clarity, in FIG. 175, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the upper front and rear frames 3230 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 175, the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213R and 3213L of the top frame base 3210 are inserted into the frame base engagement grooves 3234R and 3234L of the upper front and rear frames 3230, respectively. ing. In this state, the front and rear frame engaging claws 3213a of the top frame base 3210 are positioned below the groove rear side portion 3237 of the upper front and rear frame 3230.

The top wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 is formed into a flat plate shape and basically does not have a structure that serves as a support, so that sufficient strength is not ensured. In this regard, by sliding the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 along the frame base engagement grooves 3234, it is possible to easily attach the top frame base 3210 to the upper front and rear frames 3230. can be prevented from being damaged. After installation, the top frame base 3210 is supported by the upper front and rear frames 3230, and the upper wall 3211 can be prevented from being bent.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 167, the boundary portion (upper right corner portion 3310R) between the right side portion 3304 and the upper side portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300 has a structure that bulges toward the light passage opening 3301 side. A speaker opening 3311 is formed in the upper right corner 3310R. For clarity, the speaker opening 3311 is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 167.

A speaker inclined portion 3312 is provided below the speaker opening 3311 and has a slope that descends toward the rear. As a result, a harness placement space 3313 is formed above the speaker inclined portion 3312. As shown in FIG. 176, a harness 3314 for connection to a speaker 3410 is arranged in the harness arrangement space 3313. Harness 3314 is connected to speaker 3410 via speaker opening 3311. In FIG. 176, a part of the speaker 3410 is shown exposed through the speaker opening 3311.

A speaker harness protector 3315 is arranged on the back side of the speaker opening 3311. The speaker harness protector 3315 has a structure in which a predetermined level difference is formed between a surface in the front-back direction and a surface in the vertical direction. As a result, the harness placement space 3313 is closed by the speaker harness protector 3315, and the harness 3314 is surrounded by the wall formed by the speaker slope 3312 and the speaker harness protector 3315.

Similarly, a speaker opening 3311 and a speaker slope 3312 are formed at the boundary between the left side 3303 and the upper side 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300 (upper left corner 3310L). The upper left corner 3310L has a structure that is bilaterally symmetrical to the upper right corner 3310R, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. In FIG. 176, the speaker harness protector 3315 on the back side of the upper right corner 3310R is removed, while the speaker harness protector 3315 on the back side of the upper left corner 3310L is attached.

<Reflection of image on top frame base 3210>
FIG. 177 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the front. Figure 178 is a bottom view of the top frame base. FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism seen from slightly below. Figure 180 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram of the plane part of the central screen and the lower wall of the top frame base.

As shown in FIG. 177, the top frame base 3210 includes a bottom wall 3214. The lower wall 3214 is formed into a flat plate shape and is substantially parallel to the upper wall 3211. The upper wall 3211 and the lower wall 3214 are arranged substantially horizontally. For clarity, the bottom wall 3214 is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 177.

As shown in FIG. 178, the lower surface 3215 of the lower wall 3214 has an image reflecting surface 3216 and a decorative surface 3217. The image reflecting surface 3216 has an arcuate shape (a figure surrounded by a circular arc and a string connecting the ends of the circular arc). The image reflecting surface 3216 is not textured except for a pattern 3216a formed as a concave groove, and is a substantially flat smooth surface as a whole. The decorative surface 3217 is a portion surrounding the image reflecting surface 3216, and is decorated with unevenness as a whole.

The image reflecting surface 3216 is coated with a reflective paint so that it can reflect light. As is conventionally known, reflective paint is composed of transparent paint and glass beads, and has strong reflective performance. As the transparent paint, it is possible to use any paint (for example, the same resin material as the light-shielding paint described below). The coating method is not particularly limited, and for example, spray coating can be used. The reflective paint contains a black pigment (eg, carbon black), and the image reflective surface 3216 has a black appearance. The color of the image reflecting surface 3216 is not particularly limited, and can be painted in any color.

As shown in FIG. 179, when looking up at the upper door mechanism UD from below (from the player's perspective), the image reflecting surface 3216 comes into view. FIG. 180 shows the central screen 3010 and top frame base 3210 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing approximately through the center of the image reflecting surface 3216 in the left-right direction) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. ing. For clarity, in FIG. 180, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 (flat portion 3011) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 (lower wall 3214) is shown in diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 180, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear edge 3214a (the part corresponding to the chord in the bow shape) of the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is the front surface of the flat part 3011 of the central screen 3010. It is substantially in contact with the side surface (display surface 3011a). The display surface 3011a of the central screen 3010 and the image reflection surface 3216 of the top frame base 3210 are arranged to be substantially perpendicular to each other. Thereby, the image reflecting surface 3216 is a surface that continues forward from the top (slightly below the top end) of the display surface 3011a.

FIG. 181 schematically shows the plane portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 when the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from below. Furthermore, this schematic diagram shows a semicircular image (semicircular image 3011b) being displayed on the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010. The semicircular image 3011b is an image projected by the projector 9020.

Here, as described above, the reflected image 3216a is displayed on the image reflecting surface 3216 because the image reflecting surface 3216 can reflect light. The reflected image 3216a has a graphic shape (semicircular shape) that is axisymmetric with respect to the abutting portion of the central screen 3010 with the image reflecting surface 3216 (the lower end of the rear edge 3214a on the lower wall 3214). . Therefore, by showing the semicircular image 3011b and the reflected image 3216a to the player, it is possible to make the player perceive it as if a circle is being displayed. Note that in FIG. 181, the semicircular image 3011b and the reflected image 3216a are each indicated by diagonal lines.

<Arrangement relationship between center screen 3010 and top frame base 3210>
FIG. 182 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the front and below. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the rear and below. FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the central screen seen from the rear and above. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the top frame base seen from the rear and below. FIG. 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 185. Figures 187-189 are cross-sectional views of the center screen and top frame base.

As shown in FIG. 182, the central screen 3010 has a front upper end portion 3015 formed to protrude forward from the upper end of the front surface 3014. As shown in FIG. The front surface 3014 includes a front surface (display surface 3011a) of the flat portion 3011 and a front surface 3012a of the curved portion 3012. The front upper end portion 3015 is formed substantially perpendicular to the front surface 3014.

Specifically, the front upper end portion 3015 has a center portion 3015a, a first left side portion 3015b, a second left side portion 3015c, a first right side portion 3015d, and a second right side portion 3015e. The center portion 3015a is formed substantially horizontally at the center of the center screen 3010. The first left side portion 3015b is formed continuously from the left end of the center portion 3015 toward the lower left. The second left side portion 3015c is formed continuously from the left end of the first left side portion 3015b toward the left. The first right side portion 3015d is formed continuously from the right end of the center portion 3015a toward the lower right side. The second right side portion 3015e is formed continuously from the right end of the first right side portion 3015d toward the right. For clarity, in FIG. 182, the lower surface 3015f of the front upper end portion 3015 is shown in black.

A through hole 3016L is formed near the first left side 3015b, and a through hole 3016R is formed near the first right side 3015d. The through holes 3016 (the through holes 3016L and 3016R) are formed to penetrate the central screen 3010 in the front-rear direction. Further, the central screen 3010 has a front lower end portion 3017 formed to protrude forward from near the lower end of the front surface 3014 . The front lower end 3017 is formed substantially perpendicular to the front surface 3014, similar to the front upper end 3015.

As shown in FIG. 183, the central screen 3010 has a rear upper end portion 3019 formed to protrude rearward from the upper end of the back surface 3018. The back surface 3018 includes a surface on the back side of the flat portion 3011 and a surface on the back side of the curved portion 3012. The rear upper end portion 3019 is formed approximately perpendicular to the back surface 3018. Specifically, the rear upper end portion 3019 has a left side portion 3019a and a right side portion 3019b. For clarity, in FIG. 183, the lower surface 3019c of the rear upper end portion 3019 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 184, the upper surface 3019d of the left side portion 3019a is continuous with the upper surface of the first left side portion 3015b and the upper surface of the second left side portion 3015c, and these surfaces are integrated. Similarly, the upper surface 3019e of the right side portion 3019b is continuous with the upper surface of the first right side portion 3015d and the upper surface of the second right side portion 3015e, and these surfaces are integrated. Further, the central screen 3010 has a rear lower end portion 3020 formed to protrude rearward from the lower end of the back surface 3018. The rear lower end 3020 is formed substantially perpendicular to the back surface 3018, similar to the rear upper end 3019.

As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the top frame base 3210 is formed with a sound emission opening 3218 (a sound emission opening 3218L and a sound emission opening 3218R). Furthermore, a screen contact portion 3219 is formed on the top frame base 3210. For clarity, in FIG. 185, the sound emission opening 3218L and the sound emission opening 3218R are shown with diagonal lines. Further, in FIG. 186, the screen contact portion 3219 is shown in black.

A part of the screen contacting part 3219 is the rear end edge 3214a of the lower wall 3214, and the screen contacting part 3219 is connected to the rear end edge 3214a (screen contact part 3219C) and from the left end of the rear end edge 3214a. A portion continuously formed toward the left (screen contact portion 3219L) and a portion continuously formed toward the right from the right end of the rear edge 3214a (screen contact portion 3219R). configured.

A boss portion 3220L is formed at the lower right portion of the periphery of the sound emission opening 3218L so as to protrude rearward from the screen contact portion 3219L. Similarly, a boss portion 3220R is formed at the lower left portion of the periphery of the sound emission opening 3218R so as to protrude rearward from the screen contact portion 3219R. Further, a screw hole 3221 (screw hole 3221L and screw hole 3221R) penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed near the boss portion 3220 (boss portion 3220L and boss portion 3220R).

In FIG. 187, the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing approximately through the center of the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 in the left-right direction). It shows the situation. For clarity, in FIG. 187, the cut surface of the center screen 3010 (flat portion 3011) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 (lower wall 3214) is shown in diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 187, the screen contact portion 3219C (rear edge 3214a) of the top frame base 3210 substantially contacts the front surface 3014 of the center screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219C is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (center portion 3015a) of the center screen 3010.

FIG. 188 shows the central screen 3010 and top frame base 3210 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the right curved portion 3012R of the central screen 3010). For clarity, in FIG. 188, the cut surface of the center screen 3010 (right curved portion 3012R) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown in diagonal lines.

As shown in FIG. 188, the screen contact portion 3219R of the top frame base 3210 substantially contacts the front surface 3014 of the center screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219R is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (second right side portion 3015e) of the central screen 3010. Similarly, although not shown, the screen contact portion 3219L of the top frame base 3210 substantially contacts the front surface 3014 of the center screen 3010. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219L is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (second left side portion 3015c) of the central screen 3010.

In this way, the screen contacting portions 3219 (screen contacting portion 3219L, screen contacting portion 3219C, and screen contacting portion 3219R) of the top frame base 3210 are generally in approximate contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. are in contact with each other. Above the screen contacting part 3219, the front upper end part 3015 of the central screen 3010 (the central part 3015a, the first left part 3015b, the second left part 3015c, the first right part 3015d, and the second right part 3015e) ) are provided. As a result, even if there is a slight gap between the screen abutting portion 3219 of the top frame base 3210 and the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010, even if a wire-shaped instrument is attempted to enter through the gap. , the front upper end portion 3015 becomes an obstacle and can prevent the intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a thief from being carried out through the gap.

In FIG. 189, the center screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are shown in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the through hole 3016L of the center screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210). It shows how it is cut. For clarity, in FIG. 189, the cut surface of the center screen 3010 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown in black, and the rear upper end 3019 (left side 3019a) and front upper end 3015 of the center screen 3010 are shown in black. (The upper surface of the second left side portion 3015c) is shown by hatching.

As shown in FIG. 189, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016L of the center screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210 overlap. As a result, the boss portion 3220L is inserted into the through hole 3016L, and the rear portion of the boss portion 3220L protrudes slightly rearward than the back surface 3018 of the central screen 3010. The diameter of the through hole 3016L is slightly larger than the diameter of the boss portion 3220L.

Similarly, although not shown, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016R of the center screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220R of the top frame base 3210 overlap. As a result, the boss portion 3220R is inserted into the through hole 3016R, and the rear portion of the boss portion 3220R protrudes slightly rearward than the back surface 3018 of the central screen 3010. The diameter of the through hole 3016R is slightly larger than the diameter of the boss portion 3220R.

The through holes 3016 (through holes 3016L and 3016R) and the boss portions 3220 (boss portions 3220L and 3220R) are used when the rear transparent plate 3050 is attached to the top frame base 3210 by screw fastening. It has become something that can be done. This will be detailed later.

<Arrangement relationship between center screen 3010 and rear transparent plate 3050>
FIG. 190 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and rear transparent plate. FIG. 191(a) is a schematic diagram, viewed from above, of how light projected from a projector enters the rear transparent plate in this embodiment. FIG. 191(b) is a schematic diagram, viewed from above, of how light projected from a projector enters a rear transparent plate in another embodiment. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and the rear transparent plate. FIG. 193 is a perspective view of the rear transparent plate seen from the rear. FIG. 194 is a perspective view of the central screen and the rear transparent plate seen from the rear.

FIG. 190 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the rear transparent plate 3050 are cut along a horizontal plane in an assembled state. FIG. 191 schematically shows cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and rear transparent plate 3050 shown in FIG. 190. FIG. 192 shows a partially enlarged view of the central screen 3010 and rear transparent plate 3050 shown in FIG. 190.

As shown in FIG. 190, the back side surface of the flat part 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the front side surface of the flat part 3051 of the rear transparent plate 3050 are in close contact with each other (or are close to each other (approximately in contact with each other). However, a gap is formed between the rear surface of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the curved portion 3052 of the rear transparent plate 3050. For clarity, in FIG. 190, the cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the rear transparent plate 3050 are shown in black.

As described above, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 99). Thereby, the light projected from the projector 9020 enters the rear transparent plate 3050. FIG. 191(a) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point X on the rear transparent plate 3050. Here, for convenience, the description will be made assuming that a part of the curved portion 3052 of the rear transparent plate 3050 is substantially flat (curvature is 0).

At this time, the direction of the tangent (L ₁ (X)) to the curved portion 3052 at point X substantially coincides with the direction in which the curved portion 3052 is formed. The straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) are substantially perpendicular to each other, and the angle α between the straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) is approximately 90°. That is, the incident angle (90°-α) of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L to the curved portion 3052 is approximately 0°.

On the other hand, in the other embodiment shown in FIG. It has a size and shape. As a result, the back surface of the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the front surface of the flat portion 3051 of the rear transparent plate 3050 come into close contact, and the rear surface of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010 and the rear The front surface of the curved portion 3052 of the side transparent plate 3050 is in close contact with the front surface.

The curvature of the curved portion 3052 of the rear transparent plate 3050 according to another embodiment shown in FIG. 191(b) is approximately the same as the curvature of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. FIG. 191(b) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point Y on the rear transparent plate 3050. Point Y is a point on the curved portion 3052 of the rear transparent plate 3050 according to another embodiment, and is a point on the straight line L on the downstream side of the point X in the light traveling direction. The angle β between the straight line L and the straight line (L ₂ (Y)) perpendicular to the tangent to the curved part 3052 (L ₁ (Y)) at point Y, that is, the angle β of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L. The angle of incidence on the curved portion 3052 is larger than the angle of incidence (90°-α) in this embodiment.

Since the incident angle of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L to the curved part 3052 is as described above, in other embodiments, the light reflected at the point Y is directed toward the flat part 3011 side of the central screen 3010. It's getting easier to progress. In contrast, in the present embodiment, such reflection can be suppressed and a situation in which the reflected light enters the central screen 3010 can be prevented from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 192, in the vicinity of the left end of the rear surface of the curved portion 3052L of the rear transparent plate 3050, fine irregularities are formed by applying texture over a predetermined range. There is. In FIG. 192, the area where the texturing process has been performed (texturing area 3052X) is shown in black. As described above, the graining process is a process in which grains (wrinkle patterns) are formed on the surface, and this process is performed as a light diffusion process.

The rear transparent plate 3050 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and although not shown, a similar texture is applied to the vicinity of the right end of the rear surface of the curved portion 3052R of the rear transparent plate 3050. has been done. This can effectively prevent the light projected from the projector 9020 from entering the central screen 3010 due to reflection.

Furthermore, similar texturing may be applied to the surface of the back side (inside of the pachi-slot machine 1) of the curved portion 3012 or the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010 (near the texturing area 3052X of the rear transparent plate 3050). You can also use it as Either or both of the texturing on the rear transparent plate 3050 and the texturing on the center screen 3010 may not be performed.

As shown in FIG. 193, a screw hole 3056L and a screw hole 3056R are formed in the upper part of the rear transparent plate 3050. As shown in FIG. 194, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through holes 3016L and 3016R of the center screen 3010 overlap with the screw holes 3056L and 3056R of the rear transparent plate 3050, respectively. do. For clarity, in FIG. 194, the front upper end 3015 (first left side 3015b, second left side 3015c, first right side 3015d, and second right side 3015e) of the central screen 3010 is shown in black. ing.

<Fixing the center screen 3010>
FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 196 is a perspective view showing the under frame removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 197 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism.

In FIG. 195, the upper door mechanism UD is cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the through hole 3016L of the central screen 3010, the screw hole 3056L of the rear transparent plate 3050, and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210). It shows how it was done. For clarity, in FIG. 195, the cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the screws 3090 are shown in shading, the cut surfaces of the rear transparent plate 3050 are shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surfaces of the top frame base 3210 are shown in black. It is shown in

As shown in FIG. 195, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3056L of the rear transparent plate 3050 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210 overlap. Similarly, although not shown, the screw hole 3056R of the rear transparent plate 3050 and the boss portion 3220R of the top frame base 3210 overlap. By screwing the screws 3090 inserted through the screw holes 3056 (screw holes 3056L and 3056R) into the holes formed in the boss portion 3220 (boss portions 3220L and 3220R), the rear transparent plate 3050 is attached to the top. Attached to frame base 3210. Further, as described above, the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010 substantially contacts the screen contact portions 3219 (screen contact portion 3219L, screen contact portion 3219C, and screen contact portion 3219R) of the top frame base 3210. ing. Thereby, the central screen 3010 is held between the rear transparent plate 3050 and the top frame base 3210.

As shown in FIG. 196, an underframe 3070 is arranged at the lower part of the upper door mechanism UD. Specifically, the underframe 3070 is arranged to cover the lower surface 3020a of the rear lower end portion 3020 of the central screen 3010 and the lower surface 3055a of the lower side portion 3055 of the rear transparent plate 3050.

FIG. 197 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD is cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing approximately through the center of the upper door mechanism UD in the left-right direction). For clarity, in FIG. 197, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the rear transparent plate 3050 is shown with hatching, and the cut surface of the underframe 3070 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 197, the underframe 3070 has an upper part 3071 formed by bending the front end upward. The upper part 3071 has a structure bent toward the rear, and a rear end edge 3071a substantially contacts the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. In this state, the rear edge 3071a is positioned slightly above the front lower end 3017 of the central screen 3010. As a result, if there is a slight gap between the underframe 3070 and the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010, even if you try to insert a wire-shaped instrument through the gap, the front lower end 3017 will get in the way. This makes it possible to prevent such intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a thief from being carried out through the gap.

Note that the lower front end portion 3017 is formed slightly above the lower end of the front surface 3014. Further, the lower part 3055 of the rear transparent plate 3050 is configured to have a step, and the front part thereof is arranged to be placed on the lower rear end part 3020 of the central screen 3010.

<Speaker unit 3400>
FIG. 198 is a front view showing the top side panel removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 199 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top side panel and speaker grill are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 200 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame decoration is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a left speaker unit 3400L and a right speaker unit 3400R. Since the left speaker unit 3400L and the right speaker unit 3400R have a symmetrical structure, only the left speaker unit 3400L will be described below. Furthermore, the left speaker unit 3400L and the right speaker unit 3400R are not distinguished and are referred to as a speaker unit 3400.

The speaker unit 3400 includes a speaker 3410, a speaker grill 3420, a top side panel 3430, a plurality of speaker unit LEDs 3440, a speaker side lens 3450, and a top frame decoration 3460. Note that in FIG. 198, the top side panel 3430 of the left speaker unit 3400L is removed, while the top side panel 3430 of the right speaker unit 3400R is attached.

Speaker grill 3420 and top side panel 3430 are arranged in front of speaker 3410. The speaker grill 3420 has a mesh structure (reticular structure) and has a plurality of holes 3421 formed therein. A sound emission opening 3431 is formed in the center of the top side panel 3430. The sound output from the speaker 3410 is emitted forward through the holes 3421 and the sound emitting opening 3431.

The speaker unit LED 3440 includes a speaker unit LED 3440a placed on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the speaker 3410, and a speaker unit LED 3440b placed on the outer side of the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the speaker 3410. It is provided. The speaker unit LED 3440 is installed so as to emit light in the forward direction. Furthermore, the speaker unit LED 3440 is a full-color LED, and is capable of emitting multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green.

The top side panel 3430 is made of a translucent material and is arranged on the front side of the speaker unit LED 3440. The light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a passes through the inner side 3432 of the top side panel 3430 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, the light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440b is transmitted through the outer part 3433 of the top side panel 3430 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

A light exit opening 3434 is formed in the inner side 3432 of the top side panel 3430. The light exit opening 3434 has a shape corresponding to the speaker side lens 3450, and the speaker side lens 3450 fits into the light exit opening 3434, thereby closing the light exit opening 3434. The speaker side lens 3450 is made of a translucent material. Although not shown, a speaker unit LED 3440c is provided on the back side of the speaker side lens 3450. The light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440c passes through the speaker side lens 3450 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Furthermore, a screw hole 3435 is formed in the top side panel 3430. The top frame decoration 3460 is arranged on the front side of the screw hole 3435. As shown in FIG. 200, a boss portion 3462 is formed on the back surface 3461 of the top frame decoration 3460 so as to protrude rearward. In FIG. 200, the top frame decoration 3460 is shown as seen from the rear, while the other components are shown as seen from the front.

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3221 (see FIG. 185) of the top frame base 3210, the screw hole 3435 of the top side panel 3430, and the boss portion 3462 of the top frame decoration 3460 overlap. The top frame base 3210 is attached to the top frame decoration 3460 by screwing screws inserted through the screw holes 3221 and 3435 into the holes formed in the boss portion 3462. The screw is arranged on the back side of the top frame decoration 3460 and is not visible to the player, so that a good appearance can be achieved.

<Front top unit 3200>
FIG. 201 is a front view showing a state in which the top center panel and top lens are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged front view of the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 203 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top reflector and the arrow eye reflector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 201. FIG. 204 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 203 with the top frame base and top inner cover removed. FIG. 205 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, the top center LED board, and the center LED board base.

As described above, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with the front top unit 3200 (see FIG. 130). As shown in FIGS. 201 to 204, the front top unit 3200 includes a top center LED board 3250, a top reflector 3260, an arrow eye reflector 3270 (a left arrow eye reflector 3270L and a right arrow eye reflector 3270R), and a top lens 3280. and a top center panel 3290.

A plurality of center LEDs 3252 are provided on the front surface 3251 of the top center LED board 3250. The center LED 3252 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction (front direction) of the substrate surface. The center LED 3252 is a full-color LED and can emit multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green. As the center LED 3252, a center LED 3252a, a center LED 3252b, a center LED 3252c, a center LED 3252d, a center LED 3252e, a center LED 3252f, and a center LED 3252g are provided.

Center LED 3252a is provided at the center of top center LED board 3250. The center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252c are provided on the left side of the center LED 3252a, and the location of the center LED 3252c is an area surrounded by the location of the center LED 3252b. The center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252e are provided on the right side of the center LED 3252a, and the location of the center LED 3252e is an area surrounded by the location of the center LED 3252d. Center LED 3252f is provided on the left side of center LED 3252b, and center LED 3252g is provided on the right side of center LED 3252d.

The top frame base 3210 has connection parts 3222 (first connection part 3222a, second connection part 3222b, third connection part 3222c, fourth connection part 3222d, fifth connection part 3222e) that connect the top wall 3211 and the bottom wall 3214. , and a sixth connecting portion 3222f). Thereby, a central region 3223a, a first left region 3223b, a first right region 3223c, a second left region 3223d, and a second right region 3223e are defined.

The central region 3223a is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the first connecting portion 3222a, and the second connecting portion 3222b when viewed from the front. The first left side area 3223b is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the first connecting part 3222a, and the third connecting part 3222c when viewed from the front. The first right side area 3223c is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the second connecting part 3222b, and the fourth connecting part 3222d when viewed from the front.

The second left side region 3223d is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the third connecting portion 3222c, and the fifth connecting portion 3222e when viewed from the front. The second right side area 3223e is an area surrounded by the upper wall 3211, the lower wall 3214, the fourth connecting portion 3222d, and the sixth connecting portion 3222f when viewed from the front. Note that the fifth connecting portion 3222e and the sixth connecting portion 3222f constitute a part of the periphery of the sound emission opening 3218L and the sound emission opening 3218R, respectively.

The central region 3223a, the first left region 3223b, the first right region 3223c, the second left region 3223d, and the second right region 3223e are hollow portions that penetrate in the front-rear direction. In front view, the center LED 3252a is located in the center region 3223a, the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252c are located in the first left region 3223b, and the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252e are located in the first right region 3223c. The center LED 3252f is located in the second left region 3223d, and the center LED 3252g is located in the second right region 3223e.

A left top inner cover 3255L is provided on the front side of the left side portion of the top center LED board 3250. The left top inner cover 3255L generally matches the outer shape of the second left side area 3223d, and is arranged to overlap with the second left side area 3223d when viewed from the front. Similarly, a right top inner cover 3255R is provided on the front side of the right side of the top center LED board 3250. The right top inner cover 3255R generally matches the outer shape of the second right side region 3223e, and is arranged to overlap with the second right side region 3223e when viewed from the front.

In FIG. 205, the top frame base 3210, top center LED board 3250, and center LED board base 3256 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the second right side area 3223e). It shows how it was done. For clarity, in FIG. 205, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surfaces of the top center LED board 3250 and the center LED board base 3256 are shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 205, a center LED board base 3256 is attached to the top frame base 3210. The center LED board base 3256 has an upper portion approximately in contact with the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210, and a lower portion approximately in contact with the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210. The top center LED board 3250 is installed on the center LED board base 3256. As a result, the top center LED board 3250 is arranged vertically between the upper wall 3211 and the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 (with the normal direction of the board surface facing forward). Therefore, the center LED 3252 can emit light in the forward direction.

<Top reflector 3260>
FIG. 206 is a perspective view of the top reflector seen from the front. FIG. 207 is a rear view of the top reflector. FIG. 208 is a front view of the top reflector and the top center LED board. 209 and 210 are partially enlarged perspective views of the top reflector and the top center LED board. FIG. 211 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top reflector, top center LED board, and top frame base.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the top reflector 3260 includes an upper wall 3261, a lower wall 3262, a center partition 3263, a first left partition 3264, a first right partition 3265, and a second left partition. It includes a partition part 3266 and a second right partition part 3267.

The central partition portion 3263 is formed to connect the upper wall 3261 and the lower wall 3262 at the center of the top reflector 3260 in the left-right direction. The first left side partition 3264 is formed on the left side of the center partition 3263 to connect the rear end of the upper wall 3261 and the rear end of the lower wall 3262. The first right partition 3265 is formed on the right side of the center partition 3263 to connect the rear end of the upper wall 3261 and the rear end of the lower wall 3262. The second left partition 3266 is formed continuously from the left end of the first left partition 3264 toward the left. The second right partition 3267 is formed continuously from the right end of the first right partition 3265 toward the right.

A light exit opening 3268a is formed on the back side of the central partition 3263, and a light exit opening 3268b and a light exit opening 3268c are formed on the back side of the first left partition 3264. The first right partition 3265 has a light exit opening 3268d and a light exit opening 3268e formed on the back side, and the second left partition 3266 has a light exit opening 3268f formed on the back side. A light exit opening 3268g is formed on the back side of the second right partition portion 3267.

For clarity, in FIG. 207, the light exit openings 3268a to 3268g are shown with diagonal lines. The light exit opening 3268a passes through the central partition 3263 toward the front side. The light exit opening 3268b and the light exit opening 3268c penetrate the first left partition 3264 toward the front side. The light exit opening 3268d and the light exit opening 3268e extend through the first right partition 3265 toward the front side. The light exit opening 3268f passes through the second left partition 3266 toward the front side. The light exit opening 3268g passes through the second right partition 3267 toward the front side.

Thereby, spaces (light passage spaces 3269a to 3269g) having a predetermined extent are formed corresponding to the respective light exit openings 3268a to 3268g. Further, the peripheral edge portions of each of the light emitting openings 3268a to 3268g are in close proximity to (approximately in contact with) the surface 3251 of the top center LED board 3250.

As shown in FIG. 208, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g are positioned to overlap with the light exit openings 3268a to 3268g, respectively. Thereby, the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g passes through the light passage spaces 3269a to 3269g, respectively. Here, one light passage space 3269 and another light passage space 3269 are separated by a wall provided in the top reflector 3260. This will be explained below.

As shown in FIGS. 209 and 210, the central partition 3263 has a triangular prism-shaped base 3263a and a protrusion 3263b that protrudes forward from the base 3263a. A cavity 3263c is formed that communicates throughout. The cavity 3263c is a space surrounded by a left inner wall 3263d, a right inner wall 3263e, and an upper inner wall 3263f. For clarity, in FIG. 209, the front edge of the left inner wall 3263d, the front edge of the right inner wall 3263e, and the front edge of the upper inner wall 3263f are shown in black. Note that these rear edges constitute the periphery of the light exit opening 3268a, and the left inner wall portion 3263d and the right inner wall portion 3263e are connected at their rear ends.

The light passage space 3269a is configured as a cavity 3263c. Thereby, the light passing space 3269a is separated from the light passing space 3269b by the left side portion of the base portion 3263a, and is separated from the light passing space 3269d by the right side portion of the base portion 3263a.

Further, the light passing space 3269b is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3264a of the first left side partition portion 3264. The range of one light passing space 3269b is defined by the inclined wall portion 3264a, and the one light passing space 3269b is separated from other light passing spaces 3269b. For clarity, in FIG. 209, the side surface of the inclined wall portion 3264a that defines one light passage space 3269b is shown with diagonal lines. The inclined wall portion 3264a has a slope that widens toward the front so that the area of the portion surrounded by the front edge is larger than the area of the portion surrounded by the rear edge (light exit opening 3268b). It is formed as follows.

Further, the light passage space 3269c is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b of the first left partition portion 3264. The light passage space 3269c is separated from the light passage space 3269b by the arrow eye peripheral wall 3264b. The area defined by the arrow eye peripheral wall 3264b is divided into two by the arrow eye central wall 3264c. Thereby, one light passage space 3269c is separated from other light passage spaces 3269c.

For clarity, in FIG. 209, the front edge 3264d of the peripheral wall 3264b for the arrow eye is shown in black, the front surface 3264e continuous from the periphery of the light exit opening 3268c is shown in diagonal lines, and the front edge 3264e of the central wall 3264c for the arrow eye is shown with diagonal lines. The front surface 3264f is shown in shading. The arrow eye central wall portion 3264c is formed to protrude more forward than the front surface 3264e. Further, the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b, and the front surface 3264f of the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c has a shorter arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b. It is positioned more rearward than the front edge 3264d of the wall portion 3264b. Note that a screw hole 3264g passing through the first left partition 3264 in the front-rear direction is formed in the arrow eye center wall 3264c.

Further, the light passage space 3269f is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3266a of the second left side partition portion 3266. The range of one light passage space 3269f is defined by the inclined wall portion 3266a, and the one light passage space 3269f is separated from other light passage spaces 3269f. For clarity, in FIG. 209, the side surface of the inclined wall portion 3266a that defines one light passage space 3269f is shown with diagonal lines. The inclined wall portion 3266a has an inclination that widens toward the front so that the area of the portion surrounded by the front edge is larger than the area of the portion surrounded by the rear edge (light exit opening 3268f). It is formed as follows.

The top reflector 3260 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and similarly, the light passage space 3269d is a space surrounded by the inclined wall part 3265a of the first right partition part 3265. , one light passage space 3269d is separated from the other light passage spaces 3269d. Further, the light passage space 3269e is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall part 3265b of the first right side partition part 3265. It is separated from 3269d. The area defined by the arrow eye peripheral wall 3265b is divided into two by the arrow eye central wall 3265c. Thereby, one light passing space 3269e is separated from other light passing spaces 3269e. Further, the light passing space 3269g is a space surrounded by the inclined wall part 3267a of the second right side partition part 3267, and the one light passing space 3269g is separated from the other light passing space 3269g by the inclined wall part 3267a. Separated.

As shown in FIG. 211, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the upper surface of the upper wall 3261 of the top reflector 3260 substantially contacts the lower surface of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210, and The lower surface of the lower wall 3262 substantially contacts the upper surface of the lower wall 3214 on the top frame base 3210.

Thereby, the front of the light passage space 3269d and the light passage space 3269e is partitioned by the upper wall 3261 and the lower wall 3262 of the top reflector 3260, the right side wall 3263g of the center partition 3263, and the fourth connection part 3222d of the top frame base 3210. It is a space that has been decorated. For clarity, in FIG. 211, the lower surface of the upper wall 3261 of the top reflector 3260 is shown with diagonal lines, the upper surface of the lower wall 3262 is shown with black, and the right side wall surface 3263g is shown with hatching. Similarly, although not shown, in front of the light passage space 3269b and the light passage space 3269c, a third connecting portion between the upper wall 3261 and the lower wall 3262 of the top reflector 3260, the left side wall surface 3263h of the central partition portion 3263, and the top frame base 3210 3222c.

<Arrow eye reflector 3270>
FIG. 212 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector seen from the front and right side. FIG. 213 is a rear view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 214 is a perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector seen from the rear. FIG. 215 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector. 216 and 217 are perspective views of the center LED, top reflector, and left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view of the center LED, top reflector, and left arrow eye reflector.

Since the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R have a bilaterally symmetrical structure, they will be described below as the arrow eye reflector 3270 without distinguishing between them. As shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, the arrow eye reflector 3270 has a hollow three-dimensional shape with open front and rear sides.

Specifically, the arrow eye reflector 3270 includes a base portion 3271, a front portion 3272, and a rear portion 3273. The base portion 3271 has a structure that occupies most of the arrow eye reflector 3270. The front side portion 3272 is formed to protrude forward from the front end of the base portion 3271. The rear side portion 3273 is formed to protrude rearward from the rear end portion of the base portion 3271.

For clarity, in FIG. 212, the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 and the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 are shown in black. The outer wall surface 3271b of the base portion 3271 and the outer wall surface 3272b of the front side portion 3272 are formed to have a step at the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271. The outer wall surface 3272b of the front side portion 3272 is formed to connect the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 and the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272.

The figure defined by the front edge 3272a of the front side part 3272 and the figure defined by the front edge 3271a of the base part 3271 have generally similar shapes, and the figure defined by the front edge 3272a of the front side part 3272 is smaller than the figure defined by the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271. Further, the front side portion 3272 is formed with a front side opening 3272c that opens toward the front. The peripheral edge of the front opening 3272c matches the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272.

The outer wall surface 3271b of the base portion 3271 and the outer wall surface 3273a of the rear side portion 3273 are formed to have a step at the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271. Further, the rear side portion 3273 is formed with a first rear opening 3273b and a second rear opening 3273c that open rearward. A cavity is formed inside the arrow eye reflector 3270, and the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c communicate with the front opening 3272c.

Moreover, the rear side part 3273 has a rear partition part 3273d between the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c. The rear partition part 3273d is formed in a flat plate shape so as to connect the upper and lower parts of the rear part 3273. A screw hole 3273e is formed in the rear partition portion 3273d. For clarity, in FIG. 213, the rear end 3271c of the base portion 3271 is shown in black, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c are shown in diagonal lines, and the back surface 3273f of the rear partition 3273d is shown in black. It is shown by hanging.

A first rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273g is formed in a part of the peripheral edge of the first rear opening 3273b so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d. Further, a second rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273h is formed in a part of the peripheral edge of the second rear opening 3273c so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d. The side surface of the first rear opening peripheral portion 3273g and the side surface of the second rear opening peripheral portion 3273h match the outer wall surface 3273a of the rear side portion 3273. For clarity, in FIG. 214, the rear end surface 3273i of the first rear opening peripheral portion 3273g and the rear end surface 3273j of the second rear opening peripheral portion 3273h are shown in diagonal lines, and the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 is shown in black. It shows.

FIG. 215 shows the arrow eye reflector 3270 cut along a vertical plane in the left-right direction (a plane passing through the base portion 3271). As shown in FIG. 215, the inner wall surface 3270a of the arrow eye reflector 3270 is formed with an inclination that widens toward the front. As a result, when the arrow eye reflector 3270 is cut along a vertical plane in the left-right direction (a vertical plane such that the distance in the front-rear direction from the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c is X), the cross section The area of the corresponding opening (cross-sectional opening 3270X) increases as the value of X increases.

For clarity, in FIG. 215, the cross section of the arrow eye reflector 3270 is shown with diagonal lines. The cross-sectional opening 3270X is a portion surrounded by the diagonal line. As described above, the outer wall surface (outer wall surface 3271b, outer wall surface 3272b, outer wall surface 3273a) of the arrow eye reflector 3270 has a gap between the base portion 3271 and the front side portion 3272 and between the base portion 3271 and the rear side portion 3273. Although a step is formed between them, the inner wall surface 3270a is continuously formed between the base portion 3271, the front side portion 3272, and the rear side portion 3273 without having such a step. . Therefore, the thickness of the front side portion 3272 (the distance between the outer wall surface 3272b and the inner wall surface 3270a) is smaller than the thickness of the base portion 3271 (the distance between the outer wall surface 3271b and the inner wall surface 3270a). In FIG. 215, the thickness of the base portion 3271 is indicated by d. Note that the base portion 3271 and the front side portion 3272 are each formed to have substantially uniform thickness.

As will be described in detail later, the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 is close to the rear surface side of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 224). Here, since the arrow eye reflector 3270 itself does not pass light, when the center LED 3252 around the arrow eye reflector 3270 emits light to produce a light emission effect on the front top unit 3200, the shadow of the arrow eye reflector 3270 (especially the arrow eye There is a concern that the shadow of the front end of the reflector 3270 will be visible to the player through the top lens 3280 and the top center panel 3290, leading to a deterioration in the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine. However, as in this embodiment, by providing a step on the front end side of the arrow eye reflector 3270 and making the front side part 3272 thinner than the base part 3271, the area of the front end part of the arrow eye reflector 3270 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the shadow of the front end of the arrow eye reflector 3270 during the light emission effect, and this has the effect of improving the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine.

Further, a boss portion 3270b is formed on the arrow eye reflector 3270 so as to protrude forward from the rear partition portion 3273d of the rear side portion 3273. The boss portion 3270b has a cylindrical shape, and the screw hole 3273e is formed through the rear partition portion 3273d and extends over a part of the boss portion 3270b. For clarity, in FIG. 215, the front surface 3273k of the rear partition portion 3273d is shown in black, and the front surface of the boss portion 3270b is shown in hatching.

As illustrated, the letter "L" is formed on the front surface of the boss portion 3270b of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. On the other hand, the letter "R" is formed on the front surface of the boss portion 3270b of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. This makes it possible to easily distinguish between the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R.

In FIG. 216, the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are disassembled, and the top reflector 3260 is shown as seen from the front (approximately from the front), while the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown from the rear (approximately from the rear). ) shows the view from FIG. 217 shows the assembled state of the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L viewed from the front. FIG. 218 shows a cross section of the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L in an assembled state, viewed from the left. Furthermore, in FIGS. 216 to 218, components other than the center LED 3252, top reflector 3260, and left arrow eye reflector 3270L are removed while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the center LED 3252 and the top reflector 3260. ing.

As shown in FIG. 216, a screw hole 3264g is formed in the arrow eye center wall 3264c of the top reflector 3260. As described above, the screw hole 3264g is formed to penetrate the first left partition portion 3264 in the front-rear direction. Similarly, although not shown, a screw hole 3265g is formed in the arrow eye center wall portion 3265c of the top reflector 3260. The screw hole 3265g is formed so as to pass through the first right partition portion 3265 in the front-rear direction.

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3264g of the top reflector 3260 and the screw hole 3273e of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L overlap. The left arrow eye reflector 3270L is attached to the top reflector 3260 by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole 3264g into the screw hole 3273e. Similarly, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3265g of the top reflector 3260 and the screw hole 3273e of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R overlap. The right arrow eye reflector 3270R is attached to the top reflector 3260 by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole 3265g into the screw hole 3273e.

Thereby, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R are respectively arranged on the front side of the top reflector 3260. At this time, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L overlap with the two light exit openings 3268c of the top reflector 3260, respectively. The first rear opening 3273b and the light output opening 3268c communicate with each other, and the second rear opening 3273c and the light output opening 3268c communicate with each other. Similarly, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R overlap with the two light exit openings 3268e of the top reflector 3260, respectively. The first rear opening 3273b and the light output opening 3268e communicate with each other, and the second rear opening 3273c and the light output opening 3268e communicate with each other.

In FIG. 218, the center LED 3252, top reflector 3260, and left arrow eye reflector 3270L in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are shown in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L). ) shows how it looks when cut. For clarity, in FIG. 218, the cut surface of the top reflector 3260 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown with shading, and the side surface and front surface 3273k of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L at the rear partition 3273d. are shown with diagonal lines and black, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 218, the rear end surface 3273j of the second rear opening peripheral portion 3273h of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially contacts the front surface 3264e of the peripheral edge of the light exit opening 3268c in the top reflector 3260, and the left arrow eye reflector The back surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d in the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially contacts the front surface 3264f of the center wall portion 3264c for the arrow eye in the top reflector 3260, and the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 in the left arrow eye reflector 3270L contacts the arrow eye center wall portion 3264c in the top reflector 3260. It substantially contacts the front edge 3264d of the eye peripheral wall 3264b. Similarly, the right arrow eye reflector 3270R also substantially contacts the top reflector 3260.

<Light emission from center LED 3252>
As described above, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the center LED 3252a overlaps the light exit opening 3268a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252a passes through the light passage space 3269a (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269a is a cavity 3263c (a space surrounded by a left inner wall 3263d, a right inner wall 3263e, and an upper inner wall 3263f) in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the center LED 3252b overlaps the light exit opening 3268b of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252b passes through the light passage space 3269b (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269b is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3264a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

In addition, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252c overlaps with the light exit opening 3268c of the top reflector 3260 and the first rear opening 3273b and second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L ( (See FIGS. 208 and 217). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252c is transmitted to the light passage space 3269c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 206) and the internal space of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L (the first rear opening 3273b, the second rear opening 3273c, and the front side (a cavity communicating with the opening 3272c) and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269c is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b and the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the center LED 3252d overlaps the light exit opening 3268d of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252d passes through the light passage space 3269d (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269d is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3265a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

In addition, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252e overlaps with the light exit opening 3268e of the top reflector 3260 and the first rear opening 3273b and second rear opening 3273c of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R ( (See FIGS. 208 and 217). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252e is transmitted to the light passing space 3269e of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 206) and the internal space of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R (the first rear opening 3273b, the second rear opening 3273c, and the front side (a cavity communicating with the opening 3272c) and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269e is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3265b and the arrow eye central wall portion 3265c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the center LED 3252f overlaps with the light exit opening 3268f of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252f passes through the light passage space 3269f (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269f is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3266a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the center LED 3252g overlaps the light exit opening 3268g of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252g passes through the light passage space 3269g (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and proceeds to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269g is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3267a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

The light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g travels as described above, but the walls of the top reflector 3260 located in the path of the light (left inner wall 3263d, right inner wall 3263e, upper inner wall 3263f, inclined wall portion 3264a, inclined wall portion 3265a, inclined wall portion 3266a, inclined wall portion 3267a, right side wall surface 3263g, left side wall surface 3263h, etc.), and the wall surface of the arrow eye reflector 3270 (inner wall surface 3270a, outer wall surface 3271b, outer wall surface 3272b, etc.) is a reflector that reflects light. Thereby, the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g travels forward while being reflected by these wall surfaces.

Note that a left top inner cover 3255L is provided on the front side of the second left partition 3266 in the top reflector 3260, and a right top inner cover 3255R is provided on the front side of the second right partition 3267 in the top reflector 3260. is provided (see FIG. 203). The left top inner cover 3255L is formed into a flat plate shape, and is arranged so that its back surface substantially contacts the front surface of the second left partition section 3266 (the peripheral edge of the inclined wall section 3266a). The right top inner cover 3255R is formed into a flat plate shape, and is arranged so that its back surface substantially contacts the front surface of the second right partition portion 3267 (the peripheral edge of the inclined wall portion 3267a).

Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252f is incident on the back surface of the left top inner cover 3255L. The left top inner cover 3255L is made of a translucent material, and the light passes through the left top inner cover 3255L and travels forward of the left top inner cover 3255L. Similarly, the light emitted from the center LED 3252g enters the back surface of the right top inner cover 3255R. The right top inner cover 3255R is made of a translucent material, and the light passes through the right top inner cover 3255R and travels forward of the right top inner cover 3255R.

<Top lens 3280>
FIG. 219 is a perspective view of the top frame base and top lens. FIG. 220 is a perspective view showing the top lens removed from the state shown in FIG. 219. FIG. 221 is a perspective view of the top lens seen from the rear and above. FIG. 222 is a perspective view of the top center LED board, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector, and top lens. 223 and 224 are cross-sectional views of the top center LED board, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector, and top lens. FIG. 225 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens. FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens.

As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the top lens 3280 is surrounded by the front edge 3211b of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214, the fifth connecting portion 3222e, and the sixth connecting portion 3222f. It roughly matches the external shape of the figure. The top lens 3280 is arranged along these front edge 3211b, front edge 3214b, fifth connection part 3222e, and sixth connection part 3222f.

As a result, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the central region 3223a, the first left region 3223b, the first right region 3223c, the second left region 3223d, and the second right region 3223e of the top frame base 3210 (see FIG. 204) is covered from the front by a top lens 3280.

Specifically, the top lens 3280 has a laterally symmetrical structure and includes a center portion 3281, a left side portion 3282, and a right side portion 3283. The central portion 3281 is formed to have a triangular shape. The left side portion 3282 is formed so as to continue from the left end of the center portion 3281 toward the left. The left side portion 3282 has an inclination that becomes more rearward toward the left. The right side portion 3283 is formed to continue from the right end of the center portion 3281 toward the right. The right side portion 3283 has an inclination that becomes more rearward toward the right.

A central front convex portion 3281a is formed on the front side of the central portion 3281. The central front convex portion 3281a is a convex portion that bulges slightly forward with respect to the surrounding surface, and extends in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction. Furthermore, a through hole 3281b and a through hole 3281c are formed in the central portion 3281. A screw hole 3224a and a screw hole 3224b are formed in the first connection portion 3222a and the second connection portion 3222b of the top frame base 3210, respectively, at locations overlapping with the through hole 3281b and the through hole 3281c.

The left side part 3282 has an upper left side part 3282a and a lower left side part 3282b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper left side part 3282a. The upper left side part 3282a and the lower left side part 3282b are each formed to have substantially uniform thickness. Three left front protrusions 3284 (first left front protrusion 3284a, second left front protrusion 3284b, and third left front protrusion 3284c) are formed on the front side of the upper left side part 3282a. The first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284c are each a convex portion that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface (front main surface 3282c). It has the shape of an inverted dogleg.

Similarly, the right side part 3283 has an upper right side part 3283a and a lower right side part 3283b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper right side part 3283a. The upper right side part 3283a and the lower right side part 3283b are each formed to have substantially uniform thickness. Three front right protrusions 3285 (first front right protrusion 3285a, second front right protrusion 3285b, and third front right protrusion 3285c) are formed on the front side of the upper right side portion 3283a. The first right front convex part 3285a, the second right front convex part 3285b, and the third right front convex part 3285c are each a convex part that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface (front main surface 3283c). It has a dogleg shape.

Further, a lower left protruding portion 3282d that protrudes downward is formed on the lower left side portion 3282b. The lower left protruding portion 3282d is formed with a lower left front convex portion 3282e that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface. Further, a lower right protruding portion 3283d that protrudes downward is formed on the lower right side portion 3283b. The lower right protruding portion 3283d is formed with a lower right front convex portion 3283e that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the lower left protrusion 3282d and the lower right protrusion 3283d are the lower left protrusion 3225a and the lower right protrusion 3225b that protrude downward from the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210, respectively. mated to.

As shown in FIG. 221, a central rear recessed portion 3281d is formed on the back side of the central portion 3281. The central rear recess 3281d is a recess slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface (periphery 3281e) and extends in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction. The formation location of the central rear concave portion 3281d overlaps the formation location of the central front convex portion 3281a. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edge of the central rear concave portion 3281d substantially coincides with the outer edge of the central front convex portion 3281a. For clarity, in FIG. 221, the central rear recess 3281d is shown with diagonal lines.

Furthermore, three left rear recesses 3286 (a first left rear recess 3286a, a second left rear recess 3286b, and a third left rear recess 3286c) are formed on the back side of the left side portion 3282. . The first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c are each recessed slightly with respect to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3282f). It has a square shape. These left rear recesses 3286 are basically formed in the upper left side part 3282a, but a small portion below the first left rear recess 3286a is formed in the lower left side part 3282b.

The first left rear concave portion 3286a, the second left rear concave portion 3286b, and the third left rear concave portion 3286c are formed at the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and, respectively. It overlaps with the formation location of the third left front convex portion 3284c. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the first left rear concave portion 3286a, the second left rear concave portion 3286b, and the third left rear concave portion 3286c are respectively connected to the first left front convex portion 3284a. , the second left front protrusion 3284b, and the third left front protrusion 3284c.

Furthermore, two convex portions (a first left rear convex portion 3288a and a second left rear convex portion 3288b) are formed between the first left rear concave portion 3286a and the second left rear concave portion 3286b. Two convex parts (a third left rear convex part 3288c and a fourth left rear convex part 3288d) are formed between the second left rear concave part 3286b and the third left rear concave part 3286c. There is. The first left rear convex part 3288a, the second left rear convex part 3288b, the third left rear convex part 3288c, and the fourth left rear convex part 3288d each have a peripheral surface (rear main surface 3282f). ) is formed as a convex portion that slightly bulges out so as to connect adjacent left rear side concave portions 3286.

Similarly, three right rear recesses 3287 (a first right rear recess 3287a, a second right rear recess 3287b, and a third right rear recess 3287c) are formed on the back side of the right side 3283. There is. The first right rear recess 3287a, the second right rear recess 3287b, and the third right rear recess 3287c are each recessed slightly with respect to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3283f). It has an inverted shape. These right rear recesses 3287 are basically formed in the upper right side part 3283a, but a small portion below the first right rear recess 3287a is formed in the lower right side part 3283b. .

The first right rear concave portion 3287a, the second right rear concave portion 3287b, and the third right rear concave portion 3287c are formed at the first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and, respectively. It overlaps with the formation location of the third right front convex portion 3285c. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the first right rear concave portion 3287a, the second right rear concave portion 3287b, and the third right rear concave portion 3287c are respectively connected to the first right front convex portion 3285a. , the second right front protrusion 3285b, and the third right front protrusion 3285c.

Furthermore, two convex portions (a first right rear convex portion 3289a and a second right rear convex portion 3289b) are formed between the first right rear concave portion 3287a and the second right rear concave portion 3287b. Two convex parts (a third right rear convex part 3289c and a fourth right rear convex part 3289d) are formed between the second right rear concave part 3287b and the third right rear concave part 3287c. There is. The first right rear convex part 3289a, the second right rear convex part 3289b, the third right rear convex part 3289c, and the fourth right rear convex part 3289d each have a surrounding surface (rear main surface 3283f). ) is formed as a slightly bulging convex portion to connect adjacent right rear concave portions 3287.

Furthermore, a lower left rear recessed portion 3282g that is slightly depressed with respect to the surrounding surface is formed on the back side of the lower left protrusion 3282d. Further, on the back side of the lower right protrusion 3283d, a lower right rear recessed portion 3283g that is slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface is formed. The formation locations of the lower left rear recess 3282g and the lower right rear recess 3283g overlap with the formation locations of the lower left front protrusion 3282e and the lower right front protrusion 3283e, respectively. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the lower left rear concave portion 3282g and the lower right rear concave portion 3283g substantially coincide with the outer edges of the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e, respectively. .

As shown in FIGS. 222 to 224, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top lens 3280 is arranged on the front side of the top reflector 3260, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L, and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. There is. At this time, the front edge of the left inner wall portion 3263d of the top reflector 3260, the front edge of the right inner wall portion 3263e, the front edge of the upper inner wall portion 3263f (see FIG. 209), and the peripheral edge 3281e of the center portion 3281 of the top lens 3280. are substantially parallel surfaces, and these surfaces substantially abut.

Further, the front edge 3272a (see FIG. 212) of the front side portion 3272 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the rear main surface 3282f of the left side portion 3282 of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other, and these surfaces are substantially parallel to each other. come into contact with Similarly, the front edge 3272a (see FIG. 212) of the front side portion 3272 of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R and the rear main surface 3283f of the right side portion 3283 of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other, and these surfaces are approximately parallel to each other. come into contact with

In FIG. 223, the top center LED board 3250, top reflector 3260, left arrow eye reflector 3270L, right arrow eye reflector 3270R, and top lens 3280 are shown in a horizontal plane (the boss of the arrow eye reflector 3270) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. 3270b). For clarity, in FIG. 223, the cut surface of the center partition portion 3263 of the top reflector 3260 is shown with diagonal lines, and the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown in black.

In FIG. 224, the top center LED board 3250, top reflector 3260, left arrow eye reflector 3270L, right arrow eye reflector 3270R, and top lens 3280 are shown in the vertical plane in the front-rear direction (top lens 3280 (a plane passing through the first left rear convex part 3288a and the second left rear convex part 3288b). For clarity, in FIG. 224, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown by hatching, and the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown by diagonal lines.

In FIG. 225, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the top lens 3280 are disassembled, and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown as seen from the front, while the top lens 3280 is shown as seen from the rear. There is. FIG. 226 shows a state in which the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the top lens 3280 are cut along a vertical plane in the left-right direction (a plane passing through the base portion 3271 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. There is. In addition, in FIG. 226, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown with shading, and the first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c in the top lens 3280 are shown by hatching. Indicated by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIGS. 225 and 226, the outer shape of the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is approximately the shape of a virtual figure 3286X defined by the three left rear recesses 3286 of the top lens 3280. Match. The virtual figure 3286X is a figure surrounded by P, Q, R, and S in FIG. 225. In FIG. 225, the front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown in black.

Specifically, the front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L includes an upper front edge 3272p, a lower front edge 3272q, a left front edge 3272r, and a right front edge 3272s. The upper front edge 3272p and the lower front edge 3272q are each formed into a straight line. The left front edge 3272r and the right front edge 3272s are each formed in the shape of an inverted dogleg.

On the other hand, the outer edges of the three left rear recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280 are respectively constituted by a linear upper edge 3286p and a lower edge 3286q, and a dogleg-shaped left edge 3286r and right edge 3286s. There is. The virtual figure 3286X includes a line segment (P) connecting the upper edges 3286p of the three left rear recesses 3286, a line segment (Q) connecting the lower edge 3286q of the three left rear recesses 3286, and a third left rear recess 3286X. This figure is surrounded by a left edge 3286r (R) of the recess 3286c and a right edge 3286s (S) of the first left rear recess 3286a.

The upper edge 3286p of the first left rear recess 3286a, the upper edge 3286p of the second left rear recess 3286b, and the upper edge 3286p of the third left rear recess 3286c are positioned on the same straight line. Further, a lower edge 3286q of the first left rear recess 3286a, a lower edge 3286q of the second left rear recess 3286b, and a lower edge 3286q of the third left rear recess 3286c are positioned on the same straight line.

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper front edge 3272p of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially overlaps the upper edge 3286p of the three left rear recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280, and the lower left arrow eye reflector 3270L The front edge 3272q substantially overlaps the lower edge 3286q of the three left rear recesses 3286 in the top lens 3280, and the left front edge 3272r of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L overlaps the left edge 3286r of the third left rear recess 3286c in the top lens 3280. The right front edge 3272s of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially overlaps the right edge 3286s of the first left rear recess 3286a of the top lens 3280. The front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is arranged along the periphery of the virtual figure 3286X in the top lens 3280, and substantially contacts the rear main surface 3282f.

From the above, the light (light emitted from the center LED 3252c) passing through the internal space of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L (the cavity that communicates the first rear opening 3273b, the second rear opening 3273c, and the front opening 3272c) is The light enters the first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 217).

Similarly, although not shown, the light (emitted from the center LED 3252e) that has passed through the internal space (the cavity that communicates the first rear opening 3273b, the second rear opening 3273c, and the front opening 3272c) of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R The light) enters the first right rear recess 3287a, the second right rear recess 3287b, and the third right rear recess 3287c of the top lens 3280.

Furthermore, the light (light emitted from the center LED 3252a) that has passed through the cavity 3263c (see FIG. 209) of the center partition 3263 in the top reflector 3260 enters the center rear recess 3281d of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 216). . Moreover, the light emitted from the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g is transmitted to the formation area of the center rear recess 3281d, the left rear recess 3286, and the right rear recess in the top lens 3280. The light is incident on a region other than the region where 3287 is formed.

The passage of light emitted from the center LED 3252a is separated from the passage of light emitted from other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the top reflector 3260. This prevents light emitted from the center LEDs 3252 other than the center LED 3252a from entering the center rear recess 3281d of the top lens 3280.

Furthermore, the passage of light emitted from the center LED 3252c is separated from the passage of light emitted from the other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. This prevents light emitted from the center LEDs 3252 other than the center LED 3252c from entering the left rear recess 3286 of the top lens 3280.

Similarly, the path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252e is separated from the path of the light emitted from the other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. This prevents light emitted from the center LEDs 3252 other than the center LED 3252e from entering the right rear recess 3287 of the top lens 3280.

The top lens 3280 is made of a translucent material, and light incident on the top lens 3280 is transmitted through the top lens 3280. The light transmitted through the top lens 3280 enters the top center panel 3290 arranged on the front side of the top lens 3280 (or, as described later, passes through an opening formed in the top center panel 3290). (ejected to the outside of aircraft 1).

<Top center panel 3290>
FIG. 227 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the front. FIG. 228 is a partially enlarged front view of the top center panel. FIG. 229 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the rear and above. FIG. 230 is a rear view of the top center panel and top lens. FIG. 231 is a cross-sectional view of the top center panel and top lens. FIG. 232 is a front view of the top center panel and top lens.

As shown in FIGS. 227 and 228, the top center panel 3290 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and its outer shape in front view corresponds to the top lens 3280 (the top center panel 3290 is larger than the top lens 3280). 3280). Specifically, the top center panel 3290 includes a center portion 3291, a left side portion 3292, and a right side portion 3293.

The central portion 3291 is formed to have a triangular shape. A central opening 3291a is formed in the central portion 3291. The central opening 3291a is formed as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the central opening 3291a corresponds to the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280. For clarity, the central opening 3291a is shown shaded in FIG. 228.

The left side portion 3292 is formed so as to continue from the left end of the center portion 3291 toward the left. The left side portion 3292 has an inclination that becomes more rearward toward the left. The left side part 3292 includes an upper left side part 3292a, a left bent part 3292b bent rearward from the lower end of the left upper side part 3292a, and a lower left side part formed continuously downward from the lower end of the left bent part 3292b. 3292c. Three left openings 3294 (first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, and third left opening 3294c) are formed in the upper left side portion 3292a.

The first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c each have an inverted dogleg shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shapes of the first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c are the same as the first left front convex part 3284a, the second left front convex part 3284b, and the third left front convex part 3284b of the top lens 3280, respectively. It has a shape corresponding to the side protrusion 3284c. For clarity, in FIG. 228, the first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c are shown with diagonal lines.

The right side portion 3293 is formed so as to continue from the right end of the center portion 3291 toward the right. The right side portion 3293 has an inclination that becomes closer to the rear as it goes to the right. The right side part 3293 includes an upper right side part 3293a, a right bent part 3293b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper right side part 3293a, and a lower right side formed continuously downward from the lower end of the right bent part 3293b. 3293c. Three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, and third right opening 3295c) are formed in the upper right side portion 3293a.

The first right opening 3295a, the second right opening 3295b, and the third right opening 3295c each have a dogleg shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shapes of the first right side opening 3295a, the second right side opening 3295b, and the third right side opening 3295c are respectively the first right front convex part 3285a, the second right front convex part 3285b, and the third right front convex part 3285b of the top lens 3280. It has a shape corresponding to the side protrusion 3285c.

The top center panel 3290 also includes a lower left protruding part 3292d formed to protrude downward from the lower left side part 3292c, and a lower right protruding part 3292d formed to protrude downward from the lower right side part 3293c. It has a protrusion 3293d. A lower left opening 3292e is formed in the lower left protrusion 3292d as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower right opening 3293e is formed in the lower right protrusion 3293d as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. There is. For clarity, the lower left opening 3292e is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 228. The shapes of the lower left opening 3292e and the lower right opening 3293e correspond to the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e of the top lens 3280, respectively.

Furthermore, a plurality of grooves 3296 are formed in the top center panel 3290. Each groove portion 3296 is a recessed portion recessed from the surrounding surface, similar to the frame base engagement groove 3234 (see FIG. 171) of the upper front and rear frame 3230. Three grooves 3296 are provided on each of the left side 3292 and the right side 3293, and these grooves 3296 extend over a predetermined length on the front surface 3290a (front surface) of the top center panel 3290. It is formed to do so. For clarity, the groove portion 3296 is shown in black in FIG. 227.

As shown in FIG. 229, the top center panel 3290 has an upper end protrusion 3297. The upper end protrusion 3297 is formed at the upper end of the top center panel 3290 so as to protrude rearward. For clarity, in FIG. 229, the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 is shown with diagonal lines.

Furthermore, a boss portion 3291b and a boss portion 3291c are formed on the back side of the central portion 3291. When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the boss portion 3291b and the boss portion 3291c are inserted into the through hole 3281b and the through hole 3281c of the top lens 3280, respectively. As described above, the through hole 3281b and the through hole 3281c of the top lens 3280 overlap with the screw hole 3224a and the screw hole 3224b of the top frame base 3210, respectively (see FIG. 220).

The screw inserted through the screw hole 3224a of the top frame base 3210 is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 3291b of the top center panel 3290, and the screw inserted through the screw hole 3224b of the top frame base 3210 is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 3291b of the top center panel 3290. The top frame base 3210, top lens 3280, and top center panel 3290 are connected by screwing into a hole formed in the boss portion 3291c.

As shown in FIGS. 230 to 232, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top lens 3280 is arranged so as to be fitted on the back side of the top center panel 3290. As a result, the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280, the three left front convex portions 3284 (first left front convex portion 3284a, second left front convex portion 3284b, and third left front convex portion 3284c), The front right protrusion 3285 (first front right protrusion 3285a, second front right protrusion 3285b, and third front right protrusion 3285c), lower left front protrusion 3282e, and lower right front protrusion 3283e are respectively , a central opening 3291a in the top center panel 3290, three left openings 3294 (first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, and third left opening 3294c), and three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, third left opening 3294c). 2 right side opening 3295b, third right side opening 3295c), lower left opening 3292e, and lower right opening 3293e, and these openings in the top center panel 3290 are closed by the convex portions of the top lens 3280. Ru.

The front surface of the top lens 3280 (excluding convex parts such as the central front convex part 3281a, the left front convex part 3284, the right front convex part 3285, the lower left front convex part 3282e, and the lower right front convex part 3283e) is , has a shape corresponding to the rear surface of the top center panel 3290 (portions excluding openings such as the center opening 3291a, left opening 3294, right opening 3295, lower left opening 3292e, lower right opening 3293e), and these The surfaces will substantially abut on the entire surface.

For clarity, in FIG. 230, the outer edge of the top lens 3280 is shown with a thick line. FIG. 231 shows the top lens 3280 and top center panel 3290 cut along the vertical plane in the front-rear direction (the plane passing through the first left front convex portion 3284a of the top lens 3280) when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. ing. In FIG. 231, the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown by hatching, and the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown by diagonal lines. Moreover, in FIG. 232, the central front convex part 3281a of the top lens 3280, the three left front convex parts 3284 (first left front convex part 3284a, second left front convex part 3284b, and third left front convex part 3284c) , three right front protrusions 3285 (first right front protrusion 3285a, second right front protrusion 3285b, and third right front protrusion 3285c), lower left front protrusion 3282e, and lower right front protrusion 3283e. is indicated by diagonal lines.

<Light emission effect in front top unit 3200>
As described above, the light that has entered the central rear concave portion 3281d of the top lens 3280 (the light emitted from the center LED 3252a) is transmitted from the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280 through the central opening 3291a of the top center panel 3290. It is released to the outside of aircraft 1.

Also, the light that has entered the three left rear recesses 3286 (first left rear recess 3286a, second left rear recess 3286b, and third left rear recess 3286c) in the top lens 3280 (emitted from the center LED 3252c) The light) is transmitted to the three left front convex portions of the top lens 3280 through the three left openings 3294 (first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, and third left opening 3294c) in the top center panel 3290. 3284 (first left front protrusion 3284a, second left front protrusion 3284b, and third left front protrusion 3284c) to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Also, the light that has entered the three right rear recesses 3287 (first right rear recess 3287a, second right rear recess 3287b, and third right rear recess 3287c) in the top lens 3280 (emitted from the center LED 3252e) The light) is transmitted to the three right front convex portions of the top lens 3280 through the three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, and third right opening 3295c) in the top center panel 3290. 3285 (first right front protrusion 3285a, second right front protrusion 3285b, and third right front protrusion 3285c) to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, light incident on the top lens 3280 in areas other than the formation area of the central rear recess 3281d, the left rear recess 3286, and the right rear recess 3287 (center LED 3252b, center LED 3252d, center LED 3252f) , and the light emitted from the center LED 3252g), the area where the center opening 3291a is formed in the top center panel 3290, and the three left side openings 3294 (first left side opening 3294a, second left side opening 3294b, and third left side opening 3294c) ) and the region other than the formation region of the three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, and third right opening 3295c).

The top center panel 3290 is made of a translucent material and has a silver color when the center LED 3252 is not emitting light. A metal film is deposited entirely on the front surface 3290a (see FIG. 227) of the top center panel 3290, and the metal to be deposited is, for example, tin and indium. As a result, the light transmittance of the top center panel 3290 is approximately 20%. Note that in the groove portion 3296 (a portion corresponding to the groove bottom portion 3234a shown in FIG. 171), the metal film to be deposited is thinner than in other locations on the front surface 3290a. As a result, the light transmittance of the groove portion 3296 is relatively high.

When the center LED 3252 is emitting light, the light incident on the top center panel 3290 (the light emitted from the center LED 3252b, center LED 3252d, center LED 3252f, and center LED 3252g) passes through the top center panel 3290, and the light enters the top center panel 3290. is released from the front surface 3290a of the top center panel 3290 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. Thereby, the color of the top center panel 3290 changes from silver according to the emission color of the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g.

Here, as described above, the passing path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252a, the passing path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252c, and the passing path of the light emitted from the center LED 3252e are the top reflector 3260, The left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R separate it from the passage path of light emitted from other center LEDs 3252. Furthermore, a top reflector 3260 separates the passage of the light emitted from the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f from the passage of the light emitted from the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g.

From the above, the front top unit 3200 is divided into the following areas when viewed from the front.
(i) Formation area of the central front side convex part 3281a of the top lens 3280 (ii) Formation area of the three left front side convex parts 3284 of the top lens 3280 (iii) Formation area of the three right front side convex parts 3285 of the top lens 3280 ( iv) Area to the left of (i) above excluding (ii) above (v) Area to the right of (i) above excluding (iii) above

The area (i) above is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252a. The area (ii) above is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252c. The area (iii) above is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252e. The region (iv) above is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f. The area (v) above is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g.

Therefore, depending on the color of the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g, the appearance of colors in the regions (i) to (v) can be changed. For example, by changing the emitted light color of the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g depending on the game situation, it is possible to change the appearance of colors in the areas (i) to (v) above.

For example, in a first state (for example, a normal state), the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f is set to the first color (for example, orange), and the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g is set to the second color ( For example, white), and in the second state (for example, the first CZ state), the emitted light colors of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, and the emitted light colors of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g are set to the first color (for example, the first CZ state). For example, orange), and in the third state (e.g., a second CZ state different from the first CZ state), the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, and the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. It is possible to configure so that both of them are a second color (for example, white).

As a result, in the first state (e.g., normal state), the area (iv) above appears to have a color tone based on the first color (e.g., orange), while the area (v) above appears to be colored based on the first color (e.g., orange). The color tone is based on the second color (for example, white), and in the second state (for example, the first CZ state), both the areas (iv) and (v) above are In the third state (e.g., second CZ state), both areas (iv) and (v) are shown as having a color tone based on a color (e.g., orange), and in the third state (e.g., second CZ state), both areas (iv) and (v) are colored in a second color (e.g., orange). For example, it is possible to make the image appear to have a color tone based on (white).

At this time, the emitted light color of the center LED 3252c may be the same color as the emitted light colors of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, or may be a different color. For example, depending on the game situation, the center LED 3252c may emit light of the same color (for example, orange) as the light emitted by the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, or the light of a different color (for example, , blue) may be emitted from the center LED 3252c.

Similarly, the emission color of the center LED 3252e may be the same as or different from the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. For example, depending on the game situation, the center LED 3252e may emit light of the same color (for example, white) as the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g, or the light of a color different from the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g (for example, It is also possible to switch between emitting blue (blue) light from the center LED 3252e.

Moreover, the emitted light color of the center LED 3252a may be the same color as the emitted light color of the other center LEDs 3252, or may be a different color. For example, the emitted light color of the center LED 3252a may be configured to always be a different color (for example, green) from the emitted light color of the other center LEDs 3252.

Note that, as described above, the inclined wall portion 3264a, the inclined wall portion 3265a, the inclined wall portion 3266a, and the inclined wall portion 3267a (see FIGS. 209 and 210) of the top reflector 3260, and the inner wall surface of the arrow eye reflector 3270. 3270a (see FIG. 215) is formed with an inclination that widens toward the front. Thereby, the light emitted from the center LED 3252 advances while being diffused from the light source, making it possible to evenly illuminate the entire top lens 3280 to top center panel 3290.

Also, a part of the light emitted from the center LED 3252b is guided to the lower left front convex part 3282e of the top lens 3280, passes through the lower left opening 3292e of the top center panel 3290, and passes from the lower left front convex part 3282e to the pachislot machine 1. released to the outside. Similarly, a portion of the light emitted from the center LED 3252d is guided to the lower right front convex portion 3283e of the top lens 3280, and passes through the lower right opening 3293e of the top center panel 3290 to the lower right front convex portion 3283e. The pachislot machine 1 is discharged from the pachislot machine 1. As a result, in conjunction with the semicircular image 3011b displayed on the central screen 3010 to the reflected image 3216a displayed on the image reflecting surface 3216 of the top frame base 3210 (see FIG. 181), the semicircular image 3011b to the reflected image 3216a is the outline of the character's face, and the light emission at the lower left front protrusion 3282e and the lower right front protrusion 3283e can be shown to the player as if they were the character's eyes.

Further, light of the same color (for example, orange) as the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f is emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a (see FIG. 199) in the left speaker unit 3400L, and the light is the same as the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. Colored (for example, white) light may be emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a of the right speaker unit 3400R. Thereby, the light emitting effect in the front top unit 3200 and the light emitting effect in the speaker unit 3400 can be made to cooperate. In order to enhance the sense of unity in these light-emitting effects, a metal film similar to that of the top center panel 3290 may be deposited on the inner side 3432 (see FIG. 199) of the speaker unit 3400.

<Measures against light leakage in front top unit 3200>
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view showing the top frame base and top center panel as seen from slightly above. FIG. 234 is a perspective view showing the state in which the top center panel is attached to the top frame base, viewed from slightly above. FIG. 235 is a perspective view of the top center panel seen from the rear and slightly below. FIG. 236 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base seen from the front. FIG. 237 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top center panel seen from the rear and slightly above. FIG. 238 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel. FIG. 239 is a perspective view of the top lens seen from below. FIG. 240 is a cross-sectional view of the top lens. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram of the top center LED board, top frame base, top lens, and top center panel. FIG. 242 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel.

As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the top center panel 3290 includes the front edge 3211b of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214, and the fifth This generally matches the external shape of the figure surrounded by the connecting portion 3222e and the sixth connecting portion 3222f. The top center panel 3290 is arranged along these front edge 3211b, front edge 3214b, fifth connection part 3222e, and sixth connection part 3222f.

As a result, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the central region 3223a, the first left region 3223b, the first right region 3223c, the second left region 3223d, and the second right region 3223e of the top frame base 3210 (see FIG. 204) is covered from the front by a top center panel 3290.

The top wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 has a top wall front side 3226. The shape of the upper wall front side surface 3226 substantially matches the shape of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is disposed above the upper wall front side 3226 of the top frame base 3210, and the upper wall front side 3226 is arranged above the upper wall front side 3226. 3297. At this time, the lower surface 3297b (see FIG. 235) of the upper end protrusion 3297 is substantially in contact with the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall.

Additionally, the top frame base 3210 has a lower contact surface 3227 formed to protrude downward from the front portion of the lower wall 3214. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 235, the top center panel 3290 has a lower contact surface 3298 near the lower end on the back side. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other.

For clarity, the front side surface 3226 of the top wall of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. 233, the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is shown with diagonal lines in FIG. The lower surface 3297b and lower contact surface 3298 of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the center panel 3290 are shown in black. The positional relationship between top frame base 3210 and top center panel 3290 will be described in more detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the top frame base 3210 has an upper abutment surface 3228 that stands slightly upward from the rear end of the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall. For clarity, upper abutment surface 3228 is shown in black in FIG. 236. The upper end of the upper contact surface 3228 is continuous with the upper wall main surface 3211c. Thereby, the upper wall main surface 3211c and the upper wall front side surface 3226 are connected by the upper abutting surface 3228, and the upper abutting surface 3228 has a step.

The upper wall main surface 3211c and the upper wall front side surface 3226 constitute the upper surface of the upper wall 3211. A rear edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210. Further, the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is formed to have a thickness comparable (slightly smaller) to the length of the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 in the vertical direction.

As a result, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 substantially contacts the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 over the entire left and right direction. ing. The upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 and the upper wall main surface 3211c of the top frame base 3210 are positioned so as to form substantially the same plane.

Further, the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210 has a first lower contact surface 3227a and a second lower contact surface 3227b. The first lower contact surface 3227a is formed as a slightly curved surface extending in the left-right direction on the left side of the lower left protrusion 3225a and on the right side of the lower right protrusion 3225b (see FIG. 220). . The second lower contact surface 3227b is formed from the lower left protrusion 3225a to the lower right protrusion 3225b. In FIG. 236, only the left side portion of the top frame base 3210 is shown, but the right side portion of the top frame base 3210 has a similar structure.

Further, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214 in the top frame base 3210 is formed to protrude forward from the upper end of the first lower contact surface 3227a. For clarity, in FIG. 236, the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 is shown in diagonal lines, and the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214 and the second lower contact surface 3227b are shown in black.

The lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210, and the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 and the top frame base 3210 It is possible to substantially contact the lower contact surface 3227 over the entire left and right direction.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237, the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 has a first lower contact surface 3298a and a second lower contact surface 3298b. The first lower contact surface 3298a is formed as a slightly curved surface extending in the left-right direction on the left side of the lower left protrusion 3292d and on the right side of the lower right protrusion 3293d. The second lower contact surface 3298b is formed from the lower left protrusion 3292d to the lower right protrusion 3293d. Although only the left side portion of the top center panel 3290 is shown in FIG. 237, the right side portion of the top center panel 3290 has a similar structure.

The lower left side portion 3292c and the lower right side portion 3293c (see FIG. 227) have a structure in which the lower end portions on the back side are slightly bulged toward the rear, and the back side of the bulged portion is the first lower portion. This is a side contact surface 3298a. For clarity, in FIG. 237, the first lower contact surface 3298a is shown in diagonal lines, and the second lower contact surface 3298b is shown in black. In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 substantially contacts the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210, and the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel The second lower contact surface 3298b substantially contacts the second lower contact surface 3227b of the top frame base 3210.

In FIG. 238, the top frame base 3210, top lens 3280, and top center panel 3290 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are shown in vertical planes in the front-rear direction (first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and A state in which the top center panel 3290 is cut at a plane passing through the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 is shown. For clarity, in FIG. 238, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown in diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown in hatching.

As shown in FIG. 238, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 substantially contact each other. ing. In FIG. 238, a substantially abutting portion (boundary portion) of the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 at the lower part thereof is shown as a boundary portion A. A lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is positioned near the boundary A. Between the lower end edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 and the boundary part A, the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 are not in contact with each other, and there is a gap X between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290. is formed.

As shown in FIG. 239, a black light-shielding paint is applied to the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280. As a result, the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 has a light-shielding property and can block the passage of light. The coating method is not particularly limited, and for example, spray coating using a masking jig may be employed. In FIG. 239, the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 (the portion coated with light-shielding paint) is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 240, the front surface (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) and the back surface (back main surface 3282f and back main surface 3282f) of the top lens 3280 are approximately parallel to each other. It is formed so that. The lower edge 3280a is formed as a portion (portion indicated by a thick line in the figure) that connects these surfaces. Note that FIG. 240 shows the top lens 3280 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. For clarity, in FIG. 240, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown with diagonal lines.

FIG. 241 schematically shows the top center LED board 3250, top lens 3280, and top center panel 3290 cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. For clarity, in FIG. 241, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown with shading, and illustration of the top reflector 3260 and the arrow eye reflector 3270 is omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 241, a portion of the light emitted from the center LED 3252 and incident on the top lens 3280 is guided inside the top lens 3280 and reaches the lower edge 3280a. However, since the lower edge 3280a has a light blocking property, the light cannot pass through the lower edge 3280a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light from passing through the lower edge 3280a and leaking out of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the very small gap formed in the gap X and the boundary part A.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 238, above the boundary part A, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is provided. As a result, if there is a slight gap in the boundary A, even if a wire-shaped instrument attempts to enter through the gap, the front edge 3214b will become an obstacle and prevent the intrusion. It is now possible to do so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a thief from being carried out through the gap.

As described above, the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is coated with black light-shielding paint (black paint is applied) to have a light-blocking property, but the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 is It is not painted black like that. This point will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 238, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 substantially abut, and the top frame base The upper contact surface 3228 of the top center panel 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. In FIG. 238, the approximate contact portion (boundary portion) of the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 at the upper portion thereof is shown as a boundary portion B. In FIG. Moreover, between the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 and the boundary part B, the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 do not come into contact with each other, and between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290, A gap Y is formed.

Here, the boundary part A is only the part (in the vertical direction) where the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 substantially contact each other. The boundary between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 has a simple structure (a linear structure in cross-sectional view). On the other hand, the boundary portion B includes a portion (a portion in the front-rear direction) where the front side surface 3226 of the top wall of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 substantially abut, and a portion of the top frame The upper contact surface 3228 of the base 3210 and the rear edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are comprised of a portion (vertical portion) in which the top frame base 3210 and the top The structure at the boundary with the center panel 3290 is complex and intricate (a bent structure in cross-sectional view).

Therefore, it is difficult for light to pass through the boundary B compared to the boundary A, and even if the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 does not have a light-blocking property, the light that has passed through the upper edge 3280b will pass through the gap Y and the boundary. It is now less likely that the liquid will leak out of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the very small gap formed in the slot B. On the other hand, the light that has passed through the gap Y enters the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290, thereby making it possible to make the upper end protrusion 3297 shine.

Note that if the structure of the boundary between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is complicated, from the viewpoint of preventing light from leaking from the boundary, for example, the lower edge of the lower left protrusion 3282d of the top lens 3280 The lower edge of the lower right protrusion 3283d (see FIG. 239) may not be painted black as described above.

In FIG. 242, the top frame base 3210, top lens 3280, and top center panel 3290 in a state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are shown in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (the lower left front convex portion 3282e of the top lens 3280 and the top center panel 3290). The figure shows a state of cutting at a plane passing through the lower left opening 3292e. For clarity, in FIG. 242, the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is shown with diagonal lines, the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shown with black, and the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shown with hatching.

As shown in FIG. 242, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the second lower contact surface 3227b of the top frame base 3210 and the second lower contact surface 3298b of the top center panel 3290 substantially contact each other. ing. A lower rear protrusion 3299 is formed above the second lower abutment surface 3298b of the top center panel 3290 and protrudes further rearward than the second lower abutment surface 3298b. On the other hand, a recess 3229 that is recessed relative to the second lower contact surface 3227b is formed above the second lower contact surface 3227b in the top frame base 3210. The lower rear protrusion 3299 of the top center panel 3290 is housed in the recess 3229 of the top frame base 3210.

In this way, the boundary between the lower left protrusion 3225a of the top frame base 3210 and the lower left protrusion 3292d of the top center panel 3290 has an intricate structure, making it difficult for light to leak from the boundary. It has become. The same applies to the boundary between the lower right protrusion 3225b of the top frame base 3210 and the lower right protrusion 3293d of the top center panel 3290. Therefore, the lower edge of the top lens 3280 (the lower edge of the lower left protrusion 3282d and the lower right edge of the lower right protrusion 3283d) located near these boundaries should not be painted with black as described above. Of course, it is also possible to paint it black. Furthermore, the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 may also be painted black.

Note that the method for imparting light-shielding properties to the lower edge 3280a and the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 is not limited to painting, but may also include pasting a sticker (sheet) with light-blocking properties, or A separate member (for example, a member such as the side light shielding plate 3150 shown in FIG. 154) may be disposed below the lower edge 3280a and above the upper edge 3280b.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix A>
Conventionally, a game machine is known in which the decorative effect is enhanced by making a light-emitting decoration part emit strong light using a light-condensing member including a light-reflecting part (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018631).

In the process of intensive study on gaming machines equipped with such light emitting means, the present inventors have found that it is possible to improve the aesthetic appearance of gaming machines by devising the structure of the light guiding member. I came up with an idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to improve the aesthetic appearance of a gaming machine equipped with a light emitting means.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) A light emitting means (center LED 3252) capable of emitting light,
a light guiding member (top lens 3280) capable of guiding light emitted from the light emitting means;
a first member (top center panel 3290) disposed on the downstream side of the light guide member in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means;
The light guiding member includes a light suppressing part (black painted part) that suppresses the progress of the light emitted from the light emitting means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In developing the gaming machine according to the present invention, the present inventor has provided a first member (top center) on the downstream side in the traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) with respect to the light guide member (top lens 3280). When the panel 3290) was placed, it was assumed that the light might leak from an unintended location. Then, the present inventor came up with the idea that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine could be improved by taking measures that can prevent such light leakage. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light guiding member (top lens 3280) includes a light suppressing part (black painted part) that suppresses the progress of light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). ) is provided. With this configuration, it is possible to realize light emission around the first member (top center panel 3290) in a desired manner, and thereby, the present inventor believes that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine can be improved. succeeded in.

A predetermined gap exists on the downstream side of the light suppressing part (black painted part) in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252), and if the light suppressing part (black painted part) If it were not provided, there is a concern that the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) would leak to the outside of the gaming machine through the gap. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to prevent such light leakage due to the presence of the light suppressing part (black painted part). The predetermined gap is not particularly limited as long as it has a space through which light can pass, and is formed at the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and other members (gaming machine components). Examples include a gap, a hole (for example, a screw hole) provided in the first member (top center panel 3290), and the like. Measures that can prevent light leakage are not limited to black painting (application of light-shielding paint), but may also include attaching a sticker (sheet) with light-shielding properties, or installing a separate member with light-shielding properties. It may also be arranged.

(A-2) The gaming machine according to (A-1) above,
a second member (top frame base 3210) arranged to substantially abut the first member;
The light suppression portion is provided at a first position (lower edge 3280a) in the light guide member,
The first position is closer to the boundary between the first member and the second member than the second position (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) through which the light emitted from the light emitting means can pass through. close to,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the second member (top frame base 3210) is arranged so as to be substantially in contact with the first member (top center panel 3290), and the light suppressing part (black painted part) is provided at the first position (lower edge 3280a) of the light guide member (top lens 3280), and the first position (lower edge 3280a) is provided with the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). is closer to the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) than the second position (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) through which the . As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) and reaching the first position (lower edge 3280a) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) passes through the first position (lower edge 3280a). Therefore, even if there is a slight gap at the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and second member (top frame base 3210), the outside of the gaming machine cannot be accessed through the gap. It is possible to prevent light from leaking out.

In particular, since the second member (top frame base 3210) has a black appearance, light leaks from the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210). If this happens, the light leakage will become noticeable due to the contrast with the black second member (top frame base 3210), and there is a concern that the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine will be greatly impaired. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to prevent such light leakage, and the aesthetic appearance of the gaming machine can be appropriately maintained.

The position (first position) where a measure capable of preventing light leakage is applied is not particularly limited, but for example, the measure may be appropriately applied to the edge (end) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). Is possible. At this time, the edge (end) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is positioned near the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) (border It is possible to arrange the light guide member (top lens 3280) so that the light guide member (top lens 3280) Alternatively, the light guide member (top lens 3280) may be arranged such that the edge (end portion) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) faces the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210). (Top lens 3280) may be provided.

In the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) substantially abut each other at boundary portion A and boundary portion B, and boundary portion B meets boundary portion A. It was explained that it has a complicated structure in comparison. Specifically, the boundary portion B is a portion (referred to as a first portion) where the front side surface 3226 of the top wall of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other; It is constituted by a portion (referred to as a second portion) where the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact. Assuming that the first portion and the second portion are each flat, the angle between the normal line of the first portion and the normal line of the second portion is approximately 90°.

The above matters can be expressed more generally as follows. When the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) substantially abut each other at the first boundary (boundary A) and the second boundary (boundary B). , among the normals at any point on the first boundary (border A), the angle between the closest normal and the farthest normal in a predetermined direction (e.g., vertical direction) (of each normal The maximum value of the angle formed) is θ ₁ , and among the normals at any point on the second boundary (border B), the closest normal and the farthest normal in a predetermined direction (e.g., vertical direction) Let the angle (the maximum value of the angles formed by each normal line) with the line be θ ₂ . For example, when the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) is formed by flat surfaces substantially abutting each other, θ ₁ =0. In addition, the second boundary portion (boundary portion B) includes a portion where the flat surfaces extending in the first direction (for example, the front-back direction) substantially contact each other and a portion extending in the second direction (for example, the up-down direction). In the case where the two flat surfaces substantially contact each other, θ ₂ is the angle between the first direction (e.g. front-back direction) and the second direction (e.g. up-down direction) , 90°).

In the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are approximately separated at the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) and the second boundary portion (boundary portion B), respectively. When in contact, the edge (end) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) that is close to the first boundary (border A) is connected to the light suppressing part (black painted part). ), on the other hand, it is possible to configure so that the edge (end) near the second boundary (border B) is not the light suppressing part (black painted part). Such a configuration may be adopted when θ ₂ has a larger value than θ ₁ . In addition, when θ ₁ is equal to or less than α (for example, equal to or less than 30 degrees, equal to or less than 15 degrees, equal to or less than 5 degrees, etc.), the edge (end portion) near the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) is connected to the light suppressing portion ( It is also possible to have a black painted part). In addition, when θ ₂ is β or more (for example, 45° or more, 60° or more, 75° or more, etc.), the edge (end) near the second boundary (border B) is connected to the light suppressing part ( It is also possible not to paint the parts with black paint.

In addition, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a first member side contact surface 3297b) and a first member side contact surface Z (for example, the rear edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297), and the second member (top frame base 3210) has a second member side contact surface X (for example, , a first lower contact surface 3227a), a second member side contact surface Y (for example, the upper wall front side surface 3226), and a second member side contact surface Z (for example, the upper side contact surface 3228). However, the first member side contact surface X, the first member side contact surface Y, and the first member side contact surface Z are respectively the second member side contact surface X and the second member side contact surface Y and the second member side contact surface Z, the approximate contact portion of the first member side contact surface X and the second member side contact surface X is defined as the first boundary. (boundary part A), and the approximate contact part (first part) between the first member side contact surface Y and the second member side contact surface Y, and the first member side contact surface Z and the second member side contact surface Y. A portion (second portion) that substantially contacts the two-member side contact surface Z may be configured as a second boundary portion (boundary portion B). When these contact surfaces are all approximately flat, the angle between the normal line on the first member side contact surface Y and the normal line on the first member side contact surface Z (the angle formed by the normal line on the first member side contact surface Y) The angle between the normal line and the normal line on the second member side contact surface Z is the above-mentioned θ ₂ . In addition, the edge (for example, the upper edge 3280b) close to the normal direction of the second member side contact surface Y (the normal direction of the first member side contact surface Y) and the second boundary part (boundary part B) The angle formed with the normal direction (light emission direction at the edge) is less than γ (for example, less than 45 degrees, less than 30 degrees, less than 15 degrees, etc.), or 0 degrees (that is, these normal directions (substantially parallel).

In this specification, "substantially in contact" is a concept that includes not only a state in which two members are in complete contact but also a state in which two members are in close proximity. "Proximity" refers to a state in which the distance (gap) between two members is sufficiently small relative to the sizes of these members. For example, the distance between two members is 1/20 or less (or 1/50 or less, 1/100 or less, etc.) of the size (e.g., horizontal length) of one member (e.g., the smaller member). ), it can be said that these members are close to each other. Alternatively, if the distance between two members is 5 mm or less (or 2 mm or less, 1 mm or less, 0.5 mm or less, etc.), these members may be said to be close to each other.

(A-3) The gaming machine of (A-1) or (A-2) above,
a second member (top frame base 3210) arranged to substantially abut the first member;
The first member and the second member vertically overlap near an edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light guide member in the vertical direction;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the second member (top frame base 3210) is arranged to substantially abut the first member (top center panel 3290), and the light guide member (top lens 3280), a first member (top center panel 3290) and a second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically near the edge (upper edge 3280b) in the vertical direction. Here, when the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) reaches the edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280), the direction of light emission at the edge (upper edge 3280b) is from upwards to downwards. On the other hand, if there is a slight gap where the first member (top center panel 3290) and second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically, the extending direction of the gap is , the front-back direction or the left-right direction (a direction different from the up-down direction). Therefore, even if the light emitted from the edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) enters the gap, the direction of travel of the light is different from the direction in which the gap is formed. It is difficult to pass through the gap. Thereby, it is possible to prevent light from leaking to the outside of the gaming machine through the gap.

In the seventh embodiment, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically is the upper edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). ) was explained as being placed nearby. This makes it possible to prevent light from leaking upward. In this regard, light leakage in the upward direction is difficult to see from the player sitting in front of the table, but may be visible to other customers.According to the Pachislot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, this It is possible to achieve a good appearance even for other customers.

However, in the present invention, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically is the lower edge (lower edge) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). 3280a) may be located nearby. Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) is described as being disposed above the second member (top frame base 3210). In the present invention, the second member (top frame base 3210) may be arranged above the first member (top center panel 3290).

In the present invention, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically also constitutes the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). good. Further, in the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are located near the edge (left edge or right edge) in the left and right direction of the light guide member (top lens 3280). may be configured so that they overlap on the left and right. In this case, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap on the left and right may constitute the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). . In the second boundary part (boundary part B), compared to the first boundary part (boundary part A), the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are approximately aligned. The area of the contacting portion may be increased.

In the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are arranged at the first boundary (border A) and the second boundary (border B), respectively. It was explained that they were almost in contact with each other. In the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are between the first boundary part (boundary part A) and the second boundary part (boundary part B). , it is also possible to substantially abut only at one boundary. At this time, one boundary portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) substantially contact may be the first boundary portion (boundary portion A), It may be the second boundary (border B).

(A-4) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-3) above,
The first member has translucency,
A plurality of colors are provided as the colors of the light emitted from the light emitting means,
The appearance of the first member when the light of the first color (orange) is emitted from the light emitting means and when the light of the second color (white) is emitted from the light emitting means. different colors,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, when the light emitting means (center LED 3252) emits light of the first color (orange), and when the light emitting means (center LED 3252) emits light of the second color (orange), the light emitting means (center LED 3252) emits light of the second color (orange). The first member (top center panel 3290) is configured to have a different external appearance color depending on when white (white) light is being emitted. Thereby, by switching the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) according to the game situation, it is possible to realize an attractive light emitting effect.

Although it is desirable to use full-color LEDs as the light-emitting means in the present invention, it is also possible to use monochrome LEDs.

(A-5) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-4) above,
The first member has a first opening (first left opening 3294a) and a second opening (second left opening 3294b),
A first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) of the light guide member is visible through the first opening,
A second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) of the light guide member is visible through the second opening;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a first opening (first left opening 3294a) and a second opening (second left opening 3294b). The first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) of the light guiding member (top lens 3280) is visible through the first opening (first left opening 3294a), and the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) is visible through the second opening (first left opening 3294a). The second area (second left front convex portion 3284b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is visible through the second left side opening 3294b). As a result, the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) of the light guiding member (top lens 3280) is transmitted through the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b). It is possible to show the player the illumination mode in the second region (second left front convex portion 3284b), and it is possible to realize an innovative light emission effect. Further, the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) and the second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) are each configured as a part of one light guide member (top lens 3280). However, it is not necessary to fit a light guide member (lens) into each of the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b). There is no need to prepare one light guide member (top lens 3280), and it is sufficient to arrange one light guide member (top lens 3280), so the burden on the manufacturing process can be reduced. In addition, when a light guiding member (lens) is fitted into each of the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b), the number of parts increases, and accordingly, management Although it is thought that the burden on the player's surface would also increase, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, such a burden can be reduced.

The first opening and the second opening in the present invention include a plurality of openings (center opening 3291a, first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, third It is possible to employ any two openings among the left opening 3294c, the first right opening 3295a, the second right opening 3295b, the third right opening 3295c, the lower left opening 3292e, and the lower right opening 3293e. Further, the first region and the second region in the present invention include a plurality of convex portions (center front convex portion 3281a, first left front convex portion 3284a, second left front convex portion 3284a, second left front convex portion 3284a, Convex part 3284b, third left front convex part 3284c, first right front convex part 3285a, second right front convex part 3285b, third right front convex part 3285c, lower left front convex part 3282e, and lower right front convex part 3283e. ), it is possible to employ two protrusions corresponding to the two openings in the first member (top center panel 3290).

(A-6) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-5) above,
The first member has openings (a left opening 3294 and a right opening 3295),
A specific area of the light guide member (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) is visible through the opening,
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (a center LED 3252c and a center LED 3252e) capable of emitting light to the specific area, and a first light emitting unit capable of emitting light to an area other than the specific area of the light guide member. Possible second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) are provided,
comprising a partition member (left arrow eye reflector 3270L and right arrow eye reflector 3270R) that partitions a passage path of light emitted from the first light emitting means and a passage path of light emitted from the second light emitting means;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has the openings (the left opening 3294 and the right opening 3295); 3295), the specific area (the left front convex part 3284 and the right front convex part 3285) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is visible. Further, as a light emitting means (center LED 3252), first light emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) capable of emitting light to a specific area (left front convex part 3284 and right front convex part 3285), and a light guide A second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) capable of emitting light to an area other than the specific area (left front convex part 3284 and right front convex part 3285) on the member (top lens 3280) is provided. The path of light emitted from the first light emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the path of light emitted from the second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) are defined by the partition member (left arrow eye). It is partitioned by a reflector 3270L and a right arrow eye reflector 3270R). Thereby, using the first light emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d), specific areas (left front convex part 3284 and right front side Since it is possible to individually irradiate the convex portion 3285) and other areas, the first light emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) ), it is possible to realize a wide variety of lighting effects by switching the lighting modes of each.

As the opening in the present invention, it is also possible to employ the central opening 3291a. In this case, the central front convex portion 3281a is used as the specific area, the center LED 3252a is used as the first light emitting means, the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252d are used as the second light emitting means, and the top reflector 3260 is used as the partition member. It is possible to adopt

(A-7) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-6) above,
comprising a partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) that partitions a region through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass;
The tip portion (front side portion 3272) of the partition member is formed thinner than other portions of the partition member.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the area through which light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can pass is divided by the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270). ) is formed thinner than other parts of the partition member. Thereby, shadows due to the presence of the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) are less likely to occur, and a good-looking light emission effect can be achieved.

In particular, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the distal end (front part 3272) of the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) is substantially in contact with the light guide member (top lens 3280), and the partition member ( The arrangement is such that shadows are likely to occur due to the presence of the arrow eye reflector 3270). If the tip portion (front portion 3272) had the same thickness as the other portion (base portion 3271), the possibility of such a shadow occurring would increase. In this regard, in the seventh embodiment, the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270 ) and the light guide member (top lens 3280) are made to have a small area where they substantially come into contact with each other. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of such shadows.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in order to make the thickness of the tip portion (front side portion 3272) smaller than the thickness of the other portion (base portion 3271), a step portion is provided between these portions. In the present invention, it is possible to adopt other shapes as long as the thickness of the tip part (front part 3272) is smaller than the thickness of the other part (base part 3271), for example, a partition member (arrow eye reflector). 3270) may be configured so that the wall surface (outer wall surface or inner wall surface) has a tapered shape.

(A-8) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-7) above,
comprising a partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) that partitions a region through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass;
The area partitioned by the partition member (the area surrounded by the peripheral wall of the cross-sectional opening 3270X) emits less light from the light emitting means than the third position (a position closer to the light source). The fourth position on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light (the position farthest from the light source) is larger.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the area through which light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can pass is divided by the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270). ) (the area surrounded by the peripheral wall of the cross-sectional opening 3270 The fourth position (the position farthest from the light source) on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light emitted from (center LED 3252) is larger. Thereby, it is possible to advance the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) while diffusing it, and it is possible to illuminate a wide range of the light guide member (top lens 3280), and also to illuminate a wide range of the light guide member (top lens 3280). 3270) can also be made less likely to occur.

In this way, the arrow eye reflector 3270 has an inclination that widens toward the downstream side (front) in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). When the reflector 3270 and the top reflector 3260 are integrally molded, the inclination is opposite to the inclination of the tapered surface of the mold (the inclination for removing the resin part from the mold). Therefore, the arrow eye reflector 3270 is preferably molded as a separate part from the top reflector 3260.

When using an LED as the light emitting means in the present invention, the type of the LED is not particularly limited, and a so-called surface-mounted LED or a so-called bullet-type LED may be employed. As a surface-mounted LED, one in which a light emitting element is placed in a concave housing part and the light emitting element is filled with resin can be used. As the bullet-shaped LED, one in which the resin forming the outer surface is formed into a bullet shape can be used. Since a bullet-shaped LED includes a bullet-shaped sealing resin, it generally has directionality and has a narrower irradiation range than a surface-mounted LED.

As mentioned above, from the viewpoint of moving the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) forward while diffusing it, it is desirable to use a surface-mounted LED. Thereby, a wide range of the light guide member (top lens 3280) to the first member (top center panel 3290) can be illuminated. Furthermore, since the amount of light included per unit solid angle is reduced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the position of the light source. In this regard, there is a concern that if the position of the light source (LED grains) is completely visible to the player, it will look bad, but if a wide-angle type LED is used, such LED grains will be more noticeable. This makes it possible to ensure good design.

Furthermore, even if the light guide member (top lens 3280) is not provided, the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can be made to directly enter the first member (top center panel 3290). Although it is possible to perform the same light emission effect as in the embodiment, by providing a light guide member (top lens 3280), it is possible to make the LED grains more difficult to stand out. In addition, from the perspective of making LED grains less noticeable, by mixing pigments or dyes into the resin material before molding the light guide member (top lens 3280), the light guide member (top lens 3280) can be colored in a predetermined color ( For example, it may be colored milky white. Similarly, the first member (top center panel 3290) may be colored in a predetermined color (for example, milky white) by mixing pigment or dye into the resin material before molding the first member (top center panel 3290). Good too. Thereby, the whole of the light guide member (top lens 3280) to the first member (top center panel 3290) can be illuminated evenly and vaguely.

(A-9) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-8) above,
The first member is translucent and has a metal surface formed on its outer surface.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) is translucent and has a metal surface formed on its outer surface. As a result, even when no light is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252), the first member (top center panel 3290) has a metallic luster, making it possible to achieve an appearance with excellent design. can. In addition, in a situation where light is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252), it is possible to change the appearance color of the first member (top center panel 3290), and it is possible to change the appearance color of the first member (top center panel 3290). The member (top center panel 3290) can be shown to the player.

In this way, the first member (top center panel 3290) can be configured as a half mirror with a metal surface. The half mirror is not limited to one having a light transmittance of 50%, and a half mirror having any transmittance can be appropriately employed. The transmittance may be, for example, about 5% to 30% (eg, 20%) or about 30% to 60%. Such a half mirror can be manufactured by appropriately adjusting the amount of tin, indium, silver, aluminum, etc. to be vapor-deposited. The thicker the metal surface, the lower the transmittance and the stronger the metallic luster. Note that the method for forming the metal surface is not particularly limited, and in addition to metal vapor deposition, the metal surface may be coated, for example, by plating. The color of the metal surface is not particularly limited, and any color can be adopted depending on the type of metal used.

The location where the metal surface is formed on the first member (top center panel 3290) is not particularly limited, and the metal surface may be formed at any location on the outer surface (surface that is visible from the outside) of the first member (top center panel 3290). It is possible to form For example, in addition to the front surface 3290a of the top center panel 3290, a metal surface may be formed on the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297. Of course, no metal surface may be formed on the outer surface of the first member (top center panel 3290).

(A-10) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-9) above,
The first member is translucent and includes a first region (front surface 3290a) and a second region (groove portion 3296) having a higher light transmittance than the first region.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has translucency, and the second region (groove portion 3296) is larger than the first region (front surface 3290a). It also has high light transmittance. As a result, the second region (groove portion 3296) allows the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) to pass through more easily than the first region (front surface 3290a), making it possible to make the region shine relatively strongly. can. In this way, by providing a contrast in the intensity of light between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove portion 3296), an attractive light emission effect can be achieved.

In the seventh embodiment, the second region (groove 3296) is formed as a recess, and has a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction of the first member (top center panel 3290) than the first region (front surface 3290a). It has become. Thereby, the second region (groove portion 3296) allows the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) to pass through relatively easily. In addition, in the second region (groove portion 3296), due to its shape (grooved), the amount of metal vapor deposited is small, and the metal film is relatively thin. This further increases the difference in light transmittance between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove portion 3296). The second region (groove portion 3296) may be configured such that no metal film is formed at all. The method for creating a difference in light transmittance between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove portion 3296) is not particularly limited. The color may be a color that allows light to pass through more easily than the color of the first region (front surface 3290a).

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the second region (groove portion 3296) is described as being formed to extend (in a linear shape) over a predetermined length. As a result, even in a situation where no light is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252), it is possible to make the second area (groove portion 3296) appear as a line formed for design purposes, which may create a sense of discomfort. There is no. From this point of view, it is desirable that the second region (groove portion 3296) be formed as a predetermined pattern. The shape of the pattern is not particularly limited, and may be formed into a line (straight line or curved line), a geometric pattern, or may be composed of letters, figures, symbols, or a combination thereof. may have been done.

In this way, the first member (top center panel 3290) can be configured as a decorative member (decorative member). Further, the second member (top frame base 3210) can also be configured as a decorative member.

(A-11) Any of the gaming machines (A-1) to (A-10) above,
The light suppression part is a painted part of the light guide member,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light suppression part (black painted part) is a painted part of the light guide member (top lens 3280). As a result, even if the part where the progress of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) should be suppressed has a complex or detailed structure, it can be easily and at low cost by painting the part. , measures can be taken to prevent light leakage.

In the seventh embodiment, the light-suppressing portion (black painted portion) has been described as being formed by applying a black light-shielding paint. As the light-shielding paint, it is possible to appropriately employ any conventionally known paint having the property of absorbing light. For example, the light-shielding paint can include a resin material and a colorant, and any paint (acrylic resin paint, water-based acrylic resin paint, urethane paint, etc.) can be used as the resin material. It is. As a colorant it is possible to use any pigment (eg carbon black) or dye. The color of the light suppressing portion is not limited to black, and may be gray, for example. By changing the type and proportion of pigments or dyes contained in the light-shielding paint, it is possible to configure the light-suppressing portion to have any color. The colorant may contain multiple types of pigments or dyes (black, white, red, yellow, blue, etc.).

In order to make light leakage less noticeable, the edge of the first member (top center panel 3290) (the edge disposed near the light suppressing part (black painted part) of the light guide member (top lens 3280)) ) may also be coated with light-shielding paint. However, if the first member (top center panel 3290) has a metal surface, there is a risk that the metal film will peel off during the painting process. ) is preferably not painted.

<Appendix B>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that can perform effects using a projector have been known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 6-035066 and 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, an image for gaming is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of intensive study on gaming machines equipped with such projectors, the present inventor found that it might be possible to enhance the power of image expression by devising a layout structure around the screen. I came up with an idea.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the power of video expression.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) Screen (center screen 3010) and
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
A predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050),
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector enters the back side of the screen,
the predetermined member is disposed on the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector with respect to the screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the projector (projector 9020) and the screen (center screen 3010) are such that light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the back side of the screen (center screen 3010). A predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050) is arranged on the upstream side in the traveling direction of light projected by the projector (projector 9020) with respect to the screen (center screen 3010). With this configuration, the present inventor has found that it is possible to enhance the impact of video expression using the screen (center screen 3010). In this regard, by arranging the predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050), the screen (center screen 3010) is reinforced compared to the case where the screen (center screen 3010) is provided alone, and the player This makes it possible to protect the screen (center screen 3010) even if external force is applied. Regarding such a predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050), it has also been considered to arrange it on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). However, in this case, since there is a predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050) on the front side of the screen (center screen 3010), the player cannot view the image through the predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050). become. Therefore, there was a concern that the player would be given the impression that the video was located a little further back, and the player's sense of immersion in the video would be reduced. On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to eliminate such impressions, enhance the power of video expression, and increase the player's sense of immersion in the video. .

(B-2) The gaming machine of (B-1) above,
The predetermined member protects the screen from the back side of the screen,
The screen constitutes the outermost surface of the gaming machine,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050) protects the screen (center screen 3010) from the back side of the screen (center screen 3010); The screen 3010) constitutes the outermost surface of the gaming machine (pachislot machine 1). As a result, it is possible to strengthen the screen (center screen 3010), and since there is no member between the player and the screen (center screen 3010), the screen (center screen 3010) Images can be seen directly in the eyes of the player, further enhancing the power and realism of video expression.

Further, for example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the light-transmitting plate 1045 is arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1046, but if such an aspect is adopted, the light inside the game parlor (the pachi-slot machine 1 There is also a concern that the visual quality of the image may deteriorate due to the light that exists outside the screen being reflected back by the light-transmitting plate 1045. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since the predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050) is present on the back side of the screen (center screen 3010), it is possible to prevent such reflection. Therefore, the appearance of the video can be improved. In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the existence of the transparent plate 1045 is noticeable especially when the pachi-slot machine 1 is viewed from the side. There is a concern that the appearance of the product will also deteriorate. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since there are no other members outside the screen (center screen 3010), a sophisticated appearance can be achieved.

(B-3) The gaming machine of (B-1) or (B-2) above,
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) with a curved shape near at least one end.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) in the vicinity of at least one end. By displaying an image on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the displayed image, and it is possible to realize a realistic video expression.

The seventh embodiment has been described as having curved portions (left curved portion 3012L and right curved portion 3012R) provided near each of the left end and right end of the screen (center screen 3010). In the present invention, the position and number of the curved portions (curved portions 3012) are not particularly limited. For example, a curved portion (curved portion 3012) may be provided only near one of the left and right ends of the screen (center screen 3010), and the portion near the other end may be formed flat. . Further, a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) may be provided at a location near the center in the left-right direction on the screen (center screen 3010). Further, the entire screen (center screen 3010) may be configured as a curved portion (curved portion 3012).

(B-4) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-3) above,
comprising a performance execution means (sub control circuit 200) capable of performing a performance by controlling the projector;
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a predetermined curvature,
The effect execution means is capable of displaying an image corresponding to the curved surface on the curved surface section in a visual recognition mode such that a curved surface corresponding to the predetermined curvature is present on the curved surface section.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved portion (curved portion 3012) having a predetermined curvature, and the curved surface corresponding to the predetermined curvature is the curved portion (curved portion). It is possible to display an image corresponding to the curved surface on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) in a visual recognition mode as shown in the curved surface portion 3012). As a result, it is possible to realize a realistic image representation as if an object having the curved surface actually exists on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) of the screen (center screen 3010).

Note that curvature is a quantity representing the degree of curvature of a curved line or curved surface, and the local degree of curvature can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is called the radius of curvature. For example, the curvature of a circle with radius r is 1/r, and the radius of curvature is r. The tighter the curve, the larger the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. When the curve is a circular arc, the radius of curvature can be expressed by the radius of the circular arc; on the other hand, in the case of a curve that is different from a circular arc, the radius of curvature can be expressed by a predetermined function that represents the degree of bending of the curve. Can be done.

(B-5) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-4) above,
Equipped with a three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110),
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012),
The three-dimensional decorative portion is arranged so that at least a portion thereof overlaps the curved surface portion when viewed from the front.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape, and when viewed from the front, at least a portion of the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). ) A three-dimensional decorative part (side decorative part 3110) is arranged so as to overlap with the three-dimensional decorative part (side decorative part 3110). Thereby, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the curved surface part (curved part 3012), and the three-dimensional effect and the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) work together. , it is possible to create a three-dimensional sense of unity between the image and the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110).

Here, if a light-transmitting member (such as the light-transmitting plate 1045 in the fifth embodiment) is placed on the front side of the screen (center screen 3010), the screen (center screen 3010) and three-dimensional decoration Since the light-transmitting member is interposed between the curved surface section (side decoration section 3110), the image (column image) displayed on the curved surface section (curved section 3012) and the three-dimensional decoration section (side decoration section 3110) have a sense of unity. There is a concern that the structure may collapse, causing a sense of discomfort. In contrast, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, no other member is interposed between the screen (center screen 3010) and the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110), so this feeling of discomfort can be eliminated. This can enhance the sense of unity. Furthermore, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between these and the left speaker unit 3400L and right speaker unit 3400R, and the overall appearance of the Pachislot machine 1 can be made sophisticated.

In the seventh embodiment, the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) is arranged so as to cover the rear part of the screen (center screen 3010), and a part of the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) is disposed when viewed from the front. has been described as overlapping a part of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). In the present invention, the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) can be appropriately arranged near the curved part (curved part 3012), and the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) can be arranged near the curved part (curved part 3012). 3012) may not be covered at all. For example, a three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) is arranged adjacent to a curved part (curved part 3012), so that the surface of the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) and the surface of the curved part (curved part 3012) It may also constitute a substantially continuous surface.

(B-6) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-5) above,
Equipped with a three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110),
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a curved shape, and has an opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) facing the three-dimensional decorative portion corresponding to the shape of the three-dimensional decorative portion,
The three-dimensional decoration part is arranged along the curved surface part,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) with a curved shape, and the three-dimensional decorative portion is arranged along the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). (side decoration part 3110) is arranged. Thereby, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the curved surface part (curved part 3012), and the three-dimensional effect and the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) work together. , it is possible to create a three-dimensional sense of unity between the image and the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110). Further, the screen (center screen 3010) has an opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) that faces the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) in accordance with the shape of the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110). Therefore, the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) can be arranged so as to fit into the opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020). Thereby, the relative positional relationship between the three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) and the curved surface part (curved part 3012) can be made appropriate, and the above-mentioned sense of unity can be reliably achieved.

In the seventh embodiment, the explanation has been made assuming that the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is formed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) of the screen (center screen 3010). In the present invention, the forming position of the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is not particularly limited, and for example, the opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020). Alternatively, an opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) may be formed so as to straddle the curved portion (curved portion 3012) and the portion (for example, the rear portion 3013). The three-dimensional decoration part (side decoration part 3110) may be arranged along the part (for example, the rear side part 3013). Further, in the seventh embodiment, the opposing portion (side unevenness portion 3020) is composed of both concave portions (concave portions 3021a, concave portions 3022a, and concave portions 3023a) and convex portions (protrusions 3021b, protrusions 3022b, and protrusions 3023b). It was explained as follows. The opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) in the present invention may be composed only of concave portions or may be composed only of convex portions. Moreover, the number of opposing parts (side uneven parts 3020) is of course not limited, and it is possible to form an arbitrary number of opposing parts (side uneven parts 3020) as appropriate.

(B-7) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-6) above,
comprising a light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) arranged so as to suppress the light projected by the projector from passing through the predetermined member and leaking;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, by disposing the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150), the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is transmitted to the predetermined member (rear side light transmitting plate 3050). It is possible to suppress the transmission and leakage. If the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) were to leak from a part other than the screen (center screen 3010), that part would shine unnaturally and look bad. ) can prevent such a situation from occurring.

(B-8) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-7) above,
Light emitting means (side LEDs 3122a to 3122g) capable of emitting light;
a light guiding member (side light lens 3140) that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means;
a light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) disposed to suppress light projected by the projector from reaching the light guide member;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, by disposing the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150), the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is directed to the light guiding member (side light lens 3140). It is possible to prevent this from happening. If the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the light guide member (side light lens 3140), the light emitted from the light emitting means (side LEDs 3122a to 3122g) and the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) There is a concern that as a result of mixing, it will not be possible to perform the intended light emitting effect, but the presence of the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) prevents such a situation from occurring. I can do it.

In the seventh embodiment, a light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) is arranged to close a portion (gap) of a predetermined member (rear light transmitting plate 3050) that is not covered by the screen (center screen 3010). explained. The arrangement position of the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to block the light from passing through the gap and proceeding forward. Specifically, the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) may be arranged on the outer side of the pachi-slot machine 1 than the predetermined member (rear light-transmitting plate 3050), or the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) 3050) may be arranged on the inner side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

(B-9) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-8) above,
a light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) disposed near the screen, the light reflecting section being able to reflect at least a part of the image displayed on the screen;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) is disposed near the screen (center screen 3010), and the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) It is possible to reflect at least a part of the image displayed on the (center screen 3010). As a result, the image displayed on the screen (center screen 3010) and the image reflected on the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) due to the image being reflected on the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) are combined. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel image expression that cannot be perceived by the player using only the screen (center screen 3010).

Here, if a light-transmitting member (such as the light-transmitting plate 1045 in the fifth embodiment) is placed on the front side of the screen (center screen 3010), then the display surface of the screen (center screen 3010) This means that the light-transmitting member exists between the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216) and the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216). Therefore, due to the presence of the light-transmitting member, the appearance of the image reflected on the reflective section (image reflective surface 3216) deteriorates (especially between the display surface of the screen (center screen 3010) and the light reflective section (image reflective surface 3216). There is a concern that the sense of unity of the image will be lost due to streaks appearing at the boundary with the surface 3216). On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since there is no other member between the display surface of the screen (center screen 3010) and the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216), the reflecting section ( The image reflected on the image reflection surface 3216) can be made clear, and the image displayed on the screen (center screen 3010) and the image reflected on the light reflection section (image reflection surface 3216) can be seen as one.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) is configured by applying a reflective paint. The light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be configured as a mirror, may be configured by depositing a metal film, or may be configured as a mirror, or may be configured by vapor depositing a metal film, It may be constructed by pasting a sheet, or it may be constructed by mirror-finishing (reducing surface roughness by polishing or cutting). Further, in the seventh embodiment, the image reflecting surface 3216 is formed as a light reflecting section, but in addition to the image reflecting surface 3216, the decorative surface 3217 may also be configured as a light reflecting section. Further, as the light reflecting portion, it is possible to appropriately adopt a configuration in which it bulges forward from near the periphery (upper end, lower end, left end, right end, etc.) of the screen (center screen 3010). Note that if the second member (top frame base 3210) as a whole has reflective performance, the second member (top frame base 3210) after molding can be used without special treatment for forming a light reflecting part. ) (for example, the lower surface 3215 of the lower wall 3214) may be used as the light reflecting portion.

(B-10) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-9) above,
A protruding part (a front upper end part 3015 and a front lower end part 3017) protruding from the surface of the screen is formed along at least a part of the periphery of the screen.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the protrusions (the front upper end 3015 and the front A lower end portion 3017) is formed. As a result, if there is a gap between the surface of the screen (center screen 3010) and another member, even if you try to insert a wire-shaped instrument through the gap, the protrusion (front upper end) 3015 and the front lower end 3017) can become an obstacle and prevent the intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a thief from being carried out through the gap. Furthermore, the rigidity of the screen (central screen 3010) can be increased due to the presence of the protruding parts (front upper end 3015 and front lower end 3017), and even when force is applied during assembly work, the screen ( Distortion of the center screen 3010) can be suppressed.

In the seventh embodiment, a front upper end 3015, a front lower end 3017, a rear upper end 3019, and a rear lower end 3020 are provided as protrusions of the screen (center screen 3010). Among these protrusions, the front It has been explained that the presence of the upper end portion 3015 and the front lower end portion 3017 can prevent trigly movements. Similarly, the rear upper end portion 3019 and the rear lower end portion 3020 may be configured to have a function of preventing a wire-shaped instrument from entering, thereby preventing trifling. .

(B-11) Any of the gaming machines (B-1) to (B-10) above,
Through-holes (through-hole 3016L and through-hole 3016R) are formed in the screen,
The predetermined member is fixed by screw fastening using the through hole.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) is formed with through holes (through holes 3016L and 3016R), and the predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050) is formed with through holes (through holes 3016L and 3016R). , are fixed by screw fastening using the through holes (through hole 3016L and through hole 3016R). Accordingly, the screen (center screen 3010) can be placed at an appropriate position by fixing the predetermined member (rear transparent plate 3050).

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the screen sheet 1046 is pressed down by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (center screen 3010) is fixed. Thereby, parts such as the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are not required, and costs can be reduced. In addition, since the screen sheet 1046 in the fifth embodiment is a thin sheet-like screen having flexibility, it tends to expand and contract due to changes in humidity. Therefore, if it is fixed in close contact with another member by screw fastening, there is a concern that it will be damaged due to expansion and contraction, and it has been desirable to perform the above-mentioned pressing. In contrast, the screen (center screen 3010) in the seventh embodiment has a certain degree of thickness (for example, 2 mm) and rigidity, and does not expand or contract much even when the humidity changes. Therefore, even if screwed together, damage is unlikely to occur, making it possible to adopt the above configuration. The thickness of the screen (center screen 3010) is not particularly limited, but is preferably about 1 mm to 5 mm (or about 1.5 mm to 3 mm, or about 1.8 mm to 2.5 mm). Making the screen (center screen 3010) thinner increases the resolution of the image, but increases the possibility that it will be damaged when removed from the mold. The thickness of the screen (center screen 3010) can be appropriately determined in consideration of this point.

[Eighth embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. The eighth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of parts that apply to the eighth embodiment as well as those described in the first to seventh embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...". Even if the description is as follows, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the eighth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to seventh embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, without departing from the spirit of the eighth embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, the configurations shown in the first to seventh embodiments (including the configurations shown in the modified examples and the configurations shown in the expanded examples) are partially replaced with the configurations shown in the eighth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the seventh embodiment, components having similar functions may be given the same reference numerals for convenience. Further, even if the machine has the same shape or the same processing as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments, different symbols or step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Rock performance>
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing an example of a lock effect. FIG. 244 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number “1”. FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number “2”. FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "3". FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "4". FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "5". FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number “6”.

As described in the first embodiment, the lock effect is a effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the player's game operation for a predetermined period). In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the reel effect or pseudo game can be executed while the lock effect is being executed.

As explained in the first embodiment, during the period when the player's gaming operation is invalidated, the reel performance rotates or stops each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's gaming operation. (temporary stop). In addition, during the period when the player's gaming operation is invalidated, the pseudo game accepts the player's gaming operation in a pseudo manner, thereby causing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to rotate or stop (temporarily stop). The performance is performed by doing things like this.

In addition, in lock effects (reel effects or pseudo-games), symbol combinations may be displayed in a static manner, but benefits are not awarded to the player based on the static display of the symbol combinations. do not have. For example, even if the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in the reel production or pseudo-game matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table (see Figures 11 to 14), the combination of symbols that corresponds to the symbol combination No medals will be paid out.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol combination) is stopped and displayed in the reel production or pseudo game, the AT state may be entered. In a state where it has already been decided to shift to the AT state, it is announced (suggested) that it has been decided to shift to the AT state through a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols aligned). However, it is not determined to shift to the AT state in response to a particular symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbol combination) being stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, as such a lock effect, a lock effect as shown in FIG. 243 (lock effects corresponding to rock effect numbers "1" to "6") is provided. The rock performances corresponding to rock performance numbers "1" to "6" are one of the following rock performances (i) to (iv), or two of these rock performances. It is composed of a combination of performances.

(i) "Red 7" symbols are aligned in the reel performance (ii) "Red 7" symbols are not aligned in the reel performance (iii) "Red 7" symbols are aligned in the pseudo game (iv) "Red 7" is aligned in the pseudo game The patterns don't line up

In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "1", the performance (i) above is performed. In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "2", the performance (ii) above is performed. In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "3", the performance (iii) above is performed. In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "4", the performance (iv) above is performed. In the rock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5", after the above effect (iv) is performed, the above effect (i) is performed. In the rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "6", after the performance (ii) above is performed, the performance (iii) above is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment is used, and "Red 7" is arranged at symbol position "0". In FIGS. 244 to 249, numbers indicating the symbol positions corresponding to the symbols that are stopped and displayed are also shown.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 244, in the lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "1", after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R (see FIG. 244(a)), the player's The rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped (automatically) without a stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 244(b)). Next, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 244(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 244(d)). .

As shown in FIG. 245, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2", after each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts rotating (see FIG. 245(a)), the player's stop operation causes The right reel 3R immediately (automatically) stops rotating, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 245(b)). Next, the rotation of the middle reel 3C stops (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 245(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and a symbol other than "Red 7" (in this example, "White Blank 1") appears in the middle area of the left reel 3L. ) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 245(d)).

As shown in Figure 246, in the lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "3", after each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts rotating (see Figure 246(a)), the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed. In response, the right reel 3R stops rotating, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 246(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R is swinging at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to the stop operation for the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 246(c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R is also continuing to swing. Then, in response to the stop operation for the left reel 3L, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 246(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are also continuing to swing.

As shown in Figure 247, in the lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "4", after each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts rotating (see Figure 247(a)), a stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed. In response, the right reel 3R stops rotating, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 247(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R is swinging at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to the stop operation for the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 247(c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R is also continuing to swing. Then, in response to the stop operation for the left reel 3L, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and symbols other than "Red 7" (in this example, "White Blank 1") are stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. (See Figure 247(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are also continuing to swing.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5", after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts (see FIG. 248(a)), the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed. In response, the right reel 3R stops rotating, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 248(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R is swinging at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to the stop operation for the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 248(c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R is also continuing to swing. Then, in response to the stop operation for the left reel 3L, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and symbols other than "Red 7" (in this example, "White Blank 1") are stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. (See Figure 248(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are also continuing to swing. After that, the left reel 3L rotates again (see FIG. 248(e)), and the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and the middle area of the left reel 3L shows " "Red 7" is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 248(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are also continuing to swing.

As shown in FIG. 249, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6", after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R (see FIG. 249(a)), the player's stop operation causes The right reel 3R immediately (automatically) stops rotating, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 249(b)). Next, the middle reel 3C stops rotating (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see Figure 249(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and a symbol other than "Red 7" (in this example, "White Blank 1") appears in the middle area of the left reel 3L. ) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 249(d)). After that, the left reel 3L rotates again (see Fig. 249(e)), and in response to the stop operation for the left reel 3L, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops, and "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. (See FIG. 249(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, while the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are not swinging. Note that after "Red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C may be made to swing at a predetermined timing, similarly to the left reel 3L.

<Rock performance determination process>
FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process) is executed.

In the lock effect determination process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1001). As explained in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is a gaming period that can be controlled to a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and the advantageous section is a production section ( An advantageous section/normal game) and an increased section (advantageous section/pseudo bonus) are provided (see FIG. 5). The performance section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not reported, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, but the mode transition is It differs from the non-advantageous section in that it is carried out. The increasing section is an AT state (a gaming state advantageous to the player).

When determining that the current gaming section is not an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming section is an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is in progress (step S1002). As described in the first embodiment, the pseudo bonus is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. The main CPU 101 can determine whether or not a pseudo bonus is being played by referring to the mode flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 20).

If it is determined that the pseudo bonus is being played, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current game has shifted to the pseudo bonus (step S1003). As explained in the first embodiment, when an internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process (see step S5 in FIG. 23), an advantageous section winning time is recorded as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination. A sub-flag (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined. Then, in the performance section (advantageous section/normal game), the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referred to, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transfer lottery) is performed based on the random value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. As a result, "winning" or "non-winning" is determined as the result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery. As the "winning", "winning (current game)" and "winning (next game)" are provided.

If “winning (current game)” is determined, for example, in step S106 of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section (see FIG. 28) in the current game (the game in which the pseudo bonus transfer lottery was performed), The bit corresponding to "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1". As a result, when a "win (current game)" is determined, the current game shifts to a pseudo bonus. Similarly, when "winning (next game)" is determined, for example, the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section in the next game (the next game of the game in which the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery was performed) (FIG. 28 In step S106 (see FIG. 20), the bit corresponding to the "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1". As a result, when a "win (next game)" is determined, the next game is shifted to a pseudo bonus.

If it is determined that it is not the current game that has shifted to the pseudo bonus, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the 1G consecutive lottery has been won (step S1004). As explained in the first embodiment, in the pseudo bonus, the 1G consecutive lottery table (see FIG. 7(d)) is referred to, and a lottery (1G consecutive lottery) is performed based on the random number value and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. As a result, a "win" or "non-win" is determined as the result of the 1G lottery. As the "winning", "winning (1G series + 1)" is provided.

If "winning (1G series + 1)" is determined, for example, in step S103 of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous period (see FIG. 28), one right to generate 1G series (1G series stock) is granted. (1G continuous stock counter is incremented by 1). When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G continuous stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G continuous stock), one 1G continuous stock is used up (the 1G continuous stock counter is (subtracted by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends.

If it is determined in step S1003 that it is the current game that has shifted to the pseudo bonus, or if it is determined that the 1G consecutive lottery has been won in step S1004, the main CPU 101 selects the lock performance numbers "1" and "6" ( (see FIG. 243) is selected by lottery (step S1005). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag on (step S1006), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" will be performed. The lock performance corresponding to the lock performance number "1" or "6" is a performance equivalent to the "red 7 set" performance described in the first embodiment. In addition, if you win the 1G consecutive lottery, you will receive a lock performance (for example, a special bonus performance described in the first embodiment) that is different from the lock performance (``red 7 set'' performance) that is performed when you move to a pseudo bonus. ) may be configured to be performed.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the pseudo bonus is not in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not special lock effect generation conditions are satisfied (step S1007). As explained in the first embodiment, in the special lock effect, a "confirmed hand" (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined as a sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, and a mode transition lottery (see FIG. 8(f)) This is an effect that can be executed with a predetermined probability when it is determined to shift to Heaven C mode (see FIG. 6). In other words, the conditions for the occurrence of the special lock performance are such that a "confirmed role" is determined as a sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it is determined to shift to heaven C mode by mode transition lottery, and the special lock performance is a special lock performance that can be won with a predetermined probability. It is to win a random lottery.

In addition, if "confirmed hand" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous section, "Win (next game)" is always determined as the result of the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (see Figure 7 (c)), and the pseudo-bonus is The transition to is confirmed. Moreover, the heaven C mode is a mode in which it is expected that pseudo bonuses will be won consecutively. When the pseudo bonus starts, the ceiling shortening lottery table (see FIG. 8(e)) is referred to, and a lottery based on random numbers (ceiling shortening lottery) is performed, and as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, a "win" or " ``Non-winning'' is determined. If a "win" is determined, "0 games" is set as the ceiling number of games when the pseudo bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. The heaven C mode is a mode (heaven mode) in which a prize can be won in the ceiling reduction lottery, and a mode in which the heaven mode is easily maintained (a mode advantageous for the player).

If it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G consecutive lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S1007 that the special lock effect generation condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 executes the lock effect lottery (step S1008). . In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a "win" or "non-win" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect lottery has been won (step S1009). If it is determined that the lock effect lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 selects one of the lock effect numbers "2" and "4" (see FIG. 243) by lottery (step S1010). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag on (step S1011), and ends this subroutine. As a result, a lock effect (so-called fake effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" is performed.

If it is determined in step S1007 that the special lock effect generation condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 selects one of the lock effect numbers "3" and "5" (see FIG. 243) by lottery (step S1012). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1013), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" will be performed.

The rock performance corresponding to the rock performance number "3" or "5" is a performance corresponding to the special rock performance described in the first embodiment. Similar to the first embodiment, the special lock effect can be configured not to be executed when the degree of progress of the game (game history) during the advantageous section satisfies a predetermined condition. Such gaming history includes the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter (values referenced in limit processing), etc. Can be adopted. An upper limit (limiter) is set for the duration of the advantageous section, and the limit process is a process for ending the advantageous section when the limiter is reached (see FIG. 16).

In addition, in the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250, when a pseudo bonus transition lottery or 1G consecutive lottery is won, a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is performed (lock effect number "3"). and the rock effect corresponding to "5" is not performed). However, in this embodiment, a lock effect (special lock effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" may be performed when a pseudo bonus transfer lottery or a 1G consecutive lottery is won. As described in the first embodiment, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the 1G continuous lottery will not be executed (see FIG. 16). Further, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery may not be executed. When the pseudo bonus transition lottery and the 1G continuous lottery are no longer executed, the determination results in steps S1003, S1004, and S1007 of FIG. 250 all become "NO", and the lock effect is no longer executed. In this embodiment, for example, a variable in an advantageous section (the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, or the value of the control payout number counter, or If the value calculated based on these values and the value of the 1G continuous stock counter) exceeds a predetermined value, the lock effect (pseudo game as a special lock effect) will not be executed. Is possible.

<Rock effect execution process>
FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing the lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in a pseudo game.

The lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main side effect control process at game start) of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 250) is set to ON (step S1021). If it is determined that the lock effect start flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set on, the main CPU 101 executes lock command generation and storage processing (step S1022). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock command data and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that locking of the reels has started, and can determine the timing to execute various effects.

Specifically, upon receiving the lock command data, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to various lock performances. As a result, for example, when a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250), "7" shown in FIG. 252 is selected. Aim for the target!'' effect image 1100 is displayed on the main display device 210. The "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is performed in the order of "right reel 3R → middle reel 3C → left reel 3L" and a stop operation at the timing when the "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This is an image suggesting that By displaying the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100, it is possible to have the player operate the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R in the suggested order, and as a result, the player can participate in the pseudo game. Can be done.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1023). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes lock effect acceleration processing (step S1024). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is requested, the driving of the stepping motor is controlled by the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), and the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is started. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is accelerated until its rotation reaches a constant speed, and then controlled to maintain the constant speed. The rotation mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R until reaching the constant speed is not limited to normal rotation (forward rotation), but may include reel actions such as slow rotation, high speed rotation, reverse rotation, and combinations thereof. It may include. Furthermore, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be decelerated immediately after reaching a predetermined speed, without maintaining the rotating state at a constant speed.

In the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), the main CPU 101 rotates each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R in the manner shown in FIGS. 244 to 249 by switching the excitation pattern of the excitation phase over time. The stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R are controlled so as to stop. When accelerating the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for acceleration. When rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at a constant speed, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for constant speed. When decelerating the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for deceleration. When maintaining the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in a stopped state, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for stopping. When swinging the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the swinging excitation pattern. Each excitation pattern is held for a predetermined period of time. The time is managed by a timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). Note that the excitation method is not particularly limited, and two-phase excitation, 1-2 phase excitation, etc. can be adopted as appropriate. Further, the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R may be PM type stepping motors or HB type stepping motors. The driving method may be a bipolar method or a unipolar method.

After executing the process of step S1024, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo game flag is set on (step S1025). The pseudo game flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo game is being executed. Although not shown, if a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets a pseudo-gaming flag to ON in the process of step S1024. Processing is also performed. Furthermore, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 starts control to maintain the left reel 3L in a stopped state in the reel effect (see FIG. 249(d)). (when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R started), the pseudo game flag is set on.

If it is determined that the pseudo game flag is set on, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game process (step S1026). The pseudo game processing will be explained later using FIG. 253.

If it is determined in step S1025 that the pseudo-gaming flag is not set on, or after executing the process in step S1026, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect end flag is set on. (Step S1027). The lock effect end flag is a flag indicating that the lock effect has ended. Although not shown, when a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1" or "2" is selected, the main CPU 101 performs control to maintain the left reel 3L in a stopped state (FIGS. 244(d) and 244(d)). 245(d)) (when a predetermined time has elapsed since the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R started), the lock effect end flag is set to on. Furthermore, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "4" is selected, the main CPU 101 controls to swing the left reel 3L (see FIGS. 246(d) and 247(d)). When starting (when all the stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in the pseudo game are completed), the lock effect end flag is set on (see step S1073 in FIG. 254). Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 starts the control (see FIG. 248(f)) to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after re-rotating (see FIG. 248(f)). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left reel 3L started rotating again, the lock effect end flag is set on (see step S1084 in FIG. 255). In addition, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 starts the control (see FIG. 249(f)) to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after re-rotating (see FIG. 249(f)). When the stop operation for the left reel 3L in the pseudo game after re-rotation is completed, the lock effect end flag is set on (see step S1112 in FIG. 256).

If it is determined that the lock effect end flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1025. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect end flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag on (step S1028), and ends this subroutine. The random delay flag is a flag used to perform random delay processing. As explained in the first embodiment, the random delay process is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect and then starting rotation. This is done to prevent players from becoming more likely to "eye-push" as a result of the performance. Details of the random delay processing will be explained later using FIG. 258.

<Pseudo game processing>
FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game processing performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo game process shown in FIG. 253 is a process performed in step S1026 of FIG. 251 (lock effect execution process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the pseudo-gaming process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "6" (step S1041).

If it is determined that the selected lock effect number is not lock effect number "6", the main CPU 101 executes a normal pseudo-gaming process (step S1042). The normal pseudo-gaming process will be explained later using FIG. 254. After executing the process in step S1042, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "6", the main CPU 101 executes a post-reel effect pseudo-gaming process (step S1043). The post-reel production pseudo-gaming process will be explained later using FIG. 256. After executing the process in step S1043, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Normal pseudo game processing>
FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo game processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254 is a process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the normal pseudo-gaming process, the main CPU 101 first executes the processes from step S1061 to step S1068, but these processes are basically the same as the processes from step S111 to step S120 in FIG. 29 (reel stop control process). It is a similar process.

Here, in the normal pseudo-gaming processing shown in FIG. 254, processing corresponding to step S116 and step S117 in FIG. 29 is not performed. That is, the number of sliding pieces (see step S117) is not determined, and in the process of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines the position where the symbol will finally stop, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). The position is determined and stored as the planned stop position. As a result, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops in the manner shown in FIGS. 246(b) to 246(d), FIGS. 247(b) to 247(d), and FIGS. do. In the pseudo game, predetermined symbols may be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces, or the reel stop control process (in the main game) shown in FIG. Similarly, control may be performed to stop each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. In this case, for example, even if the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbols will not line up. It turns out. In addition, when stopping each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the pseudo game may be the same as the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game, It may be greater than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game, or it may be smaller than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game.

Further, in step S111 of FIG. 29, 80 revolutions/minute was given as an example of the speed (constant rotational speed) when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotating at a constant speed. The constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be the same as the constant rotation speed in the main game (for example, 80 rotations/1 minute), or may be faster than the constant rotation speed in the main game (for example, 90 to 1 minute). 180 rotations/1 minute, or 120 to 160 rotations/1 minute), or slower than the constant rotation speed in the main game (for example, 10 to 60 rotations/1 minute, or 30 to 45 rotations/minute). 1 minute) It can also be a thing. In addition, in the normal pseudo-gaming processing shown in FIG. 254, in the pseudo-game as well, as in the main game, wait until the rotational speed of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant rotational speed, and press each stop button 8L. , 8C, and 8R (see step S1062). However, in the pseudo game, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R may be activated before the rotational speed of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant rotational speed.

After executing the process of step S1068, the main CPU 101 determines whether the controlled reel (see step S1065) has stopped (step S1069). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control for decelerating the rotation of the controlled reel has ended. The main CPU 101 determines that when the holding time of the excitation pattern for deceleration has expired (when the time required to stop the rotation of the controlled reel has elapsed), the control to decelerate the rotation of the controlled reel has ended (control It is possible to recognize that the target reel has stopped.

If it is determined that the controlled reel is not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1069 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel to be controlled has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the reel to be controlled (step S1070). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to a rocking excitation pattern for rocking the controlled reel. As a result, the stepping motor 51 corresponding to the reel to be controlled is driven and controlled, and the reel to be controlled swings in a predetermined manner. Although the excitation pattern for rocking is not particularly limited, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which two-phase excitation is performed so that excitation pattern I and excitation pattern II are repeated as described below.

Although not shown, four excitation phases (A phase, B phase, C phase, and D phase) are sequentially arranged clockwise in each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and 1-2 phase excitation. Eight excitation patterns (A phase-B phase, B phase, B phase-C phase, C phase, C phase-D phase, D phase, D phase-A phase, and A phase) are provided as patterns. There is. For example, an excitation pattern (for example, B phase-C phase) with an offset value of 2 from the reference excitation pattern as the excitation pattern I is held for a time T ₁ (for example, 3 interrupt times), and the above A configuration is adopted in which an excitation pattern (for example, A phase-B phase) in which the offset value from the reference excitation pattern is 0 is held as excitation pattern II for a time T ₂ (for example, 300 interrupt times). It is possible to do so. It is desirable that T ₂ be less than 500 ms, and it is also desirable that the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ be less than 500 ms. For example, T ₁ may be about 1 to 20 ms (or 2 to 10 ms). , T ₂ can be set to a time of about 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). Further, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control is performed based on the excitation pattern for swinging is set to be larger than the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control is performed based on the excitation pattern for stopping. The current used by the stepping motor 51 may be approximately the same as the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the excitation pattern for constant speed. For example, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on an excitation pattern for rocking is the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on an excitation pattern for acceleration or an excitation pattern for deceleration. It may be set to about 60% (for example, about 40 to 80%, or about 50 to 70%).

By driving and controlling the stepping motor 51 as described above, the reel 3 can be vertically swung (see FIGS. 246(b) to 246(d), FIGS. 247(b) to 247(d), and FIG. 248). (See (b) to (d)). The manner in which the reels 3 swing is not particularly limited as long as the reels 3 move to an extent that is recognizable to the player. However, since "oscillation" is a slight vibration and can also be called a "temporary stop," the width of the vibration is 1 symbol (or 1/2 symbol, 1/4 symbol, or 1 symbol). It is desirable that the number of symbols does not exceed 1/8 symbol or 1/16 symbol. Note that "swinging" is a concept that includes not only the case where the reel 3 operates at a constant cycle but also the case where the reel 3 operates aperiodically. In addition, a period in which the reel 3 is almost completely stopped is also included in "oscillation," but the period must be less than 500ms (for example, 100 to 490ms, or 200 to 450ms). is desirable. That is, when the reel 3 performs some movement within a range of less than 500 ms, it can be called "swinging."

After executing the process of step S1070, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R (step S1071). This process is similar to the process of step S121 in FIG. 29 (reel stop control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the operation status of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

If it is determined that valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R exist, the main CPU 101 moves the process to step S1063. On the other hand, if it is determined that there are no valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, or 8R, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is lock effect number "5" or not. (Step S1072).

If it is determined that the selected lock effect number is not the lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1073), and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-game reel effect process (step S1074). The pseudo-game reel production process will be explained later using FIG. 255. After executing the process in step S1074, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Reel performance processing after pseudo game>
FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game reel effect processing performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game reel production process shown in FIG. 255 is a process performed in step S1074 of FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-gaming process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the pseudo-game reel production process, first, the main CPU 101 executes a re-acceleration process (step S1081). This process is similar to the process of step S1024 in FIG. 251 (lock effect execution process). In the process of step S1024, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but in the process of step S1081, the main CPU 3031 requests only the start of rotation of the left reel 3L. Other points are as described in step S1024. By executing the process in step S1081, the driving of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the rotation of the left reel 3L is started (see FIG. 248(e)).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel 3L has stopped (step S1082). This process is similar to the process of step S1069 in FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-gaming process). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left reel 3L started rotating again.

If it is determined that the left reel 3L is not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1082 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the left reel 3L has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the left reel 3L (step S1083). This process is similar to the process in step S1070 in FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-gaming process). Thereby, the driving of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L can be swung up and down (see FIG. 248(f)).

Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1084), and ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo game processing after reel performance>
FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing a process during a pseudo game after reel performance performed in the main control circuit.

The post-reel production pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 256 is a process performed in step S1043 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process) in the main control circuit 100. As described above, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (see step S1024 in FIG. 251) started. Sometimes, the pseudo game flag is set on. As a result, the determination result in step S1025 in FIG. 251 becomes "YES", and the post-reel production pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 256 is started.

In the post-reel presentation pseudo game process, first, the main CPU 101 executes a post-reel presentation pseudo game start command generation and storage process (step S1101). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data after reel performance, and stores the generated pseudo game start command data after reel performance in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The post-reel performance pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the reel performance in (ii) above is finished and the pseudo game in (iii) above is started (see FIG. 243), and various effects can be performed. It is possible to determine the timing, etc. to execute the . Specifically, in response to receiving the command data to start the pseudo game after the reel performance, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the end of the reel performance and the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image ("hit the lever" image) with the content "hit the lever" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1102). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1102 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 executes re-acceleration processing (step S1103). This process is similar to the process in step S1081 in FIG. 255 (pseudo-gaming reel performance process). As a result, the driving of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the rotation of the left reel 3L is started (see FIG. 249(e)). As described above, in the post-reel performance pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 256, it is explained that the left reel 3L is rotated again on condition that the start lever 7 is operated after the reel performance ends. However, the re-rotation of the left reel 3L may be performed automatically after the reel performance ends (when a predetermined time has elapsed after the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the reel performance has stopped). good.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotational speed of the left reel 3L has reached a constant rotational speed (step S1104). As described above, the constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be different from the constant rotation speed (80 rotations/1 minute) in the main game (see step S1061 in FIG. 254). If it is determined that the rotational speed of the left reel 3L has not reached the constant rotational speed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1104 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the rotational speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant rotational speed, the main CPU 101 allows the left reel 3L to stop (step S1105). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 4 of the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21). This enables the left stop button 8L. Note that, as described above, the left stop button 8L may be activated before the rotational speed of the left reel 3L reaches the constant rotational speed (see step S1062 in FIG. 254).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes steps S1106 to S1111, which are basically the same processes as steps S1063 to S1070 in FIG. 254. In the normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the operated stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined as the reels to be controlled, but during the pseudo-gaming after reel performance shown in FIG. In the process, the left reel 3L is the reel to be controlled. By executing the process in step S1111, the driving of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L can be swung up and down (see FIG. 249(f)). Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1112), and ends this subroutine.

<Reel rotation start process>
FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing reel rotation start processing performed in the main control circuit.

The reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 257 is a process performed in step S10 of FIG. 23 (main process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the reel rotation start process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the random delay flag (see step S1028 in FIG. 251) is set on (step S1121).

When determining that the random delay flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the random delay flag was set on (after the end of the lock effect). Step S1122). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1122 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes random delay processing (step S1123). As described above, the random delay process is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect, and then starting rotation. Details of the random delay processing will be explained later using FIG. 258. After executing the process in step S1123, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to OFF (step S1124), and ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1121 that the random delay flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 executes normal acceleration processing (step S1125). This process is the same process as described in step S10 of FIG. 23 (main process). In the process of step S1125, the main CPU 101 simultaneously requests the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, unlike the random delay process. As a result, the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts and accelerates at the same time, and reaches a constant speed at the same time. After executing the process of step S1125, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 257, it is explained that when the lock effect ends, the random delay process is automatically executed without requiring any operation by the player. However, the random delay process may be executed on condition that the player performs an operation (for example, operates the start lever 7) after the lock effect ends. In this case, for example, when the determination result in step S1122 is "YES", the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) may be displayed on the main display device 210. After that, when the start lever 7 is operated, it is possible to configure the random delay process (the process of step S1123) to start at the timing when the start lever 7 is operated. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the random delay process may be started at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed.

<Random delay processing>
FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing random delay processing performed in the main control circuit.

The random delay process shown in FIG. 258 is a process performed in step S1123 of FIG. 257 (reel rotation start process) in the main control circuit 100.

In the random delay process, the main CPU 101 first obtains a left reel random number, a middle reel random number, and a right reel random number (step S1141). The left reel random number, the middle reel random number, and the right reel random number are random numbers for randomly determining the rotation start timing of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the process of step S1141, the main CPU 101 acquires one of 0 to 20 as a random number for the left reel, one of 0 to 20 as a random number for the middle reel, and A numerical value from 0 to 20 is obtained as a random numerical value.

Next, the main CPU 101 inputs values corresponding to the left reel random value, the middle reel random value, and the right reel random value to the left reel acceleration timer, middle reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer, respectively. An acceleration timer is set (step S1142). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value obtained by multiplying the random number value for the left reel by a predetermined number (for example, 32) in the left reel acceleration timer, and multiplies the random number value for the middle reel by a predetermined number (for example, 32). The value obtained by multiplying the right reel random number by a predetermined number (for example, 32) is set in the middle reel acceleration timer. For example, if the random number for the left reel is 5, set the left reel acceleration timer to "160", and if the middle reel random number is 10, set the left reel acceleration timer to "320", If the right reel random number is 15, the right reel acceleration timer is set to "480". The left reel acceleration timer, middle reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer are each updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the left reel acceleration timer, middle reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer each decrease by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel 3L has been accelerated (step S1143). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has been accelerated when the left reel accelerated flag (see step S1146) is set on. If it is determined that the left reel 3L has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1144). When determining that the left reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes left reel acceleration processing (step S1145). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the left reel 3L in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the left reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1146).

If it is determined in step S1143 that the left reel 3L has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1144 that the left reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process in step S1146, the main CPU 101 It is determined whether 3C has been accelerated (step S1147). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the middle reel 3C has been accelerated when the middle reel accelerated flag (see step S1150) is set on. If it is determined that the middle reel 3C has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the middle reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1148). When determining that the middle reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes middle reel acceleration processing (step S1149). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the middle reel 3C in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the middle reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1150).

If it is determined in step S1147 that the middle reel 3C has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1148 that the middle reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process in step S1150, the main CPU 101 It is determined whether 3R has been accelerated (step S1151). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the right reel 3R has been accelerated when the right reel accelerated flag (see step S1154) is set on. If it is determined that the right reel 3R has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the right reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1152). When determining that the right reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes right reel acceleration processing (step S1153). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the right reel 3R in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the right reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1154).

If it is determined in step S1151 that the right reel 3R has been accelerated, if it is determined in step S1152 that the right reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process in step S1154, the main CPU 101 It is determined whether the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated (step S1155). The main CPU 101 recognizes that all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated when the left reel accelerated flag, middle reel accelerated flag, and right reel accelerated flag are all set to on. can do. If it is determined that at least one reel 3 has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1143. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, the rotation start timing of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is randomly determined, and in this respect, the random delay processing (acceleration processing of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R when a lock effect is performed) is normally This is different from the time acceleration process (acceleration process of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when no lock effect is performed). However, the behavior of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after rotation (the time from the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R until it reaches a constant speed) is different when a lock effect is performed and when a lock effect is performed. The situation is the same as if it had not been carried out.

<Reel control state in pseudo game>
FIGS. 259 to 261 are diagrams showing examples of temporal changes in the reel control state when a pseudo game is played.

259 and 260 show the relationship between the player's operation and the reel control state when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" (see FIG. 243) is performed. FIG. 261 shows the relationship between the player's operation and the reel control state when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" (see FIG. 243) is performed. In the figure, "acceleration" indicates that the reel control state is an acceleration control state, "constant speed" indicates that the reel control state is a constant speed control state, and "deceleration" indicates that the reel control state is a constant speed control state. Indicates that the reel control state is a deceleration control state, "stop" indicates that the reel control state is a stop control state, and "oscillation" indicates that the reel control state is a swing control state.

The acceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an excitation pattern for acceleration, the constant speed control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an excitation pattern for constant speed, and the deceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an excitation pattern for constant speed. The state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for deceleration, the stop control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for stop, and the swing control state is This is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for swinging. Information indicating the reel control state (reel control state flag) is stored in a reel control state flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 recognizes the current reel control state by referring to the reel control state flag storage area, and in the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), based on the excitation pattern according to the reel control state. Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled so that the excitation phase is excited.

In the example shown in FIG. 259, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is changed. becomes a constant speed control state. After that, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (first stop reel) targeted by the stop operation becomes a deceleration control state, and the first stop reel When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the first stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (second stop reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and the second stop When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the second stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (third stop reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and the third stop When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the swing control state. Then, after the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the swing control state, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R accelerates at random timing. After that, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes a constant speed control state.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is changed to an acceleration control state. becomes a constant speed control state. After that, when any of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (first stop reel) targeted by the stop operation becomes a deceleration control state, and the first stop reel When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the first stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (second stop reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and the second stop When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the second stop reel becomes the swing control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (third stop reel) becomes a deceleration control state, and the third stop When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the swing control state. Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel control state for all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R became the swing control state, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R became the stop control state. After that, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes an acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes constant speed control. state.

As described above, when the random delay process is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 259, the swing control state is directly transferred to the acceleration control state, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 260, the swing control state The system is configured to temporarily shift from the stop control state to the stop control state, and then to shift from the stop control state to the acceleration control state. In this embodiment, the stop control state may or may not be interposed between the swing control state and the acceleration control state. When interposing a stop control state, the timing of transition from the swing control state to the stop control state is not particularly limited. For example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES", the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be shifted from the swing control state to the stop control state. Also, when transitioning from the pseudo game to the main game (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES"), the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) may be displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be shifted from the swing control state to the stop control state. In these cases, the swinging of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R ends simultaneously at the timing of transitioning to the stop control state. The timing may be before the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 257) is started, or may be after the random delay process is started. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the swinging may be ended at different timings for each reel 3 (in the order in which the stop operation was performed). For example, for each reel 3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reel control state shifted to the swing control state (after rotation stopped), the swing control state may be shifted to the stop control state. Good too.

In the example shown in FIG. 261, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is changed to an acceleration control state. becomes a constant speed control state. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the reel control state for the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) changes to the stop control state via the deceleration control state (automatically) without the player's stop operation. . Similarly, the reel control state for the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) changes from the deceleration control state to the stop control state without the player's stop operation (automatically). Similarly, the reel control state for the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) changes to the stop control state through the deceleration control state (automatically) without the player's stop operation. After that, the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) is displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, reel control for the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) is performed. The state changes from the acceleration control state to the constant speed control state. When the stop button 8 (for example, the left stop button 8L) corresponding to the third stop reel is operated, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted for the stop operation (third stop reel) is changed to a deceleration control state. When the third stop reel stops rotating, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the swing control state. After that, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes an acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R becomes constant speed control. state.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 261, the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped; In this case, the reel control state does not change to the swing control state after the reel is stopped. In this way, in this embodiment, if one reel 3 stops without a stop operation by the player, it is possible to configure the reel 3 so that it does not swing. For example, after the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped, the third stop reel (e.g., , left reel 3L), when the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) and second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) are stopped, these reels 3 are not swung; When the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) stops, the reel 3 may be oscillated. In this case, as in the example shown in FIG. 261, the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) is automatically stopped once, and then the third stop reel is stopped again in response to the stop operation performed after re-rotating. Alternatively, the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) may not be automatically stopped once, and the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) may be rotated in response to the stop operation (from the beginning without going through re-rotation). The reel 3L) may also be stopped. Similarly, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) is automatically stopped, the rotation of the second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) and the third stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped. For example, when the rotation of the left reel 3L) is stopped, when the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) stops, the reel 3 is not swung, while the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and When the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) stops, these reels 3 may be oscillated. In the above, it has been explained that the reels 3 that are stopped first are automatically stopped, and the reels 3 that are stopped later are stopped in response to the player's stop operation, but conversely, the reels 3 that are stopped first are stopped automatically. The reels 3 may be stopped in response to a player's stop operation, and the reels 3 that are stopped later may be automatically stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if one reel 3 is stopped without a stop operation by the player, it is also possible to configure the reel 3 to swing. For example, when the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) to the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) is automatically stopped in the manner shown in FIG. , right reel 3R) is stopped, the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) is oscillated, and when the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is stopped, the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is oscillated. The third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) may be made to swing when the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) stops.

259 to 261, the player operates one stop button 8, and the stop button 8 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from the on state to the off state, that is, the off edge ), the reel control state for the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 is shown as being in the swing control state. In this embodiment, when the stop button 8 changes from an operating state to a non-operating state (becomes an off-edge), the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 may start swinging, or the stop button 8 may start swinging. When the non-operating state changes to the operating state (the stop switch 8S changes from the off state to the on state, that is, becomes on edge), the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 may start swinging. . For example, when the first stop operation is on-edge (the first stop reel does not swing) → when the first stop operation is off-edge (the first stop reel starts swinging) → when the second stop operation is on-edge (the second stop reel starts swinging) (No rocking) → At the off edge of the second stop operation (the second stop reel starts rocking) → On the third stop operation (no rocking of the third stop reel) → At the off edge of the third stop operation ( The third stop reel may start swinging).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) to the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) is stopped in response to the player's stop operation (FIG. 259 and FIG. 260), when the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) and second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) stop, these reels 3 are not swung, and the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3C) is stopped. 3L) may be made to swing all the reels 3 when it stops. For example, all the reels 3 may be oscillated when the off edge of the stop switch 8S corresponding to the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is detected. Alternatively, at this time, the first stop reel (for example, right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) are not swung, and only the third stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) is swung. It may also be a thing. For example, when the first stop operation is on-edge (the first stop reel does not swing) → when the first stop operation is off-edge (the first stop reel does not swing) → when the second stop operation is on-edge (the second stop reel does not swing) (No rocking) → At the off edge of the second stop operation (No rocking of the second stop reel) → On the on edge of the third stop operation (No rocking of the third stop reel) → At the off edge of the third stop operation ( All reels may start swinging).

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix C>
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for presentation (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214050). The sub-reels are larger than the main reels, are placed in conspicuous positions, and have symbols that are easy for players to identify and are arranged in an easy-to-identify arrangement. This allows the sub-reel to appear to the player as if it were the central reel.

In gaming machines equipped with such sub-reels, when the player performs a stop operation, the sub-reels are rotated in a manner that is difficult to perform with the main reels (for example, reverse rotation, frame-by-frame forwarding, etc.) and then stopped. Reel effects may be performed.

On the other hand, even in gaming machines equipped with only main reels, effects using such reels (the reels stop when the player performs a stop operation, but game media (medals) according to the display mode of the stopped reels) etc.) is desired. However, when such a performance (pseudo game) is performed on the main reels, there is a risk that the player may mistakenly recognize it as the main game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine that can prevent a player from mistaking a pseudo game as a main game even if a pseudo game is played on the main reels. The purpose is to provide.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) A plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that are decorated with a plurality of symbols and can be rotated,
A stop operation detection means (stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player;
Reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S203 in FIG. 32, etc.) for controlling the reels,
The reel control means is capable of executing post-stop-operation stop control to stop the rotating reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop-operation detection means,
A main game that can provide game media (medals) or game media data according to the pattern patterns of the plurality of reels when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and When the reels are stopped, it is possible to execute a pseudo game in which no game media or game media data is provided according to the pattern of the plurality of reels,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1070 in FIG. 254, the process of step S1083 in FIG. 255, the process of step S1111 in FIG. 256, etc.) controls the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is possible to perform post-stop motion control (swing control) to operate the game, and execute the post-stop motion control when a predetermined condition (elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) is satisfied in the pseudo game. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, game media (medals) or games are played according to the pattern of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). A main game that can give media (medals) data, and a game media (medals) or game that corresponds to the pattern form of multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation. It is possible to execute a pseudo game that does not provide media (medal) data. Then, it is possible to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) in which the reels that have been stopped are operated by the stop control after the stop operation, and a predetermined condition (the elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) can be executed in the pseudo game. It is configured to execute post-stop operation control (oscillation control) when the condition is satisfied. As a result, through post-stop motion control (swing control), it is possible to make the player recognize that the game currently being played is a pseudo game, and it is possible for the player to misunderstand the game as the main game. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

In the eighth embodiment, the pseudo game has been described as being able to be executed when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) to the 1G continuous lottery (AT additional lottery) is won. The conditions for generating a pseudo game are not limited to winning the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery) or the 1G continuous lottery (AT additional lottery), but also provide the player with benefits (for example, benefits that are advantageous to the player). When it is decided to grant a gaming state (a right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state), it is possible to cause a pseudo game to occur as appropriate. For example, a pseudo game may be generated when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, or a pseudo game may be generated when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. As the specific winning combination, for example, a winning combination that is sure to transition to an advantageous state or a winning combination (rare winning combination) that can be won with a high probability of transitioning to an advantageous state can be adopted. As the specific symbol combination, for example, a symbol combination that will ensure a transition to an advantageous state or a symbol combination that can lead to a winning transition to an advantageous state with a high probability can be adopted. As the advantageous state, it is possible to appropriately adopt the gaming state as described in the first embodiment, and in addition to the pseudo-bonus (AT state), for example, a bonus state can be mentioned. Furthermore, when it is determined that the advantageous section is adopted as an advantageous state and the non-advantageous section is to be transferred to the advantageous section (if the advantageous section transition lottery is won), a pseudo game may be executed.

In addition, if it is decided to grant the above rights in one unit game (the period from the start to the end of one main process (see Figure 23)) (for example, if you win the AT lottery) The pseudo game may be executed in the unit game (winning game), or may be executed in a unit game a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the unit game (winning game). For example, if it is decided to generate a pseudo game based on the result of an internal lottery triggered by the operation of the start lever 7, the pseudo game may be executed immediately after the decision, or the pseudo game may be executed immediately after the decision is made. A pseudo game may be executed using the operation of the start lever 7 in a unit game a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the winning unit game (winning game). In addition, when it is decided to generate a pseudo game based on a specific symbol combination being stopped and displayed, the start lever 7 operation in the next unit game after the unit game (winning game) in which the decision was made is made. A pseudo game may be executed as a trigger, or a pseudo game may be executed using the start lever 7 operation in a unit game a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) after the unit game (winning game) in which the decision was made. It may also be done. In these cases, the pseudo game may be executed even if the start lever 7 is not operated. If a pseudo game is not executed in a winning game, but a pseudo game is executed in a unit game after the winning game, a precursor performance that suggests a transition to an advantageous state is performed between the winning game and the execution of the pseudo game. (For example, the AT precursor effect described in the first embodiment) may be executed. As a result, for example, in a situation where it is decided to generate a pseudo game based on the stop display of a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols), if the pseudo game is immediately performed, It is possible to have variations in the start timing of a pseudo game, such as when a pseudo game is performed after one game, when a pseudo game is performed after two games, when a pseudo game is performed after three games, etc. It is possible to create a feeling of anticipation in the players as to when the game will be played.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, it has been explained that the pseudo game is executed when the start lever 7 is operated (before the first stop operation is performed). The timing to execute the pseudo game is not particularly limited, and may be when the start lever 7 is operated (before the first stop operation is performed) or when the first stop operation is performed (before the second stop operation is performed). (before the stop operation is performed), when the second stop operation is performed (before the third stop operation is performed), or when the third stop operation is performed ( (before the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game). In addition, after the start lever 7 is operated, on the condition that the stop button 8 is operated before the rotational speed of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches the constant rotational speed, the transition to a pseudo game may be made. good. That is, if the stop button 8 is operated before the rotational speed of all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches the constant rotational speed, the operation of the stop button 8 is treated as a first stop operation for a pseudo game. If the stop button 8 is operated after the rotational speed of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches the constant rotational speed, the operation of the stop button 8 will be treated as the first stop operation for the main game. Good too.

In addition, although it has been explained above that a pseudo game is generated when it is decided to grant a right that allows the occurrence of an advantageous state, a lottery (pseudo game) is also used to determine whether or not to generate a pseudo game. A game generation lottery) may be performed, and if the pseudo game generation lottery is won, a pseudo game may be generated and the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state may be granted. In this case, for example, instead of the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery), a pseudo game generation lottery may be performed. For example, it is possible to configure so that the result of the pseudo game occurrence lottery (win or non-win) is determined based on the above-mentioned advantageous section winning time sub-flag or advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the post-stop motion control (swing control) is executed when a predetermined condition (the elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) is satisfied in the pseudo game. As the post-stop operation control (oscillation control), it is possible to employ excitation control based on the excitation pattern I described above. The post-stop operation control (oscillation control) is not particularly limited as long as it is a control that causes the reel 3 to perform some operation within a range of less than 500 ms, and any conditions may be appropriately adopted as the predetermined conditions. be. That is, whenever the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for oscillation, the excitation pattern is switched to another excitation pattern before the retention time of one excitation pattern reaches 500ms (the retention time of one excitation pattern is less than 500ms). ) is desirable. The switching of the excitation pattern (change in phase signal) is control for physically changing the speed of the drum. Even if the excitation pattern is switched, if the switching is not used to physically change the speed of the drum, or if the switching does not physically change the speed of the drum. If it is recognized that there is an artificial obstruction, it may be treated as if the switching has not been performed. Note that when the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for rocking, the reel 3 moves slightly, but in this specification, the state of the reel 3 at this time is referred to as "temporary stop" or "stop". There is something to express.

When a game is played using physical medals in the Pachislot machine 1, the main game is played according to the pattern of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. This is a game in which game media (medals) can be awarded, and the pseudo game is a game in which game media corresponding to the pattern form of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are awarded when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation. This is a game that does not award (medals). On the other hand, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is the medalless gaming machine described in the first embodiment, the main game is to display symbols on a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game that can give game media (medals) data according to the mode, and the pseudo game is a game in which the pattern mode of multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is changed when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. This is a game that does not provide corresponding game media (medals) data. The gaming media (medals) data is data corresponding to the gaming value held by the player, and as explained in the first embodiment, is transmitted electromagnetically (or in a manner that the player cannot directly contact the gaming value). It is something that is managed.

(C-2) The gaming machine according to (C-1) above,
It is possible to perform a spinning performance (reel performance) in which the reel is stopped without using stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means is capable of not executing the post-stop motion control in the spinning reel performance, while executing the post-stop motion control in the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the reel effect (reel effect) in which the reels are stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation (even if the stop operation is not detected by the player) is performed. It is possible to perform this, and the configuration is such that the post-stop motion control (swing control) is not executed in the spinning drum performance (reel performance). In the reel performance, the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform a stop operation, so there is a possibility that the player may misinterpret the reel performance as the main game. relatively low. By not executing the post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a reel production, it is possible to highlight the post-stop motion control (swing control) in the pseudo game. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, the reel performance (reel performance) has been described as one in which the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform a stop operation. As the trigger for stopping the reels in the spinning performance (reel performance), it is possible to appropriately adopt a trigger other than the stop operation by the player. For example, the reels may be stopped (automatically) when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reels started rotating, or the operation parts (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) used for stopping operations in the main game may be used. ) The reels may be stopped when an operation unit other than the start lever 7 (for example, the start lever 7 or the bet button) is operated. A performance that stops the reels in this manner (without using the stop button 8) can be called a spinning performance (reel performance). In the spinning reel performance (reel performance), it is desirable not to perform the post-stop motion control (swing control), but it is also possible to perform the post-stop motion control (swing control).

(C-3) The gaming machine of (C-1) or (C-2) above,
The reel control means is capable of executing, as the post-stop operation control, swing control in which the reel stopped by the post-stop operation stop control swings at a predetermined period.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, as the post-stop operation control (swing control), it is possible to execute swing control that swings the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation at a predetermined period. It is composed of Through such rocking control, it is possible to realize a novel performance that draws players' attention to the period of rocking, and it also effectively prevents players from mistaking a pseudo game as the main game. can do.

The period of the oscillation is not particularly limited, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which oscillation control is performed such that a predetermined oscillation pattern is repeated, with the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ described above as one period. It is possible. However, the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) is not limited to control in which the reels are operated periodically, but may be control in which the reels are operated non-periodically. For example, when a first period of time has elapsed since the first post-stop motion control (oscillation control) was performed, the second post-stop motion control (oscillation control) is performed, and the second post-stop motion control (oscillation control) is performed. When the third post-stop operation control (oscillation control) is performed when the second time has elapsed after the (oscillation control) was performed, the first time and the second time are different. Good too. For example, excitation pattern I is held for a time T ₁ (e.g., 3 interrupt times), excitation pattern II is held for a time T ₂ (e.g., 300 interrupt times), and then excitation pattern I ( Alternatively, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the excitation pattern III (different from the excitation pattern I and the excitation pattern II) is held for the time T ₃ (for example, 5 interrupt times). After time T ₃ (e.g., 5 interrupt times) has elapsed, excitation pattern II may be held for time T ₂ (e.g., 300 interrupt times), or excitation pattern II (or excitation pattern I, excitation pattern II, and excitation pattern IV which is different from excitation pattern III) may be maintained for a time T ₄ (for example, 200 interrupt times).

(C-4) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-3) above,
By executing the post-stop operation control, the reel control means can repeatedly cause a state in which the reel that has been stopped by the post-stop operation stop control to operate and a state in which the operation is interrupted. ,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, by executing the post-stop operation control (oscillation control), the state in which the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation operates and the state in which the operation is interrupted can be changed. It is configured so that it can be generated repeatedly. This makes it possible to prevent the player from mistaking a pseudo game as the main game through the movement of the reels, and by providing a period during which the movement is interrupted, the reels are stopped (temporary stop). It is possible to make the player clearly aware of the fact that the reel has stopped (temporarily stopped) or not, and to avoid confusion for the player due to not knowing whether the reel has stopped (temporarily stopped) or not.

A state in which the operation of the reel is interrupted can be generated by holding one excitation pattern for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period can be, for example, about 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). However, the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) is not limited to generating a state in which the reel operation is interrupted, and may be one that causes the reel operation (for example, slight vibration) to continue.

(C-5) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-4) above,
The reel control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 258, etc.)
After the plurality of reels are stopped in the pseudo game, one of the plurality of reels is started to rotate for the main game, and further, the rotation start timing of the one reel is It is possible to start the rotation of the other reels at a late timing,
After the rotation of the one reel is started, it is possible to continue the post-stop operation control for the other reel until the rotation of the other reel is started.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, after the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the pseudo game, the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped for the main game. It is possible to start the rotation of one of the reels and to start the rotation of the other reel at a later timing than the rotation start timing of the one reel. After the rotation of the one reel is started, the post-stop operation control (swing control) for the other reel can be continued until the rotation of the other reel is started. ing. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a pseudo game has been played even after the rotation of the one reel has started, and prevents the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game. It can be effectively prevented.

However, as explained in the eighth embodiment, after the rotation of one reel is started until the rotation of the other reel is started, the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) for the other reel is not performed. You can also choose not to do it. For example, among multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), at the timing when one reel starts rotating due to random delay processing (when the first reel starts rotating), all The post-stop operation control (oscillation control) for the reel may be terminated. In the random delay process, the order in which the rotation of each reel starts is not particularly limited, and may be determined randomly or in a predetermined order (for example, left reel 3L → middle reel 3C → right reel 3R), the rotation may be started. To start the rotation of each reel in a predetermined order, for example, first set the left reel acceleration timer, and when the left reel acceleration timer reaches 0, start the rotation of the left reel 3L. , Then, set the middle reel acceleration timer, and when the middle reel acceleration timer reaches 0, start the rotation of the middle reel 3C, then set the right reel acceleration timer, and start the rotation of the middle reel 3C when the middle reel acceleration timer reaches 0. The rotation of the right reel 3R may be started when the number reaches 0.

(C-6) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-5) above,
The reel control means includes:
One of the reels among the plurality of reels can be stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation, while the other reel among the plurality of reels can be stopped using the stop control after the stop operation. and
While not executing the post-stop operation control for the one reel, it is possible to execute the post-stop operation control for the other reels;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped without using stop control after the stop operation, while the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3R) are stopped without using the stop control. , 3C, 3R) can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. Then, while the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) is not executed for the one reel, it is possible to execute the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) for the other reels. It is configured. If the reels are stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation, there is a possibility that the player will misinterpret the stop of the reels as the main game because the stop operation was not performed when the reels were stopped. relatively low. In such a case, by not executing the after-stop operation control (oscillation control), the after-stop operation control (oscillation control) can be highlighted when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game.

The timing at which the one reel is stopped and the timing at which the other reel is stopped may occur at any time. That is, after one reel among the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation, the other reel among the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped. The reel may be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, or one reel among the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) may be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and then the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) may be stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation. Further, the number of reels that are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation and the number of reels that are stopped not by the stop control after the stop operation are not particularly limited. For example, the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 1, the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 2, or the number of reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 2. The number of reels may be set to 2, and the number of reels that are stopped without the stop control after the stop operation may be set to 1.

For example, after the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) and the second stop reel (e.g., middle reel 3C) is automatically stopped, the third stop reel (e.g., , right reel 3R), when the first stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) and second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) are stopped, these reels 3 are not swung; When the third stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) stops, the reel 3 may be oscillated. Further, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, left reel 3L) is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, the rotation of the second stop reel (for example, middle reel 3C) and the third stop reel (for example, right reel 3L) is stopped. 3R), when the first stop reel (e.g. left reel 3L) stops, the reel 3 is oscillated, while the second stop reel (e.g. middle reel 3C) and the second stop reel (e.g. middle reel 3C) are rotated. When the three stop reels (for example, the right reel 3R) are stopped, these reels 3 may not be oscillated.

When the reels are stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, it is possible to appropriately adopt a trigger other than the player's stop operation as the trigger for stopping the reels. For example, the reels may be stopped (automatically) when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the reels started rotating, or the operation parts (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) used for stopping operations in the main game may be used. ) The reels may be stopped when an operation unit other than the start lever 7 (for example, the start lever 7 or the bet button) is operated. When stopping the reels in this manner (without using the stop button 8), it is preferable not to perform post-stop motion control (swing control), but it is preferable to perform post-stop motion control (swing control). You can also do it.

(C-7) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-6) above,
Pseudo game determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 250) capable of determining to execute the pseudo game;
Predetermined variables that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during a predetermined period (advantageous period) (value of advantageous period game number counter, value of control game number counter, value of advantageous period payout number counter, a predetermined period ending means capable of ending the predetermined period when the value of the payout number counter) satisfies a specific condition (operating condition of the limiter);
The pseudo game determining means is capable of determining to execute the pseudo game in the predetermined period, and also determines that the predetermined variable is to be executed during a specific period (quasi-limit processing (game count)) before the predetermined variable satisfies the specific condition. ) or the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated), it is not decided to execute the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, predetermined variables (the value of the advantageous period game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, etc.) that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during the predetermined period (advantageous period) It is possible to end a predetermined period (advantageous section) when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter) satisfy a specific condition (limiter operating condition). While it is possible to decide to execute a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period), it is also possible to determine the execution of a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period), and also to determine the execution of a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period). , the value of the control payout number counter) satisfies a specific condition (a period after semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated), a pseudo game is executed. It is configured so that it does not decide to do so. When a pseudo-gaming is executed, it is thought that it will create a sense of expectation in the player, but during a specific period (the period after the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated). By not executing the pseudo-game, it is possible to suppress the feeling of anticipation from being excessively aroused.

The specific period is not limited to the period after the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, but the pseudo-gaming can be executed in any period before the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section). It is possible to configure the system so that it does not decide to do so. Examples of the specific period include a period in which the value of the advantageous section game number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 1200), a period in which the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 1920), etc. It may also be possible to adopt As a result, if the remaining number of games until the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section) becomes less than the predetermined number, or if the number of remaining payouts until the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section) becomes less than the predetermined number. In this case, it is possible to prevent the pseudo game from being executed. Alternatively, when MY described in the first embodiment becomes a predetermined number or more, the pseudo game may not be executed. Note that the predetermined period is not limited to an advantageous section, but may be a non-advantageous section. Further, when the predetermined period is an advantageous section, the advantageous section may be an effect section (advantageous section/normal game) or an increase section (advantageous section/pseudo bonus). Furthermore, any mode within the performance section (advantageous section/normal game) may be adopted as the predetermined period.

(C-8) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-7) above,
a predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) by the player;
a display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying an image (“hit the lever” image) for prompting the player to perform the predetermined operation;
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means, it is possible to start the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to display an image (“hit the lever” image) for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7). It is configured such that a pseudo game can be started when an operation (operation of the start lever 7) is detected. This allows the player to participate in the simulated game according to his/her own will, and increases the player's interest in the simulated game.

In the eighth embodiment, in a performance in which a pseudo game is performed after a reel performance is performed (lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "6"), a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is performed after the reel performance ends. It has been explained that the game shifts to a pseudo-game (the rotation for the pseudo-game is started) when the game is turned on. In this way, the predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) can be employed as an opportunity to shift from reel performance to pseudo game. However, the scene in which the game shifts to a pseudo game by a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is not limited to this example. For example, in the case where a pseudo game is played again after a pseudo game has been performed (the pseudo game is repeated multiple times), the next pseudo game is triggered by a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation). It is also possible to migrate.

An example of a case in which a pseudo game is repeatedly performed multiple times is a case in which a performance related to an extension (additional addition) of the AT state is performed. For example, in a situation where it has been decided that the AT state will be added 200 games, an image showing that the "red 7" symbols are aligned in the first pseudo game and that the AT state is added 100 games is displayed, and 2 In the second pseudo-game, the "Red 7" symbols are aligned and an image is displayed indicating that the AT status has been added by 100 games (200 games in total), and in the third pseudo-game, the "Red 7" symbols are not aligned and the AT condition is added. It is possible to adopt an effect that displays an image indicating that no more state additions occur (the number of additional games ends after 200 games). In this production, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in one pseudo game (for example, "Red 7" symbols are aligned), the AT state is added a predetermined number of games (or the 1G continuous stock is In addition to informing (suggesting) that a predetermined number of symbols have been awarded) and allowing the transition to the next pseudo game, if a specific symbol combination is not stopped and displayed in one pseudo game (for example, if the "Red 7" symbol is If the AT status is not added), it will be announced (suggested) that no more AT status additions will be made (or no more 1G continuous stock will be given), and the game will not move on to the next pseudo game. It can be configured to (end the performance). Thereby, it is possible to notify (suggest) the number of additional games (or the number of 1G consecutive stocks) acquired to the player through the pseudo game. In addition, although it has been explained above that the pseudo game is repeated multiple times, a spinning performance (reel performance) may be performed instead of at least one of the pseudo games of the plurality of times. .

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, the normal operation of the start lever 7 (see step S50 in FIG. 25) is A pseudo game is automatically started without requiring a separate predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) (by executing the acceleration process for lock effect (see step S1024 in FIG. 251), reels 3L, 3C, 3R (starts rotation). However, as will be explained in the ninth embodiment, even in this case, the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is adopted as a condition for starting the pseudo game, and A pseudo game may be started upon the execution of the above operation. It is also possible to employ such a scene as the scene in which the predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) shifts to the pseudo game.

In addition, if the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) for transitioning to the pseudo game is not performed, the transition to the pseudo game may be triggered by the elapse of a predetermined waiting time, or the pseudo game may be shifted to the pseudo game in the first place. It is also possible to not allow the transition to play. Further, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and it is possible to appropriately employ the operation of any operation section (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.).

(C-9) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-8) above,
It is possible to perform a spinning performance (reel performance) in which the reel is stopped without using stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means includes:
A reel control means for a spinning drum performance that is capable of stopping the plurality of reels as the spinning drum performance without using stop control after the stop operation;
As the pseudo game, after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels stopped by the spinning reel control means, the at least one reel is controlled by the stop control after the stop operation. A pseudo game reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 256) that can be stopped,
The post-stop operation control is not performed on the plurality of reels stopped by the spinning reel control means, while the at least one reel stopped by the pseudo game reel control means It is possible to perform the post-stop operation control;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, as a reel effect, a plurality of reels ( It is possible to stop the reels (3L, 3C, 3R), and as a pseudo game, it is possible to stop at least one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the spinning performance (reel performance). After starting the rotation of the reels, it is possible to stop the at least one reel by a stop control after a stop operation. Then, while the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed for the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that have been stopped in the spinning performance (reel performance), at least one of the reels that have been stopped in the pseudo game is The reel is configured to be able to perform post-stop operation control (oscillation control). In the reel performance, the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform a stop operation, so there is a possibility that the player may misinterpret the reel performance as the main game. relatively low. By not executing the post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a reel production, it is possible to highlight the post-stop motion control (swing control) in the pseudo game. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, in a performance in which a pseudo game is performed after a reel performance (lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "6"), in the pseudo game, multiple The explanation has been made assuming that among the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), one reel starts rotating, and then the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels that rotate and stop in the pseudo game is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or three (all reels). In this specification, a "pseudo game" is not limited to a lock performance in which all reels can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation, but refers to a lock performance in which there is at least one reel that can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation. is widely referred to as a "pseudo game". In the pseudo game, the number of rotating reels and the number of reels that can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be the same or different. For example, a lock effect in which only one reel rotates and that one reel can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation can be called a pseudo game, and all reels rotate and at least one reel A lock performance that can be stopped by a stop control after a stop operation can also be called a pseudo game. In addition, in the pseudo game, the rotation of the reels may be less than one rotation (one round), or may be rotation of several symbols (for example, frame feeding). In this way, when a pseudo game is performed after a spinning drum performance (reel performance), it is desirable not to perform post-stop operation control (swing control) in the spinning drum performance (reel performance). Post-stop operation control (swing control) may also be executed. In addition, when a pseudo game is performed after a spinning drum performance is performed, the spinning drum performance may include a reel performance or may not include a reel performance (mere freeze). .

(C-10) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-9) above,
It is possible to perform a spinning performance (reel performance) in which the reel is stopped without using stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means includes:
As the pseudo game, a pseudo game reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 254) capable of stopping the plurality of reels by the stop control after the stop operation;
As the reel performance, after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels stopped by the pseudo game reel control means, the at least one reel is controlled to stop after the stop operation. A reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process in FIG. 255) for the reel performance that can be stopped without depending on the reel,
The post-stop operation control is executed on the plurality of reels that have been stopped by the pseudo game reel control means, and the at least one reel that has been stopped by the spinning reel control means is also stopped. It is possible to perform post-motion control,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, as a pseudo game, it is possible to stop a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) by stop control after a stop operation, and also to perform a spinning performance (reels As a performance), after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that have been stopped in the pseudo game, the at least one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is possible to cause the game to stop (even if a stopping operation by the player is not detected). Then, a post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed for the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that have been stopped in the pseudo game, and at least one reel that has been stopped in the spinning performance (reel performance) is The structure is such that post-stop operation control (oscillation control) can also be performed for the vehicle. In the reel performance, the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform a stop operation, so there is a small possibility that the player will misinterpret the reel performance as the main game. This may seem low, but if a reel performance is performed following a pseudo-game, the reel performance is considered to be integrated with the pseudo-game, and the player cannot play the main game. It can be said that there is a possibility of misunderstanding. By performing post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a reel performance, it is possible to effectively prevent players from mistaking the percussion performance (reel performance) as the main game. It can be prevented.

In the eighth embodiment, in a performance in which a reel performance is performed after a pseudo game is performed (lock performance corresponding to lock performance number "5"), in a spinning performance (reel performance), multiple The explanation has been made assuming that after the rotation of one reel among the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is started, the one reel is stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels that rotate and stop in the spinning drum production (reel production) is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or three (all reels). Good too. In this specification, a "reel effect" is not limited to a lock effect in which all reels can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation, and at least one reel can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation. There are two types of rock performances that are widely referred to as ``reel performances.'' In the reel production, the number of rotating reels is the same as the number of reels that can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation. That is, a lock effect in which all rotating reels can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation can be called a reel effect. On the other hand, a lock effect in which at least one of the rotating reels can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation can be called a pseudo game. In addition, in the reel performance, the rotation of the reel may be less than one rotation (one round), or may be rotation for several symbols (for example, frame feeding). In this way, when a spinning drum performance (reel performance) is performed after a pseudo game is performed, it is desirable to perform post-stop operation control (swing control) in the spinning drum performance (reel performance). The post-stop operation control (oscillation control) may not be executed.

(C-11) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-10) above,
An image (“Aim for 7” effect image 1100 ), a display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying
The specific symbol combination is such that the symbol on one of the plurality of reels is a specific symbol (a “red 7” symbol);
The reel control means executes the post-stop operation control so that the specific symbol can be displayed on the one reel when the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the stop operation is performed so that a specific symbol combination (a set of "Red 7" symbols) can be stopped and displayed as a symbol pattern on a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R). It is possible to display an image (“Aim for 7” effect image 1100) to encourage the player to take action, and a specific symbol combination (“Red 7” symbols) can be displayed on multiple reels (Reel 3L, The symbol on one of the reels (3C, 3R) is a specific symbol ("Red 7" symbol). Then, in the pseudo game, when the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the post-stop operation control (swing control ) is configured so that it can be executed. As a result, through operation control after stopping (swing control), it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game, and to prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game. It is possible to show the player the symbols constituting the "7" symbol set), and it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player through the specific symbol (the "red 7" symbol).

As described in the eighth embodiment, by executing the post-stop operation control (oscillation control), one reel can be oscillated (vibrated) or stopped almost completely. As a result, when the reel is located at the center of vibration or when the reel is almost completely stopped, the reel can move the symbol at a predetermined position (on the effective line) by the stop control after the stop operation. The same symbol (for example, "Red 7" symbol) as the symbol existing at a predetermined position (on the active line) (for example, see FIG. 246(d)) when stopped (for example, see step S1069 in FIG. 254). Is possible. During the period when the post-stop motion control (oscillation control) is being executed, the time when the symbol (for example, the "Red 7" symbol) is in a predetermined position (on the active line), other symbols are in the predetermined position (on the active line). (on the line) compared to the time it exists on the line. In the eighth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, there is only one effective line, the "center line." Note that as the specific symbol combination, it is possible to adopt any symbol combination as appropriate, and in addition to the "Red 7" symbol arrangement, for example, the "BAR" symbol arrangement described in the ninth embodiment may also be used. good. Further, the specific symbol combination is not limited to a combination of the same symbols, and may include different symbols. Furthermore, as the specific symbol, any symbol such as the "BAR" symbol in addition to the "Red 7" symbol may be appropriately employed.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, as the AT state, for example, a pseudo BB (big bonus) and a pseudo RB (regular bonus) can be adopted. Then, if it is decided to shift to pseudo BB, the first symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, and if it is decided to shift to pseudo RB, In this case, a second symbol combination (for example, a set of "BAR" symbols) may be stopped and displayed in a pseudo game. At that time, if it is decided to shift to pseudo BB, the above-mentioned "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is displayed, and if it is decided to shift to pseudo RB, the ninth embodiment is displayed. It is also possible to display an effect image of "Aim for the BAR" to be explained.

Furthermore, when a set of "Red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game, a pseudo BB effect is performed, and when a set of "BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game, a pseudo RB effect is performed. You can. In the pseudo BB performance, a pseudo BB suggestion image (an image that suggests that it has been decided to shift to pseudo BB) is displayed on the main display device 210, and in the pseudo RB production, a pseudo RB suggestion image (an image that suggests that it has been decided to shift to pseudo RB) is displayed on the main display device 210. An image suggesting that the decision has been made is displayed on the main display device 210. By transmitting information (stop position information) indicating the symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo game from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 200 can perform pseudo BB performance and pseudo RB performance. Can be done.

Further, as explained in the eighth embodiment, in the pseudo game, as in the main game, control may be performed to stop each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. . In this case, for example, even if the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbols will not line up. If the "Red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed on at least one reel because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, then the "Red 7" symbol is It may be configured such that the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed so that the "red 7" symbol is aligned on a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R).

In addition, the stop control after the stop operation when the "Red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed in the pseudo game may be the same stop control after the stop operation as the stop control after the main game, or the stop control after the stop operation in the main game may be the same as the stop control after the stop operation in the main game. The post-stop control may be different from the post-stop control. For example, assume that a Red 7 combination (for example, Red 7 Replay) is provided as an internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the Red 7 combination is "Red 7-Red 7-Red 7". Then, when the Red 7 combination is determined as an internal winning combination, in the main game, the "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and the "Red 7" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. The symbols are stopped and displayed, and the stop control is performed after the stop operation so that the "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. However, if the Red 7 combination is not determined as an internal winning combination, In the main game, the "Replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "Replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "Red 7" symbol is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. It is assumed that it is possible to perform stop control after a stop operation so that the stop display is displayed. The same stop control after the stop operation as in the main game may also be performed in the pseudo game. As a result, for example, an image ("Aim for 7" effect image 1100) is displayed to prompt the player to perform a stop operation so that a specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbols aligned) can be stopped and displayed. In the production ("Aim for Red 7" production), when the player performs a stop operation aiming at the "Red 7" symbol in the order of right reel 3R → middle reel 3C → left reel 3L, when the player performs a stop operation aiming at the "red 7" symbol, the middle row of right reel 3R After the stop operation, the "Red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the area, the "Replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "Replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. It is also possible to perform control.

Further, as described in the eighth embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the pseudo game may be greater than the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") in the main game. For example, in a pseudo game, 20-frame control may be performed (after a stop operation is performed, the reels are rotated for a maximum of 20 symbols and then stopped). In this case, the symbol that is stopped and displayed when the "red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed in the pseudo game may be the same symbol that is stopped and displayed when the small winning combination is missed in the main game. For example, as described in the first embodiment, a specific winning combination (for example, watermelon) may be determined as the internal winning combination, and the specific winning combination may be the player's stopping operation mode (stopping operation timing may be used). However, the number of medals awarded will vary depending on the pressing order or a combination of these (for example, 8 medals if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct)). (If it is inappropriate (incorrect answer), one card will be paid or no card will be paid). Then, when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct) in the main game, the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel The "Watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of 3C, and the "Watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R, but the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect answer) (I missed the watermelon). In this case, the "Watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "Watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "Replay" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. shall be carried out. If the "Red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, it will stop at the same combination of symbols as the combination of symbols that would be stopped and displayed if the small role is missed in the main game (missing small role). It may also be displayed. There is no particular limitation on the number of missed small winnings, and in addition to watermelon, it is possible to appropriately adopt a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when a small winning combination such as a bell is missed.

Furthermore, as described above, in the present invention, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate (continue) a pseudo game (pseudo game occurrence lottery), and when the pseudo game occurrence lottery is won, the pseudo game It is also possible to allow the game to occur (continue) and to grant the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state. In addition, in the case where a pseudo game is played again after a pseudo game has been performed (the pseudo game is repeated multiple times), when a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is performed, the next pseudo game is started. It is also possible to make a transition, and an example of a case where a pseudo game is repeatedly performed multiple times is a case where an effect related to an extension (additional addition) of the AT state is performed. It is also possible to combine these configurations as follows.

For example, if a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is triggered to transition to a pseudo-game, and a specific symbol combination (a set of "red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game, the AT state will be extended (additional). (displaying an image showing the number of add-on games), and then an image (“hit the lever” image) to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is displayed, and the predetermined operation ( When the start lever 7 is operated), the game is shifted to a pseudo game. It is possible to configure the pseudo game to be played repeatedly in this manner. Here, if a specific symbol combination (a set of "red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in one pseudo game, it is possible to move on to the next pseudo game (as a result of the first pseudo game, The AT state is extended (added)) On the other hand, if a specific symbol combination (the "Red 7" symbols) is not stopped and displayed in one pseudo game, the pseudo game ends (the first pseudo game As a result of the game, the AT state will not be extended (additional)), and after the first pseudo game is played, the next pseudo game will be played or not (specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbol) A lottery (pseudo game generation lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the combination (matching) is stopped and displayed, and if the pseudo game generation lottery is won, a specific symbol combination ("Red 7 It may be configured such that it is possible to stop displaying "Symbols Aligned" and to move on to the next pseudo game. As a result, as long as the pseudo game generation lottery (pseudo game continuation lottery) is won, the pseudo game will be played repeatedly and the AT state will be extended (additional). As mentioned above, the playing period in the AT state is managed by the number of games, number of sets, number of payouts, difference number of sheets, number of navigations, etc., and correspondingly, the AT state is extended (additional ), the number of games, number of sets, number of payouts, differential number management, number of navigations, etc. are added.

The conditions for extending the AT state (additional addition) are not limited to the fact that a specific symbol combination (the "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, but any condition is met in the pseudo game. It is possible to configure the AT state to be extended (additional) in some cases. For example, it is assumed that the pseudo game is played as one set of five times, and in each pseudo game, the correct pressing order is set as the order of stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Similar to the pseudo-game proceeding stop button described in the ninth embodiment, the order in which the correct answers are pressed can be determined by lottery in each pseudo-game. When one set of pseudo-games is started, the player plays the pseudo-games five times with the aim of performing the stop operation in the correct pressing order. While the pseudo game is played five times, the AT state is extended (additional) every time the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order (up to five times). After the pseudo-game has been played five times, the pseudo-game is ended and the game shifts to the main game. Such a configuration can be adopted.

In addition, if the stop operation is performed at least once in the correct pressing order in the first set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games), the transition to the next set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games) will occur. is possible (as a result of the one set of pseudo games, the AT state is extended (added)), while it is possible to press the correct answer even once in one set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games). If the stop operation is not performed, the game ends with the pseudo-game of the set (5 pseudo-games) (as a result of the pseudo-game of the first set, the AT state is not extended (additional). ). Alternatively, while the five pseudo games constituting one set are being played, if the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order in one of the five pseudo games, the next pseudo game It is possible to move on to the game (as a result of the first pseudo game, the AT state is extended (additional)), but if the stop operation is not performed in the correct pressing order in the first pseudo game, (Even if all 5 pseudo games have not been consumed, at that point) the game will end with the pseudo game in question (the AT state will not be extended (added) as a result of the 1 pseudo game). You can also do this. In addition, if the AT state is extended (additional) due to the stop operation being performed in the correct pressing order, basically the predetermined number of games will be added, but if the AT state is extended (additional) due to the stop operation being performed in the correct pressing order, If the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the number of games may be increased by more than the predetermined number of games. Further, the number of additional games may be configured to increase in stages as the number of consecutive pseudo games in which stop operations are performed in the correct pressing order (number of successive successes) increases.

When adopting a mode (push order guessing) in which the AT state is extended (additional) due to the stop operation being performed in the correct push order as described above, if you try to perform such push order guessing in the main game. Then, it is necessary to create new data for symbol combinations for correct pressing order, symbol combinations for incorrect pressing order, symbol combinations for incorrect pressing, etc., and reel arrangement for these symbol combinations. It is necessary to create new data for reel stop control, reel stop control, etc., and the amount of data increases. In this regard, when performing such push order guessing in a pseudo game, it is not limited to symbol combinations that correspond to internal winning combinations as in the main game, but it is possible to freely stop any symbol combination. Since this is possible, pressing order guessing can be realized without increasing the amount of data. In addition, it is possible to use the saved data capacity to add new gameplay features and increase interest.

The AT state extension (additional addition) as explained above can be performed when a pseudo game is performed in the AT state. Hereinafter, such an AT state will be explained using a specific example.

In this example, the states in which the player plays the game are roughly divided into an AT game, which is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a normal game, which is a normal gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous compared to the AT game. A transition from a normal game to an AT game occurs when the number of games played after the end of the AT game reaches the ceiling number of games (maximum number of ceiling games completed), when a guaranteed role is won (guaranteed role won), or when a specific situation occurs in the main CZ state. This is triggered by the decision of the reel action (CZ success).

The "determined combination" means a combination in which it is determined that an AT game will be started, and here it refers to "Cherry Rip," "Strong Cherry Rip," and "Strong Bell." When shifting from a normal game to an AT game due to winning a confirmed role, first, based on winning the confirmed role, the basic number of continuations of the AT game is given (150 is added to the difference number counter for AT management). . After that, a reel action (special reel action) is determined from among multiple types of reel actions according to the type of confirmed role, and the number of additional continuations of AT games is given according to the determined reel action (AT management difference). 300, 400 or 500 will be added to the number of sheets counter. Note that the reel action is the spinning drum performance (reel performance) described above.

In addition, in the normal game, "Strong Chance Slip" (rare role) is determined as the internal winning combination, and if you win either "Special Rip A1-6" or "Special Rip B" (Strong Chance Slip established), the main Under the control of the CPU 101, the performance game state shifts from the "normal game state" to the "main CZ state 1", and remains in the main CZ state for eight games. Then, when the production game state is "Main CZ State 1" or "Main CZ State 2" to which it will change after, a specific reel action is determined and executed, it becomes a CZ success, and the normal game changes to the AT game. It is scheduled to be moved.

When transitioning to AT gaming, the player will be notified of the stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player until the value of the AT management differential number counter becomes 0 or less (the number of ATs has been exhausted), and the game will be stopped according to the notification. By performing operations, the player can increase the number of medals. Specifically, during AT, if the "press order minor combinations" of "middle left and right bell", "middle right left bell", "right left middle bell", and "right middle left bell" are determined as internal winning combinations, The stop operation order that results in the payout of seven medals is notified.

Here, as a state during AT gaming, a pseudo-probability variable state is provided in which the number of ATs (value of the AT management differential number counter) can be added. Specifically, in an AT game, when one of "Bell Lips 1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination and the transition lottery in a pseudo-probable variable state is won, a specific reel action is executed, and the pseudo-probable variable is controlled by the main CPU 101. transition to state. In this pseudo probability variable state, the number of pseudo games when the game start lock is executed once is determined, and the determined number of pseudo games can be played. In addition, when determining the number of pseudo games, it is possible to determine a plurality of times of pseudo games.

Here, the pseudo game includes an operation on the locked bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) at the start of the game (pseudo insertion operation), and an operation on the start lever (start lever 7) (pseudo start operation). The progress is controlled by determining the pseudo internal winning combination and operating the stop buttons (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) (pseudo stop operation), and the game is played as if it were a normal game (main game). Similarly, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the game is progressing. Note that the determination of the pseudo internal winning combination is performed based on the pseudo starting operation, similar to the determination of the internal winning combination in the normal game.

Then, in the pseudo-probability variable state, an additional lottery is performed based on the determined internal winning combination for the number of ATs (the value of the difference number counter for AT management), and an additional lottery is performed for the number of ATs (value of the AT management difference counter) based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination An additional lottery will be performed for the value of the AT management differential number counter). The determination of the pseudo internal winning combination is not limited to the manner in which it is performed based on a pseudo start operation, but may be performed based on, for example, a pseudo insertion operation or a pseudo stop operation (especially a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). You can also use it as Accordingly, the timing at which the additional lottery for the number of ATs is performed is not limited to the timing at which the pseudo start operation is performed, but also when the pseudo input operation or the pseudo stop operation (especially the pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation) is performed. It may be the timing when the request is made. Additionally, at the timing when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped (pseudo-stopped) in the pseudo-game (timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the pseudo-internal winning combination is stopped and displayed), an additional lottery for the number of ATs may be performed. good. In this case, an additional lottery for the number of ATs may be performed based on the symbol combination (pseudo symbol combination) displayed by the pseudo stop. When the additional lottery is performed, the lottery result (the number of ATs) is added to the value of the AT management differential number counter.

In addition, the pseudo-probable variable states include "pseudo-probable variable state 1" (first mode) and "pseudo-probable variable state 1" (first mode), in which a relatively larger number of pseudo games is determined than in "pseudo-probable variable state 1" (first mode). Based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (for example, winning a high-probability transition lottery), there is a transition from "pseudo-probability variable state 1" (first mode) to "probability variable state 1" (second mode). The state then shifts to "pseudo-probable variable state 2" (second mode). In this "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode), when a pseudo game is executed, the number of pseudo games is always determined to be two or more times, so the number of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination is determined. It is possible to allow the player to enjoy a plurality of opportunities for the additional lottery, and it is possible to diversify the additional lottery states that are advantageous to the player, such as pseudo-probability variable states.

In addition, the transition from "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode) to "pseudo probability variable state 1" (first mode) is based on the number of times pseudo games are actually played (number of high guaranteed obstacle games). Therefore, it is possible to reliably enjoy the opportunity to increase the number of ATs based on the pseudo game in the "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode). Note that the transition to the pseudo-probability variable state may be executed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, an AT game or a lottery to transition to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined internal winning combination, and an AT game or lottery to transition to the main CZ state is performed based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. may be carried out.

As explained above, the pseudo-probability variable state is a state in which a plurality of pseudo games can be executed in one unit game. A plurality of pseudo games can be performed, for example, in step S8 (main side effect control process at game start) in FIG. 23 (main process). Since the AT state is extended (added) based on the result of the pseudo game, the pseudo probability variable state plays the role of a special add-on zone in the AT state. Here, the "pseudo game result" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state may be a pseudo internal winning combination or a pseudo symbol combination, as described above.

When adopting a pseudo internal winning combination as a "result of a pseudo game" related to extension (addition) of the AT state, the following examples can be given. In this example, it is possible to stay in the pseudo-probability state not only during AT gaming but also during normal gaming. In addition, the pseudo game is played four times as one set, and if you win the pseudo game continuation lottery (probability of winning: 50%), you can move on to the next set after the first set is played. It becomes. Three types of pseudo-probable variable states are provided: pseudo-probable variable state A (mode A), pseudo-probable variable state B (mode B), and pseudo-probable variable state C (mode C). The probability that a specific role (rare role) is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination is as follows: pseudo-probable variable state A (1/4) → pseudo-probable variable state B (1/2) → pseudo-probable variable state C (1/1) It gets expensive. When a specific winning combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination, the AT state is extended (added). The pseudo internal winning combination may be the same as the normal internal winning combination, or an internal winning combination exclusively for the pseudo game may be provided. Further, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, the first pseudo-probability variable state is promoted to a pseudo-probability variable state that is more advantageous than the pseudo-probability variable state. The promotion of such a pseudo-probable variable state may be in one stage (pseudo-probable variable state A → pseudo-probable variable state B, or pseudo-probable variable state B → pseudo-probable variable state C) depending on the type of a specific symbol combination. However, there may be two stages (pseudo-probable variable state A→pseudo-probable variable state C).

When adopting a pseudo symbol combination as a "result of a pseudo game" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state, the following examples can be given. In this example, the pseudo game is played five times as one set. If a specific symbol combination (all the "Red 7" symbols) is displayed at least once as a pseudo symbol combination in one set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games), then the next set of pseudo games ( On the other hand, it is possible to transition to one set of pseudo games (5 pseudo games) (as a result of the one set of pseudo games, the AT state is extended (additional)). ), if a specific symbol combination (a set of "red 7" symbols) is not displayed even once as a pseudo symbol combination, the pseudo game of the set (5 pseudo games) ends (the set of (As a result of the pseudo game, the AT state is not extended (additional)).

When the reel oscillates due to execution of post-stop operation control (oscillation control), the manner (pattern) of the oscillation may always be constant, or a plurality of oscillation patterns may be provided. You can also use it as The plurality of swing patterns are different reel movement patterns in a state where post-stop operation control (swing control) is being executed. For example, a plurality of rocking patterns having different periods and/or amplitudes of minute vibrations are provided, such as rocking pattern A, rocking pattern B, and rocking pattern C, and step S1070 in FIG. 254 to step S1070 in FIG. In the swing control in step S1083, it is possible to swing the reels in one swing pattern selected from these swing patterns. The timing of selecting a swing pattern is not particularly limited, and for example, one swing pattern may be selected by lottery every time swing control is performed. Alternatively, one swing pattern may be selected in the non-advantageous section, and the reels may be always oscillated in the one swing pattern during the advantageous section transitioned from the non-advantageous section. Then, when transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, one swing pattern may be selected again. Alternatively, when rocking control is performed, one rocking pattern may be selected based on a predetermined variable (value), and the value may be updated in a non-advantageous section. For example, each swing pattern is associated with a predetermined numerical range (for example, swing pattern A: 1 to 100, swing pattern B: 101 to 200, swing pattern C: 201 to 300), A swing pattern corresponding to a value (any value from 1 to 300) updated by lottery during the non-advantageous period may be selected. Further, the variable may be the value of the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, etc. Thereby, as the number of unit games played in the advantageous section increases, the swing pattern can be changed such as swing pattern A→swing pattern B→swing pattern C. Information indicating the variable or the selected swing pattern can be stored in RWM (or RAM) for managing the operation of the reels in the pseudo game. The RWM does not affect the instruction function at all.

In the case where a plurality of swing patterns are provided, the reels may be oscillated in a swing pattern according to the type of benefit given to the player. For example, if the benefit is a transition to an advantageous section (for example, if you win a lottery to move to an advantageous section), the reels are oscillated in swing pattern A, and the benefit is a transition to a pseudo bonus (AT state). If it is a transition (for example, if you win a pseudo-bonus transition lottery), the reels will swing in swing pattern B, and if the benefit is an extension of the pseudo-bonus (extension of the number of games or addition of the number of sets) ( For example, if a 1G lottery is won, the reels can be configured to swing in swing pattern C. Only the third stop reel is made to swing in a swing pattern that corresponds to the type of award, and the first stop reel and the second stop reel are made to swing in a swing pattern that is common to each type of award. It may also be a thing.

The pseudo-gaming described above may be performed on a reel-shaped physical structure (sub-reel) provided separately from the main reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), or may be performed on the main effect display section 21 or the liquid crystal display. This may be performed by displaying a reel-like image (video reel) on a display device. A pseudo game performed in such a manner can be employed as a performance controlled by the sub control circuit 200. However, it is desirable to clearly indicate the main reel controlled by the main control circuit 100 on the pachi-slot machine 1 so that the player does not misunderstand the performance as the main game. For example, in the vicinity of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, it is possible to constantly display the words "Kaido" on a panel or on a liquid crystal display device. This display is only displayed when a game is being played, and when no game is being played (the demo screen is displayed) (playing standby), when an error has occurred, or when a setting change operation is being performed. It may not be displayed while the process is being performed.

Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while a pseudo game is being performed, the pseudo game may be restarted when the power is restored from the power outage. Although not shown, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 includes a power management circuit. The power management circuit manages fluctuations in the 12V DC power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board. For example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V), the power management circuit is activated by a microcomputer that includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, etc. When a power outage occurs (when the power supply voltage drops from 12V to below the power outage voltage value (10.5V)), a power outage detection signal is output to the microcomputer. When a power outage detection signal is output from the power management circuit, the main CPU 101 stores information corresponding to the pseudo-gaming flag (pseudo-gaming information) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as backup data. The pseudo game flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo game is being executed (see step S1025 in FIG. 251), and is set on when the pseudo game starts, and when the pseudo game ends ( For example, it is set to OFF when the lock effect end flag (see step S1073 in FIG. 254 and step S1084 in FIG. 255) is set to ON. When the main CPU 101 returns from the power outage, based on the backup data, it is possible to recognize that a pseudo game was being played at the time of the power outage, and it is possible to restart the pseudo game (see FIG. 24). (See step S29). In addition, when recovering from a power outage, the pseudo game may be restarted from the beginning, or may be restarted from the state of the pseudo game at the time when the power outage occurred (from the middle of the pseudo game). For example, if a power outage occurs while all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will restart from the point where the rotation starts (see step S1024 in FIG. 251). Alternatively, if a power outage occurs while at least one reel is stopped, stop the reel that was rotating at the time of the power outage while stopping the reel at the symbol position at the time of the power outage. The process may be restarted from the point where the operation is accepted (see step S1063 in FIG. 254).

In addition, if a power outage occurs while a simulated game is being performed, and the setting value is changed when recovering from the power outage, the simulated game will not be restarted in the game after the setting value has been changed. You can also use it as In this case, for example, the main CPU 101 may initialize the pseudo-gaming information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 when the setting value is changed (see step S23 in FIG. 24). ). As a result, if a power outage occurs while a simulated game is being performed, if the set value is not changed when recovering from the power outage, the simulated game will be resumed, but the set value will not be changed. In such a case, it is possible to configure the pseudo game so that it is not restarted. Alternatively, if a power outage occurs while a simulated game is being performed, the configuration may be configured so that the simulated game is not restarted regardless of whether or not the setting value has been changed when recovering from the power failure. good.

Furthermore, as explained in the first embodiment, even if the notification target combination is determined as an internal winning combination in one unit game during the AT state, if a pseudo game is performed in the unit game, the corresponding During the pseudo game, it is desirable to configure the instruction monitor so that information regarding the stop operation is not reported. In this case, in the pseudo game, the symbol combination corresponding to the notification target combination may be stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination unrelated to the notification target combination may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when displaying information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the unit game (main game), when the random delay process is started (for example, if the judgment result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES") It is possible to configure the display to start at the timing when the first reel starts rotating by random delay processing or at the timing when the first reel starts rotating. Further, during a pseudo game, a display that uniquely corresponds to the fact that the game is a pseudo game (a display for notifying that the game is a pseudo game) may be performed on the instruction monitor.

(C-12) Any of the gaming machines (C-1) to (C-11) above,
a start operation detection means (start switch 7S) capable of detecting a start operation by a player;
a winning combination determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S5 in FIG. 23) capable of determining a winning combination when the starting operation is detected by the starting operation detecting means;
In the main game, a granting means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S14 in FIG. 23) capable of granting game media or game media data according to the symbol mode of the plurality of reels;
comprising a notification means (instruction monitor) capable of notifying information advantageous to the player,
The imparting means is
In the main game, when the plurality of reels are stopped and a predetermined symbol mode (a combination of symbols related to a small role) is derived as the symbol mode of the plurality of reels, the game is performed according to the predetermined symbol mode. It is possible to add game media or game media data that has been
The reel control means includes:
After the plurality of reels are stopped in the pseudo game, one of the plurality of reels is started to rotate for the main game, and further, the rotation start timing of the one reel is Equipped with a pseudo-gaming reel rotation start control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 258, etc.) capable of starting the rotation of the other reels at a late timing,
When a predetermined winning combination (notification target combination) is determined as a winning combination by the winning combination determining means, after the pseudo-game reel rotation start control means starts the rotation of the reels, a predetermined stop is performed as the stopping operation. It is possible to execute the stop control after the stop operation so that the predetermined symbol mode is derived as the symbol mode of the plurality of reels when an operation (correct press order) is detected;
The notification means is
When the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination by the combination determination means, information regarding the predetermined stop operation is not reported as the advantageous information in the pseudo-game, and the reel rotation start control means after the pseudo-game It is possible to notify information regarding the predetermined stopping operation after the reel starts rotating;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, after the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the pseudo game, the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped for the main game. It is possible to start the rotation of one of the reels and to start the rotation of the other reel at a later timing than the rotation start timing of the one reel. In addition, when a predetermined combination (notification target combination) is determined as a winning combination, after the reels start rotating after a pseudo game, if a predetermined stop operation (correct press order) is detected as a stop operation. , it is possible to execute stop control after the stop operation so that a predetermined symbol pattern (a combination of symbols related to a small prize) is derived, and in the main game, a predetermined pattern pattern (a combination of symbols related to a minor prize) is derived. ) is derived, it is possible to provide game media or game media data according to the predetermined symbol pattern (combination of symbols related to small winnings). When a predetermined combination (notification target combination) is determined as a winning combination, information regarding the predetermined stop operation (correct press order) is not reported in the pseudo game, and after the reel starts rotating after the pseudo game, It is configured to be able to notify information regarding the predetermined stop operation (correct press order). This makes it possible to avoid the player from misunderstanding that they should perform a predetermined stop operation (correct answer press order) in a pseudo game, and in conjunction with post-stop motion control (swing control). , it is possible to effectively prevent a player from mistaking a pseudo game as a main game.

As with the above-mentioned specific win, the predetermined win (notification target win) is a win in which the number of medals awarded varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (press order) (for example, a win in which the stop operation mode is appropriate ( If the answer is correct (correct answer), it is possible to pay out 8 pieces, and if it is inappropriate (incorrect answer), it is possible to pay out 1 piece or no payout). Notification of information regarding a predetermined stop operation (correct answer pressing order) (display of information about the stop operation on the instruction monitor) is carried out after the reels start rotating after the pseudo game, for example, when the third stop operation in the main game (or It is preferable to continue the process until the first stop operation or the second stop operation is completed.

[Ninth embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. The ninth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Further, descriptions of parts that are applicable to the ninth embodiment as well as those described in the first to eighth embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...". Even if such a description is made, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the ninth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to eighth embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, without departing from the spirit of the ninth embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the ninth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

Further, even if the shape is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the eighth embodiment, components having similar functions may be given the same reference numerals for convenience. Furthermore, even if the machine has the same shape or the same processing as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, different symbols or step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Rock effect execution process>
FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing the lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a pseudo game performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main side effect control process at game start) of FIG. 23 (main process). In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 is performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at game start) of FIG. 23 (main process). In this embodiment, the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 may be performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of the game) of FIG. 23 (main process), or the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. The lock effect execution process shown in FIG.

In the lock effect execution process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 250) is set to ON (step S1201). If it is determined that the lock performance start flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock performance start flag is set on, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game start process (step S1202). Here, the process for starting the pseudo game will be explained using FIG. 263.

In the pseudo game start process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is lock effect number "3", "4", or "5". It is determined whether or not (step S1221). If the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock performance number is not one of the lock performance numbers "3", "4", and "5", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the selected lock effect number is one of lock effect numbers "3", "4", and "5", the main CPU 101 The corresponding value is set in the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game (step S1222). The lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is 0 (step S1223). If it is determined that the lock timer at the start of the pseudo game is not 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1223 again. As a result, the pseudo game start lock is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). The lock at the start of the pseudo game may be a lock effect (freeze) that does not involve reel effects or pseudo games, or may be a lock effect that involves reel effects (reel actions such as slow rotation, high speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.). Good too. While the pseudo game start lock is being performed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are maintained in a stopped state, and even if the player performs any operation, the operation is invalid.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo game start lock timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo game start command generation and storage processing (step S1224). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data, and stores the generated pseudo game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the pseudo game, and can determine the timing etc. to execute various effects.

Specifically, upon receiving the pseudo game start command data, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image ("hit the lever" image) with the content "hit the lever" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1225). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed since executing the pseudo game start command generation and storage process (after the "hit the lever" image was displayed). It is determined whether or not (step S1226). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1225. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game cancellation flag to ON (step S1227). The pseudo game cancellation flag is a flag used to cancel a pseudo game. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1228), and ends this subroutine.

The pseudo game start process performed in step S1202 in FIG. 262 has been described above with reference to FIG. 263. The explanation returns to FIG. 262.

After executing the process of step S1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo game cancellation flag is set on (step S1203). If it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo game cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processes from step S1204 to step S1210, but these processes are different from the processes from step S1022 to step S1028 in FIG. Since the processing is similar, the explanation here will be omitted. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, when a lock performance corresponding to any of the lock performance numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock performance determination process (see FIG. 250), a lock is performed at the start of the pseudo game. Thereafter, when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started for a pseudo game, a pseudo game is performed (see steps S1206 and S1208 in FIG. 262), and a random delay process ( (See step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the pseudo game (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game) is not performed, and the After the normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game.

As described above, in the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262, it has been explained that the pseudo game is started on the condition that the start lever 7 is operated. However, as explained in the eighth embodiment, the conditions for starting the pseudo game are not limited to the operation of the start lever 7, but any operation part (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 It is possible to adopt the operation of the bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) as appropriate. Further, the conditions for canceling the pseudo game (the pseudo game cancel flag is set to on) are not limited to the elapse of a predetermined time, but can be applied to any operating part (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) may be used as appropriate.

<Normal pseudo game processing>
FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing the normal pseudo game processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing a stop button operation reception process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing the swing control process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game ending process performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 264 is a process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process) in the main control circuit 100. In the eighth embodiment, the description has been made assuming that the normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 254 is performed as the process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-gaming process). In this embodiment, as the process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (pseudo game process), the normal pseudo game process shown in FIG. 254 may be performed, or the normal pseudo game process shown in FIG. 264 may be performed. It may also be done.

In the normal pseudo-gaming process, the main CPU 101 first executes the processes in step S1241 and step S1242, but since these processes are similar to the processes in step S1061 and step S1062 in FIG. The explanation of is omitted.

After executing the process in step S1242, the main CPU 101 executes a stop button operation acceptance process (step S1243). Here, the stop button operation reception process will be explained using FIG. 265.

In the stop button operation reception process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the stop button operation cancel flag is set on (step S1261). The stop button operation cancellation flag is a flag that is set when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in a pseudo game (see step S1264). If it is determined that the stop button operation cancellation flag is set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop button operation cancellation flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have been operated (step S1262). This process is similar to the process in step S1063 in FIG. 254. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

If it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the MAX bet button 6a has been operated (step S1263). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the bet switch 6S is turned on.

If it is determined that the MAX bet button 6a has been operated, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation cancel flag to ON (step S1264). The stop button operation cancellation flag is a flag indicating that all remaining stop button operations are to be omitted. After executing the process in step S1264, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the MAX bet button 6a has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since starting the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 (step S1265). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1262. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to ON (step S1266). The stop button operation omission flag is a flag indicating that the current stop button operation is to be omitted. After executing the process in step S1266, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The stop button operation acceptance process performed in step S1243 in FIG. 264 has been described above with reference to FIG. 265. The explanation returns to FIG. 264.

After executing the process in step S1243, the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (step S1244), and determines the reel to be controlled (step S1245). In these processes, if neither the stop button operation cancellation flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 performs the same processes as those in steps S1064 and S1065 in FIG. 254. On the other hand, when the stop button operation cancellation flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop button 8 located at the leftmost position among the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R has been operated. As a result, the operation stop button storage area is updated, and the reel to be controlled is determined.

For example, when all the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area in the same way as when the left stop button 8L is operated, Bit 4 is updated to "0" and the left reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled. Further, when the middle stop button 8C and the right stop button 8R are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 1 of the operation stop button storage area, in the same way as when the middle stop button 8C is operated. Bit 5 is updated to "0" and the middle reel 3C is determined as the reel to be controlled. Further, when the left stop button 8L and middle stop button 8C are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area, in the same way as when the left stop button 8L is operated. Bit 4 is updated to "0" and the left reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled. Further, when only the right stop button 8R is valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 2 of the operation stop button storage area and sets bit 6 to "1" in the same way as when the right stop button 8R is operated. 0'' and determines the right reel 3R as the reel to be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes steps S1246 to S1249, which are basically the same as steps S1066 to S1069 in FIG. 254. In the process of step S1246, similar to the process of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines a predetermined position where the symbol will finally stop as the planned stop position, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). and store it. As a result, regardless of whether or not the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, FIGS. Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R stops in the manner shown in 248(b) to 248(d).

Here, if the stop button operation cancellation flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the control The manner in which the target reel rotates until it stops may be varied. For example, if the stop button operation cancel flag is set on (when the MAX bet button 6a is operated), but neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set on. (When the stop button 8 is operated), the time from when the button is operated until the controlled reel stops may be made longer (for example, the controlled reel may be pressed one more time). (It is also possible to rotate it and then stop it.) However, even if there is a difference in the rotation mode, the final symbol that is stopped and displayed will be the same regardless of whether the stop button operation cancellation flag or stop button operation omission flag is set to on. There is.

If it is determined in step S1249 that the reel to be controlled has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes swing control processing (step S1250). Here, the swing control process will be explained using FIG. 266.

In the swing control process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop button operation cancel flag is set on (step S1281). If it is determined that the stop button operation cancellation flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation omission flag is set on (step S1282). If it is determined that the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to OFF (step S1283).

If it is determined in step S1281 that the stop button operation cancellation flag is set on, or after executing the process in step S1283, the main CPU 101 executes control to stop the controlled reel (step S1284). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to a stop excitation pattern for stopping the controlled reel. As a result, the controlled reel is maintained in a stopped state as shown in FIGS. 246(b) to 246(d), FIGS. 247(b) to 247(d), and FIGS. 248(b) to 248(d). (Unlike what is shown, no vibration occurs).

If it is determined in step S1282 that the stop button operation omission flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the controlled reel (step S1285). This process is similar to the process in step S1070 in FIG. 254. As a result, the reels to be controlled swing in the manners shown in FIGS. 246(b) to (d), FIGS. 247(b) to (d), and FIGS. 248(b) to (d).

After executing the process of step S1284 or step S1285, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The swing control process performed in step S1250 in FIG. 264 has been described above using FIG. 266. The explanation returns to FIG. 264.

After executing the process of step S1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R (step S1251). This process is similar to the process in step S1071 in FIG. 254. If it is determined that there are no valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, or 8R, the main CPU 101 executes a process for ending the pseudo game (step S1252). Here, the pseudo game ending process will be explained using FIG. 267.

In the pseudo game ending process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is lock effect number "3" (step S1301). When determining that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "3", the main CPU 101 outputs an AT equivalent signal via the external centralized terminal board 55 (step S1302). As explained in the first embodiment, the external centralized terminal board 55 is connected to the data display device and hall computer outside the pachi-slot machine 1, and these devices can also be used to check the medal insertion status and game play in the pachi-slot machine 1. The state transition situation can be recognized.

The AT equivalent signal is an external signal that is turned on when the AT state is started and turned off when the AT state is ended. In the process of step S1302, the main CPU 101 turns on the external signal. Similarly, although not shown, after executing the process of step S1083 in FIG. 255, the main CPU 101 turns on the external signal. As a result, the data display and hall computer recognize that the AT state has started.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" ends (when the "Red 7" pattern alignment is stopped and displayed), the AT equivalent signal is turned on. It is configured so that. Further, as described in the first embodiment, a plurality of AT states (a predetermined AT state and a specific AT state) may be provided, and each AT state may have a different degree of advantage for the player. As such an AT state, for example, the pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment can be adopted. Then, in both cases where it is decided to shift to pseudo BB and when it is decided to shift to pseudo RB, the same symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game. You may also do so. Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to pseudo BB and a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game, and when it is decided to shift to pseudo RB The same AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbol combination) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game. As a result, when a specific symbol combination (for example, a set of "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game, it is possible to determine which pseudo bonus, pseudo BB or pseudo RB, to be transferred to. It is possible to make the game confusing, and it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player. Note that the timing at which pseudo BB or pseudo RB actually starts is not particularly limited, but may occur after a specific symbol combination (for example, a set of "red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game (when the pseudo game is played). (or a unit game played a predetermined number of times after the unit game). For example, in the main game, a pseudo BB is started when a set of "Red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed along the active line, and in the main game, a set of "BAR" symbols is stopped and displayed along the active line. The pseudo RB may be started using this as a trigger.

In the above, it has been explained that the AT equivalent signal is turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols all together) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo game (before random delay processing is started). Similarly, the AT equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbols) is stopped and displayed in the reel performance (before random delay processing is started). . Furthermore, the AT equivalent signal may be turned on at the timing when the pseudo bonus actually starts (for example, step S106 in FIG. 28). Further, the timing at which the AT equivalent signal is turned off is not particularly limited, but it is possible to turn the AT equivalent signal off at the timing when the pseudo bonus actually ends (for example, step S155 in FIG. 31). As explained in the first embodiment, the external signal 1 (the above AT equivalent signal) is turned on based on the start of the first set of AT state, and from the second set onward, the set is turned on. The external signal 2 may be turned on every time the process is started. From this point of view, the pseudo game may be performed only when it is decided to shift to the first AT state of the first set (for example, it is not performed when the 1G consecutive lottery is won). Further, when the AT equivalent signal is turned on, the section lamp described in the first embodiment is lit.

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S1301 that the lock effect number is not the lock effect number "3", the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "5". It is determined whether or not (step S1303). After executing the process of step S1302, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is not the lock effect number "5" (that is, the lock effect number is "4"), the main CPU 101 controls the external centralized terminal A medal insertion signal is output via the board 55 (step S1304).

As described in the first embodiment, the medal insertion signal is a signal output from the external centralized terminal board 55 when a medal is inserted (see step S42 and step S46 in FIG. 25). That is, the medal insertion signal is output every time the main game is played, and the number of games played with the pachi-slot machine 1 can be recognized on the data display machine or hall computer via the medal insertion signal. It has become. In this embodiment, by outputting a medal insertion signal even in a pseudo game, the number of times the game is played is the number including the pseudo game (the total number of times of the main game and the number of pseudo games). This allows the number of games to be counted up even when a pseudo game is played. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 outputs a medal input signal even after executing the process of step S1083 in FIG. 255.

The medal insertion signal can be output at the timing when the pseudo game starts or the timing when the pseudo game ends. The timing at which the pseudo game starts is, for example, when the start lever 7 is operated (for example, when the determination result in step S1225 in FIG. 263 is "YES"), or when the reels 3L, 3C, An example of this is when the rotation of 3R starts (for example, the timing at which the process of step S1206 in FIG. 262 is performed). The timing at which the pseudo game ends is, for example, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the pseudo game stops (for example, the timing when the process in FIG. 267 is performed), or when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the main game stop rotating. For example, when the rotation of 3R starts (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES", or when the first reel starts rotating due to random delay processing). Note that when a medal insertion signal is output in a pseudo game, the unit game in which the pseudo game is performed may be configured such that the medal insertion signal is not output when medals are inserted.

After executing the process of step S1304, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1305), and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1303 that the lock performance number is "5", the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-game reel performance process (step S1306). The reel performance process after the pseudo game is the same as described using FIG. 255, so a description thereof will be omitted here. After executing the process in step S1306, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo game ending process performed in step S1252 in FIG. 264 has been described above with reference to FIG. 267. The explanation returns to FIG. 264. After executing the process in step S1252, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo game challenge operation reception process>
FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268 is a process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo game process) in the main control circuit 100. The above description has been made assuming that the stop button operation reception process shown in FIG. 265 is performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo-gaming process). In this embodiment, the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 268 may be performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo game process).

Specifically, when all the stop buttons 8 are valid (when no stop button 8 has been operated yet), that is, when the current stop operation is the first stop operation, as shown in FIG. A pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process is performed, and if there is an invalid stop button 8 (if at least one stop button 8 has been operated), that is, the current stop operation is the second stop operation or the third stop button 8. If it is a stop operation, the stop button operation reception process shown in FIG. 265 may be performed. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the invalid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

In the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process, first, the main CPU 101 determines a stop button for proceeding with the pseudo game (step S1321). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects one of the left stop button 8L, middle stop button 8C, and right stop button 8R as a stop button for pseudo game progress by performing a lottery based on random numbers. decide.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo game start command generation and storage processing (step S1322). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data, and stores the generated pseudo game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the pseudo game, and can determine the timing to execute various performances.

Specifically, upon receiving the pseudo game start command data, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image with content such as "Pseudo game starts when three correct answers on the stop button" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the stop button 8. Can be done.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have been operated (step S1323). This process is similar to the process in step S1063 in FIG. 254. If it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo game proceeding stop button determined in step S1321 (step S1324).

If it is determined that the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo game progress stop button, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine and moves the process to step S1244 in FIG. 264. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operated stop button 8 does not match the stop button for proceeding with the pseudo game, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game cancel flag on (step S1325), and ends this subroutine.

Although not shown, if the pseudo game cancel flag is set to on, the main CPU 101, after completing the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. , ends the normal pseudo-gaming process shown in FIG. 264, and further ends the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262 without performing steps S1209 and S1210 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1323 that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated, the main CPU 101 executes the processes in steps S1326 to S1329, but these processes are performed in steps S1263 to S1263 in FIG. Since this process is similar to the process in S1266, the explanation here will be omitted. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, when the pseudo game progression stop button (for example, left stop button 8L) is operated as the first stop operation (if the three options of the stop button are answered correctly), the pseudo game continues, and the random delay processing is performed. After (see step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, if a stop button 8 other than the pseudo game progression stop button (for example, middle stop button 8C or right stop button 8R) is operated as the first stop operation (if the three stop button choices fail), At that point, the pseudo game ends, and after the normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game.

In this way, in this embodiment, after the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game has started, the pseudo game is configured to proceed on the condition that the appropriate stop button 8 is operated. is possible. On the other hand, such an appropriate operation of the stop button 8 may be adopted as a condition for starting a pseudo game. For example, in FIG. 263, it has been explained that the pseudo game is started on the condition that the start lever 7 is operated, but instead of operating the start lever 7, an appropriate stop button 8 (for example, the left stop button 8L) ) is operated, a pseudo game (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for pseudo game) may be started. If an inappropriate stop button 8 (for example, the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated, the pseudo game is canceled (in the first place, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game is (also not performed).

<Determining the freeze type>
FIG. 269 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the main display device.

FIG. 269 shows a freeze type determination screen being displayed on the main display device 210. In this embodiment, multiple types of freezes (freeze A, freeze B, and freeze C) are provided. Freeze A is a lock effect that does not involve reel effects or pseudo games. Freeze B is a lock effect accompanied by a forward rotating reel effect. Freeze C is a lock effect accompanied by a reverse rotation reel effect. The freeze type determination screen is a screen for determining one freeze among freeze A, freeze B, and freeze C. The determined freeze is executed, for example, as a lock at the start of a pseudo game (see step S1223 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, FIG. 269 shows a freeze type determination screen in which a freeze A image 1201, a freeze B image 1202, a freeze C image 1203, and an arrow image 1204 are displayed. The arrow image 1204 is an image for indicating which image is selected among the freeze A image 1201, the freeze B image 1202, and the freeze C image 1203. In the example shown in FIG. 269, an arrow image 1204 is displayed close to the side of the freeze A image 1201, indicating that the freeze A image 1201 is selected.

In this way, when the freeze A image 1201 is selected (freeze A selection state), the arrow image 1204 is displayed next to the freeze A image 1201. Similarly, when the freeze B image 1202 is selected (freeze B selection state), an arrow image 1204 is displayed next to the freeze B image 1202. In a state where the freeze C image 1203 is selected (freeze C selection state), an arrow image 1204 is displayed next to the freeze C image 1203.

The position of the arrow image 1204 can be switched using any of the following methods (a) to (c). For example, one of these methods is set in the hall menu.
(a) Operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (b) Operation of MAX bet button 6a (c) Timer management

When the above (a) is set, the player can move the arrow image 1204 by operating the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R while the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210. The type of freeze can be determined by operating the MAX bet button 6a. Specifically, if the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined, and if the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined, and freeze C is determined. When the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the selected state, freeze C is determined.

When the above (b) is set, the player can switch the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the MAX bet button 6a while the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210. By operating the start lever 7, the type of freeze can be determined. Specifically, if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined, and if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined, and the freeze C selection state is determined. If the start lever 7 is operated in , freeze C is determined.

When the above (c) is set, when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, one of the freeze A selection state, freeze B selection state, and freeze C selection state is selected. to another state (for example, Freeze A selected state → Freeze B selected state → Freeze C selected state → Freeze A selected state, etc.) at predetermined time intervals. At this time, the player can determine the type of freeze by operating the MAX bet button 6a. Specifically, if the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined, and if the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined, and freeze C is determined. When the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the selected state, freeze C is determined. Note that if the MAX bet button 6a is not operated within a predetermined time, a type of freeze is determined depending on the state when the time elapses. Alternatively, the type of freeze selected by lottery may be determined.

The timing at which the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210 is not particularly limited, but for example, when the combination of symbols related to BB is stopped and displayed along the active line (BB wins), the freeze type is determined. It is possible to configure the screen so that it is displayed. For example, when BB wins in one unit game and the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed. Alternatively, when BB wins in one unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed until the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game.

Above, we have explained the case where the type of freeze is determined, but the same method can also be used to determine the type of lock effect that will be performed when a person wins the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery or when they win the 1G consecutive lottery. good. For example, on a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 269, lock performance A (for example, lock performance without reel performance or pseudo-game), lock performance B (for example, reel performance The lock performance may be configured to be able to determine one of the lock performance (for example, a lock performance accompanied by a pseudo game) and the lock performance C (for example, a lock performance accompanied by a pseudo game). In steps S1005, S1010, and S1012 of FIG. 250, the lock effect determined in this way may be selected. In addition, the type of the swing pattern (for example, one of the swing patterns A, B, and C described in the eighth embodiment) is determined by the same method. It may be configured so that it can be done. Note that the effects determined in this way are not limited to effects controlled by the main control circuit 100, but may be effects controlled by the sub-control circuit 200.

<Processing when winning bonus>
FIG. 270 is a flowchart showing the bonus winning process performed in the main control circuit.

The bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S70 in FIG. 26 (internal lottery process) is executed. In other words, the bonus winning process is a transition from a non-bonus state (not a bonus state and neither a carryover state) to a carryover state (between flags) due to the bonus winning game (the bonus winning combination being determined as an internal winning combination). This is a process performed before the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts in the unit game).

In the bonus winning process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether BB has been determined as an internal winning combination (whether the current unit game is a BB winning game) or not (step S1341). If it is determined that BB has not been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 selects which of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" (see FIG. 243). one is selected by lottery (step S1342). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1343), and ends this subroutine. As a result, a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lock effect number corresponding to the pseudo game is selected, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 (see FIG. 252) is displayed on the main display device 210 (see step S1022 in FIG. 251). I explained it as such. Thereby, during the pseudo game, the player can be urged to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "Red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, similarly, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 may be displayed on the main display device 210, but here, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image (not shown) is displayed on the main display. It is assumed that the information is displayed on the device 210. Thereby, during the pseudo game, the player can be urged to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R.

In addition, here, after BB is determined as the internal winning combination, when the "Red 7" symbol alignment is stopped and displayed along the active line in the main game (the "Red 7" symbol alignment is established), the BB state is started, and after MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the MB state is started when the "BAR" symbol arrangement is stopped and displayed along the active line in the main game (the "BAR" symbol arrangement is established). I will do so. In this case, in the BB winning game (main game), it can be said that the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol when operating the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R.

However, as mentioned above, if the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is displayed in the pseudo game, even after the pseudo game ends and the main game begins, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image will continue to be displayed. If so, the player is forced to aim at a different symbol (the "BAR" symbol) from the symbol that he or she should originally aim for (the "red 7" symbol). In this case, there is a high possibility that the "Red 7" symbols will not be stopped and displayed along the active line (BB will not win).

In particular, when the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are arranged apart from each other on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, this possibility is very high. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, on at least one reel 3 (middle reel 3C), the symbol position ("0") corresponding to the "Red 7" symbol is changed from the symbol position ("9") corresponding to the "BAR" symbol. ), if the number of sliding pieces does not exist within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols), a stop operation is performed for the relevant reel 3 (middle reel 3C) at the timing when the "BAR" symbol is displayed on the active line. If this happens, it will be impossible for BB to win. In this sense, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image becomes a suggestion to prevent the BB from winning.

In any case, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image displayed in the pseudo game is displayed at a predetermined timing so as to prevent the player from misunderstanding the symbol (internal winning combination) to aim for. It is desirable to end the display. The timing may be before the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 257) is started, or may be after the random delay process is started. Specifically, the timing is, for example, after the second stop reel stops in a pseudo game until the third stop reel stops (for example, if the judgment result in step S1262 in FIG. 265 is "YES" and the relevant stop When the operation of button 8 is the third stop operation, or when the judgment result in step S1265 in FIG. 265 is "YES" and the third stop operation is omitted), or when all remaining stop button operations are omitted. (For example, when the determination result in step S1263 in FIG. 265 is "YES"), after the third stop reel stops until the third stop reel starts swinging (for example, in step S1263 in FIG. 264), When the judgment result in S1249 is "YES" and the reel to be controlled is the third stop reel), the timing when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped in the pseudo game (for example, when the judgment result in step S1251 in FIG. 264 is When the main game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating (for example, after the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES" and before the process in step S1252 is performed), (or when the first reel starts rotating due to random delay processing), after each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts rotating for the main game, all reels 3L, 3C, 3R stop rotating. Examples include the period until a constant speed is reached.

Further, if another pseudo-gaming effect (for example, swing control) is being performed at the timing when the display of the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is ended, that effect may also be ended. Furthermore, at this timing, a production (BB suggestion production) corresponding to the fact that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination is started (an image suggesting that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination (for example, "Aim for 7") is started. ” effect image 1100)). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from misunderstanding the symbol (internal winning combination) that the player should aim for, and to give a suggestion that the player should aim for the "Red 7" symbol.

Note that, as described in the eighth embodiment, in the pseudo game, it is possible to configure the predetermined symbols to be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. Therefore, in the pseudo game, even if the player aims at the "BAR" symbol when operating each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R (the timing at which the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R) Even if the stop operation is performed in ), the "Red 7" symbol alignment may be established. Thereby, it can be suggested that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination through the alignment of the "Red 7" symbols. If the "Red 7" symbol alignment is established in the pseudo game, the above-mentioned BB suggestion effect may not be performed in the main game.

Alternatively, in a pseudo game, "BAR" symbols are aligned in response to a stop operation being performed at a timing when "BAR" symbols can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R (stop operation at an appropriate timing). If the "BAR" symbols are not aligned, the arrangement may be such that "BAR" symbols are not aligned. Furthermore, in the pseudo game, the "BAR" symbols may be aligned regardless of the stop/start position and the number of sliding pieces. Alternatively, in the pseudo game, although the "BAR" symbols are full, the "BAR" symbols may not line up (the remaining "BAR" symbol is not stopped and displayed). If the "Red 7" symbols are not aligned in the pseudo game, it is desirable to perform the above-mentioned BB suggestion performance in the main game.

In this way, each time the "Red 7" symbol to "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, swing control is performed for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (see step S1285 in FIG. 266). ) is carried out. As explained in the eighth embodiment, the swing control is performed in a state where each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is located at the center of vibration or a state where each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is substantially completely stopped. In this process, the "Red 7" symbol to the "BAR" symbol are positioned on the active line.

As described above, when the process at the time of bonus winning shown in FIG. 270 is performed, the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 may not be performed, or the process at the time of bonus winning shown in FIG. It is also possible to perform the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. Although not shown, if BB is not determined as the internal winning combination, a lock effect (so-called fake effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" may be performed.

<Lock effect determination process at end of game>
FIG. 271 is a flowchart showing the game end lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect determination process at the end of the game shown in FIG. 271 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S156 in FIG. 31 (process at the end of the game during advantageous section) is executed.

In the game end lock performance determination process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1361). This process is similar to the process in step S1001 in FIG. 250. When determining that the current gaming section is not an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming section is an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus transfer lottery has been won (step S1362). As explained in the first embodiment, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the main game stops, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag (Fig. 7(a)) is determined. Then, in the performance section (advantageous section/normal game), the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table (see Figure 7(c)) is referred to, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transfer lottery) is performed based on the random number and the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. As a result, "winning" or "non-winning" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery. Note that the "win" includes "win (current game)" and "win (next game)," but these will not be distinguished here.

If it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" (see FIG. 243). (Step S1363). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag on (step S1364), and ends this subroutine. As a result, a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed.

Although not shown, even if you win the 1G consecutive lottery (see Figure 7(d)), any of the rock performance numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" will be selected. The lock effect may be selected (a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed). Also, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (and 1G consecutive lottery) is not won, either lock performance number "2" or "4" is selected (lock performance number "2" or "4"). A corresponding rock effect may be performed).

<Lock effect execution process at end of game>
FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing a game end lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing a process for starting a lock effect at the end of a game performed in the main control circuit.

The game end lock performance execution process shown in FIG. 272 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S16 (game end main side performance control process) of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the lock effect execution process at the end of the game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see step S1364 in FIG. 271) is set on (step S1381). If it is determined that the lock performance start flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set on, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect start process at the end of the game (step S1382). Here, the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game will be explained using FIG. 273.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the replay has won a prize (step S1401). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the active line is a symbol combination related to a replay combination (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

If it is determined that the replay has won, the main CPU 101 executes a replay winning lock effect start command generation and storage process (step S1402). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates replay winning lock effect start command data, and stores the generated replay winning lock effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The replay winning lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing when the replay wins and the lock effect is started, and can determine the timing etc. to execute various effects.

Specifically, in response to receiving the lock performance start command data when replay wins, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the replay winning and lock performance starting. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image (bet request image) with content such as "Please bet" is displayed on the main display device 210, and the player is prompted to press the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button). 6b). If the replay wins, there is no need to operate the bet button, but the bet request image can make the player feel surprised.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) has been operated (step S1403). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the bet switch 6S is turned on. If it is determined that either the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the MAX bet button 6a nor the 1 bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1404). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the replay winning lock production start command generation and storage process for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) (after the bet request image is displayed). It is determined whether or not the period has elapsed (step S1405).

If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1403. If it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated in step S1404, or if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1405, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1406). The lock effect cancellation flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1407), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the replay has not won, the main CPU 101 executes a winning lock effect start command generation and storage process other than the replay (step S1408). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates non-replay winning lock effect start command data, and stores the generated non-replay winning lock effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The non-replay winning lock performance start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the lock effect when a winning combination other than the replay is won, and it becomes possible to determine the timing to execute various effects, etc. can.

Specifically, in response to receiving the command data to start a lock performance when winning a prize other than a replay, the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the start of a lock performance when a winning role other than a replay is won. Ru. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image ("hit the lever" image) with the content "hit the lever" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to. If a winning combination other than the replay is won, the player should be required to operate the bet button before operating the start lever 7, but the ``hit the lever'' image can make the player feel surprised.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1409). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it is determined that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the lock production start command generation and storage process for winnings other than replay for a predetermined period of time (after the "hit the lever" image is displayed). (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S1410). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1409. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancellation flag to ON (step S1411). The lock effect cancellation flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1412), and ends this subroutine.

The process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game performed in step S1382 of FIG. 272 has been described above with reference to FIG. 273. The explanation returns to FIG. 272.

After executing the process of step S1382, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect cancellation flag is set on (step S1383). If it is determined that the lock performance cancel flag is set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect cancellation flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 executes the processes from step S1384 to step S1390, but these processes are different from the processes from step S1022 to step S1028 in FIG. Since the processing is similar, the explanation here will be omitted. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, when it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a replay has won, by operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the reel 3L, The rotation of reels 3C and 3R is started and a lock effect is performed (see steps S1386 and S1388 in FIG. 272), and in the next unit game, after random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257), reels 3L and 3C are rotated. , 3R rotation is the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, it was determined that a lock effect would be performed in the unit game in which the replay won, but the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) was not operated within a predetermined time after the bet request image was displayed. or when the start lever 7 is operated, the lock effect (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the lock effect) is not performed and the normal acceleration process (as shown in FIG. 257) is performed in the next unit game. After step S1125), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game.

In addition, in the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game shown in FIG. 273, if the start lever 7 is operated without operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the process will proceed to the next unit game. We plan to proceed with this. In this case, the operation of the start lever 7 in the next unit game may be omitted. That is, when the determination result in step S1404 in FIG. 273 is "YES", the determination result in step S50 in FIG. 25 is "YES" without waiting for the start lever 7 to be operated in the next unit game. ”. However, unlike the process for starting the lock effect at the end of the game shown in FIG. 273, it may be configured so that the next unit game does not proceed unless the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated. . Furthermore, even if the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is not operated, the bet button (MAX It may be configured such that the next unit game is only advanced when the bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is not operated.

Furthermore, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning combination other than the replay is won, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started for the lock effect by operating the start lever 7. A lock effect is performed (see steps S1386 and S1388 in FIG. 272), and in the next unit game, after random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is changed to the main game. It rotates at a constant speed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning role other than the replay is won, but the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, If the lock effect (rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R for lock effect) is not performed, in the next unit game, the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R will be performed after normal acceleration processing (see step S1125 in FIG. 257). is the constant speed rotation for the main game. It should be noted that it may be configured so that the next unit game does not proceed unless the start lever 7 is operated, or the next unit game will not proceed until the start lever 7 is not operated for a considerably long time (for example, 1 minute). It may be configured to proceed to a game.

<Stop button light emission control process during pseudo game>
Although not shown, in the main control circuit 100, a stop button light emission control process during a pseudo game is performed during a pseudo game. Specifically, after executing the process of step S1243 in FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo game stop button light emission control process. As a result, for example, the lighting mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R changes. This will be explained in detail below.

Each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R has a similar configuration, and includes a stop button cover that has a pressing part that can be touched by the player, and a stop button that is located at a location deeper than the stop button cover. It is equipped with a button LED. The stop button LED is a full-color LED that can emit multiple types of colors including red, blue, and green. The stop button cover is made of a translucent material, and the light emitted from the stop button LED passes through the stop button cover and is emitted to the outside of the pachislot machine 1, making it visible to the player. It is possible.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo game, the stop button LEDs of the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to emit light. Specifically, in step S1242 of FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 controls the stop button LEDs of all stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R to light up. In addition, in step S1244 in FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 causes the stop button LED of the stop button 8 that was operated this time (or the stop button 8 that was deemed to have been operated because the stop button operation was omitted) to turn off. control. Alternatively, if it is determined that the controlled reel has stopped in step S1249 instead of step S1244, the stop button 8 that was operated this time (or the stop button 8 that was deemed to have been operated because the stop button operation was omitted) The stop button LED may be controlled to turn off.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 lights up the stop button LEDs of the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the main CPU 101 may control the stop button LEDs to have a specific color (for example, red). good. In addition, the main CPU 101 causes the stop button LED of the stop button 8 that was operated this time (or the stop button 8 that was deemed to have been operated because the stop button operation was omitted) to emit light in a specific color (for example, red). It may be controlled to do so.

At this time, if it has been decided to grant a benefit to the player (for example, if the player has won a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery)), it has not been decided to grant the benefit. The stop button LED may be controlled to emit light in a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than in the case where the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won. . In addition, if it has been decided to give a benefit to the player (for example, if the player has won a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery)), the light emitting color of the stop button LED is set to a predetermined color. Control may be performed so that the probability that the light emitted from the stop button LED becomes a specific color (for example, red) is higher than the probability that the light emitted by the stop button LED becomes a specific color (for example, red).

Thereby, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation of the pseudo game through the color of the light emitted from the stop button LED. Such control can be performed individually for the three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, if all three stop buttons 8 are lit in a specific color (for example, red), the player will be excited, and if only one stop button 8 is lit in a specific color (for example, red), the player will be excited. It can also be said that this relatively lowers the expectations of the players.

Above, we have explained the effect in which the lighting mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R changes, but it is also possible to change the lighting mode of the start lever 7 and bet buttons (MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b). . For example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, and the 1 bet button 6b are each provided with a translucent cover and an LED, similarly to the stop button 8. The cover of the start lever 7 can be a spherical part that can be held by the player. For example, the LED of the start lever 7 may be turned on when the above-mentioned “hit the lever” image is displayed on the main display device 210, or when the above-mentioned bet request image is displayed on the main display device 210. Alternatively, the LEDs of the MAX bet button 6a to 1 bet button 6b may be turned on.

Furthermore, at this time, the level of expectation for the pseudo game may be indicated to the player through the color of the LED light on the start lever 7 or the bet button. For example, if it has been decided to grant a benefit to the player (for example, if the player has won a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery)), but it has not been decided to grant the benefit to the player. (For example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won. You can. In addition, if it has been decided that a benefit will be given to the player (for example, if the player has won a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery)), the color of the LED light emitted from the start lever 7 to the bet button will be It may be controlled so that the probability that the LED light emitted from the start lever 7 to the bet button will be a specific color (for example, red) is higher than the probability that the color will be a predetermined color (for example, blue).

The LEDs provided on the stop button 8, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, and 1 bet button 6b may be controlled by the main control circuit 100, or may be controlled by the sub control circuit 200. Good too. When the LED is configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, when changing the lighting mode of the LED, the main CPU 101 generates command data corresponding to the change in the lighting mode, and executes the generated command. The data may be sent to the sub control circuit 200. Note that in the main game as well, similarly to the pseudo game, an effect may be performed in which the lighting mode of the LED is changed.

<Backlight effect>
As described in the first embodiment, a light source (reel lamp) is provided inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at least at a position where the symbols are visible from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, 3C , 3R are rotating, they are illuminated from inside at a constant brightness to ensure visibility of the symbols.

In this embodiment, an effect (backlight effect) using such a reel lamp (reel backlight) is performed. Although not shown, a plurality of LEDs (reel illumination LEDs) are provided on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R as a reel backlight. These reel illumination LEDs are installed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R so that each of the nine symbols stopped and displayed within the frame of the main display window 4 can be individually illuminated. It is located in

Hereinafter, the reel illumination LED that can illuminate the upper region of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the upper left reel illumination LED, and the reel illumination LED that can illuminate the middle region of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the left middle reel illumination LED. The reel illumination LED that can illuminate the lower area of the left reel 3L is called the lower left reel illumination LED, and the reel illumination LED that can illuminate the upper area of the middle reel 3C is called the upper middle reel illumination LED. The reel lighting LED that can illuminate the middle area is called the middle and middle reel lighting LED, the reel lighting LED that can illuminate the lower area of the middle reel 3C is called the middle and lower reel lighting LED, and the upper part of the right reel 3R. The reel lighting LED that can illuminate the area is called the upper right reel lighting LED, and the reel lighting LED that can illuminate the middle area of the right reel 3R is called the right middle reel lighting LED, which illuminates the lower area of the right reel 3R. The possible reel illumination LED will be referred to as the lower right reel illumination LED.

LED for upper left reel lighting, LED for left middle reel lighting, LED for lower left reel lighting, LED for upper middle reel lighting, LED for middle middle reel lighting, LED for middle lower reel lighting, LED for upper right reel lighting, LED for right middle reel lighting A plurality of LEDs are provided as the LED for lighting the lower right reel and the LED for illuminating the lower right reel, so that it is possible to realize a backlight effect with a complicated lighting pattern on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. It has become.

The backlight effect is performed by turning off the lit reel illumination LEDs as each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops in a pseudo game. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R in a pseudo game (see step S1206 in FIG. 262 and step S1386 in FIG. LED, LED for lower left reel lighting, LED for upper middle reel lighting, LED for middle middle reel lighting, LED for lower middle reel lighting, LED for upper right reel lighting, LED for right middle reel lighting, and LED for lower right reel lighting control so that all are lit.

Then, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled has stopped in step S1249 of FIG. Among the illumination LEDs and the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the lower region of the controlled reel, the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating regions not located on the effective line are controlled so as to turn off. For example, assume that the effective line is the center line and the reel to be controlled is the left reel 3L. In this case, the main CPU 101 controls the upper left reel illumination LED and the lower left reel illumination LED to turn off, while the left middle reel illumination LED remains lit. When turning off the reel lighting LED that can illuminate areas that are not located on the effective line, all of the plurality of LEDs provided as the reel lighting LED may be turned off, or one of the plurality of LEDs may be turned off. It is also possible to turn off the LED of the section.

As a result, the visibility of the symbols stopped and displayed in the area not located on the active line is reduced, but the visibility of the symbols stopped and displayed in the area located on the active line is ensured. For example, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" (see FIG. 243), in the state shown in FIG. 246(b), the visibility of "BAR" and "Replay" on the right reel 3R decreases; The visibility of "Red 7" will be ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 246(c), the right reel 3R is the same as the state shown in FIG. 246(b), and the middle reel 3C has a decreased visibility of "Watermelon" and "Yellow Blank". The visibility of "Red 7" will be ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 246(d), the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are the same as the state shown in FIG. 246(c), and the left reel 3L has visibility of "white blank 1" and "watermelon". Although the visibility of "Red 7" decreases, the visibility of "Red 7" is maintained. Therefore, even if some of the reel illumination LEDs are turned off, the player can clearly recognize that the "red 7" symbols are aligned.

In addition, when turning off the reel lighting LED that can illuminate areas that are not located on the active line, the visibility of the symbols in the area located on the active line will not be reduced due to the reel lighting LED being turned off. It is desirable to configure For example, a structure may be adopted in which a partition plate or the like is provided between adjacent areas so that the visibility of the symbols in each area is not interfered with by the lighting mode of the reel illumination LEDs in other areas.

Furthermore, after a reel illumination LED capable of irradiating an area that is not located on the effective line is turned off, the LED may be turned on or off again. At this time, the level of expectation for the pseudo game may be suggested to the player through the lighting pattern of the LED. For example, if it has been decided to grant a benefit to the player (for example, if the player has won a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery)), but it has not been decided to grant the benefit to the player. (For example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won), the LED may be controlled to light up in a specific pattern with a higher probability. In addition, if it has been decided that a benefit will be given to the player (for example, if the player has won a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery)), the probability that the LED will light up in a predetermined pattern is Alternatively, the LED may be controlled to have a higher probability of being turned on in a specific pattern.

The reel lighting LEDs may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or by the sub control circuit 200. When the reel lighting LED is configured to be controlled by the sub control circuit 200, when changing the lighting mode of the reel lighting LED, the main CPU 101 generates command data corresponding to the change in the lighting mode. , the generated command data may be sent to the sub control circuit 200. In addition, in the main game as well, similarly to the pseudo game, an effect may be performed in which the lighting mode of the reel illumination LED is changed.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as "memory map") of the main ROM 102 and main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274A to 274C. 274A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 274B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 274C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 100, as shown in FIG. 274A, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and the They are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 274B, the program area, data area, non-standard area, trademark recording area, program management area, and security setting area are arranged in this order from the address start (0000H) side of the main ROM 102. They are placed at predetermined addresses in order.

Note that the program area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the gameplay of the game played by the player. The data area contains various data used by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the gameplay of the game performed by the player (for example, data tables such as an internal lottery table, various Data, etc. for transmitting control instructions (commands) are stored. That is, the gaming ROM area (gaming storage area), which consists of a program area and a data area, contains information necessary for control processing (processing related to gaming) related to the gameplay of the games actually played by players at the gaming parlor. Various programs and various data are stored.

Further, the non-regular area stores control programs and data for various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game played by the player (processes that do not affect the gameplay). For example, programs and data used in the Pachislot 1 certification test (sight shooting test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing during power outage, sum check processing when power is restored, etc., and anti-fraud programs. and the data necessary for it are stored in the non-regular area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 274C, from the start address (F000H) side of the main RAM 103, the gaming RAM area (prescribed storage area, temporary gaming storage area) and the non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary storage area) storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

The gaming RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data, such as internal winning combinations, determined by the execution of a control program related to the gameplay of the game played by the player. . Each of the various data is stored in a work area at a predetermined address within the gaming RAM area.

Further, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area, which is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game played by the player, and a non-standard stack. In this embodiment, this non-standard RAM area is used to execute various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game performed by the player, such as a sum check process.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game played by the player are stored in the main ROM 102. The data is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at a different address from the original ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay of the game performed by such players are performed using a non-standard RAM area located at a different address from the gaming RAM area in the main RAM 103. .

With this configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data that are unnecessary for the actual game played by the player can be placed in the ROM area (non-regular ROM area) where programs etc. cannot be placed according to conventional regulations. can do. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

<Sight firing test signal control processing (not specified)>
Although not shown, in the main control circuit 100, a sight-fire test signal control process (outside the regulations) is performed in the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32). After executing the process of step S208 in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 executes the sight-firing test signal control process (non-standard). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control processing when outputting various test signals to the test machine via the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine (see FIG. 3).

Specifically, the main CPU 101 saves the address of the stack area of the main RAM 103, sets the address of the non-standard stack area in the stack pointer (SP), and saves the data of all registers. Then, the main CPU 101 processes the rotation control signal (drive signal) of each reel, the bonus ( Processing is performed to output an ON/OFF signal (test signal) of the special prize), a control signal corresponding to the state of the conditional device signal control flag, etc. Then, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the data of all the saved registers, and sets the address of the saved stack area in the stack pointer (SP).

Such sight test signal control processing (non-standard) is executed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 274C). Note that the test firing test signal control processing (not specified) is also performed at times other than the test firing test (after the Pachislot machine 1 is installed at the game parlor), but at this time, the main control board 71 is Since it is not connected to the test machine via the first interface board 301 to the second interface board 302 for the test machine, various test signals are not output even if they are generated.

Here, as explained in the first embodiment, the configuration is such that during the pseudo game, a test signal (pseudo game signal) is output so that the test machine can recognize that the pseudo game is in progress. Is possible. The control process when outputting the pseudo game signal may be performed in the sight test signal control process (outside the regulations). In this case, the control process when outputting the pseudo game signal will be executed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 274C).

Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal, it outputs a signal for pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, thereby controlling the main control board 71. The pseudo game may be played on the board 71 side (that is, the first interface board 301 for the test machine may be provided with a pseudo game play function). In this case, a pseudo game signal is input from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the test machine, and a pseudo game signal is input from the second interface board 302 for the test machine to the first interface board 301 for the test machine. may be configured. Then, by transmitting a signal for pseudo game progress control (stop signal) from the first interface board 301 for the test machine to the main control board 71, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops in the pseudo game (pseudo stop). ). This allows the test firing test to proceed smoothly.

In addition, when a replay wins and a pseudo game is performed (see Figure 273), a test signal (cancellation signal) is output so that the test machine can recognize that the replay has won and the fact that the replay has won is canceled. It is possible to configure it so that In this case, the main control board 71 outputs a cancel signal (signal requesting operation of the bet button) to the test machine via the first interface board 301 for the test machine (second interface board 302 for the test machine). Alternatively, after inputting a signal from the main control board 71 to the first interface board 301 for the test machine (second interface board 302 for the test machine) indicating that the replay will win and a pseudo game will be played, A cancel signal may be output from the first interface board 301 for the test machine (second interface board 302 for the test machine) to the test machine. After that, by outputting a signal corresponding to the bet placed (bet signal) to the test machine, it is possible to start the next game, and the test shooting test can proceed smoothly. . The control process for outputting such a signal can also be configured to be performed in the sight-fire test signal control process (outside the regulations). In addition, when a replay is won and a pseudo game is performed, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R outside the active line is "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell". However, it is possible to adopt a case where the winning combination is a replay.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix D>
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for presentation (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214050). The sub-reels are larger than the main reels, are placed in conspicuous positions, and have symbols that are easy for players to identify and are arranged in an easy-to-identify arrangement. This allows the sub-reel to appear to the player as if it were the central reel.

In gaming machines equipped with such sub-reels, when the player performs a stop operation, the sub-reels are rotated in a manner that is difficult to perform with the main reels (for example, reverse rotation, frame-by-frame forwarding, etc.) and then stopped. Reel effects may be performed.

On the other hand, even in gaming machines equipped with only main reels, effects using such reels (the reels stop when the player performs a stop operation, but game media (medals) according to the display mode of the stopped reels) However, when such a performance (pseudo game) is performed on the main reel, the relevant It is desirable to increase the degree of freedom of operation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the player himself or herself can decide on the operations related to the pseudo-gaming, and which can increase the degree of freedom in such operations. purpose.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) A plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that are decorated with a plurality of symbols and can be rotated,
A stop operation detection means (stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player;
Reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S203 in FIG. 32, etc.) for controlling the reels,
The reel control means is capable of executing post-stop-operation stop control to stop the rotating reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop-operation detection means,
A main game that can provide game media (medals) or game media data according to the pattern patterns of the plurality of reels when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and When the reels are stopped, it is possible to execute a pseudo game in which no game media or game media data is provided according to the pattern of the plurality of reels,
The operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, game media (medals) or games are played according to the pattern of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). A main game that can give media (medals) data, and a game media (medals) or game that corresponds to the pattern form of multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by stop control after a stop operation. It is possible to execute a pseudo-game that does not provide media (medals) data, and it is configured such that operations for advancing the pseudo-game can be omitted. This allows the player to cancel the operation for proceeding with the pseudo game at his/her will, so the player himself/herself can decide on the operation, increasing the degree of freedom of the operation. Furthermore, it is possible to meet the needs of players who wish to omit this operation, and it is also possible to reduce the operational burden.

The above-mentioned operations for advancing the pseudo game include operations for advancing the pseudo game while the pseudo game is being performed (for example, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation). In addition, it also includes an operation for starting a pseudo game. The operation for starting the pseudo game is the predetermined operation in a case where the configuration is such that the pseudo game can be started when the predetermined operation is detected. As explained in the eighth embodiment, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and the operation of any operation section (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) may be performed as appropriate. It is possible to adopt.

As explained in the eighth embodiment, when a game is played using physical medals in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main game is played on a plurality of reels (reel 3L) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. , 3C, 3R) is a game in which game media (medals) can be awarded according to the symbol pattern, and a pseudo game is a game in which a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3C, 3R) is a game that does not award game media (medals) according to the pattern. On the other hand, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is the medalless gaming machine described in the first embodiment, the main game is to display symbols on a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game that can give game media (medals) data according to the mode, and the pseudo game is a game in which the pattern mode of multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is changed when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. This is a game that does not provide corresponding game media (medals) data. The gaming media (medals) data is data corresponding to the gaming value held by the player, and as explained in the first embodiment, is transmitted electromagnetically (or in a manner that the player cannot directly contact the gaming value). It is something that is managed.

(D-2) The gaming machine of (D-1) above,
When the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game, the reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing in FIG. 264, etc.) controls the plurality of reel control means by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game. It is possible to stop the plurality of reels so that the pattern pattern is the same as the pattern pattern of the plurality of reels when the reels are stopped.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game, the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, It is possible to stop the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) so that the pattern pattern is the same as that of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reel 3R) is stopped. It is configured as follows. As a result, even if an operation for proceeding with a pseudo game is omitted, the same pattern pattern will be derived as a result of the pseudo game as if the operation had not been omitted, so the intention to omit the operation Players can make decisions with peace of mind.

However, in the case where the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game and the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped, the pattern appearance of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) and, when the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game, the pattern appearance of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) may be different. There may be. For example, in a pseudo game, when multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by stop control after a stop operation, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, a predetermined symbol (for example, "Red") is stopped. 7" symbol) is stopped and displayed, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the predetermined symbol (for example, the "Red 7" symbol) is not stopped and displayed, while the pseudo game is allowed to proceed in the pseudo game. When multiple reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) are stopped due to omission of the above operation, the system is configured so that a predetermined symbol (for example, the "Red 7" symbol) is always stopped and displayed. It's okay.

(D-3) The gaming machine of (D-1) or (D-2) above,
A predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation,
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means in the pseudo game, the reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.) stops the reels that are rotating after a predetermined operation. control is possible;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation different from a stop operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is detected in a pseudo game, a stop control is performed after the predetermined operation to stop the rotating reels. configured to be executable. As a result, it is possible for the player to perform a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) instead of the stop operation (by omitting the stop operation) at the player's will, as an operation for proceeding with the pseudo game. It is possible to meet the needs of players who wish to perform operations other than stop operations in games, and to further increase the degree of freedom of operations in pseudo games.

In the ninth embodiment, it has been explained that when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed in a pseudo game, all remaining stop button operations are omitted. The stop button operation that is omitted when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed is not limited to this example, and only the current stop button operation may be omitted. Further, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and it is possible to appropriately employ the operation of any operation section (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.). For example, when one operation section (for example, MAX bet button 6a) is operated, all remaining stop button operations are omitted, while other operation sections (for example, 1 bet button 6b) are operated. In this case, the configuration may be such that only the current stop button operation is omitted.

Note that the post-predetermined operation stop control may be the same control as the post-stop operation stop control, or may be different from the post-stop operation stop control. If the stop control after the predetermined operation is the same as the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (the excitation corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) data) and drive control of the stepping motor 51 as stop control after a predetermined operation (excitation data corresponding to an excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are the same control (excitation data). ). On the other hand, if the stop control after the predetermined operation is different from the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (corresponds to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) The drive control of the stepping motor 51 as a stop control after a predetermined operation (the excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) is different from the control (excitation data) data).

(D-4) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-3) above,
It is possible to perform a spinning performance (reel performance) in which the reel is stopped without using stop control after the stop operation,
The pseudo game can be executed after the spinning drum performance is completed;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the pseudo game can be executed after the reel performance in which the reels are stopped without using the stop control after the stop operation is completed. There is. As a result, it is possible to perform a performance in two stages: a reel performance and a pseudo game, and at the stage when a reel performance occurs, the player is informed that a pseudo game will occur subsequently. can be expected.

As the reel effect, a lock at the start of a pseudo game (see step S1223 in FIG. 263) may be adopted, or a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" (see FIG. 243) may be adopted. Reel presentation may also be adopted.

(D-5) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-4) above,
Equipped with lock execution means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1223 in FIG. 263) capable of executing a predetermined lock (pseudo game start lock) in which operations by the player are disabled for a predetermined period of time,
The pseudo game can be executed after the predetermined lock executed by the lock execution means ends,
In the pseudo game, the reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the process in FIG. 266) is capable of executing post-stop operation control (swing control) for operating the reels that have been stopped by the post-stop operation stop control. On the other hand, while the predetermined lock is being executed by the lock execution means, the post-stop operation control is not executed.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the pseudo game can be executed after the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) in which the operation by the player is disabled for a predetermined period of time, and in the pseudo game While it is possible to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) that operates the stopped reels by the stop control after the stop operation, while the predetermined lock (lock at the start of pseudo game) is executed, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed. (oscillation control) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in two stages: a predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) and a pseudo game, and at the stage when the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) occurs, a pseudo game subsequently occurs. It is possible to make the players expect that. In addition, in a pseudo game, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game currently being played is a pseudo game through post-stop motion control (swing control), and the player may consider the game to be the main game. This can prevent misunderstandings. On the other hand, in the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game), operations by the player are disabled, and the possibility of the player mistaking the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) as the main game is relatively low. It has become low. By not executing the post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game), it is possible to highlight the post-stop motion control (swing control) in the pseudo game. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game.

As explained in the ninth embodiment, even if the player performs any operation while the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) is executed, the operation will be invalidated, and the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) will be invalidated. ) is completed, operations for the pseudo game are accepted (see step S1225 in FIG. 263, and steps S1262 and S1263 in FIG. 265). Further, as described in the ninth embodiment, the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo game) may be a lock effect without a reel effect, or may be a lock effect with a reel effect. If the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo game) is accompanied by a reel effect, when the reels stop in the reel effect, it may be possible to perform post-stop operation control (oscillation control), or post-stop operation control. (oscillation control) may not be performed.

(D-6) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-5) above,
A predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing in FIG. 264, etc.)
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means in the pseudo game, it is possible to execute a post-predetermined-operation stop control that stops the rotating reels;
When the stop control after the stop operation is executed, the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected, and when the stop control after the predetermined operation is executed, the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected. It is possible to stop the reel at a timing later than the predetermined timing after the detection of the reel.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation different from a stop operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is detected in a pseudo game, a stop control is performed after the predetermined operation to stop the rotating reels. It is doable. When the stop control after the stop operation is executed, the reels are stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected, and when the stop control after the predetermined operation is executed, the reels are stopped after the predetermined operation (MAX bet The reel is configured to be able to stop the reels at a timing later than a predetermined timing after the button 6a operation) is detected. As a result, it is possible for the player to perform a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) instead of the stop operation (by omitting the stop operation) at the player's will, as an operation for proceeding with the pseudo game. It is possible to meet the needs of players who wish to perform operations other than stop operations in games, and to further increase the degree of freedom of operations in pseudo games. In addition, by delaying the reel stop timing when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed than when the stop operation is performed, it is possible to provide players with novel reel actions. Therefore, even if the stopping operation is omitted, the player can enjoy the pseudo game.

The reel action when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed is not particularly limited, and the reels may be stopped after rotating more than when a stop operation is performed, The reels may be stopped after changing (slowing) the rotational speed (for example, by moving frame by frame) compared to when the stop operation was performed, or by changing the rotational direction (reversely rotating). The reels may be stopped at the top. Such reel action is realized by controlling the stepping motor 51 to drive based on a different excitation pattern when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed than when a stop operation is performed. be able to.

Note that such reel actions (extra rotation, change in rotation speed, change in rotation direction, etc.) may be performed even when a stop operation (stop button 8 operation) is performed in a pseudo game. For example, even after a stop operation is performed on at least one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), the reel is not stopped immediately, but is allowed to rotate once or multiple times (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). The reels may be stopped automatically when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the stop button 8 corresponding to the reel was operated. The one reel may be the first stop reel (the reel that was the target of the first stop operation) or the second stop reel (the reel that was the target of the second stop operation). However, it may be the third stop reel (the reel that is the target of the third stop operation). When the one reel is the first stop reel, the first stop reel may stop after the second to third stop reels stop, and similarly, the first reel may stop. In the case of the second stop reel, the second stop reel may stop after the third stop reel stops. Further, such a reel action may be performed for all reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R). Even if a reel action is performed, the reel will still be stopped due to the stop operation, so if the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the reel will be stopped. It is desirable that post-motion control (swing control) be executed.

(D-7) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-6) above,
When the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game, the reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 266) performs a post-stop operation control (after-stop operation control) that operates the stopped reel when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game. oscillation control), while not executing the post-stop operation control if the reel is stopped by omitting an operation for advancing the pseudo game in the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a reel is stopped by stop control after a stop operation in a pseudo game, it is possible to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) for operating the stopped reel. On the other hand, in the case where the operation for advancing the pseudo game is omitted and the reels are stopped in the pseudo game, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed. If the reels are stopped due to an omission of an operation to proceed with a simulated game, there is a high possibility that the player himself has made the decision to omit the operation. The possibility that this will be mistaken for the main game is relatively low. In such a case, by not executing the after-stop operation control (oscillation control), it is possible to highlight the after-stop operation control (oscillation control) when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo game as the main game.

However, even when the reels are stopped by omitting the operation for advancing the pseudo game in the pseudo game, the post-stop operation control (oscillation control) may be executed. Also, if all remaining stop button operations are omitted, the post-stop operation control (swing control) will not be executed, while if only the current stop button operation is omitted, the post-stop operation control (swing control) will not be executed. It may also be configured to perform swing control). For example, when the reels are stopped due to a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation), post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed, and a predetermined time elapses without the stop button 8 being operated. If the reel stops due to this, the configuration may be such that post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed.

(D-8) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-7) above,
The reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.) controls the rotating reels when a predetermined time elapses without the stop operation being detected by the stop operation detection means in the pseudo game. It is possible to execute automatic stop control to stop the
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses without a stop operation being detected in a pseudo game, automatic stop control can be executed to stop the rotating reels. There is. As a result, it is possible to omit the stopping operation by waiting for a predetermined time at the player's will without performing the stopping operation as an operation for advancing the pseudo game, and it is possible to omit the stopping operation. In addition to being able to meet the needs of players who wish to play games, the degree of freedom of operation in pseudo games can be further increased.

In the ninth embodiment, it has been explained that if a predetermined time elapses without the stop button 8 being operated in the pseudo game, only the current stop button operation is omitted. The stop button operations that are omitted when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without the stop button 8 being operated are not limited to this example, and all remaining stop button operations may be omitted.

Note that the automatic stop control may be the same control as the post-stop operation stop control, or may be different from the post-stop operation stop control. If automatic stop control is the same control as stop control after stop operation, drive control of stepping motor 51 as stop control after stop operation (excitation data corresponding to excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of stepping motor 51) ) and the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as automatic stop control (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are the same control (excitation data). On the other hand, if the automatic stop control is different from the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) data) and the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as automatic stop control (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are different controls (excitation data). .

(D-9) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-8) above,
If a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied in the pseudo game, the operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted,
The reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.), when the predetermined condition is satisfied when two or more of the plurality of reels are rotating in the pseudo game, It is possible to stop one of the two or more reels without using stop control after the stop operation;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is satisfied in a pseudo game, it is possible to omit the operation for proceeding with the pseudo game, and multiple times in the pseudo game. If a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time) is met while two or more of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are rotating, one of the two or more reels The reel is configured so that it can be stopped without using stop control after a stop operation. As a result, it is possible to omit the stop operation for one reel by satisfying a predetermined condition (the elapse of a predetermined time), and it is possible to meet the needs of players who wish to omit the stop operation. At the same time, the degree of freedom of operation in the pseudo game can be further increased.

In the ninth embodiment, an example has been described in which the elapse of a predetermined time is adopted as the predetermined condition, but the predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and may be any operating part (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) can be appropriately employed. For example, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed in a pseudo game, all remaining stop button operations are omitted. In this case, only the current stop button operation may be omitted.

(D-10) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-9) above,
If a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied in the pseudo game, the operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted,
The reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.), when the predetermined condition is satisfied when two or more of the plurality of reels are rotating in the pseudo game, It is possible to stop all of the two or more reels without using stop control after the stop operation;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied in a pseudo game, the operation for advancing the pseudo game can be omitted, and in the pseudo game If a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is met while two or more reels out of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are rotating, all of the two or more reels are stopped. It is configured so that it can be stopped without using post-operation stop control. This makes it possible to omit the stop operation for all rotating reels by satisfying a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation), which meets the needs of players who wish to omit the stop operation. In addition to being able to meet these demands, it is also possible to further reduce the operational burden.

In the ninth embodiment, an example has been described in which the MAX bet button 6a operation is adopted as the predetermined condition, but the predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and may be any operating part (for example, the start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a operation). It is possible to adopt the operation of the bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) as appropriate. Furthermore, the passage of a predetermined time may be adopted as the predetermined condition. For example, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined time elapses without the stop button 8 being operated in a pseudo game, only the current stop button operation is omitted, but in this case , all remaining stop button operations may be omitted.

(D-11) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-10) above,
Pseudo game determining means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIGS. 250 and 271) capable of determining to execute the pseudo game;
Predetermined variables that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during a predetermined period (advantageous period) (value of advantageous period game number counter, value of control game number counter, value of advantageous period payout number counter, a predetermined period ending means capable of ending the predetermined period when the value of the payout number counter) satisfies a specific condition (operating condition of the limiter);
The pseudo game determining means is capable of determining to execute the pseudo game in the predetermined period, and also determines that the predetermined variable is to be executed during a specific period (quasi-limit processing (game count)) before the predetermined variable satisfies the specific condition. ) or the period after the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated), it is not decided to execute the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, predetermined variables (the value of the advantageous period game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, etc. It is possible to end a predetermined period (advantageous section) when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter) satisfy a specific condition (limiter operating condition). While it is possible to decide to execute a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period), it is also possible to determine the execution of a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period), and also to determine the execution of a pseudo game in a predetermined period (advantageous period). , the value of the control payout number counter) satisfies a specific condition (a period after semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated), a pseudo game is executed. It is configured so that it does not decide to do so. When a pseudo-gaming is executed, it is thought that it will create a sense of expectation in the player, but during a specific period (the period after the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated). By not executing the pseudo-game, it is possible to suppress the feeling of anticipation from being excessively aroused.

As described in the eighth embodiment, it may be configured such that the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is not executed when the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated. The pseudo bonus transition lottery may be a lottery based on an advantageous section winning sub-flag (internal winning combination) or an advantageous section winning sub-flag (a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed). As explained in the eighth embodiment, the specific period is not limited to the period after the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, but may be a predetermined period (advantageous section). It is possible to configure the system so that the decision to execute the pseudo game is not made in any period before the end of the game.

(D-12) Any of the gaming machines (D-1) to (D-11) above,
Predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) by a player;
a display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying an image (a "hit the lever" image or a bet request image) for prompting the player to perform the predetermined operation;
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means, it is possible to start the pseudo game;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, an image (a "hit the lever" image or a bet request image) for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7 or operation of the bet button) is displayed. The pseudo game is configured to be able to start when a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is detected. This allows players to participate in simulated games according to their own will, and provides players with an opportunity to flexibly decide whether or not to participate in simulated games depending on the gaming situation. can.

In the ninth embodiment, when a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, after locking is performed at the start of the pseudo game, a predetermined operation (start lever 7 It has been explained that the transition to a pseudo game (the rotation for the pseudo game is started) is triggered by the execution of the above operation. In addition, when a lock performance corresponding to any of lock performance numbers "3" to "5" is selected in a unit game in which a replay wins, a predetermined operation (bet button operation) is performed. It has been explained that the game shifts to a pseudo game (the rotation for the pseudo game starts). In addition, when a lock performance corresponding to any of lock performance numbers "3" to "5" is selected in a unit game in which a winning role other than replay is won, a predetermined operation (start lever 7) is performed. It has been explained that this is an opportunity to shift to a pseudo game (the rotation for the pseudo game is started). In this way, the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is adopted as a condition for starting a pseudo game, and the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is performed. This may be used as an opportunity to start a pseudo game.

In addition, if the predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7 or bet button operation) to start the pseudo game is not performed, the transition to the pseudo game may be triggered by the elapse of a predetermined waiting time. However, if a predetermined waiting time has elapsed, the transition to the pseudo game may not be made (the pseudo game may be canceled). The lock at the start of the pseudo game may be a lock that lasts for the predetermined waiting time. In this case, in the pseudo game start lock, only a predetermined operation is accepted, and even if other game operations are performed, the corresponding operations may be invalidated. As described in the eighth embodiment, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and may include operating any operation section (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) as appropriate. It is possible to adopt.

[Tenth embodiment]
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. The tenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of the parts that apply to the tenth embodiment as well as those in the first to ninth embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ..." means that it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if the description is as follows, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the tenth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to ninth embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the tenth embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the tenth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

Further, even if the shape is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the ninth embodiment, components having similar functions may be given the same reference numerals for convenience. Furthermore, even if the machine has the same shape or the same processing as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments, different symbols or step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Setting suggestion execution processing>
FIG. 275 is a flowchart showing the setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit.

The setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 275 is a process for executing a setting suggestion effect. The setting suggestion performance is a performance that can suggest setting values set for the pachi-slot machine 1. As explained in the first embodiment, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage of the player regarding the game (six levels of setting 1 to setting 6), and the lower the setting value (the closer to setting 1), the higher the setting value is. ) The degree of advantage of the player becomes relatively low, and the higher the setting value (closer to setting 6), the degree of advantage of the player becomes relatively higher.

Setting suggestion presentations include setting suggestion presentation I, setting suggestion presentation II, setting suggestion presentation III, setting suggestion presentation IV, and setting suggestion presentation V. Setting suggestion performance I is a performance that can occur only when the setting value is any of settings 2 to 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is setting 1). Setting suggestion performance II is a performance that can occur only when the setting value is any of settings 3 to 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is either setting 1 or 2).

Setting suggestion performance III is a performance that can occur only when the setting value is any of settings 4 to 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is any of settings 1 to 3). The setting suggestion performance IV is a performance that can occur only when the setting value is either setting 5 or 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is any of settings 1 to 4). The setting suggestion performance V is a performance that can occur only when the setting value is setting 6 (and cannot occur when the setting value is any of settings 1 to 5).

That is, when setting suggestion performance I occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 2 or more, and when setting suggestion performance II occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 3 or more, If setting suggestion performance III occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 4 or higher, and if setting suggestion performance IV occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 5 or higher, and setting suggestion When effect V occurs, it is determined that the setting value is setting 6. In this way, setting values can be suggested using the setting suggestion effects I to V.

In each setting suggestion performance, an image (character image) for suggesting a setting value is displayed on the main display device 210. In setting suggestion performance I, character image I (predetermined character image) is displayed on main display device 210, thereby suggesting that the setting value is setting 2 or higher. Further, in setting suggestion performance II, character image II (a character image different from character image I) is displayed on main display device 210, thereby suggesting that the setting value is setting 3 or higher.

Furthermore, in setting suggestion performance III, character image III (a character image different from character image I and character image II) is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby suggesting that the setting value is setting 4 or higher. Ru. In setting suggestion performance IV, a character image IV (a character image different from character image I, character image II, and character image III) is displayed on the main display device 210, and thereby the setting value is set to 5 or more. This suggests that.

In setting suggestion performance V, character images V (character images I, character images II, character images III, and character images different from character images IV) are displayed on the main display device 210, and thereby setting values are set. It is suggested that it is 6. Image data corresponding to character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V are stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see FIG. 3), respectively.

Further, the setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 275 is a process performed in the sub control circuit 200 when the AT state ends. Although not shown, when the AT state termination condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 generates AT state termination command data and transmits the generated AT state termination command data to the sub control circuit 200. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the AT state has ended.

As described in the first embodiment, the gaming period in the AT state is managed by managing the number of games, managing the number of sets, managing the number of payouts, managing the number of differential coins, managing the number of navigations, etc. The main CPU 101 updates these variables (counters) in step S151 of FIG. Then, when the updated counter value reaches a predetermined value, the main CPU 101 transmits AT state end command data to the sub control circuit 200.

In addition, even if the updated counter value reaches the predetermined value, the AT state will start again from the next game (for example, if you have 1G continuous stock or win the ceiling shortening lottery) (in this case), the main CPU 101 may not transmit the AT state end command data to the sub control circuit 200. That is, when the predetermined AT state gaming period ends and the AT state is not extended, the AT state end command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. You can.

In the setting suggestion performance execution process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not formal login has been performed (step S1501). As will be described later, formal login is performed by the player registering as a member and entering a password. When an operation for formal login is performed, the sub CPU 201 sets the formal login flag to ON. In the process of step S1501, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the official login flag is set on. If it is determined that an official login has not been performed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that an official login has been performed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting suggestion effect setting is enabled (step S1502). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether "valid" is set as the setting suggestion effect setting on the setting suggestion effect setting screen (see FIG. 281). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect setting is not valid, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect setting is enabled, the sub CPU 201 specifies a period for setting suggestion effect (step S1503). The periods for setting suggestion effects include "Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period ``I'' and ``Period J'' are provided.

"Period A" is a period in which the number of games after power-on is 1 or more and 1000 or less. "Period B" is a period in which the number of games after power-on is 1001 or more and 2000 or less. "Period C" is a period in which the number of games after power-on is 2001 or more and 3000 or less. “Period D” is a period in which the number of games after power-on is 3001 or more and 4000 or less. "Period E" is a period during which the number of games after power-on is 4001 or more and 5000 or less. “Period F” is a period during which the number of games after power-on is 5001 or more and 6000 or less. “Period G” is a period during which the number of games after power-on is 6001 or more and 7000 or less. “Period H” is a period in which the number of games after power-on is 7001 or more and 8000 or less. “Period I” is a period in which the number of games after power-on is 8001 or more and 9000 or less. “Period J” is a period during which the number of games played after power-on is 9001 or more.

As described later, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen (see FIG. 281), "Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G ”, “Period H”, “Period I”, and “Period J”, setting suggestion effect types can be set respectively. As setting suggestion effect types, "Type A", "Type B", and "Type C" are provided. In this embodiment, the type of setting suggestion effect that occurs can differ depending on which setting suggestion effect type is set among "Type A," "Type B," and "Type C." It has become.

The number of games after power-on is the number of unit games played in the pachi-slot machine 1 since the power was turned on, and is managed in the number-of-games-after-power-on counter. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the number of games after power-on counter by 1 after executing the process of step S14 in FIG. Information indicating the value of the number-of-games-after-power-on counter is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, so that the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize the number of games after the power-on.

In the process of step S1503, the sub CPU 201 selects ten settings suggestion production periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “ One of the period G, period H, period I, and period J to which the current number of games after power-on belongs is specified. For example, if the current number of games after power-on is 100, the sub CPU 201 specifies "Period A" as one setting suggestion effect period, and if the current number of games after power-on is 7777, "Period H" is specified as one setting suggestion presentation period.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not this is the first time that the AT state has ended during the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 (step S1504). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the first time that the AT state end command data is received from the main control circuit 100 during the setting suggestion production period. If it is determined that this is not the first time that the AT state has ended during the setting suggestion presentation period, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that this is the first time that the AT state has ended in the setting suggestion presentation period specified in step S1503, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion presentation type set for the setting suggestion presentation period is " Type A" is determined (step S1505). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type A", the sub CPU 201 executes a setting suggestion effect execution process for type A (step S1506). The setting suggestion rendering execution process for type A will be explained later using FIG. 276. After executing the process in step S1506, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1505, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 is not "Type A", the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect type for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503. It is determined whether the selected setting suggestion effect type is "type B" (step S1507). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type B", the sub CPU 201 executes a setting suggestion effect execution process for type B (step S1508). The setting suggestion rendering execution process for type B will be explained later using FIG. 277. After executing the process in step S1508, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1507, if it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 is not "type B", the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect type for the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503. It is determined whether the selected setting suggestion effect type is "type C" (step S1509). If it is determined that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type C", the sub CPU 201 executes a setting suggestion effect execution process for type C (step S1510). The setting suggestion rendering execution process for type C will be explained later using FIG. 278. If it is determined in step S1509 that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is not "Type C", or after executing the process in step S1510, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine. do.

<Setting suggestion execution processing for type A>
FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the type A setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit.

The setting suggestion effect execution process for type A shown in FIG. 276 is a process performed in step S1506 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process) in the sub control circuit 200.

In the type A setting suggestion performance execution process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 1 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1521 ).

If it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 1 (it is any of setting 2 to setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 selects the setting suggestion effect I. (Step S1522). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. Thereby, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210.

If it is determined in step S1521 that the setting value of pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), or after executing the process of step S1522, the sub CPU 201 executes this subroutine. end.

<Setting suggestion execution processing for type B>
FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the type B setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit.

The type B setting suggestion performance execution process shown in FIG. 277 is a process performed in step S1508 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion performance execution process) in the sub control circuit 200.

In the type B setting suggestion performance execution process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 1 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1541 ). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 1 (any of settings 2 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value 1 is setting 2 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1542). If it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 2 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion performance I (step S1543). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. Thereby, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1543, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1542 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 2 (any of settings 3 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value of the device 1 is setting 3 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1544). When determining that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 3 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 randomly selects either setting suggestion performance I or setting suggestion performance II. (Step S1545). The probability that the setting suggestion effect I is selected and the probability that the setting suggestion effect II is selected can be arbitrarily designed, but in this case, it is assumed that these probabilities are the same (each is 1/2). do.

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1545 (step S1546). In this process, sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to character image I or image data corresponding to character image II, depending on the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1545. As a result, either character image I or character image II is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1546, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1544 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 3 (any of settings 4 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of the device 1 is setting 4 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1547). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 4 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 performs setting suggestion presentation I, setting suggestion presentation II, and setting suggestion presentation III. One of them is selected by lottery (step S1548). The probability that setting suggestion performance I is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance II is selected, and the probability that setting suggestion performance III is selected can be designed arbitrarily, but here, these probabilities are are the same (1/3 each).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1548 (step S1549). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates image data corresponding to character image I, image data corresponding to character image II, or image data corresponding to character image III, depending on the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1548. Set. As a result, one of the character images I, II, and III is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1549, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1547 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not setting 4 (it is either setting 5 or setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value of the device 1 is setting 5 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1550). When it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 5 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 performs setting suggestion presentation I, setting suggestion presentation II, setting suggestion presentation III, and setting suggestion presentation III. , one of the setting suggestion effects IV is selected by lottery (step S1551). The probability that setting suggestion performance I is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance II is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance III is selected, and the probability that setting suggestion performance IV is selected can be designed arbitrarily. However, here it is assumed that these probabilities are the same (each 1/4).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1551 (step S1552). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates image data corresponding to character image I, image data corresponding to character image II, image data corresponding to character image III, or , sets image data corresponding to character image IV. As a result, any one of character image I, character image II, character image III, and character image IV is displayed on main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1552, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1550 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not setting 5 (setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 selects setting suggestion performance I, setting suggestion Any one of the effect II, the setting suggestion effect III, the setting suggestion effect IV, and the setting suggestion effect V is selected by lottery (step S1553). The probability that setting suggestion performance I is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance II is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance III is selected, the probability that setting suggestion performance IV is selected, and the probability that setting suggestion performance V is selected. Each probability can be arbitrarily designed, but here it is assumed that these probabilities are the same (each 1/5).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1553 (step S1554). In this process, the sub CPU 201 selects image data corresponding to character image I, image data corresponding to character image II, image data corresponding to character image III, character Image data corresponding to image IV or image data corresponding to character image V is set. As a result, any one of the character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1554, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Setting suggestion execution processing for type C>
FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the type C setting suggestion effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device when the AT state ends.

The type C setting suggestion performance execution process shown in FIG. 278 is a process performed in step S1510 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion performance execution process) in the sub control circuit 200.

In the type C setting suggestion performance execution process, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is setting 1 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1561 ). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 1 (any of settings 2 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value 1 is setting 2 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1562). If it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 2 out of the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion performance I (step S1563). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. Thereby, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1563, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1562 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 2 (any of settings 3 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value of the device 1 is setting 3 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1564). If it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 3 out of the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion performance II (step S1565). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image II. Thereby, character image II is displayed on main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1565, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1564 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 3 (any of settings 4 to 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is setting 4 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1566). If it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 4 among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion effect III (step S1567). In this process, sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to character image III. Thereby, character image III is displayed on main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1567, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1566 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not setting 4 (it is either setting 5 or setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether the setting value of the device 1 is setting 5 out of six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1568). If it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 5 out of the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion performance IV (step S1569). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image IV. Thereby, the character image IV is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1569, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1568 that the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is not setting 5 (setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion effect V. (Step S1570). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image V. Thereby, the character image V is displayed on the main display device 210. After executing the process in step S1570, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

FIG. 279 shows the AT end screen being displayed on the main display device 210. The AT end screen is a screen displayed on the main display device 210 when the AT state ends. The AT end screen has an AT end display area 1251 at approximately the center of the screen, an AT state game result display area 1252 at the top of the screen, and a setting suggestion image display area 1253 at the bottom right of the screen. An image indicating that the AT state has ended is displayed in the AT end display area 1251. In the AT state game result display area 1252, an image showing the result of the game played in the AT state (for example, the number of medals paid out) is displayed. In the setting suggestion image display area 1253, one of the character images I to V is displayed as a setting suggestion image. In the example shown in FIG. 279, character image V is displayed, and it is shown that the setting value is confirmed to be setting 6.

<Hall menu screen>
FIG. 280 is a diagram illustrating an example of a hall menu screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state.

As described in the first embodiment, when the administrator at the game parlor side performs a setting confirmation operation or a setting change operation, a hall menu (hall menu screen) is displayed. The setting confirmation operation is an operation for confirming the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1. The setting change operation is an operation for changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The setting confirmation operation and the setting change operation are each performed using the setting key type switch 52. The setting key type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an administrator at the game parlor inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it to the initial position from the counterclockwise state. and turns off. When the pachislot machine 1 is powered off, turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power brings the setting into a state where settings can be changed (setting change state), and the pachislot machine 1 is powered on. If the setting key-type switch 52 is turned on in this state, the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation state).

When the setting confirmation state is entered in this way, the hall menu screen shown in FIG. 280 is displayed on the main display device 210. A similar hall menu screen is also displayed on the main display device 210 when the settings are changed. When the setting confirmation state is reached, command data indicating this state (setting confirmation start command data) is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. Furthermore, when a setting change state is entered, command data indicating this (setting change start command data) is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the sub control circuit 200 can recognize that the setting confirmation state or the setting change state has been entered.

As shown in FIG. 280, the hall menu screen includes a hall menu item display area 1300 on the left side of the screen, a button display area 1310 at the bottom of the screen at approximately the center in the horizontal direction, and a preview display area 1320 on the right side of the screen. .

A plurality of hall menu items are displayed in the hall menu item display area 1300. Hall menu items include time setting, total medal information, setting change/confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning setting, power saving mode setting, termination setting, automatic payment setting, and setting suggestion effect setting. ing. The time setting, total medal information, setting change/confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning setting, power saving mode setting, termination setting, and automatic payment setting are as described in the first embodiment. The setting suggestion effect setting will be explained later using FIG. 281.

In the button display area 1310, images corresponding to the presentation button group (see FIG. 3) are displayed. The production button group includes a decision button arranged in the center and selection buttons (up selection button, down selection button, left selection button, and right selection button) arranged around the decision button. By operating each selection button, the game parlor manager can select any one of the plural hall menu items. In FIG. 280, currently selected hole menu items are shown surrounded by solid lines, and unselected hole menu items are shown surrounded by dotted lines. By operating the enter button while one hole menu item is selected, the manager at the game parlor side can decide on that hole menu item. Note that the screen in which "time setting" is selected as a hall menu item is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

The preview display area 1320 displays a preview screen for the selected hall menu item among the plurality of hall menu items. FIG. 280 shows the time setting screen being previewed in a state where "time setting" is selected as a hall menu item. When making a new setting (for example, time setting) for one hole menu item, the manager at the gaming parlor operates the enter button while the hole menu item is selected. As a result, when the relevant hall menu item is determined, a screen for making the new settings (for example, a time setting screen) is displayed, and by operating the select button and enter button on the screen, the new settings can be changed. Settings can be made.

Furthermore, in the extremely small area at the bottom right of the hall menu screen, the words "Settings are being confirmed" are displayed in the settings confirmation state, and the words "Settings are being changed" are displayed in the settings change state. This allows the game parlor manager to understand whether the settings are confirmed or changed. The hall menu screen displayed in the settings confirmation state and the hall menu screen displayed in the settings change state differ only in the characters, and the hall menu item display area 1300, button display area 1310, and preview display area 1320 are different. The contents are the same.

Note that when the setting confirmation state or setting change state ends, the display of the hall menu screen can also be configured to end. When the setting key type switch 52 is turned off in the setting confirmation state or setting change state, command data indicating this is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. Thereby, the sub control circuit 200 can recognize that the setting confirmation state or setting change state has ended.

Alternatively, if settings are changed in the settings change state, the hall menu screen may be displayed even after the settings change state ends. On the hall menu screen displayed at this time, "end hall menu" may be displayed in addition to the hall menu items shown in FIG. 280. When the setting change state is completed, it is possible to play the game, but the administrator at the game parlor side can select and confirm "End Hall Menu" by operating the selection button and the decision button. , Thereby, the display of the hole menu screen can be ended and the game screen can be shifted to. On the other hand, in the setting confirmation state or setting change state, since no game can be played, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be ended by operating the selection button and the decision button.

As described in the first embodiment, settings can be changed by operating the reset switch 53 in the settings change state. When a setting change is made, initialization command data (see step S27 in FIG. 24) is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, and the initialization command data includes the setting change. Contains information indicating what has been done. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the settings have been changed.

<Setting suggestion production setting screen>
281 to 283 are diagrams showing examples of setting suggestion effect setting screens displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 281 is a screen displayed on the main display device 210 when "setting suggestion effect setting" is selected and determined as a hall menu item on the hall menu screen. The administrator at the game parlor side can set a setting suggestion performance type for each setting suggestion performance period by operating the selection button and enter button on the setting suggestion performance setting screen.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen includes an operation item display area 1330 at the top of the screen, a valid/invalid setting area 1340 located below the operational item display area 1330, and a setting suggestion area 1340 located below the valid/invalid setting area 1340. It has a production type setting area 1350.

In the operation item display area 1330, "return", "determination", "setting history", "password", and "initialization" are displayed as items that can be operated by the administrator of the game parlor. The administrator at the game parlor side selects any of "Back", "Confirm", "Setting history", "Password", and "Initialization" by operating the selection button and the decision button. can be determined. In the valid/invalid setting area 1340, “invalid” and “valid” are displayed as selection items for invalidating or validating the setting suggestion effect setting. The manager of the game parlor can select and decide either "invalid" or "valid" by operating the selection button and the decision button.

The setting suggestion effect type setting area 1350 has 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “ "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J") are displayed, and next to each setting suggestion production period, "None" and "Type A" are displayed as the setting suggestion production type. ”, “Type B”, and “Type C” are displayed. By operating the selection button and the decision button, the administrator of the game parlor selects "None", "Type A", "Type B", and "Type C" for each of the 10 types of setting suggestion production periods. ” can be selected and decided.

As explained using FIGS. 275 to 278, "Type A" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling so that character image I among displayable character images (setting suggestion images) always appears. . "Type B" is a setting suggestion production type for controlling displayable character images (setting suggestion images) to appear uniformly. "Type C" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling to appear the best (capable of making the most advantageous suggestion) character image among displayable character images (setting suggestion images). "None" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling so that the character image does not appear. The character images that can be displayed are character image I when the setting value is setting 2, character image I and character image II when the setting value is setting 3, and character images when the setting value is setting 4. In some cases, they are character image I, character image II, and character image III, and when the setting value is setting 5, they are character image I, character image II, character image III, and character image IV, When the setting value is setting 6, the characters are character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V.

The administrator of the gaming parlor can set the setting suggestion effect type by following the steps (i) to (iv) below.
(i) In the valid/invalid setting area 1340, select and determine "valid" by operating the selection button and the determination button.
(ii) In the setting suggestion effect type setting area 1350, by operating the selection button and the enter button, the setting suggestion effect type for "period A" is set to "none", "type A", "type B", and Select and determine one of "Type C".
(iii) Regarding "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J" , repeat the same operation as (ii) above.
(iv) In the operation item display area 1330, select and confirm "Decide" by operating the selection button and the determination button.

As a result, setting suggestion effect types are set for each of the 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods, depending on the currently set setting values and the contents selected and determined in (ii) and (iii) above. Then, when the AT state ends, the setting suggestion effect described above will be performed (see FIGS. 275 to 278).

Here, although not shown, when the operation (iv) above is performed, a message "Do you want to register this setting suggestion effect setting?" is displayed. On the other hand, if "YES" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the determination button, the contents selected and determined in (ii) and (iii) above are registered. The registered content will be referred to as a setting suggestion effect setting preset. The setting suggestion effect setting preset indicates the correspondence between each setting suggestion effect period and the setting suggestion effect type selected and determined for the setting suggestion effect period. When registering a preset for setting suggestion effect settings, you can assign a name (for example, "Custom for event day", "Custom for collection day, etc.") to the preset for setting suggestion effect setting by performing a prescribed operation. It is possible to attach The name (setting suggestion effect setting name) is saved together with the setting suggestion effect setting preset. That is, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting suggestion effect setting preset and the setting suggestion effect setting name in association with each other in the sub RAM 203.

Further, when the above operation (iv) is performed, a password is displayed (issued). This password will be referred to as a setting suggestion effect setting password. The setting suggestion effect setting password is based on the contents selected and determined in (ii) and (iii) above (each setting suggestion effect period and the setting suggestion effect type selected and determined for the setting suggestion effect period). (correspondence relationship) is encrypted. The sub CPU 201 generates a setting suggestion effect setting password by converting the information indicating the correspondence into a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols (including letters and numbers). The generated setting suggestion effect setting password is displayed on the main display device 210. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a configuration such as a table for converting information indicating the correspondence into a symbol string, and is capable of determining a setting suggestion production setting password. Since the technology related to password generation is a conventionally well-known technology in the gaming machine field (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-139519), detailed explanation will be omitted.

If the above setting suggestion effect setting preset is registered, the administrator of the game parlor side can suggest settings by following the steps (v) to (viii) below instead of the steps (i) to (iv) above. You can also set the production type.
(v) In the operation item display area 1330, select and confirm "setting history" by operating the selection button and the decision button.
(vi) The screen changes according to the above (v), and a list of registered setting suggestion effect setting presets (names for setting suggestion effect setting) is displayed.
(vii) By operating the selection button and the determination button, one of the setting suggestion effect setting names displayed in (vi) above is selected and determined.
(viii) Return to the setting suggestion effect setting screen by the above (vii), and select and confirm "Decide" by operating the selection button and the determination button in the operation item display area 1330.

On the setting suggestion effect setting screen in (viii) above, the setting suggestion effect setting preset corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting name selected and determined in (vii) above has the same correspondence with each setting suggestion effect period. The setting suggestion effect type is selected and determined. Thereby, it is possible to set the setting suggestion effect type with the same content as the setting suggestion effect setting preset.

Furthermore, instead of the steps (i) to (iv) above, the manager at the gaming parlor can also set the setting suggestion performance type by following the steps (ix) to (xii) below.
(ix) In the operation item display area 1330, select and confirm "password" by operating the selection button and the decision button.
(x) The screen changes according to (ix) above, and a password input screen (a screen on which a plurality of symbols are arranged) is displayed.
(xi) In the password input screen, by operating the selection button and the decision button, input a symbol string known in advance (password for setting suggestion effect setting).
(xii) Return to the setting suggestion effect setting screen through the above (xi), and select and confirm "Decide" by operating the selection button and the determination button in the operation item display area 1330.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen in (xii) above has the same correspondence as the content corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting password input in (xi) above (correspondence between each setting suggestion effect period and setting suggestion effect type). In relation to this, the setting suggestion presentation type is selected and determined for each setting suggestion presentation period. The sub CPU 201 decodes the information encrypted using the setting suggestion effect setting password input in (xi) above, and reflects the decrypted content on the setting suggestion effect setting screen in (xii) above. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a configuration such as a table for specifying the encrypted information, and is capable of decoding the information. Since the technology related to password deciphering is a conventionally well-known technology in the gaming machine field (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-081521), a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As a result, by recording the setting suggestion effect setting password issued in the past and inputting the setting suggestion effect setting password, the setting suggestion effect will be suggested with the same content as the content corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting password. It is possible to set the performance type. Further, even in gaming machines other than the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to set the setting suggestion effect type with the same content as the pachi-slot machine 1 by inputting the setting suggestion effect setting password.

Note that when "Initialize" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the determination button in the operation item display area 1330, the currently set setting suggestion effect setting is canceled. As a result, "none" is set as the setting suggestion presentation type for all setting suggestion presentation periods. That is, the setting suggestion effect setting is initialized. Such initialization is performed only when "initialization" is selected and determined on the setting suggestion effect setting screen, and even if the setting value is changed, the setting suggestion effect setting is not initialized. Further, in the operation item display area 1330, when "Back" is selected and determined by operating the selection button and the determination button, the screen is switched from the setting suggestion effect setting screen to the hall menu screen.

As described above, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. , "Period G," "Period H," "Period I," and "Period J").

On the other hand, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. Set the setting suggestion effect type for each of "19 times", "AT ends 20 times", "AT ends 21 to 29 times", "AT ends 30 times", and "AT ends 31 times ~"). This is what we can do. As described above, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the AT state ends.

"AT end once" refers to a setting suggestion effect performed when the first AT state ends after power is turned on. "AT ends 2nd to 9th time" refers to a setting suggestion performance that is performed when any of the AT states ends from the 2nd to 9th time after the power is turned on. "10 AT ends" refers to a setting suggestion performance that is performed when the AT state ends for the 10th time after the power is turned on. "AT ends 11th to 19th time" refers to a setting suggestion performance that is performed when any of the AT states ends 11th to 19th time after the power is turned on. "AT end 20 times" refers to a setting suggestion performance that is performed when the AT state ends for the 20th time after the power is turned on. "AT ends 21st to 29th time" refers to a setting suggestion effect that is performed when any of the AT states ends 21st to 29th times after the power is turned on. "AT completed 30 times" refers to a setting suggestion performance that is performed when the AT state ends for the 30th time after the power is turned on. "AT end 31st time~" refers to a setting suggestion performance that is performed when the AT state ends after the 31st time after the power is turned on.

A setting suggestion effect type can be set for such an AT end number by a procedure similar to the procedure explained using FIG. 281. As a result, when the AT state ends, one of the setting suggestion effects I to V will be set depending on the currently set setting value and the number of AT states after the power is turned on. It is possible to perform suggestive performances. For example, if setting 6 is set as the setting value and "Type C" is set for "AT end once", the displayable The best character image (namely, character image V) among the character images can be made to appear.

In addition, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. , "16:00 to 18:00," "18:00 to 20:00," "20:00 to 22:00," and "22:00 to 23:00"). It is said that A setting suggestion effect type can be set for such a time range by a procedure similar to the procedure explained using FIG. 281. Thereby, when the AT state ends, any one of the setting suggestion performances I to V can be performed depending on the currently set setting value and the time when the AT state ends. For example, if setting 6 is set as the setting value and "Type C" is set for "10:00 to 11:00", when the AT state ends at 10:50, the displayable The best character image (namely, character image V) among the character images can be made to appear.

<Login>
FIG. 284(A) is a diagram showing an overview of the menu screen displayed on the main display device. FIG. 284(B) is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a menu screen. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing a character customization screen for customizing a character. FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example of a game history screen. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing a gaming system.

When the decision button of the performance button group is operated in a situation where no game is being played, the sub control circuit 200 calls up the menu screen shown in FIG. 284(A) and displays it on the main display device 210. As mentioned above, the effect button group includes the cross key (up selection button, down selection button, left selection button, and right selection button) and the enter button, and when the player operates the cross key, the selection cursor moves. When the player moves in the operated direction and operates the determination button, the item pointed by the selection cursor is selected (determined).

As shown in FIG. 284(B), the menu screen has main menus such as "Custom Game", "Volume Adjustment", "Game Data", "Payout/Sequence", and "Special Site", and some of the main menus are A more detailed submenu is also provided. For example, the main menu ``Custom Game'' includes submenus ``Character Selection,'' ``Easy Start,'' ``Enter Password,'' ``View Intermediate Record,'' ``Record and Finish,'' and ``Membership Registration.'' The submenu “Character Selection” is a menu for customizing the character used in the production performed on the main display device 210.

The submenus ``Easy Start'' to ``Membership Registration'' are menus used for registered games by players. In recent Pachislot machines, by registering a player who plays the game, the player is sometimes given benefits that do not affect the ball output compared to a player who does not register. Specifically, when a player is registered, the sub-control circuit 200 records the game history after registration (for example, the game history such as the number of bonuses and the probability of winning a small role), as well as the game history after the registration. (including the performance history of the performance), and provides certain benefits based on this history. This game history can include not only information regarding the current game, but also information regarding the previous game. Specifically, the gaming history of each player is managed on the server, and when playing a game, the server notifies the gaming machine via a mobile phone etc., so that the player can easily check the gaming history of the previous game. You can play games while inheriting your history.

The submenu "Easy Start" is a menu operated when only the history of the current game is to be accumulated without taking over the history of the previous game, that is, for performing a simple login. Further, the submenu "Enter password" is a menu that is operated to further accumulate the history of the current game while inheriting the history of the previous game, that is, to perform formal login. Here, a simple login can be completed by simply operating the submenu "Easy Start", while a formal login can be performed by registering as a member and entering a password into the Pachislot machine 1. be exposed. Therefore, when comparing simple login and formal login, it can be said that simple login has a simpler registration procedure than formal login, and conversely, formal login requires more complicated registration than simple login. It can be said that it is a procedure.

The submenu ``view intermediate records'' is a menu operated when logging in (simple or formal) and checking intermediate records of the game history accumulated up to that point. The submenu "Record and exit" is a menu operated when logging in (simple or formal) and recording the game history accumulated up to that point on the server. When these submenus ``view intermediate recording'' and ``record and end'' are operated, the accumulated gaming history is read out from the pachi-slot machine 1 onto the player's mobile phone or server. Further, the submenu "membership registration" is a menu operated to perform initial registration of a player on the server.

The character customization screen shown in FIG. 285 has a "character" selection field, a "costume" selection field, a "pose" selection field, and an "accessories" selection field, and each selection field has a plurality of selectable icons. provided. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the character is customized based on the icon content selected in each selection field at the timing when the determination icon is operated.

The "Character" selection field is used to select a character, and the sub-control circuit 200 determines one character selected in the "Character" selection field from among a plurality of types of characters. Additionally, the "Costume" selection field is used to select the character's costume, the "Pose" selection field is used to select the character's pose, and the "Accessories" selection field is used to select the character's accessories. used for The "costume" selection field to the "accessories" selection field are used to customize the character's display mode (costume, pose, accessories), respectively. The sub-control circuit 200 determines one display mode selected in the corresponding selection column from among a plurality of display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection column.

On this character customization screen, the player can customize the character by operating buttons using a group of presentation buttons. When the character is customized, the sub control circuit 200 selects the character selected in the "Character" selection field wearing the costume selected in the "Costume" selection field and the accessory selected in the "Accessories" selection field. The pose selected in the "pose" selection field is displayed on the main display device 210.

In the custom game, a performance is performed using characters according to the content of the customization. A custom game starts when a determination icon is operated (a custom start operation is performed), and ends when an end icon (not shown) is operated (a custom end operation is performed).

FIG. 286(A) is the first page of the game history called from the submenu "Game History 1", and FIG. 286(B) is the second page of the game history called from the submenu "Game History 2". be. As shown in FIG. 286(A), the first page of the game history displays the total number of games, current number of games, bonus number, CZ number, ART number, top-up zone 1 and 2 times, and top-up zone 3 times. be done. In this way, on the first page of the gaming history, in addition to the total number of games and the current number of games, the number of times advantageous gaming conditions for the player, such as bonuses and ART, have been played are displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 286(A), a "next page" icon is displayed on the first page of the game history. When this "next page" icon is selected, the second page of the game history is called up. Although the first page of the game history can be viewed by all players, the second page of the game history can only be viewed by players who have officially logged in, and cannot be viewed by players who are not logged in or who are not logged in. Players with simple login cannot display it. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 200 hides the "next page" icon or makes it impossible to select it when no login is performed or only a simple login is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 286(B), the second page of the game history shows the number of times (number of wins) that watermelon ("F_Watermelon") was determined as an internal winning combination, and the chance number A ("F_Watermelon"). The number of wins for chance role B (``F_chance role 2''), the number of wins for weak cherry (``F_weak cherry''), the number of wins for strong cherry (``F_strong cherry''), and the number of times the confirmed cherry (“F_confirmed cherry”) has been won is displayed. That is, on the second page of the game history, the number of wins of so-called rare combinations is displayed.

In this way, by displaying the number of rare winnings only for players who have officially logged in, Pachislot Machine 1 allows players who have gone through the trouble of registering through formal procedures to directly enter the game. It is possible to give a benefit (display of the number of winnings of rare roles) that does not affect the player. As a result, players who wish to display the number of wins of rare combinations can be encouraged to use formal registration, and as a result, they can develop an attachment to the gaming machine and increase the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, Pachislot machine 1 does not display the second page of the gaming history that displays the number of rare winnings to players who have logged in using the simple login procedure. It is possible to prevent the player from surreptitiously viewing the results of another person's game after the other person has played the game by only logging in.

The formal login will be explained in more detail below using FIG. 287. The gaming system 1500 includes a pachi-slot machine 1, a management server 1510, and a mobile terminal 1520. The mobile terminal 1520 and the management server 1510 can exchange data with each other through communication via the Internet.

Prior to starting the game, the player receives a password from the management server 1510 while running a predetermined application on the mobile terminal 1520 that the player owns. The password is an encrypted history of games played up to the last time. The management server 1510 stores game history information indicating the history of games played up to the previous time, and the management server 1510 stores the game history in symbols consisting of a plurality of symbols (including letters and numbers). Convert to column. The password is a symbol string corresponding to such gaming history. The player can display the password on the mobile terminal 1520 by performing a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, to start the game, the player displays the menu screen (see FIG. 284(A)) on the main display device 210 by operating the effect button group on the Pachislot machine 1, and displays the main menu on the menu screen. Select "Custom Game". As a result, you can select one of the following submenu screens: ``Character selection'', ``Easy start'', ``Enter password'', ``View progress recording'', ``Record and finish'', and ``Membership registration''. A screen for selection (see FIG. 284(B)) is displayed on the main display device 210.

Then, the player selects the submenu "Enter password" on the submenu screen. As a result, a screen for entering a password (password input screen) is displayed on the main display device 210. The player can perform formal login by operating a button group using the presentation buttons on the password input screen and inputting the password issued by the management server 1510. As a result, the history of the game played this time is accumulated while taking over the history of the game played up to the previous time.

The gaming history (gaming history) includes the total number of games played, the number of times that a gaming state (specific gaming state) that is advantageous to the player occurs (for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, etc.), the number of wins and winning probability for each role, and the number of winnings for each role. In addition to the number of media inserted and paid out, the history of performed performances (performance history) is included. The performance history includes the number of times various performances have occurred, as well as history regarding custom games (character customization). The history regarding custom games includes the number of times various characters have been selected, and the game history for each type of custom game (type of selected character). The game history for each type of selected character includes the number of games played with various characters customized (for example, the number of games played with character A selected, and the number of games played with character A selected). The number of times a specific game state (e.g., bonus, ART, etc.) occurred while various characters were customized (e.g., the number of times a specific game state (e.g., bonus, ART, etc.) occurred when character A was selected). (the number of times a specific game state has occurred in a state where character B is selected, the number of times a specific game state has occurred in a state where character B is selected), etc.

In the management server 1510, such gaming history is managed in association with a member ID assigned to each player who has registered as a member. For example, the management server 1510 stores the number of games played with character A selected by one player and the number of games played with character B selected, and the number of games played with character B selected by one player. The number of games played with character A selected and the number of games played with character B selected are also stored. This allows the management server 1510 to compare the gaming histories of each player. The password also includes encrypted results of comparison of each player's gaming history (rank determined by a predetermined method).

To end the game, the player selects the submenu "record and end" on the submenu screen. As a result, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the main display device 210. The two-dimensional code is obtained by encoding address information of the management server 1510 and gaming history information accumulated in the pachi-slot machine 1. The player can take an image of the two-dimensional code using the camera included in the mobile terminal 1520. The mobile terminal 1520 recognizes the two-dimensional code from image data obtained when the camera captures an image of the two-dimensional code, and generates address information for the management server 1510 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 1510. Further, game history information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 1520 to the management server 1510. As a result, the game history is managed by the management server 1510.

Note that in order to log in officially for the first time, you need to register as a member. To register as a member, the player selects the submenu "membership registration" on the submenu screen. As a result, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the main display device 210. The two-dimensional code is coded address information of the management server 1510 and information related to membership registration. The player can take an image of the two-dimensional code using the camera included in the mobile terminal 1520. The mobile terminal 1520 recognizes the two-dimensional code from image data obtained when the camera captures an image of the two-dimensional code, and generates address information for the management server 1510 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 1510. Further, information related to membership registration is transmitted from the mobile terminal 1520 to the management server 1510. As a result, an ID for the player is set in the management server 1510.

Here, in FIG. 275, it has been explained that the setting suggestion effect is performed when formal login is performed (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not performed unless the user registers as a member). Thereby, it is possible to urge the player to perform formal login (membership registration). However, the conditions for performing the setting suggestion performance are not limited to this example. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be performed not only when a formal login is performed but also when a simple login is performed. In addition, even if formal login is not performed or simple login is not performed (regardless of whether login is performed or not), the setting suggestion effect may be performed. . Alternatively, if the setting suggestion effect setting screen is configured so that it is possible to set whether or not to link the setting suggestion effect and login ("enabled" or "invalid"), and "enabled" is set. , a setting suggestion effect will be performed on the condition that the user is logged in (as above, a formal login may be required, or a simple login may be sufficient). If "invalid" is set, the setting suggestion effect may be performed regardless of whether or not there is login.

Furthermore, although the above description has been made assuming that the screens shown in FIGS. 284 to 286 are displayed on the main display device 210, these screens are displayed on a dedicated touch panel liquid crystal provided separately from the main display device 210. It may also be a thing. This allows the player to perform operations on the menu screen even during the game (when a performance is being performed on the main display device 210).

Further, the character may be customized by operating the mobile terminal 1520 owned by the player. For example, a player who has registered as a member may display a character customization screen (a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 285) on the mobile terminal 1520 while starting a predetermined application on the mobile terminal. , the character may be customized by performing a touch operation or a button operation on the mobile terminal 1520. In this case, the customized content may be configured to be transmitted to the pachi-slot machine 1 via the management server 1510, or from the mobile terminal 1520 via non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like. It may be configured so that it can be directly transmitted to the pachi-slot machine 1.

<Variation of setting suggestion effects>
FIGS. 288 to 298 are diagrams showing examples of setting suggestion effects.

Although the setting suggestion performance has been described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform a setting suggestion performance different from the setting suggestion performance described above. The setting suggestion performance described below may be performed in place of the setting suggestion performance described above, or may be performed separately from the setting suggestion performance described above (in the first pachislot machine 1, the setting suggestion performance described above and the setting suggestion performance described below) It is also possible that both setting suggestion presentations and setting suggestion presentations may be performed. As the character image displayed in the setting suggestion effect described below, any one of the character images I to V described above may be adopted.

As an example of a setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 288(a), a character image "Ending" is displayed on the main display device 210 when the remaining number of games until the AT state ends is less than or equal to a predetermined number (100). This shows that the ending period of the AT state has started. In FIG. 288(b), after the state shown in FIG. 288(a), the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, so the lower cherry wins, and the text image "Congratulations!" appears on the main display device 210. is displayed, indicating that the character image indicates that it has been determined that the value is higher than the relatively high setting value (setting 5). FIG. 288(c) shows a character image "The end" being displayed on the main display device 210 as the AT state ends after the state shown in FIG. 288(b). Then, in FIG. 288(d), after the state shown in FIG. 288(c), the screen switches, and all the characters are gathered together and displayed on the main display device 210, so that the highest setting value (setting 6) is set. It indicates that something has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 288, when the rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the ending period of the AT state, the setting suggestion effect is performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 289(a), a character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 289(b), after the state shown in FIG. 289(a), the main image shows that the gauge is rising because the rare winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination (lower cherry has won). It shows how it is displayed on the display device 210. FIG. 289(c) shows that after the state shown in FIG. 289(b), a character image "Rush End" is displayed on the main display device 210 as the AT state ends. In FIG. 289(d), after the state shown in FIG. 289(c), the screen switches and all the characters are gathered together and displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating that the setting value is the highest (setting 6). The figure shows that it has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 289, the gauge increases (the meter accumulates) each time a rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the AT state (which may be limited to the ending period of the AT state). controlled by. The more the meter is filled, the higher the probability that setting suggestions will be performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 290(a), a character image "Rush start 1st time" is displayed on the main display device 210, and the AT of the first set is displayed in response to the first hit. In addition to indicating that the state has started, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating through the character image that it has been determined that the first setting value (setting 2) or more is reached. It shows how it is. In FIG. 290(b), after the state shown in FIG. 290(a), the text image "6th Rush continuation" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state is continuous (extended). The figure shows that the sixth set of AT states has started due to the fact that the character image is not being displayed on the main display device 210. In FIG. 290(c), after the state shown in FIG. 290(b), the character image "Rush continuation 8th time" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state continues (extended). 290(a)) and the number of character images displayed on the main display device 210 is increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 290(a). , it is shown that the character image indicates that it has been determined that the value is equal to or higher than the first setting value (setting 3). In FIG. 290(d), after the state shown in FIG. 290(c), the text image "10th Rush continuation" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state continues (extended). This shows that the 10th set of AT states has been started, and all the characters are gathered together and displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating that the highest setting value (setting 6) is set. This shows that it has been confirmed. In the example shown in FIG. 290, there is a case where a setting suggestion effect is performed when the AT state is started, but when the 10th set of AT state is started, there is a relative possibility that the setting suggestion effect will be performed. It's getting expensive.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 291(a), a character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 291(b), after the state shown in FIG. 291(a), a predetermined character image is This is displayed on the main display device 210, and indicates that the character image has been determined to be equal to or higher than the first setting value (setting 4). In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 291, you can aim at a specific position on the reel 3 (for example, a place where the same type of symbols are arranged in succession) by eye-pressing (although not shown, it is assumed that (a specific effect suggesting the setting will occur), and if the eye press is successful, a setting suggestion effect will be performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 292(a), a character image "BONUS confirmed" (bonus confirmation screen: an image that can be displayed only when the bonus role is determined as an internal winning combination) is displayed on the main display device. 210 to notify that the bonus combination has been determined as an internal winning combination, and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 to display the set value (1) through the character image. This shows that it is suggested that setting 4) or above is confirmed. In FIG. 292(b), after the state shown in FIG. 292(a), a character image "BONUS END" (bonus end screen) is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the bonus state has ended. At the same time, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the highest setting value (setting 6) has been determined. On the other hand, in FIG. 292(c), after the state shown in FIG. 292(a), the text image "BONUS END" (bonus end screen) is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the bonus state ends. However, a predetermined character image is not displayed on the main display device 210. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 292, if a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on both the bonus confirmation screen and the bonus end screen, the highest setting value (setting 6) is determined. On the other hand, if the predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 only on either the bonus confirmation screen or the bonus end screen, it is confirmed that the value is greater than or equal to the first setting value (setting 4). It is supposed to be done.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 293(a), a character image "Rush number 3 times" is displayed on the main display device 210 to indicate that the third set of AT state has ended. , a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating through the character image that it has been determined that one setting value (setting 4) or more has been determined. In FIG. 293(b), after the state shown in FIG. 293(a), a character image "4 times of Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the fourth set of AT state has ended. At the same time, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that it has been determined that one setting value (setting 5) or more is reached. In FIG. 293(c), after the state shown in FIG. 293(b), a character image "Rush number 5 times" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the fifth set of AT state has ended. At the same time, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the highest setting value (setting 6) has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 293, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen that is displayed when one AT state ends, one setting value (setting 4) If the above is confirmed and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen that is displayed when the next set of AT states of the AT state ends (the predetermined character If the image is displayed twice in succession), it is determined that the setting value (setting 5) is more advantageous than the first setting value, and when the AT state of the next set of the set is completed, When a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the displayed AT end screen (when the predetermined character image is displayed three times in a row), it is determined that the highest setting value (setting 6) is selected. Determine.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 294(a), a text image "Rush number 3" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the third set of AT state has ended. , a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating through the character image that it has been determined that one setting value (setting 4) or more has been determined. FIG. 294(b) shows that after the state shown in FIG. 294(a), the consecutive games in the AT state are completed with three sets, and the game moves to the production section (advantageous section/normal game). In FIG. 294(c), after the state shown in FIG. 294(b), a character image "Rush start" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has been restarted. In FIG. 294(d), after the state shown in FIG. 294(c), a text image "Rush count 2" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the second set of AT states has ended. In addition, by displaying a predetermined character image on the main display device 210, it is indicated through the character image that it has been determined that one setting value (setting 5) or more is reached. . In FIG. 294(e), after the state shown in FIG. 294(d), the consecutive games in the AT state are completed with two sets, and a transition is made to the production section (advantageous section/normal game). In FIG. 294(f), after the state shown in FIG. 294(e), the character image "Rush number 5 times" is displayed on the main display device 210, so that the fifth set of AT state ends (premise At the same time, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the highest setting value (setting 6) has been confirmed. It shows how it is. Note that after the state shown in FIG. 294(f), the consecutive games in the AT state end with 5 sets, and the game shifts to the production section (advantageous section/normal game). In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 294, as in the example shown in FIG. 293, as the number of times a predetermined character image is continuously displayed on the AT end screen increases, the value becomes higher than the more advantageous setting value. However, the AT end screen is displayed only when the AT state is not extended (continued) (when the AT state changes to the normal game).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 295(a), a character image "7 times of Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210 to indicate that the seventh set of AT state has ended. , shows a predetermined character image being displayed on the main display device 210. In FIG. 295(b), after the state shown in FIG. 295(a), the character image "Not yet!" (revival effect) is displayed on the main display device 210, so that it is determined that the AT state will continue. It shows how it was. On the other hand, in FIG. 295(c), after the state shown in FIG. 295(a), the consecutive games in the AT state end with 7 sets, and the transition to the production section (advantageous section/normal game) is shown. , which indicates that the highest setting value (setting 6) has been determined through the predetermined character image displayed in the state shown in FIG. 295(a). In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 295, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on the AT end screen, the predetermined character image may suggest a setting value. However, if the AT state continues after that, it means that the predetermined character image has not played the role of suggesting the setting value, and the predetermined character image becomes invalid (setting suggestion effect is It was later revealed that it was an unrelated performance (it was not confirmed that it was higher than the relatively high setting value). On the other hand, if the game changes from the AT state to the normal game, the predetermined character image will have played a role in suggesting the setting value, and the predetermined character image will be valid (it is not a setting suggestion effect). (It was later determined that the value was higher than the relatively high set value).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 296(a), a character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 296(b), after the state shown in FIG. 296(a), the predetermined winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination, and the "Aim for the BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed as the main display. It is displayed on the device 210, and shows how the "BAR" symbol arrangement is stopped and displayed on the reel 3. In FIG. 296(c), after the state shown in FIG. 296(b), the "BAR" pattern arrangement is stopped and displayed, and the "PUSH" button image (image prompting operation of the production button) is displayed on the main display. 210 is shown. In FIG. 296(d), after the state shown in FIG. 296(c), all the characters are gathered together and displayed on the main display device 210 as a result of the operation of the production button. It is shown that setting 6) has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 296, if you aim at a specific symbol (for example, the "BAR" symbol) by pressing the eye, and if you succeed in pressing the eye, an instruction to operate the production button will appear, and you will be able to operate the production button. A setting suggestion effect is performed.

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 297(a), a character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 297(b), after the state shown in FIG. 297(a), the predetermined role has been determined as an internal winning combination, and the "Aim for the BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed as the main display. It is displayed on the device 210, and shows how the "BAR" symbol arrangement is stopped and displayed on the reel 3. In FIG. 297(c), after the state shown in FIG. 297(b), the "BAR" pattern arrangement is stopped and displayed, and the "PUSH" button image (image prompting operation of the production button) is displayed on the main display. 210 is shown. In FIG. 297(d), after the state shown in FIG. 297(c), the text image "+456 sheets" is displayed on the main display device 210 as the effect button is operated, and the setting value is thereby changed. This shows that it has been confirmed that it is one of 4 to 6. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 297, the set value is determined to be any one of 4 to 6 by displaying an image including the number corresponding to "456". Such images include an image corresponding to the number of additional games in the AT state ("+456 medals"), an image notifying the number of medals acquired in the AT state ("OVER456 medals"), an enemy defeat animation (for example, a revival It is possible to adopt an image (``456 enemies were defeated'') displayed in the performance).

As another example of the setting suggestion effect, FIG. 298(a) shows that a character image "BIG BONUS" is displayed on the main display device 210, and a BB state (pseudo BB) has started. In FIG. 298(b), after the state shown in FIG. 298(a), a screen for selecting one of "one shot notification mode", "final notification mode", and "chance notification mode" is displayed. It shows how it is displayed on the main display device 210. "One-shot announcement mode," "final announcement mode," and "chance announcement mode" are each a type of presentation mode. content) are different from each other. The player can select one performance mode by operating the performance button. The rate at which each setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effects I to V) appears varies depending on the selected effect mode. For example, when "Chance Announcement Mode" is selected, the setting value may be higher than a relatively low value compared to when "One-shot Announcement Mode" to "Final Announcement Mode" is selected. Setting suggestion performances that are confirmed (for example, setting suggestion performance I) are likely to occur, but setting suggestion performances that are confirmed to be higher than a relatively high setting value (for example, setting suggestion performance IV and setting suggestion performance V) occur. It may be configured so that it is difficult to do so. In addition, when the "one-shot notification mode" is selected, setting suggestion effects that are determined to be higher than a relatively high setting value (for example, setting suggestion effects III and setting suggestion effects IV) are used as setting suggestion effects. , Setting Suggestive Performance V) only occurs (Setting Suggestive Performance I and Setting Suggestive Performance II do not occur), but in the first place, compared to the case where "Final Announcement Mode" or "Chance Announcement Mode" is selected, The configuration may be such that the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion effects is low.

As another example of the setting suggestion performance, although not shown, a setting suggestion performance that is performed when the advantageous section starts may be provided. The setting suggestion performance may have different contents depending on the type of mode in the performance section (normal game). For example, if the mode when the advantageous section starts is a specific mode, setting suggestion effects that are determined to be at least a relatively high setting value (for example, setting suggestion effects III, setting suggestion effects IV, etc.) Setting suggestion performance V) may also be performed. Alternatively, the fact that a specific mode is started itself is synonymous with confirming that the value is higher than a relatively high setting value (for example, setting 4) (a screen dedicated to the specific mode may not be displayed). This may be equivalent to a setting suggestion effect). When a specific mode is started, it is determined that the value is higher than a relatively high setting value (for example, setting 4), and it is also determined that the pseudo bonus transition lottery will be won within a predetermined number of games (a predetermined number of games). It is also possible to make sure that the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is won within the number of games. Further, a setting suggestion effect exclusively for the non-advantageous section may be provided.

In addition, if a setting suggestion effect that can occur in a specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends) is provided, the setting suggestion effect is performed when a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the effect button or touch panel) is performed. It may be generated under the condition that the event occurs, but may not be generated if a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a production button or touch panel) is not performed. Further, as gaming states (advantageous states) that are advantageous to the player, there are a first advantageous state (for example, pseudo BB (big bonus)) and a second advantageous state (for example, Pseudo RB (Regular Bonus)) is provided, the setting suggestion effect is performed during the second advantageous state (the setting suggestion effect is not performed during the first advantageous state, or the setting suggestion effect is not performed during the first advantageous state, or During this state, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion performance may be lower than during the second advantageous state.

Also, if the number of occurrences of a specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends) after the power is turned on (or after the setting value is changed) is a specific number of times (for example, the first time or In the specific situation of the 10th time), the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion performance may be higher than in the case where the number of occurrences is other than the specific number of times. For example, if the setting is set so that the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion performance is high in a specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends) for the first time, it is possible to attract customers in the early hours after the store opens in the morning. becomes.

Furthermore, a setting suggestion effect that can make suggestions including past setting values may be provided. For example, setting 6 has been set for at least one day out of the last few days (any one of today's setting value, the previous day's setting value, and the setting value of the day before the previous day is setting 6). It is also possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that confirms the setting. Furthermore, a setting suggestion effect may be provided that confirms that a higher setting value (for example, setting 5 or setting 6) is set today than the previous day. As a result, players who have checked information regarding past setting values on a data display device, data site, etc. can be entertained in guessing settings through the setting suggestion performance.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, for example, a specific winning combination (for example, watermelon) can be determined as an internal winning combination, and the specific winning combination is determined based on the player's stopping operation mode (stopping operation timing). (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct) Payout 8 pieces, payout 1 piece or no payout if incorrect (incorrect answer). Then, if you win the specific combination in a specific gaming state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not to move to the AT state in the current game (in the AT state, the playing period of the AT state will be extended) It may also include whether or not to change the degree of advantage (the same applies hereinafter) to an advantageous one (whether to directly transition to the AT state or not, or whether to directly extend the playing period of the AT state). It is possible to configure the system so that, while not making a decision (hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"), if eight coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision is made in the current game.

In addition, as explained in the first embodiment, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the main game stops, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is generated as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined. Then, in the performance section (advantageous section/normal game), the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table (see Figure 7(c)) is referred to, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transfer lottery) is performed based on the random number and the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. be exposed. Pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is basically carried out in each unit game, but in units where the player plays the game using a specific gaming method (for example, a gaming method that pays out 8 medals as described above). In the game, a pseudo bonus transfer lottery may not be performed as an advantageous determination. Alternatively, in a unit game in which a player played a game using a specific gaming method, the winning probability of a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery as an advantageous decision compared to a unit game in which the player did not play a game using a specific gaming method. may be relatively reduced. In such a case, a setting suggestion effect may be provided that can occur when the number of times the pseudo bonus transfer lottery has been performed reaches a predetermined number of times. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to enjoy the setting suggestion performance at an earlier timing if he does not play the game using a specific gaming method.

As a specific gaming method, for example, in a unit game in which a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a stop operation on a predetermined reel (for example, the left reel 3L) causes symbols belonging to a predetermined range (for example, symbol position " 10" to "18" symbols) is displayed in the middle area, or the order of stopping operations for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is in a specific order. Here are some gaming methods that: In this way, in a specific game, only if a specific stopping order is unilaterally advantageous compared to other stopping orders, if the game is played in that specific stopping order, it will be more advantageous in that specific game. It is possible to configure so as not to make a decision (or to reduce the probability that a decision will be made to change the degree of advantage to an advantageous one in a favorable decision). Note that, as explained in the first embodiment, it is desirable that such a restriction be limited to the unit game concerned.

In addition, instead of not making an advantageous decision (or reducing the probability that it will be decided to change the degree of advantage to an advantageous one in an advantageous decision), the measurement of the number of games up to the ceiling is stopped (or the said It is also possible to extend the number of games up to the ceiling. For example, as explained in the first embodiment, if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) in the performance section (normal game), the number of ceiling games is updated. (Additional or subtraction methods may be used), if the number of ceiling games reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or determined in advance when transitioning to an advantageous section, etc.), the transition to a pseudo bonus occurs. It is decided that the In this regard, the number of ceiling games may not be updated (or the number of ceiling games may be increased) in a unit game in which a player plays a game using a specific gaming method.

<Lock>
FIGS. 299 and 300 are diagrams showing an example of the first stop lock. FIG. 301 and FIG. 302 are diagrams showing an example of locking during intermediate stop.

As described in the first embodiment, the lock effect (lock) is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the player's game operation for a predetermined period). In this embodiment, it is possible to configure the first stop lock to be executed when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the lock at the time of mid-stop is executed.

As the predetermined winning combination, it is possible to adopt one in which the number of medals awarded varies depending on the mode of the stop operation (timing of the stopping operation) by the player (for example, the above-mentioned specific winning combination). That is, when a predetermined winning combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 8 medals) are paid out. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, a dropout will occur, and the number of medals to be paid out will be smaller than if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (or no medals will be paid out at all).

Here, some players who play games on the pachi-slot machine 1, when performing a stop operation for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, slide their fingers in the order of left stop button 8L → middle stop button 8C → right stop button 8R. It is thought that there are people who play games using the ``slide'' method (hereinafter referred to as the ``slide'' method). When a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, if a game is played using such a sliding stroke method, there is a high possibility that the predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) will be missed.

In this respect, when a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, the game is played using the sliding stroke method by executing the lock at the first stop or the lock at the middle stop. However, it is possible to prevent such omissions from occurring. Hereinafter, the first stop lock will be explained using FIGS. 299 and 300, and the middle stop lock will be explained using FIGS. 301 and 302.

FIG. 299(a) shows a state in which each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts rotating in one unit game, and all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating. Thereafter, the behavior of the reels 3 will differ depending on whether or not the predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination. 299(b) and FIGS. 300(a) to 300(d) show cases where a predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and in FIG. 299(c), the predetermined winning combination is A case is shown in which a different winning combination (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination.

Specifically, in FIG. 299(b), when a predetermined combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, after the state shown in FIG. 299(a), the left stop button 8L is pressed as the first stop operation. In response to the operation, the left reel 3L stops rotating, and a "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the upper area of the left reel 3L. At this time, since the first stop operation is performed, a first stop lock occurs. The first stop lock is a lock that occurs after the first stop operation is performed and before the second stop operation is performed. When the first stop lock occurs, operations performed by the player after the first stop operation (eg, operation of the stop button 8) are disabled. The first stop lock continues until the middle stop button 8C is operated. That is, the first stop lock is released when the middle stop button 8C is operated. Note that the arrow in the figure indicates the position to which the player has slid his finger in the sliding hitting method.

FIG. 300(a) shows a state in which the player slides his finger to the middle stop button 8C (the middle stop button 8C is operated) in the sliding hitting method after the state shown in FIG. 299(b). At this time, as the middle stop button 8C is operated, the first stop lock ends. The operation of the middle stop button 8C is effective as an operation for releasing the first stop lock, but is invalid as an operation for stopping the middle reel 3C.

FIG. 300(b) shows a state in which the player slides his finger to the right stop button 8R (the right stop button 8R is operated) in the sliding hitting method after the state shown in FIG. 300(a). Since the first stop lock has already been completed, the operation of the right stop button 8R is effective as an operation for stopping the right reel 3R. As a result, in FIG. 300(b), the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, the "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the lower area of the right reel 3R, and the "watermelon" is displayed along the effective line (here, the cross down line). shows a reach state (a state in which "watermelon" is displayed in a stopped state on the left reel 3L and right reel 3R, and only the middle reel 3C is rotating). In addition, if the predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, "Watermelon" will stop on the left reel 3L and right reel 3R, regardless of the timing of operation of the left stop button 8L to right stop button 8R. It is now displayed.

FIG. 300(c) shows that after the state shown in FIG. 300(b), the "Aim for the BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, on the middle reel 3C, the symbol position corresponding to "Watermelon" is close to the symbol position corresponding to "BAR" (exists within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols)). . As a result, when a predetermined combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is appropriate (for example, when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area, the middle stop button 8C is When the stop button 8C is operated), "Watermelons" are stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C, and the "Watermelons" line up along the cross-down line (a prize is won). On the other hand, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is not appropriate, the "watermelons" are not stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C, and the "watermelons" are not lined up along the cross-down line (missing).

In FIG. 300(d), after the state shown in FIG. 300(c), as the middle stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing, "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C, and it appears on the cross down line. It shows how watermelons are lined up along the line. As a result, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 8 medals) are paid out. Note that, although the above description has been made assuming that the "Aim for the BAR" effect image (an image that suggests the timing of the stop operation) is displayed on the main display device 210, such an image may not be displayed. Furthermore, when all the "watermelons" are available, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect may be performed.

In the above example, if the predetermined combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, a lock occurs at the first stop, whereas the predetermined combination (Watermelon) is not determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, the first stop lock does not occur. FIG. 299(c) shows a case where a winning combination (replay) different from the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the replay wins after the state shown in FIG. 299(a). In this case, since the lock at the first stop does not occur, the operations of the left stop button 8L, middle stop button 8C, and right stop button 8R by the sliding hitting method are the first stop operation and the second stop operation, respectively. This is effective as the operation and the third stop operation.

As a different aspect from the above, FIG. 301(a) shows that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R starts rotating in one unit game, and all reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotating. There is. Thereafter, the behavior of the reels 3 will differ depending on whether or not the predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination. 301(b) and FIGS. 302(a) to 302(b) show the case where a predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and in FIG. 301(c), the predetermined winning combination is A case is shown in which a different winning combination (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination.

Specifically, in FIG. 301(b), when a predetermined combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, after the state shown in FIG. 301(a), the left stop button 8L is pressed as the first stop operation. In response to the operation, the left reel 3L stops rotating, and a "watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the upper area of the left reel 3L. Here, FIG. 301(b) shows a state in which the finger is slid to the middle stop button 8C in the sliding stroke method (the middle stop button 8C is operated), but the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped. Not yet. In this example, the middle stop lock occurs when the middle stop button 8C is operated. The middle stop lock is a lock that occurs after the middle stop button 8C is operated. When the middle stop lock occurs, the player's operations (for example, the operation of the stop button 8) are disabled until a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the middle stop button 8C was operated.

The operation of the middle stop button 8C in the sliding hitting method is effective as an operation for generating a lock at the time of a middle stop, but is invalid as an operation for stopping the middle reel 3C. In addition, in the sliding hitting method, the right stop button 8R is usually operated within a predetermined time (the time when the player's operation is disabled by the lock at the middle stop) after the middle stop button 8C is operated. The operation of the right stop button 8R in the sliding hitting method is also invalid as an operation for stopping the right reel 3R.

FIG. 302(a) shows that after the state shown in FIG. 301(b), the "Aim for the BAR" effect image described in the ninth embodiment is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, similarly to the above, on the middle reel 3C, the symbol position corresponding to "Watermelon" is close to the symbol position corresponding to "BAR" (within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols)). I decided to. As a result, when a predetermined combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is appropriate (for example, when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area, the middle stop button 8C is When the stop button 8C is operated), "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C. On the other hand, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is not appropriate, "Watermelon" is not stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C. In addition, in the same way as above, when the predetermined winning combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, on the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R, regardless of the operation timing of the left stop button 8L to right stop button 8R, "Watermelon" is now stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 302(b), after the state shown in FIG. 302(a), the middle stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing (the right stop button 8R is operated at an arbitrary timing), and the middle stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing. "Watermelons" are stopped and displayed on the reel 3C and the right reel 3R, showing that the "watermelons" are aligned along the cross-down line. As a result, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 8 medals) are paid out. Note that, although the above description has been made assuming that the "Aim for the BAR" effect image (an image that suggests the timing of the stop operation) is displayed on the main display device 210, such an image may not be displayed. Furthermore, when all the "watermelons" are available, the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect may be performed.

In the above example, if the predetermined combination (Watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, a lock at mid-stop will occur, whereas if the predetermined combination (Watermelon) is not determined as an internal winning combination. Lock does not occur during medium stop. FIG. 301(c) shows a case where a winning combination (replay) different from the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the replay wins after the state shown in FIG. 301(a). In this case, since the middle stop lock does not occur, the operations of the left stop button 8L, middle stop button 8C, and right stop button 8R by the sliding hitting method are the first stop operation and the second stop operation, respectively. , and is effective as the third stop operation.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix E>
Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can perform a setting suggestion performance that can suggest a setting value at the end of a BB gaming state (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-245403).

In such conventional gaming machines, the setting suggestion effect, like other effects, occurs in accordance with the appearance rate set by the manufacturer. On the other hand, if the hall (store) side can suggest the setting value (degree of advantage for the player) in the manner intended, it would be useful in formulating a sales strategy for acquiring customers.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can make suggestions regarding advantageousness according to the store's intention.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has the following features.

(E-1) Advantage setting means that allows an administrator to set any one of a plurality of types of advantage (set values) as advantages for the player;
Suggestion control means (sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of FIGS. 275 to 278) capable of executing suggestion control that may suggest regarding the advantage set by the advantage setting means;
Suggestion information setting means that allows the administrator to set suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) for executing the suggestion control;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the administrator can set any one of a plurality of types of advantages (setting values) as advantages for the player, and the set advantage Suggestion control that can be suggested regarding (setting value) can be executed. The system is configured such that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for executing suggestion control can be set by the administrator. As a result, it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) in accordance with the store's intention, taking into account sales strategies, etc., and to make suggestions regarding advantageousness (setting value) in accordance with the intention. It can be carried out.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been explained that when the setting suggestion effects I to V occur, it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting value. The setting suggestion effect may be an effect that occurs only when the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (it is confirmed that the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value), or it may be a display that is likely to be equal to or greater than the predetermined set value. It may be a production that suggests. For example, setting suggestion effect V is an effect that suggests with a predetermined probability (for example, 80%) that the setting value is setting 6 (when the effect appears, the probability that the setting value is setting 6 is 80%). In addition, setting suggestion effect I is a effect that suggests with a predetermined probability (for example, 80%) that the setting value is setting 2 or higher (when this effect appears, the setting value is setting 2 or higher) The probability is 80%). In addition, as setting suggestion effects, there are effects that confirm (or suggest that there is a high possibility) that the setting value is an odd number (1, 3, or 5), and effects that indicate that the setting value is an even number (2, 4, or 5). Alternatively, an effect that confirms 6) (or suggests that it is likely) may be adopted.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine. Even in pachinko gaming machines, there are multiple setting values (6 levels from "1" to "6") that differ from each other in various data related to the pachinko game, and operations to change the set setting values (setting change) are provided. It is also possible to perform an operation for confirming the set setting value (setting confirmation). For example, when the power is not turned on, the settings may be changed by turning on the setting key, pressing the backup clear switch, and turning on the power switch. It is possible to change the set value by pressing the setting switch in the setting change state. Also, for example, when the power is not turned on, turn on the setting key and turn on the power switch without pressing the backup clear clear switch to enter the setting confirmation state. . In the setting confirmation state, for example, information indicating the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor, and it is possible to confirm the setting value. The setting change state and setting confirmation state are ended by turning off the setting key.

The suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set when the setting suggestion effect setting screen is displayed. The setting suggestion effect setting screen may be displayed when a setting confirmation operation is being performed, or may be displayed when a setting changing operation is being performed. In order to perform a setting confirmation operation or a setting change operation, it is necessary to operate a power switch or a setting key type switch (backup clear clear switch), and these switches are provided inside the cabinet G. Therefore, it can be said that the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set by opening the front door (upper door mechanism UD or lower door mechanism DD). Alternatively, in a pachinko game machine, a setting change switch may be provided on the back side (back side) of the main body. Basically, people are not allowed to enter the island, so in order to operate the back side of the main unit (the setting change switch housed in the board case etc. located on the back side), you need to use a key to rotate the frame. There is a need. Therefore, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) may be set when the frame is rotated. In other words, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be configured so that it can be set after opening the rotating opening/closing part. The rotating opening/closing portion may be a front door of a pachislot gaming machine, or may be a main body frame (a portion that is rotatable relative to the outer frame) of a pachinko gaming machine. In any case, it can be said that the suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) can be set when an operation section that cannot be operated by the player is operated.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been explained that the menu screen is displayed in a situation where no game is being played or a situation where a game is being played. "Situation in which a game is being played" refers to a state in which no game processing is being performed on the main control circuit side (i.e., one game has finished and it is waiting for a BET operation or a start lever operation). . The game process is, for example, a process related to a game that is performed after a BET operation (start lever operation) is performed and until medals are paid out. The "situation in which a game is being played" may refer to a situation in which a demo screen is not displayed on the display device. The demo screen is a screen that is transitioned to when it is determined that no game is being played (the player is waiting for a customer). As the conditions for transition to the demo screen, conventionally known conditions can be appropriately adopted. For example, in a pachislot machine, a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) may elapse without a bet being placed after medals are paid out, or a predetermined period of time may elapse without a start lever being operated after automatic insertion due to a replay. The conditions for transitioning to the demo screen are that the C/P button is operated and all credited medals are paid out, and the power is turned on (until the BET is placed). can be mentioned. In addition, in a pachinko game machine, a predetermined period of time may elapse without any operation of the handle being detected after the fluctuation of the symbols has stopped, and a predetermined period of time may elapse without any winning occurring in the starting slot after the fluctuation of the symbols has stopped. Conditions for transition to the demo screen include, for example, that a state in which there is no hold and no symbol change continues for a predetermined period of time. The setting suggestion performance setting screen can also be said to be a screen displayed in a "situation where no game is being played".

(E-2) The gaming machine according to (E-1) above,
The suggestion information setting means is capable of setting the suggestion information for each of a plurality of periods (periods for setting suggestion effects);
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) can be set for each of a plurality of periods (setting suggestion presentation periods). As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of suggestions regarding advantageousness (setting value) for each period (period for setting suggestion presentation), and to plan sales strategies etc. according to each period (period for setting suggestion presentation). We can meet the needs of stores that require

However, it is not essential to provide multiple periods (periods for setting suggestion effects), and it is possible to set suggestion information (one setting suggestion effect type) regardless of such periods (one for all periods). It may be configured as follows.

(E-3) The gaming machine of (E-1) or (E-2) above,
The suggested information setting means sets predetermined periods (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “Period G”, “Period H”, The suggestion information can be set for "Period I" or "Period J"),
The suggestion control means performs the suggestion control according to the suggestion information set for the predetermined period by the suggestion information setting means when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied in the predetermined period. is executable,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the predetermined periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G”) , "Period H", "Period I", or "Period J"), it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for a predetermined period ("Period A", "Period B", "Period ``C'', ``Period D'', ``Period E'', ``Period F'', ``Period G'', ``Period H'', ``Period I'', or ``Period J'') under a predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state). ), the specified period (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “Period G”, “Period H”) , "Period I", or "Period J"). As a result, the predetermined periods ("Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I") , or, if a predetermined condition (termination condition of AT state) is satisfied in the predetermined period (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “ It is possible to make suggestions regarding advantageousness (set value) in a manner corresponding to period E, period F, period G, period H, period I, or period J. Yes, the specified period (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “Period G”, “Period H”, “Period I”) , or “Period J”), it is possible to meet the needs of stores that are trying to formulate sales strategies focusing on the period J.

In the tenth embodiment, an example has been described in which the AT state end condition is adopted as the predetermined condition. The predetermined conditions are not limited to this example, and any conditions can be adopted as appropriate. Such conditions include, for example, the condition that a predetermined gaming state ends, the condition that a predetermined gaming state starts, the condition that a privilege is given to the player, and the condition that a predetermined winning combination is internal. Examples include the condition that it is determined as a winning combination, the condition that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, etc. As the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to adopt, for example, a gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player, such as a bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.), RT state, AT state ( ART state), a jackpot game state in a pachinko game machine, a variable probability game state, a time-saving game state, and the like. These conditions may be used alone or in combination. When a plurality of conditions are used together, the configuration may be such that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each condition.

In addition, when multiple types of predetermined gaming states are provided, a setting suggestion effect is performed when a condition regarding the first predetermined gaming state is met, and a setting suggestion effect is performed when a condition regarding the second predetermined gaming state is met. It may be configured so that the suggestion effect is not performed. If the setting suggestion performance is performed too frequently, the player will easily notice the setting value, but by adopting such a configuration, the frequency can be adjusted. The first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state can be configured to have different degrees of advantage for the player, and the first predetermined gaming state and the second predetermined gaming state can be configured to have different degrees of advantage for the player. The pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment can be adopted as the predetermined gaming states. The first predetermined gaming state may be more advantageous than the second predetermined gaming state, or conversely, the second predetermined gaming state may be more advantageous than the first predetermined gaming state. It may also be advantageous.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (terminal condition for AT state) is satisfied in one period (setting suggestion presentation period), a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied in the period (setting suggestion presentation period). It has been explained that the setting suggestion performance is performed only when the termination condition) is satisfied for the first time. However, when a predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state) is satisfied in one period (the period for setting suggestion presentation), the predetermined condition (the end condition of the AT state) is satisfied in that period (the period for setting suggestion presentation). Even if this is the second time or later, the setting suggestion effect may be performed. When a predetermined condition (terminal condition for AT state) is satisfied multiple times, the probability of each setting suggestion effect occurring is varied depending on how many times the predetermined condition (terminal condition for AT state) is satisfied. You can also use it as In this case, the number of times the predetermined condition (the condition for ending the AT state) is satisfied may be counted for each period (setting suggestion presentation period), or may be counted regardless of the period (setting suggestion presentation period). It may also be done.

In addition, when a predetermined condition (condition for ending the AT state) is met, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect generation lottery), and the setting suggestion effect generation lottery is performed. If the player wins, a setting suggestion performance may be performed. In addition, when a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is met, a lottery (specific image appearance lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to display a specific character image (specific image). If the character has won the appearance lottery, the character image may be displayed. In this case, when the predetermined condition (the condition for ending the AT state) is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect may not be performed. On the other hand, if a specific character image is displayed when a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is met, the setting will be made the next time the predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is met. Suggestive effects may be performed. The setting suggestion performance may be performed based on set suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type), or may be performed as a predetermined setting suggestion performance. Thereby, when a specific character image is displayed, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine. The display timing of the specific character image is not limited to when a predetermined condition (the condition for ending the AT state) is satisfied, and the specific character image can be displayed at any timing. For example, the character image displayed in the setting suggestion effect explained using FIGS. 288 to 298 may be adopted as a specific character image, and the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect may be adopted as the display timing of the specific character image. good. In any case, when a specific character image is displayed, it is possible to configure the setting suggestion effect to be performed whenever a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied next time.

Note that the setting suggestion performance (display of character images I to V) is performed only for a very short time (for example, within 3 seconds), and when the setting suggestion performance is started in one unit game, the setting suggestion The performance can be configured so that it is completed by the end of the one unit game (the state in which the character images I to V are displayed ends immediately and is not carried over to the next unit game). . Alternatively, the setting suggestion performance may be ended when a start lever operation is performed to start the next unit game.

(E-4) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-3) above,
As the suggestion information, multiple types of suggestion information ("type A", "type B", and "type C") are provided,
The suggestion information setting means is capable of setting one of the suggestion information selected from the plurality of types of suggestion information.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestion information ("type A", "type B", and "type C") are provided as suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation types). , is configured such that one suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) selected from multiple types of suggestion information (``Type A'', ``Type B'', and ``Type C'') can be set. . As a result, by selecting one suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) from multiple types of suggestion information provided in advance ("Type A", "Type B", and "Type C"), suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set, and the operation for setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) by the administrator can be simplified.

(E-5) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-4) above,
Equipped with a notification means (main display device 210) that can notify information,
The suggestion control means includes notification control means capable of controlling notification of information by the notification means,
The information that can be reported by the notification means is a case where the advantage set by the advantage setting means is a first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage more advantageous to the player than the first advantage. First information (character image I) that can be notified only to
When the suggestion information set by the suggestion information setting means is first suggestion information ("type A"), the notification control means is configured to control whether the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first suggestion information. If the advantage is more advantageous to the player than the advantage or the first advantage, control the notification of the first information by the notification means regardless of the advantage set by the advantage setting means. It is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the information that can be reported by the notification means (main display device 210) is the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2). First information (character image I) that can be notified only when an advantage degree (setting value) advantageous to the player is set is provided. When the first suggestion information (``Type A'') is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type), the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2) is set. If an advantage (setting value) that is advantageous to the player is set, the notification of the first information (character image I) can be controlled regardless of the set advantage (setting value). has been done. As a result, the first advantage (setting 2) or the advantage (setting value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set through the first information (character image I). This can meet the needs of stores that wish to make suggestions regarding advantageousness (setting values) in this manner.

(E-6) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-5) above,
Equipped with a notification means (main display device 210) that can notify information,
The suggestion control means includes notification control means capable of controlling notification of information by the notification means,
The plurality of types of advantages include at least a first advantage (setting 2) and a second advantage (setting 3) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage,
The information that can be reported by the notification means is first information that cannot be reported if the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage. (character image I), and second information (character image I) that cannot be reported if the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage Multiple types of information including image II) are provided,
When the suggestion information set by the suggestion information setting means is second suggestion information ("Type B"), the notification control means is configured to control whether the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first suggestion information. If the advantage is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, one piece of information is selected from the plurality of types of information according to the advantage set by the advantage setting means. is controllable so that it is notified by the notification means,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the information that can be reported by the notification means (main display device 210) is an advantageous degree (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous degree (setting 2). is set, the first information (character image I) that cannot be reported, and the advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) are set. A plurality of types of information are provided, including second information (character image II) that cannot be reported if the character is present. When the second suggestion information (``Type B'') is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type), the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2) is set. If an advantage (setting value) that is advantageous to the player is set, one piece of information selected from multiple types of information according to the set advantage (setting value) is displayed on the notification means (main display). The device 210) is configured to be controllable so as to be notified by the device 210). As a result, for example, a first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage (setting value) more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set through the first information (character image I). The second advantage (setting 3) or the advantage (setting 3) that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) may be indicated through the second information (character image II). It is possible to suggest that a value (value) has been set, and it is possible to meet the needs of stores that wish to make suggestions regarding the advantage (value) in this manner.

(E-7) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-6) above,
Equipped with a notification means (main display device 210) that can notify information,
The suggestion control means includes notification control means capable of controlling notification of information by the notification means,
The plurality of types of advantages include at least a first advantage (setting 2) and a second advantage (setting 3) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage,
The information that can be reported by the notification means is first information that cannot be reported if the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage. (character image I), and second information (character image I) that cannot be reported if the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage Image II) is provided,
When the suggestion information set by the suggestion information setting means is third suggestion information ("Type C"), the notification control means is configured to control whether the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first one. If the degree of advantage is the advantage, the notification of the first information by the notification means can be controlled, and if the degree of advantage set by the degree of advantage setting means is the second degree of advantage, the notification means can control the notification of the first information. is capable of controlling notification of the second information by
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the information that can be reported by the notification means (main display device 210) is an advantageous degree (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous degree (setting 2). is set, the first information (character image I) that cannot be reported, and the advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) are set. Second information (character image II) that cannot be reported if the character is present is provided. Then, when the third suggestion information ("Type C") is set as the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type), and the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first information (character image I), and when the second advantage (setting 3) is set, the notification of the second information (character image II) can be controlled. There is. As a result, for example, when the second advantage level (setting 3) is set, the suggestion is made not through the first information (character image I) but through the second information (character image II). (suggestion more advantageous to the player than the suggestion through the first information (character image I)), and it is possible for a store that wants to make a suggestion regarding the advantage level (setting value) in this manner. Can meet your needs.

In the above description, setting 2 corresponds to the first advantage, but the first advantage may be any of settings 3 to 5. Further, although the above description has been made assuming that setting 3 corresponds to the second advantage, the second advantage may be any one of settings 4 to 6. As long as the second advantage is an advantage (setting value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, the first advantage can be any advantage (setting value) among settings 2 to 5. It is possible to adopt an arbitrary advantage degree (setting value) among settings 3 to 6 as the second advantage degree.

In the tenth embodiment, even when an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion is It has been explained that any one of the information ("Type A"), the second suggestion information ("Type B"), and the third suggestion information ("Type C") can be set. However, if an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion information (``Type A''), the second suggestion information ("Type B") and the third suggestion information ("Type C") may be configured such that it is not possible to set them. For example, if an advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion information (``Type A''), the second suggestion information (`` Type B) and the third suggestion information (Type C) may not be selected by the selection button.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) includes first suggestion information (``Type A''), second suggestion information (``Type B''), and third suggestion information (``Type C''). ”) was provided. Suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) is not limited to these examples, and includes, for example, suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) for causing setting suggestion performance to occur with high probability, or for causing setting suggestion performance to occur with low probability. It is also possible to provide suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type), etc. On top of that, there are cases where suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) is set to cause setting suggestion effects to occur with a high probability, and suggestion information to cause setting suggestion effects to occur with low probability (setting suggestion effect type). It is possible to configure the winning probability of the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect generation lottery to be different depending on the case where is set. In addition, if suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for generating a setting suggestion effect with a high probability is set, the setting suggestion effect will occur with a high probability, but if the setting value is higher than a relatively low setting value. Setting suggestion performances that are certain to occur (for example, setting suggestion performance I) are likely to occur, but setting suggestion performances that are certain to be higher than a relatively high setting value (for example, setting suggestion performance IV and setting suggestion performance V) are likely to occur. It may be configured so that it is difficult for this to occur. In addition, if suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) is set to generate a setting suggestion performance with a low probability, the setting suggestion performance will occur with a low probability, but as a setting suggestion performance, it will have a relatively high probability. Only setting suggestion performances (for example, setting suggestion performance III, setting suggestion performance IV, and setting suggestion performance V) that are confirmed to be greater than or equal to the setting value occur (setting suggestion performance I and setting suggestion performance II do not occur). may be configured.

Note that the notification by the notification means is not limited to displaying an image, and may be output of sound, output of light, or any combination thereof. That is, the notification means may be an image display means (display device), a sound output means (speaker), or a light emitting means.

(E-8) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-7) above,
The suggestion information setting means sets suggestion information in a state where one advantage is set by the advantage setting means, and then sets an advantage different from the one advantage by the advantage setting means. If so, it is possible to maintain the suggested information;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, after setting the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) in a state where one advantage (set value) is set, the one advantage (set value) is set. If a different advantage (setting value) is set, the configuration is such that the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) can be maintained. Thereby, even if the setting of the degree of advantage (setting value) is changed, there is no need to set the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) again, and convenience for the administrator can be achieved.

(E-9) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-8) above,
The suggestion information setting means includes:
By repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect periods), the suggestion information can be set for each setting target. 1 suggestion information setting means;
A second device that can set the suggestion information for each of the plurality of setting targets by performing a specific operation (operation of inputting a password for setting suggestion effect setting or operation of selecting from presets for setting suggestion effect setting). Suggestion information setting means;
It is characterized by

According to the pachislot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, each setting is performed by repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation for selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect periods). While it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for the target (setting suggestion production period), certain operations (such as inputting a password for setting suggestion production or selecting from presets for setting suggestion production) are possible. ) is configured so that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period). As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of suggestions regarding advantageousness (setting value) for each setting target (setting suggestion presentation period), and it is possible to create sales strategies, etc. according to each setting target (setting suggestion presentation period). It can meet the needs of the store you are planning. In addition, when setting suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for each of multiple setting targets (setting suggestion production period), specific operations (such as inputting a password for setting suggestion production setting and setting suggestion production period) are required. By performing the operation of selecting from presets, it is possible to save the trouble of repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type), and it is possible to improve convenience for the administrator.

(E-10) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-9) above,
The suggestion information setting means includes:
By repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect periods), the suggestion information can be set for each setting target. 1 suggestion information setting means;
When the first suggestion information setting means sets the suggestion information for each setting target, suggestion information for each setting target indicates a correspondence relationship between each setting target and the suggestion information set for the setting target. (Suggestion information setting preset for setting suggestion effect) can be registered for each setting target;
By performing an operation to select the per-setting target suggestion information registered by the per-setting target suggestion information registration means, the setting target-by-setting target suggestion information is configured for each of the plurality of setting targets. a second suggestion information setting means capable of setting the suggestion information;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, by repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect periods), each It is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for the setting target (setting suggestion production period), and in this way, suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) can be set for each setting target (setting suggestion production period). ) is set, a setting target that indicates the correspondence between each setting target (setting suggestion performance period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) set for the setting target (setting suggestion performance period) It is possible to register each suggestion information (preset for setting suggestion effect setting). Then, by performing an operation to select the suggestion information for each setting target registered in this way (preset for setting suggestion effect setting), the suggestion information for each setting target is set for each of the plurality of setting targets. It is configured such that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set according to (setting suggestion effect setting preset). As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of suggestion regarding the degree of advantage (setting value) for each setting target, and it is possible to meet the needs of stores that are trying to formulate sales strategies etc. according to each setting target. In addition, once the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is set for each setting target, the setting object shows the correspondence relationship between each setting target and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the setting target. It is possible to register suggestion information (setting suggestion effect setting preset) for each setting, and when setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each setting target with the same correspondence next time, the registered setting It is only necessary to perform an operation to select the suggestion information for each object (preset for setting suggestion effect setting), and convenience for the administrator can be achieved.

(E-11) Any of the gaming machines (E-1) to (E-10) above,
Enter the encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) in which suggestion information for each setting object is encrypted, which indicates the correspondence between each of multiple setting objects (setting suggestion effect period) and the above suggestion information for each setting object. Equipped with possible input means,
When the encrypted information is input to the input means, the suggestion information setting means sets the suggestion information for each setting target specified from the encrypted information to each of the plurality of setting targets. Suggestion information can be set.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the correspondence relationship between each of the plurality of setting objects (setting suggestion presentation period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) for each setting object (setting suggestion presentation period) It is possible to input encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) in which suggestion information for each setting target is encrypted, and if the encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) is input, multiple settings For each target (setting suggestion presentation period), suggestion information (setting suggestion presentation type) can be set according to the suggestion information for each setting target specified from the encrypted information (setting suggestion presentation setting password). It is configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of suggestions regarding advantageousness (setting value) for each setting target (setting suggestion presentation period), and it is possible to create sales strategies, etc. according to each setting target (setting suggestion presentation period). It can meet the needs of the store you are planning. In addition, by simply entering the encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password), it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each of multiple setting targets (setting suggestion effect period). Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience for the administrator.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) can be input by operating the selection button and the decision button. The method of inputting encrypted information into a gaming machine is not limited to the method of inputting a password using an operating means such as a button or a touch panel. For example, the gaming machine may be provided with a camera, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal may be read by the camera as the encrypted information. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that encrypted information can be transmitted from the management server to the gaming machine, or the encrypted information can be transmitted from the mobile terminal to the gaming machine using non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication), etc. It may be configured as follows.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the suggestion information for each setting target (setting suggestion effect setting preset) indicating the correspondence between each setting target (setting suggestion effect period) and suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is encrypted. It has been explained that the encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) can be output. The method of outputting the encrypted information is not limited to the method of displaying the password on a display device. For example, a two-dimensional code may be displayed on the display device as the encrypted information. In this case, as described above, it is desirable to provide the gaming machine with a camera and configure it so that the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal as encrypted information can be read by the camera. As a result, when a two-dimensional code is displayed as encrypted information on a gaming machine, the camera installed on the mobile terminal captures an image of the two-dimensional code, and the two-dimensional code is transferred to the mobile terminal. Then, by reading the two-dimensional code with a camera installed on another gaming machine, the same suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) as the suggestion information (setting suggestion performance type) set on the first gaming machine can be displayed. It is possible to set the performance type) in the other gaming machines as well.

In the above, it has been explained that the setting suggestion effect period corresponds to the above setting target, but the above setting target is not limited to this example, and can be a variable that can change over time (as the game progresses). It is possible to adopt the range to which it belongs as appropriate. The variable may be the number of unit games (for example, the number of games after power-on), or the number of times a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied (for example, the number of times AT is terminated). , it may be the number of unit games in which a predetermined condition is met, or it may be time. As a result, when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is met, a setting suggestion effect can be performed according to the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the range to which the variable belongs at that time. is possible. As mentioned above, the predetermined conditions include, for example, the condition that a predetermined gaming state ends, the condition that a predetermined gaming state starts, the condition that a privilege is given to the player, and the predetermined condition. It is possible to adopt a condition that the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a condition that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, etc. As the predetermined gaming state, it is possible to adopt, for example, a gaming state (advantageous state) that is advantageous for the player, such as a bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.), RT state, AT state ( ART state), a jackpot game state in a pachinko game machine, a variable probability game state, a time-saving game state, and the like.

When the above-mentioned setting targets are adopted, for example, the setting targets corresponding to the early hours after opening in the morning (for example, "period A" shown in FIG. 281, "AT end 1 time" shown in FIG. 282, By setting "Type C" for "10:00 to 11:00," etc., it is possible to attract customers at that time. In the tenth embodiment, the number of unit games played as the variable or the number of times a predetermined condition (terminal condition for the AT state) is satisfied is determined by the number of unit games played after the power is turned on or the number of unit games played after the power is turned on. It has been explained that this is the number of times a predetermined condition (a condition for ending the AT state) has been satisfied since the end of the AT state. However, the above variables include the number of unit games played after the advantage level (set value) was changed, or the predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) that was established after the advantage level (set value) was changed. You may also use the number of times.

<Appendix F>
Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that include a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for presentation (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-214050).

In such conventional gaming machines, when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination is stopped and displayed depending on the mode of the stop operation by the player, or The combination of the symbols may not be stopped and displayed.

In this regard, some players may perform an appropriate stopping operation without thinking about anything in particular, but if a player performs such an appropriate stopping operation in a unit game where the winning combination has been determined as an internal winning combination, If you do, you may miss out on the role. Therefore, even if the player performs an appropriate stop operation, it is desirable to prevent such combinations from being missed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and even if the player performs an appropriate stop operation, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination that may be missed is not displayed in a stopped state. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can provide an opportunity to play.

In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, when a winning combination (watermelon) that is likely to be missed is determined as an internal winning combination, the first stop lock or middle stop lock is executed. It is configured to This makes it possible to prevent the player from missing the winning combination (Watermelon) due to an appropriate stop operation, and to ensure that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (Watermelon) is stopped and displayed for the player. It can provide an opportunity to attract attention.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. The eleventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the tenth embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, descriptions of the parts that apply to the eleventh embodiment as well as those in the first to tenth embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ..." means that it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if such a description is made, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment without departing from the spirit of the eleventh embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to tenth embodiments also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment without departing from the spirit of the eleventh embodiment. It can also be applied to Machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to tenth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the eleventh embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

Further, even if the shape is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment to the tenth embodiment, components having similar functions may be given the same reference numerals for convenience. Further, even if the machine has the same shape or the same processing as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments, different symbols or step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Game state transition flow>
FIG. 303(a) is a diagram showing a transition transition of gaming states according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 303(b) is a table summarizing the gaming state transition conditions according to an embodiment of the present invention.

As explained in the first embodiment, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as the game state in order to vary the degree of advantage for the player or to achieve the intended playability. It has become. In this embodiment, the gaming state as shown in FIG. 303(a) is managed by the main control circuit 100. Such gaming states include a bonus non-winning state, a flag-to-flag state, and a bonus state.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated (winning). The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated. The bonus state is a state in which a bonus is activated. As described in the first embodiment, the inter-flag state is sometimes referred to as a carryover state, a (bonus) inter-flag state, a (bonus) internal state, and the like. When a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state).

In this embodiment, a 2BB gaming state and a 3BB gaming state are provided as bonus states. "F_2BB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the 2BB gaming state, and "F_3BB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the 3BB gaming state (see FIGS. 306A to 306D). Further, as inter-flag states, there are provided a 2BB inter-flag state and a 3BB inter-flag state.

The state between the 2BB flags is configured as an RT state (RT1 gaming state). As explained in the first embodiment, the RT state is a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination compared to the state where the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). The bonus non-winning state and the 3BB flag state are each configured as a non-RT state (RT0 gaming state).

To explain in detail with reference to FIGS. 303(a) and 303(b), in the bonus non-winning state, when “F_3BB” is determined as an internal winning combination (internal winning), the main control circuit 100 , the gaming state is shifted from the bonus non-winning state to the 3BB flag state (see transition condition (1)). In this case, the RT0 gaming state is maintained. On the other hand, in the bonus non-winning state, when "F_2BB" is determined as an internal winning combination (internal winning), the main control circuit 100 changes from the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) to the 2BB inter-flag state (RT1 gaming state). ) (see transition condition (2)).

“F_2BB” (2BB) and “F_3BB” (3BB) are carryover winnings (see FIG. 18). When 2BB wins internally, the state where 2BB wins internally is carried over until the combination of symbols corresponding to 2BB ("C_2BB" shown in Figure 306B) is stopped and displayed along the active line (until 2BB wins). . The state between 2BB flags is a state in which the state in which 2BB is internally won is carried over. Similarly, when 3BB wins internally, the state in which 3BB wins internally remains until the symbol combination corresponding to 3BB ("C_3BB" shown in Figure 306B) is stopped and displayed along the active line (until 3BB wins). is carried over. The 3BB inter-flag state is a state in which the state in which 3BB is internally won is carried over.

When the combination of symbols related to “C_3BB” is stopped and displayed along the active line in the 3BB flag state (when 3BB wins), the main control circuit 100 changes the gaming state from the 3BB flag state to the 3BB gaming state. (See transition condition (3)). In addition, in the 2BB flag state, when the combination of symbols related to “C_2BB” is stopped and displayed along the active line (when 2BB wins), the main control circuit 100 changes from the 2BB flag state to the 2BB gaming state. Shift the gaming state (see transition condition (4)).

When medals exceeding the prescribed number (21 medals) are paid out in the 3BB gaming state, the main control circuit 100 shifts the gaming state from the 3BB gaming state to a bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (5)). Furthermore, when more than the prescribed number (1 medal) of medals is paid out in the 2BB gaming state, the main control circuit 100 shifts the gaming state from the 2BB gaming state to the bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (6)).

<Design arrangement table>
FIG. 304(a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table.

The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 304(a) represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

Symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter. The types of designs include "White 7", "Purple 7", "BAR", "Rip", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank A", and " "Blank B" is included.

<Design code table>
FIG. 304(b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table.

As shown in FIG. 304(b), each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is specified by a symbol code table, and in this embodiment, is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. . The symbol code table shown in FIG. 304(b) represents symbol codes as data for specifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 304(a) has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R, but in reality The symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM 102 represents an arrangement of symbol codes that specify the symbols arranged on the surfaces of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R.

In this embodiment, the symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 include "White 7", "Purple 7", "BAR", "Rip", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Watermelon", There are 10 types: "Cherry", "Blank A", and "Blank B". In the symbol code table, "White 7", "Purple 7", "BAR", "Rep", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank A", and "Blank A symbol code of "1" to "10" is assigned to each symbol of "B".

<Design combination table>
FIGS. 305A and 305B are diagrams showing symbol combination tables.

The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line and the number of medals that will be paid out when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (number of medals paid out). ing. Regarding symbol combinations, symbols on the left reel 3L, symbols on the middle reel 3C, and symbols on the right reel 3R are shown in order from the left. The names given to each combination are also shown.

Regarding the number of medals paid out, the number of medals paid out when a 2-card game is played (payout when playing a 2-card game), and the number of medals paid out when a 3-card game is played (payout when a 3-card game is played). are shown respectively. In this specification, a unit game that is played by inserting one medal is called a one-coin game, a unit game that is played by inserting two medals is called a two-coin game, and a unit game that is played by inserting two medals is called a two-coin game. A unit game played by inserting a number of medals is sometimes called a 3-coin game. In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in each gaming state is set as two or three.

As the effective line, a pseudo line (middle-middle-upper) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R is set. As described in the first embodiment, the active line is activated when the amount of medals required for the current game (the number of medals available for starting the game) is bet.

The symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 305A and 305B show combinations of symbols ("combinations") identified by storage area identification data expressed in 13 bytes, and combinations on the active line when 2 or 3 cards are hung. The number of medals to be paid out when displayed is associated with the number of medals to be paid out.

In some figures, a plurality of combinations are shown together. For example, "C_TB Reply B_01-02" is composed of two combinations: "C_TB Reply B_01" and "C_TB Reply B_02". The combination called "C_TB Reply B_01" corresponds to the symbol combination "Reply-Watermelon-Bell A", and the combination called "C_TB Reply B_02" corresponds to the symbol combination "Reply-Blank A-Bell A". Compatible. When these combinations are displayed along the active line, no medals are paid out, but replay is activated.

Similarly, "C_CB Reply A_01 to 08" is composed of eight combinations of "C_CB Reply A_01" to "C_TB Reply B_08." In the figure, for "C_CB Reply A_01-08", two types of symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are defined as symbols on the left reel 3L, and one type of symbol as the symbol on the middle reel 3C. ("Bell B") is defined, and four types of symbols ("White 7", "Purple 7", "Blank B", and "Cherry") are defined as symbols on the right reel 3R. As a result, “C_CB Reply A_01 to 08” includes 2×1×4=8 combinations.

Also, if the combination "Rep-Bell B-Bell B" called "C_CD Bell A" is displayed along the active line, 11 medals will be paid out in a 2-card game, and 3 medals will be paid out. Also in the betting game, 11 medals are paid out. Further, when a combination of "White 7-Blank A-BAR" called "C_2BB" is displayed along the active line, no medals are paid out, but the gaming state shifts to the 2BB gaming state.

In addition, in the figure, "REP" indicates a combination that activates replay (replay) when winning a prize, "FRU" indicates a combination that pays out medals when winning a prize, and "BB" indicates a BB gaming state ( 2BB gaming state or 3BB gaming state) (see FIGS. 11 to 14), and "HZR" indicates other combinations (combinations in which medals are not paid out even if a prize is won).

<Combination table by flag>
306A to 306D are diagrams showing combination tables by flag.

The flag-specific combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line. As a result, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the active line (the type of display combination that can win) is uniquely determined.

Specifically, the flag-specific combination tables shown in FIGS. 306A to 306D show combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the active line in response to internal winning combinations. The internal winning combinations in this embodiment include "miss", "F_replay", "F_common B reply", "F_chance A", "F_chance B", "F_special combination A", "F_special combination B". ", "F_Special Role C", "F_Special Role D", "F_Watermelon", "F_Weak Cherry", "F_Strong Cherry", "F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A" , "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", " F_312 Bell B2," "F_321 Bell A1," "F_321 Bell A2," "F_321 Bell B1," "F_321 Bell B2," "F_JACA," "F_JACB," "F_3BB," and "F_2BB."

For example, when the internal winning combination is "F_3BB", displaying "C_3BB" on the active line is permitted. Further, when the internal winning combination is "F_2BB", displaying "C_2BB" on the active line is permitted. That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_2BB" or "F_3BB", it represents that the internal winning combination is BB (2BB or 3BB).

In addition, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay", "C_T Reply", "C_C Reply", "C_CU Reply_01-02", "C_CD Reply_01-12", and "C_B Reply_01-32" " is allowed to be displayed on the active line. In addition, when the internal winning combination is "F_123 Bell B", "T_Koboshi 1", "T_Koboshi 4_01-02", "T_Koboshi 5_01-02", "C_CD Bell A", "C_Medium Control 2_01 ~04'', ``C_Right Control 3_01~02'', ``C_Right Control 4_01~02'', and ``C_123 Control 2_01~02'' are allowed to be displayed on the effective line.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery table according to this embodiment is an internal lottery table that is referred to in a unit game played by inserting two medals during a bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) (see FIG. 307(a)). ), the internal lottery table (see FIG. 307(b)) that is referenced in the unit game played by inserting three medals during the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state), and the 3BB flag state ( The internal lottery table (see FIG. 308(a)) that is referenced in the unit game played by inserting two medals during the 3BB flag state (RT0 gaming state) and the 3 medals during the 3BB flag state (RT0 gaming state) The internal lottery table (see FIG. 308(b)) that is referred to in the unit game that is played when 2 medals are inserted and the 2 medals that are inserted during the 2BB flag state (RT1 game state) The internal lottery table (see FIG. 309(a)) is referenced in the unit game played, and the unit game is referenced in the unit game played when three medals are inserted during the 2BB flag state (RT1 game state). An internal lottery table (see FIG. 309(b)) and an internal lottery table (see FIG. 309(c)) that is referred to in the BB gaming state (2BB gaming state and 3BB gaming state) are provided.

FIG. 307(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (two-stakes game). FIG. 307(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (three-coin game). FIG. 308(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the 3BB flag state (two-stake game). FIG. 308(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the 3BB flag state (3-coin game). FIG. 309(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a state between 2BB flags (2-bet game). FIG. 309(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the 2BB flag state (3-coin game). FIG. 309(c) is a diagram showing the internal lottery table for BB gaming state.

A plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 307 to 309 are stored in the main ROM 102 corresponding to each gaming state and each number of inserted coins, and show the winning probability of each flag with a denominator of 65536 for each setting 1 to 6. There is. For example, in FIG. 307(a), "F_2BB" is defined as the winning combination, but "F_3BB" is not defined, and the lottery value "12000" is defined for "F_2BB". As a result, the probability that "F_2BB" wins internally is "12000/65536." In FIG. 307(b), "F_3BB" is defined as the winning combination, but "F_2BB" is not defined, and the lottery value "13877" is defined for "F_3BB" for setting 1. There is. As a result, in the case of setting 1, the probability that "F_3BB" wins internally is "13877/65536".

In FIGS. 308(a) and 308(b), a lottery value is defined for a winning combination that overlaps with "F_3BB" which has already been internally won. The duplicate winning combination is written in the form of "F_3BB+ (duplicate winning combination)" in the table. In the state between the 3BB flags (2-stake game and 3-stake game), the lottery value "0" is specified for "lost" because only "lost" is never won. Instead, "F_3BB" is defined as the winning combination when there are no duplicate wins (actually "lost").

In FIGS. 309(a) and (b), a lottery value is defined for a winning combination that overlaps with the already internally won "F_2BB". The duplicate winning combination is written in the form of "F_2BB+ (duplicate winning combination)" in the table. In the state between two BB flags (two-stakes game), since only a "lost" is never won, a lottery value of "0" is defined for a "lost". Further, a lottery value of "0" is defined for the winning combination ("F_2BB") when the winning is actually a "loss", and the winning combination is configured such that the winning combination is not won. Furthermore, in the state between two BB flags (three-stakes game), since only "lost" is never won, the lottery value "0" is defined for "lost". Instead, "F_2BB" is defined as the winning combination when there are no duplicate wins (actually "lost").

<Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation mode, and number of medals paid out>
FIG. 310A is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in the non-bonus winning state and the 2BB flag state (3-card game). FIG. 310B is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in the 3BB flag state (3-card game).

In the first embodiment, when each internal winning combination is won, any combination of symbols (which can also be referred to as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) is displayed according to the stop operation mode. (See Figure 15). In this embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out is configured as shown in FIGS. 310A and 310B.

FIG. 310A shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the non-bonus winning state or the 2BB flag state. FIG. 310B shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals paid out in a unit game played by inserting three medals during the 3BB flag state.

In the figure, "1 → 2 → 3" means that the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation. A case is shown in which this is performed as a 3-stop operation (batting order 1). In "1 → 3 → 2", the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 2).

In "2 → 1 → 3", the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 3). In "2 → 3 → 1", the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 4).

In "3 → 1 → 2", the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation. This shows the case where the game is played as follows (batting order 5). In "3→2→1", the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation. (batting order 6) is shown.

For example, if "F_123 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination in a unit game played by inserting 3 medals during the 2BB flag state, if the stop operation is performed according to batting order 1, 11 If one medal is paid out and a stop operation is performed by batting order 2, there is a 1/2 probability that one medal will be paid out, and if a stop operation is performed by batting order 3, one medal will be paid out with a 1/4 probability. If a medal is paid out and a stop operation is performed by batting order 4, one medal will be paid out with a 1/4 probability, and if a stop operation is performed by batting order 5, one medal will be paid out with a 1/4 probability. If a stop operation is performed in batting order 6, one medal will be paid out with a probability of 1/4.

On the other hand, if "F_123 Bell B" is determined as an internal winning combination in a unit game played by inserting three medals during the 3BB flag state, the stop operation is performed according to batting order 1. 11 medals will be paid out, and if a stop operation is performed by batting order 2, 11 medals will be paid out, and if a stop operation is performed by batting order 3, 1 medal will be paid out with a probability of 1/4. If a stop operation is performed in batting order 4, one medal will be paid out with a probability of 1/4, and if a stop operation is performed in batting order 5, one medal will be paid out with a probability of 1/4. When a stop operation is performed in batting order 6, one medal is paid out with a probability of 1/4.

"F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A", "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2" are each Depending on the order of stop operations (press order) on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the combinations of symbols that are stopped and displayed along the active line are different internal winning combinations (press order bells). When the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressing order is correct, 11 medals will be paid out.

In addition, in FIG. 310A, "same" means a 3-coin game in a bonus non-winning state or a state between 2BB flags and a 3-coin game in a state between 3BB flags, and the internal winning combination, stop operation mode, and medals. This indicates that the correspondence relationship with the number of coins paid out is the same, and the "change" is a 3-coin game in a non-bonus winning state or a state between 2BB flags and a 3-coin game in a state between 3BB flags. , indicates that the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out is at least partially different.

For example, as mentioned above, if "F_123 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a 3-coin game in the non-bonus winning state or a state between 2BB flags and a 3-coin game in a state between 3BB flags. The number of medals paid out when the stop operation is performed differs depending on the batting order 2. Therefore, in FIG. 310A, "Change" is displayed for "F_123 Bell B". Further, "change" is also displayed for the bells in the pressing order other than "F_123 Bell B". In this embodiment, the correct pressing order for the pressing order bell is more in the 3BB flag state than in the bonus non-winning state or the 2BB flag state.

<Subflag>
FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations and subflag numbers. FIG. 311(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between subflag numbers and subflag names.

As explained in the first embodiment, the sub-flag plays a similar role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination and its winning probability) in various lotteries related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous sections) performed by the main control circuit 100. This information is used to make it possible to identify groups by grouping the internal winning combinations that play a role (such as

As shown in FIGS. 311(a) and (b), the sub-flag number "0" ("lose") is set for the internal winning combinations "lose", "F_JACA", and "F_JACB". . For the internal winning combination "F_Replay", a sub-flag number "1" ("Reply") is set. A sub-flag number “2” (“common bell”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_common B reply”. For the internal winning combination "F_Chance A", a sub-flag number "3" ("Chance A") is set. For the internal winning combination "F_Chance B", a sub-flag number "4" ("Chance B") is set.

The sub flag number “5” (“special role”) is set for the internal winning combinations “F_Special role A,” “F_Special role B,” “F_Special role C,” and “F_Special role D.” has been done. For the internal winning combination "F_Watermelon", a sub-flag number "6" ("Watermelon") is set. For the internal winning combination "F_Weak Cherry", a sub-flag number "7" ("Weak Cherry") is set. For the internal winning combination "F_Strong Cherry", a sub-flag number "8" ("Strong Cherry") is set.

Internal winning combination “F_123 Bell A”, “F_123 Bell B”, “F_132 Bell A”, “F_132 Bell B”, “F_213 Bell A”, “F_213 Bell B”, “F_231 Bell A”, “F_231 Bell B” , "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2" The sub-flag number "9" ("press order bell") is set for .

As a result, if the internal winning combination is any one of "Lose", "F_JACA", and "F_JACB", the sub-flag "Lose" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Replay", the sub-flag "Rip" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_common B reply", the sub-flag "common bell" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Chance A", the sub-flag "Chance A" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Chance B", the sub-flag "Chance B" is determined.

If the internal winning combination is one of "F_Special combination A", "F_Special combination B", "F_Special combination C", and "F_Special combination D", the sub-flag "Special combination" is set. It is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon", the sub-flag number "Watermelon" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Weak Cherry", the sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Strong Cherry", the sub-flag "Strong Cherry" is determined.

The internal winning combination is "F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A", "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B" ", "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2" '', the sub-flag ``Press Order Bell'' is determined.

<Playability>
FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of gaming states in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section according to an embodiment of the present invention.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages a gaming state (ball output state) shown in FIG. 312 separately from the gaming state shown in FIG. 303. As shown in FIG. 312, the ball release state is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

As described in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is a gaming period that can be controlled to a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified (see FIG. 5). The advantageous sections include a performance section (advantageous section/normal game) and an increase section (advantageous section/AT state). The performance section is basically a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not reported, and is a non-advantageous gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the AT state. This section is similar to the section, but differs from the non-advantageous section in that a mode transition occurs. The increasing section is an AT state (a gaming state advantageous to the player).

In the production section, control is possible in any one of the normal mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, and pseudo bonus C mode. The characteristics of each mode will be explained in detail below.

In addition, in this specification, a state in which an advantageous section and a normal mode exist is referred to as an advantageous section (normal mode), a state in which an advantageous section and a chance A mode exists is referred to as an advantageous section (chance A mode); A state in chance B mode is referred to as an advantageous section (chance B mode), a state in which it is an advantageous section and pseudo-bonus A mode is referred to as an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode), and a state in which it is an advantageous section and pseudo-bonus B mode. A state may be referred to as an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode), and a state that is an advantageous section and pseudo-bonus C mode may be referred to as an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus C mode).

<Processing at the start of the game for non-advantageous sections>
FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for a non-advantageous section performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 314 is a diagram showing the initial bonus winning rate lottery table. FIG. 315 is a diagram showing a flag set lottery table for determining the number of games that have passed in an advantageous period. FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a chance B continuation rate lottery table.

The process at the start of the game for non-advantageous sections shown in FIG. This is a process that is performed in the start state control process (for example, when the determination result in step S85 in FIG. 27 is "YES"). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section by referring to a gaming section flag storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103.

In the non-advantageous section game start processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the internal winning combination is a predetermined combination (“lost” or “F_replay”) (step S2001). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination process (see step S64 in FIG. 26) is either "lose" or "F_replay" (see FIGS. 307 to 309). Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the internal winning combination is neither "lost" nor "F_replay", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the internal winning combination is either "lost" or "F_replay", the main CPU 101 executes advantageous section transition processing (step S2002). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets an advantageous section as a game section by updating a game section flag storage area (not shown) (see step S88 in FIG. 27). The main CPU 101 also sets the ceiling number of games to "851 games." Similarly to the first embodiment, when the number of unit games played in the normal mode of the advantageous section (the value of the ceiling counter) reaches the ceiling number of games, pseudo bonuses (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode , and pseudo-bonus C mode).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an initial bonus winning rate lottery process (step S2003). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the initial bonus winning rate lottery table (see FIG. 314) and performs a lottery based on the sub-flags (see FIG. 311) and random numbers, thereby setting the bonus winning rate as "low", Decide either "medium" or "high".

In the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIGS. ", "Watermelon", "Weak Cherry", "Strong Cherry", and "Press Order Bell"), the lottery value corresponding to the bonus winning rate ("Low", "Medium", and "High") is stipulated. In the diagram, "low bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "low", "medium bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "medium", and "high bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "medium". ” indicates that the bonus winning rate is “high”. The probability that each bonus winning rate is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the bonus winning rate / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" .

The initial bonus winning rate lottery table is provided for each of settings 1 to 6. When the set value is setting 1, the first bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(a) is referred to, and when the setting value is setting 2, the first bonus winning rate shown in FIG. 314(b) is referred to. The lottery table is referred to, and if the setting value is setting 3, the first bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(c) is referred to, and if the setting value is setting 4, the first bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. The initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. , the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(f) is referred to.

For example, if the setting value is setting 1 and the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "reply", the bonus winning rate is "low" with a probability of 102/256. ” is determined, “medium” is determined with a probability of 102/256, and “high” is determined with a probability of 52/256.

After executing the process in step S2003, the main CPU 101 executes a flag set lottery process for determining the number of games that have passed in an advantageous period (step S2004). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the flag set lottery table for determining the number of games that have passed in an advantageous period (see FIG. 315), and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine "win" or "non-win."

In the flag set lottery table for determining the number of games that have elapsed in an advantageous period shown in FIG. ''), a lottery value corresponding to the result of the flag set lottery for determining the number of games that have passed in an advantageous section ("non-winning" and "winning") is defined. The probability that each result of the flag set lottery for determining the number of games that have passed in an advantageous period is determined by the following formula: ``Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256) ”. For example, when the set value is set to 1, there is a probability of 183/256 that the player wins the flag set lottery for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period. If the main CPU 101 wins the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag set lottery, the main CPU 101 sets the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag on. The advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag is set to OFF when the number of unit games played in the advantageous section reaches 100 times.

After executing the process of step S2004, the main CPU 101 executes chance B continuation rate lottery process (step S2005). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B continuation rate lottery table (see FIG. 316) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to set the chance B continuation rate as "40%", "50%", One of "60%", "70%", "80%", "90%", and "100%" is determined.

In the chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIGS. Chance B continuation rate ("40%", "50%", "60%", "70%", "80%", "90%", and "100%") for each "Setting 6") A lottery value corresponding to is defined. The probability that each Chance B continuation rate is determined shall be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the Chance B continuation rate/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" Can be done.

The chance B continuation rate lottery table is provided for each of the bonus winning rates ("low", "medium", and "high"). If the bonus winning rate is "low", the chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 316(a) is referred to, and if the bonus winning rate is "medium", the chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 316(b) is referred to. The chance B continuation rate lottery table is referred to, and if the bonus winning rate is "high", the chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 316(c) is referred to.

For example, if the bonus winning rate determined by the initial bonus winning rate lottery process (see step S2003) is "low" and the setting value is setting 1, the chance B continuation rate is set at a probability of 80/256. "50%" is determined, "60%" is determined with a probability of 73/256, "70%" is determined with a probability of 70/256, "80%" is determined with a probability of 32/256, "90%" is determined with a probability of 1/256.

After executing the process in step S2005, the main CPU 101 executes various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) (step S2006). Various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) will be explained later using FIG. 321. After executing the process in step S2005, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at start of game for advantageous section (normal mode)>
FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit.

The process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (normal mode) shown in FIG. 317 is performed in the main control circuit 100 as shown in FIG. ) is the process performed in step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 determines that the current game section and mode are the advantageous section and normal mode, respectively, by referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103. can be recognized.

In the processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (normal mode), first, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling counter (step S2021). The value of the ceiling counter indicates the number of unit games played in the advantageous section (normal mode) and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the ceiling counter is added only in the advantageous section (normal mode), and is cleared when the advantageous section ends and the mode shifts to the non-advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the ceiling counter is the number of ceiling games (851) (step S2022). When determining that the value of the ceiling counter is the number of ceiling games (851), the main CPU 101 executes the ceiling reaching process (step S2023). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information. The value of the bonus winning information corresponds to the type of pseudo bonus and is stored in the main RAM 103. Specifically, bonus winning information "1" corresponds to pseudo bonus A mode, bonus winning information "2" corresponds to pseudo bonus B mode, and bonus winning information "3" corresponds to pseudo bonus A mode. Compatible with C mode.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus precursor game number counter to "2". The value of the bonus main precursor game counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus main precursor effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The bonus actual precursor performance is a performance that suggests a shift to a pseudo bonus, and is a performance performed when the pseudo bonus is won (when the value of bonus winning information is 1 or more). When the bonus actual precursor effect ends (when the value of the bonus actual precursor game counter reaches "0"), a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C) is executed according to the value of the bonus winning information. mode).

In addition, even if the value of the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling number of games (851), if a precursor performance (bonus real precursor performance, bonus fake precursor performance, or chance A precursor performance) is executed (bonus If the value of the actual omen game counter, bonus fake omen game counter, or chance A omen game counter is greater than 0), when the omen effect ends (when the value of the counter becomes 0) ), the ceiling reaching process may be executed. The foreshadowing performance will be explained in detail later.

If it is determined in step S2022 that the value of the ceiling counter is not the number of ceiling games (851), or after executing the process in step S2023, the main CPU 101 executes various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) ( Step S2024). Various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) will be explained later using FIG. 321. After executing the process in step S2024, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Character-related lottery processing>
FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing character-related lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 319 is a diagram showing a character determination lottery table. FIG. 320 is a diagram showing a character high accuracy game number lottery table.

The character-related lottery process shown in FIG. 318 is performed when the current game section is a non-advantageous section, or when the current game section is an advantageous section and the mode is normal mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, pseudo This is performed after the main control circuit 100 performs the process of step S73 (sub-flag etc. setting process) in FIG. 26 (internal lottery process) when in the bonus A mode or the pseudo-bonus B mode (see FIG. 312). It is processing. The main CPU 101 can recognize the current game section and mode by referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the character-related lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the character high probability game number counter (see step S2049) is greater than 0 (step S2041). The value of the character high accuracy game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games to be played with a character (any one of character A, character B, character C, and character D) set, and is stored in the main RAM 103. remembered.

Although not shown, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a decoration unit A, a decoration unit B, a decoration unit C, and a decoration unit D. These decorative units are equipped with a lens member having translucency. Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with an LED for illuminating the decoration unit A, an LED for illuminating the decoration unit B, an LED for illuminating the decoration unit C, and an LED for illuminating the decoration unit D. Decoration unit A irradiation LED, decoration unit B irradiation LED, decoration unit C irradiation LED, and decoration unit D irradiation LED are decoration unit A, decoration unit B, decoration unit C, and decoration unit D, respectively. It is placed so that it can be irradiated with light. This allows decoration unit A, decoration unit B, decoration unit C, and decoration unit D to be lit individually.

Specifically, when character A is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the decoration unit A illumination LED to emit light, and the decoration unit A lights up. When character B is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the decoration unit B illumination LED to emit light, and the decoration unit B lights up. When the character C is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the decoration unit C illumination LED to emit light, and the decoration unit C lights up. When the character D is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the decoration unit D illumination LED to emit light, and the decoration unit D lights up.

If it is determined that the value of the character high probability game number counter is larger than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the character high probability game number counter (step S2042). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the character high probability game number counter is 0 (step S2043). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the character high certainty game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 clears the set character (step S2044).

If it is determined in step S2041 that the value of the character high probability game number counter is 0, if it is determined in step S2043 that the value of the character high probability game number counter is not 0, or after executing the process of step S2044. , the main CPU 101 determines whether a character is set (step S2045). If it is determined that a character has been set, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no character has been set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is a "special combination" (see FIG. 311). A judgment is made (step S2046). If it is determined that the sub-flag is not a "special combination", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-flag is a "special combination", the main CPU 101 executes a character determination lottery (step S2047). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the character determination lottery table (see FIG. 319) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby selecting "non-winning", "Character A", " One of "Character B", "Character C", and "Character D" is determined.

In the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. 319, the character is Lottery values corresponding to the determined lottery results ("non-winning", "character A", "character B", "character C", and "character D") are defined. The probability that each result of the character determination lottery will be determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" .

The character selection lottery consists of non-advantageous sections, advantageous sections (normal mode), advantageous sections (chance A mode), advantageous sections (chance B mode), advantageous sections (pseudo-bonus A mode), and advantageous sections (pseudo-bonus B mode). ). If the flag for determining the number of games that have elapsed in an advantageous period (see step S2004 in FIG. 313) is set to on, the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. If it is not set to , the character selection lottery table shown in FIG. mode), the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode), and the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode), the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. 319(c) is referred to.

For example, if the setting value is 1, in an advantageous section (normal mode) in which the advantageous section elapsed games determination flag is not set to on, there is a probability of 169/256 that "non-winning" will occur as a result of the character selection lottery. " is determined, "Character A" is determined with a probability of 36/256, "Character B" is determined with a probability of 32/256, "Character C" is determined with a probability of 18/256, and "Character C" is determined with a probability of 18/256. “Character D” is determined with the probability of .

Although not shown, in the character-related lottery process executed in one unit game, a character determination lottery is won (the result of the character determination lottery is "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and " character D), the character corresponding to the result is set in the character-related lottery process (before the process of step S2041 is performed) executed in the next unit game. As a result, in the next unit game, any one of the decoration unit A, decoration unit B, decoration unit C, and decoration unit D will be lit.

After executing the process of step S2047, the main CPU 101 determines that the character determination lottery has been won (the result of the character determination lottery is "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and "Character D"). (step S2048). If it is determined that the character determination lottery has not been won (the result of the character determination lottery is "non-winning"), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the character selection lottery has been won (the result of the character selection lottery is any one of "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and "Character D"), the main The CPU 101 executes a character high accuracy game number lottery (step S2049). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the character high probability game number lottery table (see FIG. 320) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the number of character high probability games as "3", "5", One of "10", "15", and "20" is determined.

In the character high probability game number lottery table shown in FIG. , advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode), and advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode)', the number of character high probability games ('3', '5', '10', '15', and '20 '') is specified.The probability that the number of high-probability games for each character is determined is determined by ``the lottery value specified for the number of high-probability games for the character/all that may be extracted.'' number of random values (random number denominator: 256).

For example, in the advantageous section (normal mode), as the number of high probability games for a character, "5" is determined with a probability of 153/256, "10" is determined with a probability of 85/256, and "10" is determined with a probability of 16/256. "15" is determined, and "20" is determined with a probability of 2/256. The main CPU 101 sets the determined number of character high probability games in a character high probability game number counter. After executing the process in step S2049, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Various lottery processing for advantageous sections (normal mode)>
FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit.

The various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) shown in FIG. 321 are carried out in the main control circuit 100 in step S2006 of FIG. This is the process performed in step S2024 of the game start time process).

In various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode), the main CPU 101 first executes a bonus lottery process (step S2061). The bonus lottery process will be explained later using FIG. 322.

After executing the process in step S2061, the main CPU 101 executes a bonus promotion lottery process (step S2062). The bonus promotion lottery process will be explained later using FIG. 325.

After executing the process of step S2062, the main CPU 101 executes chance A lottery process (step S2063). The chance A lottery process will be explained later using FIG. 327.

After executing the process in step S2063, the main CPU 101 executes a precursor game number lottery process (step S2064). The precursor game number lottery process will be explained later using FIG. 330.

After executing the process in step S2064, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Bonus lottery processing>
FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the bonus lottery process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table. FIG. 324(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flags and ball-out flag group (normal) numbers for each character. FIG. 324(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the ball-out flag group (normal) number and the ball-out flag group (normal).

The bonus lottery process shown in FIG. 322 is a process performed in step S2061 of FIG. 321 (various lottery processes for advantageous section (normal mode)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the bonus lottery process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the ceiling counter (see step S2021 in FIG. 317) is smaller than the ceiling game number (851) (step S2081). When determining that the value of the ceiling counter is not smaller than the number of ceiling games (851), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling counter is smaller than the number of ceiling games (851), the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2023 in FIG. 317) is "0" or not. (Step S2082). When determining that the value of the bonus winning information is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the value of the bonus lottery information is "0", the main CPU 101 executes a bonus lottery (step S2083). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 323) and performs a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random number value, so that as a result of the bonus lottery, One of "non-winning information", "bonus winning information +1", "bonus winning information +2", "bonus winning information +3", and "bonus fake" is determined.

In the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323, the ball flag groups (normal) ("other than those listed on the right", "rare LV1", "rare LV2", "rare LV3", "rare LV4", "rare LV5"), and For each “Rare LV6”), a lottery corresponding to the bonus lottery result (“Non-winning”, “Bonus winning information +1”, “Bonus winning information +2”, “Bonus winning information +3”, and “Bonus fake”) The value is specified. The probability that each result of the bonus lottery is determined can be expressed by "the lottery value defined for the result/the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)".

The bonus lottery table includes bonus winning rates (“low,” “medium,” and “high”) (see step S2003 in FIG. 313), and a flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period (see step S2004 in FIG. 313). It is provided for each presence/absence. If the flag for determining the number of games that have elapsed in an advantageous section is set on, the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. When the winning rate is "low", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(a) is referred to, and when the bonus winning rate is "medium", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(b) is referred to. If the bonus lottery rate is "high", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(c) is referred to.

In FIG. 324, each sub-flag (see step S2047 in FIG. 311)) is defined. "None" indicates that no character is set, "Character A" indicates that character A is set, "Character B" indicates that character B is set, and "Character A" indicates that character A is set. "Character C" indicates that character C is set, and "Character D" indicates that character D is set. The main CPU 101 converts the sub-flag into a ball flag group (normal) based on the presence/absence and type of the character and the correspondence shown in FIG. 324.

For example, in a state where character A is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "Rep", the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3". ” is determined. At this time, if the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is not set to ON and the bonus winning rate is "high", a "non-winning" will be determined as a result of the bonus lottery with a probability of 240/256. "Bonus winning information +1" is determined with a probability of 8/256, "bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 7/256, and "bonus winning information +3" is determined with a probability of 1/256. .

For example, in a state where character D is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "special combination", the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV5" is determined. At this time, if the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period is not set to ON and the bonus winning rate is "low", the bonus lottery result will be "bonus winning information +1" with a probability of 37/256. is determined, "bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 36/256, "bonus winning information +3" is determined with a probability of 1/256, and "bonus fake" is determined with a probability of 182/256. .

If "bonus winning information +1" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and if "bonus winning information +2" is determined, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information. If "bonus winning information +3" is determined, "3" is added to the value of bonus winning information. Here, the upper limit value of the value of the bonus winning information is "3", so if the value of the bonus winning information after addition exceeds "3", the main CPU 101 sets "3" to the value of the bonus winning information. set. When the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more, it indicates that a pseudo bonus has been won, and in this case, as described above, a real bonus precursor effect is performed.

Furthermore, when "bonus fake" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus fake flag to ON. The bonus fake flag is a flag indicating that a "bonus fake" has been determined as a result of the bonus lottery (a bonus fake has been won). If you win the bonus fake, a bonus fake precursor performance is performed. The bonus fake precursor performance is a performance that suggests transition to a pseudo bonus, and is a performance performed when the pseudo bonus is not won (so-called fake performance). Even if the bonus fake precursor performance ends, the transition to the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) does not occur.

After executing the process of step S2083, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Bonus promotion lottery process>
FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing bonus promotion lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 326 is a diagram showing a bonus promotion lottery table.

The bonus promotion lottery process shown in FIG. 325 is a process performed in step S2062 of FIG. 321 (various lottery processes for advantageous section (normal mode)) in the main control circuit 100. Note that if the value of the bonus winning information becomes 1 or more due to the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) being performed in one unit game, the bonus promotion lottery process is not performed in the unit game, The bonus promotion lottery process may be performed from the next unit game.

In the bonus promotion lottery process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is greater than "0" (step S2101). When determining that the value of the bonus winning information is "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the bonus winning information is larger than "0" (1 or more), the main CPU 101 executes a bonus promotion lottery (step S2102). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the bonus promotion lottery table (see FIG. 326) and performs a lottery based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random number, thereby determining the result of the bonus promotion lottery. As a result, one of "non-winning", "bonus winning information +1", and "bonus winning information +2" is determined.

In the bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. , "Rare LV6"), lottery values corresponding to the results of the bonus promotion lottery ("non-winning", "bonus winning information +1", and "bonus winning information +2") are defined. The probability that each result of the bonus promotion lottery is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" .

The bonus promotion lottery table is provided for each case where the current bonus winning information is "1" and when the current bonus winning information is "2" or more. When the current bonus winning information is "1", the bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 326(a) is referred to, and when the current bonus winning information is "2" or more, the bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. ) is referred to as the bonus promotion lottery table.

For example, if the current bonus winning information is "1" and the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV5", there is a probability of "non-winning" as a result of the bonus promotion lottery with a probability of 171/256. "Bonus winning information +1" is determined with a probability of 84/256, and "bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 1/256.

If "bonus winning information +1" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and if "bonus winning information +2" is determined, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information. Add "2" to the value of . As mentioned above, the upper limit of the value of the bonus winning information is "3", so if the value of the bonus winning information after addition exceeds "3", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the bonus winning information to "3". ”.

After executing the process in step S2102, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Chance A lottery processing>
FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing chance A lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing a chance A lottery table by setting. FIG. 329 is a diagram showing the chance A lottery table.

The chance A lottery process shown in FIG. 327 is a process performed in step S2063 of FIG. 321 (various lottery processes for advantageous section (normal mode)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the chance A lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 executes the chance A lottery by setting (step S2121). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A lottery table by setting (see FIG. 328) and determines a "win" or "non-win" by performing a lottery based on random numbers.

In the setting-based chance A lottery table shown in FIG. , lottery values corresponding to the results of chance A lottery by setting (“non-winning” and “winning”) are defined. The probability that each result of Chance A lottery by setting is determined shall be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

The chance A lottery table by setting is provided for each of the presence/absence of the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313). If the flag for determining the number of games that have elapsed in an advantageous section is not set to ON, the chance A lottery table by setting shown in FIG. , the chance A lottery table by setting shown in FIG. 328(b) is referred to. For example, if the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON and the setting value is 1, the probability of winning the chance A lottery by setting is 194/256.

After executing the process of step S2121, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance A lottery by setting has been won (step S2122). If it is determined that the setting-specific chance A lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance A lottery by setting has been won, the main CPU 101 executes the chance A lottery (step S2123). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A lottery table (see FIG. 329) and performs a lottery based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the chance A lottery. Then, one of "non-winning", "chance A winning information +1", and "chance A winning information +2" is determined.

In the chance A lottery table shown in FIG. , "Rare LV6"), a lottery value corresponding to the chance A lottery result ("non-winning", "chance A winning information +1", and "chance A winning information +2") is defined. The probability that each result of Chance A lottery is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" .

The chance A lottery table is provided for each case where the current chance A winning information is "0" and when the current chance A winning information is "1" or more. When the current chance A winning information is "0", the chance A lottery table shown in FIG. 328(a) is referred to, and when the current chance A winning information is "1" or more, The chance A lottery table shown in (b) is referred to.

For example, if the Chance A lottery information is "0" and the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", a "non-winning" will be determined as a result of Chance A lottery with a probability of 89/256. "Chance A winning information +1" is determined with a probability of 163/256, and "Chance A winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 4/256.

If "Chance A winning information +1" is determined as a result of Chance A lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of Chance A winning information, and if "Chance A winning information +2" is determined. , "2" is added to the value of the bonus winning information. Here, the upper limit of the value of chance A winning information is "2", so if the value of chance A winning information after addition exceeds "2", the main CPU 101 changes the value of chance A winning information to " 2”. If the value of the chance A winning information is 1 or more, it indicates that the chance A has been won, and in this case, the chance A precursor performance will be performed. The chance A precursor performance is a performance that suggests a shift to chance A mode. When the chance A omen effect ends, the game shifts to chance A mode.

After executing the process of step S2123, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Lottery processing for the number of omen games>
FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the precursor game number lottery process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 331 is a diagram showing the number of portent games lottery table.

The precursor game number lottery process shown in FIG. 330 is a process performed in step S2064 in FIG. 321 (various lottery processes for advantageous section (normal mode)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the precursor game number lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the precursor game number counter (bonus book precursor game counter, bonus fake precursor game counter, and chance A precursor game counter) (see step S2145) is 0. It is determined whether or not (step S2141). If it is determined that at least one of the values of the bonus real precursor game number counter, the bonus fake precursor game number counter, and the chance A precursor game number counter is not 0, that is, the precursor effect (bonus real precursor effect, bonus If a fake omen performance or a chance A omen performance) is being performed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the values of the bonus real precursor games counter, the bonus fake precursor games counter, and the chance A precursor games counter are all 0, If the performance (or the chance A portent performance) is not performed, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is 1 or more (step S2142).

If it is determined that the value of the bonus winning information is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the bonus fake flag (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is set on (step S2143). If it is determined that the bonus fake flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of chance A winning information (see step S2123 in FIG. 327) is greater than or equal to 1 (step S2144). When determining that the value of the chance A winning information is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2142 that the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more, if it is determined that the bonus fake flag is set on in step S2143, or if the value of the chance A winning information is 1 or more in step S2144. If it is determined that this is the case, that is, if the pseudo bonus, bonus fake, or chance A is won in the current unit game, the main CPU 101 executes a precursor game number lottery (step S2145).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the number of portent games lottery table (see FIG. 331) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the number of portent basic games as "3," "4," or "12." , "15", "26", "29", and "32". Then, the main CPU 101 separately performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine any number between 0 and 2 as the number of games to be added. Then, the main CPU 101 determines the sum of the number of precursory basic games and the additional number of games as the number of precursory games.

In the omen game number lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery value corresponding to the number of omen basic games ("3", "4", "12", "15", "26", "29", and "32") is defined for each "at the time of winning"). ing. The probability that each number of precursory basic games is determined shall be expressed as "the lottery value specified for the number of precursory basic games / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

In the figure, "Bonus Fake" indicates that the number of precursor games is determined based on the fact that the bonus fake flag is set on (a bonus fake is won), and in this case, the determined number of precursor games is determined. is set in the bonus fake precursor game counter. The value of the bonus fake precursor game counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus fake precursor performance is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Further, "Bonus winning information 1" indicates that the number of precursor games lottery is performed based on the value of the bonus winning information being 1, and "Bonus winning information 2" indicates that the value of the bonus winning information is 2. ``Bonus winning information 3'' indicates that the number of portent games is drawn based on the fact that the value of the bonus winning information is 3. In these cases, the determined number of precursor games is set in the bonus precursor game counter. As described above, the value of the bonus book precursor game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus book precursor performance is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

In addition, "when chance A wins" indicates that the number of omen games is drawn based on the fact that chance A is won (the value of chance A winning information is 1 or more), and in this case, the determined omen The number of games is set in the chance A precursor game number counter. The value of the chance A precursor game counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the chance A precursor performance is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

As the precursor game number lottery table, there are provided a precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 331(a) and a precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 331(b). The precursor performance is not performed (the values of the bonus real precursor games counter, the bonus fake precursor games counter, and the chance A precursor games counter are all 0), and the ball output flag group (normal) is "Rare LV1", "Rare LV2", "Rare LV3", or "Rare LV6", bonus fake, pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) , or if chance A is won, the number of portent games lottery table shown in FIG. 331(b) is referred to, and in other cases, the number of portent games lottery table shown in FIG. 331(a) is referred to. Ru.

For example, when no omen effect is performed and the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV1", and the value of bonus winning information is 1, the omen basic game count is 163. "3" is determined with a probability of /256, "4" is determined with a probability of 8/256, "12" is determined with a probability of 69/256, and "15" is determined with a probability of 16/256. Ru. The main CPU 101 sets the total of the determined number of precursory basic games and the number of additional games (any one of 0 to 2) in the precursory game number counter.

After executing the process of step S2145, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

Although not shown, when the number of precursor games is set in the bonus precursor game counter in step S2145, the main CPU 101 generates bonus symbol performance start command data, and stores the generated bonus symbol performance start command data in the main RAM 103. stored in the communication data storage area. The bonus main precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the bonus main precursor performance, and can control the display of images, output of sound, output of light, etc. for the bonus main precursor performance. The process to start is performed. As a result, the bonus main precursor performance is performed over unit games equal to the number of precursor games.

Further, when the number of precursor games is set in the bonus fake precursor game counter in step S2145, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake precursor performance start command data, and transmits the generated bonus fake precursor performance start command data to the main RAM 103. Store in the data storage area. The bonus fake precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the bonus fake precursor performance, and control the display of images, output of sound, output of light, etc. for the bonus fake precursor performance. The process to start is performed. As a result, the bonus fake precursor performance is performed over the unit games corresponding to the number of precursor games. The bonus fake precursor performance is basically the same performance as the bonus real precursor performance.

Further, when the number of portent games is set in the chance A portent game number counter in step S2145, the main CPU 101 generates chance A portent performance start command data, and transmits the generated chance A portent performance start command data to the main RAM 103. Store in the data storage area. The chance A precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). This makes it possible for the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is the timing to start the chance A precursor performance, and to control the display of images, output of sound, output of light, etc. for the chance A precursor performance. The process to start is performed. As a result, the chance A precursor performance is performed over unit games equal to the number of precursor games. The chance A precursor performance may be the same as the bonus real precursor performance or the bonus fake precursor performance, or may be a different performance. In addition, if you win a pseudo bonus, bonus fake, or chance A at that time, the bonus real precursor performance will be performed with the highest priority, the bonus fake precursor performance will be performed with the next priority, and the chance A precursor performance will be performed with the highest priority. is performed next with priority.

Also, while the bonus fake precursor performance is being performed (the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is greater than 0), the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is performed, and as a result, the bonus lottery (pseudo If the player wins a bonus (bonus), the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is cleared (the counter is set to "0"). Then, the number of precursor games determined by the lottery for the number of precursor games (see step S2145) is set in the bonus precursor game counter. As a result, the bonus fake precursor performance ends and the real bonus precursor performance begins.

Also, while the chance A precursor performance is being performed (the value of the chance A precursor game counter is greater than 0), a bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is performed, and thereby a pseudo bonus or bonus If the fake wins, the chance A precursor performance is continuously performed until the value of the chance A precursor game counter becomes 0 (bonus main precursor performance or bonus fake precursor performance are stocked). Then, after transitioning from an advantageous section (normal mode) to an advantageous section (chance A mode) with the end of the chance A portent production, when transitioning from an advantageous section (chance A mode) to an advantageous section (normal mode), A lottery for the number of portent games (see step S2145) is performed. The determined number of portent games is set in the bonus book portent game number counter or bonus fake portent game counter, and the bonus book portent performance or bonus fake portent performance is started (the stocked bonus book portent performance or A bonus fake omen effect will be released).

In addition, when a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) is won by the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) with the bonus fake precursor performances being stocked in this way, the pseudo bonus When the A mode ends, or when the chance B mode transferred from the pseudo-bonus B mode ends, information indicating that bonus fake precursor effects are stocked is cleared.

In addition, if the bonus fake is won again in the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) while the bonus fake precursor performance is being performed (the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is greater than 0), The original bonus fake precursor performance is continuously performed until the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter becomes 0. On the other hand, information indicating that the bonus fake has been won again is discarded.

In addition, if a chance A is won by the chance A lottery (see step S2123 in FIG. 327) while the bonus fake precursor performance is being performed (the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is greater than 0), The bonus fake precursor performance is continuously performed until the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter becomes 0 (Chance A precursor performance is stocked). Then, when the bonus fake omen performance is finished, the number of omen games is determined (see step S2145), and the number of omen games determined thereby is set in the chance A omen game counter, and the chance A omen performance is started. (The stocked chance A omen effect will be released).

As described above, bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322), bonus promotion lottery (see step S2102 in FIG. 325), chance A lottery (see step S2123 in FIG. 327), and number of portent games lottery (see step S2145 in FIG. 330) ) have been described as being performed in the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), but these processes are performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. This may be performed in the current state control process). For example, if the sub-flag set in the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process in step S6 (main process) in FIG. These processes are performed in the start state control process), while if the sub-flag is "push order bell", these processes are performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process) (game end state control process). You may also do this.

When performing these processes in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), the reference ball flag group ( (usually) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell" and 11 medals are paid out, the put-out flag group (normal) according to the character (see FIG. 324) is determined; If no medals are paid out, "0" may be determined as the put-out flag group (normal) number regardless of the character. In addition, in the unit game in which the advantageous section transition process (see step S2002 in FIG. 313) is performed, even if the sub-flag is "push order bell", the process in step S6 (at the start of the game) in FIG. 23 (main process) is performed. These processes may be performed in the state control process).

<Precursor game number counter management process>
FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing precursor game number counter management processing performed in the main control circuit.

The precursor game number counter management process shown in FIG. 332 is performed in the main control circuit 100 as shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S15 (game end state control process) of the main process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current game section and mode by referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the precursor game counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the bonus precursor game counter (see step S2145 in FIG. 330) is greater than 0 (step S2161). If it is determined that the value of the bonus precursor games counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the bonus precursor games counter (step S2162). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus precursor game counter is 0 (step S2163). If it is determined that the value of the bonus precursor game counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the bonus precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the bonus precursor performance (step S2164). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates bonus actual precursor performance end command data, and stores the generated bonus actual precursor performance end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The bonus main precursor performance end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to end the bonus main precursor performance, and the display of images, output of sound, and light Processing to terminate output, etc. is performed.

Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo bonus transition flag to ON (step S2165), and ends this subroutine. The pseudo bonus transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode). The main CPU 101 controls the mode flag storage area according to the value of the bonus winning information in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the pseudo bonus transition flag is set to on. (see Figure 20). As a result, when the value of the bonus winning information is 1, the mode shifts to pseudo bonus A mode, when the value of the bonus winning information is 2, the mode shifts to pseudo bonus B mode, and when the value of the bonus winning information is 3. If so, the mode shifts to pseudo-bonus C mode.

If it is determined in step S2161 that the value of the bonus real precursor games counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus fake precursor games counter is greater than 0 (step S2166). If it is determined that the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is larger than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter (step S2167). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is 0 (step S2168). When determining that the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the bonus fake precursor performance (step S2169). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake precursor performance end command data, and stores the generated bonus fake precursor performance end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The bonus fake precursor performance end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to end the bonus fake precursor performance, and the display of images, output of sound, and light Processing to terminate output, etc. is performed. After executing the process of step S2169, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2166 that the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance A precursor game counter is greater than 0 (step S2170). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance A precursor game counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance A precursor games counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance A precursor games counter (step S2171). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance A precursor game counter is 0 (step S2172). If it is determined that the value of the chance A precursor game counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance A precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the chance A precursor performance (step S2173). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates chance A precursor performance end command data, and stores the generated chance A precursor performance end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The chance A precursor performance end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to end the chance A precursor performance, and the display of images, output of sound, and light Processing to terminate output, etc. is performed.

Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the chance A transition flag to ON (step S2174), and ends this subroutine. The chance A transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start chance A mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance A transition flag is set to ON. . This shifts to chance A mode. Furthermore, when the chance A mode starts, the main CPU 101 sets the chance A game number counter to "3". The value of the chance A game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games to be played in the chance A mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

<Processing at the start of the game for advantageous section (chance A mode)>
FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance A mode) performed in the main control circuit. 334A and 334B are diagrams showing reward lottery tables during chance A. FIG. 335(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flags and ball-out flag group (chance A) numbers for each character. FIG. 335(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the ball-out flag group (chance A) number and the ball-out flag group (chance A). FIG. 336 is a diagram showing an addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table.

The processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (chance A mode) shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S6 (game start state control process) of the main process). The main CPU 101 determines that the current game section and mode are the advantageous section and chance A mode, respectively, by referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103. can be recognized.

In the game start processing for the advantageous section (chance A mode), first, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance A game number counter (step S2181). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance A game counter is 0 (step S2182). If it is determined that the value of the chance A game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to on (step S2183). The normal transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the normal mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to on. This shifts to normal mode.

If it is determined in step S2182 that the value of the chance A game number counter is not 0, or after executing the process in step S2183, the main CPU 101 executes a reward lottery during chance A (step S2184). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A reward lottery table (see FIGS. 334A and 334B), and performs a lottery based on the ball release flag group (chance A) (see FIG. 335) and random numbers. , As a result of the reward lottery during Chance A, "Non-winning", "Continuation rate UP weak", "Continuation rate UP", "Continuation rate UP strong", "Damage stock +1", "Damage stock +2", "Direct hit" One of "pseudo bonus A", "direct hit pseudo bonus B", and "direct hit pseudo bonus C" is determined.

In the chance A reward lottery table shown in FIGS. 334A and 334B, the ball flag groups (chance A) ("other than those listed on the right", "rare LV1", "rare LV2", "rare LV3", "rare LV4"), For each "Rare LV5" and "Rare LV6"), the reward lottery results during Chance A ("Non-winning", "Low continuation rate UP", "Continuation rate UP", "Strong continuation rate UP", " Lottery values corresponding to "Damage Stock +1", "Damage Stock +2", "Direct Hit Pseudo Bonus A", "Direct Hit Pseudo Bonus B", and "Direct Hit Pseudo Bonus C" are defined. The probability that each result of the reward lottery during chance A is determined should be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

The Chance A reward lottery table includes Chance A winning information (“1” and “2”) (see step S2123 in FIG. 327), and the remaining number of unit games to be played in Chance A mode (Chance A game number counter). Values: "0", "1", and "2"). When the chance A winning information is "1" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "0", the chance A reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334A(a) is referred to, and the chance A winning information is "1" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "1", the chance A reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334A(b) is referred to, and the chance A winning information is "1". , when the value of the chance A game number counter is "2", the chance A medium reward lottery table shown in FIG. When the value of the counter is "0", the chance A reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334B(a) is referred to, and the chance A winning information is "2", and the value of the chance A game number counter is " 1", the chance A medium reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334B(b) is referred to, and when the chance A winning information is "2" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "2" In this case, the reward lottery table for chance A shown in FIG. 334B(c) is referred to.

In FIG. 335, sub-flags (see step S2047 in FIG. 311)) is defined. "None" indicates that no character is set, "Character A" indicates that character A is set, "Character B" indicates that character B is set, and "Character A" indicates that character A is set. "Character C" indicates that character C is set, and "Character D" indicates that character D is set. The main CPU 101 converts the sub-flag into a ball-out flag group (chance A) based on the presence/absence and type of the character and the correspondence shown in FIG. 335.

For example, in a state where character A is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell", the ball-out flag group (chance A) is "Rare LV1" is determined. At this time, if the chance A winning information is "2" and the value of the chance A game counter is "2", as a result of the reward lottery during chance A, there is a probability of 176/256 that "continuation rate UP" "Medium" is determined, "Strong continuation rate UP" is determined with a probability of 16/256, "Damage stock +1" is determined with a probability of 62/256, and "Damage stock +2" is determined with a probability of 2/256. be done.

For example, in a state where character B is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "special combination", the ball flag group (chance A) "Rare LV3" is determined as "Rare LV3". At this time, if the chance A winning information is "1" and the value of the chance A game counter is "0", as a result of the reward lottery during chance A, there is a probability of "direct hit pseudo bonus". "B" is determined, and "direct hit pseudo bonus C" is determined with a probability of 16/256.

After executing the process of step S2184, the main CPU 101 determines whether character D (see step S2047 in FIG. 318) is set (step S2185). If it is determined that character D is not set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the chance A reward lottery is "non-winning" (step S2186). If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the chance A reward lottery is "non-winning", the main CPU 101 executes the chance A reward lottery non-winning process (step S2187). The reward lottery non-winning process during chance A will be explained later using FIG. 337. After executing the process in step S2187, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2186 that the result of the reward lottery during chance A is not a "non-winning", the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the reward lottery during chance A is a continuation rate UP ("continuation rate UP is weak", "continuation rate is increasing"). ” or “Strong continuation rate UP”) (step S2188). If it is determined that the result of the reward lottery during chance A is one of "low continuation rate UP", "medium continuation rate UP", and "strong continuation rate UP", the main CPU 101 selects chance B for addition. A continuation rate UP lottery is executed (step S2189). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table (see FIG. 336) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that as a result of the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery, " One of "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", and "10%" is determined.

In the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table shown in FIG. and "Strong continuation rate UP"), the results of the additional chance B continuation rate UP lottery ("Non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5") %" and "10%") are defined. The probability that each result of the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" It can be expressed by

For example, if the result of the chance A reward lottery is "Continuation rate is increasing", "2%" is determined as the result of the additional chance B continuation rate UP lottery with a probability of 128/256, and 64/ "3%" is determined with a probability of 256, and "4%" is determined with a probability of 64/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as a result of the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery to the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information. The value of the chance B continuation rate information for addition is stored in the main RAM 103. The addition chance B continuation rate information will be described in detail later. After executing the process in step S2189, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2188 that the result of the chance A reward lottery is none of "low continuation rate UP", "medium continuation rate UP", and "strong continuation rate UP", the main CPU 101 It is determined whether the result of the medium reward lottery is damage stock (“damage stock +1” or “damage stock +2”) (step S2190). If it is determined that the result of the chance A reward lottery is either "damage stock +1" or "damage stock +2", the main CPU 101 updates the value of the damage stock counter (step S2191).

In this process, if the result of the chance A reward lottery is "damage stock + 1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the damage stock counter, and if the result of the chance A reward lottery is "damage stock + 2", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the damage stock counter and ”, add “2” to the value of the damage stock counter. The value of the damage stock counter is stored in the main RAM 103. The damage stock counter will be detailed later. After executing the process in step S2191, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S2190, the result of the reward lottery during chance A is neither "damage stock +1" nor "damage stock +2" ("direct hit pseudo bonus A", "direct hit pseudo bonus B", and "direct hit pseudo bonus C"). ”), the main CPU 101 executes processing for transitioning to a pseudo bonus (step S2192). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds a value corresponding to the result of the chance A reward lottery to the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322). Specifically, when the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus A", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and if the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus A", If the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is "Bonus B", "2" is added to the value of the bonus winning information, and if the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is "Direct hit pseudo bonus C", "3" is added to the value of the bonus winning information. .

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a bonus precursor game number counter to "1". As a result, a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) is started from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). That is, the chance A mode directly shifts to the pseudo bonus without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a chance A game number counter to "0". Note that if the normal transition flag (see step S2183) is set on, the main CPU 101 clears the normal transition flag. After executing the process in step S2192, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2185 that character D is set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the chance A reward lottery is "direct hit pseudo bonus C" (step S2193). If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the chance A reward lottery is the "direct hit pseudo bonus C", the main CPU 101 executes processing for shifting to the pseudo bonus C mode (step S2194). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "3" to the value of the bonus winning information, sets the bonus precursor game number counter to "1", and sets the chance A game number counter to "0". As a result, the pseudo bonus C mode will be started from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). That is, the chance A mode directly shifts to the pseudo bonus C mode without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. Note that if the normal transition flag (see step S2183) is set on, the main CPU 101 clears the normal transition flag. After executing the process in step S2194, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2193 that the result of the chance A reward lottery is not the "direct hit pseudo bonus C", the main CPU 101 executes processing for shifting to pseudo bonus B mode, etc. (step S2195). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information, sets the bonus precursor game number counter to "1", and sets the chance A game number counter to "0". As a result, the pseudo-bonus B mode (pseudo-bonus C mode if the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more at the time of transition to the chance A mode) is started from the next unit game (Fig. 332 (see step S2165). That is, the chance A mode directly shifts to the pseudo bonus B mode, etc., without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. Note that if the normal transition flag (see step S2183) is set on, the main CPU 101 clears the normal transition flag. After executing the process in step S2195, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The chance A reward lottery (see step S2184) has been described above as being performed in the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). The process may be performed in step S15 (game end state control process). For example, if the sub-flag set in the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process in step S6 (main process) in FIG. This process is performed in the start state control process), while if the sub-flag is "push order bell", this process is performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process) (game end state control process). It may also be a thing.

When performing this process in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), the reference ball flag group (chance A) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell" and 11 medals are paid out, the payout flag group (chance A) (see FIG. 335) according to the character is determined; If 11 medals are not paid out, "0" may be determined as the payout flag group (chance A) number regardless of the character.

<Processing when reward lottery is not won during Chance A>
FIG. 337 is a flowchart showing processing performed in the main control circuit when reward lottery is not won during chance A. FIG. 338 is a diagram showing a forced cancellation lottery table during chance A. FIG. 339 is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table upon reaching the specified chance A point. FIG. 340 is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of portent games during chance A.

The reward lottery non-winning process during chance A shown in FIG. 337 is a process performed in step S2187 of FIG. 333 (game start process for advantageous section (chance A mode)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the reward lottery non-winning process during chance A, the main CPU 101 first executes a forced cancellation lottery during chance A (step S2201). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A forced cancellation lottery table (see FIG. 338) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that as a result of the chance A forced cancellation lottery, "chance A points + 1 ”, “direct hit pseudo bonus A”, “direct hit pseudo bonus B”, and “direct hit pseudo bonus C”.

In the chance A forced cancellation lottery table shown in FIG. , the lottery values corresponding to the results of the forced release lottery during Chance A ("Chance A point + 1", "Direct hit pseudo bonus A", "Direct hit pseudo bonus B", and "Direct hit pseudo bonus C") are defined. There is. The probability that each result of the forced cancellation lottery during Chance A is determined is expressed by "Lottery value specified for the corresponding result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to. For example, if the setting value is 1, as a result of the forced cancellation lottery during Chance A, "Chance A point + 1" will be determined with a probability of 255/256, and "Direct hit pseudo bonus B" will be determined with a probability of 1/256. ” is determined.

After executing the process in step S2201, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the forced cancellation lottery during chance A is "chance A point + 1" (step S2202). If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the forced cancellation lottery during chance A is "chance A point + 1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of chance A point (step S2203). The value of the chance A point is stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of chance A points is 3 or more (step S2204).

If it is determined that the value of the chance A points is 3 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a bonus lottery when the specified chance A points are reached (step S2205). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the prescribed chance A point bonus lottery table (see FIG. 339) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that as a result of the prescribed chance A point bonus lottery, " One of "bonus fake", "bonus winning information +1", "bonus winning information +2", and "bonus winning information +3" is determined.

In the bonus lottery table for reaching the specified chance A point shown in FIG. ), the lottery value corresponding to the bonus lottery result (“bonus fake”, “bonus winning information +1”, “bonus winning information +2”, and “bonus winning information +3”) when the specified chance A point is reached is specified. has been done. The probability that each result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached is determined by "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" It can be expressed by For example, if the setting value is set to 1, "Bonus Fake" will be determined with a probability of 138/256 as the result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, and "Bonus Winning Information +1" will be determined with a probability of 53/256. " is determined, "bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 64/256, and "bonus winning information +3" is determined with a probability of 1/256.

If "bonus winning information +1" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and "bonus winning information +2" is determined. If "bonus winning information +3" is determined, "2" is added to the value of the bonus winning information, and "3" is added to the value of the bonus winning information. As mentioned above, the upper limit of the value of the bonus winning information is "3", so if the value of the bonus winning information after addition exceeds "3", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the bonus winning information to "3". ”. Further, when the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more, it indicates that a pseudo bonus has been won, and in this case, a real bonus precursor effect is performed.

In addition, if a "bonus fake" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, and the value of the bonus winning information is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus fake flag to on. do. As described above, the bonus fake flag is a flag indicating that a bonus fake has been won, and thereby a bonus fake precursor effect is performed. In addition, if the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more at the time of transition to Chance A mode, even if "bonus fake" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, the bonus will not be applied. Fake flags are not set on. In this case, the value of the bonus winning information is referred to in the lottery for the number of precursor games during chance A (see step S2207), and the bonus main precursor effect is performed.

After executing the process in step S2205, the main CPU 101 subtracts "3" from the value of chance A points (step S2206). Then, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of portent games during chance A (step S2207). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of portent games during chance A (see FIG. 340) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine the number of portent games as "4", "14", " 15'', ``19'', ``20'', ``21'', and ``22''.

In the chance A portend game number lottery table shown in FIG. 340, the triggers for the portent game number lottery ("bonus fake", "bonus winning information 1", "bonus winning information 2", and "bonus winning information 3") For each, a lottery value corresponding to the number of precursor games (“4,” “14,” “15,” “19,” “20,” “21,” and “22”) is defined. The probability that each number of portent games is determined can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for the number of portent games/the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" .

In the figure, "Bonus Fake" indicates that the number of foreshadowing games will be drawn during Chance A based on the fact that the bonus fake flag is set to ON (the bonus fake is won). The number of precursor games is set in the bonus fake precursor games counter. As described above, the value of the bonus fake precursor game counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus fake precursor performance is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 (see step S2145 in FIG. 330).

Further, "bonus winning information 1" indicates that the number of omen games during chance A is drawn based on the value of the bonus winning information being 1, and "bonus winning information 2" indicates the value of the bonus winning information. is 2, and "bonus winning information 3" indicates that the number of foreshadowing games during chance A is determined based on the fact that the value of the bonus winning information is 3. is performed. In these cases, the determined number of precursor games is set in the bonus precursor game counter. As described above, the value of the bonus book precursor game counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus book precursor performance is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 (see step S2145 in FIG. 330).

For example, if the value of the bonus winning information is 1, "14" is determined as the number of precursor games with a probability of 32/256, "15" is determined with a probability of 32/256, and "15" is determined with a probability of 60/256. "19" is determined with a probability of 58/256, "20" is determined with a probability of 58/256, "21" is determined with a probability of 58/256, and "22" is determined with a probability of 16/256. The main CPU 101 sets the determined number of precursor games in a precursor game counter.

Similar to step S2145 in FIG. 330, when the number of precursor games is set in the bonus precursor game counter in step S2207 of FIG. The precursor effect start command data is stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The bonus main precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the bonus main precursor performance, and can control the display of images, output of sound, output of light, etc. for the bonus main precursor performance. The process to start is performed. As a result, the bonus main precursor performance is performed over unit games equal to the number of precursor games.

Further, when the number of precursor games is set in the bonus fake precursor game counter in step S2207, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake precursor performance start command data, and transmits the generated bonus fake precursor performance start command data to the main RAM 103. Store in the data storage area. The bonus fake precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing to start the bonus fake precursor performance, and control the display of images, output of sound, output of light, etc. for the bonus fake precursor performance. The process to start is performed. As a result, the bonus fake precursor performance is performed over the unit games corresponding to the number of precursor games.

If it is determined in step S2204 that the value of chance A points is less than 3, or after executing the process in step S2207, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to ON (step S2208). As described above, the normal transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to on. This shifts to normal mode.

Note that when the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more at the time of transitioning to Chance A mode, and the bonus lottery upon reaching the specified chance A point (see step S2205) is not performed, changing from Chance A mode to normal mode. If the transition is made, the number of portent games is determined in step S2145 of FIG. 330 instead of step S2207, and the portent effect is performed.

In step S2202, if the result of the forced release lottery during chance A is not "chance A point + 1" ("direct hit pseudo bonus A", "direct hit pseudo bonus B", or "direct hit pseudo bonus C") (Yes), the main CPU 101 executes processing for transitioning to a pseudo bonus (step S2209). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds a value corresponding to the result of the forced cancellation lottery during chance A to the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322). Specifically, when the result of the forced release lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus A", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and the result of the forced release lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus A". If the result is "direct hit pseudo bonus B", add "2" to the value of the bonus winning information, and if the result of the forced cancellation lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus C", add "3" to the value of the bonus winning information. Add.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a bonus precursor game number counter to "1". As a result, a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) is started from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). That is, the chance A mode directly shifts to the pseudo bonus without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. Note that if the normal transition flag (see step S2183 in FIG. 333) is set on, the main CPU 101 clears the normal transition flag.

After executing the process of step S2208 or step S2209, the main CPU 101 sets the chance A game number counter to "0" (step S2210). Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Transition to pseudo bonus and pseudo games>
FIG. 341 is a diagram showing an example of symbols that are stopped and displayed in a pseudo game. FIG. 342 is a diagram showing a pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing a pseudo game stop position determination table.

In this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, it is configured such that a pseudo game can be executed while the lock effect is being executed. As described in the first embodiment, the lock effect is a effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (disables the player's game operation for a predetermined period of time). In a pseudo game, during a period in which the player's gaming operations are invalidated, the player's gaming operations are accepted in a pseudo manner, thereby causing each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to rotate or stop (temporarily stop). This is how the performance is performed.

In this embodiment, five types of pseudo games (pseudo games 1 to 5) are provided, and in each pseudo game, mutually different symbols are stopped and displayed. 341(a) shows the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the pseudo game 1, FIG. 341(b) shows the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the pseudo game 2, and FIG. 341(c) shows the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the pseudo game 2. 341(d) shows the symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo game 4, and FIG. 341(e) shows the symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo game 5. It shows.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 341(a), in pseudo game 1, "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. , "Bell A" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (7 tenpai is off). As shown in FIG. 341(b), in pseudo game 2, "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L, "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R "BAR" is stopped and displayed in the middle area (7, 7, and BAR).

As shown in FIG. 341(c), in pseudo game 3, "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the left reel 3L, "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R ``Purple 7'' is stopped and displayed in the middle area of ``7'' (normally a set of 7). As shown in FIG. 341(d), in the pseudo game 4, "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the upper region of the left reel 3L, "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C. "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the lower area (7 is confirmed as 7). As shown in FIG. 341(e), in the pseudo game 5, "White 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, "White 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R ``White 7'' is stopped and displayed in the middle area of ``White 7'' (all white 7).

In this way, in the pseudo game, the symbol combinations are stopped and displayed, but no benefits are given to the player based on the stoppage display of the symbol combinations. For example, even if the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in a pseudo game matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table (see Figures 305A and 305B), medals will be paid out according to the combination of symbols. will not be carried out.

The pseudo game is a unit game in which the bonus real precursor performance or the bonus fake precursor performance ends (see step S2164 and step S2169 in FIG. This is executed as a side effect control process). The type of pseudo game to be executed is determined based on the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table (see FIG. 342) and the pseudo game stop position determination table (see FIG. 343).

When the main CPU 101 starts the bonus real omen effect or the bonus fake omen effect (for example, after executing the process in step S2023 in FIG. 317, after executing the process in step S2145 in FIG. 330, and after executing the process in step S2192 in FIG. 333), , after executing the process of step S2194 or step S2195, and after executing the process of step S2207 or step S2209 in FIG. 337), a pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery is executed. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table (see FIG. 342) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to select "pseudo game 1" and "pseudo game 1" as the type of pseudo game. One of "game 2", "pseudo game 3", "pseudo game 4", and "pseudo game 5" is determined.

In the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery table shown in FIG. ”) is defined. The probability that each pseudo-game is determined can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for the pseudo-game/the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". That is, "pseudo game 3" is determined with a probability of 86/256, "pseudo game 4" is determined with a probability of 42/256, and "pseudo game 5" is determined with a probability of 128/256.

After that, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game stop position determination process when the bonus real precursor performance or the bonus fake precursor performance ends (for example, after executing the process of step S2164 or step S2169 in FIG. 332). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo game stop position determination table (see FIG. 343) and determines the types of pseudo games as "pseudo game 1", "pseudo game 2", "pseudo game 3", " Either "pseudo game 4" or "pseudo game 5" is determined.

In the pseudo game stop position determination table shown in FIG. For each type of pseudo game (``pseudo game 1'', ``pseudo game 2'', "Pseudo game 3," "Pseudo game 4," and "Pseudo game 5") are defined.

As a result, in the pseudo game stop position determination process, if the value of the bonus winning information is "0", "pseudo game 1" is selected regardless of the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. It is determined. Further, when the value of the bonus winning information is "1", "pseudo game 2" is determined regardless of the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. Furthermore, when the value of the bonus winning information is "2", "pseudo game 3" or "pseudo game 4" is determined according to the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. . In addition, if the value of the bonus winning information is "3", "pseudo game 3", "pseudo game 4", or "pseudo game 4" depending on the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. "Pseudo game 5" is determined.

Then, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position determining process as the main side effect control process (see step S16 in FIG. 23) at the end of the game in the unit game in which the pseudo game stop position determining process has been executed. Execute. As a result, when the bonus main precursor performance ends, if the value of the bonus winning information is 1, pseudo game 2 is performed and the transition to pseudo bonus A mode occurs, and if the value of the bonus winning information is 2. , pseudo game 3 or pseudo game 4 is performed and the mode shifts to pseudo bonus B mode, and if the value of the bonus winning information is 3, pseudo game 3, pseudo game 4, or pseudo game 5 is executed. Then, the process shifts to the pseudo bonus C mode (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). On the other hand, when the bonus fake precursor performance ends (when the value of bonus winning information is 0), pseudo game 1 is performed, and in this case, pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or It does not shift to pseudo-bonus C mode).

<Game start processing for advantageous section (pseudo bonus A mode)>
FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (pseudo bonus A mode) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing a pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery table. FIG. 346 is a diagram showing a chance B continuation rate UP lottery table at the end of pseudo bonus A.

The processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (pseudo bonus A mode) shown in FIG. 23 (main process), step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 determines whether the current game section and mode are the advantageous section and pseudo bonus A mode by referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103. be able to recognize that.

In the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode), the main CPU 101 first executes the chance B&AT lottery during the pseudo-bonus A (step S2221). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery table (see FIG. 345), and performs a drawing based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value. As a result of bonus A, chance B & AT lottery, one of "non-winning", "chance B", and "AT" is determined.

In the pseudo bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. LV5" and "Rare LV6"), the lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo-bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery ("non-winning", "chance B", and "AT") are defined. "Chance B" indicates that you won at chance B, and "AT" indicates that you won at AT. The probability that each result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery is determined is determined by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be expressed.

The pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery table is provided for each of the presence or absence of the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313) and the presence or absence of a chance B win. If chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, and the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to on, the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. 345(a) is referenced, and if the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is set on, the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. If the lottery has already been won, the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. 345(c) is referred to.

For example, if Chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo-bonus A mode, and the advantageous period elapsed games determination flag is set to on, and the ball output flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3" As a result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery, "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 192/256, and "chance B" is determined with a probability of 64/256. The main CPU 101 sets a chance B winning flag when "chance B" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery. The chance B winning flag is a flag indicating that chance B has already been won in the pseudo bonus A mode.

After executing the process of step S2221, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery is "AT" (step S2222). When determining that the result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery is "AT", the main CPU 101 executes AT transition processing (step S2223). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20), thereby transitioning to the AT state. Note that the main CPU 101 clears the chance B winning flag when the chance B winning flag is set on. After executing the process in step S2223, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2222 that the result of the pseudo bonus A, chance B & AT lottery is not "AT", the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell". (See FIG. 311) is determined (step S2224). If the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag is not "push order bell", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 executes navigation setting processing (step S2225). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command data, etc. (see step S104 in FIG. 28). As a result, as in the first embodiment, the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell (FIGS. 310A and 310B) is notified on the instruction monitor and the main performance display section 21 (see FIG. 1).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the BellNavi number counter (step S2226). The value of the BellNavi number counter indicates the remaining number of BellNavi operations to be performed in the pseudo-bonus A mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 controls the state when the pseudo-bonus A mode starts, that is, when the pseudo-bonus transition flag (see step S2165 in FIG. 332) is set to ON, in the next unit game. In the process (see step S6 in FIG. 23), the BellNavi number counter is set to "6".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the VerNavi number counter is 0 (step S2227). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the VerNavi number counter is not 0, it ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the VerNavi number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery to increase the chance B continuation rate at the end of the pseudo bonus A (step S2228). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table at the end of pseudo bonus A (see FIG. 346) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to increase the chance B continuation rate UP at the end of pseudo bonus A. As a result of the lottery, "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", "10%", "20%", and "30%" ”.

In the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table at the end of pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 61-70%", "71-80%", "81-90%", and "91-100%"), the result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of pseudo bonus A ("non-winning") , "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", "10%", "20%", and "30%"). has been done. The probability that each result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of pseudo bonus A is determined is "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)".

A chance B continuation rate UP lottery table at the end of pseudo bonus A is provided for each chance B winning or not. If Chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table at the end of pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. If the prize has already been won, the pseudo bonus A ending chance B continuation rate UP lottery table shown in FIG. 346(b) is referred to.

For example, if Chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the Chance B continuation rate determined by the Chance B continuation rate lottery process (see step S2005 in FIG. 313) is 60% (51% to 60%). ), as a result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of pseudo bonus A, "3%" is determined with a probability of 128/256, "5%" is determined with a probability of 95/256, "10%" is determined with a probability of 32/256, and "20%" is determined with a probability of 1/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as a result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of pseudo bonus A to the value of the chance B continuation rate information for addition (see step S2189 in FIG. 333).

After executing the process of step S2228, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode (step S2229). The main CPU 101 can recognize that Chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode when the Chance B winning flag (see step S2221) is set on.

If it is determined that Chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B shift flag to ON (step S2230), and ends this subroutine. The chance B transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start chance B mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B transition flag is set to ON. . This shifts to chance B mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined that Chance B has not been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to ON (step S2231) and ends this subroutine. As described above, the normal transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to on. This shifts to normal mode.

<Game start processing for advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode)>
FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 348 is a diagram showing a pseudo bonus B medium reward lottery table. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing a chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition during pseudo bonus B.

The processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode) shown in FIG. 23 (main process), step S6 (game start state control process). By referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game section and mode are the advantageous section and pseudo bonus B mode, respectively. be able to recognize that.

In the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode), the main CPU 101 first executes a reward lottery during the pseudo-bonus B (step S2241). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-bonus B medium reward lottery table (see FIG. 348) and performs a drawing based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value to obtain the pseudo-bonus B. As a result of the reward lottery during B, one of "non-winning", "continuation rate UP", "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5" is determined.

In the pseudo-bonus B middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. ", and "Rare LV6"), the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B ("non-winning", "continuation rate UP", "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5") ”) is defined. The probability that each result of the pseudo-bonus B reward lottery is determined is expressed by "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to.

The pseudo-bonus B middle reward lottery table is provided for each of the presence and absence of the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313). If the flag for determining the number of games that have elapsed in an advantageous section is not set on, the pseudo bonus B middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. In this case, the pseudo bonus B middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. 348(b) is referred to. For example, if the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period is not set to ON, and the ball output flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", the result of the pseudo bonus B reward lottery is 192/256 "Continuation rate UP" is determined with a probability of , and "damage stock +1" is determined with a probability of 64/256.

After executing the process of step S2241, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the reward lottery among pseudo bonus B is "continuation rate UP" (step S2242). If the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is "up the continuation rate", the main CPU 101 executes the lottery to increase the chance B continuation rate for addition during pseudo bonus B (step S2243). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition during pseudo bonus B (see Figure 349), and determines the lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see Figure 324) and the random value. By doing so, as a result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition during pseudo bonus B, "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", and "10%".

In the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition during pseudo bonus B shown in FIG. LV4'', ``Rare LV5'', and ``Rare LV6''), the results of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition during pseudo bonus B (``non-winning'', ``1%'', ``2%'', ``3'') %," "4%," "5%," and "10%") are defined. The probability that each result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition during pseudo bonus B is decided is calculated as follows: ``Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random values that may be extracted (random number denominator) :256)".

For example, when the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", "3%" is determined with a probability of 128/256 as a result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery for addition during pseudo bonus B, "4%" is determined with a probability of 92/256, "5%" is determined with a probability of 32/256, and "10%" is determined with a probability of 4/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as a result of the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery during pseudo bonus B to the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information (see step S2189 in FIG. 333).

If it is determined in step S2242 that the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is not "continuation rate UP", the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is damage stock ("damage stock +1", "damage stock +2"). ” or “damage stock +5”) (step S2244). When determining that the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is any one of "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5", the main CPU 101 sets the damage stock counter (Fig. 333 (see step S2191) is updated (step S2245).

In this process, if the result of the pseudo bonus B reward lottery is "damage stock +1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the damage stock counter, and if the result of the pseudo bonus B reward lottery is "damage stock +1", Stock + 2", add "2" to the value of the damage stock counter, and if the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is "damage stock + 5", add "5" to the value of the damage stock counter. .

After executing the process of step S2243 or step S2245, or if the result of the pseudo bonus B reward lottery in step S2244 is any of "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5" If it is determined that there is no bonus (“non-winning”), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo bonus B game counter (step S2246). The value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games to be played in the pseudo bonus B mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 controls the state when the pseudo-bonus B mode starts, that is, when the pseudo-bonus transition flag (see step S2165 in FIG. 332) is set to ON, in the next unit game. In the process (see step S6 in FIG. 23), the pseudo bonus B game number counter is set to "25".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo bonus B game counter is 0 (step S2247). When determining that the value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B transition flag to ON (step S2248). As described above, the chance B transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start chance B mode (see step S2230 in FIG. 344). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B transition flag is set to ON. . This shifts to chance B mode.

If it is determined in step S2247 that the value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter is not 0, or after executing the process in step S2248, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Transition to chance B mode>
FIG. 350 is a diagram showing a transition route to chance B mode.

As the advantageous section (chance B mode) (see FIG. 312), chance B mode (basic) and chance B mode (special) are provided. In FIG. 350, route (I), route (II), and route (III) are shown as transition routes to chance B mode (basic).

Route (I) is a route that transitions from an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode) to chance B mode (basic). Specifically, when chance B is won in the pseudo bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery (see step S2221 in FIG. 344) performed during the pseudo bonus A mode, the pseudo bonus A mode is changed to the chance B mode (basic). (See step S2230 in FIG. 344).

Route (II) is a route that transitions from an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode) to chance B mode (basic). Specifically, when a predetermined number of unit games (25 times) are played in the pseudo bonus B mode, the pseudo bonus B mode shifts to the chance B mode (basic) (see step S2248 in FIG. 347).

Route (III) is a route that transitions from an advantageous section (AT state) to chance B mode (basic). Specifically, in the AT state, the "press order bell" (see Figure 311) was determined as a sub-flag, but the stop operation was not performed due to the correct pressing order (Figures 310A and 310B) (11 If no medals are paid out), the AT state shifts to chance B mode (basic).

Here, a plurality of modes are provided as the AT state, and an AT danger mode is provided as one of the plurality of modes. In the AT state, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), in modes other than AT danger mode, the instruction monitor and main effect display In the section 21 (see FIG. 1), the correct pressing order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) on the pressing order bell is always notified (bell navigation is always generated).

On the other hand, in the AT danger mode, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "press order bell" (see FIG. 311), it is determined whether or not to generate the bell navigation. A lottery (BelNavi generated lottery) is held to determine the correct answer, and only when the BellNavi generated lottery is won, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified. If the bell navigation generation lottery is not won, the correct pressing order is not reported, and only the fact that the pressing order bell has been determined as an internal winning combination is reported on the main effect display section 21.

Therefore, if the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination in AT danger mode, there is a possibility that the stop operation cannot be performed depending on the correct pressing order, and the stopping operation cannot be performed depending on the correct pressing order. If not, the AT state ends and a transition is made to chance B mode (basic).

Note that the AT state is basically transitioned from the pseudo bonus C mode. Specifically, when unit games are played a prescribed number of times (40 times) in the pseudo bonus C mode, the pseudo bonus C mode shifts to the AT state (AT basic mode). The AT basic mode is a different mode from the AT danger mode, and when "Press order bell" (see Figure 311) is determined as a sub-flag, the correct pressing order of the press order bells (Figures 310A and 310B) will definitely be notified. Also, if AT is won in the pseudo bonus A middle chance B & AT lottery (see step S2221 in FIG. 344) performed during the pseudo bonus A mode, the process shifts to the AT basic mode (see step S2223 in FIG. 344).

In Chance B mode, a maximum of five sets are performed, with one set consisting of eight unit games. In each set, a battle performance (battle performance) is performed in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and when the ally character defeats the enemy character in the battle performance, the character shifts to an AT state. The battle performance is a performance that is performed only in chance B mode. In this embodiment, different effects are performed in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section, and each mode in the advantageous section. Note that, hereinafter, chance B mode (basic) and chance B mode (special) will also be referred to as chance B basic mode and chance B special mode, respectively.

<Processing when transitioning to chance B>
FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the process performed in the main control circuit at the time of transition to chance B. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing a lottery table for converting remaining chance A points when chance B enters.

The process at the time of transition to chance B shown in FIG. 351 is performed in the main control circuit 100 in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process) when the current game section is an advantageous section. It is processing. The main CPU 101 can recognize the current gaming section by referring to a gaming section flag storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103.

In the chance B transition process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current mode is the AT danger mode (step S2261). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current mode is the AT danger mode by referring to the mode flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 20).

If it is determined that the current mode is not the AT danger mode, the main CPU 101 determines whether the chance B transition flag (see step S2230 in FIG. 344 and step S2248 in FIG. 347) is set on (step S2262). If it is determined that the chance B transition flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance B transition flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance A point (see step S2203 in FIG. 337) is 1 or more (step S2263). . If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance A point is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for converting the chance A point remaining at the time of entering the chance B (step S2264). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A point conversion lottery table (see FIG. 352) for converting remaining chance A points when entering chance B, and performs a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, one of "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", and "10%" is determined.

In the lottery table for converting remaining chance A points when entering chance B shown in FIG. Lottery values corresponding to the conversion lottery results (“non-winning”, “1%”, “2%”, “3%”, “4%”, “5%”, and “10%”) are defined. In the figure, "remaining chance A point 1" indicates that the value of chance A point is 1, and "remaining chance A point 2" indicates that the value of chance A point is 2. The probability that each result of the chance A point conversion lottery when chance B enters is determined as follows: ``Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256 )”.

For example, if the value of chance A point is 1, as a result of the chance A point conversion lottery when chance B enters, "1%" is determined with a probability of 219/256, and "1%" is determined with a probability of 32/256. "3%" is determined, "5%" is determined with a probability of 4/256, and "10%" is determined with a probability of 1/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as a result of the chance A point conversion lottery when chance B is entered to the value of the chance B continuation rate information for addition (see step S2189 in FIG. 333). Then, the main CPU 101 clears (sets to "0") the value of the chance A point (step S2265).

In addition, above, an example was explained in which the value of the remaining chance A point is converted to the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information, but the value of the chance A point is converted to the value of the damage stock counter. You may also do so. For example, if the value of chance A point is 1, "Non-winning" or "damage stock +1" is determined by lottery, and if the value of chance A point is 2, "damage stock +1" is determined by lottery. ” or “damage stock +2” may be determined (see step S2191 in FIG. 333). Furthermore, when the value of the chance A point is 2, "damage stock +1" may be fixedly provided without performing a lottery.

If it is determined in step S2263 that the value of chance A points is less than 1 (0), or after executing the process in step S2265, the main CPU 101 executes chance B continuation rate determination process (step S2266). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the chance B continuation rate determined by the chance B continuation rate lottery process (see step S2005 in FIG. 313) and the chance B continuation rate information for addition (step S2189 in FIG. 333, step S2228 in FIG. 344). , step S2243 in FIG. 347, and step S2264 in FIG. 351) is determined as the new chance B continuation rate. Then, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information (sets it to "0"), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2261 that the current mode is the AT danger mode, the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is the "push order bell" (see FIG. 311). It is determined whether there is one (step S2267). If the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag is not "push order bell", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation was performed in the correct push order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) for the push order bell (step S2268). ). The main CPU 101 can recognize the order of stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R by referring to the press order storage area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 22). If it is determined that the stop operation was performed in the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop operation is not performed in the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell, the main CPU 101 executes chance B continuation rate lottery at the end of AT danger (step S2269). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines "40%", "50%", "60%", "70%", "80%", " Either "90%" or "100%" is determined.

Then, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B shift flag to ON (step S2270). As described above, the chance B transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start chance B mode (see step S2230 in FIG. 344). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B transition flag is set to ON. . This shifts to chance B mode.

After executing the process of step S2270, the main CPU 101 executes chance B continuation rate determination process (step S2271). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the chance B continuation rate determined by chance B continuation rate lottery at the end of AT danger (see step S2269) and chance B continuation rate information for addition (step S2189 in FIG. 333, step S2228 in FIG. 344). , step S2243 in FIG. 347, and step S2264 in FIG. 351) is determined as the new chance B continuation rate. Then, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information (sets it to "0"), and ends this subroutine.

<Game start processing for advantageous section (Chance B basic mode)>
FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B basic mode) performed in the main control circuit.

The processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (chance B basic mode) shown in FIG. 23 (main process), step S6 (game start state control process). By referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game section and mode are the advantageous section and chance B basic mode, respectively. be able to recognize that.

In the processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (chance B basic mode), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the current unit game is the first game of the initial set (step S2281). As mentioned above, the chance B mode (chance B basic mode) is entered in units for which the chance B transition flag (see step S2230 in FIG. 344, step S2248 in FIG. 347, and step S2270 in FIG. 351) is set to ON. The process moves to the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the game. In the state control process at the start of the game in the unit game that shifts to the chance B basic mode, after the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to shift to the chance B mode, the advantageous section shown in FIG. (Chance B basic mode) game start processing is performed.

Furthermore, as described above, in the chance B basic mode, a maximum of five sets are performed, with eight unit games being one set. In the process of step S2281, the main CPU 101 determines that when the current unit game shifts to chance B basic mode, the current unit game is one game of the first set (the first set of a maximum of five sets). It is determined that the game is the first unit game of the eight unit games that make up the set. If it is determined that the current unit game is the first game of the first set, the main CPU 101 executes the process of the first game of the first set during chance B (basic) (step S2282). Processing for the first game of the first set during chance B (basic) will be described later using FIG. 354. After executing the process in step S2282, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2281 that the current unit game is not the first game of the first set, the main CPU 101 determines that the current unit game is the second or subsequent set (the second to fifth game of a maximum of five sets). (step S2283). If the chance B basic mode next set transition flag (see step S2409 in FIG. 365 and step S2428 in FIG. 366) is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current unit game is the first game of the second set or later. You can recognize that something is there.

If it is determined that the current unit game is the first game of the second set or later, the main CPU 101 executes the first game process during chance B (basic) (step S2284). The processing for the first game during chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 355. After executing the process in step S2284, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2283 that the current unit game is not the first game of the second set or later (it is any one of the second to eighth unit games of the eight unit games that make up the set), The main CPU 101 executes the process from the second game onwards during Chance B (basic) (step S2285). Processing from the second game onwards during Chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 364. After executing the process of step S2285, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<1st game processing of first set during Chance B (Basic)>
FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the process of the first game of the first set during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit.

The process for the first game of the first set during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 354 is the process performed in step S2282 of FIG. 353 (game start process for advantageous section (chance B basic mode)) in the main control circuit 100. .

In the process of the first game of the first set during chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not chance B points have been inherited (step S2301). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the chance B point is being inherited when the chance B handover point (see step S2445 in FIG. 368) is set.

If it is determined that the chance B point has not been inherited, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B point to "5" (step S2302). The value of the chance B points corresponds to the remaining amount of hit points of the enemy character in the battle performance performed during the chance B mode. When the value of the chance B point becomes 0, the ally character wins the battle performance over the enemy character and shifts to the AT state. The value of the chance B point is stored in the main RAM 103, and an image (for example, a meter, etc.) that allows the player to visually recognize the value (remaining amount) is displayed on the main performance display section 21.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance B point has been inherited, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B handover point (see step S2445 in FIG. 368) as the value of the chance B point (step S2303). The value of the chance B handover point indicates the value of the chance B point inherited from the previous chance B mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103. In addition, the main performance display section 21 displays an image (such as a meter) indicating the value of the inherited chance B points. Note that even if the chance B points are inherited, an image indicating the initial value "5" is displayed as the value of the chance B points at the time the process of step S2303 is carried out, and the chance B points are inherited. When updating the value of (for example, when subtracting the damage amount for the first time (see step S2342 in FIG. 359)), the display of the image may be updated based on the inherited value of chance B points. For example, if the value of the inherited chance B point is "3" and the amount of damage to be subtracted for the first time is "1", even if you change the image showing "5" to the image showing "2". good. When the process of step S2303 is executed, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the chance B handover point.

After executing the process of step S2302 or step S2303, the main CPU 101 executes the process of the first game during chance B (basic) (step S2304). The processing for the first game during chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 355. After executing the process in step S2304, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<1st game processing during Chance B (basic)>
FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the first game processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 356 is a diagram showing a chance B one-shot win lottery table. FIG. 357 is a diagram showing the chance B continuation lottery table. FIG. 358 is a diagram showing a lottery table for moving to heaven after an AT confirmed state.

The first game process during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 355 is performed in the main control circuit 100 at step S2284 of FIG. This is the process performed in step S2304 of (Basic) first game process of middle initial set).

In the process of the first game during chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first sets the chance B (basic) game number counter to "8" (step S2321). The value of the chance B (basic) game counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that can be executed in the set, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the chance B one-shot win lottery (step S2322). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B one-shot win lottery table (see FIG. 356) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine whether the lottery is a "win" or a "non-win."

In the chance B one-shot win lottery table shown in FIG. Corresponds to the result of Chance B one-shot win lottery (“non-winning” and “winning”) for each “flag = “0”” and “ball output mode 2 or number of games in advantageous section judgment flag = “1”” A lottery value is specified.

The ball output mode is a parameter set in the AT basic mode, and can take any value from 0 to 2. AT basic mode can be executed over 16 sets, with 18 unit games as one set, and at the start of each set, any value from 0 to 2 is set. Set as ball release mode. Specifically, when any one of the 1st, 2nd, and 13th to 16th sets starts, "0" is set as the ball output mode, and When any set among the 5th to 11th rounds starts, "1" is set as the ball output mode, and when any set among the 5th to 11th rounds starts, the ball output mode is set to 1. "2" is set as the ball mode. The ball release mode is cleared when transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section.

When it is determined in the mode transition lottery performed during the AT basic mode to transition to the AT danger mode, the AT danger mode is started. As mentioned above, in the AT danger mode, the "push order bell" (see Figure 311) was determined as a sub-flag, but the stop operation was not performed (11 If no medals have been paid out), the mode shifts to chance B mode (basic). Therefore, if the mode from which the current chance B mode is transferred is the AT danger mode (if the mode is transferred to the chance B mode by route (III) shown in FIG. 350), the value of the ball output mode is changed from the AT basic mode to the AT danger mode. This is the value when transitioning to danger mode (a value corresponding to the number of sets performed in AT basic mode until the transition). On the other hand, if the mode from which the current chance B mode is transferred is pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode (if transferred to chance B mode by route (I) or (II) shown in FIG. 350), The value of mode is "0".

In the figure, "Ball output mode 0, 1 and advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag = "0'''' indicates that the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to on, and "Ball output mode 2 or advantageous period elapsed game number determination flag = '1'" indicates that the value of ball output mode is "2" or the number of games in which advantageous period has elapsed. Indicates that the number judgment flag is set on. The probability that each result of the Chance B one-shot win lottery is determined is expressed by "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to.

In other words, if the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period is not set to ON, the probability of Chance B being a one-shot win is 2/256. Win the lottery. In addition, if the value of the ball output mode is "2" or if the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is set to on, there is a probability of 1/256 that you will win the chance B one-shot win lottery. do.

After executing the process of step S2322, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B one-shot win lottery has been won (step S2323). If it is determined that the chance B one-shot win lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B point (see steps S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 354) to "0" (step S2324). Although not shown, the main CPU 101 adds the value of the chance B point before executing the process of step S2324 to the value of the damage stock counter (see step S2191 in FIG. 333 and step S2245 in FIG. 347).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B one-shot win flag on (step S2325). The chance B one-shot win flag is a flag indicating that the chance B one-shot win lottery has been won. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the AT confirmed state flag to on (step S2326). The AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that transition to the AT state has been confirmed.

If it is determined in step S2323 that the chance B one-shot win lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the damage stock counter (see step S2191 in FIG. 333 and step S2245 in FIG. 347) is "1" or more. It is determined whether or not (step S2327). If it is determined that the value of the damage stock counter is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 executes chance B continuation lottery (step S2328). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B continuous lottery table (see FIG. 357) and determines whether it is a "win" or "non-win" by performing a lottery based on random numbers.

In the chance B continuation lottery table shown in FIG. 357, the lottery values corresponding to "winning" and "non-winning" are respectively "(2 x integer part of continuation rate) + ((144 x integer part of continuation rate) /256 quotient)” and “256-{(2×integer part of continuation rate)+((144×integer part of continuation rate)/256 quotient)}” are defined. The "continuation rate" is the chance B continuation rate (see step S2266 and step S2271) determined by the chance B transition process (see FIG. 351). For example, when the chance B continuation rate is 60%, the lottery value corresponding to “winning” is (2×60)+(quotient of (144×60)/256)=120+33=153. Therefore, in this case, the probability of winning the Chance B continuation lottery is 153/256≈60%. After executing the process of step S2328, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B continuous lottery has been won (step S2329).

If it is determined in step S2327 that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the damage stock counter (step S2330). If it is determined in step S2329 that the chance B continuation lottery has been won, or after executing the process in step S2330, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to ON (step S2331). The chance B continuation flag is a flag indicating that it is possible to shift to the next set in the chance B basic mode. Therefore, when the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, it is possible to shift to the next set in the Chance B basic mode without performing the Chance B continuation lottery.

After executing the process in step S2331, the main CPU 101 executes a process exclusively for the first game during chance B (basic) (step S2332). The processing exclusively for the first game in chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 359. After executing the process in step S2332, the main CPU 101 determines whether the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2350 in FIG. 359) is set on (step S2333). If it is determined that the AT confirmed state flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag off (step S2334).

After executing the process of step S2326 or step S2334, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery to move to heaven after the AT confirmed state (step S2335). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the AT confirmation state heaven transition lottery table (see FIG. 358), and performs a lottery based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value. As a result of the heaven transition lottery after the confirmed state, "winning" or "non-winning" is determined.

In the lottery table for moving to heaven after the AT confirmed state shown in FIG. LV5" and "Rare LV6"), a lottery value corresponding to the lottery result ("non-winning" and "winning") of the heaven shift after AT confirmed state is defined. The probability that each result of the lottery to move to heaven after the AT confirmed state is determined is determined by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be expressed. For example, when the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", there is a probability of 2/256 that the player will win the lottery to move to heaven after the AT confirmed state. If the AT confirmed state post-heaven transition lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the heaven transition lottery winning flag on. The heaven transfer lottery winning flag is a flag indicating that the heaven transfer lottery after the AT confirmed state has been won.

If it is determined in step S2329 that the chance B continuous lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S2333 that the AT confirmed state flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 performs the common processing during chance B (basic). (Step S2336). The common processing during chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 362.

After executing the process of step S2335 or step S2336, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321) (step S2337). Then, the main CPU 101 executes the VerNavi processing during chance B (step S2338). The BelNavi processing during chance B will be explained later using FIG. 372. After executing the process of step S2338, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing exclusively for the first game in Chance B (Basic)>
FIG. 359 is a flowchart showing processing exclusively for the first game in chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing a damage amount lottery table at the start of a set. FIG. 361 is a diagram showing a pursuit number determination lottery table.

The process dedicated to the first game during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 359 is the process performed in step S2332 of FIG. 355 (processing for the first game during chance B (basic)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the process exclusively for the first game during chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first executes a damage amount lottery at the start of a set (step S2341). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage amount lottery table at the start of the set (see FIG. 360) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby determining "damage amount 1" as a result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set. , "damage amount 2," "damage amount 3," "damage amount 4," and "damage amount 5."

In the set start damage amount lottery table shown in FIG. 360, the set start damage amount lottery result (``damage amount 1 ”, “damage amount 2”, “damage amount 3”, “damage amount 4”, and “damage amount 5”). In the figure, "Ball output mode 0, 1" indicates that the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1", and "Ball output mode 2" indicates that the value of the ball output mode is "2". Show that something is true. The ball dispensing mode is as described above (see FIG. 356).

The probability that each result of the damage amount lottery at the start of a set is determined is expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to. For example, if the value of the ball dispensing mode is "0", as a result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set, "damage amount 1" will be determined with a probability of 172/256, and "damage amount 1" will be determined with a probability of 79/256. "Damage amount 2" is determined, "Damage amount 3" is determined with a probability of 4/256, and "Damage amount 5" is determined with a probability of 1/256.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the damage amount from the value of chance B points (see steps S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 354) (step S2342). In this process, if the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set is "damage amount 1", the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the chance B point, and if the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set is "damage amount 1", If the damage amount is 2, subtract 2 from the chance B point value, and if the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set is 3 damage amount, subtract 3 from the chance B point value. , if the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set is "damage amount 4", "4" is subtracted from the value of chance B point, and if the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set is "damage amount 5", Subtract "5" from the value of Chance B points. Note that since the lower limit value of the chance B point value is "0", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B point to "0" when the value of the chance B point after subtraction is negative.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is "0" (step S2343). If it is determined that the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is not "0", the main CPU 101 executes a pursuit number determination lottery (step S2344). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pursuit number determination lottery table (see FIG. 361) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, thereby determining "non-winning" and "pursuit number 1" as the results of the pursuit number determination lottery. ”, “Pursuit Number 2”, “Pursuit Number 3”, and “Pursuit Number 4”.

In the pursuit number determination lottery table shown in FIG. 361, the pursuit number determination lottery is performed for each presence or absence of damage stock (see step S2191 in FIG. 333 and step S2245 in FIG. 347) (“no damage stock” and “damage stock present”). The lottery values corresponding to the results (“non-winning”, “pursuit number 1”, “pursuit number 2”, “pursuit number 3”, and “pursuit number 4”) are defined. In the figure, "no damage stock" indicates that the value of the damage stock counter is "0", and "with damage stock" indicates that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more.

The probability that each result of the chase number determination lottery is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can. For example, when the value of the damage stock counter is "0", as a result of the pursuit number determination lottery, "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 219/256, and "pursuit number 1" is determined with a probability of 35/256. is determined, and "pursuit number 2" is determined with a probability of 2/256. If the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, you will definitely win the pursuit number determination lottery, and a larger pursuit number will be determined compared to when the damage stock counter value is "0". It is becoming easier to

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more (step S2345). When determining that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the damage stock counter (step S2346). If it is determined in step S2345 that the value of the damage stock counter is less than "1" (0), or after executing the process in step S2346, the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is a win ("pursuit number 1," "pursuit number 2," "pursuit number 3," or "pursuit number 4") (step S2347).

If it is determined that the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is none of "pursuit number 1", "pursuit number 2", "pursuit number 3", and "pursuit number 4", the main CPU 101 executes this subroutine. finish. On the other hand, if the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is determined to be any one of "pursuit number 1", "pursuit number 2", "pursuit number 3", and "pursuit number 4", the main CPU 101 A pursuit number is set (step S2348).

In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the pursuit number to "1" if the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is "pursuit number 1", and if the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is "pursuit number 2" In this case, if the value of the pursuit number is set to "2" and the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is "pursuit number 3", the value of the pursuit number is set to "3" and the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is " If the pursuit number is 4, the value of the pursuit number is set to 4. Note that when the result of the pursuit number determination lottery is "non-winning", the value of the pursuit number is "0". The value of the pursuit number is stored in the main RAM 103 and is used in the chance B special mode (see FIG. 373).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance B point is less than or equal to the value of the pursuit number (step S2349). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance B point is greater than the value of the pursuit number, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2343 that the value of chance B points after subtraction is "0", or if it is determined in step S2349 that the value of chance B points is less than or equal to the value of the pursuit number, the main CPU 101 The AT confirmed state flag is set on (step S2350). As described above, the AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that transition to the AT state has been confirmed (see step S2326 in FIG. 355). After executing the process of step S2350, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Common processing during Chance B (Basic)>
FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing common processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 363 is a diagram showing a chance B rewriting lottery table.

The common process during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 362 is the process performed in step S2336 in FIG. 355 (first game process during chance B (basic)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the chance B (basic) common process, the main CPU 101 first executes a chance B rewrite lottery (step S2361). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the rewritten lottery table during chance B (see FIG. 363) and performs a lottery based on the ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and random numbers. As a result of the rewriting lottery, one of "non-winning", "continuation", "continuation & pursuit number +1", "continuation & pursuit number +2", "continuation & pursuit number +3", and "continuation & pursuit number +4" Decide which one.

In the rewritten lottery table during chance B shown in FIG. , and "Rare LV6"), the result of the rewritten lottery during Chance B ("Non-winning", "Continue", "Continuation & pursuit number + 1", "Continuation & pursuit number + 2", "Continuation & pursuit number + 3") ” and “Continuation & pursuit number + 4”) are defined. The probability that each result of the chance B rewrite lottery is determined should be expressed as "Lottery value specified for that result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" I can do it.

The chance B rewriting lottery table is provided for each of the presence and absence of the chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355). If the chance B continuation flag is not set on, the chance B rewrite lottery table shown in FIG. The rewritten lottery table during chance B shown in b) is referred to. For example, if the chance B continuation flag is not set to on, and the ball output flag group (normal) is "rare LV3", as a result of chance B rewriting lottery, there is a probability of 128/256 " "Non-winning" is determined, "Continue" is determined with a probability of 116/256, and "Continue & pursuit number +1" is determined with a probability of 12/256.

After executing the process of step S2361, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the chance B rewrite lottery includes the follow-up number (“continuation & pursuit number +1”, “continuation & pursuit number +2”, “continuation & pursuit number +3”) , or "continuation & pursuit number + 4") (step S2362). It is determined that the result of the rewriting lottery during Chance B is one of "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 1", "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 2", "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 3", and "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 4" If so, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the pursuit number (see step S2348 in FIG. 359) (step S2363).

In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the pursuit number when the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B is "Continuation & pursuit number + 1", and the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the pursuit number, and if the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B is "continuation & If the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B is "Continue & Pursuit Number + 3", add "3" to the value of the Pursuit Number. , if the result of the chance B rewrite lottery is "continuation & pursuit number + 4", "4" is added to the value of the pursuit number.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance B point is less than or equal to the value of the pursuit number (step S2364). In step S2362, the result of the rewriting lottery during Chance B is none of "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 1", "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 2", "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 3", and "Continuation & Pursuit Number + 4" or if it is determined in step S2364 that the value of chance B points is greater than the value of the pursuit number, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355) to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S2365).

If it is determined that the chance B continuation flag is set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance B continuation flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the chance B rewrite lottery result includes continuation (“continuation”, “continuation & pursuit number +1”, “continuation & "Pursuit number + 2", "Continuation & pursuit number + 3", or "Continuation & pursuit number + 4") (Step S2366).

The result of the rewrite lottery during Chance B is one of "Continue", "Continue & Pursuit Number + 1", "Continue & Pursuit Number + 2", "Continue & Pursuit Number + 3", or "Continue & Pursuit Number + 4" If it is determined that this is not the case, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, the result of the rewriting lottery during Chance B is "Continue", "Continue & Pursuit Number +1", "Continue & Pursuit Number +2", "Continue & Pursuit Number +3", and "Continue & Pursuit Number +4". If it is determined that either is the case, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to ON (step S2367).

The main CPU 101 then executes the processes from step S2368 to step S2370, but since these processes are similar to the processes from step S2341 to step S2343 in FIG. 359, the description thereof will be omitted here. If it is determined in step S2370 that the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2364 that the value of chance B points is less than or equal to the value of the pursuit number, or if it is determined in step S2370 that the value of chance B points after subtraction is "0", the main CPU 101 The confirmed state flag is set on (step S2371). As described above, the AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that transition to the AT state has been confirmed (see step S2326 in FIG. 355 and step S2350 in FIG. 359). After executing the process in step S2371, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to OFF (step S2372), and ends this subroutine.

Here, as described above, if the AT confirmed state flag is set on in step S2326 of FIG. 355 to step S2350 of FIG. is performed (see step S2335 in FIG. 355). On the other hand, if the AT confirmed state flag is set to on in step S2371 of FIG. 362 in one unit game, a lottery to move to heaven after the AT confirmed state is performed from the next unit game (step S2384 of FIG. 364). reference).

Note that the lottery to move to heaven after the AT confirmed state and the rewrite lottery during chance B (see step S2361 in FIG. 362) are explained as being performed in the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). However, these processes may be performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). For example, if the sub-flag set in the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process in step S6 (main process) in FIG. These processes are performed in the start state control process), while if the sub-flag is "push order bell", these processes are performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process) (game end state control process). You may also do this.

When performing these processes in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), the reference ball flag group ( (usually) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell" and 11 medals are paid out, the put-out flag group (normal) according to the character (see FIG. 324) is determined; If no medals are paid out, "0" may be determined as the put-out flag group (normal) number regardless of the character.

<Processing from 2nd game onwards during Chance B (Basic)>
FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the process performed in the main control circuit from the second game onwards during chance B (basic).

The process after the second game in Chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 364 is the process performed in step S2285 in FIG. 353 (game start process for advantageous section (Chance B basic mode)) in the main control circuit 100.

In the second and subsequent games during Chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first executes Chance B one-shot win processing (step S2381). The chance B one-shot win process will be explained later using FIG. 370.

After executing the process in step S2381, the main CPU 101 determines whether the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON. (Step S2382). If it is determined that the AT confirmed state flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the heaven transfer lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355) is set on or not (step S2383). If it is determined that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 executes the heaven transition lottery after the AT confirmed state (step S2384). This process is similar to the process in step S2335 in FIG. 355, so the explanation here will be omitted.

If it is determined in step S2382 that the AT confirmed state flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 executes common processing during chance B (basic) (step S2385). The common processing during chance B (basic) is as described using FIG. 362, so the explanation here will be omitted.

If it is determined in step S2383 that the heaven transfer lottery winning flag is set to ON, or after executing the process in step S2384 or step S2385, the main CPU 101 determines that the current unit game is the final game in the set of one ( It is determined whether the game is the eighth unit game among the eight unit games forming the set (step S2386). The main CPU 101 can recognize how many unit games the current unit game is by referring to the value of the chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321 in FIG. 355).

If it is determined that the current unit game is the final game in one set, the main CPU 101 executes the final game process during chance B (basic) (step S2387). The final game process during chance B (basic) will be explained later using FIG. 365.

If it is determined in step S2386 that the current unit game is not the final game in one set, or after executing the process in step S2387, the main CPU 101 executes the processes in steps S2388 and S2389, but these The process is similar to the process in step S2337 and step S2338 in FIG. 355, so a description thereof will be omitted here. After executing the process in step S2389, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Final game processing during Chance B (basic)>
FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the final game processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit.

The final game process during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 365 is the process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S2387 of FIG.

In the final game process during chance B (basic), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S2401). If it is determined that the AT confirmed state flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pursuit number is "1" or more (step S2402). If the result of the pursuit number determination lottery (see step S2344 in FIG. 359) is a win (“pursuit number 1”, “pursuit number 2”, “pursuit number 3”, or “pursuit number 4”), or there is a chance The result of the rewriting lottery in B (see step S2361 in FIG. 362) includes a pursuit number (“Continuation & pursuit number 1”, “Continuation & pursuit number 2”, “Continuation & pursuit number 3”, or “Continuation & pursuit number 3”) If the pursuit number is "4"), the value of the pursuit number is "1" or more.

When determining that the value of the pursuit number is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the heaven transfer lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355 and step S2384 in FIG. 364) is set to on. (Step S2403). If it is determined that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 sets the AT basic mode transition flag on (step S2404). The AT basic mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the AT basic mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the AT basic mode transition flag is set to on. do. This shifts to AT basic mode. After executing the process in step S2404, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2403 that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the AT heaven mode transition flag on (step S2405). The AT heaven mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the AT heaven mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the AT heaven mode transition flag is set to on. do. This shifts to AT heaven mode. The AT heaven mode is one of the modes that can be controlled in the AT state, and is more advantageous for the player than the AT basic mode. After executing the process in step S2405, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, in the AT danger mode, when the sub-flag is "Press order bell" (see Figure 311), a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate Bell Navigation (Bell Navigation generation lottery), and Bell Navigation is When the player wins the occurrence lottery, the correct pressing order is notified (see FIG. 350). Here, in the AT basic mode and the AT heaven mode, a lottery (evasion rate lottery) is performed to increase the probability (evasion rate) of winning the BellNavi generation lottery performed during the AT danger mode. In addition, in AT heaven mode, compared to AT basic mode, the evasion rate lottery is held with a higher probability (or the probability of winning the evasion rate lottery is higher), making it easier to increase the evasion rate. .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the AT danger mode, even if the sub-flag is "push order bell" (see Figure 311) and the stop operation cannot be performed due to the correct press order, the predetermined character is stocked (if the stock number is "1" or more), it is possible to avoid ending the AT state. A predetermined character can be stocked cumulatively, and the avoidance can be performed a number of times corresponding to the stock number (for example, three times if the stock number is "3"). Here, in the AT basic mode and the AT heaven mode, a lottery (character stock lottery) for adding the stock number is performed. In addition, in AT Heaven Mode, compared to AT Basic Mode, the character stock lottery is held with a higher probability (or the probability of winning the character stock lottery is higher), making it easier to increase the number of stocks. There is.

If it is determined in step S2402 that the value of the pursuit number is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B special mode shift flag to ON (step S2406). The chance B special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the chance B special mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B special mode is set to ON. . This shifts to chance B special mode. After executing the process in step S2406, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

From the above, when the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON in one set in chance B basic mode, the corresponding When the set ends, the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode) is entered, or after the set has ended, the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode) (see steps S2529 and S2530 in FIG. 373).

If it is determined in step S2401 that the AT confirmed state flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355 and step S2367 in FIG. 362) is set on. is determined (step S2407). If it is determined that the chance B continuation flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pursuit number is "1" or more (step S2408).

If it is determined that the value of the pursuit number is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 sets the chance B basic mode next set transition flag to ON (step S2409). The chance B basic mode next set transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the next set in the chance B basic mode. The main CPU 101 controls the next set in the chance B basic mode in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B basic mode next set transition flag is set to on. (See step S2284 in FIG. 353). After executing the process in step S2409, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2408 that the value of the pursuit number is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B special mode shift flag to ON (step S2410). The chance B special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the chance B special mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B special mode is set to ON. . This shifts to chance B special mode. After executing the process in step S2410, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2407 that the chance B continuation flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 executes the last game process when chance B is not continued (step S2411). The final game process when chance B is not continued will be explained later using FIG. 366. After executing the process of step S2411, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Final game processing when Chance B is not continued>
FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing the final game process when chance B is not continued, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 367 is a diagram showing a retroactive lottery table at the end of chance B.

The process during the final game when chance B is not continued shown in FIG. 366 is the process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S2411 of FIG. 365 (final game process during chance B (basic)).

In the final game process when chance B is not continued, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is a "special combination" (see FIG. 311). A judgment is made (step S2421). If it is determined that the sub-flag is a "special combination", the main CPU 101 executes an ending transition lottery (step S2422). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a "win" or "non-win" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, the ending transition lottery is won with a probability of 6/256.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending transition lottery has been won (step S2423). If it is determined that the ending transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the AT ending mode transition flag to ON (step S2424). The AT ending mode shift flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the AT ending mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the AT ending mode transition flag is set to on. do. This shifts to AT ending mode. After executing the process in step S2424, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The AT ending mode is one of the modes that can be controlled in the AT state, and is a mode that continues until the transition to the non-advantageous section (see FIG. 312). As explained in the first embodiment, when the limit process (see FIG. 16) is executed in an advantageous section (i.e., a predetermined value that is updated as the game progresses during the advantageous section (for example, the number of games in the advantageous section) When the value of the counter or the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 coins), the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section. This also ends the AT ending mode.

If it is determined in step S2421 that the sub-flag is not a "special combination", or if it is determined in step S2423 that the ending transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 determines the value of chance B points (step S2302 and (see step S2303) is "5" (step S2425). If the chance B continuation flag is set to on in one set in the chance B basic mode, the value of chance B points in that set is always subtracted by 1 or more (step S2342 in FIG. 359 and step S2342 in FIG. 362). (See S2369). Therefore, the value of the chance B point being "5" means that the current set is the first set (the first set out of a maximum of five sets).

If it is determined in step S2425 that the value of chance B points is "5", the main CPU 101 executes a retroactive lottery at the end of chance B (step S2426). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the time retroactive lottery table at the end of chance B (see FIG. 367) and determines a "win" or "non-win" by performing a lottery based on random numbers.

In the time retroactive lottery table at the end of chance B shown in FIG. 367, presence/absence of the ball output mode and the number of games that have passed the advantageous section (see step S2004 in FIG. Judgment flag = "0"" and "Ball output mode 2 or number of games in advantageous section elapsed judgment flag = "1", the result of the retroactive lottery at the end of chance B ("non-winning" and "winning") The lottery value corresponding to is defined.

In the figure, "Ball output mode 0, 1 and advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag = "0'''' indicates that the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to on, and "Ball output mode 2 or advantageous period elapsed game number determination flag = '1'" indicates that the value of ball output mode is "2" or the number of games in which advantageous period has elapsed. Indicates that the number judgment flag is set on. The ball dispensing mode is as described above (see FIG. 356). The probability that each result of the time retrospective lottery at the end of chance B is determined is determined by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be expressed.

In other words, if the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous period is not set to ON, there is a probability of 32/256 that the time at the end of chance B Win a retrospective lottery. In addition, if the value of the ball dispensing mode is "2" and the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is set to on, there is a probability of 1/256 that the time retroactive lottery at the end of chance B will be drawn. I win.

After executing the process of step S2426, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B ending time retrospective lottery has been won (step S2427). If it is determined that the time retrospective lottery at the end of chance B has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B basic mode next set transition flag to on (step S2428). The chance B basic mode next set transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the next set in the chance B basic mode (see step S2409 in FIG. 365). The main CPU 101 controls the next set in the chance B basic mode in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the chance B basic mode next set transition flag is set to on. (See step S2284 in FIG. 353).

After executing the process of step S2428, the main CPU 101 sets on the bell navigation permission flag at the time of time retroactive lottery winning (step S2429). The bell navigation permission flag at the time of time retrospective lottery winning is a flag used to perform bell navigation in chance B mode. If you win the time retrospective lottery at the end of chance B, the correct pressing order will be announced if the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination from the first unit game in the next set until the end of chance B mode. (See Figure 372). After executing the process of step S2429, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2425 that the value of chance B points is not "5", or if it is determined in step S2427 that the chance B end time retroactive lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 performs the chance B end process. (Step S2430). The process at the end of chance B will be explained later using FIG. 368. After executing the process of step S2430, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of chance B>
FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the processing at the end of chance B performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 369 is a diagram showing a chance B point handover lottery table when chance B ends.

The process at the end of chance B shown in FIG. 368 is the process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S2430 of FIG. 366 (process at the time of the final game when chance B is not continued).

In the process at the end of chance B, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is certain that the advantageous section ends (step S2441). As described above, there are three routes for transitioning to Chance B mode (see Figure 350), and if the mode from which the current Chance B mode is transitioning is AT Danger mode (Figure 350). When the current chance B mode ends, the advantageous section also ends and the mode shifts to the non-advantageous section. In addition, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the number of ceiling games (851) (reaching the ceiling), the transition is made to a pseudo bonus (see step S2023 in FIG. 317), and when the value shifts to chance B mode via reaching the ceiling However, when the current chance B mode ends, the advantageous section also ends and the mode shifts to the non-advantageous section.

In the process of step S2441, the main CPU 101 determines that the advantageous section ends when the mode from which the current chance B mode is transitioned is AT danger mode, or when the transition to chance B mode occurs via reaching the ceiling. It is determined that this is certain. Information indicating that the mode from which the current chance B mode is transitioned is AT danger mode, and information indicating that the mode has transitioned to chance B mode via reaching the ceiling are stored in the main RAM 103, and are stored in the main CPU 101. is now able to recognize the transition route to chance B mode.

If it is determined in step S2441 that it is not certain that the advantageous section will end, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery to take over chance B points at the end of chance B (step S2442). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B point handover lottery table at the end of chance B (see FIG. 369) and performs a lottery based on random numbers, so that the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is , "Non-winning + advantageous section ends," "Non-winning + advantageous section continues," and "Winning + advantageous section continues."

In the chance B point handover lottery table at the end of chance B shown in FIG. , For each "advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag is "1", the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B ("non-winning + advantageous section ends", "non-winning + advantageous section continues", and " A lottery value corresponding to "winning + advantageous section continuation" is defined.

In the figure, "the flag for determining the number of games that have passed in the advantageous section is 0" indicates that the advantageous section has passed when the current chance B mode is transferred to the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) from which the advantageous section has passed. Indicates that the number judgment flag is not set to ON, and "the advantageous section elapsed game number judgment flag is '1'" means that the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) from which the current chance B mode is transferred ), it indicates that the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag is set on. The probability that each result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is determined is: "Lottery value specified for the result / Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" ”.

For example, when the current chance B mode is transferred to the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) from which the current chance B mode is transferred, if the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag is not set to on, the chance B As a result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end, it is decided with a probability of 192/256 that "no winning + advantageous section ends", and with a probability of 32/256 it is decided that "no winning + advantageous section continues", 32/256 The probability of “winning + advantageous section continuation” is determined.

After executing the process of step S2442, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is an advantageous section continuation ("non-winning + advantageous section continuation" or "winning + advantageous section continuation"). (Step S2443). If it is determined that the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is either "non-winning + advantageous section continuation" or "winning + advantageous section continuation", the main CPU 101 transfers chance B points at the end of chance B. It is determined whether the result of the point handover lottery is "win + advantageous section continuation" (step S2444).

If it is determined that the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is "winning + advantageous section continuation", the value of chance B points (step S2342 in FIG. 359, step S2342 in FIG. 362) is set as the value of chance B handover points. S2369 and step S2526 in FIG. 373) are set (step S2445). As a result, the value of the chance B point is carried over to the next chance B mode (see step S2303 in FIG. 354).

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S2444 that the result of the chance B point transfer lottery at the end of chance B is not "winning + advantageous section continuation", or after executing the process in step S2445, the main CPU 101 turns on the normal transition flag. Set (step S2446). As described above, the normal transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to on. This shifts to the advantageous section (normal mode).

If it is determined in step S2441 that it is certain that the advantageous section ends, or in step S2443, the result of the chance B point handover lottery at the end of chance B is "non-winning + advantageous section continuation" and "winning + advantageous section". If the main CPU 101 determines that the winning period is not one of ``continuation'' (``non-winning + end of advantageous section''), the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous section shift flag to ON (step S2447). The non-advantageous section transition flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start the non-advantageous section. The main CPU 101 stores a game section flag storage area (not shown) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the unit game in which the non-advantageous section transition flag is set to ON. Update. This causes the vehicle to move to a non-advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S2446 or step S2447, the main CPU 101 clears (sets to "0") the value of the chance B point (step S2448). Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Chance B one-shot win processing>
FIG. 370 is a flowchart showing the chance B one-shot win process performed in the main control circuit.

The chance B one-shot win process shown in FIG. 370 is the process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S2381 of FIG. 364 (process for second and subsequent games in chance B (basic)).

In the chance B one-shot win process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the current unit game is the second game in a set (the second unit game out of eight unit games that make up the set). (Step S2461). The main CPU 101 can recognize how many unit games the current unit game is by referring to the value of the chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321 in FIG. 355).

If it is determined that the current unit game is not the second game in one set, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current unit game is the second game in a set of one, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the Chance B one-shot win flag (see step S2325 in FIG. 355) is set to on. (Step S2462). If it is determined that the chance B one-shot win flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance B one-shot win flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B one-shot win music output flag on (step S2463). The chance B one shot win music output flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to output the chance B one shot win music. The process for a chance B one-shot win shown in FIG. 370 is performed in the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (chance B basic mode) (see FIG. 353), whereas the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (chance B basic mode) is performed. Upon completion, start command generation and storage processing (see step S7 in FIG. 23) is performed.

In the start command generation and storage process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in communication data transmission processing (see step S204 in FIG. 32). When the chance B one-shot win music output flag is set to on, information indicating the chance B one-shot win music output flag is included in the start command data. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 determines that the chance B one-shot win music output flag is set to ON, that is, the chance B one-shot win lottery (see step S2323 in FIG. 355) was won in the previous unit game. be able to recognize what has been done.

Then, in response to receiving the start command data, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data (audio data for Chance B one shot win music) corresponding to the Chance B one shot win music. . The sound data for the music at the time of Chance B's one-shot victory is stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see FIG. 3). By setting the audio data, the Chance B one-shot victory music is output from the speakers 35a and 35b (see FIG. 2). The Chance B one-hit win music is BGM that is played only when a chance B one-shot win lottery is won.

If you win the Chance B one-shot win lottery in the first game of a set in the Chance B basic mode (the first unit game of the eight unit games that make up the set), Chance B one-shot win. The time music is played immediately after the start command generation and storage process is performed in the second game of the set (the second unit game of the eight unit games that make up the set) (for example, when the start lever 7 is operated). It is continuously output from 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) until the end of the set. Then, when the set is completed, a transition is made to the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode) (see steps S2404 and S2405 in FIG. 365).

After executing the process of step S2463, the main CPU 101 sets on the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag (step S2464). The chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag is a flag indicating that it is the timing to execute the chance B one-shot win lock effect. The lock effect at the time of chance B one-shot victory will be explained later using FIG. 371. After executing the process in step S2464, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B one-shot win flag to OFF (step S2465), and ends this subroutine.

<Lock effect execution process when Chance B wins in one shot>
FIG. 371 is a flowchart showing a chance B one-shot win lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit.

The chance B one-shot win lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 371 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main side effect control process at game start) of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the chance B one-shot win lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag (see step S2464 in FIG. 370) is set to on (step S2481). If the main CPU 101 determines that the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) in the lock timer (step S2482). The lock timer is updated by timer update processing (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the lock timer is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a chance B one-shot win lock effect start command generation and storage process (step S2483). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates Chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data, and stores the generated Chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the chance B one-shot win lock effect has started, and can determine the timing to execute various effects.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock timer is 0 (step S2484). If it is determined that the lock timer is not 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2484 again. As a result, the chance B one-shot win lock effect is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2000 ms). The chance B one-shot win lock effect may be a lock effect (freeze) that does not involve reel effects or pseudo-games, or reel effects (reel actions such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) or pseudo-games ( For example, it may be a lock effect accompanied by the pseudo-game described in this embodiment and the above-mentioned embodiments. While the chance B one-shot win lock performance is being performed, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are maintained in a stopped state, and even if the player performs any operation, the operation is invalid.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock timer is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311). is determined (step S2485). When determining that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 executes navigation setting processing (step S2486). In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the chance B one-shot win lock performance end command data (see step S2487). etc. (see step S104 in FIG. 28). As a result, as described above, the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell (FIGS. 310A and 310B) is notified on the instruction monitor (see step S2225 in FIG. 344). Furthermore, as described below, the main display device 210 will also notify the pressing order of the correct answer.

If it is determined in step S2485 that the sub-flag is not "push order bell", or after executing the process in step S2486, the main CPU 101 executes chance B one-shot win lock effect end command generation and storage process (step S2487). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data, and stores the generated chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the chance B one-shot win lock effect has ended, and can determine the timing to execute various effects.

Specifically, when the process of step S2486 is executed, the chance B one-shot win lock performance end command data includes the correct pressing order for the pressing order bell determined in the current unit game (FIGS. 310A and 310B). ) (press order information) is included. In response to receiving the chance B one-shot win lock performance end command data, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data (push order navigation image data) corresponding to the press order information. The push order navigation image data is stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see FIG. 3), and by setting the image data, the push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210. The push order navigation image is an image for informing (bell navigation) of the correct push order on the push order bell.

After executing the process of step S2487, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B one-hit win lock effect start flag to OFF (step S2488), and sets the one-shot win BelNavi permission flag to ON (step S2489). The one-shot victory bell navigation permission flag is a flag used to perform bell navigation in chance B mode (see FIG. 372). After executing the process in step S2489, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Processing for BelNavi during Chance B>
FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing the process for bell navigation during chance B performed in the main control circuit.

The Belnavi processing during chance B shown in FIG. 372 is performed in the main control circuit 100 at step S2338 in FIG. This is the process performed in step S2389 of (subsequent process).

In the bell navigation process during chance B, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311). (Step S2501). If the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag is not "push order bell", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bell navigation permission flag (see step S2429 in FIG. 366) is set on at the time of time retroactive lottery winning (step S2502).

If it is determined that the bell navigation permission flag at the time of time retroactive lottery winning is set on, it is determined whether the lock effect start flag at chance B one-shot win (see step S2464 in FIG. 370) is set on or not. (Step S2503). On the other hand, if it is determined that the BellNavi permission flag at the time of a time retrograde lottery win is not set on, it is determined whether the BellNavi permission flag at the time of a one-shot win (see step S2489 in FIG. 371) is set on. (Step S2504).

If it is determined in step S2503 that the chance B one-shot win lock performance start flag is set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Further, if it is determined in step S2504 that the one-shot win VerNavi permission flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2503 that the Chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag is not set to ON, or if it is determined that the one-shot win BelNavi permission flag is set to ON in step S2504, The main CPU 101 executes navigation setting processing (step S2505). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command data, etc. (see step S104 in FIG. 28).

After executing the process in step S2505, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. By executing the process of step S2505, as described above, the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell (FIGS. 310A and 310B) is notified on the instruction monitor (see step S2225 in FIG. 344). . Furthermore, as described below, the main display device 210 will also notify the pressing order of the correct answer.

The process for BellNavi during Chance B shown in FIG. 372 is performed in the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (Chance B basic mode) (see FIG. 353), and the process at the start of the game for the advantageous section (Chance B basic mode) ends. Then, start command generation and storage processing (see step S7 in FIG. 23) is performed. In the start command generation and storage process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in communication data transmission processing (see step S204 in FIG. 32).

When the process of step S2505 is executed, the start command data includes information (push order information) corresponding to the correct press order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) for the press order bell determined in the current unit game. It is. Upon receiving the start command data, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 sets performance data (push order navigation image data) corresponding to the press order information. The push order navigation image data is stored in the ROM cartridge board 202 (see FIG. 3), and by setting the image data, the push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210. The push order navigation image is an image for informing (bell navigation) of the correct push order on the push order bell.

As explained above, Chance B one-shot win lottery (Figure 355 (see step S2322), when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination in the second game of the set (the second unit game of the eight unit games constituting the set), When the chance B one-shot win lock performance is completed (for example, after 2000 ms have passed since the start lever 7 was operated), the correct pressing order is notified (see step S2486 in FIG. 371). In addition, when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination in the third game or later of the set (the third to eighth unit games of the eight unit games that make up the set), a start command is generated and stored. Immediately after the process is performed (for example, within 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) after the start lever 7 is operated), the correct pressing order is notified (see step S2505 in FIG. 372). In this way, if you win the chance B one-shot win lottery in one unit game, a bell navigation will occur if the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination from the next unit game until the chance B mode ends. become.

Note that even in the AT state or pseudo bonus A mode, if the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, similarly to the process for bell navigation during chance B shown in FIG. 372, step S6 of FIG. 23 (main process) In the process (game start state control process), navigation setting process (see step S2505) is performed. As a result, the correct pressing order will be notified immediately after the start command generation and storage process is performed (for example, within 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) after the start lever 7 is operated).

<Game start processing for advantageous section (chance B special mode)>
FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B special mode) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 374 is a diagram showing the pursuit number UP lottery table.

The processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (chance B special mode) shown in FIG. 23 (main process), step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 determines whether the current game section and mode are the advantageous section and the chance B special mode by referring to the game section flag storage area (not shown) and the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103. be able to recognize that.

In the processing at the start of the game for the advantageous section (chance B special mode), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the AT confirmed state flag (see step S2350 in FIG. 359 and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to on. (Step S2521). If it is determined that the AT confirmed state flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 executes a pursuit number UP lottery (step S2522). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pursuit number UP lottery table (see FIG. 374) and performs a lottery based on the ball release flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and random numbers. As a result, one of "non-winning", "pursuit number +1", "pursuit number +2", and "pursuit number +3" is determined.

In the pursuit number UP lottery table shown in FIG. and "Rare LV6"), a lottery value corresponding to the result of the pursuit number UP lottery ("non-winning", "pursuit number +1", "pursuit number +2", and "pursuit number +3") is defined. ing. The probability that each result of the pursuit number UP lottery is determined can be expressed as "Lottery value specified for the result/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can. For example, when the ball flag group (normal) is "Rare LV3", as a result of the pursuit number UP lottery, "pursuit number +1" is determined with a probability of 128/256, and "pursuit number +1" is determined with a probability of 128/256. "Pursuit number +2" is determined.

After executing the process of step S2522, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is a win (“pursuit number +1”, “pursuit number +2”, or “pursuit number +3”). (Step S2523). If it is determined that the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is any one of "pursuit number +1", "pursuit number +2", and "pursuit number +3", the main CPU 101 selects the pursuit number (step S2348 in FIG. 359). and (see step S2363 in FIG. 362) are updated (step S2524). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the pursuit number when the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is "pursuit number + 1", and when the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is "pursuit number + 2" In this case, "2" is added to the value of the pursuit number, and when the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is "pursuit number + 3", "3" is added to the value of the pursuit number.

If it is determined in step S2521 that the AT confirmed state flag is set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the heaven transfer lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355 and step S2384 in FIG. 364) is set on. (Step S2525). If it is determined that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 executes the heaven transition lottery after the AT confirmed state (step S2526). This process is similar to the process in step S2335 in FIG. 355, so the explanation here will be omitted.

If it is determined in step S2523 that the result of the pursuit number UP lottery is none of "pursuit number +1", "pursuit number +2", and "pursuit number +3", the heaven transfer lottery winning flag is turned on in step S2525. If it is determined that the value is set to , or after executing the process of step S2524 or step S2526, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the pursuit number from the value of the chance B point (step S2527). Note that since the lower limit value of the chance B point value is "0", the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B point to "0" when the value of the chance B point after subtraction is negative.

Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is "0" (step S2528). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is "0", the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S2529 to S2531, but these processes are the same as the processes of steps S2403 to S2405 in FIG. 365. Since the process is similar to that, the explanation here will be omitted. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the chance B point after the subtraction is not "0", the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2532, which is similar to the process of step S2409 in FIG. 365. Therefore, the explanation here is omitted.

After executing the process of step S2530, step S2531, or step S2532, the main CPU 101 executes the process for bell navigation during chance B (step S2533). The process for Vernavigation during chance B is as described using FIG. 372, so the description here will be omitted. After executing the process in step S2533, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

Although the pursuit number UP lottery (see step S2522) is described as being performed in the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), this process is performed in the process shown in FIG. It may be performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) of the main process). For example, if the sub-flag set in the sub-flag etc. setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process in step S6 (main process) in FIG. While these processes are performed in the start state control process), if the sub-flag is "push order bell", this process is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). It can also be done.

When performing this process in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), the reference ball flag group (usually ) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell" and 11 medals are paid out, the put-out flag group (normal) according to the character (see FIG. 324) is determined; If no medals are paid out, "0" may be determined as the put-out flag group (normal) number regardless of the character.

<Appendix G>
Conventionally, gaming machines are known that include a chance zone in which the lottery to transition to AT is given preferential treatment than in the normal state (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-77412). In the chance zone, the expectation for the ball to be released is higher than in the normal state, so that the player's interest can be increased.

In conventional gaming machines, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous state such as AT, there is room for improvement in the subsequent game and the notification method to that effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming when the right to shift to an advantageous state is granted. do.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(G-1) A state control means capable of controlling a state related to a game;
a granting means capable of granting the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) advantageous to the player;
Comprising a notification means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIGS. 371 and 372, etc.) capable of notifying information advantageous to the player,
The granting means is capable of granting the right to shift to the advantageous state when a specific condition (winning a Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode);
The notification means is capable of notifying information advantageous to the player when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), an advantageous state advantageous to the player (Chance B one-shot win lottery) is established. It is possible to grant the right to shift to the AT state), and it is configured so that it is possible to notify information advantageous to the player. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's motivation for playing the game through this information, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

(G-2) The gaming machine of (G-1) above,
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (outputting a song when chance B wins in one shot) when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state,
The notification means (the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2486 in FIG. 371) notifies the player of information advantageous to the player after the specific performance is started when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state. It is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), a specific effect (Chance B one-shot win lottery) is established. The system is configured such that it is possible to execute a specific performance (output of music at the time of chance B one-shot win), and to notify information advantageous to the player after the specific performance (output of music at the time of chance B one-shot win) is started. ing. If the information is announced before the specific performance (Chance B one-shot win music output) starts, the specific conditions (Chance B one-shot win lottery) will be announced at the time the information is announced. There is a possibility that the player will be able to sense that a winning (win) has been achieved. In this case, it will not be possible to get players interested in the specific performance (output of music when chance B wins with one shot) that will start after that, and the specific performance (output of music when chance B wins with one shot) There is a concern that the significance of implementing such measures will be diminished. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, by suppressing the notification of the information before the specific performance (output of music when chance B wins in one shot) is started, It is possible to avoid such a situation, increase the value of the specific performance (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot), and increase the interest of the game when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted. can be further improved.

(G-3) The gaming machine of (G-1) or (G-2) above,
The imparting means is
A first granting means (see Fig. a main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2326 of 355;
a second granting means capable of granting the right to transition to the advantageous state when a second condition (the value of chance B points becomes 0 due to subtraction of the amount of damage) in the specific state; A main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2350 in FIG. 359,
When the first granting means grants the right to shift to the advantageous state, the state control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing in steps S2404 and S2405 in FIG. 365) controls the second granting means to grant the right to shift to the advantageous state. It is possible to transition to the advantageous state at an earlier timing than when the right to transition to the state is granted,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when the first condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), it shifts to the advantageous state (AT state). While it is possible to grant the right to (AT state). If the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the fulfillment of the first condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery), the second condition (Chance B winning by subtracting the amount of damage) is granted. The configuration is such that it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) at an earlier timing than when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of the point value becoming 0). has been done. As a result, if the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is met, it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to play the game in an advantageous state (AT state) at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation of the player that the first condition (winning in the chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied, and also to increase the expectation of the first condition (winning in the chance B one-shot win lottery). ) can further improve the interest of the game.

(G-4) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-3) above,
comprising a variable updating means capable of updating a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) in the specific state,
The state control means is capable of shifting to the advantageous state when the predetermined variable becomes a predetermined value (0) in the specific state,
The variable updating means (the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2324 in FIG. 355) updates the predetermined variable so that the predetermined variable becomes the predetermined value when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state. It is possible to update the variables of
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to update a predetermined variable (value of chance B points) in a specific state (chance B basic mode), and it is possible to update a predetermined variable (value of chance B points) in a specific state (chance B basic mode). When a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) reaches a predetermined value (0) in , it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (AT state). Then, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), a predetermined variable (value of Chance B points) becomes the predetermined value (0). The configuration is such that a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) can be updated. As a result, a predetermined variable (chance It is possible to unify control regarding the value of B points), and to further improve the interest of the game through a specific state (chance B basic mode) using such a predetermined variable (value of chance B points). I can do it.

(G-5) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-4) above,
comprising a variable updating means capable of updating a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) in the specific state,
The state control means is capable of controlling a predetermined interval (set) multiple times in the specific state,
The variable updating means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S2342 in FIG. 359 and step S2369 in FIG. 362) is capable of updating the predetermined variable in each of the predetermined sections in the specific state,
The provision means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S2350 in FIG. 359 and step S2371 in FIG. 362) determines that the predetermined variable becomes a predetermined value (0) in one of the predetermined sections in the specific state. It is possible to grant the right to transition to the advantageous state if
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, control can be performed multiple times in a predetermined section (set) in a specific state (chance B basic mode), and each predetermined period in the specific state (chance B basic mode) can be controlled multiple times. It is possible to update a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) in an interval (set). Then, when a predetermined variable (value of chance B points) becomes a predetermined value (0) in one predetermined section (set) in a specific state (chance B basic mode), an advantageous state (AT state) is established. It is structured so that it is possible to grant the right to migrate to. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in updating a predetermined variable (value of Chance B points) in each predetermined section (set) in a specific state (Chance B basic mode). Through a specific state (chance B basic mode) using such a predetermined variable (chance B point value), the interest in the game can be further improved.

(G-6) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-5) above,
The notification means is
In the advantageous state, it is possible to notify information advantageous to the player at a first timing (when the process of step S7 in FIG. 23 is performed);
When the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state, information advantageous to the player is announced at a second timing later than the first timing (when the process of step S2487 in FIG. 371 is performed). It is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, in the advantageous state (AT state), information advantageous to the player is notified at the first timing (when the process of step S7 in FIG. 23 is performed). On the other hand, if a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), information advantageous to the player may be transmitted at the first timing (as shown in FIG. 23). The configuration is such that the notification can be made at a second timing (when the process of step S2487 in FIG. 371 is performed) that is later than the time when the process of step S7 is performed. As a result, by delaying the timing of notification of the information when a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (chance B basic mode), an advantageous state (AT state) is created. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the case where the right to transfer to the other party is granted.

(G-7) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-6) above,
The notifying means is capable of notifying information advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition (internal winning of the push order bell) is satisfied in each unit game in the advantageous state, and in the specific state. If the specific condition is met, it is possible to notify the information in multiple unit games before shifting to the advantageous state;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a predetermined condition (internal winning of the push order bell) is satisfied in each unit game in an advantageous state (AT state), information advantageous to the player is notified. It is possible to It is configured to be able to notify the information in a unit game. As a result, if a specific condition (Chance B one-shot win lottery win) is met in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), the advantageous state (AT state) will be changed even before shifting to the advantageous state (AT state). ), it is possible to notify the same information as above, so it is possible to further improve the interest of the game when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

(G-8) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-7) above,
The imparting means is
A first granting means (for example, , the main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2326 in FIG.
A second granting means (see Fig. 359 and step S2371 of FIG. 362,
The state control means includes:
After controlling to the specific state, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (chance B special mode),
When the right to shift to the advantageous state is granted by the first granting means, it is possible to shift to the advantageous state without controlling to the predetermined state, while the second granting means grants the right to shift to the advantageous state. If the right to shift to the state is granted, it is possible to shift to the advantageous state after controlling to the predetermined state;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when the first condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), the state shifts to the advantageous state (AT state). While it is possible to grant the right to AT state). If the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is granted and the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted, the control is controlled to a predetermined state (chance B special mode). While it is possible to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) without having to do so, it is possible to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) by satisfying the second condition (the value of the pursuit number is greater than or equal to the value of chance B points). When the right to shift to is granted, the system is configured such that it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) after controlling to a predetermined state (chance B special mode). In this way, the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is met and the second condition (the value of the chase number is greater than or equal to the value of chance B points) is met. , by varying whether or not to include a predetermined state (chance B special mode) in the process of transitioning to an advantageous state (AT state), the game can be improved when the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted. You can further improve your interest.

(G-9) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-8) above,
comprising variable management means capable of managing a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) in the specific state,
The state control means is capable of shifting to the advantageous state when the predetermined variable becomes a predetermined value (0) in the specific state,
The variable management means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing in step S2445 in FIG. 368 and step S2303 in FIG. It is possible to inherit the predetermined variable to the specific state that occurs;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a predetermined variable (value of chance B points) becomes a predetermined value (0) in a specific state (chance B basic mode), an advantageous state (AT state ). If one specific state (Chance B basic mode) ends without the predetermined variable (Chance B point value) becoming the predetermined value (0), the specific state (Chance B basic mode) that occurs later is changed to The configuration is such that the predetermined variable (value of chance B point) can be inherited. As a result, continuity can be created between one specific state (Chance B basic mode) and a later specific state (Chance B basic mode) based on a predetermined variable (Chance B point value). This is possible, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in a specific state (Chance B basic mode).

(G-10) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-9) above,
comprising variable management means capable of managing a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) in the specific state,
When the state control means is controlled to a first state (non-advantageous section) after one of the specific states ends, the state control means does not allow the predetermined variable to be inherited by the specific state that occurs later; When the specific state is controlled to a second state (advantageous section) after the end of the specific state, it is possible to inherit the predetermined variable to the specific state that occurs later.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when the control is performed to the first state (non-advantageous section) after the end of one specific state (chance B basic mode), the specific state that occurs later ( When a predetermined variable (Chance B point value) is not inherited by Chance B basic mode), and the second state (advantageous section) is controlled after one specific state (Chance B basic mode) ends. is configured such that a predetermined variable (value of chance B point) can be inherited by a specific state (chance B basic mode) that occurs later. As a result, when the first specific state (chance B basic mode) is controlled to the second state (advantageous section) after the end of the first specific state (chance B basic mode), the first specific state (chance B basic mode) and the specific state that occurs later ( It is possible to create continuity around a predetermined variable (the value of Chance B points) between the game and the Chance B basic mode, which further improves the interest of the game in a specific state (Chance B basic mode). be able to. In addition, if the control is returned to the first state (non-advantageous section) after the end of one specific state (chance B basic mode), such continuity cannot be created, so the first specific state (Chance B Basic Mode) can be increased. Thereby, it is possible to further increase the interest of the specific state (Chance B basic mode), and the player can fully enjoy the game in the specific state (Chance B basic mode).

(G-11) Any of the gaming machines (G-1) to (G-10) above,
first output means (speakers 35a, 35b) capable of outputting game-related output;
a second output means (instruction monitor and main display device 210) capable of outputting information regarding the game;
Equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (output of chance B one-shot win music) by outputting from the first output means when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state. can be,
The notifying means is capable of notifying information advantageous to the player by outputting from the second outputting means when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), the first output means (speaker 35a, The output from the second output means (the instruction monitor and the main display device 210) allows the player to It is configured to be able to broadcast information that is advantageous to the public. In this way, when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b) and the second output means ( Outputs related to the production and notification are performed using two output means: an instruction monitor and a main display device 210). Therefore, through the output from the two output means, it is possible to stimulate the player's five senses (visual and auditory) in a complex manner, and the game when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted. It is possible to further improve the interest of the user.

In the 11th embodiment, it has been explained that information advantageous to the player (the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell) is reported when the chance B one-shot win lock effect ends (see FIG. 371). The timing at which the information (the correct pressing order on the pressing order bell) is announced may be approximately at the same time (just before or after) when the chance B one-shot victory lock effect ends, or the timing when the chance B one-shot victory lock effect ends (just before or after) It may also be possible while the victory lock effect is being executed. For example, the navigation setting process is performed before the chance B one-hit win lock effect start command generation and storage process, and information regarding the set stop operation, etc. is included in the chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data. If the sub control circuit is configured to set the push order navigation image data when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) has elapsed after receiving the chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data, the chance The information (the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell) can be notified while the B one-shot win lock effect is being executed.

In addition, in setting the timing to notify the player of information advantageous to the player (the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell) to be after the start of the specific performance (output of music when Chance B wins with one hit) It is not essential to perform a time lock effect. For example, a specific effect (output of music when chance B wins in one shot) is started almost at the same time as the reels start rotating, and when a predetermined period of time (e.g. 1000ms) has elapsed, the relevant information (correct answer at the press order bell) is started. The order in which the buttons are pressed may be notified. In addition, if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the fulfillment of a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) in one unit game, the unit game (one game in the set) While starting a specific performance (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot), even if a predetermined condition (internal win of the push order bell) is met, the information (on the push order bell) is started. If a predetermined condition (internal winning of the pressing order bell) is satisfied in the next unit game (second game or later in a set), the relevant information (the correct answer on the pressing order bell) is not announced. (press order) may be notified.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific performance (output of music when chance B wins in one shot) is performed through the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b), and information advantageous to the player (pressing the correct answer on the pressing order bell) is performed through the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b). In the above description, it has been explained that the notification of the order) is performed through the second output means (the instruction monitor and the main display device 210). The first output means and the second output means are not particularly limited, and include a display means (display device) capable of displaying an image, a sound output means (speaker) capable of outputting sound, and a display means capable of emitting light. It is possible to appropriately employ any output means such as a light emitting means (LED) that is capable of providing a light emitting means (LED). For example, the specific effect may be the display of an image, the output of sound, the output of light, or any combination thereof. Furthermore, information advantageous to the player may be displayed by displaying an image, outputting sound, outputting light, or any combination thereof. Good too. The specific performance and the notification of information advantageous to the player may be the same type of output (for example, both display images). In this case, the display means for performing the specific performance and the display means for notifying information advantageous to the player may be the same display means or different display means (the first display means and the second display means). means). For example, a main display device and a sub display device may be provided as in the first embodiment, and these may be employed as the first display means and the second display means, respectively.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, if a specific condition (Chance B one-shot win lottery win) is satisfied in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), the specific condition (Chance B basic mode) is It was explained that the production (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) will continue. The length of the specific performance is not particularly limited, and may continue over multiple unit games, or be completed within one unit game (the unit game in which the specific performance has been started). It may be something that appears for a short time (for example, within 3 seconds). In addition, the specific performance (output of music when chance B wins with one shot) is performed only when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted (if a specific performance occurs, the output of a song when Chance B wins in one shot) will be performed only if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) ), or if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted, or if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is not granted. It may also be carried out. When adopting a form in which a specific performance (output of music when Chance B wins in one shot) is possible even if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is not granted, the specific performance (Chance B If the system is configured so that when the output of the music when the player wins with one shot occurs, the probability of transitioning to the advantageous state (AT state) is higher than when the specific effect (output of the music when the chance B wins with one shot) does not occur. good. Alternatively, if a specific performance (output of music when chance B wins in one shot) occurs, the transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is made with a relatively high probability (for example, 80% or more). It is also possible to configure the system so that there is a high expectation that the system will move to

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, an advantageous state (AT It has been explained that when the right to shift to the AT state is granted, the shift to the advantageous state (AT state) is performed when the predetermined section (set) ends. The timing of shifting to the advantageous state (AT state) when a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied is not limited to this example. For example, even if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the fulfillment of a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery), even if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted, the number of times set in advance (for example, 5 times) It is also possible to shift to the advantageous state (AT state) after completing all predetermined sections (sets) of . In addition, if a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is met in one predetermined section (set), how many times is the predetermined section (set) in question? Depending on the situation, do you want to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) when the predetermined section (set) ends, or complete the predetermined section (set) a preset number of times (for example, 5 times)? After that, it may be determined whether to shift to the advantageous state (AT state). For example, in the specific state (Chance B basic mode), the number of remaining predetermined sections (sets) including the predetermined section (set) is greater than (or less than) a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). In this case, the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) may be made only after all predetermined intervals (sets) have been completed a preset number of times (for example, 5 times) (or by lottery). Similarly, even if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the second condition (the value of chance B points becomes 0 due to subtraction of the amount of damage), the preset It is also possible to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) after completing a predetermined period (set) of a preset number of times (for example, 5 times), or to move to an advantageous state (AT state) after completing a predetermined period (set) of a preset number of times (for example, 5 times). It may also be determined whether or not to end all sections (sets).

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is established in the first unit game in one predetermined section (set) in a specific state (Chance B basic mode). It was explained as making a decision as to whether or not. The timing of determining whether or not to establish a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is not particularly limited, and any unit game in one predetermined section (set) (for example, the last It is possible to configure the system so that the determination is made in unit games).

From the time a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is established until the transition to an advantageous state (AT state), information advantageous to the player (the order in which the correct answers are pressed on the push order bell) is displayed. However, the specific state (Chance B basic mode) continues. The appearance of the screen as seen by the player also shows that a performance (battle performance) is being performed during a specific state (Chance B basic mode), which is distinguished from an advantageous state (AT state). When the specific state (Chance B basic mode) ends, the ally character wins the battle performance over the enemy character and shifts to an advantageous state (AT state). The performance performed in the advantageous state (AT state) can be different from the performance performed in the specific state (Chance B basic mode).

In addition, during the specific state (Chance B basic mode), information advantageous to the player (the order of pressing the correct answer on the push order bell) is not generally reported, but under certain conditions (Chance B one-shot win lottery) If a winning (win) is achieved, information advantageous to the player (the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell) is exceptionally reported. In a specific state (Chance B basic mode), information advantageous to the player (the order of pressing the correct answers on the push order bell) is announced only when a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is met. Alternatively, the information may be notified even if some condition other than a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is satisfied.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, the lower limit value of the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) is explained as being the predetermined value (0), but the lower limit value of the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) ( (upper limit value) may not be set. In this case, when a predetermined variable (chance B point value) becomes less than (or more than) a predetermined value (0) in a specific state (chance B basic mode), the transition is made to an advantageous state (AT state). It is possible to configure In addition, in this case, benefits may be granted depending on the difference between a predetermined variable (value of chance B points) and a predetermined value (0) (extent below (exceeding) the predetermined value (0)). good. At this time, it is desirable to configure the system so that the greater the difference between the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) and the predetermined value (0), the greater the benefit is provided. Such benefits include, for example, those that allow the advantageous state (AT state) to proceed advantageously (for example, those that increase the probability (evasion rate) of winning the BelNavi generation lottery performed during AT danger mode In AT danger mode, even if the stop operation cannot be performed due to the correct press order, it is possible to avoid ending the AT state (plays the same role as a specified character). It is possible to do so. Such benefits may be granted according to the value of the damage stock counter. The benefit may be displayed on the display device as a predetermined image (an icon advantageous in the AT state). In addition, if the advantageous state (AT state) is managed by the number of games, the number of differential sheets, the number of navigation times, etc., the benefits are as follows: the number of games, the number of differential sheets, the number of navigation points, etc. It is also possible to directly give the number of times of navigation, etc. The method of managing the advantageous state (AT state) is as described in the first embodiment. Although the eleventh embodiment has been described as managing the predetermined variable (the value of chance B points) using a subtraction method, it is of course possible to manage it using an addition method. Further, the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) can be updated based on the internal winning combination determined in each unit game.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine. Advantageous states include bonus states (BB state, MB state, etc.) in pachislot gaming machines, RT states, AT states (ART states), pseudo bonuses, advantageous sections, time-saving gaming states in pachinko gaming machines, variable probability gaming states, and jackpot games. It is possible to adopt the state etc. as appropriate. The specific state is not particularly limited as long as it can give the right to shift to an advantageous state, and may be a chance zone or normal mode in a pachislot machine, or a time-saving gaming state or a non-time-saving gaming state in a pachinko machine. It may be a gaming state, a variable probability gaming state, or a non-probable variable gaming state. As the specific conditions, conditions for being granted the right to shift to an advantageous state (such as winning an AT or BB in a pachislot game machine, a jackpot in a pachinko game machine, etc.) can be appropriately adopted. The advantageous state and the specific state are not limited to states controlled by the main control circuit, but may be states (effect mode) controlled by the sub-control circuit.

The information advantageous to the player may be information that allows the player to play the game advantageously, or may be information that suggests that the right to shift to an advantageous state has been granted. Information that allows players to play games advantageously includes information that allows players to perform advantageous operations (for example, information regarding stop operations in pachislot gaming machines, information regarding left-handed or right-handed hitting in pachinko gaming machines, etc.) can be mentioned. Information regarding the stop operation in pachislot gaming machines includes the symbol combination with the highest number of payouts among the symbol combinations that are allowed to be stopped and displayed along the active line when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. It is possible to appropriately employ information for performing a stop operation necessary to win a prize. Such information includes information indicating the correct pressing order in the pressing order combination, information indicating the type of the pressing order combination, information indicating the timing at which a stop operation should be performed (eye press), etc. . Examples of information that suggest that the right to shift to an advantageous state has been granted include AT and BB in pachislot machines, jackpots in pachinko machines (e.g., normal jackpot, guaranteed variable jackpot, time-saving jackpot, jackpot with a large number of rounds) ) etc. (which is output only when a winner is found) can be listed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to provide information that is advantageous to the player by notifying (suggesting) that they have won a prize or by displaying a symbol combination that corresponds to a winning lottery (a symbol combination that corresponds to a bonus or a jackpot). It can be said that it informs. The number of times that information advantageous to the player is reported from the time a specific condition is met until the state shifts to an advantageous state is not particularly limited, and may be once or multiple times. good. In addition, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, among the performances that suggest the result of one jackpot determination (extraction of random number values for jackpot determination) as a specific performance, it is possible to It is also possible to adopt a method in which the contents are determined before the variable display (special symbol variation) of the identification information corresponding to the previous jackpot determination is completed.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, control can be performed multiple times in a predetermined section (set) in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), and the predetermined section (set) is composed of a predetermined number of unit games (eight times). It was explained as something that would be done. The number of unit games that constitute a predetermined section (set) is not particularly limited, and may be multiple times or one time. When the number of unit games constituting a predetermined section is one, the predetermined section and the unit game are synonymous. A unit game in a pachi-slot gaming machine can be a period from the start to the end of one main process (see FIG. 23). In addition, a unit game in a pachinko machine is a period in which one special symbol game is played (from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display and the final display of the result of the special symbol hit determination process). (period until derivation).

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, a predetermined state (Chance B special mode) is interposed between one predetermined section (set) and the next predetermined section (set) in the specific state (Chance B basic mode). It was explained as follows. However, it is not essential to intervene a predetermined state (Chance B special mode), and if the specific state (Chance B basic mode) continues when one predetermined section (set) ends, the next It is also possible to shift to a predetermined section (set). The probability of continuing the specific state (chance B basic mode) when one predetermined section (set) ends (the probability of winning the chance B continuation lottery) is between 0 and 100% (or between 50 and 70%). It may be determined by a random lottery, or it may be determined by a predetermined probability (for example, 50%). Alternatively, the chance B continuation rate (see Figure 351) before the value of the chance B continuation rate information for addition is added may be determined by lottery from 0 to 100% (or 50 to 70%). Alternatively, it may be a predetermined probability (for example, 50%).

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, control can be performed multiple times in a predetermined section (set) in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), and the specific state (Chance B basic mode) can be continued in one predetermined section (set). The explanation has been made assuming that the specific state (chance B basic mode) is ended when the decision to do so is not made. The end conditions for the specific state (Chance B basic mode) are not limited to this example, and the specific state (Chance B basic mode) is managed by a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games), and the predetermined number of games is After the number is exhausted, the specific state (chance B basic mode) may be ended. In this case, control may be performed in a predetermined interval (set) according to the result of a lottery performed during a specific state (chance B basic mode), and in such a predetermined interval (set), an advantageous state ( A determination may be made as to whether or not to grant the right to transition to the AT state (for example, battle performance). Also, during a predetermined period (set), the value of the counter in game number management is not updated (subtraction is stopped), and when the predetermined period (set) ends, updating of the value of the counter is started again. You can do it like this. As a result, if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is not granted in a predetermined section (set), the number of games played excluding the predetermined section (set) will be the predetermined number of games. It is possible to configure the specific state (chance B basic mode) to be terminated when the specific state (chance B basic mode) is reached without transitioning to the advantageous state (AT state). Further, in one predetermined section (set), it may be determined by lottery whether or not to control to the predetermined section (set) again after one predetermined section (set) ends.

Furthermore, in the medalless gaming machine (gaming machine that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player) described in the first embodiment, the gaming machine is not normally connected to the gaming value providing device (communication-only unit). If there is no such information, if information corresponding to the number of gaming values is transmitted to the communication dedicated unit in response to the operation of any of the return operating means, there is a risk that the information will be lost. Therefore, in order to prevent the game from progressing unless it is properly connected to the communication dedicated unit, an error condition on the main control board is displayed at the start of the game, so that the game cannot be played (for example, the input button (bet button), the settlement button, etc.). It may also be possible to set the device to a state in which the button, start lever, etc. cannot be accepted. Thereby, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent information corresponding to the number of game values from disappearing.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. The twelfth embodiment will be described below. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment basically has the same configuration and functions as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments described above, except for the points described below. be. Further, descriptions of parts that apply to the twelfth embodiment as well as those described in the first to eleventh embodiments will be omitted.

In addition, in the above description, it is limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, "in the first embodiment, ..." or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...". Even if the description is as follows, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the twelfth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, descriptions limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment to the eleventh embodiment also apply to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment without departing from the spirit of the twelfth embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the expanded example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the twelfth embodiment. It is possible to do or combine them.

Furthermore, even if the machine has the same shape or the same processing as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments, different symbols or step numbers may be given for convenience.

[11-1. Processor configuration]
FIG. 375 mainly shows the configuration of the sub-control unit of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment. The sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375 includes a sub-relay board 2200 and a sub-control board 2300, and the sub-relay board 2200 corresponds to the sub-relay board 74 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. The sub-control board 2300 corresponds to the sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Similar to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub-control board 2300 is electrically connected to the main control board 2010, and determines the contents of the production and controls the production based on commands sent from the main control board 2010. Performs processing such as execution. The sub control board 2300 and the sub relay board 2200 are basically connected to each other in a BtoB (Board-to-Board) manner, and are shown separated by dashed lines in FIG. 375. Further, in this embodiment, the sub control board 2300 and the sub relay board 2200 are housed in separate board boxes.

As shown in FIG. 375, the sub-control board 2300 is configured as a multi-chip module in which a CPU 2390, GPU 2400, VPU 2410, VRAM 2420, SDRAM 2430, etc. are integrated into one package. Note that the GPU and VPU may be collectively referred to as VDP, or each of GPU and VPU may be referred to as VDP, so VDP is used as a general term for GPU and VPU.

The CPU 2390 determines the presentation content based on commands and the like transmitted from the main control board 2010, and performs various controls to execute the determined presentation content. For example, in order to display a 3D image or 2D image on a display device, the operation of the GPU 2400, VPU 2410, etc. is controlled. Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 2390 is a multi-core CPU having four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, and CPU core #4). Note that the CPU 2390 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be configured from five or more (or three or less) CPU cores, or may be configured as a multi-CPU.

The GPU 2400 includes four GPUs (GPU #1, GPU #2, GPU #3, and GPU #4). Further, in this embodiment, the GPU 2400 may be composed of five or more (or three or less) GPUs, similarly to the CPU 2390. In this embodiment, the SDRAM 2430 is composed of two SDRAMs each having a capacity of 1 GB.

Next, each component of the sub control board 2300 will be explained. The HSS I/F 2320 is a high-speed serial interface (for example, an interface of a standard such as SATA3), and the sub control board 2300 receives data from the sub ROM 2210 of the sub relay board 2200 via the HSS I/F 2320, and stores the data from the FRAM ( (registered trademark) 2220. The sub ROM 2210 stores various control programs executed by the CPU 2390, various data tables, and various performance data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 2510, video data related to the sub display device 2520, and data related to lamps and LED groups). Lamp data, sound data related to speaker groups, etc.) are stored. The sub ROM 2210 has the same function as the ROM cartridge board 202 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above.

The UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) I/F 2330 is an interface for serial communication, and the sub control board 2300 receives data from the main control board 2010, door monitoring unit 2020, and selector 2030 via the UART I/F 2330. Receive. Here, the main control board 2010 corresponds to the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and the door monitoring unit 2020 corresponds to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. corresponds to Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the medal sensor 31S of the selector 31 is connected to the main relay board 73, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the sub-control board 2300. .

Further, the sub control board 2300 exchanges predetermined data with the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 via the UART I/F 2330. Here, the main display device 2510 generally corresponds to the main display device 210 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and the sub-display device 2520 corresponds to the sub-display device 220 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. handle.

Furthermore, the sub control board 2300 transmits and receives data to and from the RTC (Real-Time Clock) 2230 of the sub relay board 2200 via the I2C I/F 2340. In addition, the sub control board 2300 outputs audio to the speaker group 2040 via the I2C I/F 2340 to the digital amplifier 2240 of the sub relay board 2200, so the sub control board 2300 sends setting data to the digital amplifier 2240 and the digital amplifier 2240. Sends and receives data (commands) to obtain the status (operating state) of the device. Here, the speaker group 2040 corresponds to the speaker group (35a, 35b, etc.) of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, for example, the speaker group 2040 is provided at the top of the gaming machine. The gaming machine can be configured with four speakers, including L and R speakers provided at the bottom of the gaming machine. In addition, in this embodiment, although it connects to RTC2230 via I2C I/F2340, it may connect to RTC2230 via SPI I/F2360 depending on the communication specification of RTC.

Furthermore, the sub control board 2300 transmits sound source data for outputting audio to the speaker group 2040 to the digital amplifier 2240 of the sub relay board 2200 via the I2S I/F 2350.

Further, the sub control board 2300 transmits data for controlling the light emission of the performance LED group 2050 to the LED driver 2250 of the sub relay board 2200 via an SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) I/F 2360. Here, the performance LED group 2050 corresponds to the lamps/LEDs 23 of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, the LED group 2050 corresponds to the upper part, the upper right side, the upper left side, the lower right side, and the lower left side. A plurality of full-color LEDs can be mounted on the waist panel, the inside of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R (reel lamp), and each button. Note that the 7-segment LED used for payout display etc. is controlled by the main control board 2010 and is not included in the performance LED group 2050. In this embodiment, the LED driver 2250 is connected via the SPI I/F 2360, but depending on the communication specifications of the LED driver, the LED driver 2250 may be connected via the I2C I/F 2340.

GZIP (or GUNZIP) 2370 of the sub control board 2300 is a circuit for decompressing (expanding) files. Generally, GZIP is a function for compressing files, and GUNZIP is a function for decompressing files, but in this embodiment, GZIP 2370 is a circuit for compressing/decompressing files. Further, the sub control board 2300 receives signals from the button group 2060 via a GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) 2380, which is a general purpose I/O port, and also controls the movable accessory 2070 via the GPIO 2380. Send a signal. Here, the button group 2060 corresponds to, for example, the effect button group (10a, 10b, etc.) of the Pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, and does not include a stop button or the like. Further, although the movable accessory 2070 is not provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, it can be provided in this embodiment.

As described above, the sub-control board 2300 includes four CPUs 2390 and four GPUs 2400, but the number does not necessarily have to be four. Sub-control board 2300 further includes one VPU 2410. The GPU 2400 and the VPU 2410 are microprocessors dedicated to image processing, and they generate images displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520. In this embodiment, the GPU 2400 The VPU 2410 mainly executes processing related to 3D images (moving images, still images), and the VPU 2410 mainly executes processing related to 2D images (moving images, still images) under the control of the CPU 2390.

Two frame buffers (a first frame buffer, a second frame buffer) are set for each display device in the VRAM 2420 of the sub-control board 2300, and image data of an image to be displayed on the corresponding display device is written to each frame buffer. Furthermore, the image data of one frame buffer is transferred to the display device at the timing of the first frame, and the image data of the other frame buffer is transferred to the display device at the timing of the next second frame, and these processes are performed. By repeating this alternately, a moving image is displayed on the display device.

In addition to the method of setting two frame buffers for each display device, it is also possible to set a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer with a size that combines the display size (pixels) of multiple display devices and display image data. When transferring image data to a device, there is also a transfer method that specifies a data range in the frame buffer and transfers it to the display device, and it is also possible to use a method that transfers from one frame buffer to multiple display devices. However, the number of display devices is not limited to one frame buffer. Furthermore, two frame buffers such as the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer are called double frame buffers, and each frame buffer has "drawing" and "display" functions to perform the above operations. It is possible.

The SDRAM 2430 of the sub-control board 2300 corresponds to the sub-RAM 203 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. The SDRAM 2430 is provided with a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by execution of a control program, and a storage area for storing data related to various control instructions (commands) transmitted from the main control board 2010. It will be done.

Image data written to the first frame buffer or second frame buffer of the VRAM 2420 is transferred to the main display device 2510 or sub display device 2520 via the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) I/F 2440 of the sub control board 2300. The transmitted image data is then displayed on the display device. Further, a VSYNC signal is transmitted to each display device by the LVDS I/F 2440, and image data (frames) in the display device are switched based on this VSYNC signal.

Note that the VSYNC signal is a signal that is transmitted (generated) at every 16.5 msec period when the frame rate (FPS) is 60 fps, and is transmitted (generated) at every 33 msec period when the frame rate (FPS) is 30 fps.

Data is transmitted and received between the above-mentioned components of the sub-control board 2300 via the bus 2310 of the sub-control board 2300.

[11-2. Processes and threads]
Next, the processes and threads of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 to 378.

As shown in FIG. 376, when the power is turned on, the boot loader installed in the sub ROM 2210 of the sub control board 2300 or the sub relay board 2200 runs an OS (Operating System: Kernel) program (corresponding to the management program of the present application). After loading and starting, the OS starts the master process program (corresponding to the control program of the present application), and then the master process starts the program of each process (corresponding to the control program of the present application). do. For example, in Figure 376, the master process is shown launching three processes: a graphics process, a sound process, and a lamp process. Here, a process is a program that is being executed, and can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the OS. Also, one process is given one common memory space.

In the master process, five threads (inter-process communication thread, periodic thread, peripheral device thread, main board thread, and master thread (main thread)) are executed in parallel and receive commands and the like from the main control board 2010. A thread is a part that executes instructions of a program (process), and is the smallest unit that uses a CPU core.

Also, similar to the master process described above, the graphics process executes four threads (interprocess communication thread, periodic thread, role thread, and graphics thread (main thread)), and the sound process executes three threads (process An interprocess communication thread, a periodic thread, and a sound thread (main thread) are executed, and three threads (an interprocess communication thread, a periodic thread, and a ramp thread (main thread)) are executed in the lamp process. As described above, since multiple threads exist in one process, the processing mode in this embodiment can be said to be "multi-threaded", and since multiple processes are running at the same time, It can be said to be "multi-process".

Further, at this time, the OS can be configured to start not only the master process but all processes. Note that "starting" means reading a target process from the sub ROM 2210, loading it onto the SDRAM 2430, and causing the loaded process to be executed, which is similar to the operation of application software on a personal computer.

As mentioned above, each thread can use a CPU core and give instructions to the CPU core, but which CPU core a thread gives an instruction to is basically controlled by the OS. be exposed. Furthermore, the user can also specify the association between a thread and the CPU core on which the thread operates. Specifically, the lamp process always occupies one CPU core, and the master process, graphics process, and sound process have threads operated by three unoccupied CPU cores, but the graphics process's file cache In the process (see FIG. 392), the ramp process temporarily occupies one of the three CPU cores. Therefore, all threads of one process do not necessarily use the same CPU core. Further, as described above, each process is given a memory space, but threads within the same process can share this memory space.

FIG. 377 shows the relationship between the master process, graphic process, sound process, and lamp process described above and the shared memory. This shared memory is different from the above-mentioned memory space that can be shared by threads within a process. In this embodiment, a part of the SDRAM 2430 shown in FIG. 375 is used as the shared memory, and each thread (interprocess communication thread) accesses this shared memory to enable data sharing between processes.

As a shared memory configuration, there is a method (centralized shared memory method) in which each CPU core (or each CPU) accesses one shared memory through one shared bus. There is also a method (distributed shared memory method) in which the local memories of each CPU core (or each CPU) are connected via a shared bus so that they can be accessed virtually as one shared memory.

In this embodiment, as described above, the SDRAM 2430 is configured with two SDRAMs, so one of these SDRAMs (part or all of one SDRAM) can be set as a shared memory, or two SDRAMs can be configured as a shared memory. It is also possible to virtually connect at least a portion of each of them and set it as a shared memory.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 375, a movable accessory 2070 can be provided, but the process and thread related to this are controlled by the accessory thread in the above-mentioned graphic process. Further, the processes shown in FIG. 376 and the threads related to the processes are merely examples, and various variations can be considered in terms of their number and functions.

In FIG. 377, solid line arrows represent subjects and objects related to securing areas in the shared memory, and writing data to the shared memory, dotted line arrows represent writing data to the shared memory, and dash-dotted line arrows represent the shared memory. Represents loading data from. Note that in each process, threads that do not access the shared memory are not shown.

For example, in FIG. 377, the master thread of the master process reserves multiple shared memories in SDRAM 2430. Here, the name of that one shared memory is "Master → Graphic", and this shared memory "Master → Graphic" means the storage area of data from the master process to the graphic process, and in fact, this In the shared memory "master→graphics", data is written in the master thread of the master process, and data is read in the interprocess communication thread of the graphics process.

Note that in this embodiment, the thread of the sending (writing) process is configured to secure the storage area of the shared memory so that debugging and restarting can be performed on a process-by-process basis, but depending on the OS, Alternatively, the storage area may be secured by a thread of a process on the receiving side (reading side). Further, it is also possible to configure such that all storage areas are secured by any one process (thread thereof).

Similarly, the graphics thread of the graphics process secures the shared memory "Graphics → Master", and this shared memory "Graphics → Master" is used for data writing by the graphics thread of the graphics process, and the inter-process communication of the master process. Data is read in a thread.

In addition, the sound thread of the sound process secures a shared memory "sound → master", and data is written to this shared memory "sound → master" by the sound thread of the sound process, and the interprocess communication thread of the master process The data is loaded. Furthermore, the sound thread of the sound process secures the shared memory "sound → graphics", and this shared memory "sound → graphics" is written by the sound thread of the sound process, and the interprocess communication thread of the graphics process. The data is loaded.

Furthermore, the lamp thread of the lamp process secures the shared memory "lamp → master", and data is written to this shared memory "lamp → master" by the lamp thread of the lamp process, and the interprocess communication thread of the master process The data is loaded.

As described above, in this embodiment, all reading (reception) of data from the shared memory during inter-process communication via the shared memory is performed by the inter-process communication thread of each process (at one point). (dashed arrow). Additionally, the main thread of each process (e.g. master thread, graphics thread, sound thread, lamp thread, etc.) is configured to write data to the shared memory (solid arrows and dotted arrows ). Additionally, the main thread of each process can be configured to read (receive) data from shared memory, and the interprocess communication thread of each process can be configured to write (send) data to shared memory. It can also be configured as

Furthermore, a shared memory is set up in which data is written by multiple processes regarding the sound process and the lamp process. For example, the master thread of the master process secures the shared memory "ANY→Sound", and data is written to this shared memory "ANY→Sound" by the master thread, graphics thread, and lamp thread, and the sound process Data is read in the inter-communication thread. In addition, the master thread of the master process secures the shared memory "ANY→Lamp", and data is written to this shared memory "ANY→Lamp" by the master thread, graphics thread, and sound thread, and the process of the lamp process Data is read in the inter-communication thread.

Further, the master process secures a shared memory "ANY→Master" for debugging the game machine, and collects debugging data from the inter-process communication threads of all processes including the master process. In addition, in FIG. 377, regarding the shared memory "ANY→Master", the solid line represents the securing of the shared memory "ANY→Master" by the master thread and the writing of data, but data from other threads to the shared memory is The notation of the dotted line arrow representing writing and the notation of the dashed-dotted line arrow representing reading of data from the shared memory are omitted.

For example, a TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) driver or the like can be incorporated into the inter-process communication thread of the master process, and this embedded communication protocol allows shared memory to be stored in the external computer for debugging connected to the pachi-slot machine 1. Data (message) written in "ANY→Master" can be transferred. The external computer is connected to the sub-control unit 2100 of the pachi-slot machine 1 via a predetermined interface (for example, a LAN line or an IEEE802.3-compliant GMAC interface), and receives data from the shared memory "ANY→Master" using the above protocol. It is possible to receive and perform necessary analysis on these data.

In addition to the inter-process communication thread of the master process, by incorporating TCP drivers etc. for the graphic process, sound process, lamp process, etc., the inter-process communication thread of each process can handle the communication using the communication protocol. This makes it possible to read and write shared memory.

Thereby, it is possible to send and receive data to and from a predetermined shared memory under instructions from an external computer connected to the sub-control unit 2100, and to control processing of each process. Such a configuration enables effective debugging in a semi-actual machine state. For example, by implementing the first process in the pachi-slot machine 1 so that each process executes, and having the second process executed based on instructions from an external computer, it is possible to debug the second process or to integrate the first process and the second process. Relationships can be organized easily. Such a configuration eliminates the conventional work of grasping internal data using a dedicated measuring instrument, and as a result, debugging can be easily performed.

Furthermore, in relation to FIG. 376, we have explained the configuration in which the OS starts the master process, and then the master process starts each process. After that, the master process determines that each process has started normally. After that, data (messages) can be sent to the shared memory of each process.

For example, the master thread of the master process allocates shared memory (shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", "lamp → master", etc.) into which data will be written by the processes to be started, and then starts each process. Activate it. Therefore, after securing the necessary shared memory, the main thread of each process sends messages to the master process using the interprocess communication thread (shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", "Lamp"). → send the specified data to the master, etc.). Next, the master process's interprocess communication thread determines whether messages from each process can be received in the shared memory mentioned above. If the messages can be received, the process corresponding to that shared memory starts normally. It is determined that the process has been executed, and a message is sent to each process (data is sent to the shared memory ``Master→Graphic'', ``ANY→Sound'', ``ANY→Lamp'', etc.).

Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 375, a movable accessory 2070 can be provided, but a description of processes and threads related thereto will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 378, the data transmission/reception method in the shared memory described in FIG. 377 will be described. FIG. 378(A) shows a form of data transmission and reception regarding the above-mentioned shared memory "ANY→Sound". In other words, regarding the shared memory "ANY→sound", as mentioned above, data is written in the master thread of the master process, the graphics thread of the graphics process, and the lamp thread of the lamp process, and the data is written in the interprocess communication thread of the sound process. Data is loaded. If we consider writing data in the three threads mentioned above as sending a message, and reading data in the inter-process communication thread of the sound process as receiving a message, then the shared memory "ANY→Sound" is stored in the so-called "message queue". ”.

Figure 378(B) shows a situation where messages are sent and received from a process (in FIFO format) in the shared memory "ANY→Sound" with message queue depth = N (N message storage area). has been done. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 378(B), messages "0", "1" are sent by "send 0", "send 1", and "send 2" from different processes (master process, graphic process, lamp process), respectively. ", "2" are sent, those messages are added to the message queue in the order they were sent (the number of messages is 3), and the first one (for example, the message specified by the first address) is the message "0", The termination (for example, the message specified by the termination address) will be message "2." In the upper part of FIG. 378(B), the hatched area of the message queue indicates that messages are stored.

After that, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 378(B), one process (sound process) receives the first added message "0", and as a result, the first message becomes message "1" and the message is stored. The hatched areas showing that messages are "1" and "2" are the messages "1" and "2." At this time, the start address is changed, and the message "1" becomes the start and the message "2" becomes the end.

Next, as shown in the lower part of FIG. The terminal address is cleared (the hatched area indicating that the message is stored disappears). In FIG. 378, the transmission/reception method related to the shared memory "ANY→Sound" has been described, but the same applies to other shared memories.

Further, when the same shared memory (message queue) is simultaneously accessed from the inter-process communication threads of multiple processes, exclusive control is performed so that writing or reading of any one is given priority. Such exclusive control prevents different messages from being added to the same area of the message queue at the same time.

However, since the inter-thread communication area is reserved as memory for use by the sound process, it is impossible to access it from other processes (master process, graphics process, and lamp process), and it is managed by the sound process. Allocated in memory.

[11-2-1. Sound process]
Next, the basic flow of the sound process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 379 to 383.

FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow regarding each thread of the sound process. Here, a single request or a sequence request including multiple single requests is executed using an event code or a sound code. A single request may be, for example, a request for a new sound, a request for muting or muting a sound that is being played, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 379, the inter-process communication thread of the sound process and the sound thread are provided with timing information from the periodic thread at regular intervals. Also, if you write event codes, sound codes, etc. to the shared memory "ANY→Sound" from other main threads (for example, master process, graphics process, lamp process main threads), those data will be transferred between processes. Read by the communication thread and provided to the sound thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), the shared memory "ANY→Sound" includes event codes, sound codes, and data related to sound requests such as volume settings, sound mute requests, and sound pause requests. is stored.

When the sound thread receives an event code, sound code, etc. from the interprocess communication thread, it provides a request based on the data and related sound data to the library API. The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of firmware or a driver, for example, and controls audio output from the speaker group 2040 connected to the digital amplifier based on requests and sound data.

The library API sends playback information and the like to the sound thread in response to receiving requests and sound data. When the sound thread sends the playback information etc. received from the library API to the shared memory "sound → master" or "sound → graphics", the interprocess communication thread of the master process accesses the shared memory "sound → master". The inter-process communication thread of the graphics process reads the playback information, etc. by accessing the shared memory "sound→graphics".

For example, as shown in Figure 380(B), the shared memory "sound → master" contains survival information regarding each thread of the sound process (information indicating that the thread is operating normally) and requested requests. Request information etc. are stored.

In addition, the shared memory "sound → graphics" includes, for example, playback information including the type of sound being played, sequence pattern, playback elapsed time, etc., as shown in FIG. Lamps, sound information (including requests and sound information being played), etc. are stored.

[11-2-1a. Sound process sound thread]
FIG. 381 shows a flowchart showing the process flow of the sound thread shown in FIG. 379. When the sound thread is started, it secures the shared memory "sound→master" and "sound→graphics" (step S3001). Next, in step S3002, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area may be reserved separately as memory between each thread (for example, between the sound thread and the inter-process communication thread, or between the sound thread and the periodic thread), or it may be a common area between all threads. There are various forms such as being reserved as memory.

In addition, in this embodiment, all data is exchanged between threads through inter-thread communication via the inter-thread communication area. For example, one process updates variables (flags, etc.) declared as global variables, and the other The process does not use traditional data sharing methods such as referencing its global variables. The inter-thread communication area is a message queue in the same format as the shared memory described in FIG. 378, and is secured in the SDRAM 2430, for example.

Next, in step S3003, a request (event code, sound code, request, etc.) from the inter-process communication thread is obtained by referring to the inter-thread communication area as described above. Next, in step S3004, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3004), the request is analyzed in step S3005.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether the request is a new request (step S3006). If the request is a new request (YES in step S3006), the new request is registered in step S3007, and then the process advances to step S3014. If the request is not a new request (NO in step S3006), the request is registered as a request in progress in step S3008.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3004), it is determined in step S3009 whether there is timing information (SID=1) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3009), the process advances to step S3014. If there is timing information (YES in step S3009), in step S3010, playback information is acquired from the library API, and then, in step S3011, the acquired playback information is set in the shared memory "sound→graphics".

Next, in step S3012, thread survival information (interprocess communication thread survival information, periodic thread survival information) of each thread is acquired from the inter-thread communication area of the sound process, and in step S3013, the acquired survival information and , sets sound thread survival information indicating that the sound thread itself (sound thread) is alive in the shared memory "sound→master", and then proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, it is determined whether the request being executed is a sequence request. If the request being executed is a sequence request (YES in step S3014), sequence update processing is performed in step S3015. If the request being executed is not a sequence request (NO in step S3014), the process advances to step S3016.

In step S3016, the request being requested is processed, and in step S3017, driver (API) access is performed. Processing of pending requests includes, for example, muting, muting, fading in/out, ducking, changing volume, requesting (executing) markers, and obtaining and obtaining sounds to play when new sounds are requested. This includes registering sounds that have been created. Ducking is an editing process that reduces the volume of a specific sound source under certain circumstances to make other sounds easier to hear or stand out. For example, reducing the volume of BGM at the moment a narration is played. In addition, in the case of playing back BGM, editing is assumed to reduce the volume of the sounds of musical instruments other than the guitar in order to make the guitar sound stand out.

Furthermore, driver access is a process in which the processing result of the request being requested is reflected in the driver and the sound data is actually sent from the driver to the digital amplifier. This controls the audio output and the like for the speaker group 2040 connected to the digital amplifier.

Next, the process waits for the sound thread update timing to arrive (step S3018), and then returns to step S3003 to repeat the subsequent processing. Note that sound control using the sound thread will be explained in detail later.

[11-2-1b. Sound process interprocess communication thread]
FIG. 382 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. 379. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memory "ANY→sound", and if a request exists in the shared memory, it retrieves the request from the shared memory and sends the request to the sound thread through inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first obtains a request from the shared memory "ANY→sound" (step S3031). Next, in step S3032, it is determined whether there is a request (event code, sound code, request, etc.). If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3032), the request is set in the inter-thread communication area in step S3033, and the process advances to step S3034. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 380, event codes, sound codes, requests, etc. are written to the shared memory "ANY→Sound" from the inter-process communication threads of the master process, graphic process, and lamp process. It will be done. If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3032), the process proceeds to step S3034 without doing anything.

In step S3034, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This inter-process communication thread survival information is set even if there is no request to the shared memory. Thereafter, in step S3035, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (SID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3031 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-1c. Periodic thread of sound process]
FIG. 383 shows a flowchart showing the process flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. 379. A periodic thread operates at a constant cycle, generates timing information for the sound thread and the inter-process communication thread, and notifies this to the sound thread and the inter-process communication thread, respectively, using inter-thread communication. do.

First, in step S3051, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different sound ID (SID) for each thread. For example, in the case of timing information corresponding to a sound thread, SID is 1, and is timing information that occurs every 10 msec. Further, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, SID=2, and the timing information is generated every 20 seconds.

Next, in step S3052, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication), and in step S3053, the periodic thread survival indicating that the periodic thread itself (periodic thread) is alive. The information is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then, in step S3054, the process waits for a certain period of time (10 msec), and then returns to step S3051 to repeat the subsequent processing.

In this embodiment, the timing information is generated every 10 msec, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing information may be generated at any period between 2 msec and 20 msec.

[11-2-2. lamp process]
Next, the basic flow of the lamp process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 384 to 388.

FIG. 384 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow regarding each thread of the lamp process. Here, a single request or a sequence request including a plurality of single requests is executed using an event code, pattern request, sequence request, or the like. An independent request is, for example, a request for (lighting up) a new lamp, a request for turning off a lamp that is currently on, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 384, the inter-process communication thread of the lamp process and the lamp thread are provided with timing information from the periodic thread at regular intervals. Also, if sequence request 1, etc. is written to the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" from another main thread (for example, each main thread of the master process, graphic process, lamp process), the sequence request 1, etc. will be transferred between processes. Read by the communication thread and provided to the lamp thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385(A), the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" contains event codes, pattern requests, sequence requests, table number requests, as well as port specification, group specification, lamp clear, lamp pause, Data related to lamp requests such as lamp brightness settings are stored.

When the lamp thread receives an event code or the like from the interprocess communication thread, it provides a request regarding the lamp and related lamp data to the library API based on the event code or the like. The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of firmware or a driver, for example, and controls lighting of the performance LED group 2050 connected to the LED driver 2250 based on requests and lamp data.

The library API sends playback information and the like to the lamp thread in response to the request and reception of the lamp data. When the lamp thread sends the playback information etc. received from the library API to the shared memory "lamp → master", the inter-process communication thread of the master process accesses the shared memory "lamp → master" and reads the playback information etc. . Note that in this embodiment, the shared memory "lamp → graphics" is not provided because the lamp reproduction information is not required in the graphic process, but if necessary, the shared memory "lamp → graphics" is provided and the lamp thread sends The data may be read by the interprocess communication thread of the graphics process.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385(B), the shared memory "Lamp → Master" contains survival information regarding each thread of the lamp process (information indicating that the thread is operating normally), and information about the lamp being played. Reproduction information including a pattern, elapsed reproduction time, etc. is stored, and request information of a requested request, etc. is also stored.

[11-2-2a. Lamp thread of lamp process]
FIG. 386 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the lamp thread shown in FIG. 384. The lamp thread secures the shared memory "lamp→master" at startup (step S3071). Next, in step S3072, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area may be reserved individually as memory between each thread (for example, between a ramp thread and an inter-process communication thread, between a ramp thread and a periodic thread), or it may be a common memory between all threads. There are various forms such as being reserved as memory.

The inter-thread communication area of the lamp process is also similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

In addition, in this embodiment, all data is exchanged between threads through inter-thread communication via the inter-thread communication area. For example, one process updates variables (flags, etc.) declared as global variables, and the other The process does not use traditional data sharing methods such as referencing its global variables.

Next, in step S3073, a request (an event code, a sequence request, etc.) from the inter-process communication thread is obtained by referring to the inter-thread communication area as described above. Next, in step S3074, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3074), the request is analyzed in step S3075.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether the request is a new request (step S3076). If it is a new request (YES in step S3076), the new request is registered in step S3077, and then the process advances to step S3083. If the request is not a new request (NO in step S3076), the request is registered as a request in progress in step S3078.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3074), it is determined in step S3079 whether there is timing information (LID=1) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3079), the process advances to step S3083. If there is timing information (YES in step S3079), in step S3080, playback information etc. are acquired from the library API, and then, in step S3081, thread survival information of each thread is acquired from the inter-thread communication area of the ramp process. Then, in step S3082, the reproduction information etc. acquired in step S3080, the survival information (interprocess communication thread survival information, periodic thread survival information) acquired in step S3081, and the fact that the self (ramp thread) is alive are determined. The displayed lamp thread survival information is set in the shared memory "lamp→master", and the process then proceeds to step S3083.

In step S3083, it is determined whether the request being executed is a sequence request. If the request being executed is a sequence request (YES in step S3083), sequence update processing is performed in step S3084. If the request being executed is not a sequence request (NO in step S3083), the process advances to step S3085.

In step S3085, the request being requested is processed, and in step S3086, driver (API) access is performed. Processing of a request in progress includes, for example, acquiring a lamp to be reproduced when a request such as turning off, fading in/out, changing brightness, or adding a new lamp is requested, and registering the acquired lamp. Further, driver access is a process in which the processing result of the request being requested is reflected in the driver and lamp data is actually sent from the driver to the LED driver 2250. As a result, lighting and the like are controlled for the performance LED group 2050 connected to the LED driver 2250.

Next, the process waits for the lamp thread update timing to arrive (step S3087), and then returns to step S3073 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-2b. [Lamp process interprocess communication thread]
FIG. 387 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. 384. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memory "ANY→Lamp", and if there is a request such as an event code in the shared memory, it retrieves the request from the shared memory and sends the request to the lamp thread through inter-thread communication. Send to.

The inter-process communication thread first obtains a request from the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" (step S3101). Next, in step S3102, it is determined whether there is a request. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3102), the request is set in the inter-thread communication area in step S3102, and the process advances to step S3103. Note that in this embodiment, requests are written to the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" from each interprocess communication thread of the master process, graphic process, and sound process, as shown in FIG. 377. If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3102), the process proceeds to step S3104 without doing anything.

In step S3104, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This inter-process communication thread survival information is set even if there is no request to the shared memory. Thereafter, in step S3105, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (LID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3101 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-2c. Ramp process periodic thread]
FIG. 388 shows a flowchart showing the process flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. 384. A fixed-period thread operates at a constant cycle, generates timing information for the ramp thread and the inter-process communication thread, and uses inter-thread communication to notify the ramp thread and the inter-process communication thread, respectively. do.

First, in step S3121, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different lamp ID (LID) for each thread. For example, in the case of timing information corresponding to a lamp thread, LID is 1, and is timing information that is generated every 2 msec period. Further, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, LID=2, and the timing information is generated every 20 seconds.

Next, in step S3122, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication), and in step S3123, the periodic thread survival indicating that the periodic thread itself (periodic thread) is alive. The information is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then in step S3124, the process waits for a certain period of time (2 msec), and then returns to step S3051 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3. Graphic process]
Next, the basic flow of the graphic process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 389 to 395.

FIG. 389 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow regarding each thread of the graphic process. Here, an example is shown where a request is requested. In addition, in this embodiment, it can also be comprised so that it may have the movable accessory 2070, and the accessory thread implemented in that case and the flow of data related to this are shown by the dotted line.

As shown in FIG. 389, the inter-process communication thread of the graphics process and the graphics thread are provided with timing information at regular intervals from the regular cycle thread. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes the movable accessory 2070, timing information is provided to the accessory thread at a constant period from a fixed periodic thread.

Also, if a request is written to the shared memory "Master → Graphics" or "Sound → Graphics" from another main thread (for example, the main threads of the master process or sound process), the request will be processed by the interprocess communication thread. Loaded and provided to the graphics thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 390(A), the shared memory "master graphics" stores gaming status, key input information, error screen display information, various information related to screen display, projector information, etc. It can function as a "request" to a process. The gaming state includes, for example, a gaming state, an RT state, an internal winning combination, and the like. Further, the key input information includes, for example, information regarding the push of a predetermined performance button, the operation of a chance button, the coordinates of the touch panel, and the type of operation. Furthermore, the error screen display information may include an error code for displaying an error screen, and the projector information may include focus information, center coordinate position, and the like.

Note that in this embodiment, since a projector is used as the main display device 2510, projector information is stored in the shared memory, but a liquid crystal display device similar to the sub display device 2520 may be used as the main display device 2510. In this case, main liquid crystal information is stored instead of projector information. The main liquid crystal information is information according to the specifications and specifications of the mounted liquid crystal display device.

As explained with reference to FIG. 380(C), the shared memory "sound → graphics" includes playback information including the type of sound being played, sequence pattern, playback elapsed time, etc., markers, and a sound-linked lamp that is linked to the sound. , sound information (including requests and sound information being played), etc., each of which can function as a "request" for a graphics process.

When the graphics thread receives a request from the interprocess communication thread, it provides 2D/3D request data to the library API based on the request. The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of firmware or a driver, for example, and is executed by the processing of the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 (under control of the CPU 2390) based on the 2D/3D request data. The main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 of the pachi-slot machine 1 are controlled to display images.

The library API sends various information to the graphics thread in response to receiving 2D/3D request data. When the graphics thread sends various information received from the library API to the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "ANY → Sound", "ANY → Lamp", the inter-process communication thread of the master process sends the various information received from the library API to the shared memory "Graphics → Master". ” and read the various information, the inter-process communication thread of the sound process accesses the shared memory “ANY→Sound” and reads the various information, and the inter-process communication thread of the lamp process reads the various information from the shared memory “ANY →Lamp” and read the various information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 390(B), the shared memory "Graphic → Master" includes survival information (information indicating that the thread is operating normally), projector information, and accessories regarding each thread of the graphic process. Information, error information, video information, etc. are stored.

As explained with reference to FIG. 380(A), the shared memory "ANY→Sound" contains event codes, sound codes, and information related to sound requests such as volume settings, sound mute requests, and sound pause requests. Data etc. are stored in the shared memory "ANY→Lamp", as described with reference to FIG. 385(A), in addition to event codes, pattern requests, sequence requests, table number requests, port designation, Data related to lamp requests such as group designation, lamp clear, lamp pause, and lamp brightness settings are stored.

Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment has the movable accessory 2070, when the accessory thread receives an accessory request from the master process (via the inter-process communication thread and the graphics thread of the graphic process), Based on the accessory request, request data is provided to the library API. Note that in this embodiment, the accessory thread does not perform complicated operations regarding the movable accessory 2070, so it does not use sequence requests, but based on the accessory request from the master process, the graphics thread It is also possible to generate a sequence request by combining requests for accessories.

The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of firmware or a driver, for example, and allows the movable accessory connected to the motor driver IC etc. to respond to the request based on request data from the accessory thread. It is controlled so that it is driven. Further, the accessory thread transmits the accessory information received from the library API to the graphics thread, and the graphics thread writes the received accessory information to the shared memory "Graphic→Master".

[11-2-3a. Graphics thread of graphics process]
FIG. 391 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the graphics thread shown in FIG. 389. The graphics thread secures the shared memory "graphics→master" at startup (step S3141). Next, in step S3142, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area may be reserved individually as memory between each thread (for example, between a graphics thread and an inter-process communication thread, between a graphics thread and a periodic thread), or it may be a common area between all threads. There are various forms such as being reserved as memory.

The inter-thread communication area of the graphics process is also similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

In addition, in this embodiment, all data is exchanged between threads through inter-thread communication via the inter-thread communication area. For example, one process updates variables (flags, etc.) declared as global variables, and the other The process does not use traditional data sharing methods such as referencing its global variables.

Next, in step S3143, a request from the inter-process communication thread is obtained by referring to the inter-thread communication area as described above. Next, in step S3144, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3144), the request is analyzed in step S3145.

The analysis of the request is performed, for example, based on the data sent from the master process (that is, based on the data stored in the shared memory "master → graphics"), and the command from the main control board 2010 is registered in the request. Therefore, depending on the type of command, when executing a new performance (for example, a start command), a new performance is determined based on information such as the gaming state and internal winning combination that are also registered in the request ( The start command triggers a lottery of performances, the display (winning) command triggers switching to another production), prepares to execute the newly determined production, and updates the currently running production depending on the type of command ( For example, preparations are made to update the production trigger in response to the stop command.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether the request is a new request (step S3146). If it is a new request (YES in step S3146), a new performance object is generated in step S3147, and then the process advances to step S3154. Here, when a new performance is determined, a new performance object is generated, including the performance sequence of the determined performance, the registration information of the image data to be used (video (2D/3D)/still image (2D/3D)), and the usage A rendering object is generated from the selected rendering data by selecting rendering data in which the drawing size of the image data, various effects (effects, etc.), trigger information, etc. are stored.

If the request is not a new request (NO in step S3146), the request is registered in the effect object being executed in step S3148.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3144), it is determined in step S3149 whether there is timing information (GID=1) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3149), the process advances to step S3154. If there is timing information (YES in step S3149), in step S3150, various information is acquired from the library API, and then, in step S3151, the acquired various information is set in the shared memory "Graphic→Master".

Next, in step S3152, with reference to the inter-thread communication area, thread survival information of each thread (inter-process communication thread survival information, periodic thread survival information, accessory thread survival information ) is acquired, and in step S3153, the acquired survival information and the graphics thread survival information indicating that the graphics thread itself (graphics thread) is alive are set in the shared memory "Graphic → Master", and then in step S3154. move on.

In step S3154, updating processing of the effect object being executed is performed. This processing performs frame-by-frame updating processing, updates of presentation triggers in response to commands from the main control board 2010, etc., and as a result, the presentation object being executed is updated on a frame-by-frame basis.

Next, in step S3155, 2D/3D CG processing is performed. This process performs effect instructions, sprite settings, brightness/transparency settings, etc. for 2D images (including movies), and polygon instructions, texture selection, etc. for 3D images (including movies).

Thereafter, in step S3156, file cache processing is performed. File cache processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 392. Next, in step S3157, driver (API) access (drawing processing, data construction processing) is performed. This process reflects the results of the 2D/3D CG process in step S3155 on the driver to generate a 3D image or 2D image related to the effect, and is a process of the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410. Note that although OpenGL is used here as a driver (API) for accessing the GPU (VPU), other drivers may also be used.

Next, it waits for the update timing of the graphics thread to arrive (step S3158), and then returns to step S3143 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3b. File cache processing]
FIG. 392 shows a flowchart showing in more detail the flow of the file cache processing shown in FIG. 391.

Here, the CPU 2390 that controls the graphics thread in FIG. 391 and the file cache process in FIG. 392 corresponds to the arithmetic processing processor, and the GPU 2400 that performs driver (API) access (drawing processing, data construction processing) in step S3157 in FIG. 391. The VPU 2410 corresponds to an image processing processor, and the sub-control unit 2100 corresponds to an effect control section having the above-mentioned arithmetic processing processor and image processing processor. Further, the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520, which are displayed by the production control section, correspond to the display section.

First, in step S3171, for example, with reference to the sub ROM 2210, it is determined whether there is a read list. If it is determined that there is a read list (YES in step S3171), prefetch information is generated from the read list in step S3172. The prefetch information stores data identification information (for example, data name and address) arranged in the order of data to be read.

Next, in step S3173, for example, a file cache memory (for example, FIFO format memory) is secured in the SDRAM 2430, and in step S3174, a request is made to generate a file cache thread.

In step S3174, when generation of a file cache thread is requested, the file cache thread is activated as a read-only thread. This file cache thread is executed as a thread of the graphic process by any CPU core that is not operating in the CPU 2390, and after performing file cache processing, the process ends.

In the file cache thread, data used in driver access (drawing processing, etc.) performed by the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 is prefetched based on the above prefetch information. For example, related data related to drawing processing stored in the sub ROM 2210 is read in advance into the file cache memory of the SDRAM 2430 in a predetermined order based on the arrangement of data identification information stored in the prefetch information, and finally, It is transferred to the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410.

Note that the read list may be stored and managed as part of the related data transferred to the GPU 2400 or the like, or may be managed as data separate from the related data.

If it is determined that there is no read list (NO in step S3171), it is determined in step S3175 whether there is a cancellation request. If it is determined that there is a cancellation request (YES in step S3175), the prefetch information is discarded in step S3176, and further, the discard of the file cache thread is requested in step S3177, and then the file cache processing is ended. If it is determined that there is no cancellation request (NO in step S3175), the file cache processing is ended without doing anything.

Note that when securing memory for a file cache, if the system and applications use the VRAM 2420, all or part of the unused portion of the VRAM 2420 can be used as the memory for the file cache.

In addition, the prefetch information includes, for example, the order (processing order) in which data necessary for drawing one scene on the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 is provided by a predetermined CPU core (CPU core different from the file cache thread). ), and the file cache thread reads data into the file cache memory in the order specified by the prefetch information.As a result, the data is arranged in the file cache memory in the order specified by the prefetch information. It turns out.

When the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 performs drawing processing or the like, a predetermined CPU core sequentially retrieves the data read by the file cache thread in the order in which it was read, transfers it to the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410, and writes the processing result to the VRAM 2420. In addition, each time data is read from the file cache memory by a predetermined CPU core, the data is erased from the file cache memory, so the predetermined CPU core is not required for drawing processing etc. of the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410. While the data is being transferred, another CPU core (file cache thread) can read in parallel (in the background) the data for the next scene (i.e. read ahead), effectively In other words, it is possible to eliminate (or significantly save) the time required to read the data.

Note that the content and order of use of the data used in scenes used for general production, etc. are known in advance, and if this content is stored in the prefetch information, the file cache thread can effectively use the data. Read ahead is realized. For example, in a 3D image, data used for modeling, coordinate transformation, shading, texture mapping, etc. of a target object (polygon object) and the order in which these data are used are known in advance.

Note that if the prefetch information is unknown, prefetching in the file cache thread is not performed, and normal reading is performed (necessary data is read directly from the sub ROM 2210 or the like without using the file cache memory). Further, if there is no data in the file cache memory, a predetermined CPU core performs normal reading (reading from the sub ROM 2210, etc.).

It is also possible to cache data related to image processing using the functions of the OS (operating system), but the normal cache is cache memory of the CPU (for example, the L1 cache is 64 KB for each CPU core, All CPU cores use L2 cache (512KB), and the storage capacity is not large, so the memory capacity quickly runs out and normal read processing is often performed, making it difficult to obtain the expected performance. is difficult. In contrast, in the file cache processing of the present application described above, a relatively large capacity of file cache memory is secured, and related data is placed in the file cache memory (by a read-only thread) in consideration of the processing order. By storing data, processing efficiency of data reading is improved, and multiple data can be read at high speed.

[11-2-3c. Graphics process interprocess communication thread]
FIG. 393 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. 389. The interprocess communication thread monitors the shared memory "master → graphics" and "sound → graphics", and if predetermined data (for example, registration data) exists in the shared memory, retrieves the data from the shared memory and Send data as a request to the graphics thread via inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first acquires registration data from the shared memory "master→graphics" and "sound→graphics" (step S3191). Next, in step S3192, it is determined whether there is registered data. If it is determined that there is registered data (YES in step S3192), the registered data is set as a request in the inter-thread communication area in step S3193, and the process advances to step S3194. In addition, in this embodiment, the shared memory "master → graphics" and "sound → graphics" include the master process and sound process, as shown in FIGS. 377, 390(A), and 380(C). Registration data such as gaming status (eg, stored in the shared memory "Master→Graphics") is written from the intercommunication thread. If it is determined that there is no registered data (NO in step S3192), the process proceeds to step S3194 without doing anything.

In step S3194, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This inter-process communication thread survival information is set even if there is no registered data in the shared memory. Thereafter, in step S3195, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (GID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3191 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3d. Regular periodic thread of graphics process]
FIG. 394 shows a flowchart showing the process flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. 389. A fixed-period thread operates at a constant cycle, and generates timing information for the graphics thread, accessory thread, and inter-process communication thread, and uses inter-thread communication to pass this timing information to the graphics thread, accessory thread, and inter-process communication thread. , respectively notify the interprocess communication thread.

First, in step S3211, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different graphic ID (GID) for each thread. For example, in the case of timing information corresponding to a graphics thread, GID is 1, and is timing information that is generated every 16.5 msec period (timing synchronized with VSYNC signal = 60 fps). Furthermore, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, GID=2, which is timing information that occurs every 20 seconds. Further, in the case of timing information corresponding to the accessory thread, GID=3, and the timing information is generated every 1 sec period.

Next, in step S3212, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication), and in step S3213, the periodic thread survival indicating that the periodic thread itself (periodic thread) is alive. The information is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then in step S3214, the process waits for a certain period of time (0.5 msec), and then returns to step S3211 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3e. Graphic process role thread]
FIG. 395 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the accessory thread for controlling the movable accessory thread 2070 shown in FIG. 389.

First, in step S3231, the accessory thread refers to the inter-thread communication area and obtains a request from the graphics thread. Next, in step S3232, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3232), the request is analyzed in step S3233.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether the request is a new request (step S3234). If the request is a new request (YES in step S3234), the new request is registered in step S3235, and then the process advances to step S3237. If the request is not a new request (NO in step S3234), the request is registered as a request in progress in step S3236.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3232), it is determined in step S3237 whether there is timing information (GID=3) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3237), the process advances to step S3241. If there is timing information (YES in step S3237), in step S3238, accessory information is acquired from the library API, and then, in step S3239, the acquired accessory information is sent to the graphics thread via the inter-thread communication area. , and the graphics thread sets this accessory information in the shared memory "Graphic → Master".

Next, in step S3240, the accessory thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (the accessory thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This accessory thread survival information is set even if there is no request to the shared memory. After that, the process advances to step S3241.

In step S3241, the request being requested is processed. This process is performed, for example, to acquire a drive pattern to be driven when a new accessory is requested to be driven, such as stop, forward rotation/reverse rotation, rotation speed change (acceleration/deceleration), vibration, etc., and the acquired drive pattern. Perform registration, etc.

Next, in step S3242, driver (API) access is performed. This process causes the driver to reflect the result of processing the request in progress (request data). Further, the driver (API) transmits accessory drive data based on the request data to a motor driver IC or the like (for example, a motor or solenoid for driving the accessory), and controls the movable accessory 2070 to be driven.

Next, the process waits for the timing to update the accessory thread (step S3243), and then returns to step S3231 to repeat the subsequent processing.

Note that if the movable accessory 2070 is not provided, it is desirable that the accessory thread be made inactive or deleted from the graphic process.

[11-2-4. Master process]
Next, the basic flow of the master process will be explained with reference to FIGS. 396 to 401.

FIG. 396 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow regarding each thread of the master process. As shown in FIG. 396, each thread of the master process is provided with timing information at regular intervals from a regular cycle thread. In addition, survival information, etc. is written from other main threads (for example, the main threads of the graphics process, sound process, and lamp process) to the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master". and its survival information etc. are read by the interprocess communication thread and provided to the master thread.

The master thread receives the main board command from the main board thread, and in response to this main board command, sends a request to the shared memory "Master → Graphics", and also receives inter-device commands from the peripheral thread, and sends a request to the shared memory "Master → Graphics". Sends a request to the shared memory "Master → Graphics" in response to an inter-device command. Thereafter, the interprocess communication thread of the graphics process accesses the shared memory "master→graphics" and reads the request.

Note that the data stored in the shared memory "Graphic → Master", "Sound → Master", "Lamp → Master", and "Master → Graphic" has already been explained, so the explanation will be omitted here. Furthermore, the shared memory "ANY→Master" is reserved for debugging the gaming machine, and its explanation will be omitted here.

[11-2-4a. Master thread of master process]
FIG. 397 shows a flowchart showing the process flow of the master thread shown in FIG. 396. At startup, the master thread secures the shared memories "master->graphics", "ANY->sound", and "ANY->lamp" (step S3261). Next, in step S3262, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area may be reserved individually as memory between each thread (for example, between the master thread and the inter-process communication thread, between the master thread and the periodic thread), or it may be a common area between all threads. There are various forms such as being reserved as memory.

The inter-thread communication area of the master process is also similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

Next, in step S3263, initialization processing is performed. This initialization process checks the backup memory (for example, FRAM (registered trademark) 2220), initializes communication circuits for peripheral devices, and the like. Thereafter, in step S3264, a request from the inter-process communication thread is obtained by referring to the inter-thread communication area as described above, and in step S3265, it is determined whether the obtained request is an analysis result. If it is determined that the request is an analysis result (YES in step S3265), command-by-command processing is performed in step S3266, and then the process advances to step S3267.

The command-specific processing is processing performed for each command ID of the analysis result (main board command from the main control board 2010). For example, if it is a start command, stop command, winning (display or 3OFF (detection of the player's third stop operation)) command, the command ID, internal winning combination, gaming status, RT status, advantageous section information etc. is sent to the graphics process (master → graphics), and if it is a bet (input) command, the consistency with the information from the peripheral device (CMOS selector) thread is determined, and initialization (setting change / setting If it is a confirmation) command, it executes processing for the maintenance (hole) menu and requests a maintenance menu request to the graphic process (master→graphic). Further, if it is an error command, it performs error processing and requests the graphic process to display an error screen, and if it is a no-operation (periodic) command, it performs processing according to the no-operation command.

In this embodiment, when a start command is received, the graphics process determines the effect (lottery). ) etc. can also be configured to determine the performance.

If it is determined that the request is not an analysis result (NO in step S3265), the process advances to step S3267. In step S3267, it is determined whether the request is peripheral device information (such as an inter-device command from a peripheral device). If it is determined that the request is peripheral device information (YES in step S3267), processing for each peripheral device is performed in step S3268, and then the process advances to step S3269.

Peripheral device processing includes the selector 2030 (e.g. CMOS selector), door monitoring unit 2020 (e.g. 24h door monitoring unit), sub display device 2520 (e.g. touch panel liquid crystal display device), main Processing is performed according to information from the display device 2510 (for example, a projector). For example, if it is a CMOS selector, it will process the number of medals inserted according to the number of medals inserted, or display an error if it is determined that an incorrect medal has been inserted based on the medal color/engraving judgment results, so the graphic process Make a request. In addition, in the case of a touch panel display device, the type of touch panel operation (tap, flick, zoom, etc.) and the coordinate information of the operation are transmitted (requested) to the graphic process.

If it is determined that the request is not peripheral device information (NO in step S3267), the process advances to step S3269. In step S3269, it is determined whether the request is survival information. If it is determined that the request is survival information (YES in step S3269), survival confirmation processing is performed in step S3270, and then the process advances to step S3271.

The survival confirmation process is performed by checking the survival information stored in the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", "Lamp → Master", and the survival information of the inter-thread communication area of the master process. This process determines whether each thread of the process is operating normally.

In step S3271, the result of the survival confirmation process in step S3270 is referred to to determine whether all threads of each process are operating normally. If it is determined that all threads are operating normally (YES in step S3271), in step S3272, a WDT (watchdog timer: not shown) provided in the multi-module of the sub control board 2300 is cleared, The process advances to step S3274.

On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one thread is not operating normally (NO in step S3271), process and thread management processing is performed in step S3273, and then the process advances to step S3274. The process and thread management processing controls, for example, to restart a process that has an abnormal thread, or to display information regarding a thread that is not operating normally on the main display device 2510 or the like.

Note that the process & thread management process may restart (reboot) the sub control board 2300 using the WDT function, and may also reboot the sub control board 2300 for processes that have abnormal threads in order to restart only abnormal threads. , instructs the target thread to restart. Such a restart instruction is performed, for example, by sending a restart message to the shared memory and having the process (interprocess communication thread of the abnormal thread) read the message. .

In step S3274, it is determined whether a power interruption interrupt has occurred. If it is determined that a power interruption interrupt has occurred (YES in step S3274), a power interruption process is performed in step S3275, and the process then proceeds to step S3276. On the other hand, if a power interruption interrupt has not occurred (NO in step S3274), the process proceeds to step S3276 without doing anything.

Note that the power cutoff process stores in the FRAM (registered trademark) 2220 performance information that is being executed (for example, gaming status, performance status, moving images and still images that are being displayed, lamp light emission patterns that are being executed, and lamp sequence information). , request information for the sound being played, etc.), making it possible to resume the performance that was being executed before the power interruption occurred.

In step S3276, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (MID=1) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3264 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-4b. Master process interprocess communication thread]
FIG. 398 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. 396. The interprocess communication thread monitors the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master", and if a request exists in that shared memory, it retrieves the request from the shared memory and processes the request. , sent to the master thread through inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first obtains requests from the shared memories "graphics → master", "sound → master", and "lamp → master" (step S3291). Next, in step S3292, it is determined whether there is a request. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3292), the request is set in the inter-thread communication area in step S3293, and the process advances to step S3294. In this embodiment, the shared memory "Graphic → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master" are shown in FIG. 377, FIG. 390(B), FIG. 380(B), and FIG. 385(B). As shown, requests are written from the interprocess communication threads of the graphics process, sound process, and lamp process. If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3292), the process proceeds to step S3294 without doing anything.

In step S3294, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This inter-process communication thread survival information is set even if there is no request to the shared memory. Thereafter, in step S3295, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (MID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3291 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-4c. Periodic thread of master process]
FIG. 399 shows a flowchart showing the process flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. 396. Periodic threads operate at regular intervals and generate timing information for the master thread, inter-process communication thread, main board thread, and peripheral thread, and use inter-thread communication to pass this information to the master thread. , the interprocess communication thread, the main board thread, and the peripheral thread, respectively.

First, in step S3311, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different lamp ID (MID) for each thread. For example, in the case of timing information corresponding to a master thread, MID is 1, and is timing information that occurs every 4 msec. Furthermore, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, MID=2, which is timing information that occurs every 20 seconds. Further, in the case of timing information according to the main board thread, MID = 3, which is timing information that occurs every 4 seconds, and in the case of timing information according to a peripheral device thread, MID = 4, which is timing information that occurs every 10 seconds. This is timing information that occurs every cycle.

Next, in step S3312, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication), and in step S3313, the periodic thread survival indicating that the periodic thread itself (periodic thread) is alive. The information is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then in step S3314, the process waits for a certain period of time (1 msec), and then returns to step S3311 and repeats the subsequent processing.

[11-2-4d. Main board thread of master process]
FIG. 400 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the main board thread shown in FIG. 396. The main board thread receives commands sent by the main control board 2010 and performs processing corresponding to the commands. Commands are stored in the receive buffer using the UART I/F 2330 (see Figure 375) through receive interrupt processing that occurs in 1-byte units, and when the number of receptions reaches a specified number (for example, 8 bytes), the command is Set (register) in a buffer that can be obtained by the board thread.

First, in step S3331, the above buffer is referenced to obtain a command. In step S3332, it is determined whether there is a received command, and if it is determined that there is a received command (YES in step S3332), command analysis is performed in step S3333. This command analysis checks the command and saves the command ID depending on the type of command obtained, and also saves the command parameters such as the gaming state, internal winning combination, RT state, etc. stored in the command in a predetermined area. Store in.

In the present embodiment, for example, when a start command is received, the graphics process determines the effect (lottery), but the main board thread or the sub-control main processing corresponding to the main board thread (executed by the sub-control board 2300) It is also possible to configure the performance to be determined by sub-side control processing) or the like.

Next, in step S3334, the analysis result from the command analysis in step S3333 is set in the inter-thread communication area, and further, in step S3335, main board thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (main board thread) is alive is set. , is set in the inter-thread communication area, and then the process advances to step S3336.

If it is determined in step S3332 that there is no received command (NO in step S3332), the process advances to step S3336. In step S3336, the process waits for the arrival of timing information (MID=3) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3331 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-4e. Peripheral thread of master process]
FIG. 401 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the peripheral device thread shown in FIG. 396. The peripheral device thread includes information for the selector 2030 (e.g., CMOS selector), door monitoring unit 2020 (e.g., 24h door monitoring unit), sub display device 2520 (e.g., touch panel display device), and main display device 2510 (e.g., projector). Perform processing. All of these peripheral devices are capable of bidirectional communication using serial communication (UART).

As described above, in order to perform processing on peripheral devices, the CMOS selector processing in step S3351, the 24h door management unit processing in step S3352, the touch panel processing in step S3353, and the projector processing in step S3354 create a link between the master thread and the peripheral devices. Controls the sending and receiving of commands between devices.

The touch panel processing is processing based on information regarding the coordinates and operation type of the touch panel provided on the sub display device 2520, and the projector processing is processing for setting focus, white balance, etc. on the main display device 2510 (for example, a projector). This is a process that performs

Thereafter, in step S3355, peripheral device thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (peripheral device thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area, and in step S3356, timing information (MID=4) from the periodic thread is set. It waits for the arrival, and then returns to step S3351 and repeats the subsequent processing.

[11-3. Image processing]
Next, image processing using a graphic process (graphic event) executed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 402 to 404. Note that although the image processing described here can be realized with a multi-process and multi-thread configuration according to this embodiment, such a configuration is not essential. This can be realized in a configuration having at least one CPU and one GPU (or GPU and VPU).

[11-3-1. Normal decoding process]
FIG. 402A shows time-series processing of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) during normal operation. Note that here, the CPU 2390 that performs sub-control processing corresponds to an arithmetic processing processor, the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 that perform graphic control processing correspond to an image processing processor, and the sub-control unit 2100 corresponds to the above-mentioned arithmetic processing processor. and an image processing processor. The main display device 2510 and sub-display device 2520, which are objects of display control and are displayed by the production control section, correspond to a display section, and this display section can be expressed as a concept including a VRAM 2420 (see the figure below). 402(B) and FIG. 402(C)).

The performance control section generates display data to be output to the display section by decoding the still image data and video data. For example, in the case of MPEG-based codecs, compression is performed based on interframe prediction, and for video data in these formats, key frames (for example, I frames) that can reproduce one frame of display data with only that data are used. Then, decoding processing is performed using a difference frame (for example, a P frame or a B frame) that can reproduce one frame of display data by referring to a key frame or the like.

Since the normal playback frame rate is 60 fps, sub-control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub-control board 2300 performs processing related to image control at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Here, 16.5 msec is the time to display one frame, so at a frame rate of 60 fps, 16.5 msec is referred to as one frame time.

Timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 are each at intervals of one frame time (16.5 msec). In FIG. 402, each cylindrical shape represents a process related to a frame, and the numbers such as "00", "01", and "02" written on the cylindrical shape indicate frame numbers. Further, in FIG. 402, the horizontal axis is the time axis, and the length of the cylindrical shape along the time axis represents the approximate processing time.

In the CPU processing in FIG. 402(A), the CPU 2390 sequentially acquires the data necessary for decoding from the sub ROM 2210 etc. for 8 frames from frame 00 to frame 07 during 16.5 msec, writes it to the SDRAM 2430, and writes it to the SDRAM 2430. and the VPU 2410 to decode the frame. In FIG. 402(A), an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylindrical shape of frame 00 in CPU processing to the left end of the cylindrical shape of frame 00 in GPU (VPU) processing. This indicates instructions to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 and preparation of data, and this arrow is omitted for frames 01 to 06. As described above, in this embodiment, decoding for multiple frames (for example, 8 frames) is performed in less than 2 frame time (for example, 1 frame time).

In the display processing in FIG. 402(A), the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 write frame image data such as frames 00 to 03 to the VRAM 2420, and synchronize with the VSYNC signal at timings t1, t2, and t3, respectively. The image corresponding to is displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520.

In FIG. 402(A), when frame 00 is specified as the frame number to be displayed at t0 (that is, when the display frame position is specified), frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510 etc. at timing t1. From timing t0 to t1, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. perform advance decoding of 8 frames from frame 00 to frame 07, and then one frame is displayed (consumed) by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and VPU 2410. Preliminary decoding processing is performed for each frame.

For example, at t1, when frame 01 is specified as the frame number to be displayed (that is, when the display frame position is specified), at timing t1, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. start advance decoding of frame 08, and frame 01 is displayed, at timing t2, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. start advance decoding of frame 09, and when frame 02 is displayed, at timing t3, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. start advance decoding of frame 10, Thereafter, advance decoding processing is performed in the same manner.

In the process shown in FIG. 402(A), eight frames are always decoded in advance, and the number of frames to be decoded in advance (the number of preceding decodes) is determined in advance. In this embodiment, for example, the maximum number of frames is 8 frames, but various maximum number of frames can be set, and the maximum number of frames can be set according to the set maximum number of frames. , the number of preceding decodings can be set. In this embodiment, such a number of preceding decodings is managed as a "threshold value."

Furthermore, it is also possible to set the number of advance decodes to 0 and synchronize decoding processing and display processing without performing advance decoding in CPU processing and GPU (VPU) processing.

Additionally, when the display frame position is specified, if the specified frame number is smaller than the frame number that will be displayed on the main display device 2510, etc., decoding processing for displaying past frames will be performed. conduct. However, in this case, in the decoding process, the video data of the corresponding key frame must be searched for in the past, and the differential frames following this key frame must be sequentially read to generate the frame to be displayed.

[11-3-2. Seek decoding process (1)]
FIG. 402(B) shows the sub control processing (CPU processing ), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) are shown.

Here, seek is a process of fast-forwarding a video, and the above-mentioned process of displaying past frames (also referred to as rewind process or fast rewind) is also one type of seek.

The seek “Seek=5” shown in FIG. 402(B) means to skip four frames and perform fast-forward playback. The higher the seek number, the faster the fast forward speed. For example, fast-forward processing of a moving image is performed when the effect moving image displayed on the main display device 2510 is played back in fast-forward due to an operation by a player.

As shown in FIG. 402(B), initially, as in the case of FIG. 402(A), the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. operate to decode eight frames in advance. Here, at timing t0a immediately before timing t1, the CPU 2390 receives a seek command of "Seek = 5" (frame number = display frame position designation where the number of frames to be sought is added to the current frame number and displayed = 05). Suppose we did. Then, at this point, the specified frame number is compared with the frame number that will be displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like thereafter. Here, the specified frame number (05) is larger than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510 etc., and the difference in frame numbers is smaller than the above-mentioned threshold value "8", so frame 05 It is found that the decoding of has been completed, so the CPU 2390 displays frame 05 at timing t2 and controls the video to be played in fast forward. Note that in FIG. 402(B), frame 00 is displayed at timing t1, and frame 05 is displayed at the next timing, but since the seek command is received before timing t1, If predetermined processing conditions are satisfied, it is also possible to display frame 05 at timing t1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the case has been described in which the current frame number displayed on the main display device 2510 etc. is "00", but in the case of the current frame number (101), the CPU 2390 performs a seek operation with "Seek=5". When the command is received, it becomes the specified frame number (106).

In addition, in the CPU processing, after receiving the seek command "Seek=5" at timing t0a, frames after frame 06 are required, so control is performed to perform advance decoding processing on eight frames after frame 06. . At this point, it is not known whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames starting from frame 06 in preparation for normal video reproduction thereafter. Also, since frames 06 and 07 are to be performed between timing t0 and t1, the schedule remains as is, and decoding of frames 08 to 12 is newly started from timing t1, and further, At timing t2, decoding of frame 13 is started.

In this regard, during the normal decoding shown in FIG. frames are decoded first. Also, at this time, the decoded frames 01 to 04 are discarded.

Next, at timing t1a, if a seek command of "Seek = 5" (specifying the display frame position for displaying frame number = 10) is received again, at this point, the specified frame number and the main The frame numbers displayed on the display device 2510 or the like are compared. Here, the specified frame number (10) is larger than the frame number (05) displayed on the main display device 2510 etc., and the difference in frame numbers is smaller than the above-mentioned threshold value "8", so frame 10 Since it can be seen that the decoding of frame 10 has been completed, control is performed to display frame 10 at timing t3.

In the CPU processing, after receiving the seek command "Seek=5" at timing t1a, frames after frame 11 are required, so control is performed to perform advance decoding for eight frames after frame 11. At this point, it is not known whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames after frame 11 in preparation for normal video playback. Also, since frames 11 and 12 are to be performed between timing t1 and t2, the schedule is left as is, and decoding of frames 13 to 17 is newly started from timing t2, and further, At timing t3, decoding of frame 18 is started.

In this respect, during the normal decoding shown in FIG. Frames are decoded in advance. Also, at this time, the previously decoded frames from frame 06 to frame 09 are discarded.

Since no seek command is received between timing t2 and t3, the process is similar to the normal decoding shown in FIG. 402(A), and at timing t3, only frame 18 is decoded as described above. , at timing t4, frame 11 is displayed, and at timing t4, only frame 19 is decoded.

[11-3-3. Seek decoding processing (2)]
FIG. 402(C) shows the sub-control processing (CPU processing ), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing).

Here, seek is a process of fast forwarding or rewinding a moving image, and the seek of "Seek=10" shown in FIG. 402(C) means to skip nine frames and play back.

As shown in FIG. 402(C), initially, as in the case of FIG. 402(A), the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. operate to decode eight frames in advance. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 2390 receives a seek command "Seek=10" (specifying a display frame position for displaying frame number=10) at timing t0b immediately before timing t1. Then, at this point, the specified frame number is compared with the frame number that will be displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like thereafter. Here, the specified frame number (10) is larger than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510 etc., and the difference in frame numbers is larger than the above-mentioned threshold "8", so the CPU 2390 , at timing t2, it is necessary to display frame 10 and control the video to be played in fast forward.

In CPU processing, after receiving the seek command "Seek=10" at timing t0b, frames after frame 10 are required, so the decoding process for frames 08 and 09 is skipped, and from timing t1, frames 10 and after are required. control to perform advance decoding for frames. At this point, it is not known whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames starting from frame 10 in preparation for normal video reproduction thereafter. At timing t1, decoding of frames 10 to 17 is newly started, and furthermore, from timing t2, decoding of frame 18 is started. Also, at this time, the previously decoded frames from frame 01 to frame 07 are discarded.

Since no seek command is received between timing t1 and t2, the process is similar to the normal decoding shown in FIG. 402(A), and at timing t2, only frame 18 is decoded as described above. , at timing t3, frame 11 is displayed, and at timing t4, only frame 19 is decoded. Further, at timing t4, frame 12 is displayed, and at timing t4, only frame 20 is decoded.

Further, for example, in the situation where the advance decoding process shown in FIG. The specified frame number is then compared with the frame number displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like. Here, the specified frame number (8) is larger than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like, and the difference in frame numbers is the same as the threshold value "8" described above. Therefore, the CPU 2390 displays frame 8 at timing t2 and controls the video to be played in fast forward. In the CPU processing, after receiving the seek command "Seek=8" at timing t0b, frames after frame 8 are required, so from timing t1, the CPU performs control to perform advance decoding for frames after frame 8. At this point, it is not known whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames starting from frame 08 in preparation for normal video reproduction thereafter. That is, decoding of frames 08 to 15 is newly started between timing t1 and timing t2, and decoding of frame 16 is further started from timing t2.

In this way, if the difference between the frame number whose display frame position is specified by the seek command and the frame number to be displayed is smaller than the threshold, it is determined that the previous decoding has been completed, and the process proceeds to the previously decoded frame position. On the other hand, if the difference between the frame number whose display frame position is specified by the seek command and the frame number to be displayed is greater than or equal to the threshold, it is determined that the frame to be displayed has not been previously decoded, and the previously decoded frame is discarded. At the same time, (if necessary) the advance decoding process for unnecessary frames is skipped and a new advance decoding process is started from the seek destination frame. However, by skipping such advance decoding processing, the sequential decoding processing is interrupted, and in the end, the frame with the frame number for which the display frame position was specified is searched from the original video data, and the search frame is a key frame. If there is, it is used as is, but if the search frame is not a key frame, the video data of the corresponding previous key frame is searched, and the difference frames following this key frame are sequentially read to generate the display frame. Since a process (seek process) is required, the processing cost may actually increase depending on the case. Therefore, when a seek command is issued, this function is used to determine whether to continue the decoding process (including using a decoded frame) or jump to the decoding process of the frame with the frame number for which the display frame position has been specified. How to set the threshold becomes important.

If the frame to be displayed by a seek instruction has already been pre-decoded, as many new frames as can be pre-decoded are added and pre-decoded, and the additional pre-decode processing is performed at the timing of the next frame. By doing so, the processing load can be reduced.

Additionally, if the frame displayed by a seek command has already been pre-decoded, the processing cost (processing time) is the same as the pre-decode processing in normal processing at the frame time, and some frames will be discarded, but the processing load will increase. There's nothing to do. Furthermore, in a situation where a seek command as shown in FIG. 402(C) is issued, if normal processing as shown in FIG. 402(A) is performed without skipping the preceding decoding process, the preceding decoding process and the decoded frames will be discarded continuously, resulting in an increase in processing load.

Note that in this example, the threshold value "8" corresponds to the number of frames to be subjected to advance decoding processing, but the threshold value corresponds to the number of frames for sequential (normal) decoding processing of multiple frames and frame discard processing. A more appropriate value can be determined based on the relationship between the time and the time for skipping the preliminary decoding process of unnecessary frames and performing the decoding process from the frame whose display frame position is specified.

[11-3-4.30fps video playback processing]
Similar to FIG. 402(A) and the like, FIG. 403(A) shows the time series of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) during normal operation. processing is shown.

In this embodiment, the graphic process is performed at 60 fps (16.5 msec), but it is also possible to use a moving image (movie) created at a frame rate of 30 fps. In addition, in this case, the frame rate of the video is fixed to the hardware specifications and often cannot be changed in the initial settings, and even if the frame rate can be changed due to the hardware specifications. If videos with different frame rates coexist and control is performed that frequently changes the frame rate, there is a concern that unpredictable problems may occur. Therefore, it is necessary to use software to deal with the above situations.

Here, if a 30 fps video is played directly on a platform that plays 60 fps videos, it will be played back at double speed, so processing is performed once every two frames. As a result, one frame is substantially played back every 33 msec, and a 30 fps video is played back at the normal speed. Further, with such processing, writing to the VRAM 2420 (display processing) is performed once every two times, and a 30 fps moving image can be easily played back at a processing cycle of 60 fps.

In FIG. 403(A), similar to FIG. 402(A) and the like, sub-control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub-control board 2300 performs processing related to image control at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 are each at intervals of one frame time (16.5 msec). In FIG. 403, similarly to FIG. 402, each cylindrical shape represents a process related to a frame, and the numbers such as "00", "01", and "02" written on the cylindrical shape indicate frame numbers. There is. Further, as in FIG. 402, the horizontal axis is the time axis, and the length of the cylindrical shape along the time axis represents the approximate processing time.

In the CPU processing in FIG. 403(A), the CPU 2390 sequentially acquires data necessary for decoding from the sub ROM 2210 etc. for 8 frames from frame 00 to frame 07 during 16.5 msec, writes it to the SDRAM 2430, and writes it to the SDRAM 2430. and the VPU 2410 to decode the frame. In FIG. 403(A), an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylindrical shape of frame 00 in CPU processing to the left end of the cylindrical shape of frame 00 in GPU (VPU) processing. This indicates instructions to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 and preparation of data, and this arrow is omitted for frames 01 to 06.

In the display processing of FIG. 403(A), the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 write frame image data such as frames 00 to 03 to the VRAM 2420, and synchronize with the VSYNC signal at timings t1, t2, and t3, respectively. The image corresponding to is displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520.

Here, in FIG. 403A, 8 frames from frame 00 to frame 07 are displayed by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. from timing t0 to t1 until frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510 etc. at timing t1. A preliminary decoding process is performed, and thereafter, control is performed so that frame 00 is displayed also at timing t2. Such display control can be realized, for example, by writing frame image data in the VRAM 2420 and setting the VSYNC signal at a cycle of 33 msec, and writing to the VRAM 2420 is performed once every two times compared to the case of FIG. 402(A). becomes.

Also, for example, frame image data of frame 00 is written to the first frame buffer of the VRAM 2420, frame 00 is displayed by the VSYNC signal at timing t1, and then frame image data of frame 00 is written to the second frame buffer. In this state, the same frame 00 may be displayed by the VSYNC signal at timing t2, and as a result, control may be performed such that frame 00 is continuously displayed on the display device for two frames (33 msec).

After that, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and VPU 2410 perform advance decoding processing on a frame-by-frame basis each time a new frame is displayed for the second time. In FIG. 403(A), when frame 00 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2), decoding of frame 08 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started at timing t2, and frame 01 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2). Display at timing t4), decoding of frame 09 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started at timing t4, and thereafter, advance decoding processing is similarly performed.

With this video playback process, it is possible to read low frame rate video data (for example, 30 fps video data as above) on a platform that plays high frame rate videos (for example, 60 fps video as above). You can control the video playback at a normal speed.

[11-3-5.60fps video playback processing]
Similarly to FIG. 402(A), etc., FIG. 403(B) shows the time series of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) during normal operation. processing is shown.

In this embodiment, the graphic process is performed at 60 fps (16.5 msec), but it is also envisioned that 60 fps video data may be played back at 30 fps for the purpose of reducing the processing load. Furthermore, in this case, the frame rate of the moving image is fixed to the hardware specifications and often cannot be changed through initial settings or the like. Therefore, it is necessary to use software to deal with the above situations.

If you try to play a video (movie) created at a frame rate of 60 fps at 30 fps, the playback will be twice as slow, so it is necessary to play the video in skips of one frame every 33 msec. be. As a result, a 60 fps video is played back at normal speed. Further, with such processing, writing to the VRAM 2420 (display processing) is performed once every two times, and a 30 fps moving image can be easily played back at a processing cycle of 60 fps.

In FIG. 403(B), similar to FIG. 402(A) and the like, sub-control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub-control board 2300 performs processing related to image control at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 are each at intervals of one frame time (16.5 msec).

In the CPU processing in FIG. 403(B), the CPU 2390 sequentially acquires data necessary for decoding from the sub ROM 2210 etc. for 8 frames from frame 00 to frame 07 during 16.5 msec, writes it to the SDRAM 2430, and writes it to the SDRAM 2430. and the VPU 2410 to decode the frame. In FIG. 403(B), an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylindrical shape of frame 00 in CPU processing to the left end of the cylindrical shape of frame 00 in GPU (VPU) processing. This indicates instructions to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 and preparation of data, and this arrow is omitted for frames 01 to 06.

In the display processing in FIG. 403(B), the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 write frame image data such as frames 00, 02, and 04 to the VRAM 2420, and synchronize with the VSYNC signal at timings t1, t2, t3, and t4, respectively. This shows a process in which an image corresponding to frame image data is displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520.

Here, in FIG. 403(B), 8 frames from frame 00 to frame 07 are displayed by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. from timing t0 to t1 until frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510 etc. at timing t1. A preliminary decoding process is performed, and thereafter, control is performed so that frame 00 is displayed also at timing t2. Such display control can be realized, for example, by writing frame image data in the VRAM 2420 and setting the VSYNC signal at a cycle of 33 msec, and writing to the VRAM 2420 is performed once every two times compared to the case of FIG. 402(A). becomes.

Also, for example, frame image data of frame 00 is written to the first frame buffer of the VRAM 2420, frame 00 is displayed by the VSYNC signal at timing t1, and then frame image data of frame 00 is written to the second frame buffer. In this state, the same frame 00 may be displayed by the VSYNC signal at timing t2, and as a result, control may be performed such that frame 00 is continuously displayed on the display device for two frames (33 msec).

Thereafter, in FIG. 403(B), frame 02 is displayed at timing t3, and display of frame 02 continues at timing t4. In this way, by displaying one frame at a time with a cycle of 33 msec, 60 fps video data can be played back as a 30 fps video.

Here, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and VPU 2410 perform advance decoding processing for each frame each time a new frame is displayed for the second time. In FIG. 403(B), when frame 00 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2), decoding of frame 08 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started at timing t2, and frame 02 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2). Display at timing t4), decoding of frame 09 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started at timing t4, and thereafter, advance decoding processing is similarly performed.

Note that here, since only even frames such as frames 00, 02, and 04 are used for display processing, processing of odd frames such as frames 01, 03, and 05 may be omitted in advance decoding processing by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. can.

Through such video playback processing, on a platform that plays high frame rate videos (e.g. 60 fps video as above), high frame rate video data can be played back as low frame rate videos (e.g. 30 fps video as above). video), the video can be controlled to play at a normal speed.

[11-3-6. Blending process]
FIG. 404 shows an overview of the blending process executed by the GPU 2400 in the graphic process (graphic event) of this embodiment.

FIG. 404A shows a temporary buffer 2610 used for image blending processing, a work buffer 2620 that stores a base image (background), and a frame buffer 2630. The temporary buffer 2610 has the same buffer size as the screen size, and the sprite image 1 is placed at the actual drawing position. Note that the temporary buffer 2610, work buffer 2620, and frame buffer 2630 (the above-mentioned "first frame buffer" and "second frame buffer") correspond to the VRAM 2420 shown in FIG. 375 of this embodiment.

It is also possible to make the temporary buffer 2610 and the work buffer 2620 correspond to the SDRAM 2430, and it is also possible to make either the temporary buffer 2610 or the work buffer 2620 correspond to the VRAM 2420, and the other one to correspond to the SDRAM 2430. It is. The correspondence between the temporary buffer 2610 and the work buffer 2620, the VRAM 2420, and the SDRAM 2430 can be appropriately set in advance according to the used capacity of each RAM.

A shader and the like in the GPU 2400 blends the sprite image 1 in the temporary buffer 2610 and the base image stored in the work buffer 2620, and outputs the blending result to the frame buffer 2630. In frame buffer 2630, sprite image 1 is placed at the same coordinate position as in temporary buffer 2610. As a result, the frame buffer 2630 stores an image in which sprite image 1 is synthesized on the front of the base image.

Similar to FIG. 404(A), FIG. 404(B) shows a temporary buffer 2610 used for image blending processing, a work buffer 2620 for storing a base image (background), and a frame buffer 2630. Unlike FIG. 404(A), sprite image 1 and sprite image 2 are arranged in the temporary buffer 2610 at the actual drawing positions. Note that the frame buffer 2630 corresponds to the VRAM 2420 shown in FIG. 375 of this embodiment.

A shader or the like in the GPU 2400 performs a blending process on the sprite images 1 and 2 in the temporary buffer 2610 and the base image stored in the work buffer 2620, and outputs the blending result to the frame buffer 2630. In frame buffer 2630, sprite images 1 and 2 are arranged at the same coordinate positions as in temporary buffer 2610. As a result, the frame buffer 2630 stores an image in which sprite images 1 and 2 are synthesized in front of the base image. As shown in FIG. 404(B), if the coordinates of sprite images 1 and 2 do not overlap, both can be placed in the temporary buffer 2610, and a shader or the like can perform blending processing at the same time.

Conventionally, when performing image blending processing, buffers were prepared according to each sprite image (for example, 5 buffers for sprite images of 5 different image sizes, or 10 buffers regardless of the image size). (10 buffers for different types of sprite images), as in this embodiment, each sprite image can be stored using only one temporary buffer 2610, which is the same as the screen size, so there is no wastage of memory and efficiency. It can be used often.

In addition, when performing blending processing multiple times, first copy the blended image (sprite image) stored in the frame buffer 2630 to a part of the temporary buffer 2610, and then perform the blending processing with other sprite images. After processing, the processing results can be written back to the same location in the frame buffer 2630.

[11-4. File unzipping process]
Next, file decompression processing using a graphic process (graphic event) will be explained.

In the graphic process according to the present embodiment described above, when reading in multithreads, the GZIP 2370 of the sub control board 2300 is used to decompress image data, etc. (see FIG. 375). GZIP2370 is a circuit for decompressing a file, and when reading a file using multiple threads, this circuit can only be used by one thread. Therefore, a graphics thread that uses GZIP2370 locks the GZIP2370 circuit (device) and then performs file decompression processing.

At this time, if you try to lock the GZIP2370 circuit when decompressing the file with another graphics thread, it will fail, so decompression processing is performed using software. This software decompression process implements the decompression process executed by the GZIP2370 circuit using software. The graphics fix thread can wait for the GZIP2370 circuit to become free when the locking of the GZIP2370 circuit fails, but by using such software decompression processing as appropriate, the image data etc. It is possible to prevent the file reading performance from becoming essentially single-threaded (due to the bottleneck of GZIP2370).

Here, the file decompression process of the graphics thread will be described with reference to FIG. 405. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the flow of file decompression processing in one graphics thread.

First, in step S3371, the status indicating whether the GZIP 2370 circuit (hereinafter referred to as "HW GZIP") is being used by another graphics thread and is in operation is acquired. Next, in step S3372, it is determined whether HW GZIP is in operation with reference to the acquired status.

If it is determined that this HW GZIP is not in operation (NO in step S3372), the graphics thread can perform file decompression processing using HW GZIP, and thereafter performs the processing for that purpose. First, in step S3373, the HW GZIP device is locked to prevent other graphics threads from using this HW GZIP. Next, in step S3374, a request is made to HW GZIP to decompress the specified file. Thereafter, when the file decompression process by HW GZIP is completed, the device of HW GZIP is unlocked in step S3375 so that other graphics threads can use this HW GZIP. After the process in step S3375, the graphics thread ends the file decompression process.

If it is determined that this HW GZIP is in operation (YES in step S3372), the graphics thread issues a decompression request for the specified file to perform GZIP decompression processing (SW GZIP) using software in step S3376. . Thereafter, when the file decompression process by the software ends, the graphics thread ends the file decompression process.

[11-4. Sound control]
Next, sound control executed in the sound process (sound thread) of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 406 to 409. The CPU 2390, which controls the operation of such a sound process (sound thread), corresponds to an arithmetic processing section, and the digital amplifier 2240, which is connected to the CPU 2390 and receives and amplifies sound data from the CPU 2390, corresponds to a sound source amplification section. do. Further, a speaker group 2040 connected to the digital amplifier 2240 and outputting audio corresponds to a sound output section.

When the main thread of another process, such as the master process or the graphics process, receives an event code request or sound code request through shared memory to the interprocess communication thread of the sound process, and then from the interprocess communication thread to the sound thread, These requests are passed. The event code request is an event that represents an event that occurs when the start lever 7 of the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment is operated, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, a medal is inserted (bet operation), a determined production, etc. Contains code. Further, the sound code request includes a sound code that specifies a request related to sound.

When the sound thread receives an event code request, it retrieves a sound object based on the event code, then retrieves the sound code (hash value) registered in the retrieved sound object and executes the request based on the sound code. I do. Here, there may be multiple sound objects, and in that case, requests corresponding to multiple sound codes are made according to each sound object. On the other hand, if a sound code is received, the request is made using that sound code as is. The sound thread calls the library API to implement the request regarding the sound code.

When executing a request regarding a sound code as described above, request information including request data corresponding to each sound code is sent to the library API when calling the library API. FIG. 406(A) shows an example of request data of this embodiment.

The request data shown in FIG. 406(A) includes a plurality of data including an item of "target channel/group." Here, the "target channel/group" specifies the control target of the request data, and as shown in FIG. 406(B), even the same area has a plurality of data storage formats. In other words, when the control target is a single channel, the 2 bytes (16 bits) from the 7th to 8th bytes of the 8 bytes represent the channel number, and when the control target is a single group, the 2 bytes from the 5th to 6th bytes represent the channel number. Enter the group number (a group of two or more specified channels; for example, group number "01" is a number that groups four channels: channel 10, channel 11, channel 14, and channel 15). represent. In addition, as shown in FIG. 406(B), if the control target is multiple channels, all bits of the 8 bytes are used to specify multiple channels to be controlled from among 64 channels (1ch to 64ch). . For example, if the first bit is "1", the 64th channel (64ch) is used, and if the last bit is "1", the first channel (1ch) is used, Bits of unused channels are set to "0".

The difference between a single group and multiple channels is that for a single group, it is necessary to set a channel for each group in advance, but in the case of multiple channels, it is necessary to set the channel for the request data from the sound thread or other process. The corresponding bit can be specified.

Note that the above-mentioned "channel" represents a logical channel (logical channel), unlike a physical channel (physical channel) corresponding to a speaker. Such logical channels are used to synthesize multiple sound sources and output the synthesized sound to one physical channel (speaker). For example, if one logical channel is associated with a BGM sound source and another logical channel is associated with the sound effect of a bet (insertion), such as when a coin is inserted, these two sounds can be synthesized. Then, the synthesized audio is output from one speaker.

In the item "option flag/function type", as shown in FIG. 406(C), the upper 2 bytes (16 bits) represent the option flag, and the lower 2 bytes represent the function type. If the first bit of the option flag is "1", it indicates that the request is for a specified sound code, and the contents of "target channel/group" have no meaning. For example, "1" is set in the case of a request such as pause/cancellation of suspension or mute/cancellation of mute. If the first bit is "0", the request does not target the specified sound code, so the process proceeds to evaluation of the second bit.

If the second bit is "1", it indicates that the request targets multiple channels, and all 8 bytes of "target channel/group" are evaluated as bits representing the channel to be controlled. On the other hand, if the second bit is "0", it indicates that the request is for a single channel or a single group, and if there is data in the 7th and 8th bytes of "Target channel/group", the value is , represents the channel number of the controlled object, and if there is data in the 5th and 6th bytes, the value represents the group number of the controlled object.

In addition, the request data shown in FIG. 406(A) includes, for example, delay time, priority, master volume reference index number, command volume value, playback request parameter, own request ID, target request ID, fade attribute, Includes ducking attributes, fade request parameters, ducking request parameters, etc.

Note that the delay time is a delay time until the start of reproduction in the case of a single note, and a delay time until implementation in the case of a sequence request (the sequence request will be described later). Further, the master volume reference index number is an index number that refers to master volume information stored in a master volume table, which will be described later, and the master volume table defines, for example, 32 types and 7 levels of volume values. . The reproduction request parameters include, for example, the name of the sound file to be reproduced, the file format, the reproduction start position, and the like.

In addition, for a request for a single sound, the own request ID becomes the request ID for the request information, but for a child request (child playback request) of a sequence request, the request ID for the request information (of that sequence request) ID and own request ID have different values.

The target request ID is, for example, the request ID that is the target of pause/unpause or mute/unmute when the first bit of the option flag indicates that the request is for the specified sound code. It is to be specified.

The fade attribute has contents such as none, in, and out, and the ducking attribute has contents such as none, target, and influence. A fade request parameter and a ducking request parameter are defined when necessary for a fade attribute or a ducking attribute.

FIG. 407 shows an example of a request table stored in, for example, the sub ROM 2210. In this example, the request table is configured to have a common header and multiple pieces of request information. The common header stores the tool, encoder, library, each version of the binary file data format, the system sampling frequency, the system frame rate, the number of data (of the data stored in the table), etc.

Each piece of request information is associated with a sound code, and typically includes one or more pieces of request data. In addition, the request information may include a sequence marker that functions as one or more indexes that specify the playback position of the sound, for example, by time or number of frames, but request information that does not include a sequence marker or a sequence marker Only request information may exist.

The request table shown in FIG. 407 exemplifies three pieces of request information, and the request information with Index=1 has sound code=0003 and one request data. This request data is a reproduction request for "2ch" where the control target is a single channel, and the request ID is 1. Furthermore, the reproduction request parameters related to this reproduction request include sound file name=M1, file format=A, reproduction start position=10, and the like.

Further, the request information with Index=2 has sound code=0022 and one request data. This request data is a reproduction request for "2ch" where the control target is a single channel, and the request ID is 2. Furthermore, the reproduction request parameters related to this reproduction request include sound file name=M2, file format=A, reproduction start position=20, and the like.

The request information with Index=10 has a sound code=0101 and is a sequence request including three requests (two playback requests and one volume control request). A sequence request is a request in which multiple sound controls (playback, stop, volume control, etc.) are arranged on the time axis. In the sequence request, only the reproduction request is registered by quoting the already registered reproduction request, and the reproduction request parameter defined by the quotation source is used as the reproduction request parameter.

Here, request information with Index=1 (playback request with request ID=1) and request information with Index=2 (playback request with request ID=2) are sequence requests (requests) corresponding to request information with Index=10. ID=10) and is included in the request information with Index=10, the request data of the playback request with request ID=1 is referred to as the playback request data (1), and the original request information with Index=1 is referenced at this time. ’s own request ID is “1” instead of 10. Similarly, the request data of the playback request with request ID=2 refers to the original request information with index=2 as playback request data (2), and the own request ID at this time is not 10 but " 2".

When such a sequence request with request ID=10 includes two reproduction requests, one reproduction request is a "child request" and the sequence request is a "parent request."

A sequence request represented by request information with Index=10 may include several sequence markers, as shown in FIG. 407. Each sequence marker has a marker position (time) and a marker name.

As a specific mechanism, when the sound being played reaches the marker position, the marker name is stored in the playback information, and the playback information in which the marker name is stored is sent to the graphic process and/or the ramp process. This is a function provided for the receiving process to execute an effect according to the marker name stored in the playback information, and is information that can be set arbitrarily by the designer. Therefore, depending on the marker name, it is possible to use it in the graphic process but not in the lamp process.

With this configuration, individual sound codes are set for each request, so for example, if you execute a mute request for the sound code "0101" of a sequence request, the entire sequence (all included playback requests) will be muted. On the other hand, if you specify the sound code "0003" or "0022" in the playback request and execute a mute request, you can individually mute the playback of the sound related to the corresponding playback request. can.

Similarly, for example, if a playback stop request is executed for the sound code "0101" of a sequence request, the entire sequence (playback of sounds related to all included playback requests) can be stopped. ” or “0022” and execute a playback stop request, it is possible to individually stop the playback of sounds related to the corresponding playback request.

FIG. 408(A) shows an example of a hash value request table. The hash value request table includes a common header in the same format as the common header described in connection with the request table shown in FIG. ) is stored in association with the index value.

The hash value in the hash value request table is generated based on the sound code. Since the order in which each request is stored in the request table and the hash value in the request table are the same, the hash value and the request information corresponding to this hash value are stored in the same index (in the same storage order). ) are associated.

As mentioned above, the sound thread receives an event code request and acquires the sound code (hash value) registered in the acquired sound object based on the event code, but this process uses the hash value request table. It is done by reference. After obtaining the hash value, the request information in the request table is specified based on the hash value, and a request is made based on the specified request information.

FIG. 408(B) shows an example of a channel group table. The channel group table includes a common header in the same format as the common header described in connection with the request table shown in FIG. 407, and further stores channel group information regarding each channel group. Each channel group information includes a group number and channel information of channels belonging to this group. Channel information is, for example, 64-bit data, and each bit represents whether the corresponding channel belongs or not. If the value of the 1st bit is "1", the 64th channel belongs to the group, and the value of the 64th bit is "1". ”, 1ch belongs to the group. A channel whose bit value is "0" indicates that it does not belong to the group.

In this way, by using the channel group table, it is possible to flexibly set the correspondence between groups and channels belonging to the groups.

FIG. 408(C) shows an example of the master volume table. The master volume table includes a common header in the same format as the common header described in connection with the request table shown in FIG. 407, and further stores a plurality of pieces of master volume information. In this example, 32 types of master volume information are stored, and each master volume information stores an index number and 7 volume values. As a result, 7 levels of volume settings can be selected from among the 32 types. is possible.

As described above, in the request data shown in FIG. 406(A), one master volume information in this master volume table is referenced by the master volume reference index number, and the volume setting can be changed on a request-by-request basis. can.

In this embodiment, the volume of the sound source data transmitted to the digital amplifier 2240 is reflected in the master volume information and the player volume that can be selected by the player. Further, the volume of the digital amplifier 2240 may be set based on the master volume information and the player volume that can be selected by the player. When setting the volume of the digital amplifier 2240, the I2C I/F 2340 The volume setting value is transmitted to the digital amplifier 2240 via the digital amplifier 2240.

Note that in this embodiment, there are cases in which the master volume information is not referred to. For example, if a request is made from the master process to output an abnormal sound when an error occurs (for example, the main board command is an error command) as an event code or sound code (see Figure 380(A)), the master volume information Regardless of the situation, the abnormal sound is always played at maximum volume.

FIG. 409 shows an example of sound data. The sound data of this embodiment is sound data created according to the encoding type, and is, for example, a file in a format such as an SMZ file or PCM. FIG. 409(A) is sound data with a sound marker, and includes a common header, marker information, and a data section. Common headers include, for example, data length, size of one frame, number of frames, codec version, data format version, sampling frequency, bit rate, monaural/stereo type, number of sound markers, loop section (number of samples at starting position) , loop section (end position sample number).

Further, this sound data includes marker information of the number defined by the number of sound markers in the common header, and each marker information includes a respective marker position (eg, frame position). The data section stores actual sound data such as PCM data and sound source data compressed in the SMA format.

FIG. 409(B) shows an example of sound data without a sound marker. The common header is similar to the common header of the sound data shown in FIG. 409(A), and a data portion containing actual sound data is stored after the common header.

Below, the configuration of the gaming machine described above and the effects produced by the configuration will be additionally described.

<Appendix H-1>
Among conventional game machines, one has been proposed in which the display speed of display effects can be changed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-073743).

In the gaming machine according to such a proposal, the display speed of the display effect is changed by the display speed stepwise changing section of the display control device, but it is also possible to change the display speed by a program, and the display speed by the program can be changed. When playing a video at double speed by changing , it is necessary to play the third frame after playing the first frame, so perform seek processing to obtain the third frame, and then perform playback processing on the third frame. It turns out.

However, in such a gaming machine, when a program plays back a moving image at double speed, seek processing as described above always occurs, resulting in a problem that the processing becomes heavy. Furthermore, if the display control device is provided with a dedicated circuit such as a stepwise display speed changing section, as in the gaming machine described above, manufacturing costs will increase.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is possible to change the display speed of images in a performance without increasing the processing load (for example, from normal speed to n times speed (2x speed or 5x speed). The purpose of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can change the playback speed (e.g.).

A further object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can change the display speed of images in performance at low cost without providing a dedicated circuit.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(H-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A display unit (for example, the main display device 2510 and sub display device 2520 (including VRAM 2420) shown in FIG. 375),
It has an arithmetic processing processor (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375) and an image processing processor (for example, GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 shown in FIG. 375) that is connected to the arithmetic processing processor and performs image processing, and controls the effect and performs the A production control unit (for example, a sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375) that displays on a display unit,
The performance control unit is
a decoding unit that performs decoding processing from still image data and video data to generate display data;
Display data output means for displaying a display frame on the display unit by outputting the display data to the display unit every frame time (for example, in the case of 60 fps, one frame time is 16.5 msec). A gaming machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment) characterized by:

(H-1-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit (for example, specifies a frame number of a frame to be displayed) to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of display frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing in which the decoding processing is performed in advance (for example, as shown in FIG. 402(A), from timing t0 to timing t1, decoding processing from frame 00 to frame 07 is performed, and display processing for frame 00 is performed. A gaming machine configured to be able to perform processing previously performed.

(H-1-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings (the number of frames to be decoded in advance) of display data that can be generated in advance is set, and further,
A gaming machine configured such that an upper limit for the number of decoding processes to be performed in one frame time (for example, a maximum of 8 frames in the examples shown in FIGS. 402(A) to 402(C)) is set.

(H-1-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to third embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
The performance control unit is
The preceding decoding process is newly performed for the amount of display data used by being output to the display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 402(A), the timing t1 when display processing of frame 00 is performed The gaming machine is configured to control the decoding means so that frame 08 is decoded at timing t2, and frame 09 is decoded at timing t2 when frame 01 is displayed.

(H-1-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
The performance control unit is
having a threshold value regarding the display data;
The preceding decoding process is performed on the display data output means according to the value of the frame position related to the display frame position designation, the value of the frame position related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the relationship with the threshold value. A gaming machine configured to perform control so as to instruct which of display data already generated by the above processing and display data generated by the decoding processing to be output to the display section.

(H-1-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fifth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set;
The effect control unit has a threshold regarding the display data,
The threshold value is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The performance control unit is
If the value of the frame position related to the display frame position designation is larger than the value of the frame position related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the values of both frame positions is smaller than the threshold value (for example, , as shown in FIG. 402(B), the value of the frame position related to display frame position specification (frame 05 specified by Seek=5) is larger than frame 00 related to display processing, and the value of the frame position is larger than frame 00 related to display processing. (if the difference "5" is smaller than the threshold "8"), the display unit is controlled to display the display frame related to the display frame position designation using the display data already generated by the preceding decoding process. A gaming machine consisting of.

(H-1-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to sixth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set;
The effect control unit has a threshold regarding the display data,
The threshold value is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The performance control unit is
If the value of the frame position related to the display frame position designation is larger than the value of the frame position related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the values of both frame positions is smaller than the threshold value, the The display data output means is configured to control the display data of the frame position related to the display frame position designation to be selected from the display data already generated by the preceding decoding process and output to the display unit. A game machine that is played.

(H-1-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to seventh embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set;
The effect control unit has a threshold regarding the display data,
The threshold value is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The performance control unit is
If the value of the frame position related to the display frame position designation is larger than the value of the frame position related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the values of both frame positions is equal to or greater than the threshold value ( For example, as shown in FIG. 402(C), the value of the frame position related to display frame position specification (frame 10 specified by Seek=10) is larger than frame 00 related to display processing, and the value of the frame position (if the difference "10" of (using a decoded frame 10), the gaming machine is configured to control the display unit to display a display frame related to the display frame position designation.

(H-1-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set;
The effect control unit has a threshold regarding the display data,
The threshold value is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The performance control unit is
When the value of the frame position related to the display frame position designation is larger than the value of the frame position related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the values of both frame positions is equal to or greater than the threshold value, The decoding means is controlled to perform a decoding process to generate display data at a frame position related to the display frame position designation, and the display data output means is further configured to output the display data generated by the decoding process to the display data output means. A gaming machine configured to control output to the section.

(H-1-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to ninth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding unit,
The decoding means includes:
The decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames can be performed in one frame time,
Advance decoding processing is possible in which the decoding processing is performed in advance,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set;
The effect control unit has a threshold regarding the display data,
The gaming machine is configured such that the threshold value is set to the number of preceding decodings (for example, the number of preceding decodings "8" as shown in FIGS. 402(A) to 402(C)).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the display speed of images in the effect can be changed without increasing the processing load. Furthermore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to change the display speed of images in the effect at low cost without providing a dedicated circuit.

In addition, when the game machine configured as described above is instructed to play a video at n times the speed, the user can respond to the result of comparing a numerical value based on the specified frame number and a predetermined threshold without being aware of the video playback status. In order to switch video playback processing, it is possible to perform optimal video playback processing by specifying an arbitrary frame for playback at the double speed.

<Appendix H-2>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed in which files are grouped together and the grouped files are accessed (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-031586).

In the gaming machine according to such a proposal, a target file is read from a set file list or a file name written in a program, and is expanded or stored in a designated area (RAM).

However, in such gaming machines, a file list or a file name written in a program is read, and then the target files are read in order, so it takes time to read.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can quickly read a plurality of files.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-2-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A display unit (for example, the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 shown in FIG. 375),
It has an arithmetic processing processor (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375) and an image processing processor (for example, GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 shown in FIG. 375) that is connected to the arithmetic processing processor and performs image processing, and controls the effect and performs the A production control unit (for example, a sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375) that displays on a display unit,
A gaming machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment), wherein the effect control section controls the transfer of data for image processing in the image processing processor.

(H-2-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
List information that specifies each of the data to be transferred (for example, the read list described in the flowchart of FIG. 392) is stored in advance,
The gaming machine is configured such that the performance control unit specifies data to be transferred based on the list information.

(H-2-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The gaming machine is configured such that the list information includes information indicating an order in which the data is transferred.

(H-2-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to third embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
Based on the prefetch information, it is configured to start a data read-only process (for example, the file cache thread described in the flowchart of FIG. 392) that reads the data from the data storage area and stores it in the data memory area. Game machine.

(H-2-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
Based on the prefetch information, the data read-only process sequentially stores data in the data memory area, so that the data is arranged in the data memory area in an order necessary for processing by the image processing processor. A gaming machine configured as follows.

(H-2-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
An upper limit storage capacity is set in the data memory area,
In the gaming machine, the data read-only processing is configured to control such that the data is not read when the data memory area is full.

(H-2-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to sixth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The arithmetic processing processor is composed of a plurality of core processors (for example, four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
The data read-only process is configured such that one or more of the data read-only processes are started by being started by an inactive core processor among the plurality of core processors. Game machine.

(H-2-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The production control unit, based on the cancellation request,
discarding the prefetch information;
A gaming machine configured to issue a request to discard the data read-only processing.

(H-2-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The performance control unit is configured to erase the data from the data memory area when the data stored in the data memory area is processed by the image processing processor.

(H-2-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The production control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The production control unit, when the list information exists,
Generate prefetch information from the list information,
Secure a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed faster than the data storage area where the data is stored,
activating a data read-only process for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
A game in which the data read-only processing is configured to store data for constructing 3D image data in the data memory area in an order necessary for processing by the image processing processor based on the prefetch information. Machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a plurality of files can be read quickly in image processing.

Further, with the gaming machine configured as described above, data related to drawing processing is read in advance in a predetermined order based on the prefetch information generated from the file reading list, so that the processing efficiency of data reading in image processing is improved.

<Appendix H-3>
In a conventional gaming machine, when managing playback channels for audio effects, a configuration has been disclosed in which the playback channels are managed using a management table and channel numbers (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-119192).

The reproduction channels in this case are managed by real numbers such as 1 to 32, for example.

However, in such gaming machines, the playback channels are managed using real numbers, so even when using multiple channels, it is necessary to define and manage each channel, resulting in unnecessary processing. are doing.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine that can define and manage a plurality of channels for audio output related to performances, etc. through simple processing without waste. The purpose is to

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-3-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An arithmetic processing unit (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375),
a sound source amplification unit (for example, digital amplifier 2240 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the arithmetic processing unit;
a sound output section (for example, the speaker group 2040 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the sound source amplification section,
The arithmetic processing unit is
having a plurality of audio channels (for example, 1ch to 64ch logical channels) for outputting sound data to the sound source amplification section,
Set channel data (for example, request data as shown in FIG. 406(A)) corresponding to one or more of the plurality of audio channels, and output the channel data to the sound source amplification section. A gaming machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment) characterized in that the sound output section is controlled to output a sound.

(H-3-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The gaming machine is configured such that the channel data has a plurality of setting formats (for example, the request data format shown in FIG. 406(B)) for specifying the audio channel.

(H-3-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
The channel data related to the plurality of setting formats each include:
have the same data length (e.g. 8 bytes),
The range of the area used to specify the audio channel is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 406(B), when the control target is a single channel, the rightmost (lowest) 16 bits are used; In the case of a group, the gaming machine is configured such that the 16 bits to the left (higher) of the rightmost 16 bits are used.

(H-3-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
The channel data related to the plurality of setting formats each include:
have the same data length,
The range of the area used to specify the audio channel is different,
In the channel data related to the plurality of setting formats,
In different setting formats, the area used to specify the audio channel overlaps at least in part (for example, as shown in FIG. 406(B), when the control target is a single channel and when the control target is multiple channels) , there is overlap in the area used),
A gaming machine configured to separately use information for identifying the different setting formats.

(H-3-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
Information indicating whether a plurality of audio channels are specified in the channel data (for example, option flag/function identification request data shown in FIG. 406(C)) is stored in the sound source amplification unit separately from the channel data. A gaming machine configured to output data to

(H-3-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fifth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
The channel data is
A gaming machine configured to have a setting format for specifying the audio channels individually and a setting format for specifying the audio channels managed in groups in units of groups.

(H-3-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to sixth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
The first setting format set in the channel data (for example, the setting format related to the controlled object = single channel shown in FIG. 406(B)) is a format for setting a channel number, and the second setting format (for example, , the setting format related to controlled object = single group shown in FIG. ) is a gaming machine configured to set bit information that allows setting of the maximum number of channels.

(H-3-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to seventh embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
The first setting format set in the channel data is a format for setting a channel number, the second setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels,
When setting the first setting format, set the channel number in a first channel area, and when setting the second setting format, set the channel number in a second channel area that does not overlap with the first channel area. A gaming machine configured to set a group number.

(H-3-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
The first setting format set in the channel data is a format for setting a channel number, the second setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels, and the third setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels. The format is a format that sets bit information that allows the maximum number of channels to be set.
When setting the first setting format, set the channel number in a first channel area, and when setting the second setting format, set the channel number in a second channel area that does not overlap with the first channel area. Set the group number,
When setting the third setting format, the gaming machine is configured to set the bit information in the first channel area, the second channel area, and the third channel area.

(H-3-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats specifying the audio channel,
When the channel data is in a setting format that specifies the audio channels in groups, the arithmetic processing unit refers to a channel group table (for example, the channel group table shown in FIG. 408(B)), Know which audio channels belong to the specified group,
The gaming machine is configured such that the channel group table stores, for each group, audio channels belonging to that group as bit information that allows the maximum number of channels to be set.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a plurality of sound channels can be defined and managed, so that processing related to audio output is simplified.

<Appendix H-4>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed that uses a sound table that manages sounds in order to control sound effects (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-015443).

In such conventional gaming machines, when a plurality of sounds are to be controlled in succession, a sound sequence that manages the reproduction of the plurality of sounds is requested and the sounds are played back.

However, when a request for a sound sequence as described above is registered, in order to control the playback of individual sounds, management and processing separate from the sound sequence are required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to manage multiple sounds by requesting a sound sequence (sequence request), and also to manage individual sounds registered in a sequence request. The purpose is to make it possible.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-4-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
An arithmetic processing unit (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375),
a sound source amplification unit (for example, digital amplifier 2240 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the arithmetic processing unit;
a sound output section (for example, the speaker group 2040 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the sound source amplification section,
The arithmetic processing unit is
It is characterized by having sound source request data (for example, a request (request ID=1) or a sequence request (request ID=10) shown in FIG. 407) in which a plurality of sound source data are set to be output to the sound output unit. (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment).

(H-4-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding single sound source data (for example, the request shown in FIG. 407 (request ID=1)), and second sound source request data including a request regarding multiple sound source data. A gaming machine configured to include data (for example, a sequence request (request ID=10) shown in FIG. 407).

(H-4-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
comprising a sound source request data storage unit (for example, a request table shown in FIG. 407) that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
The arithmetic processing unit is
When the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request regarding sound source data, the gaming machine is configured to refer to the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request from the sound source request data storage section.

(H-4-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to third embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
In the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier (for example, a request ID),
A gaming machine configured such that, when the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request regarding sound source data, the second sound source request data includes an identifier of the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request.

(H-4-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
In the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier,
The arithmetic processing unit is
When the second sound source request data includes a playback request regarding sound source data, the sound source request data storage section is referred to using the identifier of the first sound source request data related to the playback request, and the corresponding first sound source request data is stored. A gaming machine configured to obtain.

(H-4-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fifth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
The gaming machine is configured such that the second sound source request data is a set of data for continuously controlling a plurality of sound source data.

(H-4-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to sixth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
In the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier,
A gaming machine configured to be able to set each of the sound source request data based on the identifier.

(H-4-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to seventh embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
When the second sound source request data includes a playback request regarding sound source data, a playback position can be set in the first sound source request data related to the playback request (for example, setting a playback start position of the request data), and the second sound source A gaming machine configured so that one or more playback positions can be set in request data (for example, setting a sequence marker of a sequence request).

(H-4-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
In a situation where the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request regarding sound source data,
When making a predetermined request for the second sound source request data, the request is accepted as a request regarding all the sound source data included in the second sound source request data,
When a predetermined request is made individually for the first sound source request data related to the playback request, the gaming machine is configured such that the request is received as a request regarding the sound source data of the first sound source request data.

(H-4-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
The sound source request data storage unit stores sound source request data in association with a first code (for example, a request ID (the above-mentioned identifier)),
A second code storage unit (for example, the hash value request table in FIG. 408) stores a second code (for example, a hash value) related to the sound source request data in accordance with the arrangement of the corresponding sound source request data in the sound source request data storage unit. memorize in the same order,
The arithmetic processing section can access the target sound source request data by referring to the sound source request data storage section using the first code, and can access the target sound source request data using the second code. A gaming machine configured such that target sound source request data can be accessed by referring to a code storage section and the sound source request data storage section.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to manage multiple sounds using a sound sequence request (sequence request) and to manage individual sounds registered in the sequence request. Increased freedom.

<Appendix H-5>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed in which all processing is performed by the main processing of a program of an effect control device (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-213753).

In such conventional gaming machines, the performance control system program is composed of a program commonly called a "single thread."

However, in a single-threaded system like the one described above, if a problem occurs in one of the multiple processes, the system cannot be restored to normal unless the entire system is rebooted. .

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and even if a problem occurs in a part of the system, by restarting only the part where the problem has occurred, the system can be restarted without stopping the entire system. The purpose is to operate stably.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-5-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control unit (for example, It has a sub-control unit 2100) shown in FIG. 375,
The arithmetic processing processor is composed of a plurality of core processors (for example, four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
A gaming machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment), wherein the control unit performs production control by using the plurality of core processors.

(H-5-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory (e.g., sub-ROM 2210 shown in FIG. 375) in which a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs (e.g., a program for executing an OS) are stored;
It has a rewritable read/write memory (for example, SDRAM 2430 shown in FIG. 375),
The control program stored in the read-only memory is a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program (for example, a master process, a graphics process, a sound process, a lamp process, etc.). A gaming machine that includes a program for executing processes).

(H-5-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
Furthermore, it has a game control unit that controls the lottery in the game,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
A first process (for example, a master process) among the plurality of processes is
receiving a command from the game control unit and executing processing according to the command;
Sending a request according to the command to a second process (for example, a graphics process) among the plurality of processes;
The second process executes processing according to the received request, and transmits information according to the request to a third process among the plurality of processes,
The gaming machine is configured such that the third process (for example, a sound process or a lamp process) executes processing according to the received information.

(H-5-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to third embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
Furthermore, it has a game control unit that controls the lottery in the game,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
The plurality of processes include a first process for managing all other processes, a second process for controlling image display on display means, and at least a process for controlling audio output on audio output means, or A third process including either a process of controlling light emission to the light emitting means,
The first process is
receiving a command from the game control unit and executing processing according to the command;
Sending a request according to the command to the second process;
The second process executes processing according to the received request, and transmits information according to the request to the third process,
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-5-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
A gaming machine configured such that in each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors.

(H-5-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fifth embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
Each of the plurality of processes is provided with one intra-process common memory space (for example, an inter-thread communication area),
The gaming machine is configured such that the thread uses the intra-process common memory space to transmit and receive data with other threads within the same process.

(H-5-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
One of the plurality of processes (for example, the master process) collects survival information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of the other processes, and centrally monitors the status of each thread. A gaming machine configured to be managed by.

(H-5-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to seventh embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
One of the plurality of processes is
Collect survival information from each thread of other processes indicating whether the thread is normal or not, centrally manage the state of each thread,
If there is an abnormal thread, control the specified response,
The gaming machine is configured such that the response includes at least one of the following: restarting a process that has the abnormal thread; and displaying information regarding the abnormal thread on a predetermined display means. .

(H-5-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
Each of the plurality of processes is given one intra-process common memory space,
One process among the plurality of processes centrally manages the state of each thread by collecting survival information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of the other process,
The survival information is configured to include survival information collected by one thread (for example, the main thread of each process) from other threads via the intra-process common memory space in each of the other processes. Game machine.

(H-5-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
Equipped with rewritable read/write memory,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
Each of the plurality of processes is given one intra-process common memory space,
When the threads of one process repeatedly perform processing at different execution cycles, one thread of that process outputs timing information to the common memory space within the process, making it possible to grasp the processing timing of other threads. has become,
The gaming machine is configured such that the timing information is given an identifier (for example, SID=1, 2, etc. for a sound process) so that it can be known to which thread execution cycle the timing information corresponds.

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, even if a problem occurs in a part of the system, by restarting only the part where the problem has occurred, stable operation can be achieved without stopping the entire system. .

In addition, according to the gaming machine configured as described above, each main function is multi-processed, and furthermore, each process is multi-threaded, so that even if a problem occurs in one process or thread, the problem will not be solved. Since it is only necessary to restart the process or thread where the error occurred, stable operation can be maintained without stopping the entire production control subsystem.

<Appendix H-6>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration has been disclosed in which all processing is performed by the main processing of a program of an effect control device (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-213753).

In such conventional gaming machines, data is exchanged between each process in the production control system program by reading data stored in a designated location in the memory from the memory by referring to the same designated location.

It is easy to create a program that exchanges data as described above, but when it is installed in an actual device, it is not possible to understand the contents of the data stored in the memory from the outside. A dedicated measuring instrument for debugging, such as a circuit emulator, is required.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to enable easy debugging by grasping internal data without using a dedicated measuring instrument.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-6-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control unit (for example, It has a sub-control unit 2100) shown in FIG. 375,
The arithmetic processing processor is composed of a plurality of core processors (for example, four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
The control unit includes:
a read-only memory (e.g., sub-ROM 2210 shown in FIG. 375) in which a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs (e.g., a program for executing an OS) are stored;
It has a rewritable read/write memory (for example, SDRAM 2430 shown in FIG. 375),
The control program stored in the read-only memory is a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program (for example, a master process, a graphics process, a sound process, a lamp process, etc.). It consists of a program that executes a process),
A gaming machine (for example, Pachislot machine 1) according to the twelfth embodiment.

(H-6-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The number of shared memories corresponding to the plurality of processes is individually reserved (for example, as shown in FIG. 377, the master process exchanges data with the graphics process, sound process, and lamp process, In response to data reception from each process, the shared memory "Graphic → Master", "Sound → Master", and "Lamp → Master" are secured, and in response to data transmission to each process, the shared memory "Graphic → Master" is secured. Master → Graphic”, “ANY → Sound”, “ANY → Lamp”),
A gaming machine configured to output data to the shared memory according to the process, and to input data output by a process different from the process from a shared memory different from the shared memory.

(H-6-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The shared memory is individually secured in a number corresponding to the plurality of processes,
outputting data to the shared memory corresponding to the process; inputting data output by a process different from the process from a shared memory different from the shared memory;
The shared memory includes a first shared memory (for example, shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", etc.) that inputs data from one process and outputs data to one process, and a first shared memory that inputs data from one process and outputs data to one process, and a first shared memory that inputs data from one process and outputs data to one process, A gaming machine configured to include a second shared memory (for example, a shared memory "ANY→Sound", "ANY→Lamp", etc.) that inputs data from and outputs data to one process.

(H-6-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to third embodiments.
Furthermore, it has a game control section that controls the progress of the game,
A first process (for example, a master process) among the plurality of processes is
receiving a command from the game control unit and executing processing according to the command;
Sending a request according to the command to a second process (e.g., a graphics process) of the plurality of processes via the shared memory;
The second process executes processing according to the received request, and transmits information according to the request to a third process (for example, a sound process or a lamp process) among the plurality of processes. send via shared memory,
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-6-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fourth embodiments.
Furthermore, it has a game control unit that controls the lottery in the game,
The plurality of processes include a first process for managing all other processes, a second process for controlling image display on display means, and at least a process for controlling audio output on audio output means, or , a third process including either a process of controlling light emission to the light emitting means,
The first process is
receiving a command from the game control unit and executing processing according to the command;
transmitting a request according to the command to the second process via the shared memory;
The second process executes processing according to the received request, and transmits information corresponding to the request to the third process via the shared memory,
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-6-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to fifth embodiments.
The shared memory is a gaming machine configured to allow input and output of data using a predetermined communication protocol (for example, TCP) implemented in the process.

(H-6-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to sixth embodiments.
The shared memory is configured to allow data input/output using a predetermined communication protocol implemented in the process,
A gaming machine configured so that an externally connected device (for example, a PC connectable to the gaming machine) can send and receive data to and from the shared memory using the communication protocol.

(H-6-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to seventh embodiments.
The shared memory is configured to allow data input/output using a predetermined communication protocol implemented in the process,
Externally connected devices can send and receive data to and from the shared memory using the communication protocol,
The process is controlled to perform processing according to data input to a corresponding shared memory,
A gaming machine configured to be able to control processing of the process based on data input to the shared memory from the externally connected device.

(H-6-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any of the first to eighth embodiments.
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
One process (for example, a master process) among the plurality of processes,
centrally managing the state of each thread by collecting survival information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of other processes via the shared memory;
If there is an abnormal thread, control the specified response,
The gaming machine is configured such that the response includes at least one of the following: restarting a process that has the abnormal thread; and displaying information regarding the abnormal thread on a predetermined display means. .

(H-6-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor among the plurality of core processors,
One of the plurality of processes is
centrally managing the state of each thread by collecting survival information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of other processes via the shared memory;
The survival information is transmitted by one thread (e.g., the main thread of each process) to other processes via a memory space (e.g., inter-thread communication area) that can be commonly used within the process. A gaming machine configured to include survival information collected from threads.

According to the gaming machine configured as described above, data inside the gaming machine can be grasped and debugged easily without using a dedicated measuring device.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, data can be sent and received from a personal computer or the like to a process executed in the gaming machine via a LAN line or the like, so that easy debugging can be realized.

<Additional notes (other)>
Conventionally, multiple reels with multiple symbols arranged on the surface of each reel, game medals, coins, etc. ("medals, etc.") were inserted, and it was detected that the start lever was operated by the player, and the multiple reels were reeled. Detects when a player presses a start switch that requests the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of multiple reels, and outputs a signal that requests the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. A stepper motor is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmits the respective driving force to each reel, and the operation of the stepping motor is controlled based on signals output from the start switch and stop switch. and a reel control unit that controls, rotates and stops each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, it performs a lottery based on random numbers, and the result of this lottery (``internal winning combination'') A gaming machine called a pachi-slot machine is known in which the rotation of the reels is stopped based on the timing at which the operation of the stop button is detected.

In addition, conventionally, when a predetermined variable display start condition is met, such as when a game ball passes through a starting area provided in a rolling game area, the ball is identified on the display area of the variable display device. Variable display control means is provided that performs control to display information in a variable manner, and performs control to derive and display identification information that is being displayed in a variable manner, and when the derived and displayed identification information becomes a predetermined combination, the player A pachinko gaming machine is known in which the game enters a jackpot gaming state (so-called "jackpot") that is advantageous for players.

However, since conventional pachislot and pachinko gaming machines do not have the structure and functions of the gaming machine of the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve interest. The present invention has been made in view of these points, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The first to twelfth embodiments have been described above. In the embodiments described above, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, etc.).

Although the first to twelfth embodiments of the present invention have been described above, they are merely illustrative examples and do not particularly limit the present invention, and the specific configuration of each means etc. may be changed in design as appropriate. It is possible. Furthermore, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. isn't it.

Further, in the above detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly explained so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the detailed description above, but can also be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of its application is diverse. Further, the terms and phraseology used in this specification are used to accurately explain the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. Furthermore, those skilled in the art will be able to easily deduce other configurations, systems, methods, etc. included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described in this specification. Therefore, the claims should be considered to include equivalent structures within the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. The purpose of the abstract is to provide a simplified explanation of the technical content and essence of the application for the Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers in the technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terminology, or technical terminology. This will enable a quick determination through a thorough investigation. Therefore, the Abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention, which should be evaluated by the claims. Furthermore, in order to fully understand the purpose of the present invention and the unique effects of the present invention, it is desirable that the present invention be interpreted with full consideration of previously disclosed documents.

The detailed description provided above includes computer-implemented processes. The foregoing descriptions and representations are presented to be most effectively understood by those skilled in the art. In this specification, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a self-consistent process. Further, in each process, transmission/reception, recording, etc. of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. In each process, such signals are expressed as bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used solely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. Further, although the processing in each process may be described using expressions common to human behavior, the processing described in this specification is in principle executed by various devices. Further, other configurations required to perform each process will be obvious from the above description.

1 Pachislot machine A Display unit B Irradiation unit C Screen device G Cabinet UD Upper door mechanism DD Lower door mechanism 2010 Main control board 2100 Sub-control unit 2300 Sub-control board 2390 CPU
2400 GPUs
2410 VPU
2420 VRAM
2510 Main display device

Claims (1)

an arithmetic processing unit;
a sound source amplification section connected to the arithmetic processing section;
a sound output section connected to the sound source amplification section,
The arithmetic processing unit is
comprising sound source request data in which a plurality of sound source data are set to be output to the sound output unit;
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request data including a request regarding a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
The arithmetic processing unit is
When the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request regarding sound source data, the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request is referred to from the sound source request data storage unit,
When the second sound source request data includes a playback request regarding sound source data, a playback position can be set in the first sound source request data related to the playback request, and one or more playback positions can be set in the second sound source request data. The position can be set,
Each of the playback positions is associated with identification information,
The arithmetic processing unit may output the identification information corresponding to the playback position when the playback regarding the first sound source request data or the playback regarding the second sound source request data reaches the playback position. A gaming machine that does.

Images